


Class_ 2TB 33 

Book ,T Sfe 
Copyiight N°__ 


COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT; 










s'*4 f 

• * r 4 
















v 4 ■. .-gj* ' 'f i >' • ■> ' 

lt -. S * V. ^ - i. ‘ V-i •' V .'i ,- 

; , V# *■-.-'?* . v r Jpr< *7 • • ,\> . . - ~.V: 

*•••■'•• •'•i-r.-'-'.'v v>*v . v 

HKh 


, Y * VC 


; > -.*• 




N. 




V 


. > - 




\. 








































« 




















































































* 









THE NEW IDEA 


NEW TONE SYSTEM 


SCIENCE 

OF 

YOUTH AND HEALTH 













THE KEY 


To think to the full understanding, in appropri¬ 
ation, of a knowledge of processes of life unfold- 
ment, body, mind and soul is in the actuality of prop¬ 
agating one’s form of life to higher powers. 

Processes of tone thinking, in the plan of life, in 
the mutual oscillations of the spiritual and celestial 
Principles are processes of creation. Thus, think¬ 
ing is in the reality of propagation, and in the actu¬ 
ality of creation. ( 

All things are possible to methods of thinking in 
the orbital plan of Principle. One must become the 
things or facts which that one desires to know; or, 
such things or facts must become a part of the 
substance of the life of that one. Self-life unfold- 
ment proceeds by harmony unit and mass-tones in 
the fact of thinking. 









THE NEW IDEA 



Methods of Thinking 



Unfoldment 



By C. R. TUTTLE 


n 


Author “Northland” (Toronto, 1885), “Golden North” (Chicago, 1898), 
Illustrated Histories, Michigan (1872), Indiana (1874), North¬ 
west (1875), Iowa and Kansas (1875), “Illustrated History of 
the Dominion of Canada” (2 large Vols. quto. 1876-7), 
“Border Wars of Two Centuries (1875), “Life Pri¬ 
mer” (Cleveland, 1906), “Creation by Thinking” 
(Cleveland, 1906), etc., etc., etc., Official Ob¬ 
server Hudson Bay Expedition, 1884; 

Principal Cleveland Thought Sci¬ 
ence School, 1905-6. 


> ■> 
> i > 


SEATTLE: 

PUBLISHED BY THE METROPOLITAN PUBLISHING CO. 

1908. 






First edition of 1,000 
Jane, - - - 1908 


VuBftARY ot OONtiKES? 
\ wo Copies rieceiv*; 

JUN \2 1908 
Vo.* Z2 '4r& 

O'IaSS a XXc. No. 

2 ^> 2- f S *2-- 

con b. 


& 


COPYRIGHT, 19CS 

By 

C. R. TUTTLE 


Manufactured by 
Metropolitan Press, Inc. 







CONTENTS 


No. Title. Page. 

Introductory.11 

Preliminary Exercises.. 17 

1 Plan of Life .34 

2 Plan of Life, continued. 46 

3 God unfolding in Man.. 54 

4 Principle . 63 

5 Thought Organism .... 71 

6 Cellular Thought Or¬ 

ganism . 79 

7 Tone Vestures . 83 

8 Personality of Thoughts 88 

9 Physical Subvestures... 94 

10 Rising to the Full Tone. 103 

11 Reality of Ideas .Ill 

12 Thinking .115 


13 Fellowship in Thoughts.122 

14 Psychological Processes.127 

15 Invisible Mass-Tone Life.137 

16 Scope of Achievements 

by Thinking .142 

17 Thought Messengers... 148 

18 Spiritual-Celestial .154 

19 Ante and Post Human 

Existence .157 

20 Annihilation .165 

21 How Shall One Know?. 169 

22 Self-Creation .173 

23 Thinking to Benefit 

Others .175 

24 The Danger Period ....179 

25 Self.183 

26 Functions of Fellowship.186 

27 Subjective and Object¬ 

ive .193 

28 Duality of Thinking ...198 

29 Potential Evil .203 

20 All or None .208 

31 Evolution by Desire ... .211 

32 Who are Angels? .215 

33 Plan of Life Extended.217 

34 Scope of this System..227 


Title. Page. 

Morning Work .235 

Evening Work .244 

Daily Thinking .252 

The Four-Fold Key _256 

The New Christianity. .262 
Organized Invisible 

Brotherhood .268 

Skeleton of this System.276 

Self-Regeneration .282 

Thinking in Fellowship. 289 
Thinking away from 

Troubles .293 

Thinking to Health.296 

Thinking to Prosperity .303 

Naturalness .308 

Perpetual Youth and 

Health .312 

The Human Song.324 

Realities of Evolution. .327 
Nuxus of Christian 

Science .330 

Conscience .332 

Faith .339 

Reverence .345 

Social Science.349 

Thinking to Courage.. .355 

Thinking to Peace.359 

Powers of Thinking... .361 
Psychological Points...366 
Three-fold Conscious¬ 
ness .370 

Sparks of Science ....373 

Death and Hell .380 

Key to Success .384 

Hints to Thinkers.387 

Our Relations with the 

Departed .391 

Human Prejudices .399 

Scientific Supports .... 402 
Under the Light of Sci¬ 
ence .408 


No. 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 













































10 


CONTENTS. 


No. Title. Page. 

69 Thinking in Glory .412 

70 Right and Wrong .416 

71 The Bread of Life.419 

72 Thinking away from 

Death .423 

73 The Marriage Union ..425 

74 Power of Harmony.429 

75 The Light of Life ....433 

76 Memory .438 

77 Apperception .441 

78 Relativity of Space and 

Life .444 

79 Man the All .447 

80 Power, Love and Truth.450 

81 Specific Methods for 

Specific Purposes ...457 

82 Source of Success .465 


83 Profitable Discussion .. 469 

84 The Organism of Con¬ 

sciousness .486 


85 Man-Created Sources 

of Life .491 

86 Personality of Psychic 

Organism.494 

87 Integrtty-Honor-Talent. .504 

88 How to Live .507 

89 God’s People .510 


No. Title. Page. 

90 The God Within .512 

91 The Ultimate Supreme..516 

92 Microcosm and Macro¬ 

cosm .519 

93 Volition and the Will..524 

94 Desire, Choice and Mo¬ 

tive .532 

95 Sadness and Sorrow....536 

96 Generations of Princi¬ 

ple .541 

97 A Flame of Light.545 

98 Bodily Immortality.556 

99 Pantheism .559 

100 Physical Thinking ....562 

101 The Orbit of Life.568 

102 Higher Controls .579 

103 Evolution of the Soul..5S3 

104 Evolution of Duality..590 

105 Five Pre-Human Man 

Races .593 

106 Rising as a Whole.599 

107 Choosing a Kingdom..606 

108 Review .612 

Appendix for the Free¬ 
dom of A Slave.621 

Thinking away from the 

Liquor Habit .623 































INTRODUCTORY 


DEAR PEOPLE* it has been my purpose in all my 
thinking of sixty years, or from that point in my life 
wherein a fixed purpose could take root, as well a3 in the 
labors necessary to prepare these pages, to present to you 
a volume that will functionally live for generations, and 
become a higher foundation for the interpretations of 
Principle for the rising thoughts of our times; and to 
establish a Correspondence School in the Science of Think¬ 
ing, by means of printed Lecture Courses, and methods of 
oral lectures by local leaders. How far that ambition 
will be realized, no one can now tell. 

I hasten to say that it has not been my expectation 
to be able to prepare a finished work from a literary 
standpoint.. I am without the learning, or training, of 
the colleges. I am plain, self-made and without polish. 
This book is necessarily the same. 

As will be seen from the following pages, I have 
made far greater progress in methods of thinking in Prin¬ 
ciple than in the art of expression. I am painfully aware 
of the latter weakness, but if one is unable to express his 
vision of science in the full beauty and strength of art, 
it is not, in our age, a sufficient reason for silence. This 
book must, therefore, stand upon its thought rather than 
upon its expression—upon science, rather than art. 

It is realized that our world is giving birth to an in¬ 
creasing volume of New Ideas, and some of them are tak¬ 
ing form in organizations calculated to propagate new 
doctrines among the people. This volume is presented in 
the hope that it will provide, to some extent, a foundation, 
in science, for much of the advanced thinking of our day ; 
and, if others will build more beautiful structures, in the 
arts of expression and teaching, upon these foundations 
the author’s hope will be realized. 

Unless the volume wholly fail to meet the expecta¬ 
tions of its author, the system of interpretations of 
Truth herein presented will afford suggestion for profit¬ 
able thinking— thinking to the unfoldment of student’s in 
health and happiness. That is the paramount aim. Some 
portions of the plan of life in this system will involve 
serious, persistent and, possibly, laborious study, but, 
as a whole it certainly appeals to human life on its own 
ground, and in the true spirit of its infinite possibilties. 

(ID 



12 


THE NEW IDEA. 


If the following pages are understood as an appeal 
to t hink more and believe less, that understanding will 
be well founded. However, belief without thinking, like 
“faith without works” is dead. I have often felt that 
the common understanding of the word, “believe,” in 
its applications to the teachings of the New Testament, 
is in error. To believe is to exercise belief in something. 
If the exercise of belief is not in thinking to the propaga¬ 
tion of a knowledge of that something, then I afti still in 
ignorance of its functions. 

It is pointed out in these introductory remarks, that 
the subjects selected for the series of Thinking Exercises, 
which compose this book, are not homologically devel¬ 
oped to completion, neither in scientific analysis, nor in 
synthetic philosophy. They are treated with a view 
to thinking in life unfoldment, and are, for the most part, 
suggestive of a complete system of synthetics, rather than 
constituting it. However, in the functions of suggestion, 
the interpretations partly elaborated will serve to indi¬ 
cate, quite clearly, the new system. 

The writer will be pleased to co-operate with those 
who may find, in these teachings, a source of supply for 
their needs, and who may, therefore, wish to assist in 
propagating thinking along these lines throughout the 
world, in the establishment of Thinking Science Schools, 
by periodical and further book publications, and by a 
published lecture system, all to be carried out in a quiet, 
unassuming manner. To that end the author respect¬ 
fully solicits correspondence, and co-operation. But let 
us take sufficient time to thoroughly digest this effort. 

I have sought, as far as possible, to avoid leading the 
student into a maze of indefinable thinking, but rather, 
by such classification of ideas as I found myself capable 
of formulating, to follow a rather crude line, it may be, 
of what will be recognized as synthetic philosophy, based 
on the deductions of analysis. Prom all that has been 
said in this volume, the student will probably conclude 
that the hope of immediate advances in human thinking, 
in methods conformable to Principle is in a more effective 
tone analysis. 

I can almost bring to vision a system of photo-spectral 
and vibration instruments suitable for that purpose. It 
is certainly not too extravagant to hope that the near 
future will develop a system of scientific tone analysis 
which will successfully manipulate colors, and the lower 
celestial ethers. 

I claim that the following thinking exercises—chap¬ 
ters, if you please—discover and partly elaborate, al- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


13 


though somewhat crudely, the tone organism of the unit 
forms of life, primal and secondary. I have endeavored 
to bring to vision the unit constitution of molecular 
forms of substance, and to establish for thos6 units, when 
disrobed of their physical subvestures, their identity as in 
, the actuality of thoughts. I have also made effort to es¬ 
tablish the fact that such unit forms of life substance 
are primarily propagated by the oscillations of Prin¬ 
ciple, and that Principle transmitted its own nature to 
them, by which they come forth, potentially at least, in 
the functions of conscious wisdom and intelligence. 

Thus I establish for all substance,. units and orga¬ 
nizations of untis in mass-tone bodies, the functions of 
life. That is done by the apprehension of the substare 
of Principle within each unit, and by bringing to vision 
the tone-vestures of the units, propagated by their sub¬ 
stares, by which etheric tone vestures come forth, in six 
‘ folds, in relativity and interdependence of tones, and 
finally the physical subvesture tones, by which we appear 
to have matter. Each unit being properly regarded as 
an epitome of the mass body, according to the class of 
units, or primal unit organisms, of which it is composed,, 
it is easily seen that all mass-tone bodies, visible and in¬ 
visible, are in the functions of life. 

The nature of mass-tone is partly elaborated, by 
which processes of propagation in experimental chemistry 
are explained. The tone is in the fact of the polar ener¬ 
gy of Principle, the oscillations of which propagate a 
sheen, or vesture, which comes forth from the forms of 
life in the facts of environment. It is shown that all 
propagation is by tones, which, at the last analysis are 
resolved to the oscillations of Principle. Finally propa¬ 
gation is resolved to thinking, and even the resurrection 
is shown to be the product of the oscillations of Prin¬ 
ciple. 

I trace the rise of organism from one harmony point, 
or mass-tone, to another, in so-called atomic-molecular- 
corpuscular bodies, such as planets, aind do the same, as 
to the rise of cellular organisms, up to man, and to the 
Risen Forms of invisible life, demonstrating that all such 
evolution, or life unfoldment is in the effect of thinking. 
I show, as far as possible, but in a clear vision, that 
from the microcosm to the cosmos, all is man—that there 
is nothing in our universe but man—nothing higher than 
completely unfolded mankind, and that there never can 
be. 

By the system of thinking elaborated on the follow¬ 
ing pages it is revealed that the God of Being—an ideal 


I 


14 THE NEW IDEA. 

God in the comprehension of humans—unfolds, through 
and by Principle, into the reality of the Living God, 
through the unfoldment of mankind; that the consum¬ 
mation of creation is in the Supreme Omniscient Man, and, 
that finally unfolded mankind is the Living God. 

It is shown, also, that man, in his present human 
state, posseses infinite knowledge, potentially, and that, 
by thinking in harmony with the plan of Principle, he 
unfolds that knowledge to consciousness, which psycho¬ 
logical organization of Consciousness, he is thus unfold¬ 
ing, by thinking, into the realities of the as yet invisible 
man. 

It is shown, in clear vision, that there is no such fact 
as death in our universe—that life cannot die—that the 
visible body cannot die—that the invisible form of life 
cannot die, and that not anything is dead—that every¬ 
thing is alive; and, that all error, evil, vice, disease and, 
so-called, death are in functional degrees of wisdom ancT 
intelligence, existing in perception only, except as to 
their results, which are harvested in life unfoldment, 
for which they are the tone potentialities. 

A series of thinking exercises are given for life un¬ 
foldment in health, power, peace, and plenty, joy and 
gladness, which, it is believed, will be functional to the 
rise of the life organizations df students. 

Functional duality in the forms of life is fully elab¬ 
orated, not only as to mass bodies, but as to unit thoughts; 
and the organic functions of the latter are so clearly de¬ 
fined that it is plainly seen that there is no such fact as 
inorganic substance, or “matter” in our universe. 

It is seen from a study of duality, and from methods 
of thinking in the plan of Principle, that men and women 
join in the everlasting wedlock of primal dual individ¬ 
uality upon entering the household of Invisible Brother¬ 
hood of all harmonious mass-tone forms of Risen Life. 
Of that transcendent fact the marriage union of these 
human spheres is, for the most part, grandly symbolic. 

It is shown that the unfoldment of humans to higher 
spheres of life, by thinking to the propagation of invis¬ 
ible forms, in the actuality of the resurrection, symbol¬ 
ized in sacred scripture, works out self-regeneration, in 
conjunction with invisible powers, for all who enter upon 
that work in volition, desire, choice and motive, but that 
for those who wilfully think themselves into a disorga¬ 
nization and degeneration of the grand psychological 
organism which Principle has so freely given them, there 
is the penalty of “going back” to the next lower pre- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


15 


human man sphere, wherein the only open door to a re¬ 
turn to evolution is reincarnation. 

It may be said that all the more important high places 
in the transcendent plan of life are partly or more fully 
elaborated, and that the wisdom and intelligence in which 
the work is performed is drawn from a study of Oriental, 
Egyptian, Persian, Grecian, Hebrew and other lore, and 
from a study of modern science; but that as a super¬ 
structure to all those sources of information, the author 
has built this new system by thinking in the plan of 
Principle, to the unfoldment of his life into a Knowledge 
of Truth. 

In concluding these introductory remarks, the au¬ 
thor feels warranted in saying that this volume will pro¬ 
vide for the man and woman of average intellectuality, 
and even a small degree of learning, a most useful study. 
That study will unfold the student to higher degrees 
of knowledge. The paramount object is to awaken peo¬ 
ple, generally, to a greater desire for more knowledge 
of self and the neighbor, so that they will rise to a higher 
respect of the former, and a more sincere esteem of the 
latter. It is certain that the foundations laid on the fol¬ 
lowing pages are sufficiently broad and deep, in Prin¬ 
ciple, to afford food for almost endless elaborations. 















































-» 












* 











r 


THE NEW IDEA 


METHODS OF THINKING FOR SELF¬ 
LIFE UNFOLDMENT, 

IN THE 

SCIENCE OF YOUTH AND HEALTH 


PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 

THE FIRST idea presented in this volume is one 
appealing directly to common sense. It follows: All 
ailments which afflict the human race rose from the wrong 
thinking of man; therefore, health and happiness will rise 
only by the right thinking of man. 

The reader is requested to weigh the foregoing propo¬ 
sition with great care, and to analyze it thoroughly, before 
taking another step toward the following pages. If that 
premises and that conclusion are wrong— in error; then 
the entire volume is without foundations in Truth; if they 
be in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which are the 
wings of human life unfoldment, that which follows may 
safely be accepted. 

Sickness, disease, affliction, vice, sorrow and, so 
called, death, are all in abnormal or unnatural conditions 
of life, produced by thinking and acting in error. Their 
reverse are the natural and normal conditions of life. 
The first are propagated by thinking in error; the last 
may be unfolded by thinking in the methods of Principle. 
That partial repetition is ventured, at this threshhold, in 
order to accentuate the ideas involved. 

Man was created to live in perpetual youth and 
health. That he has failed to realize those blessings is 
wholly due to erroneous thinking. He may easily regain 
those lost conditions of life, by right thinking. Our first 
parents, as will be seen later, on these pages, were in a 
condition of perpetual youth, complete health, and per¬ 
fect happiness. Thev forfeited those golden possessions 
for themselves, and for us. by their wrong thinking, and 

(17) 





18 


THE NEW IDEA. 


by our successive thinking in error, respectively. Man¬ 
kind is to regain those blessings, by a return to right 
thinking; and. in the exact measure in which man thinks 
in desire, choice, motive and volition, according to the 
plan of life, as revealed by the unfoldment of Principle, 
he will come into possession of perpetual youth, complete 
health, and perfect happiness. 

Methods of thinking are in the actuality of processes 
of creation. Right methods of thinking create in right¬ 
eousness; wrong methods of thinking create evil and 
affliction, and that thing commonly called death. All of 
the latter evils, now concomitant to human life, will ulti¬ 
mately be abolished, by the thinking of man in proper 
methods, quite easily within his self-powers; and, the 
earnestness and promptness, by which he enters upon 
those methods will measure, exactly, the progress he 
will make in those mighty conquests. 

I have discovered that humans did not gradually and 
visibly rise from the higher man ape tribes, according to 
the generally accepted plan of evolution. It is true that 
man was evolved, through animal species, up to that 
point, but between that and the human status, he passed 
through five stages, or races, of pre-human man; and, 
when humans appeared in flesh and blood, they came 
by the first pair— the first man and woman—by the fact 
of our first parents, very much as we have their appear¬ 
ance recorded in the Bible. That does not apply to 
the method of their creation, of course, in the manner 
symbolized by Moses. However, it is a fact that all 
humans proceeded from one pair —one male and one 
female. 

It is also true that they appeared on the earth, by 
the usual method of a birth, in propagation, the nature 
and source of which birth are fully elaborated, later on 
these pages. It is likewise true that our first parents 
came into life, and rose to function in maturity, in a 
perfectly natural state —a completely normal condition. 
That is the same as saying that they were completely 
harmonious, without error, evil, sickness, or being subject 
to physical death or dissolution. They were not in touch 
with any natural source of evil nor affliction, neither 
within, nor without. That source was created by wrong 
thinking; and, because life has been unfolded from that 
source, by continuous thinking in error, man has fallen 
a victim to sickness, and all sorts of afflictions, including 
physical dissolution. Those evils are the functional de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence, by which man is grad¬ 
ually being awakened to the realization of the necessity of 
adopting proper methods of thinking—methods revealed 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


19 


by the unfoldment of Principle—by which he may re¬ 
create, and regenerate his tone form of life back to its 
primal human estate. 

The work before the human race, today, is to think 
itself up to natural functions—to the overthrow of wrong 
thinking—and to the inauguration of right methods of 
thinking. In the degree in which that is accomplished, a 
human will realize continuous youth, health, prosperity 
and happiness. That is the burden of these teachings. 
The methods of thinking prescribed in this volume are 
formulated with that end in view. They ar<? all therapeut¬ 
ical, in that way, and in that sense only. 

It may as well be stated at the outset, that while 
man has, for ages, recognized the wonderful powers of 
thinking, it remained for the author to discover methods 
of thinking by which those powers are made self-func¬ 
tional for self-unfoldment, to the realization of continu¬ 
ous youth, health, prosperity and happiness. In that 
Avay this volume becomes transcendently useful. It is at 
once resolved to marvelous utility, in the every day life 
of man. As a study, the Thinking Exercises of the volume 
are a mighty functional power for the unfoldment of self 
into the bloom of youth and health. 

The study of Principle is resolved to the unfoldment 
of the student. The plan by which Principle unfolds 
into forms of life provides us not only with the plan of 
life, but w r ith the correct methods of thinking, by which 
man rises from evil and affliction toward Truth, in which 
rise there is realized degrees of freedom from all afflic¬ 
tions. Thus, our system rises, functionally, to the only 
real science of youth and health there is, or can be, in 
human spheres. Any other is man-made. This plan is 
unfolded from Principle. Its source is in Principle, and 
its elaborations are unfolded into a lengthy and practical 
series of Thinking Exercises, each of which is born of 
the oscillations of Principle. 

Hence this volume is properly entitled the “Science 
of Youth and Health.” It is in the fact of “The New 
Idea,” because its pages shine in the glory of scientific 
discoveries, from the beginning to the end: and. it is, 
therefore, in “Methods of Thinking for Self-Life Unfold¬ 
ment. ’ ’ 

SOUL EVOLUTION. 

Technique of Soul Unfoldment— There is one hard 
place in this volume. It is wherein one must bring to 
vision, in life unfoldment, the fluxing together of unit 
souls into the rising and expanding degrees of the mass- 
tone soul. I have, therefore, arranged, in skeleton form, 



20 


THE NEW IDEA. 


some of the more prominent characteristics, or turning 
points, in the evolution of the soul, until the human soul 
is reached. The same rule applies on the arc of soul 
unfoldment above humans. I shall repeat this skeleton 
plan, in any connection in this work, where that appears 
to be necessary, so as to save the trouble of turning back, 
every time to this point, in order to refresh the memory. 

1— Principle is the portal through which the fountain 
of life is propagated from esse to existere. As the units 
pass that threshold they each assume, from the mould of 
Principle, a certain form-tone, different from each and all 
the others. 

2— The primal propagations of Principle were in the 
units of Power and Love. 

3— Primordial Principle is in the fact of potential em¬ 
bryos, and all primal units propagated by it are in the 
same state. 

4— When Primordial Principle had divided into the 
Two Principles of Power and Love, its work, as Primor¬ 
dial Principle was finished, except as to the everlasting 
continuity of that work. 

5— All propagation beyond that point was achieved 
by the Two Principles. 

6— The first propagation by the Two Principles was 
by which a substare form of life in Truth was begotten. 

7— That form of life is the primal soul. 

8— Primordial Principle transmitted its nature, one 
half to Power, and the other half to Love, so that to¬ 
gether, or in the sum of them both, their potentialities are 
equal to those of the parent Principle, in the sum total of 
all the primal units of life that ever have, or ever will 
come forth from that parental fountain. 

9— Primordial Principle was not in the fullness of un¬ 
foldment, but in the wholeness of potential embryos neces¬ 
sary to complete unfoldment into Omnicience, or Absolute 
life. 

10— It was the same with its children, called Power 
and Love, and with its grand-child of Truth. They were 
each and all in potentiality. 

11— The number of the primal units of Power and 
Love, already, and yet to be propagated, is infinite; so 
also is the number of secondary forms of life in potential 
Truth. Each differs from the other in form tone. The 
functions of oscillation already have been elaborated. 

12— Thus we have primal souls in the facts and func¬ 
tions of potential embryos. They are the data, the begin¬ 
ning points of soul unfoldment. 

13— The primal soul was in three fundamental tones, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


21 


known to the scale of harmonies as C, E, and G. It very 
soon expanded into the functional use of six other tones, 
and a little later to three more, making twelve in all. 

14— From that primitive state, the soul has unfolded, 
until, today, one of the highest human souls comprehends 
an innumerable number of tones. The final soul will em¬ 
brace them all—the form tones of the Ultimate Infinite 
Universe. 

15— We now hold in vision a single primal soul, in the 
three fundamental tones of Power, Love and Truth. As 
we think of it existing in the highest dual heavens—the 
highest dual spiritual-celestial heavens—it is provided with 
a double tone vesture body, to-wit: an inner spiritual body 
of spiritual Power, Love and Truth, and an outer body of 
Celestial Power, Love and Truth. The soul within that 
double, or dual body, is in the three fundamental tones 
of primal Power, Love and Truth. A little later we see 
that single soul in a second, or outer dual body of the tones 
of divine Power, Love and Truth, and angelic Power. 
Love and Truth; still a little later, we see that same 
single soul clothed in a third dual body of celestial Power, 
Love and Truth, mental Power, Love and Truth, and 
physical Power, Love and Truth. Finally it is clothed in 
a fourth dual body of sub-angelic Power, Love and Truth, 
and sub-physical Power, Love and Truth. 

16— All those bodies are in potential degrees, or tones, 
of intelligence, as to their upper, or inner sides, and in po¬ 
tential degrees, or tones, of wisdom, as to their lower, or 
outer sides. 

17— It must be remembered that as the single primal 
soul began to propagate tone-vesture bodies, as aforesaid, 
it also began to fellowship with other primal unit souls 
which, in like manner, propagated tone bodies for their 
respective uses and functions. 

18— When three or more of these come together in 

fellowship, or in joint propagation, two mighty facts, 
or processes were realized, to-wit: (1) The primal souls 

and bodies of such fellowship circles propagated new 
souls and bodies; and (2) such new souls and bodies 
were by that propagation fluxed into a new metamor¬ 
phosis of one mass tone soul and body. 

19— That is precisely the fact of the animal or hu¬ 
man cell. The primal cell is in the fact of a mass tone 
male-female, or dual soul and body, while the proto¬ 
plasmic cells are in the separate facts of male mass tone, 
and female mass tone souls and bodies. 

20— Thus, in the birth of the unit organism of animal 
and human forms of life, there was, first, the gathering 


22 


THE NEW IDEA. 


together, by way of interdependent, or sociological asso¬ 
ciation, in the plan of apperception, of many single 
primal souls, with their respective four-fold bodies; and, 
secondly, the division of them all, on the boundary lines 
dividing their respective, spiritual and celestial sides, 
resulting in male mass tone souls, and female mass tone 
souls, as aforesaid. 

21— That wonder work of propagation, by which, 
first, a dual mass tone soul came forth; and, secondly, 
male and female mass tone souls rose, characterized the 
glory of the morning in which the second birth of life 
transpired. 

22— From that event, mass tone souls rose in separ¬ 
ate dual columns, but when a certain stage of soul un- 
i'oldment is reached, male and female souls reunite into 
the individuality of duality. 

23— In some wonderful and incomprehensible way 
the soul of Jesus of Nazareth had unfolded to that trans¬ 
cendent duality, or was always in that powerful status; 
and, it is in the plan of life that the soul of one man 
and that of one woman shall become the same, for all 
mankind. That is the secret of the coming power, and 
ultimate omniscience of the rising human soul. 

24— The unfoldment of the soul on the arc of evolu¬ 
tion, from and after the second birth of life, up to the 
human soul status, is by the continuous fluxing of cellu¬ 
lar unit souls into the mass tone soul, by propagation; 
and, that is the method in force among humans of the 
present generation. Further, that method will continue 
all the way up the arc of evolution, only that later on, 
in spheres now invisible, mass tone souls will flux to¬ 
gether into the larger mass tone Harmony, of duality. 
Already that latter process is going forward imper¬ 
ceptibly. 

25— There is the unfoldment of the four successive 
bodies jointly, simultaneously with the soul. Man should 
unfold soul and body together. That is achieved by the 
joint oscillations of the spiritual and celestial triad tones 
of the successive bodies, by which the latter propagate 
the rise and expansion of the soul. Thus the tones of 
the successive vesture bodies, which were propagated by 
the oscillations of the soul, return in propagations there¬ 
to, by the orbital plan of Principle; and, in the latter 
processes, the soul is raised and expanded. In that way 
there is the renewal of the whole man, body and soul. 

26— By the unfoldment of the soul, the body is un¬ 
folded; by the unfoldment of the body, the soul is un¬ 
folded. The processes are mutual. The finale of that 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


23 


evolution is the invisible new man, wherein soul and 
body become one integral and undivided whole. 

Any one who will master the foregoing twenty-six 
short paragraphs, so as to bring their teachings to clear 
vision, will, in that result, possess the key to a complete 
understanding of all the doctrines taught in this volume. 
Each student should familiarize himself, or herself, with 
each item in the foregoing, so as to be able to recall, 
any one or all, at will. The student will find it a handy 
ready reckoner for almost constant use in the study of 
these pages. 


SOUL RE-UNION. 

It is now expedient that we carry the evolution of 
the soul to higher ground, implicating the biological 
foundations of marriage unions. Let me observe, at this 
point, that not all which is said in these and the fore¬ 
going observations, will be fully understood, except by 
a study of the following Thinking Exercises. They are 
in the method of foundations, to be referred to in con¬ 
nection with a study of the following pages. 

In the first place, let me say that there is in our 
physical subvesture spheres, a partial marriage union 
of the man and the woman. That may be called a bod¬ 
ily union. It sometimes reaches out to a union of the 
higher tone functions, but seldom, if ever, while the man 
and the woman dwell in flesh and blood, implicates a 
union of souls. It will not always be that way. With a 
higher knowledge of the facts of life; and, when men 
and women come to experience more effective methods 
of thinking, that union will extend to the soul. 

In this connection I find it expedient to call atten¬ 
tion to the first division of Principle, by which the Two 
Principles come forth, not only in the facts of the male 
and female Principles, but in the more comprehensive 
division known as the spiritual and celestial Principles. 
The two latter Principles involve the full functions of 
the male and the female, but they rise to still higher 
significance. They rise to ideas, or facts, of spiritual 
Power, and celestial Love, or to the spiritual and celestial 
Principles, by which the whole universe, first, and, man, 
secondly, were unfolded into duality. 

By that evolution of the female Principle to the 
status of the celestial Principle, we have celestial Power, 
Love and Truth, distinctive from spiritual Power, Love 
and Truth. In that way spiritual Power, Love and Truth 
become the spiritual substare soul of the spiritual primal 
unit form of life, and celestial Power, Love and Truth 



24 


THE NEW IDEA. 


become the celestial substare soul of the celestial primal 
unit form of life. Please observe that, by that unfold- 
ment, we have two classes of primal substare souls, the 
one called spiritual and the other celestial. That is all 
important. It is the key which not only unlocks the 
mystery of the biological foundation of the marriage 
union, but that transcendent process of soul evolution, 
by which the new soul —the new man—is unfolded in 
the fact of the resurrection. 

It is seen that, as the division of Primordial Prin¬ 
ciple marks the first morning of life, whereat we have 
the first birth; and that whereas Principle was again 
divided in the second morning of life, whereat we have 
the second birth of life; that the plan of life seeks the 
reunion of Principle as to both of those divisions. In 
the secret processes of the unfoldment of cellular forms 
of life, the Two Principles embraced—reunited—but di¬ 
vided again when the primal ovum cells unfolded to sep¬ 
arate male and female protoplasmic cells. 

That was the second division of the soul. In atomic 
units, existing exclusively prior to the cellular birth of • 
life, the spiritual and celestial substare souls dwelt, inter- 
dependently, in one atomic or molecular unit organism, 
but in a measure separately. In that way the spiritual- 
celestial units were dual; in cellular forms, the soul, or 
substare, became completely divided. 

It is said that there is a line of descent from primal 
cellular birth, wherein that division did not take place, 
and that the soul of Jesus is the product of that descent. 
If further elaborations should establish that life phenom¬ 
ena, it would not raise the form of life of the Master 
above the potentialities of humans. It would only place 
the evolution of that exceptional form farther ahead on 
the arc of evolution, because the male and female souls 
are all ultimately to reunite by pairs. It is in the plan 
of life that, in one line of descent and ascent, the spir¬ 
itual and celestial soul should remain forever dual. 
We have an abundance of ancient, as well as Hebrew 
sacred scripture for that transcendent line of extension 
and evolution, but its biological elaboration is left for 
some future effort. I have hut slightly outlined ideas of 
that mighty fact in this volume. The student may rest 
assured that it is in the plan of life by Principle. 

We see, from the foregoing, that the marriage union 
is not only an institution of Christian civilization, but 
that it rests on biological foundations. It is an institu¬ 
tion of life, and comes of the evolution of life—of life 
unfoldment—by Principle. In these physical subvesture 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


25 


tones, it does not often extend beyond a fluxing to¬ 
gether of outer bodily tones, but with higher and more 
effective methods of thinking it will extend to a union 
of the higher tones, and, finally, to a re-union of the male 
and female souls, into one glorious dual soul, in which 
the Two Principles will become one distinctly, not as 
they were in unity, but as they are, and will become, in 
the greater fact of Harmony. 

As naturally growing out of the foregoing, I hasten 
to emphasize the transcendent functional importance of 
the higher marriage union—the marriage of two human 
souls—by which two souls, the one male and the other 
female; the one spiritual, and the other celestial; the one 
in the fact of Power, the other in the fact of Love, shall 
unfold into one distinctly, as it is in the wonderful met¬ 
amorphosis of Harmony. I do this because, in that state, 
humans will attain unto great degrees of Power, Love 
and Truth. In the processes of unfoldment, by thinking, 
by which that transcendent union is achieved, there are 
the bloom of youth and health, power and peace, pros¬ 
perity and plenty, for all who engage in the glorious 
work. 


PERCEPTION. 

What is perception? One idea is that the thing per¬ 
ceived to exist does not exist at all; another is that it 
exists, but not in the nature, or character, in which it 
is perceived. One school of the new thought says: 
“Not things, but the point of view, is vital and impor¬ 
tant.” 

It is almost self-evident that whatever the real 
nature of the thing may be, its true character cannot 
be determined by the functional powers of perception. 
Because that is a fact, one cannot, in perception, truth¬ 
fully say whether a thing, or fact, of sense exists or not. 

A condition does not exist in substance; rather, sub¬ 
stance exists in condition. However, the point is as to 
whether substance can be apprehended in perception at 
all, and, if at all, in what measure, Or relativity, the per¬ 
ception bears to Truth. It is true that the real nature 
of a thing cannot be affected by perception. It is what¬ 
ever it is, regardless of the nature of perception. 

At this point the question of the reality in question 
shifts from the thing to perception itself. It is self evi¬ 
dent, in experience, that perception itself is in error, or, 
in a greater or less measure of error. It is not in Truth. 

Again, I ask, What is perception? What is it by any 
rule of science? Can perception be brought under the 



26 


THE NEW IDEA. 


light of science, and held there long enough to enable 
one to determine just what it is? Science says that per¬ 
ception is the appropriation of facts, or the apprehen¬ 
sion of them, through the senses. That does not say very 
much. It does not answer the question at all, as to the 
dependence one may place upon it as a guide. All admit 
its utility. It surely is functional for both good and evil. 

Is there any simple, common sense methods, by which 
one may know just what sense perception, or perception 
of any kind, really is? The answer is, Yes! All such 
matters may be correctly weighed, and measured, by 
thinking in the plan of Principle. Here is the real sci¬ 
entific definition of Perception : It is in the rising degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, which are the tone radiations 
of thoughts. 

This volume tells you exactly, and correctly, what 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence are. It is the only 
volume in our world, or available to humans, which im¬ 
parts that most important knowledge, or, rather, the only 
book, the study of which will enable the student to un¬ 
fold his or her form of life into a conscious knowledge 
of functional degrees of wisdom and intelligence. De¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence are the wings of evolu¬ 
tion—of life unfoldment. They are ever rising, and un¬ 
folding; they unite into rising and unfolding perceptions 
of Truth. Some of those degrees are very low, some are 
higher; others are so high that they reach summits where¬ 
on they resolve themselves to transcendent conceptions 
of Truth. 

Dear student; please allow me to call you by that 
name, even at this threshold of our studies; never under¬ 
value or disparage, the functions of perceptions. They 
combine the mighty sweep of infinite variety of life units 
into the personality of the indispensable Schoolmaster, 
commonly called Suggestion, and function as the great 
pushing force of evolution, or life unfoldment. It is upon 
the wings of perception, which are degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, that humans rise, by unfolding their 
inherent infinite knowledge into consciousness. At the 
last analysis perception is potentiality. 

We are not so much to deny human perceptions as 
to raise them higher—to unfold them into higher degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence. A full elaboration of those 
degrees of life will be found on the following pages. This 
much has been said here to prevent the reader from com¬ 
mitting the error of concluding that these teachings are 
in a conception of so-called Christian Science. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


27 


THE YOGAM. 

I make no attempt in this volume to elaborate the 
religio-philosophy of the ancient Orient, from the view¬ 
point of its very rich symbolism. We have found a bet¬ 
ter, a more effective, method of thinking in science, and 
modern synthetic philosophy. I am aware that man 
may exercise a functional power over his thoughts higher 
than that of the human will, and that the wonderful 
mastership of the Gurus unfolds to the exercise of that 
power. But there is a shorter and more satisfactory 
method of reaching the functions of guru than that of 
the yogam of the Vedanta philosophy of India. The 
stages of the yogam are student, householder, yogi and 
guru, or gnani. The course in yogi are Karma Yoga, 
Bhakti Yoga, Raja Yoga, and Jnana Yoga. 

Floyd B. Wilson, an adept in yogam, who is doing 
much to relieve Hindu methods of perplexing nomencla¬ 
ture, is authority for the statement that Jesus adopted 
that method of thinking, to the unfoldment of his life, 
known as Bhakti Yoga, while Buddha chose the method 
of Raja Yoga. The first is the path of love and devo¬ 
tion; the second, that of developing psychic functions. 
Karma Yoga implicates industry and eo-operation, while 
Jnana Yoga is in a method of unfolding into knowledge. 

I readily admit that if the whole yogam of the Hin¬ 
dus could he readily comprehended up to, and including, 
guru, so that one could function in the latter, to the 
exercise of that higher soul power, which transcends voli¬ 
tion, and the will, to the control of both, man would, 
thereby, be in possession of a method of thinking, by 
which he could readily re-establish tone connection be¬ 
tween the inner soul, or “hidden man of the heart,” and 
his outer tone vestures, so as to function in the wholeness 
of unfoldment. I refer to cases where that connection 
has become broken, or discordant, by thinking in error, 
which may be presumed to be the general rule in our 
day. However, there is a shorter route to the functions 
of guru than that laid down in the Vidas. The latter is 
too cumbersome; and its austere severities are not neces¬ 
sary in our times. Nor do the possibly more attractive 
methods of ancient and modern theosophy lessen the labor 
and pains involved by the former. 

I cannot say wherein the error rises, in connection 
with the foregoing plans of life unfoldment, but possibly 
it is in faulty interpretation of ancient symbolism. Never¬ 
theless, it is error to say that “human evolution is a 
ceaseless unfolding to the expression of the divine in 
man,” provided that be held as the sum-total of human 


28 


THE NEW IDEA. 


life unfoldment. The divine is the central and functional 
tone of the spiritual side of man’s duality. But the 
physical and the celestial tones of the celestial side of 
man’s duality are also central and fundamental. They are 
essential and indispensable to soul unfoldment. But all 
that is fully elaborated on the following pages. The 
object of these remarks, in this place, is to explain that 
modern methods should supplant those altogether too 
cumbersome plans of ancient and modern Oriental philos¬ 
ophy, whether they be founded on the yogam of the 
vedas, or the more picturesque planes of theosophy; and, 
not in the least to undervalue or discredit those wonder¬ 
fully transcendent systems of truth interpretation. 

THE OLD AND THE NEW. 

The key to a knowledge of self is in the fact that the 
soul was born by the polar energy of the Two Principles, 
and that the body was propagated by the oscillations of 
Principle in the soul. 

In his latest (1908) volume, Charles B. Newcomb 
says: “We have found in him (man) two factors—the 
Personal and the Spiritual. The Personal is the outmost, 
the least refined, the most material expression of the 
Spiritual.” That conception could not be made to con¬ 
form to this new system in any way whatever. The two 
great factors in man are the spiritual and the celestial. 
There is not a spark of material in man, neither in his 
body, mind nor soul. That is fully explained in this vol¬ 
ume. Personality can be applied only to a man, or to 
a woman—to a male or to a female. It has nothing what¬ 
ever to do with any other consideration of a human, or 
any other form of life. 

Again, he says: “The Personal, or Mortal Man, is 
the visible expression, or consequence, of the invisible 
Spiritual Cause.” No part of man, body, mind, or soul, 
is mortal. Nothing connected with the life of man is 
mortal, except his perceptions, and the results of those 
are everlasting. Man’s perceptions are degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence, which unfold, by their potentiali¬ 
ties, into the real. The mortality of perceptions, there¬ 
fore, is resolved to their continuous change—their un¬ 
folding rise. There is no matter, no materiality. The 
physical subvesture tones of life appear to be matter, but 
those will unfold when human thinking becomes normal. 

Again, says Mr. Newcomb: “We come now to the 
consideration of a third factor which needs equally to 
be understood before we can have any intelligent con¬ 
ception of man’s constitution. This is the Psychical or 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


29. 


Astral Man. It involves a quality which of itself is 
neither distinctively material nor spiritual. It is at dif¬ 
ferent times visible and invisible. It shares man’s double 
nature and serves as a connecting link between liis mor¬ 
tal and immortal parts.” Mr. Newcomb is breaking into 
the New Thought, all right, but he is bringing along with 
him a very doubtful brand of theosophy. I should not 
have known what department of man was meant, except 
that it is called the Psychical Man. That is indeed the 
Third Person of the human triad, and is the new man— 
the real man— the partly risen man—the invisible man— 
who is propagated bv the joint oscillations of the spiritual 
and celestial sides of man’s transcendent duality. It is 
m this connection that so many misinterpret the true 
theosophy of the Buddhistic school. The real soul re¬ 
sides in that invisible man; and, it is being therein un¬ 
folded to higher and grander tones, by experience. 

I agree with Mr. Newcomb: The Third Person of 
man “needs equally to be understood before we can have 
any intelligent conception of man’s constitution.” True, 
indeed, “it is neither distinctively material nor spirit¬ 
ual.” It is in reality, spiritual-celestial, and combines in 
its risen, or rising tones, a development of the lower spir¬ 
itual, and lower celestial tones, with some degree of un- 
foldment of them all. It will ultimately rise to the com¬ 
plete unfoldment of all spiritual and celestial tones. 
True, the Psychical man—the invisible man—“shares 
man’s double nature ’ ’—double in the fact, of his spiritual 
and celestial duality—“and serves as a connecting link 
between”—. But I cannot complete the quotation and 
say—“his mortal and immortal parts.” Let us have a 
partial compromise of this matter. I will agree that every 
part—every fiber of man—body, mind and soul, is con¬ 
tinuously changing, rising or falling, and that in re¬ 
spect of the continuous changing of its tones it is all 
mortal —all changing—but in no other sense. Moreover, 
that continuous change is concomitant to all parts of 
man’s constitution. There is nothing whatever to be 
excepted. 

The invisible new man— the psychical man—holds 
the spiritual and celestial sides of man’s partly visible 
form together, and, when it withdraws, at that event, 
miscalled, death, the units composing the latter disperse. 
It will not, I say, always be that way. By normal methods 
of thinking humans will unfold their physical subvesture 
tones, leaving nothing behind. That process is elabor¬ 
ated on the following pages. In the more genuine new 
thought, the psychical man is in the fact of the human 


30 


THE NEW IDEA. 


psychological consciousness, or psychical organization. 
It is the rising invisible new man. 

Speaking of the psychical man, Mr. Newcomb says: 
“At the death of the body, it retains for a time its form, 
and, apparently, a limited degree of intelligence, but, 
finally, becomes disintegrated, as the Spirit withdraws 
itself, having no use for it on higher planes. * * * The 
Spirit itself has never yet fully entered into ether (mean¬ 
ing the physical and astral bodies)—else they would be 
indestructible.” If that is not in the old conception of a 
soul endowed body, and of the separate and distinct ex¬ 
istence of matter, I am greatly mistaken. There may be 
a partial conception of modern theosophy, but there is no 
new thought, in such ideas. In fact, they do theosophy 
injustice. It is because all tones of life primarily pro¬ 
ceeded from Absolute Spirit, that they are indestructible. 
How could the radiations of the soul be destructible? 
They are potential degrees of wisdom and intelligence, 
by which the soul is propagated to higher realities; and, 
they are not only the instrumentalities of propagation, but 
become the things which they propagate. That is the 
idea inherent in self-life unfoldment. That idea is prop¬ 
agated by the orbital plan of Principle. 

It may as well be recognized now, as later, that 
physical, or sub-physical tones, commonly called matter, 
cannot exist by themselves, or apart from the substare 
soul from which they are propagated. Each unit of such 
tones is six, or seven-fold, and contains, as its inmost, a 
spark of Spirit, in the primal tones of Power, Love and 
Truth. The human group soul is composed of an infinite 
number of those substares, fluxed together into the human 
metamorphosis. There is not a tone of this, or any other 
universe, high or low, that is destructible. Tones, whether 
of so called matter, or otherwise, are unfolded—destroyed, 
never! 

I desire to explain that the foregoing is not intended 
as an adverse criticism of Mr. Newcomb’s writings. As 
an author, he enjoys a high conception of the school of 
thought to which he belongs. I have made the foregoing 
selections because that is a fact; and, in order that I 
might bring an authoritative vision of the ideas, or con¬ 
ceptions, of a soul endowed body ; of a mortal man ; and, 
of the distinctive existence of matter, side by side with 
the New and Higher Thought of this tolume, which 
teaches the unfoldment of the whole man, body, mind 
and soul, from Absolute Spirit, as one integral form of 
life; and, in the glorious fact that the evolution of such 
a man is part of the unfoldment of the God of Being 
into the Living God. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


31 


HARMONY MASS-TONE. 

Wherever and whenever, on the following pages the 
word, tone, or mass-tone, appears, it must be held in 
thought as a harmony tone, or harmony mass-tone. It 
is possible for one to think of a mass of tones—any num¬ 
ber of tones in association—whether discordant or har¬ 
monious. Therefore, the student is advised, in advance, 
that in this volume, mass-tone not only implicates Har¬ 
mony, but, also, the fact of such a chemical combination 
of tones as to implicate the active Principle of propaga¬ 
tion. A Harmony mass-tone always is in the fact and 
process of propagation. 

When it is said on the following pages that three 
or more unit-tones are necessary to a mass-tone in har¬ 
mony that is said in reference to life units, the respective 
valence, or tone rates of oscillation of which dilfer from 
each other. Two units, the valence, or rates of oscillation 
of each, of which are exactly equal, although of different 
powers, because of Principle, will chemically combine in 
harmony mass-tone, or propagation. It is in that way 
that Power and Love chemically combine, so to speak, 
and propagate a unit form of life in Truth. The unit of 
Power, and that of Love are in the fact of the Two Equal 
Principles —the male and female Principles. They are of 
equal tone volume, or oscillation, which is to say that 
their respective rates and radii of oscillation are exactly 
equal. Later, on these pages, the whole subject of mass- 
tone is fully elaborated. 

Just a few words, further, in conclusion, about Har¬ 
mony Tones, and Harmony Mass-Tones. At the last an¬ 
alysis, Harmony is unfolded from two great sources, to- 
wit: Harmony and inharmony. The difference is most 
easily apprehended in the facts that two harmonious 
units, or mass-bodies may unite into the larger harmony 
mass-tone, while three or more inharmonious units or 
bodies are required in any union, in order to propagate 
a harmony mass-tone. 

Any one even partially acquainted with ideas of 
valence in connection with the science of chemistry can 
easily bring the above facts to clear vision. Power and 
Love are of exactly equal valence; hence they embrace 
in the propagation of a form of life in Truth. That is 
wherein two become one in Harmony. In all other pro¬ 
cesses of propagation, three, or more, units, or forms, of 
life are required for a process of propagation, or a har¬ 
mony mass-tone. 

It is seen, by a close inspection of all processes of 
propagation, on the whole orbit of life, that those two 


32 


THE NEW IDEA. 


methods continuously prevail. It is in this way: inhar¬ 
mony propagates to Harmony, implicating a union of 
three or more; and Harmony propagates to higher de¬ 
grees of Harmony, in pairs. If the immediately fore¬ 
going be applied to resolutions in chemistry, there will 
be no difficulty in comprehending their full significance, 
but when those processes implicate human forms of life, 
a new problem rises. 

It is observed, in the first place, that a human, or 
homogeneous form is the highest Harmony mass-tone form 
of life reached, visible to man; and, by all the rules of 
harmony propagation, the higher rise of the man and the 
woman must proceed from their union in pairs, as before 
stated. That is quite fully elaborated in this volume. 

It would appear that as the original, or primal mar¬ 
riage union was in the embrace of Power and Love, 
or the male and female Principles, by which a form 
of life in Truth was begotten, that, when Power and Love 
unfolded into the spiritual and celestial Principles, and 
those two principles unfolded, in turn, to the embodi¬ 
ments of the man and the woman, their union must like¬ 
wise propagate to a form of life in Truth. 

That latter union is in a higher conception than the 
continuous propagation of the race; it rises to the tran¬ 
scendent idea of the new man—the more real—the higher 
invisible dual man. 

HARMONY HEALING. 

In respect of hurtful and immoral habits, as well as 
of all ailments, sickness and disease, let it be said here 
that their seat is in the celestial side of man’s duality, 
exclusively—in the celestial tones of the units of which 
the life organization is composed. I say that they have 
their seat in that department of a human constitution, 
but their effects extend to the whole life, body, mind and 
soul. It is not here said that those habits and ailments 
exist, in the reality of substance life, but rather in a 
discordant condition of the celestial tones. At the last an¬ 
alysis all such afflictions are in the fact of tone inhar¬ 
mony. They disappear in the exact measure in which 
Harmony is propagated. 

Immoral, or injurious habits, ailments, sickness and 
diseases cannot function in the realm of degrees of in¬ 
telligence, because such degrees always are righteous, to 
the full degree of their unfoldment. Because the spiritual 
and celestial tones of the human duality are in relativity 
and interdependence, unfoldment in degrees of intelligence 
is obstructed by the inharmony of degrees of wisdom. 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


33 


To remove, or, better still, to rise out of, and above, 
injurious habits and ailments, it is necessary, only, to 
unfold into higher degrees of Harmony. That is not 
accomplished by fighting, or treating, or, in any way pay¬ 
ing attention to such afflictions, but rather by turning 
away from them and toward ideas of Harmony. Think¬ 
ing to unfoldment in the latter, by proper methods, propa¬ 
gates youth and health.. That is quite easy to accom¬ 
plish by following the instructions given in this volume. 
In order to do that successfully one requires a general 
knowledge of the plan of life, as it is unfolded from 
Principle. 

Life building, by methods of thinking, in the plan 
of Principle, to self-iife unfoldment in continuous youth 
and health is resolved to a continuous rise in unfolding 
degrees of Harmony. The latter is achieved by the appro¬ 
priation of degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which are 
the tones of the soul, propagating in the orbital plan of 
Principle, by which the soul is unfolded to successively 
higher spheres of life. Body, mind and soul; and, Power, 
Love and Truth, are the three dual poles of the processes 
of propagation, by which they unfold into the integral 
wholeness of one life; and that is accomplished by meth¬ 
ods of thinking in the plan of Principle, by which, during 
the whole journey, youth and health are made continuous. 


EXERCISE I. 


THE PLAN OF LIFE. 

Science the New Foundation—Definition of Science—Ap¬ 
plication of Principle to Process—Principle—The Two 
Principles—Infinite Knowledge of Man Potentially— 
Being, Principle and Life, the prior, subsequent and 
final—Skeleton of part of the plan of Life—Mate¬ 
rialism abolished. 


HE who tells the story of the evolution of Man in the 
highest degrees of wisdom and intelligence, of his day, 
is the greatest benefactor of his generation. 


It would appear proper to say that the time has come 
in the unfoldment of mankind when one may press en¬ 
quiries on self as to Whence came Man? and, Whither 
is he going? The origin, evolution and future status of 
Man are mighty questions. Ever since man has been 
able to think in any degree of volition, those questions 
have thrilled his life organization, and his best thoughts 
have been propagated in a continuous effort to solve 
them. 

Resulting from that effort many systems of religio- 
philosophv, and, later, Christian theology have been pro¬ 
mulgated and practiced. Nearly all of them have, at one 
time or another, found many followers. It would be error 
to say that all such building in religion and theology has 
been in vain. Out from it all a goodly measure of prog¬ 
ress has come. Man knows more of man today than in 
any past age. Man can think stronger and clearer and 
with better results now than in any time in the past. 

In his struggles to appropriate the rising light of 
human unfoldment, man is forced to establish his hopes 
and aspirations on a new foundation. It appears, in a 
broad sense, that the day of direct revelation of hidden 
truth to man has, as to ancient methods, faded and gone. 
We have garnered from the past the teachings of seers 
and phophets, but we find that a satisfactory interpreta¬ 
tion of ancient symbolism is achieved only under the 
steady light of science. The hope of man, therefore, is 
in Science. Science is becoming our foundation whether 
we will or no. Scientific knowledge is rising to supplant 
all other systems of thinking, and the world must look to 
science hereafter for all revelations of Truth. 

( 34 ) 




NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


35 


Indeed, science itself is speedily becoming the only 
revelater for man. It is providing keys which unlock 
successive mysteries, and methods which solve problem 
after problem, until we plainly see that its reach is in¬ 
finite. If we say that man, by nature, possesses infinite 
knowledge, and that his particular task is the unfold- 
ment of that Knowledge to Consciousness, by scientific 
methods of thinking, we say the truth; and, that is the 
same as saying that by the appropriation of science man 
will become Omniscient. 

What is Science? It is any process that conforms to 
Principle. The student should hold that fact in steady 
vision. He or she will not, in this age, find a better defi¬ 
nition of science. It is the application of Principle to 
process. Art is the result, or product of that process. 
The question now forces itself, WTiat is Principle ? I must 
answer the last question as fully as possible, and in such 
a manner that the average thinker of our day will not 
only understand, but appropriate a knowledge of Prin¬ 
ciple, or this whole effort will be in vain. 

It will probably be considered a little unfortunate, 
by a majority of my readers, that we are to consider, so 
early in these studies, the science of metaphysics, but the 
promise is given that it shall be a somewiiat new meta¬ 
physics, and decidedly simple, and possibly, entertaining. 
I wish to point out, in the first place that metaphysics is 
the highest science known to man, and that it is parent 
to all other sciences. It includes within its infinite sweep 
all the sciences, because it gave them birth and existence. 
It is the Father-Mother head of the whole family of sci¬ 
ences. 

Primarily, metaphysics is the science of Principle, 
and it is from a knowledge of it that w T e bring to vision 
the functions of Principle. The story of the evolution or 
unfoldment of man from and by Principle is resolved to 
the history of the universe. It is an account of how one 
thing became an infinite number of things, and how that 
infinite variety became one thing again, differing from 
the original; it is a story of how’ one thing became many 
things, each differing from the other, and how that in¬ 
finite multitude united into one thing higher and grander 
and greater than that from which it sprang. 

Life is a proposition which proposes: All things 
which proceeded from one thing, each of the pro¬ 
ceeding things differing from the other, are, w’hen har¬ 
moniously united, greater in the resulting fact than the 
Being from w r hicli they are propagated. Is such a prem¬ 
ise founded on facts, and can it be demonstrated? The 


36 


THE NEW IDEA. 


story of the unfoldment of man from the God of Being 
into the Living God furnishes precisely that proposition, 
and to tell that story in wisdom and intelligence is a 
complete demonstration of it. 

The unfoldment of man from Being, by Principle, 
conforms to a plan, simple, but grand. It is transcend¬ 
ency more interesting and instructive than the most ab T 
sorbing plot and counterplot of fiction. An outline, or 
skeleton of that plan, which will bring to vision the 
source and functions of Principle, is the first thing with 
which we have to do. In this connection we are com¬ 
pelled to resort to many divisions, and subdivisions, but 
they are all quite easily correlated, classified and com¬ 
prehended, because they conform exactly to the plan of 
the student's life organization. Thus appealing to him, 
or to her that plan cannot confuse nor perplex. 

We start with the datum of an Ideal God. That de¬ 
mands a few words of explanation. The Absolute Being 
—God—which is the source of Principle, and of all forms 
of life which come forth, in successive births, propagated 
by the oscillations, or polar energy of Principle, is in¬ 
comprehensible—at present unknowable. We cannot com¬ 
prehend God. Hence, as God dwells in us we know that 
He Is, but as to His nature and character that is all as 
vet Ideal. If the student complain that our start is made 
in the incomprehensible, the author respectfully suggests 
that as the real story of God is the history of man, we 
will very soon harmonize on that point. It will also soon 
appear that the God of human comprehension is none the 
less real because Ideal. 

The first emanation—creature—which proceeded 
from the Absolute is Principle, which is next subsequent 
to God. It is not proper to hold, in thought. Absolute 
Being and Principle as one distinctly. The former is, to 
our perceptions, the all— that fact called space within 
which all things of life dwell and are upheld. Its sub¬ 
stance is infinite, and is the fountain of life. The lat¬ 
ter is that partly comprehensible emanation which stands 
with one foot in esse and one in existere, and is the indis¬ 
soluble link which binds God and the universe of life 
together. Principle is the fountain of propagation, 
the source and creator of Form, the poidal through which 
there is communication between Being and Life. In and 
proceeding from Principle we find the whole infinite plan 
of life. That plan is in such potential riches that all 
which follows is but its simple unfoldment. 

Primordial Principle is one distinctly— in the fact of 
unity. In that state it is one with Absolute Being, its 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


37 


Source, which is the prior, or cause of the cause. Prin¬ 
ciple becomes Cause, by unfoldment. Unfoldment is the 
product of thinking, or of propagation. When Primor¬ 
dial Principle began to think, it divided into Two Prin¬ 
ciples, and Life was Born. The beginning of life was in 
the fact of a real birth. The first-born unit-form of life 
came forth by propagation—by the oscillations of the 
poles of Principle, or by the oscillations of the Two Prin¬ 
ciples, one with the other, which is commonly called Polar 
Energy. By that primal propagation Principle became 
Cause —the foundation and source of propagation. 

It must be understood that all life was propagated in 
unit forms, from its source, by Principle, and that each 
unit comes forth in an actual birth, in a form-tone pecu¬ 
liar to the oscillations of the Two Principles, by which it 
is propagated. Hence it is seen that the first step in the 
unfoldment of Principle is that it divided, by the primal 
method of propagation called fissoin, into the male and 
female Principle. It is generally taught that Primordia 
Principle, which makes one with the Absolute, is incom¬ 
prehensible, but this work presents a method of think¬ 
ing by which the nature of Principle is quite fully re¬ 
vealed. It is, we may say in advance, in an Individual 
Form of great glory and power, and possesses not only 
infinite Wisdom and Intelligence, but all Love and Truth. 
The two proceeding Principles are in the reality of per¬ 
sonal forms of life. These facts will become plainer to 
thought vision as we proceed. The Two Principles may 
properly be called by many names, to correspond with 
their various functions. The highest are Power and Love. 

In this skeleton of the plan of life, which is revealed 
by the study of Principle, none of the important facts 
sketched are developed. Hence, they will not be very 
w r ell understood until more fully elaborated on subse¬ 
quent pages. It has been considered necessary to sketch 
this plan, very briefly, as data upon which to construct 
more amplified explanations 'which are to follow. 

It may be said that, the second step in the unfoldment 
of Principle is by the embrace of the Two Principles, 
by 'which a form* of life in Truth is propagated. It is 
to be remembered, here, that the forms of life thus spoken 
of are units of life— thoughts— and as in perception, of 
infinitely small size. Spiritual life came forth from Prin¬ 
ciple by units, each unit in individual or personal form, 
and possessed of conscious intelligence. 

It is here said that the first complete unit form of 
life was born of the embrace of Power and Love, and is 
in the form, or tone, of Truth. In that propagation Prin- 



38 


THE NEW IDEA. 


eiple transmitted its own life—its own nature— to its 
child. It is the same with Power and Love. Hence the 
primal units of life are in a metamorphosis of Principle, 
and its children of Power, Love and Truth. Those units 
are in Truth. They are the primal sparks of life which 
continuously pour forth from Principle to swell the tide 
of primal life. Principle is everywhere; hence life units 
are bom everywhere and continuously. 

Thus we have the birth of the primal microcosm— 
the unvestured unit form of life—the single thought—the, 
so-called spiritual ultimate atom. Each of such units is 
of real substance in a form-tone peculiar to itself, and in 
the actuality of a thought, as yet without vesture, or 
vestures, and in the supreme fact of a substare, or unit of 
very life, as will be more fully explained. Those primal 
units are of the highest spiritual substance, and each in 
a rate of oscillation peculiar to the expression of its polar 
energy, in its distinctive form. Prom that substare, or 
unit form of very life, the spiritual vestures wherewith 
it is clothed, come forth in tones, by the oscillations of 
the Two Principles within, in the fact of propagation. 

The fact of propagation by tones into and through 
vestures, by which the world’s enjoy light, and by which 
environment is established, in all its wonderful functions, 
will, later in these studies, engage our attention. Three 
vestures are thus propagated by the spiritual substares, 
which envelop them, respectively, and by that process of 
propagation the spiritual triad heavens came forth, in 
three great zones of substance, by units, which are called, 
in sacred scripture, (1) spiritual, (2) divine, and (3) 
angelic. All three are spiritual, but the highest is the 
spiritual proper. In the process of forming the three 
spiritual heavens named, by the propagation of vestures, 
by tones, the units fellowship, in degrees of organism, 
until worlds and heavens were established peculiar to the 
spiritual hemisphere of our universe. It will be noted 
that not only the spiritual zones of life substance were 
propagated, but the three Celestial zones also, before cel¬ 
lular forms of life were born. 

In this connection the student is reminded that life 
must not be thought of as a mighty wave, or whole, but 
as constituted by invisible unit forms. Primarily, those 
unit forms are spiritual, each, as already stated, with a 
substare of Principle, because Principle transmutes its 
own substance—its own nature—to each unit form that it 
propagates. Moreover, each such form, as stated, is in 
the fact of individual life possessing conscious intelli¬ 
gence. Thus all life is by its units prior to organization 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


39 


in mass-tone bodies, and subsequent thereto as well, no 
matter what metamorphosis the units may assume in 
mass. 

That is an all important fact. When any organism of 
those units is brought to psychological vision, together 
with their respective tones, or rates of oscillation, as also 
the various types of organization into which they fellow¬ 
ship in mass-form life building, it is seen that Principle 
performs its greatest work of creation in the propaga¬ 
tion of the units. That accomplished all else is compara¬ 
tively an easy task. The primal life units whether spir¬ 
itual, or celestial are in individual forms, and in the 
actuality of thoughts. There is nothing save thoughts, 
and thought organizations in our universe. 

The third great advance in the plan of life as un¬ 
folded from Principle is the birth of the primal unit form- 
tone of celestial life. It is pointed out in this place that 
our universe, speaking from the standpoint of the great 
zones of ether, or the great divisions of life substance, is 
divided into upper and lower, or inner and outer hemis¬ 
pheres. The upper is composed of three great zones of 
spiritual ether, called spiritual, divine and angelic, with 
their corresponding tone-colors of violet, blue and green, 
on a descending scale. The lower is composed of three 
great zones of celestial ether, called the celestial proper, 
the mental and the physical, with their corresponding 
tone-colors of yellow, orange and red, also on a descend¬ 
ing scale. 

The birth of the primal units of celestial life is an¬ 
other wonder-work of Principle. It is noticed that the 
scale of harmonics is divided between E and P into prac¬ 
tically two scales. There is neither sharp nor flat to con¬ 
nect the tones of E and F, as are known to exist to estab¬ 
lish tone connection between all others. It is precisely 
the same between the zones of ether. The zones of the 
spiritual group flow into each other, as also do those of 
the celestial triad, but the two sets of life substance are 
separated. There is, apparently, no bridge between the 
spiritual and the celestial worlds and heavens. The pri¬ 
mal unit of celestial life is not resolved to the spiritual 
substare with a set of celestial vestures.. On the contrary, 
it is a new birth of life—the propagation of another kind 
of life. The only fact about it which is in common with 
its higher neighbor of the spiritual spheres is that the soul 
of its substare embraces Principle, but it is in a New Prin¬ 
ciple— the third or the fourth Principle. We have seen 
how Primordial Principle divided, by propagation, into 
the male and female Principles, and how a spiritual form 




40 


THE NEW IDEA. 


of life in Truth was propagated, containing both of 
those Principles in the perfect embrace of individual dual¬ 
ity. We shall later come to see that in the birth of the 
primal celestial units of life, the foundations of an im¬ 
mortal celestial body were securely laid, and that in that 
achievement, Primordial Principle divided its form once 
more, establishing the spiritual and the celestial Prin¬ 
ciples which bear the same relations to each other that the 
original Two Principles do, except with a wider sweep of 
oscillation. 

It is noted that intelligence is peculiar to the spiritual 
Principle, while wisdom is native to the celestial Prin¬ 
ciple. Intelligence was born of the spiritual Principle; 
wisdom of the celestial Principle. Hence it is by the oscil¬ 
lations of those two principles—-by the reciprocal counter¬ 
acting alternations of intelligence and wisdom, accord¬ 
ing to their respective functions, that what we are to 
call the Risen Life is propagated in a metamorphosis un¬ 
known to visible spheres. 

By the birth of the celestial units Principle went 
forth in a work of propagation by which we have, first, 
spiritual Power, Love and Truth; and second, celestial 
Power, Love and Truth, which function separately and 
jointly. That is the same as saying that the substare of 
Principle with its three celestial vestures can function 
celestially, by itself, as also with the three spiritual ves¬ 
tures, spiritually, by itself; or, with all six vestures it can 
function both spiritually and celestially at the same time. 
That will be further explained 

Thus we may say that the birth of celestial life works 
a new division of Principle, or the unfoldment of a new 
Principle. As the body is to the soul in the old termin¬ 
ology, so is the celestial to the spiritual in the new. The 
propagation of the celestial body of light—the light of 
the world—elaborated later, will, I trust, prove very sat¬ 
isfying. 

In describing the organism of a life unit—a thought 
—as will be done later, we say, speaking from the view 
point of physical subvestures, that it is primarily atomic. 
Then by organization those units become molecular; then 
by further organization, they become corpuscular; then 
crystaline, and finally, cellular. Those terms apply to 
physics, but the organism is about the same when the 
physical subvestures are thrown oft'. Forms of life visible 
to the human eye, in mass-tone are composed of units, 
each wearing six etheric tone vestures, and one, two, or 
three physical subvestures. The latter are, in physics, 
called gaseous, liquids and solids. 


NEW' TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


41 


Take the human body—the visible body—for exam¬ 
ple. It is called physical, but that is partly in error. It is 
composed of units, and organisms of units which wear 
physical subvesture clothing, and is therefore a physical 
sub vesture body. When that husk is, thrown off, the 
human life organization will stand forth in a now invis¬ 
ible body composed of life units, the outer vestures of 
which are without physical subvestures, and composed of 
physical magnetic ether. In that case the outer envelope 
of the units is purely physical. In visible bodies—bodies 
now visible—the outmost vestures are below that stand¬ 
ard at least one half tone. 

A vesture—any vesture—is that fact of environment 
propagated by the tones of the substare of the unit. Tone 
vestures are in the actuality of propagation. They are the 
instrumentalities by which a discrete degree of life is 
propagated to higher powers, or to another metamor¬ 
phosis of higher quality. A unit, or organism of life is 
in the fact of a discrete degree of life. Its tones are the 
continuous degrees by which the discrete degree is raised 
to higher powers in propagation. It is by its tones, which 
are in the fact of the oscillations of Principle, that life, 
as to all its forms is rising, and as a whole, that process 
is resolved to the fact wherein, by the externalization, or 
continuous degrees by which the discrete degree is raised 
through humanity to the Living and True God. Those 
processes will be more fully elaborated on subsequent 
pages. It is added here only that the zones of vesture sub¬ 
stance composing the six, (or three dual) systems of 
worlds and heavens named are constituted by individual 
unit forms of life, or thoughts, each unit of which is an 
epitome of the whole. 

The fourth great advance in the unfoldment of Prin¬ 
ciple in the plan of life is achieved by the embrace of the 
spiritual and celestial Principles by which cellular 
units, or plant and animal unit forms of life are propa¬ 
gated. Those units rise by propagatary organization, or 
fellowship, in fixed and intermediate types, or forms, until 
man is reached, and thenceforward arid upward, as we 
shall see to higher, and to us, invisible forms, as millions 
already have done. 

Going behind cellular life, it may properly be observed 
here that the period of the vesture extension of atomic, 
molecular, and corpusclar units is very long, reaching 
from the birth of life to the birth of the animal aud plant 
kingdoms, whereas the dawn of the latter is as of yester¬ 
day! In the processes of world building, in which we 
have to do with the former, the generations of form or- 


42 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ganisin, speaking wholly from the standpoint of our own 
physical subvesture spheres, ere as follows: First, the 
atom, or single thought, with ten degrees or tones, as 
elsewhere more fully explained; second, the primal mole¬ 
cule, with thirty tones; third, the primal corpuscle, with 
ninety tones; and, fourth, the cell with three hundred and 
sixty different classes of degrees of life. The units of the 
latter metamorphosis are of the classes of variety. The 
numbers greatly exceed those figures. 

These observations, in the absence of any further de¬ 
velopment at present, will be sufficient to indicate the rise 
and expansion of life organism. It is also expedient t* 
point out here, leaving further explanations for subse¬ 
quent pages, that the differences in tones and powers of 
life units wearing physical subvestures, rise from the dif¬ 
ferences of the proportions which the higher life sub¬ 
stances within bear to each other. The number of tones 
in the substare of any life unit is three, and they are the 
real fundamentals, to wit, C, E, and G. From those all the 
other tones and fractional tones of the life scale of har¬ 
monics proceed. All physical, or mechanical tones are 
but expressions of the real, and are more or less imper¬ 
fect. 

It is scarcely necessary to point out to the advanced 
thinker that our modern science of physics deals only with 
the tip end of creation—only with the physical subves- 
tures which are commonly called matter, and although 
recognized in the Nineteenth century as of molecular con¬ 
stitution, “matter” is still held in high scientific quarters 
as dead, or inorganic. The fact is that an atomic organi¬ 
zation, such as a molecule, contains, within its tone ves¬ 
ture folds, including the substare, and aside from the out¬ 
most subvestures, ten different classes and qualities of 
life, and at least thirty different classes of tones. It is es¬ 
sentially organic and so are each of the atoms or single 
thoughts of which it is composed. Not anything is inor¬ 
ganic. Nlot anything is dead. All the processes of chem¬ 
istry are in the facts of propagation wrought by the polar 
energy of Principle. 

Thus life was born and creation was started by the 
propagation of thoughts from Principle. With each oscil¬ 
lation of the poles of Principle a new thought is born. 
Thus creation was begun and thus it continues. The 
whole process is one of thinking. By the oscillations of 
the poles of Principle the primal thoughts are propagated 
each in a different metamorphosis of substance from the 
eternal fountain, or each in a form-tone peculiar to its 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


43 


own individuality, and therefore differing from all the 
others. 

From those primal thoughts man has been propa¬ 
gated not only to his present visible, but to a much higher 
invisible state. It is not the idea, however, that each 
one of those primal thoughts unfolded into a man That 
would be error. The fact is that man, as we now see him 
—visible man—contains within his life organization an 
innumerable number of thoughts, each one robed in tone- 
vestures according to its quality, or powers, and that such 
thoughts are not only classified by the tone -vestures 
which they have propagated, and which they wear, but 
also by degrees of fellowship organization which mark 
their degrees of evolution, or life unfoldment. 

All thoughts are born from the oscillations of the 
poles of Principle, whether in the heart of man, as is now 
going on by the continuous thinking of humans, or from 
the secret chamber of propagation of Primordial Prin¬ 
ciple. Principle is the same in the least as in the great¬ 
est things. Thoughts are primary and secondary Those 
which come forth everywhere from Principle in unit 
forms of life substance are primary; those which are 
born of the fellowship of those primary thoughts, in their 
several grades of organism are secondary, but there is the 
rise in each generation of thoughts, by unfoldment, in 
perfect correspondence with the rise oi the forms of life. 

I turn aside at the very threshold of these studies to 
dispose of an important subject. There has been much 
discussion by theologians and others on the subjects of 
materialism and idealism. Neither of these terms is very 
well understood, hence discussion, in the past has mysti¬ 
fied rather than explained, true ideas concerning them. 
I have thrown some light on ideals and idealism else¬ 
where. As to what is material and immaterial the ques¬ 
tion is a very simple one. We must first determine what 
substance is. Life is substance to be sure, but there is a 
higher substance than that of life. There is the substance 
of Being—of the Absolute—which is at present incompre¬ 
hensible. That is the highest substance within or with¬ 
out our universe. 

Then, there is the substance of Principle which is 
next subsequent to the Absolute, and lower in quality, but 
proceeding from the Prior. Next, in order, there is the 
substance of very life, which is Power, Love and Truth in 
such organic combination as to constitute the primal unit 
forms of life, which unit forms are coextensive in variety 
with the infinite resources of Principle. That unit form of 


44 


THE NEW IDEA. 


very life—primal life—exists as the substare of each ves¬ 
tured unit form of life of infinite variety in our universe. 

We already have three classes of substance, to wit: 
(1) that of Being; (2) that of Principle, and, (3) that of 
very life. There can be no question of the realness of the 
substances named. The only difficulty we meet with in 
connection with this subject is as to just where to draw a 
line, intelligently, so as to have all of real substance on 
one side, and all of so-called materiality, or matter, on the 
other. Shall we draw it so as to have Being, Principle 
and Very Life, or substare life on one side, and all ves¬ 
ture life on the other? That division would be in error 
because the vestures are the tone radiations springing 
from the polar energy of the substare, and that which is 
propagated from substance must be substance also, al¬ 
though of different powers. 

A materialist is one who denies the existence of spir¬ 
itual substances, and holds that spiritual phenomena, so 
called, are the result of some peculiar organization of mat¬ 
ter; one who holds to the real existence of matter. It is 
quite pleasing to contemplate how clearly and completely 
this new system of Truth interpretation settles these mat¬ 
ters. In sense perception the lowest vestures—the physi¬ 
cal subvestures, such as gases, liquids and solids—appear 
to be, when compared with higher invisible substances, of 
the greatest density; while, by the same rule, the higher 
one ascends on the scale of the ethers the more rare they 
appear to be. It is in this connection that the illusions of 
percept take us by storm. The facts are that the higher 
the substance the more dense it is, while the lower the ves¬ 
ture the more extended it is. It may appear contradic¬ 
tory to say that a solid has less density than a liquid, and 
a liquid less than a gas, and a gas many, many times less 
real density than the lowest ether, but such is the truth. 
However, man cannot successfully deny the plain dictates 
of his perceptions, no matter what the degree of their 
illusions, except in the measure of the unfoldment of those 
potentialities. Such unfoldment. nevertheless, is greatly 
hastened by this particular knowledge. 

The substance of the extended and visible worlds and 
heavens, with all physical phenomena, is generally com¬ 
prehended under ideas of materiality, or matter. To our 
perceptions all visible or miscroseopic vesture substance 
is material, and we do not comprehend the higher sub¬ 
stance because it is hidden in a two fold sense: first, it is 
too fine in quality to be apprehended in human vision, 
and, secondly, it is concealed within the vestures of the 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


45 


units, the finer within the coarser, until the substare of 
spirit, or very life is reached. 

By the tone, or vesture constitution of the unit forms 
of substance, only the physical subvestures of which can 
be brought to vision, it is seen that what we regard as mat¬ 
ter, or materiality, is but a small fraction of each unit, 
and that it could have no existence apart from the inner 
vestures, and the substare of such units. All life exists, 
primarily, by units, and those units in these lower physi¬ 
cal spheres wear, over the inmost substare of very life, six 
etheric vestures, and one, two, or three physical subves- 
tures. 

Prom a study of the unit forms of life, which are all 
in the reality of thoughts, one will soon extend vision so 
as to have no place for anything but the real, except po¬ 
tentialities which unfold into the real. There is really 
nothing in so called materialism save a mighty group of 
functional potentialities properly called degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence, which are as yet, unfolding in sense 
perception. 

Materialism, so called, can have no existence, except 
in the illusive vision of him or her, who regards only the 
visible as life, and who disregards—denies—the more real 
and higher invisible life substance. 

We have matter in perception. There is none else¬ 
where. It is in the illusions of our perceptions of facts 
and not in the facts themselves that error exists. We 
have no real knowledge of facts, as yet. We enjoy only 
perceptions of them. We rise to higher conceptions of 
facts, through unfolding degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, by processes of thinking 1 . All the materialism 
there is in our universe is in human perceptions. They 
are rising continuously to higher visions—making prog¬ 
ress toward the real. 



EXERCISE II. 


PLAN OF LIFE (Continued). 

Forms, Tones, tone-colors, mass-tones and mass-tone colors 
—Unit forms of life are unit Thoughts—Life Scale of 
Harmonics and its lessons—Degrees of life—Primal 
organisms—Rising from the visible to the invisible— 
The Lord of Brotherhood—Man and Woman to re¬ 
unite into dual individuality—The six heavens of 
ether resolved to three dual heavens—Relativity and 
interdependence—The faculty of desire—Prayer. 


THE PLAN of life as unfolded from Principle in¬ 
volves substance, form, tone, mass-tone, tone-colors, and 
mass-tone colors. There is a certain fixed form for each 
unit of life, which is determined by Principle, and that 
form, or quality is inherent in the relative proportion of 
the classes of substance which constitute the interiors of 
the life unit, and also from degrees of experience, espe¬ 
cially that obtained in the prison houses of compression 
of physical subvestures. 

The unit forms of life—thoughts—which are infinite 
in numbers and variety are each in the fact of a discrete 
degree of life, and each such discrete degree is, by its in¬ 
herent Principle, in a certain rate of oscillation, or polar¬ 
ity vibration, which is its tone, and tone-color. The tone 
and the color are practically one fact, divided only in per¬ 
ception. The tone is that fact by which the units in mass 
bodies sing to us, and the color, or sheen is that emana¬ 
tion, or radiation propagated by the tone, by which they 
are revealed in mass to human vision. But of course they 
have transcendently higher functions than those named, as 
we shall see. 

It is expedient to state here, without elaboration, 
what discrete and continuous degrees of life are. A dis¬ 
crete degree is a unit of life. It is separated from every¬ 
thing else in the universe by a covering, or envelope, or 
membrane, which is propagated by its oscillations, or 
tones. Those propagating tones, or oscillations are the 
continuous degrees, sometimes called heterogeneous de¬ 
grees. It was Swedenborg who called these degrees of 
life homogeneous, and heterogeneous, but he did not ex¬ 
plain their full functions as will be done later in this 
volume. He also called them discrete and continuous. It 
is easily seen that the sparks of life which come forth- 

( 46 ) 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


47 


from Principle are each discreted from everything else, 
and are therefore in exclusive, small packages, so to 
speak, separated from all else. In that way the life unit is 
in the reality of the I am. It communicates with the 
world of life around it only by its tone radiations, by 
propagating a fine environment, or sheen, in the fact of a 
tone-color. Those radiations behind which are the propa¬ 
gating oscillations of its substare are its continuous de¬ 
grees, which work out the transformation of the unit 
from which they emanate to a higher metamorphosis. The 
discrete degree is homogeneous, because at rest, and in a 
degree of organic harmony, as will be hereafter explained. 
The continuous degrees, or radiations, are heterogeneous 
because they are in the strife of contending variety, the 
functions of which are the evolution of a higher degree 
of harmony for the discrete degree. 

The unit forms of life, and those which combine in 
the more primal stages of organism are each in the actual¬ 
ity of a single thought, or thought organism, such as an 
idea, and each in the fact of individuality, possessing 
functional wisdom and intelligence. That will appear 
more clearly later. It is self evident that a thought could 
not exist except in some degree of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence. 

The tones of the infinite number of thoughts com¬ 
posing our world and physical heavens, each one wear¬ 
ing the full compliment of etheric vestures, and one or 
more of the three physical subvestures, unite in mass-tone 
in the life scale of harmonics, and their tone-colors com¬ 
bine in the bands of the planetary spectrum, but, as 
stated these two are one phenomena, divided only by the 
perceptions of hearing and vision. We cannot directly 
hear the mighty song of our planet, produced by the in¬ 
numerable trillions of unit-tones in one transcendent 
mass-tone, except psychologically. Nevertheless, man has 
developed a scale of harmonics, expressive of the real 
tones, in which he practices vocally and mechanically to 
his great joy and gladness. 

Science has all along taught that there are seven 
tones in the scale, and seven distinct color bands in the 
spectrum. That, in an important sense, is in error. There 
are only six tones, properly speaking, in the harmonic 
scale, and only six colors in the spectrum. The seventh, 
in the first case is the mass-tone, and in the second, the 
mass-color. The tone of A is the mass-tone, or the tone 
into which all the others are fluxing, while the purple is 
the mass-color, combining all the other colors, tints and 
hues. 


48 


THE NEW IDEA. 




As already stated, the tones are the continuous de¬ 
grees of life by which discrete degrees of life are propa¬ 
gated to other forms of higher powers. The tones are in 
the fact of polarity oscillations, and, therefore, the instru¬ 
mentalities of propagation. The last statement should be 
held in steady vision, because its full understanding will 
solve for us the secret of the propagation of the as yet in¬ 
visible new heaven and new earth, as well as invisible 
man, or the real man, who is rising from the visible human 
form of life. 

The fifth great advance in the unfoldment of the 
plan of life would itself require many volumes to fully 
elaborate. It need be but briefly stated here, since it will 
be m6re fully explained elsewhere, between these covers. 
It is in that method of propagation wrought by the spir¬ 
itual and celestial Principles, acting in conjunction, by 
which visible man is gradually regenerated—-born again— 
by continuous processes of resurrection, into an invisible 
form of life, psychological in metamorphosis, and com¬ 
monly called Consciousness. When forms of life, higher 
than visible man, are here spoken of, it must be under¬ 
stood that such forms are invisible only to man in his 
present state. In his future rise they will become visible. 

The, as yet, invisible form of man is in due course of 
unfoldment released from the subvesture body, and there¬ 
upon rises in an etheric body, a little later to join the 
ranks of now Invisible Universal Brotherhood, which is in 
a transcendent bodily mass-tone form of community life, 
called by sacred Scripture symbolism, The Lord. That 
will be more fully and interestingly elaborated. 

The plan of life, as it is revealed by Principle unfolds 
to no such fact as death for either the body, or the psycho¬ 
logical organization, which is already partly risen, or for 
any other thing. There is no such fact as death in our 
universe, except in a by-gone perception. It reveals, how¬ 
ever, that when the invisible life organization, conven¬ 
iently called consciousness, is released in that event miss- 
called death, the units of the visible one from which it is 
delivered by an expulsive effort, with its attendant birth- 
pains, part sociological company, and live and work on 
in their separate individual capacities, until they re¬ 
engage in similar work of life form building. 

That method of thinking by which the visible life or¬ 
ganization of man is regenerated and raised to the status 
of an invisible constituent of Universal Brotherhood is 
quite fully explained later in this volume. From those 
marvelous processes it will be seen that mankind is propa- 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


49 


gating itself into the glories of a heavenly world brighter 
and fairer and grander than this one. 

The plan of life involves an infinite system, or series 
of methods of propagation, by thinking, so that the unit, 
as well as the larger organized forms of life, are some¬ 
times in dual existence, and sometimes in divided male 
and female forms. The latter prevails exclusively in phy¬ 
sical subvesture spheres. But those divided forms, at the 
summit of which are men and women, will reunite into 
dual individuality at the threshold of the full tone of the 
physical zone. 

It is seen in the plan of life that men and women, in 
their present state, wear physical subvesture group bodies 
—bodies of the three subvestures of the zone of physical 
ether, which, from the standpoint of physics, are com¬ 
posed of about one-third gases, one-third liquids, and one- 
third solids. When men and women rise to the full tone 
of the physical zone, they will become individually dual 
and wear magnetic ether dual bodies, and exist in the first 
real heaven of Brotherhood. The man and the woman 
will then enter upon real wedlock, and become one un¬ 
divided form of life. 

The Universal Brotherhood of risen life exists, as the 
mass-tone life of mankind in all the heavens of substance 
simultaneously, and men and women, although now vis¬ 
ible in physical subvesture spheres as to their bodies al¬ 
ready dwell in the lower spheres of the first heaven of 
that risen mass-tone life by their invisible psychological 
life organizations. Later, when released from subvesture 
bodies, that which is now properly recognized as the 
psychological organization, invisible to man, will become 
the basic organism of a still higher and more expanded 
consciousness. That, of course, is propagated from the 
lower risen organic form 

It should be observed in this connection that while 
there are six great zones or heavens of ether in our uni¬ 
verse, the unfoldment of man rises through them in pairs, 
so that the ascent of three works out the rise through 
them all. The full-tone physical and the angelic zones are 
one zone, that is to say, the angelic is the spiritual or sub¬ 
jective side of the physical, while the physical is the lower 
celestial, or objective side of the angelic. The mental 
zone of ether is in like manner paired with the divine 
great divisiofl of substance. The latter is spiritually sub¬ 
jective to the former; and the mental is celestially objec¬ 
tive to the divine. Lastly, the celestial zone of ether, 
proper, is paired with the spiritual zone, proper, and is 
objective to it. That is the same as saying that man is a 


50 


THE NEW IDEA. 


man-angel, by his duality; that a mental is a mental- 
divine by its duality; and that a celestial is a celestial- 
spiritual by its duality. Thus the third heaven of each 
hemisphere of our universe is the highest heaven, except 
that new heaven which is propagated, by man, especially 
for his final abode. Of that more will be said later. 

When it is said that the risen mass-tone life of man¬ 
kind dwells in all of the heavens of our universe simul¬ 
taneously, it is so said with reference to the oneness of 
all life, in its final goal, and to the fact that the mighty 
rising flood of the forms of life are in an unbroken column 
through all the heavens from the lowest spheres to the 
highest. 

The rise of life from physical subvesture spheres to 
the full physical tone of ether substance is a mighty ad¬ 
vance, implicating the second birth, and the first fluid 
ether body; that from the physical to the mental full tone 
is transcendently greater; and that from the mental to the 
celestial full tone carries the life organization to the bor¬ 
der of the Infinite and the Absolute. Thus man, in his 
unfolding rise ,will wear and shed four bodies, including 
the present visible one, and finally pass into the new 
heaven in a body of shining light, where man “no more 
shall need the sun and stars for light.” Man will always 
reside, potentially, in that new heaven, until he goes to 
dwell there bodily, by his higher and relatively invisible 
psychological organization, no matter in which of the 
spiritual-celestial heavens he may, until then, exist bodily 
—exist in a body of the substance of the zone in which 
he may dwell. 

In the plan of life as unfolded from Principle, the 
methods of propagation— thinking— produce transcendent 
results. The rise of the forms of life is not accomplished 
by successive vesture disrobing of the units, but rather 
that new-born units are propagated by their embrace. 
Such is the marvellous function of the fellowship of the 
life units of infinite variety. 

In a fuller explanation of the foregoing paragraph 
which is presented on later pages, the student will come 
to see the mighty functions of the relativity and interde¬ 
pendence of variety, by proportion, and how, by the ap¬ 
plication of Principle to process, which is the only science 
there is or can be in life, men and women are resolved, 
by thinking in scientific methods, to their present condi¬ 
tions; and, also, how it is that they are continuously ris¬ 
ing, or unfolding into that but partly understood fact 
called Consciousness, which is the invisible life organiza¬ 
tion already within and permeating them, respectively, 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


51 


and through which they have access to the life substance 
of invisible worlds of risen life. 

The infinite variety of unit and organized thoughts 
propagated by Principle, unite in the beautiful fellowship 
of life building, by propagating from the eternal fountain 
or source of life, new unit thoughts—unit forms of life— 
which associate by their own conscious wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence, to build the invisible psychological organization 
which we properly call consciousness. Herein are the 
secrets of the resurrection and immortality. 

It may be said here that unit forms of life find their 
exact places and perform their respective functions in 
the great work of building the mass bodies of life, 
whether they be men or worlds, not by any law, or out¬ 
side controlling force, but by their own conscious wisdom 
and intelligence. Those single thoughts in fellowship, ex¬ 
ercise even volition. The will abides and rules even in 
the primal units, potentially, as in the larger organiza¬ 
tions in mass-tone. Therefore, so called involuntary or 
automatic thinking is resolved to conscious thinking, or 
thought fellowship in wisdom and intelligence, always, 
at least in so far as the units are concerned. There is 
really nothing automatic in creation, except wherein wis¬ 
dom and intelligence are themselves automatic. 

It may, with but little effort, be seen that the con¬ 
sciousness of the unit is resolved to the mass-tone con¬ 
sciousness of the larger organization. Thus the individu¬ 
ality of each form of life, unit, or in any degree of organ¬ 
ism is preserved from its birth onward and evermore. 

One great factor in the plan of life as it unfolds from 
Principle has given mankind a world of trouble, and led 
to all sorts of more or less foolish theological speculation. 
I refer to error and evil. Eiror and evil; pain and disease; 
accident and calamity; sickness and so-called death; 
whence do they come, and to what end? These life phe¬ 
nomena are all resolved to the study of environment—to 
an understanding of the potential forces which abound 
in the world of suggestion to push mankind upward. Error 
and evil combine into the pushing force of life. We will 
be pushed up until we reach the drawing, pulling force of 
Love. We have only to move forward and upward to leave 
error and evil behind and below. 

Love is the pulling force of our universe. We have 
only to appropriate its power through unfolding degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, and thus appropriating, that 
pulling, elevating force increases. At the last analysis 
error, evil, pain, sickness, disease, and death are all in the 
potential illusions of sense perception. As man unfolds 


THE NEW IDEA. 


by thinking in methods of Principle, into degrees of the 
real, those annoying phantoms are left behind. They are 
unreal except in their results. They have no real exis¬ 
tence except in perception and result. These phenomena 
will be further explained in this work. 

The key to life unfoldment is in a knowledge of 
Principle. The unutterable riches of Principle come forth 
and unfold in any human life organization which dili¬ 
gently applies itself, in iove and affection, to thinking 
in volition, in desire, in high ideals of choice, in a pure mo¬ 
tive, founded on love for the neighbor and controlled 
by the subjective consciousness. The subjective will is 
the expression, in silence or otherwise, of psychological 
consciousness. That is said to distinguish the higher from 
the sentient will, which is the mass-tone expression of 
sentient functions. 

The function of desire, peculiar only to physical sub¬ 
vesture spheres, is a mighty factor in life unfoldment—in 
the evolution of life. In these spheres of life, evolution 
or unfoldment is by desire, as we shall see. Desire rose 
from the separation of the Two Principles, when separate 
male and female forms of life were propagated, and it 
will continue as a basic faculty, until those Two Prin¬ 
ciples reunite, when it will be resolved to love. However, 
desire as a foundation faculty reaches out to all things. 
Its highest exercise is in what is commonly called prayer. 
Prayer is in the plan of life, and if one could know the 
secretly and silently expressed desires of a human heart, 
which rise to higher and invisible powers, that one would 
be able to correctly measure the degree of knowledge of 
that life. One betrays his knowledge of higher things by 
his prayers, if they arc heard, more completely than in 
any other way. Following is a prayer of desire, charac¬ 
teristic of the expressions of an advanced Christian 
Thinker: 


Dear Master of Life, out’ rising Lord 
and rightful King, thy name is Love. Thou 
are the Infinite fountain of risen life. Thou 
art in us, and we in Thee. Dwell thou in our 
hearts and unfold our lives through succes¬ 
sive degrees of wisdom and intelligence, un¬ 
til, in Truth, we shall behold Thy face. Then 
in that dear face we shall see our own. 
Teach us that Thou art all in all, and that 
possessing Thee, desiring naught beside, we 
have all things of good 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


53 


There is in the plan of life a transcendent element 
of Brotherhood—Universal Brotherhood—by which all 
the forms of life of infinite variety are fluxing together 
into the universal all harmonious life, which, from our 
lower potential spheres is not yet fully comprehensible. 
In this feature of the great plan, it is revealed that the 
only work one can do for self is in efforts for others. If 
we are advanced and desire to further advance we will 
reach that goal more gloriously by assisting those who 
appear to be weaker. We are not all in our selves, re¬ 
spectively, but we have property rights and interests 
which reside in the neighbor. There is not a form of life 
in the universe, high or low, from whose abundance we 
must not draw. In short, it is in the plan of life that we 
shall, sociologically, live upon each other, and, thus liv¬ 
ing, unfold together in the glory of relativity and inter¬ 
dependence, into the realtities of the eternal now. 

Thus we see in the unfoldment of Principle an in¬ 
finite life bond, holding ail forms into one mighty mass- 
tone life of Harmony, »in which the whole infinite variety 
of individualities dwell, each as one distinctly, and the 
whole as an Individual Universe, which in the finished 
work of creation is in the reality of Man, and that man 
God. 

In this brief outline of the plan of life, not even, all 
of its great features are presented. It is sufficient, how¬ 
ever, to work from, in greater detail, until we shall be 
able to reconstruct it, later, on these pages, employing 
terminology which, at this time, might not be generally 
understood. 


EXERCISE III. 


GOD UNFOLDING IN MAN. 

Spiritual and Celestial Duality—The Lord-man and the 
Angel-man—The risen life—Everything is alive—Not 
anything is dead—The death-birth—Creative power 
of Thinking—Man’s Knowledge not confined to that 
which he learns from man—The resurrection a con¬ 
tinuous process of thinking—Scientific foundations 
of the everlasting continuity of the forms of life from 
one standpoint. 


IT IS possible that the two foregoing thinking exer¬ 
cises have quite heavily taxed the beginner in this some¬ 
what new system. It may be observed, however, that as 
soon as the student brings to vision the drift of these 
teachings their study will not cause mental weariness. 
On the contrary, they will supply the bread of life to 
the psychological faculties, and promote their growth and 
development. It may be well, however, before entering 
upon the study of Principle, proper, as we shall do in the 
next following exercise, to present a line of thinking, par¬ 
tially introductory of the subjects that are to be con¬ 
sidered later, by a method somewhat lighter, as to pro¬ 
cesses of thinking. That may prepare us, in some mea¬ 
sure, for the somewhat difficult work we have to do in 
the next succeeding exercise. 

The student must realize as soon as possible that 
thinking is working. It is not labor, but work—work 
which unfolds the life organization by the use of its fac¬ 
ulty organism. It will require several readings and con¬ 
siderable study of the two foregoing exercises, as well as 
a close application to all that follows, to work out, by 
thinking, an appropriation of their real significance. What 
is meant here by the appropriation of knowledge is in be¬ 
coming the things one desires to know. Unless a fact of 
life becomes a part of one’s life organization, by sub¬ 
stance, that one cannot be said to possess a knowledge 
of it. It may reach the understanding, in part, but does 
not in that way, become a part of the life, by substance, 
to expand its variety. It must be realized that the items 
of knowledge are in the reality of substance, and, in the 
measure of their appropriation in a food sense, there is 
unfoldment, this great truth will become plainer to the 
student’s vision. As is more fully explained later, there 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. *5 

is a difference between learning and knowledge. Learn¬ 
ing, which is a necessary accomplishment for a man or 
a woman, is acquired. Knowledge comes by unfold- 
ment. It is appropriated by thinking to unfoldment. 

We all know that there is a spiritual side to one’s 
life. The other side is called sentient. Thus humans 
are dual. We know more of our sentient side, Than of 
the spiritual. Perception by our senses is in the every¬ 
day affairs of visible life. Spiritual things are invisible, 
and therefore hidden. How is that? It is in this way: 
The duality of man resolves him or her to an angel-man, 
or an angel-woman. Be holding a man from sense vision, 
we see a man, but beholding a man spiritually—from the 
lowest spiritual plane of life—we see an angel. 

It is true that from a spiritual viewpoint, a man is in 
reality an angel. That spiritual side of his life is, of 
course, not revealed to physical vision. It is invisible. 
It is as much in the fact of personality, functionally, 
and otherwise, and in every way, as the visible sentient 
or celestial, side. The whole matter is resolved to the 
fact of duality. In short, man is double. One side 
—one person of his duality—is visible to himself and 
others ; the other is not. But. we can see the invisible 
side psychologically. That will be more fully explained. 

At this point let us guard against an error. The 
student may say, or bring to thought vision the idea, 
that the invisible psychological organization of man, 
which we call the subjective consciousness, is his 
spiritual, his angelic side. Not at all. That invis¬ 
ible life organization which will one day be released 
from this dual body, is propagated by the joint thinking 
of the angel and the man; that is, by joint subjective 
and objective thinking—by joint spiritual and celestial 
thinking—and is as much the product of the angel side, 
as of the human side of man’s duality. By that joint 
thinking the angel-man is resolved, in the invisible psy¬ 
chological life organization, to the higher duality of the 
divine-mental. That will be the process and the effect 
thereof, when man has reached the full tone of the physi¬ 
cal ether zone, with his next succeeding body. 

It is seen from the above that the duality of man 
continues. The risen man is dual as well as the man 
which, by regeneration, the risen man proceeded from. 
Thinking of the angelic side of man as in personal bodily 
form, do you ask what becomes of that personality and 
that body in the event which we now generally call 
death ? The answer is very simple. The very same hap¬ 
pens to both sides of man 's duality. The units of which 


56 


THE NEW IDEA. 


the visible dual body are composed are themselves dual. 
It is remembered that the unit is an epitome of the whole. 
The old dual form is dissolved, that is, the units part 
company, and the new and higher dual life is secure in 
the risen life organization propagated from the old one. 
It will not always be that way. See chapter forty-seven. 

It is not necessary to develop thinking further on 
that line at present. What has already been said is for 
the purpose of laying a foundation for what is com¬ 
monly called religion. There is a large and very re¬ 
spectable class of people who want to hear nothing about 
religion, nor Christianity, except on Sunday, and then as 
little of it as possible. They forget that the highest 
half of their duality is spiritual, and that it must feed 
on emotional thinking, or famish. To w'rite this volume, 
or to attempt the promulgation of a system of thinking 
for life unfoldment, and ignore one half—the greater 
part, it may be—of man, would be nonsense. Man must 
be trained to think spiritually, in scientific methods, as 
well as celestially, or he will not be able to think to un¬ 
foldment at all. That is self evident. Hence, this, work 
must deal with the spiritual side of man—with religion 
—with Christianity—with the whole life. The fact 
that this explanation, which reaches out pretty close to 
an apology is considered necessary, indicates the sordid, 
sentient ascendency of man in his present state. 

It is true that “our rising Lord and rightful King” 
once dwelt in human flesh, but how few there are who 
understand in what way that is a fact. The Christian dis¬ 
ciple is prone to say that it is exclusively because the 
man Jesus once dwelt in a human body. It is the truth 
not only because of that, but also because every con¬ 
stituent form of immortal life composing the partly com¬ 
prehensible Lord form of life was at one time, or now 
is in a human metamorphosis. 

It is from an understanding of the “Son of Man” 
symbol so strangely shedding its sacred light on the pages 
of the New Testament, that we come into a true vision 
of the human state as a prerequisite to the risen life. It 
requires a long and diligent, but transeendently delight¬ 
ful study—the indifferent might call it tedious—to reveal 
that the visible human life organization is but the mar¬ 
velously developed egg from which, by the unfolding 
power of thinking, the real man—the risen man—the 
Lord-Man—is hatched. 

The so-called death of the egg is the birth of the 
form of life which proceeds, always. The egg does not 








NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


die. It simply changes its metamorphosis—its form of 
life—rising to a higher and more useful form—a more 
beautiful form, with greater powers. 

In the evolution of the forms of life visible to 
humans, there are many such changes—many such death- 
births—but when the egg, no matter what application 
may be held for it, hatches into an invisible sphere— 
invisible to all below it—human science refuses to follow. 
It has circumscribed its field to correspond with the 
boundaries of physical subvestures. All methods of 
thought which penetrate beyond human physical vision, 
or the functions of sound-hearing are relegated to the 
realm of religion, and with that field, science will have 
little, or nothing to do. 

However, it is beginning to dawn on the thought 
of our world that not anything is dead—that everything 
is alive, and that the forms of life in their upward sweep 
always reappear to some grade of vision in a higher and 
grander form, whenever those from which they emerge 
dissolve by that transmutation. 

If one say that the visible body dies that one is 
speaking in the language of a by-gone century. The 
body cannot die. That which happens to any visible 
body at the event mis-called death, as all can now 
plainly see, is the separation of the invisible physically 
subvestured units, each going about the very same kind 
of business in which it was engaged before the almost 
infinite multitude assembled, in mass form, to compose 
such body, and to propagate an invisible body therefrom. 
The units live and work right on as if they had com¬ 
pleted one task and were anxious to be engaged in an¬ 
other. And that is the fact. 

Neither can the invisible body, which is propagated 
from and by the units of the visible one. die. ' It is 
composed of new-born, risen units which have been un¬ 
folded from the parent ones, and which will themselves 
unfold to greater powers, as we shall see. While the 
units of the visible body were in fellowship, working 
out the wonderful problem of relativity and interde¬ 
pendence, ever and anon, oscillating to the measure of 
the unerring poles of Principle, they were not only build¬ 
ing a visible, so-called, physical body, but propagating 
and raising higher an invisible form of life, which is 
the real man. 

Now, we are interested in the transcendent work of 
man-building. To follow the stages of that progress leads 
the student into a delightfully instructive pathway until, 
by unfoldment, a flood of light bursts upon the psycho- 


58 


THE NEW IDEA. 


logical vision, and Consciousness is thrilled with the as¬ 
tonishing truth that man-building is Lord-man building, 
and that the evolution of life is God unfolding in man. 

Would the reader like to enter upon the study 
of such marvellous architecture? The author promises 
nothing except that not so much as a single statement 
in this plain work shall violate any rule, or dictum of 
modern science, or outrage the most highly developed 
Christian Principle. 

I shall regard the reader as a student, if he or she 
agrees to come with me beyond this point. The only 
obligation imposed is that we must think. The task is 
not performed by the mere thinking of the author. Stu¬ 
dents must each think for self, and, if possible, think 
beyond the psychological power of the teacher. 

In this connection, let it be ventured, in advance of 
the scientific proof which shall abundantly follow, that 
man already possesses Infinite Knowledge. All that re¬ 
mains for him to do is to unfold that Knowledge to Con¬ 
sciousness, by thinking. In the elaboration of that 
glorious fact we shall grandly see just what Conscious¬ 
ness is, and that, very probabty, for the first time. 

Teachers in all ages hav r - sought to separate the 
spiritual from the mental, and the mental from the physi¬ 
cal, and of course, the physical from the spiritual, and 
so on. Such matters trouble us no more when we 
have mastered the organism cf a single thought—unit 
form of life—which we shall find a not difficult task. 
The trend of human knowledge points to one fact which 
is Absolute, commonly and reverently called God; to 
facts which are spiritual* to facts which are divine; to 
facts which are angelic; to facts which are celestial; to 
facts which are mental; and, lastly, to facts which are 
physical. 

Thus we have a group of six kinds, or classes of 
life below the Absolute. How shall we separate them? 
We know that each of those facts—kinds of life—pro¬ 
ceed from the Absolute, or Primordial Principle. Then, 
on an ascending scale, life rises from the physical to the 
Absolute, by propagation, through all the Masses of sub¬ 
stance named. 

But there is another kin I of life not named in the 
foregoing. It is not only invisible to humans, as to its 
forms, but it is more than that. It is the Risen Life. 
What is that? Does that kind of life come of the “res¬ 
urrection?” Yes, but not at a 1 * as we have supposed— 
not according to modern theological interpretations of 
sacred symbolism. 







NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. fc» 

We must have clearer, more satisfactory and more 
scientific visions of those things signified by Scripture 
symbols. We get such interpretations, however, in the 
increasing light of the rising centuries. Man is rising 
and his expanding visions are apprehended through un- 
fo’ding degrees of wisdom and intelligence. Pacts stand 
for raoie today than they did in the days of the Chris¬ 
tian Pathers, or the Grecian Philosophers; and there are 
more facts now than there were then. We are not so 
much leaving behind the interpretations of our fathers, 
as we are improving and extending them to a wider 
range of facts and applications. 

The resurrection, as we shall see, is concomitant with 
the evolution of life, and is a part of it—nay, all of it. 
The resurrection is a continuous process, taking place, 
item by item, thought by thought, in the. daily life of 
man, and it is in that way that the invisible risen life 
is wrought; it is in that way, by thinking, which is the 
only creative power in our universe, that the wonderful 
mass-tone Lord life has risen, and will continue to rise 
from these lower and from higher spheies, until, in 
Scripture metaphor, he shall have “put all things under 
his feet.” 

The risen life of man, which in a transcendent fellow¬ 
shipping Brotherhood, resting on the everlasting founda¬ 
tion of the relativity and interdependence of all unit and 
mass forms of life, continues evermore to rise even after 
it has risen from human vision. The assembled mass- 
tone form of all that life, in an unspeakable bodily form, 
is properly called the Lord. 

It may be a more or less burdensome task for the 
thinking processes of man, in his present state, to com¬ 
prehend how it is that persons, such as men and women, 
rising from visible to invisible forms of life, and fellow¬ 
shipping in that exalted brotherhood of Love and Har¬ 
mony, which rests upon the substance of tone relativity 
and interdependence, which finally resolve all the forms 
of life to one glorious mass-form, become one individual, 
without the slightest impairment of the functions of its 
members, respectively, but with an infinite enlargement 
of those powers, co-extensive with the universe, with all 
the characteristics possible to infinite individuality. How¬ 
ever, there is no escape from the faci that such is the 
goal of evolution, and no othe.. can intelligently be de¬ 
sired. 

It helps our thinking at tins threshold of our studies 
to remember that the several grades of unit organism, 
which compose our physical bodies, are each, although 


60 


THE NEW IDEA. 


innumerable, and in surpassing variety, in the fact of 
personal, or individual forms. Each is an epitome of the 
Avhole, in any life organization, whether it be a.plant, an 
animal, or a higher creature. 

When one contemplates the organization of visible 
man, with his associated innumerable unit forms, each of 
which, although compressed by one, two or three physical 
subvestures, is in the fact of individual or personal form, 
and possessed of conscious wisdom and intelligence, each 
with its individual functions differing from all the others, 
that one has the license of science to project a corre¬ 
sponding, but higher organization for invisible forms of 
life, the units of which are without physical subvestures, 
and therefore not apprehended by human vision, even 
when in mass. 

It may, at first, be difficult to understand that the 
larger, as well as the smaller units—the visible as well 
as the invisible life organizations—are woven together 
by the same warp and woof, which are Power and Love,, 
weaving in forms of Truth, but clearer visions of that 
part of the great plan of life, propagated from Principle, 
will attend each step of progress in these studies. All 
the forms of life, whether unit or mass, find the patterns 
of their designs in Principle The whole orbit of crea¬ 
tion is resolved to a triangle, with Unity at the starting 
angle, and Variety at the next, w T ith Harmony at the 
final. Principle dwells in unity and is one distinctly 
in its primordial state. Varhty, which is propagated 
from Unity, by proportion, which, in turn, is parent to 
relativity and interdependence, is infinite in both num¬ 
bers and differences, and when the units of substance of 
that infinite variety are all finally united complete Har¬ 
mony is the result. 

Harmony is the final goal of creation, but its comple¬ 
tion is never reached, because Principle is inexhaustible, 
and must forever continue to increase the numbers and 
differences of variety. Variety is composed of the unit 
forms of substance propagated from Principle, by the 
propagatory oscillations of its poles, and such units are 
forms of life—real thoughts. Hence, creation is by think¬ 
ing, and all things created are composed of thoughts. The 
processes of thinking evolve thought organisms, or life 
organizations; and the numbers of the grades or forms 
of organism, and the differences of their tones are co¬ 
extensive with variety itself. 

As in all propagation. Principle projects its own sub¬ 
stance into each unit form of life. Hence it is not 
carried about by some guiding and controlling law, but 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


61 


lives and moves by its own oscillations, which are in 
conscious wisdom and intelligence. That unit is an 
individual or personal form of life, in a fixed tone or 
quality, peculiar to itself; and, because of its relativity 
and interdependence with all »ther such forms, and with 
mass forms, it holds communication with them, at will, 
and joins them in a fellowship born of such relativity 
and interdependence, in the great work of life organism 
building. That fellowship is properly called thinking. 

We have a glimpse of the everlasting continuity of 
the forms of life, and of the Master mass form, composed 
of the lesser forms, in the fact that Harmony must for¬ 
ever extend, inasmuch as varkty must foiever increase. 
Principle could not cease to propagate thoughts—unit 
forms of life—and while that process continues, Harmony 
building cannot be finally ended. 

It is seen that life must forever expand, and that 
our Rising Lord, in whom we already potentially dwell, 
by our yet detained invisible lives, is as yet in the early 
morning of life. Life must forever, if forever it is to 
continue, feed upon something. There must forever be 
a supply of the bread of life. Hence Principle has form¬ 
ulated a plan of life with an et ernal supply of sustaining 
food. 

Probably the student enquires, at this point, Are we 
to have a religious book in this effort? The answer is. 
Not at all. In the first place, while there are good 
and evil conditions in life, there is no .such division as 
religious and secular, possible. That distinction is made 
in error. It comes of ideas of Truth and error. Man is 
prone to put business over there, and worship over here, 
so to speak, but such separations are in illusion, only. 
It is the door of error which has been opened through 
which man passes from a Sabbath of some kind of wor¬ 
ship to six days of more or less doubtful pursuits. No, 
this is not a religious volume in the ordinary sense of that 
word. Nor is it secular. It is essentially a work of 
Thought Science, and its students will probably very soon 
discover that if they keep themselves abreast with its 
teachings, they will require to do much more thinking 
than feeling. 

It is true that its pages abound with scientific dis¬ 
coveries not recorded in other books, but Avhen they are 
subjected to the light of scientific teachings, generally, 
they will all be found to conform thereto, and to har¬ 
monize with them in every feature wherein science has 
been projected further ahead, or beyond the limits which 
a blind conservatism has prescribed for it. 


62 


THE NEW IDEA. 


Is it true that man can know only that which he 
has learned from some other man? Human thinking is 
a process of creation. It has powers which reach out 
even beyond the whole world of visible and audible sug¬ 
gestion. By it man may unfold his life, through succes¬ 
sive degrees of wisdom and intt liigence, until the horizon 
of his vision is extended, by the solution of mystery after 
mystery and problem after problem; and until, 
adopting methods of thinking in the plan of life, 
as it unfolds from Primordial Principle, he may live in 
perfect health, restful peace, and abounding plenty, and 
become so completely attuned with the facts of the 
universe, that he can intelligently hold communion with 
all forms of life, not only in his own sphere, but with 
those in higher realms. 



EXERCISE IV. 


PRINCIPLE. 

Metaphysics simplified—Principle or cause explained— 
Comprehending facts by u ifoldment, or by becoming 
those facts—How Absolute Eeing is resolved to Abso¬ 
lute Life—Functions of oscillation—A parallel in 
propagation—Smallness in perception is fineness in 
reality—Power, Love and Truth—a unit form of life 
in Truth—Harmony the Goal of Creation. 


AS already stated, the study of Principle is in the 
science of metaphysics, but wo must avoid modern meta¬ 
physics, as much as possible, lert we become so completely 
involved by its obstruce propositions as to lose track of 
the main subject. The story * f the unfoldment of man 
cannot be correctly told, or appropriated, without a 
knowledge of Principle, but that knowledge is not as 
metaphysical as we may have been led to suppose. In 
short, metaphysics is a word not very well understood. 
It is the science of the real ar distinguished from the 
phenomenal—the environment—or vesture existence. It 
is the science of the source of life as distinguished from 
abstract life. There is another word which may as 
well be disposed of in this connection. It is ontology. 
Ontology is that department of science of metaphysics 
which investigates and explains the nature and essential 
properties and interdependence of all creatures as such, 
as the effects of the causes which constitute the source 
of life. 

Standing on these premises, we apparently find our¬ 
selves able to comprehend Principle only from its be¬ 
havior in life; and yet, the principle of life within us 
already partly unfolded, comes to our relief, with the 
simple, self-evident proposition that Principle is Cause, 
and as such must be subsequent to something else. There 
must be a prior for every subsequent, and each subse¬ 
quent must be followed by a final, or effect. If we have 
the subsequent in Principle, by thinking in the proper 
method of that Principle, we shall find little difficulty 
in discovering the prior and the effect. That may be 
metaphysics, but it is delightfully simple. Whatever is 
prior to Principle is the cause of the cause, and whatever 
is subsequent to Principle is the effect. 

If we sav that Primordial Principle is in the reality 

( 63 ) 



64 


THE NEW IDEA. 


of Being, or that the two words, Being and Principle, 
stand for the same fact, then »ve have life imbued with 
Principle as the effect. The question forcing itself to 
attention here is, how by the application of the science 
of metaphysics can we determine whether Being and 
Principle are one and the same fact, and if not, what 
are their differences and relativity. 

It does not at once appear Miat metaphysics can help 
us to solve Being, because at the threshold of that science 
we come to see that its foundation is subsequent to Being 
—to that which is commonly but reverently called God. 
If metaphysics is the first, or primal science, holding 
priority over all other sciences, and embraces all the 
others within its scope, or unfoldment, we see at once 
that it functions at the birth of life, because science— 
any science—is nothing more, nothing less, than the ap¬ 
plication of Principle to process. 

If, therefore, Principle came forth from Being, and 
life proceeded from Principle, we are bound to say that 
the coming and the proceeding are processes wrought in 
the first place by Being—God—and, in the second, by 
Principle. Hence, Being is the prior, Principle is the 
subsequent, and life is the effect. 

It is within the scope of metaphysics, which is in 
the reality of science, because in the application of Prin¬ 
ciple to process, to determine--to demonstrate—that life 
proceeded from Principle—was born of Principle—but 
behind this metaphysics cannot apparently go, because 
the behavior of Principle affords no clue to the substance 
from which it proceeded, or the method by which it was 
propagated, except in this way, which, to the author’s 
thought resources is the climax of metaphysical science, 
to-wit: The effect is the all of cause, and of the cause 
of its cause, which is to say that both dwell together 
in the effect and are it. That idea is quite fully illustrated 
in the propagation of the three primary colors from light, 
and of the three secondary colors from the primaries. 
Swedenborg reasoned in about that method. 

But let us look at the propagation of colors from 
light and see what that process will reveal to us. First, 
as to relativity. Solar light, as we see is parent to the 
primary colors, and in turn, the latter are parent to the 
secondary colors, that is to say, they proceed from each 
other by propagation. While neither of those three are 
fully comprehended as to their exact tones and functions, 
we see that they are in relativity as to quality, or powers. 

Solar light is transcendency higher than color, but 
one color does not appear to be so very much higher than 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


65 


another. We learn from tone analysis that the sec¬ 
ondary colors rise from a chemical imion of primary 
colors, in vibratory propagation, and, that the orange 
color, for example, while it draws its life from both the 
red and the yellow, is discreted from both as to its rate 
and radii of vibration, in such a way that it cannot inter¬ 
mingle its tones with those of its parental tones, except 
by the intermediary sharps and flats. 

We learn from the same source that neither of the 
tone-colors, nor all of them in mass-tone, can mingle their 
tone radii with light vibrations, which are discreted from 
the tone color degrees propagated from them. Hence, 
while it is true that both the light, and the primary 
colors, standing as prior and subsequent to each other, 
and as the cause of the cause, and the cause, respectively, 
dwell together in the secondary tone-color effects, and 
are them in Principle; and are so discreted, the one from 
the other, that Principle and the effects in which it dwells 
are so closely related that to comprehend one is to 
know the other: but that Being (light, as in this case) 
and color are so widely different—separated—that to 
comprehend the latter affords no clue whatever to the 
nature of the prior, or light. 

We turn, therefore, to the effect itself, and ignore 
the cause, or subsequent, to see if in it we may discover 
an image of the prior. In this research we meet only 
with disappointment. We see at once that whatever 
of the prior dwells in the effect resides there in, or 
through. Principle, or the subsequent, and that it—the 
fact of Being—can be comprehended only up to the be¬ 
havior of Principle, or the subsequent, and no further. 
The door leading to the realm behind and above Prin¬ 
ciple is closed, apparently, to aH lesearcli in the science 
of metaphysics, because that science cannot appropriate 
anything higher than PrincipV. 

Because this is the apparently fixed limit to scien¬ 
tific inquiry, most thinkers in all ages have made Principle 
and God, or Being, one fact—one distinctly. That con¬ 
clusion is in error. The author humbly proclaims a 
science transcendently higher than that of metaphysics, 
and although he may not be the discoverer of it. he is 
certainly the first to elaborate it in degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, for the common use of mankind. That 
new and higher metaphysics is simply life unfoldment, 
wrought by thinking according to scientific methods, 
properly understood as the enforcement of Principle in 
process. 

By that new science the student may unfold, in 




^ _ >; * 


66 


THE NEW IDEA. 


vision, through degrees of wisdom and intelligence, until 
he shall see as he is seen, and, beholding the face of God, 
see his own therein, which is the same as saying that 
life unfoldment is the unfoldment of God in man. By 
that science, I say, we may come to see that the cause 
of the cause, as well as the cause, dwell in the effect 
and are it. 

There is more than the fact of Being— esse— which 
cannot be reduced to a demonstration in science, except 
in the science of life unfoldment. It is by becoming 
what we desire to understand, or rising to, or into it, 
that we come to know it. 

From the foregoing observations it is seen that God 
—Being—is prior to Principle*, and, we may add that 
Supreme Being did not all come forth in Principle; that 
the Supreme Principle which pervades all life in our 
universe is not the whole of, nor the complete equivalent 
of, at present, unutterable and unsearchable Being from 
which it came. We know that our universe, which is 
the sum total of life, was propagated from esse by Prin¬ 
ciple, and that Principle projected itself into life—be¬ 
cause life—first in a series of devolutions and then in 
a series of evolutions, by which ultimately Absolute Being 
is resolved to Absolute Life, and by which these two 
make one in the finished work of creation, but we do 
not and cannot now know as to other probable propa¬ 
gations, or emanations from God, into universal systems, 
differing in Principle from our own. See “Generations 
of Principle.” 

We may also come to know that the nature of that 
Principle by which our universe was propagated is itself 
the plan of life, and that it contains, potentially, within 
itself, all the form-tones of life of infinite variety, whether 
in degrees of wisdom or intelligence, whether with or 
without vestures, as well as the relative rates of oscilla¬ 
tion by which Harmony is evolved from variety into the 
Universal Brotherhood of risen life.. 

Our primal Principle—the Primordial Principle— 
from which all life came forth, or from which all its 
form-tones proceeded, is dual —two in one. and one in 
two; two in one, when in the fact of one distinctly, or, 
in the perfect embrace of propagation, and one in two, 
when that embrace is temporarily broken to permit that 
which is created thereby to proceed in a new form of 
life, or substance. 

The interdependent duality of all Principle pervad¬ 
ing the universe, in forms of life, is the first and all pre¬ 
vailing evidence of its infinite potentiality. We come 




NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


67 


to see the duality of Principle in the study of life 
organism, both before, during, and after its unfoldment, 
in any form of life. The lirst step of creation is the fact 
of organic development. Primordial Principle is dual 
and in the fact of dual Individuality. It is that first¬ 
born form of life which binds esse to existere —Being to 
life—God to the universe, and which resolves the uni¬ 
verse to the Living God. 

It is not easy, perhaps, to bring to human psycho¬ 
logical vision the glorious individuality of Primordial 
Principle, and to behold it as possessing conscious intelli¬ 
gence and wisdom, and as manifested in a form of trans¬ 
cendent nobility, but if this be done, even in part, now, 
it will be easier to realize the individuality or personality 
of each of the infinite variety of unit forms of life which 
are propagated directly from it, and, in turn, by the 
fellowship of those unit forms, from them. 

It is certainly not difficult to see that life could 
not proceed from Principle except, primarily, in unit 
forms. Principle governs —propagates—form, first, last 
and always. It is itself in the glory of form—perfect 
form—and therefore everything propagated by it must 
be in an image of that form, in some degree of wisdom 
and intelligence, because Principle descends and ascends 
on the whole orbit of life, manifesting itself, so to speak, 
in form-tones exactly corresponding to the degrees of 
life which are those form-tones Principle is always the 
same whether in low or high degrees of wisdom or intelli¬ 
gence. The apparent, or percept differences consist in 
the degrees of its unfoldment. We shall later have to 
do with the functions of Principle in its descent and 
ascent on the orbit of life, whereby we have devolution 
and evolution. 

We have already said that Principle came forth 
in the reality and actuality of cause. It is subsequent 
to Being, which, as we have seen, is the cause of the 
cause. We have, in this first step of creation, the prior 
(Being), and we must have the final or the effect. What 
is that? 

It has already been stated that the first complete 
process in creation—in life—was the unfoldment of or¬ 
ganism from the infinite potentiality of Principle. How 
was this accomplished? We have said that Principle 
is the same in all things. Go to the early morning 
of the Silurian Geological age, and behold the cytula— 
the primal dual, father-mothe - cell—in its struggle to 
clothe its tender form of life. It spun a fine fibre from 
the substance of its tiny body, and in the attempt to 


68 


THE NEW IDEA. 


weave a garment therefrom, cut or divided its form into 
two forms. The dividing fibre ran between the gender 
functions, and that method of cellular propagation called 
fissoin brought forth separate male and female cells. This 
was the birth of plant and air nal unit forms of life. 

Now, go back to the golden morning of life, and 
behold the birth of the first forms of life propagated 
by Principle. The method of that propagation was also 
in the fact of fissoin, or division, because, from the 
primordial dual form of Principle, two new forms 
came forth, the one male, the other female, the one called 
Power, the other Love. 

Do not forget that these first-born forms of life— 
the first effects of cause—were in form. Holding them 
in vision separately, they were not individuals, because 
they were divided lives, and, therefore, when separated 
from each other, they are persons. Persons are always 
in the effect of divided duality That is precisely the 
case of the man and the woman in the sub-physical zone. 

We may properly give to the first born male and 
female forms of life the names of Power and Love, re¬ 
spectively. They were, however, not destined by their 
parent Principle to live apart—to exist separately— 
except as they should alternately embrace and separate 
in the great work of oscillation or propagation. 

As we comprehend Truth in our potential state for 
the greater part, in percept, in rising degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, we naturally hold to the ideals of time, 
place, size, distance, and motion, all of which are matters 
of sense, which are gradually resolved to their corre¬ 
spondences in concept, as we unfold. Hence we say that 
the primal forms of life, such as Power and Love were 
infinitely small beyond even partly unfolded psycho¬ 
logical vision. But this smallness is, at the last analysis, 
resolved to quality—to the relative fineness of the sub¬ 
stances of which their forms are composed 

It has been said here that Power and Love were prop¬ 
agated to separate forms of life by the oscillations of the 
duality, or poles, of Principle. It will be extending 
thought a little higher to say that the birth of those 
separate form-tones was the unfoldment of the male 
and female functions of Principle, constituting its duality, 
into interdependent forms of life. 

Principle, in its primordial state, was one distinctly, 
but in its first step of creation— first act of propagation— 
it became two—became itself divided into personal forms 
of life. Prom the unity of one distinctly, its potentialities 
began to unfold from the force of its own nature until it 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


69 


became dual, and finally that duality divided—separated 
—and from one distinctly, Two Principles came forth, 
in the fact and form of persons, which we call Power and 
Love, and which have generally been designated as the 
positive and negative poles, or tunctions of Principle. 

We properly dignify and magnify those two as real 
forms of life, in the actuality of conscious intelligence and 
wisdom, containing all the functions of organized mass- 
tone life, potentially. 

Now, power and love, or the male and female Prin¬ 
ciples, were propagated to forms of life by their own 
reciprocally counteracting alternations of oscillation, 
which are in the actuality of cause, combining metaphori¬ 
cally speaking, the spinning wheel and the loom, the warp 
and the woof of which are resolved to new substance from 
the infinite fountain of germ life, or very life. The latter 
is that eternal fountain in esse from which Primordial 
Principle is ever spinning and weaving the infinite web 
of life. 

It is in the nature of oscillation, which is resolved 
to the alternating embrace and separation of Power and 
Love, to separate and then to make one in conjugal em¬ 
brace, continuously, propagating a new form of life from 
the eternal fountain of esse with each such alternation. 
Hence the first-born male and female forms of life, which 
came forth from the duality of Principle, immediately re¬ 
united—embraced—and as a result, a form of life in 
Truth was born. 

With this birth a complete form of individuality 
in the actuality of very life came forth. Ntow, in the 
same way that the male and female forms of life propa¬ 
gated from Principle, by separation, the first individual 
form of life—perfect life—came forth in Truth, by re¬ 
union. That form of life in Truth, properly called 
Truth, was in the reality of a union of power and love 
into one undivided form of life. It was therefore an 
Individual. 

In just the same way that Primordial Principle di¬ 
vided on a line separating its dual hemispheres, to bring 
forth male and female forms of life, those unit personal 
lives united into a dual form of individuality in the 
reality of Truth. 

Why do we call this first-born of very life, Truth? 
Because within its potentialities dwell all things possible 
to infinite life. It is very life, germ life, and more, as 
we shall see. It is, in the fact of Spirit. 

Attention is here called to a most significant fact. 
That primal form of life, in the glory of individuality, 



70 


THE NEW IDEA. 


conscious intelligence and wisdom, is a triad. If the 
student will come to see somewhat clearly in what way 
that is a fact, he or she will at the same time bring to 
vision how it is that the spiritual heavens and worlds, 
are, by tone vestures, also in the fact of a triad. As 
a triad the primal form of life tf which we are speaking 
is composed of Power, Love and Truth, which three make 
one in Truth. 

Let us resort to our metaphysics once more. I have 
made effort to illustrate how it is that the cause of the 
cause, and the cause dwell together in the effect and are 
it. We see that the first full step of creation, propa¬ 
gated from Eternal Being, through and by Principle, the 
first-born of esse, a form of life in Truth. Being is the 
cause of the cause; Principle is the cause; and a form 
composed of Power, Love and Truth is the full and the 
final effect. No more than a mere hint is necessary 
to enable the student to see that Principle dwells in— 
pervades—Truth. But is it quite as plain to psycho¬ 
logical vision in what way God, or Being, or Spirit dwells 
therein, in order to complete the metaphysical truth, that 
the cause of the cause—the prior—as well as the cause— 
the subsequent—dwell together in the final effect and 
are it? 

The whole problem is solved when we are reminded 
that Truth is itself unfolding. Within its life—its form 
of life, Power and Love dwell together in Truth—Har¬ 
mony. These three: Power, Love Truth, are the all of God 
in our universe, except those potentialities which remain 
to be unfolded by thinking, from that triad unit form 
of life. Truth shall make j r ou completely free when you 
have been unfolded from its potential riches into it; and 
you are now unfolding in its lower degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence towards the summit of its mighty orbit. 

In short, when the first complete unit form of life 
appeared, God appeared in like measure therein, and thus 
a form of life in Truth was propagated as to substance, 
form or tone, according to Principle, but that fair and 
glorious form, which is vet in the morning of its tran¬ 
scendent life, is in reality, but the first step in the unfold- 
ment of the Eternal God. Life is the Unfoldment of God. 
Creation is the journey from Absolute Being to Absolute 
Life, and the route is laid through the functional poten¬ 
tialities of Variety, from which Harmony is propagated. 
Each step in the work of creation is a series of processes 
of thinking. All creatures in oar universe are thoughts, 
or organizations of thoughts. There is naught beside. 
Thus the student is himself a part of God unfolding in 
a man, and the finale of that unfoldment is the Supreme 
Man. 


EXERCISE V. 


THOUGHT ORGANISM. 

Individuality and personality of single thoughts, and also 
of their organizations—The mass-tone—Organic con¬ 
struction of a life unit—Fundamental tones of the 
substare—The vesture triads—Ten tones of the ulti¬ 
mate atom—The duality or hemispheres of the Uni¬ 
verse-Analysis of the life scale of harmonics—Func¬ 
tion of the orange or mental tone—Discrete and con¬ 
tinuous degrees. 

NEARLY all the unsolved mysteries which confront 
us in the study of life, as we live it, and the doubts as to 
the here and the hereafter disappear, when we come to 
see that a life organization such as a world, a plant, an 
animal, or a man is made up of infinitely small units, 
wonderfully vestured, properly called thoughts, and that 
each of that surpassing variety is an individual, or a per¬ 
son, differing from all the others in form-tone, and that 
each such individual or person possesses, by its nature, 
conscious intelligence and wisdom. 

Next in importance to an understanding of the won¬ 
derfully functional organism of those unit individuals, 
or persons, is a comprehension of mass-tone life, or com¬ 
pound life organization, in its different degrees of Har¬ 
mony, or form-mass-tones, by which unfoldment is 
wrought through the function of associated units in socio¬ 
logical fellowship, or contract work. 

When it is understood that a life unit—a single 
thought—whether, speaking from the standpoint of its 
physical subvestures, it be called atomic, molecular or 
cellular, is a matchless creature of intricate organic life, 
'involving intelligence, wisdom and a degree of self con¬ 
sciousness; and when it is seen that such thought is one 
distinctly as an individual or personal form of life, which 
individuality—or personality—is infinite and everlasting, 
as to its final form-tone, we are in a frame of mind, 
or condition of thinking to study its organism. 

Prom the analysis of tone-colors, or the oscillations 
of Principle, in the unit forms of life, in mass-bodies, or, 
in sociological organization, we are able to bring to vision 
the number and interdependent relativity of the zones of 
ether, or heavens, which compose our universe, and to see 
that the whole is duplicated in each and every one of 

( 71 ) 



72 


THE NEW IDEA. 


its units, but in different proportion of the inner and 
outer functional vestures of those units; and, from a 
study of the life scale of harmonics, which is resolved 
to the analysis of tones, we bring to raptured vision the 
fact that each life unit, as w G ll as each mass-tone body, 
composed of such units, is, generally speaking, spherical, 
hemispherical, and spheroidal, as to its physical shape, 
which is speaking and comprehending in perception. This 
has no reference to its real form, which latter is a fact 
of quality, or tone, comprehended only in unfolding de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence. 

From the same unerring scale, one comes to under¬ 
stand that each unit and mass-tone body of life is hemi¬ 
spherical, or in duality, with its inner spiritual and outer 
celestial triads. In this study the student must hold in 
steady vision the fact that each unit thought is an epitome 
of the whole body of which it is an integral and indis¬ 
pensable constituent, except as to proportion of vesture 
and fundamental tones, which latter differences are 
wherein the functions of variety abide. 

We see that in the life scale of harmonics there are 
really two scales, the upper and the lower, or the inmost 
and the outmost. When we speak of facts that are 
above and below each other, we speak in perception, or 
sentiently, or in degrees of wisdom, and when we speak 
of the same facts as within or without each other, we 
speak spiritually, or in degrees of intelligence. Those 
two lines of comprehension will make one in Truth. 

The celestial or sentient side of the scale of har¬ 
monics is composed of three tones, which represent the 
three zones of the celestial heavens—the three zones of 
ether of the celestial hemisphere of our universe. It 
is the same with each epitome unit thereof, except as to 
proportion as aforesaid. 

We speak of these zones of ether as they manifest 
themselves to sentient percepl as form-tones, or forix- 
tone-colors, and in that sense they are as follows: 


1— C, Red... 

2— D, Orange 

3— E, Yellow. 


Physical. 

Mental. 

Celestial. 


The latter is the celestial proper, but the whole three 
are celestial and constitute the celestial half of our uni¬ 
verse, or the celestial half of a. single thought. They are 
in degrees of wisdom, as to life unfoldment, but that will 
not become completely clear to vision until the student 
makes some progress in the study of discrete and con¬ 
tinuous degrees of life. 

Degrees of wisdom unfold by vibration—thinking— 






NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


73 


only in conjunction with degrees of intelligence, which 
are spiritual. Herein is the foundation of the duality 
of life, and of course, of the unit forms of life. 

The spiritual side of the life scale of harmonics is 
composed of three tones, which m the mass-tone under¬ 
standing, or concept are the three zones, or heavens, of 
the spiritual hemisphere of our universe. It is the same 
with each unit thereof, except as to proportion. 

We speak of those zones of ether as they manifest 
themselves to sense perception as form-tones, or form- 
tone-colors, and in that sense they are as follows: 

4— F, Green.Angelic. 

5— G, Blue.Divine. 

6— B, Violet.Spiritual. 

The latter is the spiritual proper, but the whole three 
are spiritual, and constitute the spiritual half of our uni¬ 
verse. They are in degrees of intelligence as to life 
unfoldment, but they unfold only in conjunction with 
celestial degrees of wisdom. Herein is the mystery, so- 
called, of the propagation of the risen invisible life. 

Degrees of intelligence are emotional, in their tone 
oscillations in conjunction with degrees of wisdom which 
are sentient, and when they flux together, they propa¬ 
gate emotional thoughts and feelings. Therein that 
which is commonly called religion takes its rise. 

I presume that the student is now able to see that 
a single thought—a unit-form of life—is, first dual, as 
to its spiritual and celestial sides. It is dual in organism, 
but as we shall see, its organic functions do not stop at 
duality. Each of the sides of its duality is in the fact 
of a triad, so that its upper hemisphere is in the actuality 
of prior, subsequent and final, and its lower hemisphere 
is the same. 

In a unit form-tone of life—a thought—there is a 
wonderful organism which is still more wonderfully func¬ 
tional. The mass-tone life of the spiritual side is the 
prior; the mass-tone life of the celestial side is the sub¬ 
sequent, and the final or effect is that which is begotten 
by those mass-tone oscillations, and that effect is in 
the fact of Consciousness, or the invisible form of life 
springing from the fellowship of those oscillations. 

Attention is now directed to the difference between 
a unit tone—a unit-form—of life, and a mass-tone form, 
in the expectation that a study of the organism of a single 
thought can be made most successful by uniting it with 
considerations of the functions of that organism. It 
has already been observed that I establish the plan of 
thought organism—the organism of a single thought, and 








74 


THE NEW IDEA. 


that of an organization of thoughts—by correlations with 
tone-colors. It has always been thought that there are 
seven tones and seven colors corresponding to them. That, 
as already stated, is not the fact. There are six tones and 
one mass-tone in the scale of harmonics, just as there are 
six colors and one mass-color in the scale of tone-colors, 
and just as there are six zones of ether and one mass- 
zone in our universe. 

The latter is the effect or risen life. Speaking in 
symbolism, we say that t.her^ are six days and the 
Sabbath. The six days are the producers; the seventh 
is the united product—the combined effect. 

If one will take all the tone-colors and the tints and 
hues thereof, as contained in some such plastic substance 
as dyes of plant formation, and combine them in the 
proper proportion of each, there will folloAV a chemical 
combination resulting in a mass-tone compound purple 
color. 

Suppose, following out the plan of the generally 
accepted tone-color scale, we fill in the place of the appar¬ 
ently missing tone, and say that A is the sixth tone, 
and that its sheen is purple, we shall be in error, because 
that is the mass-tone-col or of the other six. 

Let us illustrate: We have the three primal, or 
fundamental tone-colors in red, yellow and blue. Those 
are the three fundamental tones of the life scale of 
harmonics. If red and yellow be combined in the proper 
proportions orange will result. If yellow and blue be 
combined in proper proportions, green will result. Lastly, 
if red and blue be combined in proper proportions violet 
will result. These secondary tone-colors are true bio¬ 
logical compounds, wrought by propagatory processes the 
same as any chemical compound. It is admitted that, 
experimentally, the results obtained are only mixtures, 
but in the processes of nature they are real compounds, 
and have therefore been resolved from a molecular con¬ 
stituent, speaking from the standpoint of physical sub¬ 
vestures, to a corpuscular constituent state. 

We are departing to a considerable extent from the 
technique of unit life organism, but a partial elaboration 
of tone-colors in this connection will greatly facilitate an 
understanding of the subject in hand. Therefore atten¬ 
tion is here called to the marvellous function of the 
orange tone. To see that fact plainly we must come 
to understand that the orange tone-color is th n all of 
both the red and the yellow. It is through that func¬ 
tion—the function of the orange—that the red tone, 
which is the physical full tone, unfolds into the yellow, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


75 


or the highest of the celestial tones; and also by means 
of the fractional tone-colors known as the sharp and flat 
of D. We also see from these observations, why it is 
that D is called the mental tone, or mental zone of ether. 
It is because it unites C and E, by its flat and sharp on 
rising and descending scales of unfoldment. It com¬ 
bines within its own discrete degree the life substance 
of both the physical and the upper celestial zones, and by 
its flat and sharp unfolds its own life, which includes all 
below it into the upper zone of the celestial hemisphere 
of the unit, or mass-body, whereby the tone of E be¬ 
comes another and a higher fact in the invisible’ effect. 

A tone is in the fact of the continuous degrees of 
any discrete degree of life. It is propagated from the 
substare of a life unit by the oscillations of Principle. 
Those oscillations are in the fact of propagation. They 
constitute life. Thus the behavior of Principle, which 
is cause, propagates the tone of any discrete degree of life 
(and it resides as the substare of each discrete unit in 
the universe) and that tone is in the fact of a color, 
partly in order that it may appeal to both the functions 
of hearing and vision of any mass-tone life such as an 
animal or a man. Speaking physically, only the mole¬ 
cular tones are revealed to human vision. The cellular 
tones are not. The latter are fine in quality of substance 
beyond physical vision, but are brought to psychological 
sight by thinking in Principle. 

By the tone—by the continuous degrees of a unit, or 
mass-body—the quality of that form of life is determined. 
The quality is its degree of Harmony, or the degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence in which that form of life thinks. 
Hence the rates of oscillation of a discrete degree of life 
are in the fact of its continuous degrees. The latter are 
the functional powers by which vestures are propagated, 
and by which discrete degrees of life are resolved from 
one form tone to another. These processes are more 
fully described in the Exercise on tone vestures. Such 
is the nature of Principle, or the plan of life. 

These observations enable us to bring more clearly 
to vision the wonderful organism of a single thought, or 
a unit form of life. We sav that the unit contains a 
ten-fold organism. The question rises here, What is the 
technique of that unit organism. It follows: 

The substare of the unit is' in the reality of very life, 
or Power, Love and Truth, which are the all of Princi¬ 
ple, as we have seen. It is in the functional tones of 
C, E and G. as stated. The three unit tones of the sub¬ 
stare, oscillating with Principle propagate to the other 


76 


THE NEW IDEA. 


two triads of the unit, to-wit.: its spiritual and celestial 
hemispheres, which are in the actuality of spiritual, di¬ 
vine, angelic, celestial, mental and physical tone func¬ 
tions, or organs, each in a separate tone and the -whole 
in mass-tone. Thus the unit, counting its function of 
one distinctly, has ten organic tones or functions. They 
are called: 

1—Power. 6—Angelic. 


7— Celestial. 

8— Mental 

9— Physical. 

10—The Mass-tone. 


2— Love. 

3— Truth. 

4— Spiritual. 

5— Divine. 


The latter is wherein the unit with its nine distinct 
tones, functions as one tone—as one distinctly, which is 
the mass-tone. That will be more fully explained a little 
later in this exercise. 

As explained elsewhere, the substare of each life unit 
contains three tones, to-wit.: C, E and G. Those are the 
fundamentals. All other tones proceed from the oscil¬ 
lations of those. They are Power, Love and Truth. 

I will now venture a -word of explanation as to the 
difference between a unit tone and a mass-tone. A unit 
tone is the rate of oscillation of the poles of Principle, 
in any unit form of life, such as Power, or Love, by itself. 
A mass-tone is the sum total of the rates of oscillation 
of the unit tones combined in any discrete degree of life, 
but it implicates vastly more than that. It involves rel¬ 
ativity and interdependence. It is very important that 
the facts here spoken of be clearly brought to vision. 
Any number of unit tones cannot be combined in a mass- 
tone. Herein the whole scope of tone and vesture an¬ 
alysis is involved. Proportion is the secret of the mass- 
tone. Tones must be chemically combined in certain pro¬ 
portions, the one to the other, and the one to all the oth¬ 
ers in order to produce a mass-tone in Harmony. A mass- 
tone in Harmony is the propagation point. A mass-tone 
out of proportion—out of harmony—is heterogenous. 

Let me illustrate: In a corpuscle of that liquid com¬ 
pound called sulphuric acid, there are three classes of ele¬ 
ments, the constituents of which are two molecules of sul¬ 
phur, one molecule of hydrogen, and four molecules of 
oxygen. These units, in the second degree of organism, 
are themselves existing because of the mass-tone oscil¬ 
lations of the atomic units within their little, invisible 
bodies, and they are each, therefore, in a degree of or¬ 
ganic Harmony. Each of those molecular units is in a 
mass-rate of vibration. Now the rate of each is to the 
rate of each of the others in a certain ratio. When these 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


77 


rates are relatively such that they all vibrate as one—one 
distinctly—without fractions, except as the fractions com¬ 
bine to make a unit, with no remainder—and when the 
differences in the rates of oscillation of the units com¬ 
pensate each other, in the reality of Brotherhood, there 
is Harmony, and there is propagation. 

That is the secret of each and every process in chem¬ 
istry. That is why the three classes of molecular con¬ 
stituents named, by mass-tone, and by no other power 
in the universe, propagate to a corpuscle of sulphuric 
acid. What is true regarding physical sub vestures is 
likewise true regarding the inner and higher tones of 
the units. They, too, are in relativity and interdepend¬ 
ence with each other, each unit with those of its own class 
of substance, and the units of one class! with those of an¬ 
other. The relativity and interdependence of tones— 
of unit and mass-forms of life—are transcendently func¬ 
tional. It is the basic function of Universal Brotherhood. 

Thus it is seen that a unit thought—a unit form of 
life—is an epitome of all organized forms, and indeed 
of the whole universe. The great problem of life—of 
creation—was solved when unit thoughts were created; 
when unit thoughts were propagated, in infinite variety 
of tones, from Principle. It would appear from a study 
of single and mass-tone thought organization that the 
whole resources of Principle were taxed to their utter¬ 
most in the propagation of those grand units. 

We are practically chained down to sense percep¬ 
tion, and forced to view facts from the standpoints of the 
three subvestures of the physical zone in which we, as 
yet, dwell; hence our scope of vision is narrowed. How¬ 
ever, the student will rise from precept to some degree 
of concept—to a healthful measure of psychological vis¬ 
ion—from these feeble suggestions. It is only in rising 
from the illusions of sense perception that the real, here 
so crudely suggested in the lower degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, will appear. 

I have, in the foregoing been speaking, exclusively, 
of atomic and molecular life units—unit thoughts. It 
was by the oscillations of those thoughts that the zones 
of ether—the heavens—of our universe were propagated. 
It was by the fellowship of those units that dear old 
mother earth came forth, and it is by the embrace, in 
Principle, of those unit tones that the new heaven and the 
new' earth are coming forth, as yet invisible to man. 
But our attention must now be engrossed with another, 
and higher class of unit thoughts, to-wit.: cellular unit 
forms of life. 


i 


78 


THE NEW IDEA. 


Note—It is pointed out that the tone-colors, as we 
behold them, are all physicalized. They will be quite 
different when we rise to behold them in their native 
purity. 

In the above physical subvesture tones are not im¬ 
plicated. They will be elaborated later. 




EXERCISE VI. 


CELLULAR THOUGHT ORGANISM. 

The fifth degree of Mass-tone—Rise and expansion of 
cellular organism—Not the mere association of units 
but real propagation of new units—The wonderful 
Cellular Kingdom with its busy inhabitants—Func¬ 
tion of desire—Creation is by thinking. 


IT is not so much because of the psychological or¬ 
ganism which invisibly rises, by thinking, from the cell, 
that special attention is here called to that discrete unit 
form of life, but mainly that the student may bring to 
steady vision the continuously expanding mass-tone cor¬ 
responding to the rising forms of organized life. With 
each successive form of life organization, the number of 
unit tones fluxed into the mass tone is increased. Hence 
a eellular unit is in a higher and more functional or¬ 
ganism, combining a greater number of degrees of life 
than any of its predecessors. Its metamorphosis shows 
the dawn of psychological faculties as well as physical 
functions. 

In the form tone of the cell the potentialities of Prin¬ 
ciple are unfolded to the fifth degree of mass-tone. The 
primal atom contains ten tones; the primal molecule 
. thirty tones; the primal corpuscle ninety tones; and the 
primal male, or female cell, three hundred and sixty 
tones each, that is to say, three hundred and sixty dif¬ 
ferent classes of tones in the unit cellular form. In the 
fact of proportion there are a great number of tones of 
each class, so that the total, by number, and by class, 
exceeds much over five thousand in a single cell. 

I have, by the foregoing observations laid great em¬ 
phasis on the function of tones, and now we will go 
still further and say that creation, or propagation is by 
tones; that tones are in the actuality of thinking; that 
the tones are propagated by the oscillations of Principle, 
and are therefore thinking processes in Principle, which 
are resolved to the science of life building. 

By the tones of atomic, molecular, and corpuscular 
forms of life, the worlds are propagated; by the tones 
of cellular life in fellowship with molecular tones, plants 
and animals, and finally man, are evolved. 

I omit consideration of the unit crystal in this con- 

( 79 ) 



80 


THE NEW IDEA. 


nection. It is in the fourth degree of tone organism, and 
sustains peculiar relations to all forms of life. 

To recapitulate, there are ten tones in a primal atom, 
thirty in a primal molecule, ninety in primal corpuscle, 
and three hundred and sixty in a single cell. The latter 
is by class, as there are twelve classes of elements in a 
single cell, to-wit: in the cytula, or primal ovum cell, 
speaking from a physical view point, carbon, oxygen, hy¬ 
drogen, nitrogen, sulphur and phosphorous; and in the 
protoplasmic cell, with its outer vesture, six more, to-wit.: 
potassium, calcium, sodium, magnesium, iron and chlor¬ 
ine. If science had yet determined the exact proportion 
of elements in a cell—plant or animal cell—it would be 
quite easy to determine the total number of tones in the 
unit form of plant and animal life, but that summit of 
wisdom and intelligence has not yet been reached; nor 
does the author admit that science has yet definitely fixed 
the number of continuous degrees in any tone. Both 
the problems are in metaphysics, or the science of Prin¬ 
ciple, and can be thought out to a conclusion in degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, by any one who will devote 
sufficient time and skill to the work. We have no in¬ 
dispensable necessity for those conclusions in this work. 
Adopt any number of tones as requisite to a cellular 
Harmony point, that you please, the point is that each 
of those tones is in such relativity and interdependence 
with all of the others, that a mass-tone is the result. 

I pause here to call attention to the fact that the 
rising forms of life unfolded from Principle increase in 
the volume of mass-tone with each step of their rise by 
propagation, not by the mere accumulation of previously 
existing tones. By the fellowship of atoms in mass- 
tone, the molecule is born; by the fellowship of atoms 
and molecules the crystal is propagated; by the fellow¬ 
ship of molecules the corpuscle is born; and by the fel¬ 
lowship of molecules and corpuscles the cell is propa¬ 
gated. 

In each such birth, which is in the fact of creation, 
it is not a union ofl the old units, but a real birth of new 
substance—of a new form of life propagated by the os¬ 
cillations of Principle, from the eternal fountain of very 
life, or spirit. Such are the riches—the glory—of the 
plan of life. However, each tone in the parental form of 
life finds a living representative in the new born creature. 

Prom these observations the importance of the sci¬ 
ence of tone analysis is impressed. It is a delightfully 
healthful study. I advise those who wish to enrich their 
own tones of life to enter upon it. 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


81 


But now as to the potential embryos of the cell. 
Prom those facts who will say that the cell is not in¬ 
finite? But what signifies that wonderful sociological 
compact of tones held in one mass-tone by the bond of 
Harmony? An answer to this astonishes psychological 
vision. 

It is a fact that each member of that mighty family 
of tones, constituting the cell is in the actuality of a per¬ 
sonal form of life, possessing wisdom and intelligence, 
unfolding into consciousness, the very same, in principle, 
that the larger unit life of a man unfolds into trans-human 
consciousness. Thus our story of man is growing more 
and more wonderful, until the student ^nay doubt of its 
adherence to Truth. If one chooses to reduce this version 
to the level of a mere theory, then let it be remembered 
that such a theory enriches life, gloriously. But it tran¬ 
scends theory grandly. It is in the plan of life as un¬ 
folded to vision by Principle. It is an expression of the 
facts of life in degrees of wisdom and intelligence. 

Yes, dear student, the cell is a little kingdom, 
yea, a little universe, with a vast population, born and 
unborn. Each of its inhabitants differs from the others, 
in appearance, tone, and/ age; in size, power, and speech; 
in color or complexion, carriage and force. O what a 
wonderful kingdom is the cell! And, lo! the number of 
its inhabitants is hourly increasing. A new-born form- 
tone of life utters a birth cry every minute. 

And, behold, it is a kingdom of industry. The busy 
little people are spinning and weaving the garments of 
life—the vesture plasm of propagation. It is a series 
of work shops and centers of barter. There is the giv¬ 
ing and taking of exchange. Thus the associated unit 
form tones, singing and shining in the harmony of song 
and color propagate the faculty of desire. 

The cell is touched. It desires to know more of the 
thing touched. Necessity is thereby propagated, and at 
its command the cells join into a sopiological cellular 
colony, and the five planes of vibration, or the five senses 
and their organs evolve, as the primal animal forms of 
life rise from the single cell to the sea weed and the sea 
worm, and to higher species. 

Thus the rise of the forms of life, in evolution, chal¬ 
lenge our highest admiration. The inhabitants of the 
little cellular kingdom, joining with those of other cells, 
propagate the bodily and faculty organism of rising ani¬ 
mal forms, and finally of man. 

As we follow the industrial trail of creation, and 
bring to psychological view the spinning and the weaving, 


82 


THE NEW IDEA. 


and the building processes of the atoms, the molecules, 
the corpuscles and the cells, in their wonderful fellowship, 
we are astonished, until we turn to the visible insect 
world where we see much the same, although inferior 
types of industrial activity. 

And what does all this industry of the invisible world 
resolve to? To the fact of thinking—to the fellowship 
of thoughts, which are the only unit forms of life there 
are or can be in our universe. Yea, thrice yea, creation 
is in the actuality of thinking. One has but to learn the 
methods of thinking in harmony with Principle, and to 
think accordingly to ultimately become omniscient. 

When shall we discover that the things which we 
think we left behind—the things from which we think 
we sprang—are in reality ahead of us, and that these 
are all ideals into which we shall grandly unfold? 

Again, I say that the individual inhabitants of the 
little cellular kingdoms from which men and women un¬ 
fold, do not associate by their tones to compose our phys¬ 
ical and psychological organisms, but that they propa¬ 
gate those wonderful organic functions from the infinite 
fountain of eternal substance, according to their tones 
and the infinitely rich resources of the oscillations of 
Principle. 

Thus, by thinking man is built in the glory of phys¬ 
ical and psychological organism, spiritually and celes¬ 
tially, and thus he is transmuted into a still more glorious 
form of life to invisible spheres. 

Thus, by moleeular and corpuscular thinking the 
worlds were created, and are now being transmuted to 
the invisible new worlds; thus by cellular and molecular 
thinking in fellowship, man has been evolved, and is 
now being propagated to the consciousness of the risen 
life to final unspeakable mansions in those grand new 
heavens. 


EXERCISE VII. 


TONE VESTURES. 

Substance—How it is spun and woven by the tones of life 
units—The oscillations of Principle spin and weave 
the substance of life—Vestures are in degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence, and finally resolved to 
Truth—All motion of the forms of life due to the os¬ 
cillations of Principle within them—Higher and invis¬ 
ible substance becomes visible by becoming it. 


IN these humble Exercises in thinking, I have, up 
to this point endeavored almost exclusively to bring to 
the vision of the student the facts of form, tone, color, 
organism and functions of thoughts, or life units prop¬ 
agated to existence by the polar energy of Principle. 
Nothing has yet been said as to substance, nor have the 
subjects referred to been more than partly elaborated. 

My plan is to rise into this study with the student, 
by degrees of wisdom and intelligence, so to speak, by 
a system of overlapping and interdependent classifica¬ 
tion, with some actual and some apparent repetitions, 
which, rising from different standpoints, may enable the 
average thinker to see the plan of life as it unfolds from 
Principle. The learned or trained thinker will naturally 
desire a more homological classification, but the average 
person has not yet come to think in a scientific method, 
and he or she can best be reached and trained in thought 
science by that entrance to his or her life organization 
which is already open. 

In my father’s home, which was of the old-fashioned 
country type, the front door was seldom opened. En¬ 
trance through the kitchen was by far the most common 
and convenient. People who entered that way were gen¬ 
erally the most heartily welcomed. I feel that I can best 
reach the student through the most thoroughly beaten 
path, and if that shall be in a method somewhat behind 
the latest fashion, it may prove all the more agreeable to 
us both. 

I take it for granted that the reader is not, as yet, 
fully reconciled to the application of the words vesture 
and subvesture as employed in this work. The word 
vesture, as we generally employ it signifies a garment, 
a robe, a dress, a vestment, or an envelope. The only 
significance in addition to the foregoing definitions with 






84 


THE NEW IDEA. 


which I desire to invest the word is that, in this vol¬ 
ume, the idea of a vesture is a living garment, a robe 
of life, and, finally, a celestial body, which shall be as 
imperishable as that of the higher organism within. 

Each form of life, unit or in mass-body has from 
the beginning of life sought to clothe its form with a 
garment which would protect it from the world of life 
on its every touch. It may be stated broadly that each 
method of propagation known to science was discovered, 
or invented, as you please, in an attempt, by self, to pro¬ 
vide clothing for the form of life. 

Principle, in oscillations calculated to spin and 
weave a membrane for its exalted form, not only accom¬ 
plished that task, but in the process, divided its own 
form, and Two Principles came forth. The primal cell 
did the very same. In the symbolism of Moses, prim¬ 
itive man and woman did the same. In short all propa¬ 
gation in our universe is resolved to the spinning and 
weaving of vesture life. 

The oscillations of Principle which are Principle in 
divided forms, reside as the substare to every unit 
thought, or form of life. They spin and weave a plasm 
or embryos which comes forth in the fact of radiation, 
called light, or its subsequents of colors. That radiation 
is in the fact of a tone, and the tone glitters in the actu¬ 
ality of a sheen. Both the tone and the color, which are 
One fact, are in vesture substance. 

In the case of the primal units, called atoms down 
in the realm of physics, there must be fellowship, or the 
coming together of two or more units, in order that a 
membrane or an envelope may be propagated. The com¬ 
ing together, commonly called attraction is due to the 
nature of the poles of Principle to unite. 

In the fellowship of the units their respective radii 
flux together, just as the tones C and E unite to prop¬ 
agate the tone of D, but in that act of propagation the 
associated embryos propagates to a membrane, which 
takes the form of a dwelling for the associated units. 

It is in that way that we have discrete degrees of 
life. The very fine membrane discretes the forms of 
life within, from everything else in the universe, 
and in the new forms, they can fellowship with other 
forms only by their respective tones. 

Thus we can see the origin of the primal vestures. 
AH vesture life is propagated in the same way. Princi¬ 
ple is a unit and universal. 

It is from the oscillations of Principle, which are 
resolved to tones, that we catch a glimpse of the nature 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


85 


of substance and form. We shall make no effort, at pres¬ 
ent, to extend the student’s vision to the substance of 
esse, or Being. That is apprehened only in a high de¬ 
gree of psychological concept—in consciousness—and in 
the light of Spirit. But we may comprehend life sub¬ 
stance (and all substance, below that of Absolute Be¬ 
ing is life) in psychological or subjective thinking. It 
comes forth primarily in six great zones or qualities, or, 
tones of ether, all of which are invisible to humans. 

That primal vesture substance is in the fact of a 
plasm or embryos, in units, and in degrees of life, which 
are degrees of intelligence and wisdom, according to 
their relative positions on the scale of harmonics, or 
orbit of existence, and that substance becomes visible in 
the exact measure in which any life organization is re¬ 
solved, by unfoldment, to its tones. In other words, in 
the degrees in which the form of life becomes that sub¬ 
stance it will be visible to it. 

In the subvestures of the physical zone, life organiza¬ 
tions, such as men and women, wear bodies of the sub¬ 
stance of those zones, which bodies, together with the 
heaven and earth composed by such vestures are visible 
to such inhabitants. 

Thus the successively higher grades of substance be¬ 
come visible to man in the degree in which man becomes 
such substance. No other rule applies to the evolution 
of life. Our knowledge of the higher life, in any degree 
of wisdom and intelligence is appropriated only by be¬ 
coming that life. We come to know God by becoming 
God. There is no other method, but that method is tran- 
scendently available. 

It is noticed that as the substare of a unit, or mass 
form of life is propagated to a higher form, the tones 
by which such propagation is wrought, or the imits com¬ 
posing such tones, which are in the reality of new born 
substance life pass into and become the higher form of 
life. The tone is radiated—propagated—by the oscilla¬ 
tions of Principle which constitute the substare, and is 
both the instrument of propagation and the fact propa¬ 
gated. 

Thus vesture life appears in a new light. It is the 
envelope of a form of life, glittering in a sheen of grand¬ 
eur, and is in the fact of the higher form, at least poten¬ 
tially. As to a primal vesture that is essentially the fact, 
but as to subvestures it is mediately the fact, which is to 
say that error or illusion become subfunctional in the evo¬ 
lution of the real. That will become plainer later. 

Vesture life, then, is in the facts of degrees of wis- 


/ 


86 


THE NEW IDEA. 


dom and intelligence, which degrees are the tones of a 
form of life, by which the form is propagated to a higher- 
form, or to a wider range of Harmony in mass-tone. 
Hence the vesture, passing by tone in any process of 
propagation, itself becomes that higher life. Thus is 
seen the wonderful potentiality of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence. in that those degrees not only unfold into but act¬ 
ually become Truth. In that way the vestures, apparent¬ 
ly the robes of the forms of life are themselves resolved 
to the higher forms. 

It is in that way, as we shall see more plainly later, 
that the immortal celestial body—form of life—is propa¬ 
gated. Thus the plan of life is in the actuality of an 
industry of spinning and weaving the warp and woof of 
life into a living robe. 

As to form, substance and form are one fact, not in 
the idea that life is in units, and each unit is in a certain 
shape, but in a fixed quality, or tone, which is a form- 
tone. The form is, at the last analysis, the capacity of 
any life unit to propagate light, or life, by primal units, 
from the eternal fountain; it is the adjustment of the 
poles of Principle in a life unit by which oscillation is 
said to “ring true.” When life is in “good form” its 
units vibrate in righteousness; when in bad form, they 
vibrate in error—inharmony. Form is quality, and at the 
last analysis is resolved to Harmony. Substance, form, 
oscillation, tone and color are one and the same fact, 
just as the five senses, so-called, are one fact in sub- 
Oonsciousness. Both are in the fact of five methods of 
comprehending one and the same fact. 

Why do we call a great primal vesture, a zone of 
ether? Why the word zone? Well, what is a zone? It 
is a portion of the surface of a sphere included between 
two parallel planes, with respect to latitude and tempera¬ 
ture. Conceiving the universe to be spherical I regard 
its great life divisions as zones, first, as to the relativity 
of the interdependence of vesture life, and second, be¬ 
cause each zone of life substance is in the fact of temper¬ 
ature. Temperature—heat and cold—in the alternations 
of polarity is the most potential function of evolution. 
In our subvesture spheres it is resolved to climate which 
has, more than any other force in the actuality of degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, raised man above the animal 
races. 

Temperature is by no means an exclusive concomi¬ 
tant of these physical subvesture spheres. It prevails 
in every zone of the universe in about the same way as in 
and on our earth. Each zone of the universe has, in cor- 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


87 


respondences, a set of potential phenomena for the evo¬ 
lution of its inhabitants to higher spheres, and among 
them temperature, springing always from the same rel¬ 
ative source is one of the most functional. 

Even Love, which is in Truth, and in the reality of 
very life is warm, while its opposite is cold. Tempera 
ture rules in all things of life. Its origin is in the com¬ 
pressing folds of vesture. In that substance are the tones 
that sing and shine in the glory of process all along the 
highway of life, until that living way is resolved to its 
goal in Truth. 

How wonderful is the story of man, especially in 
respect of the vestures of the forms of life. Their first 
function is to protect those primal forms as they pour 
forth into existence everywhere from the great heart of 
Principle; their second office is in a work of propagating 
them to higher and more glorious forms; and, by their 
third and last achievement, they, themselves, unfold into 
that risen life, wherein the body, as everlasting as the 
source of life is eternal, makes one with an infinite fac¬ 
ulty organism, also unfolded by unspeakable vesture 
tones. 


EXERCISE VIII. 


PERSONALITY OF THOUGHTS. 

Thoughts are infinitely small worlds, or little men and 
women—They are beautiful in form—They possess 
wisdom and intelligence and are in a degree of Con¬ 
sciousness—They are industrious and employ them¬ 
selves in spinning and weaving the warp and woof of 
life. 


IN this wonderful plan of life, as far as we have 
gone, I have endeavored to impress the fact that thoughts 
—life units—are all in personal or individual form-tones. 
Something more definite is now to be said on that subject. 

A molecular thought organism—an idea—or behind 
that, an atomic unit thought, as the student may choose, 
is, in form and function, about the same as a world; and a 
cellular unit thought, is in form and function almost ex¬ 
actly the same as a man. 

The atomic units are, in a way, little worlds moving 
about on miniature orbits, in all the reality of world 
life. They are invisible to human sight, but none the 
less real on that account. The infinite variety of those 
units did not assemble into a large world like our earth, 
by organization, but they united to propagate our world, 
item by item, thought by thought, which is another and a 
more profound fact. 

The cellular units are in a way, little men and women 
—miniature people—going their several ways to and fro, 
busy with the everyday affairs of life. They are also in¬ 
visible to unaided human sight, but not the less real on 
that account. The infinite variety of those units did not 
assemble, merely, into a larger man, or woman, like our¬ 
selves by organization, but they united to propagate men 
and women, step by step, on the arc of evolution, which is 
a more glorious process. 

Those tiny creatures of both classes can think, and 
feel, and taste, and smell and hear and see, and sing, 
and shine in the glory of their personal beauty. They are 
in families and cherish kinship; they are in colonies and 
cultivate fellowship; they are in communities, and unite 
in social and economic functions. They do almost every¬ 
thing that men and women do, but in a more limited 
sphere of consciousness. 

TIow do you know? That is the question which I 

( 88 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


89 


must answer. Suggestion is, no doubt, useful in assisting 
one to a clear and correct psychological vision of the 
forms of life in the so-called invisible worlds. One read¬ 
ily adopts the idea that life—all life—is primarily in 
unit forms, which are all far beyond the reach of human 
physical vision; and, if little or no importance be attached 
to the ever pervading principle of form, the average 
thinker will offer no opposition to the theory that the 
invisible units of life are in the actuality of thoughts. 

But when those units are invested with personality, 
or individuality, and held to exist in a form-tone of 
conscious intelligence and wisdom, and in the exercise 
of faculty powers, there is less inclination to hold them 
in view as real thoughts. 

Thought implies thinking, and thinking is said to 
be the exercise of the higher intellectual faculties, not 
including simple perception through the senses. The au¬ 
thor prefers to include perception as one branch of think¬ 
ing, and to classify thought process as sentient, spiritual 
and psychological. It is evident that all these three 
processes of thinking are inseparably connected, the one 
running into the other form the lowest to the highest. 

Those three systems of thinking are one system, just 
as body, mind and spirit are one life. It is plain that 
any single thought, functioning in the physical zone, or 
wearing physical vestures, is composed of the substance 
of each of the six zones of ether, with a substare of very 
life, or Principle, so that the pnfoldment of a single 
thought is, to all intents and purposes, the same as the 
unfoldment of a thought, or life organization, such as a 
man or a woman. It must be remembered that life prog¬ 
ress is always by its units. It is the same in a single 
life organization, such as a man, as in a community of 
men and women. 

Society rises physically, intellectual^ and morally, 
exclusively in the fact of the physical, mental and, moral 
rise of its members. It is precisely the same with a hu¬ 
man life organization. Its mass tone life rises by the 
rise of its individual units. 

We meet with no difficulty in thinking of a com¬ 
munity, as in the fact of mass tone life, existing by its 
individual members. Men, women and children compose 
the community. They are persons. They are in sociolog¬ 
ical organization.. An injury to one is an injury to all. 
A benefit to one is a benefit to all. They live in inter¬ 
dependence and relativity. They rise into family groups, 
then into colonies, and finally into an extended commu¬ 
nity. The members are bound together into a mass tone 




90 


THE NEW IDEA. 


form of life by kindred ties and sociological bonds. 
Thus living in harmony they prosper. 

We are face to face with the personality of the units 
composing the community. We see them and enjoy their 
presence. We hear their voices and feast upon their 
smiling faces. We smile and talk back to them. Thus 
we, the greater units, live in the luxury of the sociological 
bond. 

But when we turn our vision towards a life organiza¬ 
tion such as man it becomes clouded. We know, or say 
we do, in a way, that man is made up—composed of—an 
almost innumerable number of unit forms of life, so¬ 
ciologically bound together by the bond of relativity 
and interdependence. 

We know, likewise, that in that human life organiza¬ 
tion-human community—there are kindred groups much 
like families, and neighborhoods, composing the bodily 
organs, and the psychological faculty centers. Thus there 
are all the ties, from kinship to fellowship, among the 
units of the human life organization, just as there are 
in the community. 

And yet we are prone to doubt, or to deny, the 
personality of the units composing the man, while we 
readily concede the evident personality of the larger 
units of which the community is made up. 

That should not be so. We should as readily grant 
the personality of the one as of the other, because it is 
self-evident that if the smaller units, constituting the man 
are not persons, or individuals, as the case may be, per¬ 
sonality to the members of the community would be im¬ 
possible. The only difference between them is the degree 
of mass tone life reached, in each case, respectively. 
One star differs from another star in glory. 

It is by these observations that I seek to impress the 
student with the personality, or the individuality, as the 
case may be, of all the forms of life, unit, or organized, 
in our universe. The difference between a person and 
an individual is elaborated elsewhere. 

Now, as each unit composing a life organization such 
as a rock, a plant, an animal, a man, or any of the higher 
forms of life is in the actuality of a thought; and as 
each kindred group of units within that organization 
composing a sense or psychological organ or faculty is a 
thought organism; and, finally, as the whole organiza¬ 
tion is in the fact of a sociological compact of thoughts, 
each differing from the other, in form tone, so, with equal 
force and equal principle is each such unit in the actu¬ 
ality of a person or an individual, living or thinking in 




NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


91 


conscious intelligence and wisdom, and in a degree of 
organ or faculty development. 

The forms of those units are very wonderful. Their 
little life forms shine in great beauty and they function 
in as full and complete personal liberty asjlo men and 
women, whether within or without psychological orga¬ 
nization. 

What do they look like? Well, each unit is, in form 
and tone, an exact epitome of the larger life organization 
of which it is a constituent. Such is the rule of Prin¬ 
ciple. But no two are just alike. An atom or a molecule 
is in form tone a little world, and a single cell is, by the 
same rule, an epitome of a man. 

With psychological vision thus aided, the student 
will soon come to see thoughts as to their form tones, and 
as this apprehension becomes brighter and clearer, the 
wonderful activities of those beautiful creatures, in their 
independent relations of fellowship will become interest¬ 
ing and instructive. 

There is nothing as healthful—health and youth¬ 
giving—as our fellowship with thoughts. We should come 
to know them, and then we will love them. When we 
have become trained to think—to employ those beautiful 
little creatures—in the grand work of faculty building, 
which is, in reality, unfolding our lives by the birth of 
new thoughts into consciousness, or the invisible fluid 
life organization, we shall sicken and sorrow no more. 

The individuality of mother earth is claimed by sev¬ 
eral authors, and, of course, poets, in all ages, have sung 
of our globe as in the personality of a man. In the 
Menorah Monthly, of June, 1898, Charles Hallock, speak¬ 
ing of the individuality of the earth says: “Cosmic phy¬ 
siology discovers at the equator the plexus of a great cir¬ 
culatory system, whose pulsations are as regular as the 
human heart-beat, with the warm arterial current flow¬ 
ing outward to its polar extremities, and the colder venous 
currents returning with the same steadfast uniformity 
from the antipodes; the swell of the ocean conforming to 
the pulsations of the tides like the heaving of the human 
bosom in respiration. The cosmic heart has two auricles 
and two distinct arterial currents, the gulf stream and the 
Kuroshva; and these arterial currents and all the Aretie 
counter currents are operated upon by influences which 
cause variations of temperature at the centre and extremi¬ 
ties, just as in the human body; and when the circulation 
is deranged the whole body suffers. The cosmic has the 
same proportions of water as the human body, and the 


92 


THE NEW IDEA. 


same proportions of organic matter, which comprises the 
same chemical constituents, salts, phosphates, etc. 

“The earth has corresponding organs and functions 
and is subject to like corporeal disorders. It has lungs, 
bowels, nerve centers, and secretory glands, with blad¬ 
ders, sacs and pockets to retain the fluids and rents for 
their discharge. Geysers, craters, sink holes and tunnels 
constitute their connecting passages, and hot water, as- 
phaltum, paraffine and salt solutions appear in outflow, 
with foecal extensions, intermittent or sporadic, according 
as the body is in a normal or disordered state. 

“The earth has peristaltic action and digestion, thirst, 
hunger, constipation, body gases, flatulence, rumblings iu 
the bowels and detonations of varying quality, intensity 
and significance. It is subject to convulsions from inter¬ 
nal or external causes—from forces, magnetic, dynamic, 
electric, capillary, etc., which are attended by phenomena 
familiar to the everyday economy of the human system. It 
has agues, tremors, intermittent fevers, paralysis and la¬ 
bor pains, which, in fables, give birth to mountains, and 
betimes to mice. Excrescences crop out upon its surface, 
subterranean veins course through it, boils afflict it, fun¬ 
gus grows rank upon it, parasites infest it. It has absorb- 
tion, respiration, exhalations, perspiration, body odors, 
eructations. And. speaking of perspiration, only lately 
have physicists discovered that the dew upon its surface, 
instead of falling from the atmosphere above, was really 
the transpired humor from its body. 

“The earth has also emotions and its moods, its 
periods of calm and irritation, its aspects of severity and 
serenity, of parsimony and beneficence, of beauty, and 
gloom and melancholy. So near, indeed, are the macro¬ 
cosm and the microcosm kin that one cannot be describ¬ 
ed except in the similitude of the other.” 

The writer above quoted might have gone still fur¬ 
ther in the elaboration of the similitude of the earth and 
man, showing that while man is in a higher state of life 
organization, the earth, as to form tone is the product of 
the one and only Principle of life. The carriage, or gait 
of the earth is the same as that of man. In all its mo¬ 
tions it ever maintains an erect position, with its head 
uppermost, and nods to the right and left the same as a 
man in walking. Those noddings, which produce the four 
seasons, when described in the true orbital figure are 
about the same as the figure produced by the motions of 
the waltz Avhich shows that both dauce to the same music. 

It should be observed, however, that cellular tones 
prevail in man. while molecular tones predominate in the 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 93 

earth. That fact eventuates in a difference of form. Man 
is in a higher and more exalted form. 

But the facts sought to be impressed here are, first, 
both a planet and a man are composed of very small unit 
forms of life, and, second, that each of those units is, re¬ 
spectively, in the form of the larger body of which it is 
a constituent. In other terms the earth is a combination 
of little worlds, while the man is an organization of little 
men; not, however, of the original units, which abound, 
infinitely, everywhere, but of ihose propagated in the 
work of mass form building. 

When it is said that the units of which a world, or 
a man, is composed are in the same form as the larger 
body, it is likewise said that they are in the form tone, 
which implies all the sense and psychological functions 
which characterize those mass bodies, though not as fully 
developed. In principle they are the same. The units com¬ 
posing the earth being in the fact of duality, are indivi¬ 
duals; those composing the man, being in divided male 
and female forms of life, are persons. 

Hence the wisdom, intelligence and conscious life of 
those individual and personal units is apparent. Prom 
these doctrines which are in truth, expressed in degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence, it is seen that one may have in¬ 
telligent and conscious intercourse or communication with 
all unit forms of life, within or without his or her own 
life organization. That is wherein the mass tone and the 
unit-tone fellowship in life building. That is the nuxus of 
thought science. It is the foundation in principle of hu¬ 
man life unfoldment, wherein, by use, the already partial¬ 
ly developed psychological faculties may be further un¬ 
folded, by thinking, which is by use, in desire, choice, 
motive and the will, which, by the way, involves the use 
of all the faculties of any human life. 





EXERCISE IX. 


PHYSICAL SUBVESTURES. 

Origin and functions of tone-vestures explained. The sur¬ 
passing wonders of potential symbolism—All have, 
by their units, been to “hell,” and are now on the 
return journey—Subvestures the physical prison 
houses of compression—Thus they function to chasten 
the unit-tones—Cellular units were born in the throes 
of a potential “hell”—The rise and redemption by 
thinking—In the cell atomic and molecular units 
were bom again. 


IF the student and the author can now indulge a fa¬ 
miliar talk, as it were, on this whole matter of tone ves¬ 
tures, a better understanding between us may be the re¬ 
sult. I must declare that this is a vastly important sub¬ 
ject. It is one rather difficult of explanation. However, 
it must be resolved to clear vision in order to make real 
progress in these studies. It has been noted that creation 
is exclusively by thinking, either by the thinking of 
Principle in its own primordial form, or by the thinking 
of Principle in subsequent forms, be they whatever you 
please. 

Light is a fact of the universe which has been, and 
is yet being created. The light of the universe is a many 
sided fact. Let us consider it for a few moments in or¬ 
der that we may shed light on the subject of tone ves¬ 
tures. 

“In the beginning God created the heaven and the 
earth. . . . And God said, Let there be light and 

there was light.” It is plain that the light was created 
simultaneously with the heavens and the worlds. The 
two processes are one process, and inseparable. It is not 
irreverent to enquire into that process of propagation by 
which the light was created. It naturally springs into 
vision, from a study of the creation, or propagation of 
the primal units of life. I have said that Principle trans¬ 
muted its form and function of substance to the units 
which are propagated by its polar energy. Therefore, it 
is plain that the highest spiritual units come forth in the 
actuality of oscillation. Each is in a rate of oscillation 
by Principle. That rate of oscillation is its tone, and, as 
already stated, that tone propagates radiation—an 
aura, or vesture. I can only sav that the radiation thus 

( 94 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


95 


propagated by the primal spiritual units is in the reality 
of pure white light—a luminous fluid of atomic consti¬ 
tution unutterably fine. That is the primal light—pure 
light, without color decomposition, as took place subse¬ 
quently. But, as we shall see, a higher and still purer 
light, the Risen Light of the world, is propagated by 
thinking, in the course of the unfoldment of the plan of 
life. The primal light here spoken of is the primal ves¬ 
ture. It does not radiate from a common focal centre, 
after the plan of our Sun, but as an aura of radiation sur¬ 
rounding each primal unit of life, the number of which 
is infinite, and their proximity such that the radiations 
blend, until an illimitable flood of light prevails. 

Only a word as to the order of creation. It is plain 
that, potentially, the fundamental tones, that is C, E 
and G, or the physical, the upper celestial, and the divine, 
come forth in the primal unit, and that the first light of 
the universe is in the fact of radiations of divine Power. 
Love and Truth, Celestial Power, Love and Truth, and 
Physical Power, Love and Truth. Immediately follow¬ 
ing, or simultaneously with those radiations, or emana¬ 
tions, spiritual Power, Love and Truth, Angelic Power, 
Love and Truth, and Mental Power, Love and Truth 
come forth. I find it difficult to explain the order of the 
creation of the universe for the reason that it can be 
done, in our potential degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, only by implicating the perception of time, which 
cannot be applied to spiritual facts. Therefore the fore¬ 
going must suffice. Moses overcame the difficulty by 
arbitrary methods, which has given theologians a world 
of trouble. 

It is attempted here to bring to the vision of students 
the second and highest function of tone vestures. It is 
that of propagating the forms of life from which they 
radiate to higher forms, and finally to the exalted status 
of Risen Life. In that wonder work the tones function 
to assemble the units in succeeding degrees of fellowship 
organization, wherein tone vestures are propagated in 
mass tone, as is finally the case with a world, or a man. 

In all of the successive degrees of fellowship orga¬ 
nization, from the most primal to the most extended, the 
mass forms of life are dual in the fact of the original dis¬ 
crete degree, and in the higher form which is propagated 
from the lower, by oscillation, or thinking. In the case 
of a man or a woman, we call the first, the visible life 
organization, and the second, the invisible life organiza¬ 
tion. The latter, while attached to the former, in these 
spheres is commonly called consciousness. 


96 


THE NEW IDEA. 


It is the hope of the author that the foregoing obser¬ 
vations will raise the vision of the student, as to tone 
vestures, to higher ground. But we are not yet done 
with this great subject. We must come to see in what 
way that which we call civilization, with all its wonder¬ 
ful achievements and institutions is in the reality of 
tone vestures to mankind, together with its mighty func¬ 
tion in propagating man to the higher life. 

We now turn our attention to the lower spheres of 
the physical zone—to physical tone subvesture life as 
we are now living it. The reader no doubt comprehends 
fully, how it is that a world or heaven in any zone of 
the universe is said to be of the substance of that zone, 
because the units which compose such world or heaven 
wear, as their outer tone vestures, that substance. It is 
in that way that any zone exists. 

In bringing to the vision of the student the wonder¬ 
ful functions of physical subvestures, I venture the some¬ 
what astonishing statement that the plan of life carries 
us to “hell” and return even beyond the limits of meta¬ 
phor. The facts are that,. by his units, every man has 
descended into hell, and is now on the return journey in 
rising mass tone life. The hell here spoken of is not just 
as the orthodox theologians have, in times now happily 
gone, pictured it, but it is a real place of torment of in¬ 
describable afflictions—insofar as functional potentialities 
can be real. 

There is a mine of surpassing riches in the plan of 
life, properly called symbolism. Happy indeed is the 
student who comes to see that all the institutions of 
our civilization, and of all past civilizations, and, further, 
that all things of potential life—vesture life—are sym¬ 
bols ; and happier still is he, if able to correctly interpret 
them. All sacred scriptures abound with the riches of 
symbolism. All human economics are in symbols; the 
church is a mighty symbol; the home is a symbol of tran¬ 
scendent beauty: wedlock is a beautiful and most instruct¬ 
ive symbol; even Christianity, as it is generally taught is 
a most functional symbol; commerce is symbolic; the Sab¬ 
bath is a grand symbol; the community is a glorious 
symbol; our educational institutions are in potentiality, 
symbolic; the teachings of Jesus, as well as those -of 
Buddha, Zoroaster, and Swedenborg are all in the mighty 
power of symbolism; history is a collection of symbols 
arranged in successive order: yea, the whole universe of 
suggestion is in the beauty and strength of symbolism. 
Even error is symbolic, and the rankest illusions are in 
the force of sj^mbolism. 



/ 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


97 


Everything below Truth is a symbol. In our present 
potential sta‘te we cannot comprehend Truth, except in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which at the last 
analysis are resolved to symbols. We comprehend ex¬ 
clusively by symbols. We ourselves are in the faet of 
symbolism, and will so remain until our potentialities are 
unfolded into Truth. 

The real man—the coming man—who, in the universal 
mass tone, will be God, is now largely in the fact of en¬ 
vironment. The life of man, as at present constituted, 
exists potentially in his circumstances—his environment 
—and his environment is co-extensive with the universe. 

What is a symbol? It is a sign by which one infers 
a thing. It is a visible sign of an idea. It is that which 
unfolds to ideals, and in the process moves the ideals 
farther ahead, and raises them to more exalted standards. 
Thus a creed, or a set of articles of faith are symbols, 
unfolding towards Truth. 

In the potentialities of vesture life—in degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence—is found the source of all sym¬ 
bolism. The potentialities are, in a wide sense them¬ 
selves the things to which they unfold; they are the 
symbols which point towards realities; yea, more, they 
are the things which become—which evolve into—real¬ 
ities. Our circumstances—our environments—our ves¬ 
tures themselves are not only potential to unfoldment, 
but by transmutation, by propagation, become the things 
unfolded. 

A vesture—a potentiality—an item of environment— 
is a fact of the real self in radiation towards the higher 
self, and, in fellowship with all the others is an item of 
progress—a fact of propagation. 

Hell is a symbol. It is in the fact of functional po¬ 
tentiality. It is in the reality of vesture life. It is in 
the actuality of propagation wrought by the three subves¬ 
tures of the physical zone. 

The mighty sweep of Principle—the plan of life— 
comprises the whole orbit of propagation of discrete and 
continuous degrees, with Being, Principle and Truth, 
which are resolved, to Love, as the foundation. Upon that 
Supreme Substare, the six zones of ether were propa¬ 
gated, as the six successive vestures of the units; and in 
each zone, or connected with each principal vesture, there 
are subvestures in the faet of a trial. 

We cannot, in our present potential state extend the 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence in which we function, 
to a comprehension of the subvestures of the three upper 
zones, except in correspondences, but we have direct ac- 


98 


THE NEW IDEA. 


cess to the three subvestures of the physical zone, in which 
we now dwell and function, and which, in some exact pro¬ 
portion constitute our visible bodies. 

The three subvestures here spoken of, all of which 
are visible,, are responsible for all human ideas of so- 
called matt'er. The science of physics has, up to this time, 
dealt with the substance of these lower subvestures as if 
they could exist alone, or by themselves, independent of 
the higher vestures within the units, or of the inmost 
substare thereof.. Science admits that the “matter” of 
these subvestures is in unit form tones, that is to say, that 
it is composed of primal atoms, molecules, corpuscles, cells 
and crystals, but it either denies, or ignores the higher 
degrees of substance life within each unit, and, leaving 
itself in that wretched state of helpless poverty, is com¬ 
pelled to borrow" a vital spark, held to be necessary to 
each and every process in chemistry, from some source, 
it knows not whence. But the science of physics, as w r e 
have it today, will rise by unfoldment, until it will dis¬ 
cover the riches of higher degrees of life within each 
physical unit, from which a thousand vital sparks radiate, 
whenever those units are associated in such a proportion 
to each other as to reach the harmony of mass tone. 

I do not criticise, nor condemn the blindness of mod¬ 
ern science in this respect. I seek rather, in my humble 
capacity, to shed such light on these important facts as 
will work out a recognition of the higher tone and mass 
tone analysis, in light and colors, as will lead to the dis¬ 
covery that an atom, a molecule, a corpuscle or a cell, as 
apprehended in physical subvesture substance is a won¬ 
derfully garmented unit form of real life, which, by its 
interiors is most marvelously organic, and surpassingly 
functional. 

It is respectfully suggested that if scientific men will 
take up research along the lines presented in the fore¬ 
going paragraphs, a far more simple and satisfactory 
system of dynamics than that which now prevails will 
be evolved. It will soon come to be seen, in a new light, 
that all motion originates with that which moves. Pyth¬ 
agoras and Zeno -were right, but were unable to explain 
the causes which produced the results of their deduc¬ 
tions. 

As stated elsewhere, the three subvestures of the phys¬ 
ical zone correspond to the three states of so-called mat¬ 
ter. We have seen how the lower or outmost of the ce¬ 
lestial heavens is in the full tone of magnetic ether. That 
is primal physical vesture substance. All the ethers are 
magnetic. That is the nature of ether, and it is from 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


99 

physical ether—magnetism—that electricity proceeds. Of 
course the etheric zones are in relativity as to quality, or 
powers, the coarser being the lower, or outmost, and the 
finer the higher, or inner, or inmost, successively. 

Physical magnetic ether is the finest substance of the 
physical heaven. It is not visible to humans except in 
its effects. Its tone color is red, and it is both caloric 
and clorifie, as are all ethers, to-wit: in degrees of tem¬ 
perature and color. In the life scale of harmonics its 
tone is called C, and it is the basic tone of the scale. It 
has been pointed out that the physical zone or heaven, 
in the substance of magnetic ether constitutes the third 
primal vesture of the celestial substare, or the sixth prim¬ 
al vesture of the spiritual substare. Now, the great phys- 
cal zone is clothed, by its units, in three subvestures, cor¬ 
responding, as stated, to the three states of so-called mat¬ 
ter, to-wit: gases, liquids and solids, which are coarser, 
respectively in the order named. 

The six-fold physical life units first propagate a gas¬ 
eous subvesture; then, over that, a liquid subvesture, and 
finally over all, a solid subvesture. It must be held in 
vision that the interiors of the first named subvesture 
are not gaseous. Only the envelope in gas. The same is 
true of the second subvesture, to-wit: only the envelop, 
or covering is liquid; and finally the same is the fact with 
the third subvesture; only the covering or outer envelope 
is solid. The interiors of the solid unit, except the first 
two subvestures named are etheric, that is to say, they are 
the same, in all respects, as units without physical sub¬ 
vestures. These observations again bring to vision the 
wonderful organism of a unit form of life. 

It is noted here that a life unit, when residing in the 
lowest sub vesture of the physical zone is the most highly 
organized of all molecular or corpuscular units. The 
atom, in that state contains twelve degrees, or tones of 
life, three being added for the three subvestures. That 
is the origin of the significance of the number twelve. 
Prom it we have the “twelve stones,” and the twelve 
tribes of Israel. The number twelve is made further sig¬ 
nificant by the fact that twelve classes of subves¬ 
tured molecules were united in the first, or primal proto¬ 
plasmic cell. 

Attention is now called to the fact that while the 
primal physical unit, that is, the unit without subvestures 
is in the fact of the red tone-color, the same unit, by the 
sub vestures oscillates in three lower tones, one for each 
of the subvestures. Those are in a lower rate of oscilla¬ 
tion, and their colors are in a tertiary effect, to-wit: olive, 



100 


THE NEW IDEA. 


russet and citrine. It is also noted that while the original 
physical unit is caloric it is far more so when clothed in 
the compressing subvestures. 

When the unit has descended to the lowest of the sub¬ 
vestures it is in a state of the highest temperature, at 
least internally. Heat is in the fact of the compression of 
the unit forms of life. It is quite easy to see that, with 
each step of its progress in devolution, the oscillations 
of the interiors of the unit are increased in rate of ve¬ 
locity, while the reach of throb, so to speak, is decreased. 
Herein is the function of the compression of a unit form 
tone. 

If the student still holds in vision the individuality 
of molecular units, and can now bring them to psycho¬ 
logical apprehension, as existing in a form of conscious 
intelligence and wisdom, it will be quite easy to see that, 
in their subvesture prison houses of compression, they 
are mercilessly afflicted. The treatment thus adminis¬ 
tered is, to say the least, heroic. But such is the plan 
of life. 

We are taught in the cosmogonies of science that 
our earth, when its units were robed in gaseous garments 
was more than 40,000,000 of miles in diameter. It was 
probably “without form and void/’ before the units put 
on their first subvestures, because we know that all the 
processes of physical world building are due to the func¬ 
tional powers of such vestures. Therefore, when the 
units, in fellowship, clothed themselves in the second sub¬ 
vesture, and the earth was a universal sea, its diameter 
was many times less, but, in this middle state, science does 
not even guess at its size. However, when it “consol¬ 
idated,” when its units, for the most part descended from 
the liquid to the solid vesture—and it rested there its 
diameter is measured at only 8,000 miles. Hence, by the 
functions of subvesture compression, the earth, or the 
units composing it, were mightily squeezed. The force of 
this size reduction, is measured by the proportion of 40 
or 45 millions of miles to 8,000 miles. 

Nlow, dear student, it is, by Principle, in the mighty 
plan of life—of creation—that each unit form tone which 
now composes your life organization made the terrific 
journey above described, before its form was chastened 
and its tone purified sufficiently to qualify it to enter 
upon the functions of cellular life. That is the truth, 
herein expressed in such degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence as the author has been able to propagate in the 
science of thinking, but the end is not yet. 

By the functions of subvesture compression those 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 101 

units were brought into closer fellowship than hitherto. 
Of their own natures, rising from proportion in relativity 
and interdependence, they had united to propagate the 
earlier stages of unit organism, but, in the double work of 
world building, and preparing their life forms for the 
transcendent duty of propagating cellular form tones of 
life, they entered the crucible of very hell. There was no 
retreat. The ordeal could be overcome only by going 
forward through the only open door. Their condition 
was unbearable, and yet, as the sequel proves, it qualified 
them for self deliverance. 

In their existing forms they were absolutely help¬ 
less. It was necessary, in order to rise from that appar¬ 
ently bottomless pit, to become something else—to chamge 
their lives. As long as they remained what they were 
there could be no redemption. Propagation was the only 
open door. They applied that remedy in processes of 
thinking. 

Here is a lesson to the student. One often complains 
of his condition—of his circumstances and surroundings. 
How shall those be changed, or improved? By that one 
becoming something else, and rising out of present cir¬ 
cumstances. The remedy is always in self—in thinking. 

Molecular life units in the hell of compression chas¬ 
tisement, appropriated their own circumstances in a fel¬ 
lowship of redemption. What one could not do by itself 
was accomplished in fellowship groups. This was an ad¬ 
vance step in Brotherhood. They united by wisdom and 
intelligence. Some of the units were weaker than others. 
Twelve classes of them got together, in larger or smaller 
numbers of each class, according to their relativity and 
interdependence, and in that way became harmonious. 
Once the mass tone of Harmony was established, a meas¬ 
ure of deliverance came, and the sociological compact 
rose from molecular to cellular life, and, in that step the 
work of redemption was gloriously begun. 

In that advance step devolution was changed into 
evolution, and the compressing vestures which afflicted 
their unit lives became functional, as unfolding degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, to raise and expand their 
lives. Compression was resolved to expansion. The very 
functions which oppressed them began to minister to them 
in gifts of joy and gladness. Contention and strife, af¬ 
flicting weakness, and the want of necessaries were re¬ 
solved to power, peace and plenty. Old things passed 
away, by degrees, and all things became new in a flood 
of new-born life. 

Thus the units were born again. Their afflictions 


102 


THE NEW IDEA. 


became functional in propagating the new birth. In 
their new forms a wider range of form tones were brought 
into association, with a consequent increase of power, 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence. In that way life 
began to unfold to the higher. It was a work of Brother¬ 
hood, and as a work of Brotherhood it must continue. 

It is seen than to be bom again, and yet again, are 
steps in the processes which deliver from “hell.” Each 
advance in the rise from afflicting potentialities of ves¬ 
ture life is in the fact of a new birth. “Marvel not be¬ 
cause I say unto you, ye must be born again.” 

But the journey from “hell” to the final heaven of 
perfect life is a long one. One may make it a continuous 
heaven of increasing power, abiding peace, and abound¬ 
ing plenty; another, a continuing hell. The former is 
the free heritage of all, and is provided in the plan of 
life. Study it, live in it, and become it, and you will suf¬ 
fer affliction no more. 


EXERCISE X. 


RISING TO THE FULL TONE. 

From sub vesture to Full Tone life—The real environ¬ 
ment is civilization—Achievements of man a part of 
man—The rise of the whole man—Man’s works rise 
with him—The symbolism of civilization—From po¬ 
tentiality through rising degrees of reality—It is the 
whole life which unfolds. 


FROM what has been said, it is seen that the unfold- 
ment of this system of thinking evolves great discoveries 
in science. The unit tone plan of creation, implicating 
environment, or vesture, which is now given to the world 
for the first time probably ranks equally with the fore¬ 
most discoveries of the Nineteenth Century. That is a 
fact when the nature of the latter discovery is carefully 
considered. Among the greatest achievements of that 
century, which records greater advances in science and 
the arts than in all the preceding ages, the doctrine of 
the molecular constitution of all sustances, and that of 
the evolution of life, as formulated by Darwin, are in the 
front rank. 

We crown the discovery of the unit constitution of 
substances, with the greater achievement of divining the 
organic composition of those units, imparting to each 
the glory of conscious individual or personal life, in de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence; and, we raise evolution 
from the mere propagation of animal species, in suc¬ 
cessive order, to man, to the unfoldment of Principle in 
all things, continuing in a plan of life until all things 
become the Living God. 

We establish the doctrine that all the units of life 
are in the actuality of thoughts, and that all creation, 
whether in the unfoldment of life organizations, or their 
environments is by thinking. 

We formulate, from the plan of life, as it comes forth 
from Principle, methods of thinking to ideal standards, 
by which man ultimately unfolds to the status of God, 
and through which, in every step of that unfoldment, he 
may banish error and evil and appropriate power, peace 
and plenty, and live in the full enjoyment of the freedom 
of Truth, with its concomitants of perfect physical and 
psychological health and happiness. 

We teach that the unfolding environment of man is 
the unfoldment of man himself, and that the astonishing 

( 103 ) 



104 


THE NEW IDEA. 


progress in science and the arts of our gladsome day, is 
itself the real rise of mankind. It is readily seen that 
each man, according to his already unfolded capacity has 
the power to appropriate into his own life every item of 
developed science and art which now fill the world with 
the glory of man. Thus the relativity and interdepen¬ 
dence of all forms of life resolve themselves to prac¬ 
tical Brotherhood. 

Is it not plain to the vision of the careful student 
that the whole environment of mankind, as evidenced in 
the development of science and the arts is resolved to 
the unfoldment of men and women? Is it not from those 
tones—tones of propagation—that we appropriate the 
bread of life? Do we not respectively mingle the tones 
of our own forms of life into that great visible mass 
tone life, commonly called civilization, and thereby 
ourselves unfold into higher and purer and stronger 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence? 

We bid the student to call into clear psychological 
vision some of the principal features of the environment 
potentialities of man which have sprung into functional 
power during the Nineteenth Century, and in so doing, 
to regard them as part of the life of man, or as the ves¬ 
ture life wherewith man is clothing himself, and by 
which he is propagating himself to higher spheres. Re¬ 
member, also, as this is done, that I have said that ves¬ 
ture life is radiated from the discrete degrees which are, 
in the higher sense, in the forms, of men and women, 
and that the vesture tones thus propagated from them 
by thinking are not only the instrumentalities of such 
propagation, but that, by unfoldment, they become the 
things propagated. 

I refer now to the vesture tones propagated by man 
in the progress of science and the arts during the N5ne- 
teenth Century, and to secure a ready summary of them, 
I compile from the tenth volume of “The World’s His¬ 
tory and Its Makers,” as follows: 

1—The human mind reels when it tries to grasp the 
stupendous achievements of the Nineteenth Century in 
every branch of discovery and invention. Close behind the 
worshipers of knowledge have followed the magicians of 
today; chemists, engineers and electricians. At their com¬ 
mand the spirits of air, water, earth and fire have been 
made to do man’s every bidding. They propel his steam¬ 
ships, railway cars and mighty engines; they make his 
garments; they build his houses; they illuminate his cities; 
they harvest his crops. For him they make ice in the 
tropics or grow oranges amid snow. For him they fan 
a heated atmosphere into cooling breezes, or banish icy 
winds. They flash his news around the globe; they earry 




NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


105 


the sound of his voice for thousands of miles; or preserve 
it after he is dead. 

2— Man has made a messenger boy of the lightning, 
and harnessed vapor to his chariot wheels. The beginning 
of the Nineteenth Century saw the discovery of the as¬ 
teroids. The discovery of the planet Neptune came in 
1846. It was maintained that the measurement of the 
distance of the stars was an impossibility; the Newtonian 
theory incapable of proof, and that the chemical compo¬ 
sition of the fixed stars must forever remain a secret. 
Three years later those distances were determined, New¬ 
ton’s theory was proved, and, later the invention of the 
spectroscope, combined with the discovery of spectrum 
analysis inaugurated the study of stellar chemistry. 

3— One hundred years ago oxygen was a new discovery. 
Since then the range of chemistry has become boundless. 
Man has penetrated the inmost secrets of substance. The 
doctrines of the molecular constitution of substances, and 
the determination of the mechanical equivalent to heat, 
leading to the theory of the conservation of energy; and 
the fact of evolution have come to light. The phenomena 
of the atmosphere and meteorology have become nearly 
exact sciences. One discovery leads to another and science 
has been applied to a myriad of practical uses. 

4— Electricity came and now man has the telegraph, 
wireless and otherwise, the ocean cable, the electric rail¬ 
way, the telephone, the phonograph, the gramophone, the 
telantograph, the kinetoscope and the Roentgen rays. To¬ 
day electricity rings bells, opens and locks doors, lights 
and heats dwellings, drives fans, woi'ks sewing machines, 
does cooking and propels elevators. 

5— Steam came in with the Nineteenth Century. To¬ 
day there are over 500,000 miles of steam railway in the 
world, and the modern steam printing press folds, pastes 
and counts, 90,000 four-page, or 24,000 sixteen-page papers 
an hour. The typesetting machine is with us. The cotton 
and woolen industries have become maiwels; ice-making 
and refrigerating have sprung up, and not only have we 
the railways, but electric cars, horseless carriages, electric 
and gasoline. The air is navigated by balloons and flying 
machines. 

6— The sewing machine is here with its wonderful 
devices and attachments, and so also the typewriter. Elec¬ 
tric lights have taken the places of the tinder, flint and 
steel, and the tallow dip. Wonder succeeds wonder. In 
1813 the world was astonished when Westminster bridge 
was illuminated by gas; today great buildings and floating 
palaces glow with electric lights; electric light now ex¬ 
plores the depths of the ocean, and science has taught it 
to serve the surgeon. The combined uses of anaesthetics 
and antiseptics have revolutionized surgery, robbing the 
knife of its terrors. 

7 — Evolution has come to broaden the mind of man and 
open the way for higher discoveries. The secrets of the 
formation of the earth have been revealed. The discovery 
of the cell theory and the science of embryology, the germ 
theory of disease, and the white blood corpuscles have 
risen the practice of medicine to a broader function. Pas¬ 
teur and Koch have successfully combatted the most dreaded 
zymotic diseases, and put to flight the most deadly bacilli. 



106 


THE NEW IDEA. 


8— Metaphysics has given place to psychology and men 
and women are being taught to think according to scientific 
methods. Anthropology, philology, sociology and the sci¬ 
ence of religions have attained full stature through the tri¬ 
umph of the comparative method of study. History has de¬ 
veloped into philosophy, and revealed the past records and 
deeds of mankind. Slavery has been abolished and popular 
education is becoming universal. Reforms follow reforms 
and prisons and hospitals are evidences of humane prog¬ 
ress. Free libraries abound. Books are generally good, 
exceedingly abundant and very cheap. The news of the 
world may be had for a penny within a few hours of its 
happening, and for a few cents private letters are carried 
to the antipodes. 

9— The business of the agriculturist has been revo¬ 
lutionized from drudgery to a modern industry, with every 
possible labor-saving machinery. Mighty bridges span 
once thought impassible streams and chasms, and great 
canals are coming to shorten the circumnavigation of the 
earth. Steam and electricity have come with adequate 
machinery to revolutionize and expedite mining, and the 
science of metallurgy has increased the possibilities of the 
steel industry. 

10— Discovery has increased and developed the hab¬ 
itable portion of the globe, and in all the arts of peace and 
war man has moved marvelously forward. There have 
been wonderful improvements in' lighthouse and life saving 
ocean and sea devices, and the Red Cross physicians and 
nurses and hospital tents or ships follow army and navy. 

But these are only some of the principal features in our 
civilization which have been developed in the past century. 

As one contemplates the foregoing in the light of the 
fact that the whole, and many thousand fold more con¬ 
stitute the tone vestures of the mass form life of man¬ 
kind, it is revealed that by thought radiations—by think¬ 
ing, and thought expressions—of man, the human race 
is robing itself in a living vesture; an environment which 
is potentially alive; a system of circumstances, or a. 
civilization in the actuality of mass tone, only a small 
part of which, after all, is visible. 

Is not this wonderful mass tone vesture really an 
integral part of man? Is it not the highway of propaga¬ 
tion which man is casting up for his own evolution? 
Does it not presage a higher man ? Does not man really 
live in his works? Is he not by and through them, propa¬ 
gated to a higher life? Is not this marvellous vesture 
environment the real unfoldment of man into the fact of 
omniscience? 

Wherein, then, is the vesture, the tone, the life 
surroundings, the circumstances, the externalized part 
of man, to be considered less a part of the man, than any 
other part of his life? In nothing whatever to be sure. 

But, alas! and yet not alas! All this partly visible 
vesture of man is in the fact of symbolism. It appeals 




NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


107 


to us as certain that it is all in the potential functions of 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence. It is to mankind 
what the aura is to the unit form of life. It is all in the 
fact of mass tone. It is in the fact of the expressed 
thoughts of mankind. 

We can begin to see, from what has been said, that 
there is in actuality the mass tone life of the race, or that 
part of the race living at any one time in visible form; 
then follows a vision of the mass tone life of the race 
including those living in visible, and those living in 
invisible forms. That mass tone is the vesture environ¬ 
ment; it is what we call civilization; and it is in those 
functional potentialities by which men and women are 
propagated to higher invisible forms of life, where the 
race exists in a still higher mass tone life of which this 
partly visible environment is grandly symbolic, and into 
which it unfolds. Did I not say that the vesture is in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which are appro¬ 
priated to the propagation of visible forms to higher 
invisible forms? 

Now, all propagation of mass tone forms is by the 
unit tones composing them. The latter, each individually 
live, both before and after the fact. Man holds his place, 
as an identity both before, in, and after, propagation to 
the invisible mass tone life. Moreover relativity, from 
his personal standpoint, with all the other forms of life 
is maintained, but is continuously changing, according 
to his individual unfoldment. 

I have already referred to the invisible mass tone 
life of the race as in the fact of Universal Brotherhood, 
and that will be still further elaborated later. Now, as 
with the individuals, so also with the mass form. The 
quality of the latter depends upon the individual tones of 
the former. Mass tone life can rise only by the indi¬ 
vidual rise of its members. 

Man rises to the invisible mass tone life through 
and by his vesture environment, into consciousness, and, 
upon assuming that state, the environment concomitant 
to the life form which he has risen, will have risen also. 
The latter and the man are one life. 

It is in the plan of life that when man begins to 
function by his now invisible form of life in the new 
heaven and on the new earth, which are being propa¬ 
gated from these visible subvesture ones, he will so begin 
a new life in the fact that his now visible psychological 
organization will function spiritually and sentiently, as 
to faculty organism, and there will, simultaneously, 
therewith be begun the evolution of a higher set of 


108 


THE NEW IDEA. 


invisible psychological faculty organism. It will, 
in a way, be in the fact of history repeating itself on a 
higher scale. 

When the cells came forth from the Silurian Sea and 
sociologically organized, by propagation, into animal 
forms of life, physical organism rose in bodily form, 
and upon those sense functions, psychological faculty 
organism rose simultaneously. That work of propaga¬ 
tion, by sentient, spiritual and psychological thinking 
has been going on for ages, until visible man has reached 
his present summit of unfoldment. 

When invisible man leaves the visible subvestured 
unit body, and rises, with his invisible environment, to 
dwell in the first degree of restored dual individuality, 
in the full tone of the physical zone, his risen fluid ether 
life organization will be visible to himself and to others 
inhabiting that zone, and there will at once begin to 
unfold a higher invisible psychological faculty organiza¬ 
tion in correspondence with his present divided life. 

My vision of that state of primal dual individuality 
is not speculative. It comes of thought unfoldment, in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, and is founded, po¬ 
tentially, in Truth. That will be more fully explained. 
The entrance of the human life organization from phy¬ 
sical subvesture spheres to the full tone of the physical 
zone is attended with a set of transcendent life phe¬ 
nomena. In the first place there is a period of infancy, 
or that which corresponds to infancy in the present vis¬ 
ible race, which is confined to the formative stages of in¬ 
termediate spheres. 

Two mighty achievements are wrought in that 
period or sphere of propagation. The first is that of a 
reunion of the male and female forms of life in everlast¬ 
ing wedlock to and of which the Avedlock of subvesture 
life is both functional and symbolic. At the beginning of 
animal life, in the cellular unit world, dual unit forms 
of life were divided into separate male and female forms, 
which gave rise to the functional power of desire, and 
by which evolution took a wider range, than the vesture 
devolution which preceded it. The forms thus divided 
reunite in the glory of primal individuality at the 
threshold of full tone physical life. That wedlock is 
wrought by Principle, in the wonderful plan of life, for 
all human persons, who sufficiently unfold by thinking 
here; and the symbolic marriage union of physical sub¬ 
vesture spheres, in that way, enters upon the second de¬ 
gree of reality. 

That wonderful reunion is not the end, but the be- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


109 


ginning 1 , so to speak, of individual creation by thinking. 
In that transcendent mass tone embrace of wedlock, 
creation proceeds on a higher scale, and while forms of 
life no more beget their kind, they propagate higher 
forms in the orders of creation which must be left for 
future study. 

The second great achievement wrought by the birth 
into the full tone of our zone is the adjustment of the 
new duality. At present man is dual by the fact of the 
angel and the man. They dwell together in one form 
of subjective and objective life. The angel is the higher 
self—the spiritual side of a human life organization. At 
the entrance to the full tone physical zone, that duality 
moves upward, in consciousness, from the conditions of 
these spheres, one full tone. The subjective, or higher 
self, together with its sentient side, constituting the 
human duality, unfolds by the deliverance of its new 
etheric, now invisible body, from the visible one, in a 
death-birth, (until so-called death, as we now have it, is 
overcome), into the physical full tone of the Angel-Man, 
which is the first degree of the Risen Life. 

Man, in that new risen body is dual, as before, by the 
spiritual and celestial sides, but the duality becomes 
double by the higher marriage union—by the union into 
one form of life of the male and the female— but that 
double duality makes one in the individuality of Brother¬ 
hood. The forms of life, how r ever, are subjective and ob¬ 
jective all the way up the arc of evolution. 

In concluding this exercise I return to the subject of 
the risen environment. In what way do our works fol¬ 
low us? 

If man is propagated to a higher life—the now in¬ 
visible form of life—it must be the whole man, and not 
merely one part of him. We cannot consider man apart 
from his works any more than one can think of God 
apart from His works, especially when we already know 
that man and God are one and the same fact—one dis¬ 
tinctly in the potentialities of man. 

It may as well be bluntly stated that when the per¬ 
sonal forms of life of these subvesture spheres stand 
forth in the enlarged and purified Consciousness of pri¬ 
mal individuality, in the full tone of the physical zone, 
everything of degrees of wisdom and intelligence which 
we have here will be visible there, but in a risen environ¬ 
ment, in a higher vesture civilization, corresponding to 
the risen man. Both will have risen together. It is the 
same as saying that risen man is in a higher degree of 


110 


THE NEW IDEA. 


omniscience, or in higher degrees of wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence. 

In that state, vision will behold all things present in 
the clear, transparent light of physical ether. Subves¬ 
ture substance will have been left behind, with all error 
and illusion inherent in it. Our present subvesture phys¬ 
ical bodies will also have been left behind, with all the 
evil, vice, disease and sickness common to them, but the 
substance of our present Consciousness,, that is to say, 
the substance of our present invisible physchological or¬ 
ganizations will constitute the lower dual form of our 
new life organizations, and all the potentialities of life 
will rise with that, and as aforetime, continue functional, 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, for further unfold- 
ment towards Truth. 

The new dual life organizations, in the primal state 
of individuality (will), busy themselves in carrying for¬ 
ward the higher tones of their risen environment to still 
higher potentialities. In other terms the work of life 
unfoldment, by thinking, will continue, until complete 
Omniscience is reached, or until the infinite knowledge, 
and powers which man already possesses are fully un¬ 
folded into Absolute life. 

And now the student eagerly asks, what are the 
relativity and interdependence between life in those full 
tone spheres and life in these subvesture potentialities? 
Is it all one and the same life, and is not the whole grand 
picture of the higher or risen life in the reality of a sys¬ 
tem of ideals towards which man thinks himself to 
greater degrees of Omniscience right here on the earth, 
as it is in the everyday common sense understanding of 
things ? 



EXERCISE XI. 


REALITY OF IDEAS. 

Substance of thoughts and Ideas—Old philosophy of 
Idealism resolved to the new—The reality of man, 
past, present and future—Principle the primal and 
only Thinker—Ideals proceed from Principle and 
Man unfolds into them—Ideals propagated by de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence are potentially in 
Truth—Error and evil are unreal except in result. 


WHAT are ideals? We have said that a symbol is 
a visible sign of an idea. That is the same as saying 
that a symbol is an idea externalized. A symbol is also a 
sign by which one infers a thing. An idea is that which 
exists in thought. It is an image of something. It can¬ 
not be nothing. There is a philosophy, which is by no 
means scientific, called Idealism, which is a system, or 
theory, that denies the existence of material bodies, and 
teaches that we have no rational grounds to believe in 
the reality of anything but ideas and their relations. 
Hence the so-called doctrine of Idealism. It is said in 
science that ideal is unreal, but that is said in relativity. 

Can we get at the bottom and find out what is real? 
Is anything real? Scientific philosophy says that Being 
is real; that Truth is real. But we have our key in Prin¬ 
ciple. We must go to Principle, which is the open door 
to the real—to God. Principle is the primal source, or 
origin; it is that from which all things proceed; it is 
the ultimate element, or cause; it is the primal faculty 
of life; it stands with one foot in the real and the other 
in life and is the connecting link between Being and the 
Universe of life. 

We have already seen and shall yet see even more 
definitely that Principle is the primal Thinker of our 
universe. As cause, Principle thinks. It could not be 
cause in any other way. When we speak of the oscilla¬ 
tions of Principle, that is the same as saying that Prin¬ 
ciple, by its polar duality, thinks. With each process of 
the thinking of Principle a brand new thought is born in 
form and tone, which had no previous existence except 
in the potentialities of the Source of life. 

We have seen that by the oscillations of Principle, a 
unit form of life—a thought— an idea—in Truth was 
born. Now, is it not plain to psychological vision, that 

(HI) 



112 


THE NEW IDEA. 


when one thinks in the plan of life as unfolded by Prin¬ 
ciple—that when one thinks in that science which is the 
application of Principle to the process—the result of such 
thinking is in the birth of thoughts which, although in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, are potentially in 
Truth ? 

We see at once that an idea, if propagated by Prin¬ 
ciple is in Truth, although as with man, it may be only 
potentially so. One thing is self evident. It is that all 
the Truth we can appreciate is in our ideals. We cannot 
rise to Truth, and behold it face to face, except by un- 
foldment through thinking in degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence. We thus unfold to ideals propagated from 
Principle. That Principle resides in us, and although we 
are in a potential state, Principle is the same in the 
least as in the greatest things. Principle changeth not. 

It is admitted, of course, that man may think in 
error. In short, I readily admit that, for the greater 
part, man, in these lower spheres, thinks in error. But 
I teach and steadfastly hold to the doctrine that 
the present partly unfolded psychological organism 
of man, may, in desire, choice, motive and the will think 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, so that the new 
born thoughts propagated thereby will be in the reality 
of ideas functional to the evolution of Truth—to the 
real. 

It is evident that we can comprehend—rise into— 
Truth, only by thinking; hence ideals are the functional 
powers by which our potentialities are unfolded. It is 
true that the processes of that unfoldment are in degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, and that there are as many 
of those degrees between us and Truth, as there are 
tones, but there is no other method in Principle. 

It is equally evident that by thinking in degrees of 
wdsdom and intelligence, we not only propagate ideas, 
but unfold to and become those ideas. Thus it is that 
man creates his own God, Who is, to him, purely ideal, 
and thus creating he becomes the real God. Therefore 
the questions put into the mouth of the student in the 
concluding sentences of the last chapter are fully an¬ 
swered, to wit: “Yes, the life above and the life below 
are both one life, and the whole grand picture of the 
higher or risen life is in the reality of a system of ideals 
toward which man thinks himself to greater degrees of 
Omniscience right here on the earth, as it is in the 
everyday common sense understanding of things.’' 

But we really become our ideals. They are the pure 
form tones of life which Father-Mother Principle propa- 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


113 


gates to psychological vision, through our thinking, 
and they are in the fact of Faith by which we are shown 
things to come. 

If our chosen ideals are not real neither is God real. 
Both are to us potentially real. In our search for the 
real where shall we go? Shall we go to rising man, who 
changes his mass tone life with each breath? Shall we 
go to man’s environment, which shines in the glory of 
progress, but which changes the hues and tints of its 
brilliancy with each thought vibration of the race? 
Shall we go to esse, the source of life, which is unfold¬ 
ing through Principle, and through man to the Greater 
God of our rising ideals? Shall we go backward or for¬ 
ward? Yea, forward! 

Beyond the horizon of our purest and highest ideals, 
where the illusions of the setting sun are dispelled in an 
immortal noon-dav; beyond the potential vestures of 
time and sense; as far beyond human ideals of God and 
glory as the infinite orbit of life can reach. There in 
a land where unfolding ideals unfold no more—there is 
the real. It is not behind us in a human Ideal God; it 
is not present with us, or in us, in our slavery destroy¬ 
ing belief in a living over-ruling God; it is not in the 
first nor in the second resurrection of our hopes. Where 
is it? Where, 0, where, is the real. It is grandly and 
transcendently in the God which man already is, and the 
Greater God which he is hourly and evermore becoming. 

Yea! Man is real—the only real thing in the uni¬ 
verse ! Everything which goes to make up the sum of 
his incomprehensible life is real. His aspirations are 
real. His ideals are real. The potentialities of his inner 
and vesture life are real. His past is real; his present 
is real; his future is real, and he is transcendently real in 
the Eternal Now. 

There is nothing unreal in or connected with the life 
of man, save and except error, but even that is potential 
of Truth. Truly man is “conceived in sin and brought 
forth in iniquity.” That symbolic utterance character¬ 
izes the conditions of functional error and its long train 
of afflictions which enter the life of man at his Cel¬ 
lular birth, and until now provided him with a simple 
problem for solution, to-wit: The exercise of his po¬ 
tential powers in the effectual denial of their existence. 
In the solution of that simple proposition man demon¬ 
strates his reality and the non-existence, except in the 
fact of result, of his so-called enemies. 

The unreal condition of human life is all wrapped 
up in the word error, and when man has unfolded to 


114 


THE NEW IDEA. 


its final overthrow, it will die, and he will have only the 
existence of its results to enjoy. 

Yes, all but error in the life of man is real. The 
children of error are fear, evil, disease, sickness and 
death. All these are unreal. They are false, but their 
conquest, which is in the fact of their denial, is func¬ 
tional to man’s unfoldment in degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence, which are also real. 

From what has been said it is seen that both the 
here and the hereafter are real. The past is real; the 
present is real; the future is real. They are in relativity. 
The one cannot be without the other. The present is the 
all of the other two; so is the future. All three are re¬ 
solved to the Eternal Now. 

He who raises the ideals of the present enriches the 
realities of the future. The realities of the future are 
but the unfoldment of mankind to the ideals of the pres¬ 
ent. The higher the race casts its ideals the grander 
and more glorious the heaven of the future will be. Man 
creates his own future by unfolding into his present 
ideals. He can never raise above the standards of his 
successively higher ideals, but he will continue to realize 
them as he rises through successive degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, until, beholding the face of a once 
Ideal God he will see his own in the Living God. 


EXERCISE XII. 


THINKING. 

Organism of ideas, which, in physics, are called mole¬ 
cules— Anaiagy of single thoughts to atoms—Or¬ 
ganic life of units—Thinking is propagation—Geom¬ 
etry of Principle—Principle the source of form— 
Significance of the Science of number—Life unfold- 
ment is by thinking—Straight and curved lines sym¬ 
bolic of Power and Love, Intelligence and Wisdom. 

IN the previous exercises I have endeavored to con¬ 
struct a general premises, the data of which is unfolded 
from Principle. However, that data by no means con¬ 
stitutes the whole plan of life. I have chosen to divide 
the premises into two parts, the second to be in the facts 
of a reconstruction and extension of the first part. By 
this method, having studied the first, the student will the 
more readily understand, accept and appropriate the 
second. Thus, by two general stages, or efforts, we will 
rise to our humble summit. 

A good deal has already been said concerning the 
constituent organism of thoughts, which I have made 
interchangeable with unit form tones of life. Of course, 
I hold to the doctrine that all substances, visible and in¬ 
visible are life, not merely imbued with the principle of 
life, but are by their units and mass bodies in the reality 
of life potentially. 

Science, in the Nineteenth Century, rose to the 
vision that all “matter” is of molecular constitution, or 
that it exists bj r its molecular units. Of course I lay no 
claim to that discovery. I do lay claim to the discovery 
of the unit constitution of those units, and partly to the 
individuality, and to the personality of both. I have ar¬ 
ranged a proper order for unit organism, and determined 
the number of tones in the primal, or most simple forms 
of each. 

For instance, I hold that the so-called ultimate 
atom is in ten tones; that the substare of that atom, or 
primal thought, contains three tones; that the atom or 
single thought is in the first degree of organism; that the 
so-called molecule—the primal, simplest one—is in the 
second degree of Harmony with thirty tones; that the 
simplest corpuscle contains three molecules, and is there¬ 
fore in the third degree of unit organism, with ninety 

(115) 


116 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tones; and that the cell contains twelve classes of mole¬ 
cules, and is in the fifth degree of unit organism with three 
hundred and sixty different classes of tones. 

I have omitted the crystal, which is a unit form of 
life, in the fourth degree of unit organism, with an un¬ 
known number of tones, because I have not as yet fully 
solved the organism and functions of that beautiful crea- 
true. 

It is to be regretted that in our modern text books 
on chemistry, the unit forms of life, although, of course 
regarded only as “matter,” are not referred to by name 
in their proper relations with their neighbors of dif¬ 
ferent organism. For example a student’s high school 
chemistry, of the experimental type, speaks of molecules 
of water. Water is a compound, and constituents of com¬ 
pounds are corpuscles. Similar errors abound, but it 
may be hoped that improvements will be wrought in 
these respects. 

I do not expect science to admit, without some delay, 
the organic life of all the units which are prior to the 
cell, as it graciously does in the case of that form tone, 
but it is gratifying to notice that the latest text-books 
on physics are free from all references to a “dead world,” 
such as disfigure standard works on human physiology. 
But of course they unfortunately hold to the view that 
all unit substance behind the cell, or that which existed 
prior to it, is inorganic. I claim, I say, the discovery that 
all constituents of substance are organic and that they 
are in the fact of life. Other important discoveries which 
are partly elaborated in this volume, as well as those .al¬ 
ready mentioned will sooner or later find their places iu 
“recognized” science. 

In all references to life units in this volume, they are 
properly regarded as real thoughts, and as minute indi¬ 
viduals, and persons, respectively, each in the fact of 
conscious wisdom and intelligence; but while this vision 
will rapidly find place in scientific philosophy, conserva¬ 
tive science will put up the bars against it, until its vo¬ 
taries are themselves a little more unfolded in the plan 
of life as it is by Principle. 

With the foregoing data partly formulated, I now 
ask the student’s attention to the study of methods of 
thinking. We have before us the source of thoughts— 
primal thoughts—in the fact of Principle; also the tone 
organism of those thoughts. We know that the thoughts 
to which our thinking gives birth are of the same sub¬ 
stances and are in precisely the same functional organ¬ 
ism. 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


117 


Thoughts are propagated by thinking. Thinking is, 
therefore, a process of propagation. Nothing can be 
propagated into life—into a form tone of life—except by 
the joint activity of the poles of Principle, properly 
called the male and female principles, which are the two 
sides or poles of their parent dual form of Primordial 
Life. 

Principle, by its two children is a marvelous source 
of form. That fact must be impressed, and we must have 
considerable latitude for the somewhat difficult task. The 
student may be aware of the wonderful elaboration of 
forms, and the relativity thereof, one with the other, and 
their relative proportions in equations and otherwise, in 
the science of geometry, as taught from early times, and 
as enlarged by modern applications. Again, the student 
is more or less acquainted with the vast range and prac¬ 
tical application of mathematics, or the science of num¬ 
bers, in which additions, subtractions, multiplications, 
divisions, proportions and equations follow fast, one on 
the heels of the other, until the mind is lost in a maze of 
problem. 

Whence all these and the other sciences ? They came 
forth into rising life by the oscillations of the God-Man 
called Principle. He, resourceful old soul, is the father- 
mother of all our sciences, and a thousand more to come. 
It is a fact that the oscillations of Principle describe 
every form which can be evolved in the whole range of 
geometry, developed, or as yet, undeveloped. Down deep 
in the great heart of that grand old Prince of Form, all 
the figures possible to the infinite applications of the 
straight and the curved lines have dwelt potentially 
since the birth of life. Nothing of science, nor philoso¬ 
phy, nothing whatever of life has or ever can proceed 
from any other source. 

It is a fact that the oscillations of Principle pro¬ 
vide every item in the whole sweep of mathematics, or 
the science of number. There is one mighty fact grow¬ 
ing out of that statement which I greatly desire to im¬ 
press on the very heart of the student. It is this: The 
science of number is, at the last analysis, resolved to 
the relativity and interdependence of the infinite variety 
of the unit forms of life—thoughts—which have come 
are now coming, and will forever come forth, in propaga¬ 
tion. from, by and in the oscillations of Principle. 

It is the exclusive, the only, business of mathe¬ 
matics, to search out, place, number, measure, weigh, 
soimd, test, assemble by proportion and unite by equa¬ 
tion, all the thoughts—unit forms of life—whose variety 


118 


THE NEW IDEA. 


is infinite, thrice infinite, as they pour forth into the 
universe to expand and glorify it, from the resourceful 
heart of Principle. Hereafter, dear reader, when you 
study the science of number, in any of its many ap¬ 
plications, remember that you are adjusting your own 
life, in the measure of the success of that study, to the 
plan of life as it is in Principle; that you are at some 
point on the orbit of life counting up, and assembling the 
units of life in proportion. Such is the infinitude of 
mathematics; such the sweep of its child called geometry. 

It is not necessary to go further on this line. The 
object already has been accomplished in the fact that it 
must be clear to vision that Principle is the real primal 
thinker in our universe. All thoughts are easily traced 
to that one and only source. Not only is that a fact, but 
the thought resources of Principle are inexhaustible. 
Principle gave birth to the first thought and the last 
thought. 

Principle is a thought maker, and in that way a life 
builder. He is the same yesterday, today and forever. 
He is the substaxe of each and every form of life in 
our universe. He is in each man and woman, and lo! his 
infinite resources are yours. I have said that man al¬ 
ready possesses infinite knowledge, and all that remains 
for him to do is to unfold that knowledge into Con¬ 
sciousness. With Principle as the soul and centre of life, 
man’s advance to infinite heights of glory is assured. 

Man’s course—the plan of his life—is clear before 
him. He has but to think according to such methods as 
are revealed by Principle, and thus thinking, his unfold- 
ment is sure to follow. Moreover, the speed of that 
unfoldment is wholly dependent upon the skill with 
which he thinks. It is not that he shall feel his way 
upward, but rather that he shall think. Thinking must 
be prior to feeling, else the feeling will be with consum¬ 
ing glow. 

The study of proper methods of thinking is resolved 
to experimental psychology—to the use of the faculties 
which we already possess in order that they be further 
developed, and new functions evolved. In this work of 
life unfoldment we must first bring to vision the tech¬ 
nique of the processes of thinking as revealed in the 
oscillations of Principle. 

It is pointed out here that Principle, with its two 
poles of propagation is not a machine. It is not in the 
fact of mechanism. Mechanics are, to be sure, symbolic 
of organism, and yet, in Principle, they are resolved to 
one thing, except that the one is the outward sign, the 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


119 


other the inward life. There is the same difference be¬ 
tween Monism and Christianity. 

Thinking of Principle as an individual form of life, 
and as standing at the dawn of life unfoldment, we note 
its primal organism, in the positive and negative poles 
of propagation. All other life organism is within its 
form potentially. In ancient Chinese geometry there is 
developed a system of forms, or figures, correlated with 
life unfoldment from Principle. It is beautiful and in¬ 
structive. As with Principle, all the forms and fig¬ 
ures deduced are in applications of the straight and 
curved lines. The system referred to starts with the 
Great Principle. Then follows the Two Principles much 
as we have them in this work. 

In our plan we say that the straight line is the Posi¬ 
tive, and the curved line, the Nlegative Principle. It is 
true that the oscillations of the Two Poles of Principle 
describe every form and figure possible to infinite geom¬ 
etry. I know of no other language with which to ade¬ 
quately express the fact. Moreover, the number and va¬ 
riety of these forms are also infinite. By human think¬ 
ing many of these forms, in demonstration of proposition 
and theorem, have been outlined, and formulated into a 
broad and useful system of study, called geometry. By 
the thinking—oscillations-^-of Principle, all those forms, 
or the forms of which those are mere mechanical sym¬ 
bols, and millions more, are propagated to substance life, 
from its eternal source, in the fact of individual units, pos¬ 
sessing form tones in the actuality of conscious wisdom 
and intellience. That is the transcendent achievement at 
the very threshold of life. Truly the creation of the 
units involves the highest creative skill. That work ac¬ 
complished all that follows is comparatively easy. “And 
the sheep follow him, for they know his voice.” Prin¬ 
ciple is the shepherd; the sheep are the unit forms of life. 

Prom what has been said it is seen that Principle 
resides in every unit form of life as a substare, and in 
the mass tone thereof, as the central life force in each 
human life organization. It is by that primal and inmost 
germinating organism that men and women think in the 
work of life unfoldment. It is in the nature of life that 
thinking is continuous, except that, sentiently, the pro¬ 
cess is suspended during sleep. That function will be ex¬ 
plained later. In all the stages of devolution and evolu¬ 
tion up to man, in which, first, the worlds or heavens 
were propagated, and then plant and animal forms of 
life were evolved, thinking was automic, commonly so- 
called, but in reality, by the conscious intelligence and 


120 


THE NEW IDEA. 


wisdom of thought organisms, and, primarily, by the in¬ 
finite potentialities of Principle. But, when the evolution 
of life has reached that stage in which the units have 
propagated an effective working psychological organism, 
thinking may be carried on, and is conducted, in voli¬ 
tion, or in degrees of wisdom and intelligence of the mass 
tone life. That is wherein man rises, or begins to rise, to 
conscious creative functions. It is wherein the faculty 
functions of man harness and train, to their practical 
use and systematic unfoldment, the whole organism of 
Principle in precisely the same way, metaphorically 
speaking, that man subdues electricty to his service. 

It is one of the marvels of the plan of life that in 
the human status, man takes possession of—actually cap¬ 
tures—and himself operates, the wonderful organism of 
life, by which he is created up to that point, in the work 
of building his grand form to his own sweet will and 
choice. That is a remarkable turning point in life. It 
is wherein man appropriates the Ideal God to human 
servitude. 

It would, no doubt, be interesting and instructive 
to note the functions of Power and Love in the oscilla¬ 
tions of Principle. It is true that the male and female 
poles of Principle are also, in process, in the actuality of 
Power and Love. It is by those functions that degrees 
of intelligence and wisdom are propagated. Metaphor¬ 
ically, Power is the strait line, and cannot be said to be 
of utility in life until curbed, or curved, by Love. Love 
is the negating, restraining force, which makes Power her 
obedient captive to the propagation of form. It is evi¬ 
dent that form could not be propagated from a straight 
line, but by the curving 1 process, form is brought forth. 
Hence it is that a straight line is resolved to a circle 
in Love, which is very life. 

In the oscillations of the poles of Principle, Power 
is the straight line, and Love, with Power embraced 
within her transcendent form is the curved line, and thus 
with each oscillation—embrace and divorce—of Power 
and Love, a form of life is propagated in substance, 
which, as the student can quite plainly see, is in the 
tones of intelligence and wisdom. Thus there is a dual 
propagation. Power propagates intelligence and Love re¬ 
solves it to wisdom. Intelligence is the rugged son of 
Power; Wisdom the loving daughter of Love. The two 
are forever inseparable—ther are one distinctly. 

That is, perhaps, as far as it is necessary to go at 
present with the scientific technique of the processes 
of thinking in their primal stages. When we reach the 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


121 


realm of volition, the processes of thinking, as in hu¬ 
mans, become more delightfully complex. In the latter, 
a greater number of unfolded psychological functions 
are employed. I have, therefore, laid the foundations. 
We see the interdependent tone relations of thought or¬ 
ganisms ; we see the methods of their propagation, or 
creation; we must next come to see tlieir wonderful 
creative powers in fellowship. 


EXERCISE XIII. 


FELLOWSHIP OF THOUGHTS. 

Creation needs no outside g-uiding force—All necessary 
Power, Intelligence and Wisdom are inherent in the 
units—Creation is not in a mere union of thoughts, 
but by propagation in fellowship—By the fellowship 
of thoughts new-born thoughts Proceed—When 
wisely chosen thoughts are propagated in one’s life 
organization that form of life becomes Beautiful. 


DOES Principle turn loose into life myriads of units 
to work out, by their inherent wisdom and intelligence, 
the great problem of creation, or was a guiding and con¬ 
trolling power sent with them to function as the chief 
architect of fortune? Both ideas are in fact, because, in 
propagation the forms of life, by which new forms come 
forth, proceed into the things propagated. 

I repeat. Principle is the same in all forms of life, 
in the least as in the greatest. It transmits its potential¬ 
ities to each creature of its creation. It is by the wisdom 
and intelligence of the units that life is what it is today, 
and w r liat it is destined to become. No outside force is 
granted or required. Each unit is a little God, and as 
an epitome of the whole, containes within itself, and in 
the functions of fellowship with all the others, all that 
is or can be in the plan of life. 

The last sentence brings us face to face with our 
present subject, the fellowship of thoughts. A single 
unit—a single thought—although born of Principle, does 
not contain the whole of its parent form of life. You 
are not the all of God, even potentially. It requires all 
the units that have been, or ever will be propagated into 
life to comprise the all of Principle. In truth Principle 
is eternal and infinite in resource. 

Hence the relativity and interdependence of thoughts 
— of the unit forms of life. No one is the all, except by 
fellowship—except by the surpassing function of what 
we call Brotherhood. The plan of life is that those 
infinite units shall unite, not only by themselves, but by 
propagation to other units, in one organism of Harmony, 
by degrees of organism corresponding with the functions 
of progress. It is a fact that a single thought can do 
nothing by itself for self. In that regard it is powerless. 
It might sing its tone-song, and glow T in beauty by its 

( 122 ) 






NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


123 


tone-color alone forevermore, and no result in progress 
could follow. In that sense the unit is but a small frac¬ 
tion fef Principle. It is by association, by the sociological 
bond, that it functions, and in no other way. 

What is the sociological bond—the bond of Brother¬ 
hood? It consists in the fact that a life unit can make 
progress in Harmony only by harmonizing with others. 
The element of Harmony does not, and cannot exist in 
one distinctly. Two or more are necessary to the fact of 
Harmony. That is because the full functions of life are 
not in one, except in that unutterable One which is the 
source of life. 

Fellowship is an industry of borrowing and lending; 
of giving and taking; of actual swapping this for that, 
and that for this; it is a traffic of properties. One has 
a surplus of certain properties of which another is defi¬ 
cient, and vice versa; hence exchange follows. I have 
already referred to the barter and trade of the unit 
forms of life, but now we shall come to see the fuller 
functions of that commerce. In that vision we shall also 
see the foundations of Brotherhood. 

A question rises at this point, Will not that com¬ 
merce of properties resolve the units to exact similarity? 
Will they not compensate each other in mutual traffic 
until each one will become an exact counterpart of all 
the others, and the whole scheme fall short of ideal crea¬ 
tion? Wherein is the element of progress? It is in the 
order of progress and the methods of propagation. Let 
us examine those phenomena carefully. In the first stages 
of that fellowship three units, because of their respective 
tones, come together. Why do they unite ? It is because 
each of the three is in a certain tone, or rate of oscillation, 
so that when they unite there will be such a chemical 
unison of their respective tones that mass tone, or prop¬ 
agation will result. Thus the units seek each other by 
their respective tones. When three or more unite, as 
stated, they propagate to another form of life in powers 
differing from the original. Thus the atoms, or unit 
thoughts chemically united, by their tones, are propa¬ 
gated to molecules, the vestures coming forth to corre¬ 
spond to the necessities of each succeeding form of life. 

Thus fellowship continues, not only of the primal 
units, but until what we call physical corpuscles are prop¬ 
agated. Thus mass tone is extended and expanded, even 
in the successive degrees of unit organism. This goes 
forward until the ceil is born. Now, it must be remem¬ 
bered that, as can plainly be seen from these items of 
progress, Harmony is not accomplished alone by the 


124 


THE NEW IDEA. 


barter in the respective properties of the units, nor by 
their mere association, or combination, but by a union 
of the things propagated by Principle—by thinking. 
Hence, the units which combine to produce mass tone 
Harmony are quite different from their parental unit 
forms of life. 

I have established five grades of those new units 
which come forth from the fellowship of thoughts, and 
there are probably many more. It is seen, therefore, that 
real progress is inherent in propagation by the units. One 
can easily see that to be the case with the community of 
human forms of life. The rise of the whole is in the 
unfoldment of the respective members. 

We work out a problem in mathematics by combina¬ 
tions of units, and by arranging them in proportions, 
and by equations, until we resolve them to a. certain 
fixed and unalterable conclusion. That conclusion is in 
the fact of progress. It is in the fact of symbolic prop¬ 
agation, symbolizing the higher problem of life progress. 
The fellowship of numbers in the science of mathematics, 
by which conclusions are reached in the solution of prop¬ 
ositions, is about the same as with units, or numbers, in 
the science of life. It is an onward and an upward move¬ 
ment called the progress of propagation. It never re¬ 
turns to the facts with which the start is made. The 
result is always something different. 

Hence, in the higher mathematics wrought by Prin¬ 
ciple in life unfoldment, there is found in each conclu¬ 
sion, or in each problem solved, corresponding to the 
different grades of Harmony organism, something new 
which is in the fact of creation. As the life units unite, 
each Harmony point reached propagates a new form of 
life, with powers differing from even that of the com¬ 
bined originals in mass tone. 

As I study the fellowship of thoughts, and the won¬ 
derful creations thus achieved, I am thrilled and trans¬ 
ported by the riches of Principle, which are thus building 
through us such a matchless structure of imperishable 
life. As we come to realize that we are indispensable 
and everlasting members of that mighty organism; our 
hearts bound with joy and gladness, giving birth to 
new and still more beautiful thoughts. Such is the 
transcendent way of life. The more of life we appropri¬ 
ate, the more and more beautiful forms of life we prop¬ 
agate to swell the mighty procession. 

If we could find Immortality in nothing else, we see 
it in the full bloom of magnificence in the never ending 
sweep of propagation. Its mighty stream of life, rising 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


125 


in an ideal fountain of eternity, sweeps on, rolls on, wid¬ 
ening and deepening in its mighty flood of augmenting 
Harmony, preserving the infinite form tones of each of 
its imperishable units, until, Absolute in the Omniscience 
of glory, we see ourselves living, healthy, happy, ambi¬ 
tious, created and creating constituents of a Real God. 

Who shall formulate for us a language, each letter 
and word of which shall be in the fact of life, with which 
to express the potential riches of Brotherhood? Who? 
You and I are to provide that mode of expression by our 
respective life forces, by our actions. How? Think in 
Principle and we shall live in Principle. Character and 
conduct are but expressions of thought processes. The 
visible is but a symbol of the real which is invisible. 
To think right is to live right. You cannot dam back 
the flood expression of right thinking, any more than 
you can strangle the shams of conduct, the outflow of 
evil thinking! Cleanse the fountain, and the stream is 
pure. 

From these observations we readily see the supreme 
importance of our being trained in scientific methods of 
thinking. Without that training exhortation must fall 
very short of its work. It is easy to awaken the flow of 
an emotional tide within a human life organization, but 
that will not abide unless it flow from the controlled 
oscillation of Principle within the heart. We must think 
to unfoldment, each one for self, and the feelings thus 
propagated will survive through every storm. But if 
our feelings flow from the thoughts of others, they will 
fade and die with the dying sounds of the spoken words. 

We must now apply ourselves, patiently, and dili¬ 
gently and persistently to the appropriation of experi¬ 
mental psychology—to thinking in Principle, which is 
the only plan of life. It has been said that a religion, 
or a Christianity which is not experimental—which is 
not appropriated in and propagated from one’s life or¬ 
ganization is not worth possessing. It is the very same 
with psychology, or with anything else. We must become 
the thing sought, or we will never attain to its use. One 
cannot develop a psychological faculty already partly 
unfolded, or give birth or unfoldment to a new one, 
except as that development and that birth become an 
integral part of that one’s life. 

Dear Ideal Father-Mother, God, Thou art 
the Fountain of life. Thou art in us; yea! 
we are Thee in partly unfolded potentiality. 

Dwell in our hearts, 0, Thou Principle of 


126 


THE NEW IDEA. 


life, until we shall, by Thee be unfolded into 
the full glory of the Real God. Help us to 
look forward, not backward, in efforts to 
behold Thy face. Thou are the Goal of life. 

Thou art ever present in expanding reality, 
and as we rise in unfolding degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence, we are Thee forever¬ 
more. 

The foregoing expression of desire, in subjective 
Consciousness, is itself a study. It breathes in the spirit 
of this new system of thinking, and, the committing of 
it to memory, in the understanding, will afford a good 
text for more than one thinking Exercise. 


EXERCISE XIY. 


PSYCHOLOGICAL PROCESSES. 

Progress of Psychology—Experimental Psychology—Ad¬ 
vances in human progress—Functions of the adven¬ 
turer in thinking—Molecular and cellular thinking— 
The human point in evolution—Characteristics of 
Our Ideal God—Unfoldment is by thinking in the 
use of faculties—Organ and Faculty Building—Con¬ 
sciousness and the Will—Purifying the Heart. 


IF WE were to trace, in their proper order, the evo¬ 
lution of the physiological and psychological organs and 
faculties, respectively, of the human life organization, 
including the technique of their unfoldment, we would 
most effectually bring to vision the different methods of 
thinking by which those achievements of creation have 
been accomplished, and, from such laborious deductions, 
we would be able to project the system into future use, 
but that would require many volumes of the scope of 
this one. Therefore the task is beyond present possibil¬ 
ities. 

The plan here referred to has not yet been worked 
out, in science, so far as the author is aware. Psychology 
has, to some extent, been reduced to science. Useful text 
books have been devised and considerable headway has 
been made, but man has not, as yet, sufficiently unfolded 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence to formulate any¬ 
thing like an effective system of experimental psychology. 
Even if such were possible, in our generation, the labor 
involved would not be rewarded, except in the gener¬ 
osity of a somewhat distant future. The demand of the 
hour appears to be a rudimentary plan, correlated with 
the unfoldment of Principle, step by step, so far as pos¬ 
sible, with what has been achieved in creation, and more 
( 127 ) 




128 


THE NEW IDEA. 


particularly with reference to the future stages of life 
building. 

The science of psychology is somewhat new, com¬ 
paratively speaking. It is true that psychological unfold- 
ment is prior to physical development, but those life data 
are all peculiar to the invisible worlds. Man attacks 
everything with the weapon of science on its physical, or 
lowest side. lie naturally invades life on the plane of 
his own visible body. There is wherein he is most at 
home. As long as he can feel, taste, smell, hear and see, 
he is standing on solid ground, and promulgates his de¬ 
ductions in the actuality of suggestion as food for the 
evolution of the race. 

That is not to be deplored at all. We most effect¬ 
ually function, always, in the substance of that zone from 
which we draw our bodily form clothing. It is the out¬ 
most and is generally visible, if not by units, then by 
their mass. Nevertheless, herer and there along the high¬ 
way of life, a man will rise and function in advance 
of his fellows. His teachings will not meet with much 
attention by the generation from which they started, but 
as the years roll by, they begin to germinate, and by the 
time man has reached a plane on their level, they will 
become of general utility. That is said in respect of the 
masses. Of course there are always a formidable number 
in the skirmish lines of human progress, who persist in 
throwing themselves into the face of danger, in order 
that the multitude, which follows, may be advised of 
pitfalls, and may profit by adventurous experiments. If 
one of the picket line fall over a precipice and is dashed 
to pieces on the hungry rocks below, the conservative 
marcher avoids that way, and in doing so, seldom fails 
to credit his personal good sense, rather than the misfor¬ 
tune of the mistaken pioneer. 

History, however, shows us that the trails blazed 
by daring pioneers, later become permanent highways of 
transportation. It is in the plan of life that some will 
venture ahead—venture upon uncertain ground. The 
oldest routes of travel in our world, physically and psy¬ 
chologically speaking, were once the trails of daring 
adventurers. The more conservative life builders, at first, 
disparaged those routes, but after a considerable multi¬ 
tude had traveled that way, and were not injured, they 
themselves adopted the course, but generally in more com¬ 
fortable conveyances. 

It is for the most part the unselfish man who for¬ 
sakes the doctrinal firesides of his fathers, and plunges 
ahead into new fields of thought. His lead is not always 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


129 


followed, but if not, his failure is a functional warning. 
In either event his venture is in the service of humanity. 
Much, however, depends upon the motives, as well as 
the sagacity of the adventurer. When those are in tune 
with the spirit of life progress, the tent of human expe¬ 
rience may safely be pitched a little further ahead. That, 
much has been said as a cover of defense for that which 
follows. 

It is generally held that there are two great methods 
of thinking common to the unfoldraent of Principle. The 
first applies to the devolution and evolution of the forms 
of life from the birth of Principle to the birth of its 
child, called Man; the second applies to Man only. That 
division, it is claimed, is strongly marked by a certain 
degree of unfoldment of the Will. We shall not indulge 
in any controversy as to just where and when, or in 
what species the will began to function. I simply affirm 
that the Will functioned in Primordial Principle, and has 
established an unbroken rule from the birth of the first 
unit form of life, until this hour, and that its sway will 
continue forever and ever. The primal organism of 
Principle included the faculty of the will. Of course 
all faculty functions are potentially in Principle, and the 
order of their unfoldment corresponds to the order of 
degrees of organism. That is true of both molecular 
and cellular forms of life. 

It is claimed that there is a certain Harmony point 
reached in the evolution of life which marks its forms 
as human. That is easily discovered. There are five 
races of pre-human man, from the last of which the 
human race is evolved. There is no similarity, or but 
very little, between humans and the ape tribes, which 
are regarded as the highest mammal race from which 
pre-human man was unfolded. 

But the human point, in life unfoldment, must not 
be confounded with that important line which marks 
the advent of “years of understanding,” in which youth 
begin to think in volition, desire, choice and motive. Of 
course infants are born into the human state, but as to 
the dawn of that propagation, an explanation is given 
elsewhere in this volume. 

Much is necessary to be said preparatory to teaching 
exact, methods of thinking. Much has already been said, 
but I must venture upon this “New Psychology,” with 
much care. We must have further foundations in Prin¬ 
ciple. To that end we once more resume consideration 
of the primal organism of the first complete form of life 
in Truth, which is propagated from the embrace of the 




130 


THE NEW IDEA. 


Two Principles. We have seen that a very life unit, or 
thought, contains, by way of functional potentialities, or 
embryos organism, all the attributes of our Ideal God. 
I will mention some of them, to wit: 


POWER. 

OMNIPOTENCE. 

JUSTICE. 

ETERNITY. 

UNSEARCHABLE. 

INTELLIGENCE. 

CREATOR. 

GLORY. 

OMNIPRESENCE. 

MERCY. 

IMMUTABLE. 

KNOWLEDGE. 

FAITHFULNESS. 

REVELATION. 

LAW. 

TRUTH. 

OMNISCIENCE. 


GOODNESS. 

LOVE. 

WISDOM. 

JEALOUSY. 

SPIRIT. 

PERFECTION. 

SUPREME. 

SAVIOR. 

TEACHER. 

JUDGMENT. 

LORD. 

PERSONALITY. 

HARMONY. 

REFUGE. 

FATHERHOOD. 

COMFORTER.. 

ETC. 


Those, and ten thousand times ten thousand other 
functions of our Ideal God are all, potentially, in Prin¬ 
ciple, and in the first stages of primal unfoldment, in the 
unit form of Very Life property called the triad of 
Power, Love and Truth. Those unit forms of substance 
are thoughts—primal thoughts. Two or more of those, 
units of the first degree of organism, in fellowship con¬ 
stitute an idea, and the degrees of unit life organization 
by ideas, are the same as the degrees of unit life organ¬ 
ism which we already have elaborated, and correlated with 
the atom, the molecule, the corpuscle and the cell; and 
also the crystal. 

From the above we can see the riches of a single 
thought, the transcendent wealth of ideas. We see also 
that ideas are in the reality of substance—life. What 
then becomes of our former conception of Idealism? Do 
we not see that man has hitherto had no understanding, 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, of what ideas 
really are, and of what should be understood by doc¬ 
trines of Idealism. Once more we strengthen our foun¬ 
dations, to wit: That the ideals of mankind are the 
realities of life. If thoughts are not realities, then the 
real is a sham. 

We may now take a step forward. Thought unfold¬ 
ment is, of course, life unfoldment, and all unfoldment 
is from and by Principle. Now, the principle of unfold¬ 
ment is in the use of the thoughts which we desire to 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


131 


unfold. Man has the faculty of choice. By using that 
faculty in a system of practice, it will unfold, develop, 
expand and rise in degrees of wisdom and intelligence. 
The best method of that practice is in a system of Thought 
Chosing, or thinking in choice. In that practice all 
necessary guides and helps are found in the functional 
realm of suggestion as we shall see. What is here said 
of the faculty of choice may, with equal force, be said 
of all other faculty organs, or functions. 

We have seen from our researches in unit thought 
organism, that the infinite organic riches of a single 
thought, potentially, are devided into spiritual and celes¬ 
tial groups, which are interdependent. Now it is because 
man is exclusively composed of thoughts that he is 
essentially a thinker. The thoughts composing his life 
organization are in infinite variety, both as to classes, 
and numbers, and tone degrees. The processes of think¬ 
ing by which man has been created up to his present 
functions have all been in the actuality of organ and 
faculty building. There is nothing of the man except 
in the reality of organism, spiritually, sentiently or psy¬ 
chologically. The units comprising those organs and 
faculties are thoughts. They were propagated by other 
thoughts in fellowship groups, and the organs and facul¬ 
ties thus propagated are in functional circle, colony or 
community groups of organized life, with powers accord¬ 
ing to the quality tones of the units in mass tone. Each 
of those organs or faculties are discreted, and thus they 
become individually functional. A faculty is, of course, 
a collection or colony of thoughts, reaching out in degrees 
of organization to ideas. A faculty, therefore, functions 
in ideality. 

The whole psychological or faculty organization of 
a man, which is continuously unfolding or expanding in 
rising degrees, is in the actuality and reality of idea 
organization in mass tone. A thought is discreted by a 
vesture; so is an idea; so also is an ideal group; and 
finally, so is the human faculty organization. 

When one speaks of the power of mind over “mat¬ 
ter,” two mistakes are made. In the first place there is 
no such fact as “matter,” and, in the second place, it is 
the power of the higher thoughts over the lower ones. 
There is nothing in the life organization of a man but 
thoughts. One thought is higher, in powers and func¬ 
tions, than another by two great facts. First by vesture, 
by which thoughts are high or low, corresponding with 
the zones of ether from which they weave their outer 
vestures; second by the proportion of the higher poten- 


132 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tialities of their interiors, the one with the other. It is 
known to the student, no doubt, that proportion is parent 
to variety in the way just stated. 

Therefore, abolish the notion that there is the power 
of mind over “matter.” It should be stated as the power 
of thoughts over each other, in the fact of the relativity 
and interdependence of their tone qualities. But it must 
be remembered, at this point, that there is the full force 
of reciprocity in the exercise of thought powers, by which 
the equality of Brotherhood is established and main¬ 
tained. Thoughts control each other in the fellowship 
of barter and exchange, by which their traffic is mutual 
and without competition. That is an important lesson 
to the larger units such as men and women . 

It will be seen from following to their conclusions 
the ideas here expressed that there is nothing to conquer, 
by one part of the life organization as against another, 
except error. All the thoughts may unite in destroy¬ 
ing error. 

Another fact should be added to this data composing 
our foundations for correct, or scientific methods of think¬ 
ing. It is that a thought, or an idea (the latter in a little 
higher degree of organism than the former), is in a 
state of actual—real—life organism, and in a mass tone 
rate of oscillation by Principle, by which it must function 
continuously. It cannot exist in idleness, because exist¬ 
ence is in the nature of life, of activity, of process, 
whether that process be upward progress or otherwise. 

It must also be taken into account that thinking is 
propagation, that is to say, each process of thinking 
gives birth to one or more new thoughts—thoughts pecu¬ 
liar to the person from whose life they come forth. Those 
new thoughts never existed prior to their birth in the 
man or woman propagating them, except in the poten- 
italities of Principle. It is in that way that each person 
has his or her own ideas of things, which differ more or 
less from the ideas of another. 

In this connection I desire to point out the seat of 
organism of thought propagation in the human life or¬ 
ganization. It is not in the cerebral region, as many sup¬ 
pose, but in the Heart. All human thoughts are born 
in the human heart. They come forth, primarily, at the 
bidding of the primal human faculty of desire, implicat¬ 
ing all the functions of the household of Consciousness 
and the Will. When thoughts come forth in the heart 
under the dictum of a wise choice, and in a healthy 
motive they are transcendently health giving and life 
expanding. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


133 


It may sound a little in want of propriety to say 
that scientific thinking is thought breeding, but that is 
the truth. By the exercise of the psychological faculties, 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, one may propagate 
a new and far more healthy breed of thoughts than any 
which that one has hitherto given birth to, unless that 
one is in full training in thought science. In giving birth 
to thoughts the heart should be prepared for the sacred 
work. It should be purged, by desire and the will, of all 
uncleanness, and all impurities, and desire, which rules 
on the throne of the heart, should summon motive, choice, 
and the will in council. 

I must turn aside here to explain the will. What is 
it? The race has been asking the .same question as to 
Consciousness. The answer to one of these questions is 
practically the answer to both. Consciousness is the fact 
of mass tone of all the psychological faculties—that 
wherein the whole psychological organization is one dis¬ 
tinctly; and the will is that mass tone life expressing 
itself. That is very plain. It is a short explanation, ten 
thousand times more satisfactory than the long-winded 
deductions of scientific theology. 

It is seen, therefore, that Consciousness and The 
Will are closely akin. Consciousness is in the fact of 
the invisible man, as to his life organization; The Will 
is that invisible life organization speaking or acting— 
expressing its life. Hence The Will is the action of all 
the psychological faculties in one mass tone. Its expres¬ 
sion implicates the expression of all the faculties, but 
with some more particularly, than with others. 

From what has been said the supremacy of conscious¬ 
ness and the will are quite evident. As a power, the 
will is supreme. It is the government; it is that wherein 
the units express themselves in mass tone. It is that 
wherein each and all of the psychological functions join 
in one harmonious expression. It is the combined power 
of them all. In that way the will is resolved to Principle. 
It is in the plan of life. It is Principle expressing itself 
in any one form tone of life. 

When it is said that desire should summon motive, 
choice and the will in council, as in a previous paragraph, 
it should be explained that any one faculty, no matter 
how weak, functionally, has the power and the right, by 
the relativity and interdependence of the faculties, and 
all other form tones, to command any one or all the 
others. Each unit is represented in mass tone Conscious¬ 
ness, and the expressions and acts of that mass tone life 
are, at the last analysis the expressions and acts of the 


134 


THE NEW IDEA. 


units. It is the same, or should be, with human civil 
government. Its acts are the acts of the people. Any 
one of its loyal adherents—its citizens—has a moral and 
legal right to invoke the action of the government for 
its welfare. 

It is in that sense that we say that any one faculty 
has the moral and legal right—the inherent right—to call 
upon the ivill to function in its behalf, whenever necessity 
arises. Not only is that a fact, but it has the power to 
compel obedience by the function of the infinite life bond; 
which resolves all the functions of life to one function 
in Brotherhood. But still further, any one psychological 
faculty has like right and power to summon any one or 
all of the others in its service. 

We say, then, that, for a start in the methods of 
thinking, by Principle, desire should summon a faculty 
council in the heart, and there, upon its rightful throne, 
it should preside. Having called Choice and Motive, the 
will is of course involved. The will, by its volition—by 
its voluntary functions—meets the demands of necessity, 
which faculty is ever present in function, at any process. 
If not present there is no necessity for action and there 
can be no process. But where there is, in life, need of 
the process, necessity is always functionally present; and 
lo! by the process of thinking whatever is necessary to 
life may and shall be supplied, and that in surpassing 
abundance. 

The most delightful facts connected with a study of 
this “New Psychology” is that it is preeminently inspir¬ 
ational. As its processes of thinking thrill our own psy¬ 
chological organizations both intelligently and emotion¬ 
ally, we are grandly prepared for further steps of its 
entertaining and life building progress. 

Desire has now laid before its council the proposi¬ 
tion to purify the heart, wherein it dwells as the Father- 
Mother progenitor of all the faculties of that life. Why 
do we thus dignify the function of desire? Because it 
is the basic faculty, or function of evolution in all the 
forms of animal life, and of man. All evolution in the 
physical zone is by desire. Nothing can proceed without 
desire. It is at the bottom, consciousness and the wili 
are at the top. All other faculties are between. 

But as to the process in question: Motive asks for 
information as to the object to be gained, and desire 
makes answer that of late the units of life to 'which it 
has given birth are not satsifactory to Choice. Choiee 
declares that they are below the standards Of progressive 
ideals. Then follow Reason, Judgment, Decision, and a 


NEW” TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


135 


host of others, all voluntary functions, and choice is 
approved, and desire sustained, whereat Necessity brings 
forward the desired result. 

That by no means metaphorical council is a type of 
a thousand and one other councils which desire may and 
should summon in its great heart home palace. But the 
student probably declares that all this does not supply 
the technique of the methods employed. Very well. Let 
us have that here and now. It is true that the will must 
do something. There must be action in wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence. The program: Dwell in thought on pure facts, 
and in that way think your heart to purity. Fill your 
heart with pure thoughts—with brand new, clean, inno¬ 
cent thoughts, by calling aids from the infinite world of 
suggestion, until there will be no room for unholy ideas 
to form. Dwell upon the purity of your Ideal God; on 
the purity of Love; then on the beauty, the strength and 
the glowing health of purity. Think not of its opposites. 
Indulge no contrasts. Rise in your heart to love purity 
for its own sake; for its sweetness; for its intrinsic worth. 
Trace its origin back to Love, to spirit, to your highest 
Ideal God; trace it in its glorious mission of redemption 
from error and evil. Keep at it. Draw from memory, 
from books, from ideals. Persist in it. Those are the 
functions of the will, involving in the process, every 
/. faculty function of the life. Soon the whole psychological 
organization, will be in a glow of light, of Love, and the 
Spirit, which is very life, sweeps silently through the 
whole faculty organism, and there is a rising impulse. 
Thoughts, feelings and emotions rapidly succeed each 
other, and although alone and separated from all others 
visible, you find yourself in the most delightful company. 
Sorrows melt into sweet perfume.; forebodings have been 
hushed into oblivion; the lower sense of sight has flown, 
and a new vision—a sweetly clear, transcendent psychol¬ 
ogical vision, rising to the outlines of spiritual thoughts, 
which conquer all things of sense in a transporting em¬ 
brace of Love, speaks to you in the voice of silence, say¬ 
ing, “The pure in heart shall see God.” 

Does the reader say that all that is nonsense? It 
may be to him or to her. If so, more is the pity. I have 
said that emotions born of thinking in Principle abide; 
those which rise from mere suggestion, and which do not 
induce deep thinking, very soon subside. Thinking is 
creation in substance. It is life building. 

It is plainly seen from what has been said that it is 
quite easy to purify the heart. By continuing those exer¬ 
cises it may be purified more and more, in a series of 


136 


THE NEW IDEA. 


successive purifications, until, as compared with its con¬ 
ditions at the start, the thinker will hame a new heart, a 
regenerated and re-created heart, in which old things 
shall have passed away and all things of desire shall 
have become new. The processes of propagation wrought 
by the oscillations of Principle thus continue, or will con¬ 
tinue, according to the persistence of the mass tone will, 
until the whole life, from the lowest physical fibre to the 
highest spiritual ray of light will be stirred to renewal, 
and health will abound. 

In what way can one insure the continuous activity 
of the will to the end just described? By desire. But 
suppose desire become weary, and quit work? Desire 
cannot become weary, cannot quit work. By its nature 
it is ever active, ever at work. Man has the power to 
harness it at the instigation of any convenient faculty, 
and it will carry all his burdens to victory. But there 
is another and a higher functional power upon which one 
may draw in thinking ourselves to purer spheres of peace, 
plenty, joy and gladness. What is that? 


EXERCISE XV. 


INVISIBLE MASS TONE LIFE. 

Answering an important question—Mankind uniting into 
a larger and broader, mass tone risen life—The Invis¬ 
ible Risen Brotherhood—A man a part of the Lord— 
We know facts only by becoming those facts—Foun¬ 
dations of equality—Economics of God. 


IN attempting to answer the question put in the 
last sentence of the preceding Exercise, permit me to 
summarize very briefly from what has already been said. 
I wish, in this place, to correlate the higher mass tone 
Consciousness and The Will, with the rising forms of 
life, and to show that there is a higher Consciousness, 
and a higher Will, than those in man, already propa¬ 
gated to life from the oscillations of Principle. 

We have said that Consciousness is in the fact of the 
invisible form of life propagated from any visible form 
in our zone. That applies to the units in all their types 
of organism, in animals and in man. It applies also to 
higher life organizations. We have also said, and now 
reaffirm the statement, that the Will is the action, or 
expression of that invisible form—the function of Con¬ 
sciousness. 

We have also said that, inasmuch as all the types 
or forms of life below man have, by propagation, un¬ 
folded into visible man, and are being unfolded into the 
visible man, that invisible man is uniting into a higher 
and broader mass tone life than we are, in these lower 
spheres, permitted to behold. The reader will have no 
difficulty in comprehending the expansion of the forms 
of life by mass tone, as they rise in evolution from one 
degree of organism to another. If there are more unit 
form tones in a man today than there were yesterday, 
it is easy to see that man is expanding in degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence, which degrees of life are sub¬ 
stance ; and if there are a greater number and variety of 
degrees of life in each successive mass tone form, on 
the arc of evolution, then, the mass tone form of life into 
which all mankind is rising, by the invisible life organi¬ 
zations of its members, must be in a transcendent fact of 
Brotherhood. 

That risen mass form of life, in a higher degree of 
Harmony than we have yet been permitted to behold, 

( 137 ) 



138 


THE NEW IDEA. 


is also in the facts of Consciousness and The Will. What 
shall we call that form of life? We might easily do worse 
than turn to the symbolism of the sacred scriptures, be¬ 
cause I am persuaded that the highest use this or the 
succeeding generation will be able to make of science is 
the interpretation of the sacred teachings of the ages, in 
connection with methods of life unfoldment by Principle. 

In my vision of rising life, I behold the mass tone 
risen life—the now invisible Brotherhood of mankind — 
in the clear and glorious fact of the Ideal Lord—ideal 
only because partly incomprehensible. That there is 
such a glorious form of life, into which we are rising, no 
man capable of thinking in Principle to the unfoldment 
of his own life in degrees of wisdom and intelligence 
will, for a moment deny. Enough has already been said 
up to this place, in this volume, to bring that transcend¬ 
ent form of life to somewhat clear vision. There is, there¬ 
fore, not only the partly comprehensible Consciousness 
and The Will of the Mass Tone Risen Life, but the infin¬ 
ite faculty organization of the same, in such marvelous 
psychological arrangement, by the ties of fellowship and 
Brotherhood that each man and woman, upon rising to 
the reunion of primal individuality, will take a place— 
a “mansion home”—in that unspeakable life organiza¬ 
tion, in some such status and function as that of a faculty. 

Here we rise to a high summit of modern thought, 
in the full function of science, as it is in the application 
of Principle to process, aside from which there is no 
science, which enables us to interpret the Nlew Testament 
scriptures wherein the Lord is called the son of man 
because, as we now plainly see, that, as yet invisible form 
of life is being created by the thinking of man. More¬ 
over we see in the form tone life of the Risen Brother¬ 
hood, the full functions of all human government, in 
the fact of unfolded symbolism. In these spheres we 
study the principles of government, and we say that 
government is by the will of the governed; that each 
citizen is represented in the compact, and that the 
will of mankind is the will of the government. In the 
Risen Brotherhood, we have the same facts on a higher 
scale. Each man rises into that transcendent Form by 
his invisible life organization, yea, he already medi¬ 
ately dwells therein. 

We can easily see that The Will of that Higher Mass 
Tone Form is always and forever in justice towards 
man, because it is the mass tone will of mankind. We 
all have a say in the rule of that King. His government 
is resolved to self government indeed and in Truth. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


139 


These things have been said at the risk of some 
repetition in order, in this connection, to bring to vision 
in what way we have access to that mass tone invisible 
life. We have fellowship one with the other here, 
and in such association, we are provided with a source 
of strength, comfort and encouragement. Even here 
we have a small measure of Brotherhood, which is some¬ 
what grandly symbolic of the higher and more real 
sociology. 

Attention is called to the fact that each man and 
woman of our race, while functioning in these subvesture 
spheres, may, in that science called Anagoge rise to ap¬ 
propriate the substance of the Risen Life. In other 
words, man already dwells, mediately, by his subjective 
consciousness, in the higher Brotherhood, by methods of 
thinking in the science of Anagoge. 

To reach an understanding of that transcendent 
method of thinking, by which the human life organiza¬ 
tion is transformed into a higher embodiment of life, it 
is necessary to bring to vision the fact that, by thinking 
in the method of the science named, man is “transformed 
by the renewing of his mind, ’ ’ in processes of regeneration 
commonly called the resurrection, from a visible to an 
invisible form of life. He will experience three of those 
bodily transformations, one for each great celestial zone, 
besides one for that in which he now dwells. 

That celestial rise is concomitant with the irse through 
the three great spiritual zones, which is to say that man’s 
unfoldment is dual. That resurrection is wrought by 
thinking in the science of Anagoge, thought by thought, 
bit by bit, item by item, unit by unit, tone by tone, con¬ 
tinuously, in a wonderfiil method of propagatory regen¬ 
eration, while the visible form of life remains in func¬ 
tional organization. The whole transcendent problem of 
the First Resurrection is solved in the foregoing. It is 
in the plan of Principle. It is wrought by the oscillations 
of Principle, propagating degrees of wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence which unfold into Truth. 

The nature and functions of the risen mass tone 
life are resolved to Brotherhood. Pothagoras, Aristotle, 
Zeno, St. Thomas of Aquin, Buddha, Zoroaster, Swenden- 
borg and many other great teachers of early days caught 
a partial vision of that mighty feat, and Jesus, the great¬ 
est of all moral teachers, not only beheld the Truth, 
but grandly became it. It was given to Him to unfold 
into Truth first, which is an achievement open to the stu¬ 
dent-open to man without exception. More will be said 
about that later. 


140 


THE NEW IDEA. 


I again impress the fact that we know facts only 
by becoming those facts, only by unfolding into them. 
We become God by unfolding into the Lord. 0 how 
glorious the plan of life! We become our ideals by un¬ 
folding into them, in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, 
and with each step of that unfoldment we rise into higher 
degrees of the real. 

What is Brotherhood ? How could language describe 
it? It is a mighty fact beyond the highest powers of 
symbolism, or present idealism. Language is a mockery. 
Would the student come to know its heights and depths; 
its glories and riches? If so, there is but one method. 
It is by unfolding into its presently unutterable realities. 
Life has been unfolding to its ideals, since its birth, in 
the achievement of Brotherhood. Brotherhood w’as the 
aim and goal of Principle, when it entered upon the 
great work of propagating thoughts and ideas, each dif¬ 
fering from the other, in infinite numbers and variety, 
with the exalted purpose of gathering them all together, 
in different degrees of organic life, and finally into one 
transcendent mass tone form of life, which is the fact 
of Brotherhood. 

All the processes of thinking in our universe, up to 
this time, and all such processes forever yet to come have 
been, are, and will forever be, in the propagation of 
Brotherhood, which is in the fact of the life of the first, 
the second and the final heavens of risen life. Brother¬ 
hood, or Harmony is that infinite mass tone form of life 
wherein all other and constituent forms are rising by 
Principle to dwell in the Harmony of relativity and inter¬ 
dependence, which is the Equality of Truth. Here is a 
text in wisdom for the modern Socialist. Equality can 
be built, in science, upon no other foundation. Bellamy's 
“Equality” is functional, but had he possessed the vision 
here suggested he would have painted in higher degrees 
of Truth. 

Brotherhood is not founded upon philanthropy; 
neither is Love. Brotherhood is the nuxus of equality, 
for in that life, its units, its constituents, its members, 
all stand upon that equality of relationship which makes 
each one indispensable to the life of all the others. Such 
is the commerce of life, the economies of God. One star 
differeth from another star in glory, but they are all in 
glory. Brotherhood is the Lord. Brotherhood is the 
first, the second, and the third or final stage of the life 
organism of the Living God—the real God—which is 
being unfolded from human ideals of the God of Being. 

All the foregoing has been said in order to explain 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


141 


the highest and most potential method of thinking, pos¬ 
sible to the creative powers of humans. We have heard 
much about the science of healing, or the science of 
health, or a science in Christian ethics which can heal all 
human diseases, and banish all human woes. Dear stu¬ 
dent, that science which transformed Jesus into the Lord, 
and which will carry your life over the very same high¬ 
way is the only Christian science worth consideration and 
appreciation. The student was brought into these physi¬ 
cal subvesture spheres of flesh and blood with the very 
same attributes, save one, which characterized Jesus 
when he came forth in flesh and blood. The only differ¬ 
ence, if difference there be, is in degrees of unfoldment. 

From that beginning Jesus thought himself through 
potential degrees of wisdom and intelligence, into the 
fact of Truth. He unfolded form ideals to higher ideals, 
rising with each step, until the sub vestured elements 
obeyed expressions of his power, and the bonds of so- 
called death were broken by his word. Disease fled from 
his gaze as error vaishes in the presence of Truth. When 
he discovered the secret of unfoldment, which is said to 
be in his twelfth year, he betook himself to solitude, and 
entered upon a system of thought unfoldment, precisely 
as Buddha did, but in a more protracted effort, covering 
about eighteen years. 

When he had reached the highest summit possible 
to thinking in the flesh he came forth as the light of life 
in the simplicity of Power, Love and Truth. The student 
may do the very same. He or she has the same origin, 
the same possibilities. 


EXERCISE XVI. 


SCOPE OF ACHIEVEMENTS BY THINKING. 

Doctrines of life to be judged by their fruits—All rise in 
life is by thinking to ideals in Wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence—Evidence of experience comes by experiment 
—A mighty range of possible achievements by think¬ 
ing—Thinking more potential than acting—Human 
conquests in invisible worlds—Thinking of man is 
responsible for all eventuations in our world. 


THE foregoing exercise does not invite the student 
to think in what is generally called imagination, nor to 
accept, in what is called belief, a set of doctrines which 
cannot be understood. We certainly have solved the 
problem of the resurrection, and brought to clear vision 
just how humans are self propagated from this to a 
higher heaven. We have resolved a large section of 
sacred scripture Symbolism to satisfactory interpreta¬ 
tions. That has been done in a spirit of loyalty to biblical 
symbols, in a manner which enriches our understanding 
of Christianity. In fact this volume, on every page, 
shines with scientific interpretations of Christian doc¬ 
trines, or Christian Ideals. 

But we are aiming to develop methods of thinking, 
which will be essentially creative, and, therefore, func¬ 
tional to personal life unfoldment. Man cannot unfold 
from some measure of light into darkness. It may be 
possible for him to descend on that scale, morally, and 
sink back into the bonds of affliction, but, according to 
my vision, those bonds will become functional to his 
ultimate return to evolution. What is here sought to be 
impressed is the fact that all rise in life is wrought by 
thinking to ideals higher than those already unfolded. 
In that way we rise from summit to summit, from one 
set of ideals to those of a higher moral and intellectual 
standard. But all our ideals, to be functional, must be 
propagated from Principle. That is wherein science 
takes control. That, aside from art, which is not scien¬ 
tific is worthless. 

If, therefore, the student should declare that this 
whole system of doctrines, especially those relating to 
Brotherhood, or the risen life is in theory, now incapable 
of scientific demonstration, I should immediately reply 
that any one can quite easily prove its scientific founda- 
( 142 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


143 


tions in the fact that it is functional to life unfoldment, 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence. That is an appeal 
to experience. We may rest upon the testimony of expe¬ 
rience when it is expressed in living results, not when 
externalized in words, because the latter are self contra¬ 
dictory, often being one thing today and another tomor¬ 
row. Wisdom is justified of her children, and this, or any 
other system of ideals must ultimately be judged by its 
fruits. 

But there are thousands who may read this volume 
who will not readily accept its doctrines. To those we 
appeal on the ground of experiment. They can have no 
knowledge of the merits of the system except by thinking 
in Principle which is best carried on by a study of these 
pages. They must accept the doctrines here taught, at 
least as an experiment, before they can have knowledge, 
or experience of their merits. It is not necessary to 
impose any conditions whatever. Any one who will 
read and study these pages, in the partial understanding 
of their teachings, will experience the power of unfold¬ 
ment. That is sure and certain. It cannot be otherwise, 
because in the degree in which he understands these ideals, 
the student will come to know self, which to know aright 
is life everlasting. 

Beliefs, founded on theories are dangerous. They 
are injurious. They often beget a state of unwholesome 
dependence. The theory of human dependence, reaching 
out to helplessness, and the necessity of some redeeming 
agency outside of self and Brotherhood, produces weak¬ 
ness, and a condition of supineness which easily sinks 
into disease. It is not rugged. Ideals unfolded in Prin¬ 
ciple, conformable to the plan of life, inspire and develop 
a sense of interdependence, which is the foundation of 
the only independence there can be in Truth. 

As is plainly seen, the object of this volume is to 
formulate and present to students a system of ideals 
according to the plan of life, as it is revealed by the 
functions of Principle, which shall serve as standards 
towards which to think in unfoldment. If one will bring 
to vision the birth of life from Principle, and follow its 
organic form tone rise, until it swells with rapture into 
the risen Invisible Brotherhood, and fail to realize the 
functional powers of such a study, it will be because that 
one utterly fails to appreciate the degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence expressed. 

But as to the technique of scientific methods of think¬ 
ing, there is much which may be said. We may classify 
some of the principal degrees, or departments of thought 


144 


THE NEW IDEA. 


processes in their application to life building. They 
follow: 

1. —Thinking to an understanding of the I AM. 

2. —Thinking to the appropriation of Power. 

3. —Thinking to the appropriation of Power, Love 
and Truth. 

4. —Thinking to unfoldment in degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence. 

5. —Thinking to unfoldment in purity. 

6. —Thinking to unfoldment in security; to functions 
wherein the assaults of the enemies of one's life are 
rendered powerless, and harmless, and resolved to min¬ 
istrations in joy and gladness. 

7. —Thinking into higher, purer and stronger Con¬ 
sciousness. 

8. —Thinking in the glory of the mass tone will. 

9. —Thinking in the fellowship of Harmony. 

10. —Thinking to the unfoldment and general good 
of enemies, by which self is four-fold blessed. 

11. —Thinking to the discovery and destruction of 
self imperfections and faults. 

12. —Thinking to the benefit of others, whether pres¬ 
ent with or absent from them, but without their knowl¬ 
edge. 

13. —Thinking to peace and prosperity. 

14. —Thinking to love of enemies. 

15. —Thinking to propagate the love of others for 

self. 

16. —Thinking to patience, gentleness, meekness and 
to the power of silence. 

17. —Thinking to the recovery of the sick whom you 
personally know, without their knowledge of the same. 

18. —Thinking to the laying up of treasures in heaven 
which is the unfoldment of self into the Invisible Broth¬ 
erhood. 

19. —Thinking to self health and happiness. 

20. —Thinking to the unfoldment in health, purity, 
loveliness, beauty and sweetness, of those whom you love. 

21. —Thinking to win the love, affection and esteem 
of those whom you love, esteem and respect. 

22. —Thinking to remove obstacles, or the unfold¬ 
ment of environment. 

23. —Thinking to secure the attention and commun¬ 
ion of absent friends, or loved ones. 

24. —Thinking in telepathy which is a practice in 
silent thought fellowship. 

25. —Thinking to the propagation of higher ideals. 

26. —Thinking to unfoldment into ideals. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


145 


27. —Thinking to the appropriation of the variety 
of unit forms of life in life building. 

28. —Thinking to resolve the “blues” into courage 
and gladness. 

29. —Thinking to train self to become a source of 
light and joy, and a fountain of useful knowledge in the 
home. 

30. —Thinking to increase the love and devotion of 
your wife, and your love and devotion for her. 

30. —Thinking to make your wife lovely, beautiful 
and lovable. 

31. —Thinking to dispel fear and to develop courage. 

32. —Thinking to unfold into a bright and shining 
light, in every walk of life. 

33. —Thinking to dispel cross-grained habits, and to 
cultivate gentle manners. 

34. —Thinking to cleanliness and Godliness. 

35. —Thinking to be manly and womanly, in the 
rugged development of sex. 

36. —Thinking to invisible wedlock between man and 
wife, where earthly wedlock has become Harmonious, so 
as to perform, as far as possible in these spheres, that 
which should not all be postponed until the now invisible 
zone of life is reached. 

37. —Thinking to induce sleep and rest. 

38. —Thinking to comfort and assist a loved one, a 
friend or a neighbor in deep affliction. 

life. 

39. —Thinking to overcome misfortune in your own 

40. —Thinking to resolve so called death into a birth 
of rejoicing. 

41. —Thinking to overcome contagion and infection. 

42. —Thinking to destroy hurtful habits in self and 
others. 

43. —Thinking to prevent accident and calamity. 

44. —Thinking to undo a wrong done to a neighbor. 

45. —Thinking in expression of gratitude for bless¬ 
ings enjoyed. 

46. —Thinking in methods of expression, in silent 
behavior, in words, in actions and in deeds, so as to give 
to others a full compensation in exchange for what you 
received from them. 

47. —Thinking to the further unfoldment of your fac¬ 
ulties by their use. 

48. —Thinking and expressing continuously in bene¬ 
fits, and good will to the neighbor. 

49. —Thinking in silence covenant work. 


146 


THE NEW IDEA. 


50.—Thinking to know more than is expressed, so 
as to live in the fact of a silent power. 

The question is, will the desired results follow each 
of the foregoing exercises in thinking. On that head 
much may be said which beginners will doubt, until they 
have entered upon a pretty thorough practice in this sci¬ 
ence. It already has been said, and will be repeated in 
another form later, that ten thousand times as much can 
be accomplished by thinking as by acting. Thought ex¬ 
pressions, in words and actions, are the proper accompa¬ 
niments of thinking processes, but by far too much 
reliance is placed on words and deeds, and very much 
too little on the powers and functions of thinking. Think¬ 
ing expresses itself as a natural result. If you do your 
thinking in force and according to Principle, and rely 
upon that for results, surprises will follow in delightful 
succession. Otoe can think himself to victory in all 
things of life, much more effectively than by the display 
of actions. There is a potency in silent thinking which 
is as effective in achievement, as it is difficult to measure. 
The invisible world about us is filled with those forces, 
and they are working out for men and women nearly 
everything of good and evil which overtake mankind. 
It is for the purpose of harnessing and subduing those 
forces, and bringing them into the service of man, that 
thought science is seeking attention at this time. 

Man is making mighty conquests in the visible world. 
He is also recording achievements in invisible spheres, 
but he will not enjoy life to its full plan, until he further 
invade the unseen in displays of his unfolding genius. 
Invisible forces are loudly knocking at our doors. We 
have not yet learned the nature of the real powers which 
are afflicting us, nor come to understand the handy weap¬ 
ons within our reach by which they may be destroyed, 
or harnessed to our use and benefit. Diseases, accidents 
and calamities, and sociological disturbances come to 
man out of invisible spheres, and work ruin to his right¬ 
ful peace and prosperity. That will continue in aug¬ 
menting volume until man shall rise in the power of 
thought processes in a series of conquests in worlds 
unseen. 

That interpretation of science which separates man 
from the visible and invisible substance forces, through 
which he is sturggling to rise is too physical, and too 
material for the full scope of practical use. Scientific 
men may tell us that human conduct, in its mass tone 
life, does not propagate all the evils which afflict the 
race, as well as all the blessings which come to it, or 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


147 


they may declare a knowledge of such life phenomena to 
be unknowable. In either case they are not promoting 
science to higher spheres. Life is a unit and universal, 
and the thinking of man is potential to physical distur¬ 
bances or peaceful rest equally with moral and sociolog¬ 
ical conditions. Man is king, whether he will or no, and 
his potential thinking, far more than his puny actions, 
is responsible for all eventuations affecting the life of 
our world. 


EXERCISE XVII. 

THOUGHT MESSENGERS. 


Little thought organizations ever ready and anxious to 
do our bidding—Mission of an idea—How it works— 
Sending messages by thought propulsions—Trans¬ 
mitting thoughts by magnetic ether shimmers— 
—Conversing with unseen or risen life organizations 
subject to limitations—Illusions of potential spheres 
—Spiritualism—Age of science—Function of motive 
—Brotherhood the foundation—Functional choice of 
Ideals. 


IN continuing- the general subject of methods of 
thinking, in a plan which the student will readily ob¬ 
serve is of an evolutionary character, attention is called 
to the fact that we can command the smaller thought 
organizations, such as ideas, to do our bidding, more 
effectively than the larger mass tone bodies, such as men 
and women. That is not because men and women will 
wilfully refuse to serve us, but for the reason that a little 
colony of thoughts, such as an idea, discreted in a mental 
ether vesture, can travel anywhere without meeting with 
obstructions, while men and women, in larger thought 
communities, are loaded down and rendered rather 
clumsy in physical subvestures, and are not very well 
qualified for rapid transit. 

Moreover, little thought organizations are in the fact 
of mass tone conscious wisdom and intelligence, and 
know precisely the nature of the mission upon which 
they are sent, and are in every way qualified to perform 
it. Suppose the mission be to influence a man or a woman 
to perform certain acts, those little fellows can readily 
enter that particular life organization in the fact of an 
idea, and, lo! in an instant that person lias a new idea, 
so to speak, and, of course, in proportion to other influ¬ 
ences may or may not act upon it. However, if the 
author of the idea repeat it sufficiently often, and with 
the necessary patience and force, action will result. 

We do not. place sufficient reliance upon the forces 
and functions of thoughts. We constantly employ them 
to determine where we are at, what we are doing, and 
in all sorts of business and domestic relations, but we 
seldom send them to carry messages to others. We gen¬ 
erally go ourselves, or communicate bv letter, personal 

( 148 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


149 


messengers, telegram or telephone. A day and a time, 
and a condition of life are dawning and will soon unfold 
into clearer light and more perfect function, -when we 
shall employ thoughts and ideas to perform those 
services. 

It is plain to the vision of even the average thinker 
that everything created or achieved in our universe, so 
far, is the result of thinking. That thinking has, of 
course, been supplemented by actions, and by physical mo¬ 
tion efforts, but we shall have no more of the latter when 
we rise to the full ether tone of our zone. Just here 
allow me to observe that we rise to the full tone men¬ 
tioned in the fact of duality. We individually rise by a 
birth into it in the fact of the resurrection, as already 
explained, and each successive generation of man is 
a little higher in Omniscience than the previous one, so 
that, ultimately, man here on the earth will wear the eth- 
eric fluid body, and, by evolution, will function in the 
highest sphere of physical life. In that way the invisible 
and the visible will make one. That doctrine of Truth 
will be further elaborated. 

It is noted that in symbolic accounts of the achieve¬ 
ments of our Ideal God it is recorded that He said “Let 
there be light and there w T as light.” That, however, was 
not the spoken word, such as we employ. That was in 
the voice of silence. In respect of that let me say that 
there is the expression of thoughts in the voice of silence. 
One may speak their thoughts in silence, or they may 
think without speaking their thoughts in any way. One 
can formulate thoughts or ideas, and send them forth in 
a mighty propulsion in the performance of specific work. 
That is done by the mass tone will of the invisible, or 
psychological Consciousness. 

Observe how simple the process is. Take for an 
illustration the physically spoken word. Its physical 
vibrations propagated to sound in atmospheric waves, and 
they thus beat against the outer ear drum, through which 
they are carried to the inner magnetic drum, or triangle, 
with its fountains of mental magnetic ether, and by 
the latter those sound w r aves are transmitted to etherie 
shimmers, or oscillations, by which there is propagation 
to consciousness. That process of hearing is very briefly 
stated and is practically self evident. It is in that way 
that we appropriate sound as psychological food through 
the function of hearing. But is it not plain that the rise 
of man will lift him out of those coarser physical func¬ 
tions, and propagate him to substance spheres in which 
he 'will hear and be heard in pure magnetic oscillations, 


150 


THE NEW IDEA. 


without the lower office of physical subvesture sub¬ 
stance ? 

Now, let us contemplate the simplicity of transmit¬ 
ting and receiving thoughts and ideas from and to widely 
separated persons, or persons in each others silent pres¬ 
ence. Thoughts or ideas may be propelled from one 
brain organism to another in their own substance, and 
by shimmers, or oscillations, of mental magnetic ether. I 
say from and to brain organisms. Thoughts are born in 
the heart in the fountain of desire, but they rise to func¬ 
tion in the brain. In the single subvestured units of 
atmosphere, the next inmost vesture is that of physical 
magnetic ether, in the red tone; the next inmost to that 
is the vesture of mental magnetic ether in the orange 
tone. Now, human thoughts, as they go forth from the 
brain are in the substance of mental magnetic ether, with 
their interiors of higher life, and if in the organism of 
an idea are vestured in physical magnetic ether. They 
travel by the shimmers of their outer vesture substance. 
In that way they are propelled from one human brain 
to another, and to the higher psychological organizations 
of invisible forms of life. The propelling force is in the 
mass tone will of Consciousness. Thus men and women 
may talk mentally with each other and psychologically 
with higher forms of life, and spiritually with the angels, 
or higher selves. 

Then, the student says, I am approaching, in dem¬ 
onstration, the doctrines of spiritualism. There are no 
spirits; there is but one spirit. There are risen invisible 
life organizations, such as we will become, with whom 
we may converse in psychological silence; but to do that 
we will need considerable training in these transcendent 
methods of thinking in the science of Anagoge. There is 
a sense in which no limits can be prescribed for the 
powers and functions of thinking, but there is another, 
in which reasonable limitations are evidently in Principle. 
If one seek to perform miracles, so called, before he has 
unfolded to powers sufficient for that work, he will 
utterly fail; or, if one undertake similar performances in 
the name and by virtue of Faith, in our times, wherein 
the necessity of such achievements do not exist, as they 
probably did in days long passed, failure will overtake 
the effort. We live in an age of science; we must con¬ 
form to that science which is in the actuality of the 
applications of Principle to processes, which eventuates 
in degrees of wisdom, and intelligence, or we will make 
haste slowly, and with many defeats. And yet the way 
is so replete with triumphs, and so grand in the glory of 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


151 


self achievement, that one, in the midst of its springing 
flowers and sweet perfumes, would almost wish it were 
even longer. The glory of scientific life is that each step 
of its unfoldment is a very heaven of joy and gladness. 

It is the reckless haste to function as God, before 
we learn to live in all the powers of a man or a woman 
that renders our thinking to ideals ineffectual. Let it 
be often and impressively repeated. Life unfoldment is 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, and not one of 
those degrees, infinite in numbers, can be lightly passed 
without disaster. ‘‘Wisdom’s ways are pleasantness, and 
all her paths are peace.” However, one should not be 
discouraged by mistakes. Mistakes are functional when 
one seeks to mend them and to avoid their repetition. 

I will venture to say to the student that there is 
much thinking necessary to the full preparation for 
effective thinking. One must devote a whole world of 
attention to motive. That faculty is generally in a non 
functional state, because wrapped up in self-propagated 
vestures of selfishness. That is unfortunate, because noth¬ 
ing so effectually builds insurmountable obstacles to 
progress as selfishness. To raise motive to its best fun- 
tions one should contemplate the fact of Brotherhood, 
from a heart made pure, by exercises for that purpose, 
like those already described. One should come to see 
the nature of motive. It is the function by which the 
cause is propagated to the effect. It is force pure and 
simple. In a sense it is action. Without motive there 
can be no process either in good or evil. Moreover, mo¬ 
tive is transmitted into the effect. The character of 
motive is the exact character of its effect. A pure and 
holy motive, set to exalted ideals propagates in righteous¬ 
ness. That means that it propagates in the science of 
Principle, and produces effects in Truth. 

I say, therefore, construct your motive, your ideals 
in Brotherhood. Why? Because Brotherhood—Har¬ 
mony—is the highest ideal possible to potential human 
life. It is the goal of life. It is the purpose of creation 
continuously expressed by Principle. It is the way, the 
plan of life. It is in degrees of wisdom and intelligence 
unfolding to Truth, which is the finished work of man 
in Harmony. Degrees of Brotherhood are steps in har¬ 
mony building. “Love your neighbor as yourself.” 
Why? Because he is actually a part of yourself, and 
you are part of him. “This is my commandment, that ye 
love one another as I have loved you.” The lesson, the 
symbol, or the gift of the life of Jesus for man is in the 
fact of accentuating Brotherhood by the bond of life, the 


152 


THE NEW IDEA. 


interdependence by life substance, and the equality by 
Principle, of all forms of life in our universe. It is more 
than that. It is in a symbol of the greater fact that we 
all live by and in each other, and that work for the 
neighbor is the highest work for self. We are only tem¬ 
porarily divided. The divided male and female forms 
which must all soon unite in the glory of immortal wed¬ 
lock are all a grand symbol of the greater truth that all 
forms of life, will, upon that reunion, join in the unspeak¬ 
able glory of Brotherhood. That is wherein we have the 
highest functions of Brotherhood. That is the consum¬ 
mation of Love. 

Surely he who despises his neighbor despises him¬ 
self. Mankind is rising to the transcendent glory of one 
life in Invisible Brotherhood, which is in the fact of the 
embrace of spiritual and celestial love, by degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence, propagating to Truth. 

Thus thinking the student regenerates motive, and 
comes to see that the welfare of the neighbor is the only 
good for self, and that his greatest joy is in work for 
the brother man. Thus thinking in Principle, one is pre¬ 
pared to think in power for the rise of self in an effectual 
effort to raise other selves. 

Preparatory to thinking in Choice, one should distin¬ 
guish, in ideals, between the real, and the degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence by which we unfold into the 
real—by which we become real. In this wisdom we will 
see how it is that all the potentialities—all the riches— 
all the property interests—all that we regard as material 
wealth—are but the means to a higher end. They are 
not the end, only the instrumentalities by which the end 
may be reached for others as well as for self. To him 
who seeks material riches as a selfish end, Jesus says, 
“thou fool this night thy soul shall be required of thee; 
then whose shall these things be which thou hast pro¬ 
vided?” The same teacher commands us to “lay up 
treasures in heaven.” I have elsewhere elaborated the 
last injunction, and shown that by thinking we may 
propagate invisible life organizations in the fact of the 
higher life in a heavenly land that is higher than this 
one. In that treasure is where the transformed heart 
resides. 

Thus thinking we unfold the faculty of choice in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence until, with Martha, 
we choose the better part. We come to distinguish the 
end from the means, and to esteem the real above the 
potentialities by which it is reached. In a thousand ways 
that will readily suggest themselves, one may develop the 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


153 


faculty of choice so as to prepare for more effective 
thinking. 

It may, in some cases, be necessary to awaken desire 
itself to more intensity. That is done by a contemplation 
of the infinite riches of life, and the easy means of their 
attainment, which man already possesses, and which he 
may effectively employ to his honor and glory. Desire 
is always for possession, and there are conditions in its 
faculty existence when desire has functioned in hope and 
expectation, to meet only with disappointment. A little 
contemplation on lines of Principle will show that such 
disappointments have resulted from poor choice, or faulty 
methods of thinking. In that way the ruling function 
of the heart may be awakened to stronger and more suc¬ 
cessful efforts. 

Thus it is seen that there are methods of thinking 
preparatory to entering upon scientific processes of 
thought propagation. These should have careful atten¬ 
tion. Only a few have been meptioned, but those will 
suggest others, so that the student may easily quicken 
and readjust his psychological faculties for active, sys¬ 
tematic and successful life building. 


EXERCISE XVIII. 


SPIRITUAL—CELESTIAL, 

Both sides of the duality of life equally sacred—As intel¬ 
ligence is to wisdom so are the spiritual to the celes¬ 
tial sides of man’s duality—Distinction between the 
spiritual and The Spirit. 


IT is very important that, as early as possible, a 
definite understanding should be had between student 
and author, as to the significance, in their several appli¬ 
cations, of the words spiritual and celestial, so frequently 
used in this volume. When we refer to the spiritual side 
of the duality of a life unit, that has no reference to The 
Spirit, which is God. The vestures of the unit forms 
of life, and of the primal life organisms composed of such 
units, are six fold. The higher three are called spiritual, 
and are in the fact of intelligence, while the lower three 
are called Celestial, and are in the fact of wisdom. They 
are tone vestures, and the tones are propagated by the 
oscillations of Principle within the substare of each imit. 

Because the so called spiritual tone vestures are 
called spiritual, divine, and angelic; and because the 
three celestial tone vestures are called celestial, mental 
and physical, the beginning student may fall into the 
idea that such tones, or vestures, especially as to the 
higher triad, are themselves, or are, therefore, held to 
be, in the facts of spiritual, divine and angelic life, from 
the view points of those dual creatures which are the 
propagations of life unfoldment. That is not the case. 
It is error to suppose that those heavenly creatures, which 
are generally spoken of as angels, divines and spirituals 
existed prior to man. Nothing existed prior to man, 
except the God of Being, and nothing exists subsequent 
to man, except the higher man. As fully explained else¬ 
where in this work, the primal microcosms were in the fact 
of man,, as also each degree of mass tone organism thereof. 

The man of today—the human as Ave see him in 
flesh and blood—unfolds through all the upper heavens, 
and in that marvelous unfoldment the subjective side of 
his duality is, first, in the fact of an angel, second, in 
the fact of a divine, and lastly, in the fact of a spiritual. 
But it must be remembered that the spiritual, the divine 
and the angel spoken of in this paragraph, except as to 
the latter in human spheres, have reference to the spir- 

( 154 ) 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


155 


itual sides of the risen dual forms of life, and not to 
those forms, which have not yet risen. That which is 
wrought by the resurrection, fully elaborated elsewhere 
on these pages, is of a vastly different character from 
that which has not been so transformed. 

Speaking of the spiritual and the celestial sides of 
the duality of life units, and life organizations, such as 
planets, animals, and the man, respectively, the spiritual 
side is not more sacred, nor is it to be regarded with great¬ 
er reverence, than the celestial side, unless it be possible to 
bring to vision -wherein, speaking of the continuous tone 
degrees of potentialities, intelligence is more sacred than 
wisdom. The fact is that w T hen I speak of spiritual de¬ 
grees of life— unrisen life—and of celestial degrees of 
the same, I refer to the tones of life units, propagated 
by Principle, which come forth in the fact of the Two 
Principles, the one positive and the other negative, the 
one male and the other female, the one is Power and 
the other is Love. It is not possible to think of Power 
as higher than Love, nor of the male as higher than 
the female. Hence, in the sense in which I refer to 
unrisen life units, and the organizations thereof, as to 
the spiritual and celestial sides of their duality, the 
wmrd spiritual signifies nothing higher, nor more sacred 
than the word celestial. It is the same with each pair 
of the three triads, to-wit: The spiritual is not more 
sacred than the celestial; the divine not more to be rev¬ 
erenced than the mental; the angelic not more in awe 
than the physical. 

It is sincerely hoped that the foregoing explanation 
Avill be held in constant vision, because, when I have 
explained, as is done in this volume, the duality of a 
form of life, such as a human, and said that when the 
invisible dual form of life propagated by the visible one 
is released from the latter, in that event miscalled death, 
that very same process of dissolution overtakes the spir¬ 
itual side of the dual body which temporarily remains 
in vision, that happens to the celestial side, a misunder¬ 
standing is likely to spring up, unless the facts above 
stated are remembered and fully understood. It is not 
difficult to see that when the invisible man passes from 
the visible one, the temporarily remaining body dissolves, 
that is the units composing it part company, and ©f 
course those units are each in spiritual and celestial 
duality. Hence, the spiritual and celestial sides of the 
visible life organization share the very same fortune. 
They continue in everlasting association in the duality 
of the departing units. 


156 


THE NEW IDEA, 


Moreover, the same facts apply to the units of a 
risen form of life, to-wit: When invisible man, in the 
next higher heaven, sheds the etheric body to rise by 
unfoldment into the next one, the dual units composing 
the body thus shed, part company in the same way, and 
are ready for other work. Thus the dual life units, by 
their respective degrees of organism, and by their de¬ 
grees of tone vesture, function as body builders for all 
the forms of life. All those processes are in the actu¬ 
ality of propagation. 

However, those last named processes are elaborated 
elsewhere in this volume. The object here is, at the 
risk of some repetition, which appears to be unavoidable, 
to explain that one tone of life, while it may be higher 
than another in powers for the propagation of the light 
of life, is no more sacred than another. That would 
spring into vision from a study of the relativity and 
interdependence of all form tones of life, even in the 
absence of this explanation. The author is anxious lest 
he be misunderstood. One’s sensibilities, especially re¬ 
garding the more sacred things of life, are easily 
wounded, and the desire is to avoid that, notwithstand¬ 
ing all things of vesture life are equally indispensable, 
even though it will be a long time before they will be 
held, in human estimation, to be equally sacred. 

It must also be remembered that there is the same 
unfoldment for the spiritual side of man’s duality, as 
for the celestial side. Both sides unfold in harmony, 
and reciprocally, or in interdependence. However, the 
spiritual tones here referred to must not be confounded 
with those emanations of The Spirit explained on other 
pages. 


EXERCISE XIX. 


ANTE AND POST-HUMAN EXISTENCE. 

The five missing links of pre-human man—One solution 
of the so called missing links in the continuous chain 
of evolution—Life unfoldment in invisible spheres— 
Only a small department of propagation goes for¬ 
ward by visible forms of life—Predominant sentient 
consciousness in animals and pre-human man super- 
ceeded by psychological consciousness in humans. 


WHILE the nature of ante and post human forms of 
existence is pretty well cleared up by the general teach¬ 
ings of this volume, it is expedient that something be 
said on those subjects in this place, from the stand¬ 
point of visible forms of human life. We say, of course, 
that all is man from the primal microcosm to the ulti¬ 
mate cosmos, but the student will naturally inquire as to 
the methods of evolution prior to the status of man as 
we see him today. 

It is not our purpose to enter into the technique of 
the evolution of the animal forms of life below man. 
That already has been quite fully done in the evolutions 
of many skilled authors. Nor is it my purpose to enter 
upon any account of the five races of man which existed 
invisibly prior to the human race of man. It is known 
that when that is done the evolution of all the animal 
and man races is accounted for in an unbroken chain, 
without a single “missing link.” 

A word or two here as to under what circumstances 
the forms of the animal fixed and intermediate species 
were changed from one degree of mass tone harmony to 
another, in their unfoldment, may be useful. It is seen 
from this system of evolution that everything depends 
upon the character and organism of the life units. A 
study of the methods of tone propagation, by Principle, 
reveals the plan of the rise of any form of animal life. 
It is seen from that that such form is sometimes visible 
and sometimes invisible, that is to say, that the real 
form is sometimes in a physical subvesture body, and 
at other times, it is not. There is the invisible form 
of life for each animal, below man, just as there is for 
man in his present state, only that in the human state 
of man the Celestial Principle is more or less developed, 
the significance of which will be further explained. 

( 157 ) 



158 


THE NEW IDEA. 


The invisible form of an animal is its real form, or 
higher life organization, propagated by the oscillations 
of the visible, or physically subvestured units composing 
it, by which the animal is dual. It must be brought to 
vision that that duality rises from the duality of the 
units, and unit organisms composing the visible form. 
Hence, there is a continuous existence, in a form of life, 
of an animal, from its most primal organism, on up to 
man. That is even true of the single cell. It exists in 
spiritual and celestial duality, primarily, as to all units 
composing the visible body of any form of life. That 
fact accounts for the invisible animal form in the fol¬ 
lowing way: The units in mass tone propagate an invis¬ 
ible form, also dual, which is higher than the visible one, 
wherein the units are supposed to be outwardly clothed 
by pure physical ether vestures, with all their interior 
and higher qualities of life as yet in potential embryos. 
That form of life exists within the visible one, and it 
has been held that when released from it, in that event 
called death, by which the outer body is thrown off, and 
while in an etheric body, which form is also dual, its 
form is changed. That is error. The metamorphosis of 
any fixed, or intermediate species of animal life is always 
changed, as to its visible bodily form, while living in 
physical subvesture clothing. That is accomplished by 
the propagation of the invisible form during that period, 
but the change does not appear until the surviving form 
of life puts on a new sub-pliysical body to fit its changed 
form. All change in metamorphosis is due to methods 
of propagation. Those are, in the plan of Principle, on 
a rising scale corresponding to the rise of form. 

Now, if the student has brought to clear vision the 
nature of life unit organism, also the duality of such 
units and the more primal organism thereof; and, like¬ 
wise, the fact that each such unit and primal organism 
is an epitome of the mass body of which it is, or becomes, 
a constituent, then it will become clear how it is that the 
body is not endowed with life, or a soul, but that both 
are unfolded from the infinite units according to the 
substare of Principle within each. It should be remem¬ 
bered that there is nothing 1 within the life organism of 
a human creature, including mind, soul or spirit, which 
is not unfolded, by propagation, from the organization 
of that form of life, or from the life foods appropriated 
from without. 

There is, of course, the evolution of the mind—the 
intellectual faculties—and the evolution of the soul, both 
in the same manner, by the oscillations of Principle 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


159 


within the potential units, of visible forms; but of 
course there are various understandings as to the sig¬ 
nificance of the word soul. The author understands 
that to be in the fact of the continuously rising invisible 
form of life, of any life organization, whether in the 
compressing functions of a physical subvesture body, or 
not. It is also to be borne in thought that when a form 
of life becomes invisible, in these lower physical spheres, 
by passing out of the visible one, it becomes visible to 
all life organizations of the sphere to which it rises, and 
that when in such form, it is in a bodily metamorphosis of 
etheric substance, although, as in the case of animal souls, 
it returns to these lower physical vestures for another 
body, or successive bodies, in which to be propagated to 
a still higher form. 

It is in the plan of life that such “animal souls” go 
out of one physical subvesture body and return to an¬ 
other, after a period of experience in etheric spheres, 
for the purpose of raising their forms higher, by a higher 
method of propagation than that which the former body 
was able to supply. Such are the functions of form tone 
organism. The beginning student will be somewhat 
shocked, it may be, at the idea that “human souls” are 
unfolded from animal souls, by the methods of propaga¬ 
tion partly set forth in the foregoing, but he or she may 
rest assured that if there is the evolution of man from 
the lower forms, at all, it is body, soul and spirit—it is 
of the whole man, and not a part of him. 

If the student will bring to vision the infinite re¬ 
sources and potential organism of the units, it will not 
be hard to discover that not only “human souls,” but 
even the highest forms of life of invisible worlds may 
be and are propagated from their fellowship oscillations. 

The author will not undertake, in this volume, to 
describe the functions of those periods wherein “animal 
souls” dwell in invisible etheric spheres, which connect 
their lives from one visible body to another, in an un¬ 
broken chain of existence. The time has not arrived 
when that can profitably be done. 

The object of the foregoing observations concerning 
pre-human existence is that some foundations may be 
laid upon which to rest considerations of the existence 
of those forms of life which rise out of and succeed men 
and women of the present, visible human race. But. 
before leaving the subject .something should possibly be 
said concerning the dark period, or that unbridged 
chasm which appears to lie between the ape familes 
and the human race. None of the evolutionists have 


160 


THE NEW IDEA. 


been able to account, in a satisfactory manner, for the 
ascent of man from man-ape animal forms to the full 
human status. They very properly reason that there is 
such an evolution, but they cannot present, from any 
sources at command, the links of unfoldment by fixed 
types of intermediates. 

It is when such difficulties as those confront the 
student that he may, by thinking in silence, in methods 
of Principle, discover “missing links,” aside from the 
testimony of fossil remains—aside from sub-physical 
evidences altogether—in a clear vision of the interme¬ 
diary spheres which lie just on the boundary of the full 
tone physical zone. It cannot be said that “animal 
souls,” in the stages of their rise, on leaving any one 
physical subvesture body, enter fully into the full tone 
of the physical ether heaven. They rise to the “border 
land, ’ ’ but the substance of their outer bodies, or sheaths, 
is of a lower tone, by several fractions, than that of 
normal physical ether. 

Careful study along these lines is well rewarded. 
It reveals the invisible existence of the “five races of 
man” which constitute all the, so called, missing links 
of evolution. It is in the plan of life that “animal souls” 
return to physical subvesture spheres for all stages of 
propagation, until the higher ape tribes were evolved. 
Then they pass out, not to return until they rise through 
five formative stages in nearby invisible spheres. When 
that is completed they return to these spheres for the 
last time, to dwell in a human body. They never dwell 
in a human body but once, except as hereinafter ex¬ 
plained. During that stay in the visible human form, 
be the period ever so brief, such souls are humanized— 
reach a degree of harmony that is homogeneous. 

A vision of the five invisble races of man comes 
from a study of sentient animal consciousness. It is 
easy to see that in all animals, sentient consciousness— 
later sub-consciousness in humans—is the ruling force. 
It is, in a way, in the subjective, because the higher fac¬ 
ulties of human subjective consciousness are in a state 
of very slightly unfolded potential embryos, in the life 
units composing the animal life organization. We know 
that just as there are five sense functions, there are 
five planes, or mass tones, of sentient consciousness. 
Now, consciousness, whether it be sentient, or psycholog¬ 
ical, is always in the fact of an invisible mass tone form, 
attached to the visible form composed of the units by 
which it is propagated. When released from the visible 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


1«1 


form it dwells in those spheres of substanee life of which 
such invisible form, or its outer sheath, is composed. 

It must now be brought to vision that the form of 
life which is here described as animal sentient conscious¬ 
ness rises by unfoldment, until it becomes human sub- 
consciousness. In that evolution it is superseded by 
human psychological consciousness, because of the 
greater unfoldment of the latter in the higher stages. 
That transformation is wrought in the “dark period” 
before referred to. 

It is plainly in the plan of life that not all the 
stages of its unfoldment shall be within the vision of 
the inhabitants of any one sphere. Hence, a form of 
animal life is alternately visible and invisible—alter¬ 
nately in these and in slightly higher spheres. The “five 
races of man,” here spoken of, are peculiar to those 
spheres of life, and, of course, are to be correlated with 
the five planes of sentient consciousness. Those five 
races did not exist in the flesh and blood of physical sub¬ 
vesture tones. The stages of progress in their evolution 
are hidden from humans, but when the highest is reached 
a physical bodj r —a human physical body—is sought and 
obtained, in which psychological consciousness rises into 
the ascendancy. Where is that human physical body 
obtained? It is plain; the so called “animal soul,” now 
in the fifth degree of sentient consciousness, returns to 
the very same animal form of life from which it passed 
to enter upon the first degree thereof, and when the 
first pair—the first male and the first female—were thus 
delivered to human existence, they came forth in bodies 
to fit their new forms—forms propagated in invisible 
spheres. It is seen that but two of such forms, as stated, 
would be sufficient, but probably many were propagated 
in the same w r ay. The second generation, and each suc¬ 
ceeding generation would, of course, be more perfect in 
form, until the perfect human body is reached. But, in 
Principle that perfection was in the first born. It is 
seen from the foregoing that Moses rose, in his vision 
of Adam and Eve, to something more tangible than 
fable. Men and women, in our day, beget their own 
kind. So it was in the days of primitive man. It was 
in the propagation of the bodily forms of primitive man 
and woman, as above stated, that the human rose above the 
animal races. 

A system, developed by occult science, has been 
worked out, which gives to the supposed “five races of 
man,” constituting the links connecting human with the 
higher animals in an unbroken chain, an earthly exist- 


162 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ence in flesh and blood. It is explained that the fifth 
of those races, conveniently called the Atlantis, was 
engulfed when the land settled, giving place to the 
Atlantic ocean, and that each of such races were in like 
manner extinguished, leaving no accessible remains by 
which their history can be traced, even in the faintest 
outlines. But that system is short of being satisfactory. 
Science gives it no attention whatever. Nor can the 
plan of the invisible existence of such “five races” be 
sustained by scientific deductions, except they be pro¬ 
jected far beyond the domain of analysis, and relegated 
to the possibilities of sentient evolution of the higher 
animal tribes as stated in the foregoing. A more com¬ 
plete elaboration of that plan will give to it greater 
possibilities. It is a very short sighted vision which 
can see, so to speak, no process of propagation 
in unseen spheres. It is evident that the rise of 
animal forms of life was, for the greater part, accom¬ 
plished beyond the veil of human vision, and the same, 
and even more may properly be claimed for the five 
“missing links,” or man races. That should not be 
regarded as strange when the whole rise of man above 
the human state is accomplished in spheres invisible to 
the present race. 

I teach that when the * * human soul ’ ’ passes from 
the human visible body it does not necessarily again re¬ 
turn for a repetition of physical subvesture experiences, 
to secure a higher unfoldment in form, and I base that 
doctrine upon the following self evident facts: 

1. —Human forms of life have existed, in successive 
generations, long enough for “human soul return,” and 
none have yet returned in a higher form. 

2. —How do I know that none have so returned to 
dwell in bodies of flesh and blood? Because there has 
been no change in the physical form of human bodies 
since the first were propagated. If the doctrine of “soul 
return” be sound, for higher evolution in form, then we 
would witness a rise in the bodily forms of humans, be¬ 
cause we know that the “soul”—the invisible life organ¬ 
ization of a human—must continuously and forever un¬ 
fold to higher form tones, and that the form of the 
body must correspondingly reside. 

. It is true that each generation of mankind is a little 
higher in mental and psychological powers. That rise 
is due to the fellowship progress of pre-human souls in 
invisible spheres, before functioning in the physical sub- 
vesture bodies for the last time. That rise is also due 
to unfoldment. by thinking, of each generation, while 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


163 


in physical bodies which higher degree of imfoldment 
is transmitted, in potential embryos, to the form tones 
of the succeeding generations. Then where do the human 
“souls” come from which daily and hourly come forth 
in new born bodies in human propagation? They come 
from that infinite sphere of “soul” life where the “five 
races of man” dwell, as before explained, and they will 
continue to so come forth until “time shall be no more.” 
It is at least seen that the plan of the evolution of rising 
forms of life, in an endless chain, with no missing links, 
is accounted for in the foregoing, which is given with¬ 
out any elaboration, and as suggestive of experimental 
thinking, rather than as data of synthetic philosophy. 

We now come to consider, briefly, post-human forms 
of existence, but that department of unfoldment has 
already been quite fully elaborated elsewhere in this 
volume. It remains only to state, in this connection, 
that the propagation of invisible forms of life by humans, 
is in conjunction with the unfoldment of the Celestial. 
Principle, by which bodily forms of higher etheric sub¬ 
stance are propagated from the visible ones to function 
as constituent members of the higher Universal Brother¬ 
hood. 

The author is aware that his system of doctrines, or 
ideas, concerning pre and post human forms of life do 
not fully conform to the teachings of ancient and mod¬ 
ern theosophy, but the differences between them and 
this plan are not greater than those by which the ancient 
occult science is distinguished from the most flourishing 
types of the modem. I hold that the so called “group 
soul” is identical with the animal, and pre-human “man 
soul,” and not with the human psychological organiza¬ 
tion of consciousness; that there is “soul return” for 
all types and grades of the former, but not for the latter, 
except in the case of moral degenerates as elsewhere 
explained. 

We are never at liberty to dispute the teachings 
of ancient Seers, who were accredited in their respective 
generations. It is all resolved to the modern interpre¬ 
tations of those teachings. Men have license to differ 
concerning the latter. I have come to be fully persuaded 
that we are dependent upon science, and scientific meth¬ 
ods of thinking, for the conclusions reached concerning 
the plan of life, that there are departments of life un¬ 
foldment, which are revealed, even in our day, only by 
thinking in Silent Communion with invisible forms of 
life. Is it not possible that when one is in doubt as 
to the doctrines of any of the great ancient teachers he 


164 


THE NEW IDEA. 


or she may enjoy direct communication with them to 
the complete solution of such doubts? That is not only 
possible, but gloriously practical for those who have come 
into possession of the keys of life unfoldment. I have 
at least reached a stage of unfoldment by thinking, which 
enables me to discover the fact as to whether or not my 
teacher, be he heard on the printed page, or from the 
platform, enjoys communication with the Seers of un¬ 
seen worlds. Unless that correspondence with the higher 
environments is in active play, the teacher must function 
in the lower degrees of wisdom and intelligence, and 
confine himself, most generally, to functional perception 
potentialities. 


EXERCISE XX. 


ANNIHILATION. 

The symbol of ‘ Eternal Death” explained—The awful 
function of degeneration—Thinking out of human 
life on a descending scale—Moral degeneracy the 
danger point. 

SINCE the following Exercise in thinking was pre¬ 
pared I have come across some extracts from an article 
written by the Rev. Andreas Bard, rector of St. Paul’s 
Episcopal Church of Walla Walla, Wash., in which he 
says: 

“Will the soul survive the wreck of death? I 
answer: Some will; others will not. Man is not immor¬ 
tal. Man is immortable. The distinction is vast. Look 
upon the soul as a spark divine in the bosom of the babe. 
It should be fanned into a living flame by the experiences 
of earth. It should soar higher and higher, until it min¬ 
gles with the sun-heart of God. Every day, every 
thought, every deed should make it grow in force. Then, 
at the end of life, it has ceased to be a possibility. It 
has become a reality. It is no longer immortable. It 
is immortal. The fittest survives. 

“But how often the spark is not fanned into a flame! 
It glimmers and glows. Not being touched by the fire 
of God’s love, nor fanned into life by the storms and 
experiences of earth, it finally dies. It is neither immor¬ 
table nor immortal. It is extinguished. This is the 
meaning of ‘eternal death.’ There is no hell to be afraid 
of. The penalty of an aimless life is annihilation.” 


IT is seen from the teachings of this volume that 
man, by the thinking, or the oscillations of the units of 
which his life organization is composed, rises from one 
harmony point to another, in the evolution of his organic 
form until mass tone consciousness is propagated. I 
have said that the psychological organism of man is in 
the fact of his invisible form, or the real man; also, 
that when that invisible form is released, it rises through 
certain stages of development to take a place in the 
Risen Brotherhood of mankind as an active member of 
that transcendent household; also, that by thinking, in 
proper methods, a man or a woman may propagate that 
invisible form of life, while yet here in these lower phys- 

( 165 ) 



166 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ical spheres into a glorious degree of Harmony; also 
that into such invisible form of life no evil can enter 
by substance. 

I have also taught in this volume that there is no 
death for any part of the life organization, or for any 
item of life, no matter how small, or how great in organ¬ 
ism; that all error, evil, and disease are in percep¬ 
tion, functional to man’s rise and unfoldment, and that 
he will eventually rise out of all such potentialities. I 
have even said that if man will not unfold by thinking 
in volition, desire, choice, and motive, in an effort by 
self, he must rise over the crucible of affliction. In 
other words, that if he will not pull himself up, he must 
be pushed up by error and evil. That is all in Truth. 

It may be, therefore, that the student has already 
said that, if the foregoing teachings are sound, the only 
thing man has to fear is potential affliction, and that 
eventually he will reach a heaven of joy and gladness, 
peace and plenty, whether he make the effort or not. 
It is true that much dependence may be placed on po¬ 
tential evil—in human affliction. Those afflictions 
are indeed in the facts of degrees of wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence, but as against wilful disobedience persisted in, 
until degeneration has taken a mighty grip on the func¬ 
tions of a life organization, they cannot avail. There 
are the dangers of disorganization and degeneration to 
be avoided, because it is possible for degeneration to 
proceed, until the units high and low, part sociological 
company, with the result that can only be expressed 
by the words, “partial annihilation.” 

In other terms, a human life organization may, by 
right thinking, regenerate and rise from one degree of 
Harmony to another, evermore, or, by wrong thinking, 
it may degenerate and descend into inharmony, and be¬ 
come heterogeneous to its complete disorganization— 
until the units separate, and that particular mass tone 
form of life has gone out, so far as the degrees of un¬ 
foldment of these spheres are concerned. Of course, the 
units of the physical body will continue to live, and may 
engage in building another mass tone body, wherein 
the unfolding volition will grasp the higher life foods 
and the treasure will be propagated to a dwelling place 
where disintegration cannot enter. 

It is useless to teach that man can be forced into 
the immortality of his rising form whether he will or 
no, when the fact is that as soon as evolution has carried 
him up to a point wherein he takes possession of his 
own life and moulds it to suit his own “sweet will,” 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


167 


it rests wholly with self whether that one will continue 
to rise or, by choice, begin to fall. 

Mass-tone life has been given to man by the glorious 
thinking in fellowship of the grand life units, but he 
cannot be forced to continue. He has the power to 
think himself out of existence, so far as that part of the 
invisible form of life that is propagated in these spheres 
is concerned, and it may be that many descend to such 
awful consequences. One can see that the dangers of 
degeneration are cumulative. Man may descend to such 
a state of degeneracy as to hate life. It is for him only 
inexpressible misery, but in such cases, insanity or sui¬ 
cide generally comes to the relief; and while we do not, 
as yet, fully know the functions of those afflictions, it 
may be that those diseases—those particular forms of 
disease—propagate a return, even beyond this sphere, 
to evolution. It is plain, however, that if man has the 
will power to think himself out of life—to the dispersion 
of the units composing his invisible form of life—he 
passes through an awful hell to accomplish the task. 

However, let it be understood that I do not teach 
degeneration to total annihilation, in the idea of a sub¬ 
stitute for, so-called, “eternal death.” There is no 
power within or without a life organization, such as a 
human, which will ever be exercised to the total and final 
extinction of that life. By evil, or disobedient thinking 
and acting, in such a persistence of the will that degen¬ 
eracy has destroyed, or paralyzed the moral faculties, 
and dethroned conscience, a human may become disorgan¬ 
ized to the dispersion of the units composing his higher 
form, or by which he or she is resolved back to the state in 
which that one existed before it entered a human body. 
That is a setback to the extent of the loss, with the endur¬ 
ance of all sufferings consequent upon it, of the possibili¬ 
ties of a certain period of physical subvesture life unfold- 
ment, which may be called the human period, but degen¬ 
eration, originating in the human sphere, could not carry 
a life below the entrance to the potentialities of the 
next lower sphere: As functional forces, the powers of 
human degeneration stop there. They cannot go fur¬ 
ther. 

Then what? The foregoing observations bring us 
face to face with the necessity of reincarnation; and I 
can plainly see in my vision of evolution, as it is in Prin¬ 
ciple, that reincarnation is the only open door for the 
human degenerate, who has persisted in wilful wrong 
thinking to the complete paralysis of his moral faculties 
and, therefore of conscience. I can as plainly see in my 


168 


THE NEW IDEA. 


vision of Truth that, for him or her who has laid up the 
treasure of the human form of life in the heavenly world, 
by right thinking—by thinking in fond obedience of, and 
in harmony with the highest will, there is no “soul re¬ 
turn,” but a continuous and everlasting rise to higher 
and better things. 

For one who is in the throes of physical, mental, 
and moral degeneracy, it is easier to sink lower than to 
rise, but the way becomes a literal hell. However, there 
must be relief from such a life when its form is re¬ 
solved back to the next lower sphere. Then there is 
met with the opportunity to rise again, by the same meth¬ 
od in which the failure was made, the first step in which 
is reincarnation. 

Does it not appeal to the student that the plan of 
life as outlined, so far, in this thinking exercise is loyal 
to Principle? And does this not all conspire to enhance 
the value of such methods of thinking as will enable one 
to rise by unfoldment in every hour of life in this sphere ? 
Thousands, it may be, will read these pages, who know 
what a measure of moral degeneracy is, and the dangers 
inherent in its nature. That observation will be keenly 
appreciated by those who have begun to rise again, by 
the unfolding power of right thinking—thinking in meth¬ 
ods of Principle. 

If one should ask, Why is it necessary that humans 
should be exposed to such dangers? The answer is 
two-fold; first, the heroism necessary to appropriate po¬ 
tential evil to one’s unfoldment is not, and never can be, 
a sufficient price for so valuable a prize as life—self life 
unfoldment by self; and, second, let it be remembered 
that it is not only you and I who are making this mighty 
journey of evolution, but God, who is unfolding in us. 
That which Principle finds necessary for self should be 
accepted by us, with ready obedience, knowing that the 
plan of life is founded in infinite wisdom, and that by 
thinking and acting in that plan man easily conquers. 

I have shortened this exercise as much as possible, 
because it is the plan of this volume to avoid the dark 
side of life in an effort to magnify the bright side. How¬ 
ever, it is expedient that students should come into a 
clear understanding that man is, in the highest sense, 
self-created, and that failing to do his own work, he falls 
behind the mighty procession of evolution and suffers 
in consequence. It is all a matter of one’s response to 
the invitation of Principle. It is for man to say, I will! 
or, I will not! 


EXERCISE XXI. 


HOW SHALL ONE KNOW? 

The nature of knowledge—Its substance—It is appropri¬ 
ated by thinking—The test of experiment recom¬ 
mended—One may know whether or not this is the 
Plan of Principle by its fruits—Conquering Disturb¬ 
ing thoughts. 


SUPPOSE it be admitted that thinking in volition, 
desire, choice and motive, will unfold man into kite 
ideals, and resolve them to his form tone of life, how 
can one know what the real plan of life is, so as to con¬ 
form to that ? It must be admitted that the plan unfolded 
by and from Principle is the right one. Principle is in 
Truth, as we all know, but there are different sets of 
doctrines, promulgated by man as to what the real plan 
of Principle is. Thinkers differ as to that. Some say it 
is this way ; others contend it is that way. How shall one 
decide as between this and that? 

It is impossible for any one to decide that important 
issue for another. Each one must do that for self. But 
how? That decision can be reached, on solid ground, 
only by the appropriation of degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence, by which Knowledge is unfolded into con¬ 
sciousness. It is very important to understand just how 
it is that the items of knowledge are in the fact of sub¬ 
stance. Knowledge is not in the memory. Memory is 
a function in knowledge. The whole psychological house¬ 
hold of Consciousness, with all its wonderful kindred 
faculty groups is in the reality of Knowledge. Each 
item, or life unit, or thought propagated into that in¬ 
visible and higher human form is, to the extent and qual¬ 
ity of its tone, an addition to one’s life organization, by 
substance. 

We already possess sufficient knowledge to see that 
the psychological side of man’s life organization is high¬ 
er and grander than the visible side, and we know, also, 
that any system of thinking which will most speedily 
expand and strengthen that invisible faculty organism, 
is in the plan of Principle. That is self-evident. 

Now, suppose the student set up, as standards, the 
following ideals, to-wit.: 

1—A pure, clean, strong light and happy heart, 
overflowing with joy and gladness. 

( 169 ) 



170 


THE NEW IDEA. 


2—A disposition, radiant with cheerfulness, youth¬ 
fulness, health and zeal. 

Those will be enough for our purpose. We now begin 
to think. For some time we strive to bring to vision— 
to a clear understanding, reaching out to appropriation 
—what purity, cleanliness, strength, a light heart, a hap¬ 
py heart, joy and gladness, cheerfulness, youthfulness, 
health and zeal, are. We are to make them a study; to 
read about them; think about them; until we come to es¬ 
teem them for their real worth, to desire them with all 
the powers of the heart. 

It is seen, of course, that all the foregoing is think¬ 
ing in volition, in choice of ideals, and in a flood of 
desire from a pure heart. That latter idea is wherein 
motive rises in great functional power. 

Suppose that the foregoing is diligently persisted 
in, in connection with the morning and the evening ex¬ 
ercises, and the daily thinking, given later on these 
pages, for, say nine days, before one “pulls up the bush 
to see if the roots are growing”; that is, before we stop 
to weigh or measure our progress. What will be the re¬ 
sult? 

Let us answer that question by asking another. 
Suppose that, for the same period, one think in ideals 
of the opposites of the life characteristics named, and, 
as he or she will be sure to do, to act in some measure, 
accordingly, What will be the result? It is unnecessary 
to definitely make reply to either of the foregoing propo¬ 
sitions. The answers already are fully formulated in the 
thoughts of the reader. 

However, as to the first proposition, at the end of 
the period named, the adept, or even the stumbling think¬ 
er, at least begins to realize the wonderful experiences 
of life unfoldment, and will desire to continue the prac¬ 
tice. The heart will rise into purity and become strong; 
its former heaviness will have gone; the whole life orga¬ 
nization will be delighted by a sense of self-cleanliness; 
and happiness, inexpressible, will rise with joy and glad¬ 
ness. The thinker will be the very soul of cheerfulness, 
with gladsome smiles, gentleness, and kindly words; and 
a. clear sense of regenerated vouthfulness, with rising 
health, of body, mind and spirit, will propagate to zeal. 

That one who will make an earnest, honest, persist¬ 
ent effort in thinking in the health and life giving ideals, 
listed in the foregoing, for even three or four days, will 
become a. living, willing, anxious witness to the truth¬ 
fulness of what has just been said. Thus the proof of 
the life unfolding functions of a system of thinking comes 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


171 


by self-experiment. In that way, dear student, and in 
no other, will one come to know the plan of life unfold- 
ment as it is in Principle and in Truth. 

There will of course, necesarily exist in motive, the 
object of rising to join the invisible Brotherhood of man¬ 
kind, which works out to an appropriation of the tones 
of that transcendent mass-tone life, by which the rise, 
as above stated, will be hastened and made productive 
of the results here declared to be the sure rewards of such 
thinking. 

But the student must remember that those rewards, 
which come to the thinker in this sphere of life depend, 
primarily, upon self-effort. Man must think, which is 
real work, in such experiments as the best and most avail¬ 
able suggestion will lead him to undertake, until he 
discover the real way. He will know the right way—the 
real plan of Principle, when he finds it—by its fruits. 
That is the only test worth a name. 

Attention is here called to a very important fact. 
One who sets out to think in volition, and in the plan of 
Principle, will sometimes be besieged by unbidden and 
inflowing thoughts, frequently in evil, and generally in 
error, by which he or she will be literally distracted. That 
one may be led to conclude that no such disturbing forces 
from environment so troubled him before, and that such 
assaults are consequent upon the new departure, and so 
they are. The cases wherein it is otherwise are excep¬ 
tional. 

It rises in this way: The life organization has been 
permitted to go forward, free from self control, and 
without care or interest, and has fallen into a rut of error, 
in which it is held by strong forces. When the attempt is 
made to get out of the rut, those forces are disturbed, 
and finally overthrown. They do not yield without a 
struggle. Hence, the confusion and disorder. All that 
is a very good sign that the real work has begun, and 
the beginner should push the new method of thinking 
with all the more determination. 

Sometimes those distracting thoughts will disarm 
volition half a dozen times in as many minutes, and 
thrust the chosen line of thinking aside in order to give 
place to their own functions. That is wherein the strug¬ 
gle for the beginner rises. In such cases one will do well 
to meet the distracting invisible forces, with a keen con¬ 
templation, for a few minutes, retrospective of lost and 
wasted opportunities, by which he or she will realize 
that present conditions are not what they might have be¬ 
come, had the better system of thinking been entered 


172 


THE NEW IBEA. 


upon long before. That will drive away injurious 
thoughts, and quicken volition into stronger resolves. All 
such disturbing thoughts are in evil, although they may 
be in disguise. 

Much may be depended on, in this respect, by a cor¬ 
dial compliance with the rules, given in this volume, for 
morning, evening and daily thinking. If those be thor¬ 
oughly carried out, it will not be long before self control, 
and the power of concentration will be in full functional 
force, to the complete deliverance of self from all dis¬ 
tracting forces. 

It should be impressed that thinking is peculiarly 
self work, and has nothing to do with any one else, ex¬ 
cept when it is propagated for the benefit of another. 
Any outside interference on the part of others, so far as 
one’s thinking is concerned, is to be promptly discour¬ 
aged. It should always be remembered that thinking is 
a secret and a silent process. No one should think 
aloud. Of course they cannot do so in actuality, but there 
are those v r ho speak their thoughts before reason and 
judgment have had time to consider and properly formu¬ 
late them. That should be avoided. 

It is noted, also, in connection with methods of think¬ 
ing, that results—abiding results—are not immediately 
propagated. The results do not always quickly follow 
the process. One may think, persistently, for hours to¬ 
day, and nothing will appear to follow. The results come 
secretly. One is not advised of their unfoldment. They 
are well seated in the life organization before they make 
their presence known. One has only to do the thinking in 
proper methods. Results will surely follow, and, what is 
the most gratifying thing a*bout it, those effects are 
cumulative. 


EXERCISE XXII. 


SELF CREATION. 

Regeneration and Degeneration—The wonderful organism 
of a Thinker—Its functions— Volition, desire, choice 
and motive the mighty factors of self-life building. 


A HUMAN who has arrived at the age of under¬ 
standing is gradually put in possession and control of a 
most wonderful organism for the propagation of 
thoughts. It may be said that, in a wide sense, up to that 
point—up to a point of life unfoldment wherein one is 
able to exercise desire in choice, volition in high ideal 
motives, life building has, for the most part, proceeded 
by the voluntary wisdom and intelligence of the units 
in mass tone, but when those powers become functional, 
and in the measure in which they become functional, a 
man or woman becomes a builder of self, and may build 
up or down—may rise or fall. He or she cannot remain 
stationary. 

It must be admitted that the organism thus given 
into the hands of man—thus passed over to the control 
of his own powers—is a most complicated and delicate 
creation. It is to be operated with great care. One is 
the better prepared, by considerable training, for the im¬ 
portant task. If one desire a short, convenient name for 
that organism, call it A Thinker. It is the product of 
the highest skill, and the most transcendent inventive 
genius in our universe. It is quite easily put out of or¬ 
der, but may be restored to the harmonious co-operation 
of all its parts, by its proper use, without cost for re¬ 
pairs. 

It does not wear out. The more it is used the larger, 
stronger, and more useful it becomes. It grows, or un¬ 
folds into a wider range of functions by use. A Thinker 
is primarily designed to propagate thoughts. It is itself 
composed of thoughts. Thoughts constitute the sub¬ 
stance from which it is constructed. When put in oper¬ 
ation, it has the power and wisdom to appropriate unit 
forms of substance existing outside of its own organiza¬ 
tion, and to flux them into substance, and in that way to 
spin and weave the invisible plasm of new thoughts, and 
to mould them in transcendently high and beautiful per¬ 
sonal forms of life, and to tranmute them into the con¬ 
sciousness of its own higher form. 

( 173 ) 



174 


THE NEW IDEA. 


It is thus seen that the most remarkable invention, or 
mechanism, if you please, that man can train himself to 
manipulate is actually within his visible life organiza¬ 
tion—is really his higher life. In a vision of those facts 
it is seen that man is ineed a creator of man—a builder 
of self. That is surely self-evident. Even the unit forms 
of substance which he uses in the wonderful work, are, 
in the very same way, created—propagated—by their 
potential units which compose his visible body. The 
primal units, from which they were propagated, in the 
line of descent, came forth from Primordial Principle. 

It is true that the “materials”—“blocks” from which 
the Thinker builds—are of the most transcendent nature. 
Principle, in the facts of the Two Principles, which are 
forever in oscillation, dwells within, as the soul and cen¬ 
ter of each such unit. That applies to the substance used, 
and to the units of life substance—thoughts—propagated 
by the Thinker. Thus, again, it is seen that creation is 
due to the infinite organism of the units employed—to the 
wonderful processes of thinking. 

Thus equipped man may think himself into any form 
tone according to his volition and desire. He may rise 
and expand into the Harmony of the higher and better 
life, in continuous joy and gladness, power, peace and 
plenty, or he may descend and degenerate, heterogen¬ 
eously, until his life organization is resolved back to that 
estate of pre-human existence for which the only open 
door is reincarnation. 

That is a fact, because the new units—new thoughts— 
which the Thinker propagates are always the exact 
image, or tone, of motive. Man’s creations, which are 
always in the actuality of thoughts, or thought externali- 
zations, are forever moulded by desire, choice of ideals, 
and motive, exercised in volition. If man could not think 
himself into lower tones, he could not prophgate his life 
to higher tones. That is self evident. The former is 
called degeneration; the latter regeneration. The teach¬ 
ings of this short exercise should be held in steady vision. 


EXERCISE XXIII. 


THINKING TO BENEFIT OTHERS. 

Thinking more effective for the prosperity of the neighbor 
than any other method of assistance—Secret of the 
success of great men—Marvelous power and re- 
sources of the “Thinking Machine”—Learning to 
operate it—Examples of the grand achievements in 
thinking for the good, of others. 

IT has been said in this volume that no one has a 
right to interfere with the thinking of another. That is 
said in respect of the facts that no one can do your think¬ 
ing, or can grow, or unfold for you. That is self work— 
done by self, or it is never done. But there is a grand 
sense in which we may think for the benefit of others. 
f Phat is best done without their knowledge, and even at 
some distance from them. 

One may easily send his or her strengthening, uplift¬ 
ing, cheering, encouraging, health-giving thoughts to oth¬ 
ers with the most gratifying results for their good. In that 
way one may disarm enemies, and render them powerless 
to accomplish injury to the Thinker; in that way one 
may, at least, assist in restoring the sick to health; de¬ 
livering the unfortunate from trouble and affliction, and 
lifting clouds of doubt and fear from the weak and dis¬ 
couraged. 

As a rule people have, as yet, very little confidence 
in that method of helping the neighbor. The author de¬ 
clares such to be the most effective plan. That does not 
propose a discontinuance of acts of charity, nor of deeds 
of philanthropy. It is a method of helping the neighbor, 
while absent from him or her, which infinitely transcends 
charity, or philanthropy, in its results. More good can 
be done in that way for others than in any other. The 
trouble is that we limit the powers and functions of 
thinking, without authority, to the spoken word, or to 
deeds of kindness. Those are necessary, but their 
functions fall far short—far below—those of silent think¬ 
ing. In the latter practice, one may do all things for 
another. There is no limit to its possibilities. It is in 
the spirit ©f Brotherhood, which is the plan of life. 

There may be some limitation set for self work for 
self, but none for thinking for the benefit of the neighbor. 
What a marvelous revelation we would have if the veil 
were removed that conceals unseen forces. We would 

( 175 ) 



176 


THE NEW IDEA. 


then discover the secret of this or that one’s great success, 
or the real cause of so many failures. The reason that 
there are so many failures in life, and so few successes 
is because, in our day, people think ill of each other, 
rather than good. One will experience some difficulty 
in selfishly thinking self into great power and glory 
among men, but very little in accomplishing the same for 
the neighbor. No one has any right to deny that doctrine 
imtil he or she has given it a fair trial. 

It is often said, when a great man passes out of this 
sphere, that his success in this life was largely due to a 
great mother, or to a loving, devoted wife. That is true, 
of course, but in what way did they contribute to that 
greatness? It was not so much in deeds they performed; 
it was in comforting and encouraging ministrations, and, 
above all else, in good-will, and continued good wishes 
thinking of that mother, or that wife, towards the son, 
or the husband. It was the thinking, in love and affec¬ 
tion, for theeir success, which achieved most. I hear 
some one say, “They did more praying than thinking,” 
Be it so! It’s a poverty stricken prayer, indeed, that does 
not implicate thinking. It was good-will thinking in 
volition, desire, choice, and motive, call it whatever you 
please. The help consisted in the continuous inpour of 
good thoughts—strengthening , uplifting, encouraging, 
health-giving, and good-fortune producing thoughts— 
which did more for the achievement of success and 
greatness in the case given, than anything else. 

Man has a very inadequate knowledge of the power 
of his thinking towards others. If a man be generally 
held in high esteem, and thought well of, he will as gen¬ 
erally prosper; if he is thought ill of, generally, he will 
most always fail. How little we know, in our day, of 
the real functions of rising Brotherhood. A little think¬ 
ing soon convinces one of the fallacy of that common say¬ 
ing, “It makes do difference to me what he thinks.” It 
works a great difference in one’s life to be well thought 
about, on the one hand, or to be thought ill of, on the 
other. I do not think there is a man living in this sphere, 
who could make a success of life, in opposition to the 
adverse thinking of those who know him, if such ill think¬ 
ing be founded on just cause. Even when it is not, if 
such thinking is not disarmed by the contra good think¬ 
ing of its object, he will fail in his plans. 

The invisible portions of our life organizations are 
interdependent, the one with the other, by relativity. 
We are closer together by our invisible lives than by our 
visible forms. All thinking of humans is carried on in 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


177 


invisible spheres. The substance units—thoughts—em¬ 
ployed in thinking in volition, are far above the functions 
of physical sub vesture tones. Hence, thinking is more 
potent for weal or woe than visible actions. A psycholog¬ 
ical blow, delivered to one a thousand miles away is more 
destructive of real life progress, than is a blow of the fist 
to one near by. 

Man is just beginning to train and control his think¬ 
ing organism. With that power he will ultimately come 
to do all things. It is beyond all belief as to what he can 
now do, with a little training and practice. When one 
comes to devote the same time and skill to training self 
to operate his thinking organism, that he now does in 
conquering the resources of a piano, a violin, a sewing 
machine, or a typewriter, the world will be filled with 
grander achievements, and invisible worlds would rapidly 
give up their hidden resources for human good. Then 
what will follow when man devotes himself to the control 
of that organism with a zeal and determination commen¬ 
surate with its transcendent character? 

Thinking in fellowship, in oneness of purpose, where¬ 
in, say a group, or circle, of a dozen, or any other number, 
agree with each other, when all are together, to take up 
thinking work for a certain person, or persons, in need 
of assistance or relief, may be carried on with most 
astonishing and gratifying results. That is a transcend¬ 
ent method, because it reaches out beyond the functions 
of one thinker, into a mass tone of thinking that is sur¬ 
prisingly potential. 

Let the understanding between students and author 
be very clear as to this plan of thinking. Nothing is 
done while the thinkers are in each other’s visible pres¬ 
ence, except to agree as to just what shall be done, and 
the particular time, in each day, when it shall be per¬ 
formed. The real work is done in silence and in solitude, 
by each party to the agreement, separately, but the think¬ 
ing arranged for is all exercised in precisely the same 
hour, and it is to generally continue at least once a day 
for nine days, if the circumstances of the case will permit. 

I can assist the elaboration of this particular kind of 
thinking by an illustration, taken from my own expe¬ 
rience. I believe it was in 1906, in Cleveland, Ohio, that 
I entered my thought science class room, on one occasion, 
when not more than twenty or thirty were present. I 
read to them, from a newspaper of the same date, of an 
accident which had taken place the previous day in that 
city, by which a baker had both his hands cut off at the 
wrists. He had a wife and some five children, and had 


178 


THE NEW IDEA. 


not many weeks before, purchased a humble house, on 
the installment plan ,which was to cost $2,000, on which 
he had paid but $200. He and his family occupied the 
new home. When the accident occurred he was taken to 
the hospital. 

Having completed reading the sad tale, I asked: 
“What shall we do for that family? Let us do our very 
best, each morning, at eight o’clock, for nine days.” We 
then entered into thirty seconds of silence, in which each 
student was supposed to have performed a vow con¬ 
cerning the object of attention. That was all. We did 
not speak to each other on the subject afterwards. To 
have done that would have broken the silence. We do 
not claim that the good fortune which followed the ter¬ 
rible misfortune of the afflicted man was the result of 
our helpful thinking, but without any act, or word of 
instigation on our part, a movement started among the 
people, which resulted in paying, in full, for the handless 
man’s home, and the presentation to his wife of a clear 
deed to the premises. In addition to that he received 
about $5,000 in cash, and his wrists healed perfectly. 

The reader may be justified in doubting that our 
thinking had anything whatever to do with bringing 
about his good fortune, but we have as good a claim to 
even that, as the parties whose evil thinking caused his 
misfortune to take place, have to the results of their 
unconscious work. Certain it is that the calamity event¬ 
uated as the result of some one’s wrong thinking, and that 
the good fortune which followed was the effect of the 
good thinking of many. 

Another case in point is at hand. A person suffering 
from a great bodily affliction was advised to experiment 
in these methods of thinking. He joined the Cleveland 
school, and in three months was perfectly sound and in 
the highest health. A small circle in the class took his 
case in hand in secret and in silence. Besides that he 
entered personally and zealously into studies similar to 
these. He is a prominent man of Cleveland, Ohio. Any 
person wishing to correspond with him privately, may 
obtain his testimony of the value of this system of think¬ 
ing. For that purpose his address will be given on appli¬ 
cation to the author. 

I might easily cite a.score of examples of the almost 
marvelous effects of the methods of thinking herein 
taught, and especially of those good results rising from 
thinking for the benefit of others. 


EXERCISE XXIV. 


THE DANGER PERIOD. 

Degeneration—Scientific definition of sin—“Soul re¬ 
turn and reincarnation for the Degenerate only— 
Infants and children gloriously provided for in the 
plan of life—Choosing regeneration or degeneration 
—That is in the functions of volition, desire, choice 
and motive. 


JUST as regeneration, or unfoldment, is the source 
of all power, health, prosperity and happiness, degener¬ 
ation is the cause of all weakness, disease, failure and 
suffering. Both processes are wholly within the domain 
of man’s volition. He may, in volition, choose either 
course. It can work only injury to teach any other doc¬ 
trine, because it would not be in Truth. It must be re¬ 
membered that a refusal to choose either course is the 
fact of selecting a measure of degeneration. Man must 
exercise choice. That faculty must be heard. Man either 
chooses regeneration—decides to unfold into higher and 
better conditions—or he rejects that course. He may not 
deliberate over the question. He may, in the agnosticism 
of indifference, appear to let it alone, but that works out 
a rejection of thinking to unfoldment, which results in 
some measure of disorganization. 

The earlier stages of degeneration have no such 
symptoms as appear in the acute forms of the disease 
known as moral degeneracy. In fact one may so live as 
to wholly avoid that affliction, and yet make little or no 
progress in real life unfoldment. The disease of moral 
degeneracy rises, from the indulgence of evil thinking, 
propagating to immoral habits. It is the product, for ex¬ 
ample, of the liquor habit, and its affiliated vices. 

But there is a kind of degeneration which does not 
directly attack the moral faculties in that way. It rather 
dwarfs, or obstructs the unfoldment of the invisible life 
organization, and confines man to sentient functions, rob¬ 
bing him of the higher bread of life, which assimilates 
to the propagation of visions of the risen life. Such a 
man or woman does not rise out of sentient life. The 
spiritual side of his duality becomes non functional, and 
his higher self is in slavery. That makes the evolution 
of the invisible form impossible. It is clearly taught in 
this volume that the invisible form of life is propagated 

( 179 ) 



180 


THE NEW IDEA. 


by the mutual, the reciprocal, thinking of both sides of 
man’s duality. 

What is the result of such one-sided thinking and 
acting? Why, for such a life, there is no resurrection 
propagated. It is not science—not in Truth—to say that 
the resurrection of man’s new form of life proceeds from 
the human state, by an arbitrary achievement of powers 
outside of man. It proceeds from the thinking of man him¬ 
self, in volition, desire, choice and motive, or it does not 
proceed at all. That is self evident. In such a case, the 
life organization of a man or a woman is, at that event 
miscalled death, resolved back to the next lower pre¬ 
human state of existence, and as in the former case, the 
only open door to a resumption of evolution is reincar¬ 
nation. 

Man must do his own thinking to the unfoldment of 
his invisible higher form, here, while in the body, or go 
back for another opportunity. In the now fast-becoming 
obsolete visions of life unfoldment that eventuation was 
interpreted as being cast into hell, to experience the 
“death that never dies.” We enjoy clearer visions of 
Truth in our day. 

The question now rises, what becomes of infants, 
and those who pass out of the human state before they 
reach the age of understanding wherein they can exercise 
volition in desire, choice and motive, intelligently, in 
methods of thinking? From a consideration of this diffi¬ 
cult subject such absurd doctrines as “infant damnation,” 
and the plan of predestination and forordination have 
sprung up. 

It may appear to some that any system of doctrines, 
or plan of life, which provides for the unfoldment of 
infants and children, who pass from these spheres, before 
years of understanding are reached, and, which resolves 
evil and consequent afflictions to potential degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence as the “pushing force” for the 
rise of mankind, must necessarily provide for the ulti¬ 
mate rise of all to a heaven of happiness. And, as a 
matter of fact that is the truth, but there are, in the 
plan of Principle, peculiar responsibilities imposed on 
that period of human life which comprise the years of 
understanding, and, also, great and exceeding rewards, 
on the one hand, and terrible penalties on the other, re¬ 
sulting from the manner in which those responsibilities 
are discharged. 

An elaboration of the functions and processes by 
which infants and children departing from this life, as 
such, are unfolded into invisible spheres, and into per- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


181 


fected new invisible bodies, involves the functional inter¬ 
dependence of the zones of life substance, and of the inter¬ 
mediate spheres within any zone. It must also be under¬ 
stood that until a human has developed to the functional 
use of volition, in desire, choice and motive, although 
somewhat in conflict with evil and its afflicting potential¬ 
ities, he or she cannot function to thinking in that process 
of propagation called sin. 

What is sin, and wherein does it differ from other 
evils ? Those are important questions. Their answer 
clears away many clouds which darken human vision to¬ 
day. To commit sin is to think and act to the disorgani¬ 
zation, in any measure, of the invisible form of life which 
is, to a considerable extent, propagated, in humans, before 
the years of understanding, as defined in the foregoing, 
are reached. The processes of propagation of the invis¬ 
ible form begin to function simultaneously with the be¬ 
ginning of life in the visible form. The periods of infancy 
and youth are most fruitful for that unfoldment, and, it 
is seen that, as compared with life in lower spheres, those 
characteristics of human life are greatly lengthened for 
that specific purpose. Hence, dear student, it is a fact 
that an infant, or a child, enters the next higher sphere 
of life by its invisible form, in a far greater degree of 
unfoldment, as to its real value, than do a great majority 
of those who reach what is known as middle age. 

It is in the plan of life that a portion of the human 
race shall remain in these spheres, until what is called 
middle and old age are attained, for the purpose of prop¬ 
agating bodies for those invisible forms which rise from 
the spheres of the next lower man-race, and in order to 
provide an opportunity for such to unfold, by succeed¬ 
ing generations, in the human state until the visible and 
invisible forms of rising man shall make one in Omnis¬ 
cience. That is an opportunity which this volume seeks 
to emphasize. Those of our race who improve it will, 
in that future generation, be on the earth when 
the visible and the invisible shall make one in the rise of 
unfoldment, which is the fact of the “Second Coming” 
of the Lord of Life. It is the effort of this work to 
impress upon those who enjoy that transcendent oppor¬ 
tunity now to take advantage of it by thinking in meth¬ 
ods of Principle to the unfoldment of their forms into 
the next higher heaven. 

There is no “soul return”—no going backward to a 
lower sphere of life—for infants and children, and, there¬ 
fore, no reincarnation is necessary for them. 

It is the same with those who, having reached years 


182 


THE NEW IDEA. 


of understanding, so as to be able to function, by desire 
in volition, choice and motive, apply themselves to the 
unf oldment, of their lives into invisible forms of life by 
right methods of thinking. It is scarcely expedient to 
interject here the fact that he who thinks right will act 
righteously. There is no other course possible. He who 
thinks in methods of Principle will act in the same way. 
Man’s actions are but the real expressions of his thinking. 
For such I repeat there is no “soul return,” and none is 
necessary. Their rise is continuous. 

But for humans who have reached that degree of un- 
foldment wherein, by the exercise of volition, desire, 
choice and motive, they take possession of the organism 
of their own lives, and abuse it into disorganization, and 
degeneration, there is the going backward, if carried too 
far, to the next lower sphere of man-life, and then, as 
elsewhere stated, the only way to a resumption of evolu¬ 
tion is by “soul return,” in the processes of reincarnation. 
There is reincarnation for the degenerates, who pass out 
in their degerenacy, but for no others. 

To commit sin is to think and act in degeneration, 
by which a human may become a degenerate. Sin can 
be committed in no other way. It has nothing to do 
with creeds. It is all in thinking to the destruction of 
the grand form of life which Principle has unfolded; it 
* is in using, wilfully, the transcendent organism which 
Principle has handed over to a man to accomplish its 
destruction. That is sin. 


EXERCISE XXV. 


SELF. 

Self pride the beginning of wisdom—Self respect works 
esteem of others—Love of self and other selves—Les¬ 
sons of the picture and the statue—Necessity of new 
schools for Thinking. 


IT is in error to say that one is selfish because that 
one is proud. Self pride is the beginning of wisdom. Self 
carelessness is a child of ignorance, and is akin to degen¬ 
eration. High self respect, and affectionate esteem of the 
neighbor are the wings of life unfoldment. As long as 
they vibrate in the life substance of environment, the 
form to which they belong must rise. 

It appears to me that a lively sense of self respect 
is necessarily antecedent to functional esteem of the 
neighbor. One who exercises no pride in self can see but 
little to admire in the other self. It i sabout the same, 
in another way, with one who is puffed up by self esteem. 
Thus, I distinguish between the functions of respect and 
esteem, in their functional applications. One may respect 
both self and the neighbor, while esteem is for another 
only. However, even self esteem is better than a self 
denial, which does not recognize the true spirit of the 
I am in self. 

One cannot exercise too much interest in self pro¬ 
vided it rise in correspondence with interest in others. 
The relativity and interdependence of at least all human 
forms of life should be kept steadily in view. It is only 
natural that one who is living in a state of self neglect, 
and therefore in a poverty of self respect, should point 
the finger of envying criticism towards him or her who 
is in love with self. 

What, self love ? Decidedly so. One should not hate 
self, and there is no stopping place between that and the 
kind of love here spoken of. One is not commanded to 
love the neighbor more than self—but as much. That’s 
the test. In some way the doctrine of self denial has 
been twisted out of its proper functions. Suppose an 
artist paint a beautiful picture, so full of life that it could 
speak, or. that a sculptor chisel a grand statue that could 
talk. What would be thought of them, if, when admiring 
multitudes uttered words of appreciation and praise, they 
should talk back, and the picture would persist in declar- 

( 183 ) 



184 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ing that it was botch, and the statue would contend that 
it was humbug. Surely people would cease to admire 
them because of their disrespect for their creator. 

The man, or the woman should, somehow, get into 
the relative attitude of the picture or the statue referred 
to, but in talking back at expressions of admiration for 
their splendid lives, they should at least be able to feel 
that, while that part of their creation which is charge¬ 
able to self volition, choice and motive has been more or 
less a failure, the life organism which Principle has given 
to them is transcendently grand. That carries us to the 
point. Man is generally ashamed of his own work of 
self building, because he has neglected it. He is often 
inclined to lay the blame on circumstances. He nearly 
always does that. But the real truth is that he does not 
realize that he is wholly accountable for his condition, 
whatever it may be. If he be without knowledge he will 
excuse himself, and say that he has not had opportunity. 
Well, he has had plenty of opportunity to think, and in 
this world so full of suggestions that environment is talk¬ 
ing to everybody, how can one excuse self for not think¬ 
ing? But he does think continuously. The question is 
how? 

There is a sense in which the whole race should begin 
to learn how to think. It is true that when we were chil¬ 
dren we attended school for the purpose of being trained 
how to think. Our children are in training for the same 
purpose today. But that is the training of youth how to 
think to learn. We need training in methods of thinking 
for the unfoldment of knowledge. That school is for chil¬ 
dren of more mature age. Can we not see that the latter 
is equally, if not of far greater importance, than the 
schools for youth. 

Thus, by thinking to self life unfoldment in knowl¬ 
edge, one is elevated to a correct vision, first of self, then, 
of other selves. Then it bursts upon consciousness that 
all men and women are in the everlasting bond of rela¬ 
tivity and interdependence, and that self love, and love 
of the neighbor are fast resolving themselves to one trans¬ 
cendent fact. On those lines of thinking and study, 
knowledge is unfolded, and Brotherhood begins to rise. 
Who will say that such methods of thinking are not worth 
the effort? 

To know self aright is life everlasting. The fact of 
everlasting life is in a knowledge of self, because such 
knowledge comprehends all others within its rising sweep. 
Do not be afraid to exalt self, as long as such gr^nd ideals 
include others. You are, potentially, as high as the high- 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


185 


est in the universe, and nothing can be more self evident 
than that all one’s potentialities are to be unfolded into 
full functions. Not only is that the Truth, but man’s 
potentialities always and forever increase in the ratio 
of their unfoldment. Then is it not plain that self human 
life is both infinite and Omniscient in unfolding poten¬ 
tiality? 


EXERCISE XXVI. 


FUNCTIONS OF FELLOWSHIP. 

Difference between learning and knowledge—Learning is 
acquired—Knowledge comes of Life unfoldment— 
Unfolding Power, of this volume—The book of life— 
The unfolding wife—John and Mary—From Friend¬ 
ship and Fellowship to Love—Unfolding to the one¬ 
ness of life—Giving is receiving in Principle—Think¬ 
ing in fellowship makes all life akin—The real func¬ 
tion of sociology. 


CAN a learned man think more effectively than an 
unlearned man? He certainly can in those present and 
visible degrees of wisdom and intelligence which make 
up the sum of every day life in business, social and eco¬ 
nomic affairs, as well as in the applications of material 
science and the arts. But we must distinguish between 
learning and knowledge. The latter may be held to 
include all learning, but learning often possesses little 
knowledge. Moreover a vast volume of knowledge may 
exist where there is very little learning. That is not said 
in disparagement of learning. It is mightily functional 
for good when properly employed. The author possesses 
such a small measure of the learning of the sucools and 
colleges of our age that he constantly suffers from the 
need of more. 

And yet there is a greater need of more knowledge 
among men than there is of more learning; or, to state 
the position in more exact terms, knowledge does not 
unfold in man, in our day, in proportion to the rise of 
learning. That is a very unfortunate characteristic of 
life. I have already stated that man—any man—already 
possesses infinite knowledge. Within his life is the full 
knowledge—the complete omniscience—of God, poten¬ 
tially. All that is required is its unfoldment, in degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, by thinking. He does not so 
possess learning. That must be acquired in the fact of 
an education. Man cannot acquire knowledge. It must 
be unfolded from the potentialities of the life organiza¬ 
tion. 

The unfoldment of knowledge, which is the unfold¬ 
ment of life, in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, in¬ 
volves a measure of learning. It is quite necessary that 
one should possess an elementary education—to be able 

( 186 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


187 


to read and write, with such accompaniments as those 
simple arts imply—in order to make headway, beyond a 
certain point, in thinking processes in the degrees named. 
Of course, natural suggestion, as applicable to all animal 
life, is functional to elementary unfoldment in man, espe¬ 
cially in infancy and early childhood. But an element of 
learning—of education—is necessarily involved after that 
stage is reached. Learning is, therefore, the handmaid 
- of knowledge. At best learning is suggestion. It points 
the way. 

It is safe to say that those who have sufficient learn¬ 
ing to read and study a book, written in plain termin¬ 
ology, such as this volume, are superabundantly qualified 
to think in the unfoldment of their potentialities. One 
of the most encouraging indications is that, in the first 
reading, they will not fully understand its teachings. 
That will be, in the first place, an endorsement of the 
book; in the second place, a proof that the student has 
not, as yet, unfolded to its degrees of wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence. The value of the volume, or its contents, may 
safely be measured by the difference, or distance, between 
the student’s status of unfoldment and these teachings. 
When the faithful reader has risen to the full understand¬ 
ing, in appropriation, of the ideas of this book, he will 
be in a position to project its doctrines to higher wisdom 
and intelligence. That is precisely the function of these 
teachings. If people throw aside a volume which they 
say they cannot understand, they act in error. It is only 
the novel which the reader fully understands on first 
reading. It is a high degree of fiction which will bear a 
second reading. It is a creative work which provides a 
study. 

Books come to us sometimes in the fact of a person. 
The young man sometimes finds in the young lady he 
meets a volume for study. Please note that fact. He 
looks her over and thinks about her, and says, mentally, 
I do not quite understand her. Then his desire is aroused 
to know her completely. He has talked to many a girl 
whose life is on her sleeve, and all he needs to do is to 
leave her and go by himself, and add, subtract, multiply 
and divide her points, in order to know her heights and 
depths. But that new girl is a problem hard to solve. 

I have met the man who married that girl, and after 
fifty years of married life, he told me that he had only 
begun the solution. 

He declares that the girl which he could not, at the 
first reading, solve and know all about, had proved to be 
a well of living water, from which he had quenched his 


188 


THE NEW IDEA. 


every thirst, until her unfoldment had met his every 
need. 

It is humbly submitted that this volume may prove, 
not the girl on her sleeve, but the girl hard to understand, 
hard to solve; and may it prove a well of living water— 
a fountain of life—from which students may drink in 
satisfying draughts. May the student become married 
to these teachings and celebrate a golden wedding in the 
fiftieth attempt to fathom their depths, which at best 
can be but in the function of suggestion. 

It is scarcely necessary to say that this proposition, 
in the study of suggestion, which we are reaching, is 
itself a glorious method of thinking. O that we could 
come to study each other. That is the most potential 
method of thinking to unfoldment of self and the other 
self, possible to thought processes, except only one, and 
at the last analysis it is resolved to that one. Dear stu¬ 
dent, what is the function of fellowship? It is mightly 
potential. Did you ever consider it in higher thought? 
From what characteristic of life shall we select an illus¬ 
tration? Let us take one full of potentiality. Let us 
take the young man and the young woman. Their first 
acquaintance is mutually agreeable. They simply agree 
to “keep company.” Nations have been born in those 
two words. They may not be conscious of the fact, but 
they should be, that they are entering upon a study of 
each other—entering upon one of the most potent meth¬ 
ods of thinking possible to life. It will consume ten 
generations to solve the full functions of fellowship, and 
then the solution will be but begun. 

How grand is the study of subvesture life, which 
provides the wonderful institution of fellowship. The 
two look upon each other. That works the function of 
suggestion. They eat and drink from each other’s lives 
in the commerce of life building. They fraternize. That 
is fellowship. They make a series of exchanges of each 
other’s talents, and potentialities, and, without knowing 
how it came to pass, they innocently say to their parents 
and kinsfolk that they are friends— -in the mighty fact 
of friendship. Man has not, I venture, studied the fact, 
but almost as much of life is born of pure friendship as 
of wedlock. It is a mighty function. Thinking in fellow¬ 
ship ! Well, dear student, the worlds, and the heavens of 
our universe were built that way, by the units which 
are grand parents to those which compose your life organ¬ 
ization. 

But finally friendship has propagated to love. The 
exchange of life for life, in an honest barter has gone on, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


189 


until, when John or Mary is absent from the other, John 
is no longer John, and Mary is no longer Mary. They 
must be in sense and psychological contact to be in full 
function. They are becoming one life. The science which 
cannot see that the male and the female will ultimately 
reunite in one form of life is unable to comprehend the 
simplest facts of symbolism. They have now entered upon 
one of the grandest methods of thinking. I trust the stu¬ 
dent will not lose sight of the fact that we are studying to 
unfoldment, a scientific method of thinking in the plan 
of life. 

Directly dame fortune comes along with a new po¬ 
tentiality, and projects it into the ideal dream, Bodily 
separation follows. Grief upon grief, tears upon tears, 
in a metaphorical double heart break are the concomi¬ 
tants. But. degrees of wisdom and intelligence are just 
as well as merciful. John is afar working out an ideal 
fortune for Mary. Mary is just as afar preparing to 
make John’s return a heaven for both. Mary cannot hear 
from her loved John as expected, and she takes herself 
into solitude and weeps. She does not try to talk to 
John, with mountains, or the great ocean, between them. 
She waits, and hopes and prays. Both hearts—both lives 
—are pure and good. Why the misfortune? 

It is not a misfortune. It is a mighty function. It 
is potentially predecessor to a higher life—to that stage 
of life unfoldment when John and Mary will be one life. 
The separation and its resulting griefs are the items 
by which fellowship propagates a final reunion of their 
lives. Do you know, dear student, that in the exact meas¬ 
ures that such potenialities are comprehended they dis¬ 
appear. Would you dissipate—dispel—the trials of life? 
Then, by thinking in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, 
rise to understand their functions, and then they are 
gone. It is precisely the same with evil. It can’t live 
an instant after you rise to the appropriation of its 
functions. How could it? Don’t you see that, in that 
consummation, its work is finished. 

But John and Mary, by their trials will, sooner or 
later, come to abolish separation. By thinking they will 
rise to annihilate distance, by talking with each other, 
in no matter what quarter of the globe they may respect¬ 
ively be located. That they will ever be present with 
each other, no matter where fortune may cause them to 
travel apart. Don’t you see, dear reader, that we cannot 
rise by self alone? We need the other selves in every 
step of the way. John and Mary are “in love;” they 
are in fellowship with all mankind, and, in the rise of 


190 


THE NEW IDEA. 


life, the love between John and Mary extends to the 
whole race, and thereby the race is propagated into the 
reality of transcendent Brotherhood. 

What the law cannot do, Love, the only begotten 
son of our hopes—of our mass tone ideals—achieves in 
the processes of its unutterable embrace. I am striving 
to impress the function of that method of thinking which 
is in the exchange of thoughts, by which all life is ulti¬ 
mately resolved to fellowship, and fellowship to unfold- 
ment. It has been the same all along the pathway of 
life. The dear units were, by Love, wrought into suc¬ 
ceeding degrees of organization—fellowship—until man 
was propagated, and men and women will come to fellow¬ 
ship in the purity of propagation, by thinking, until the 
glory of Brotherhood will fill the universe. 

Come, dear students, let us take up and function in 
that grand method of thinking called fellowship, in which, 
by the exchange of thoughts, we shall unfold into degrees 
of Brotherhood. How shall we do this? By the study 
of each other. We need not proceed contrary to our nat¬ 
ural inclinations, except wherein we shall discover our¬ 
selves in error. At the start select those whom you feel 
are most in harmony with your desires, and whose lives 
are, to your vision, richest in potentiality; and those who 
appear to enjoy the same inclinations towards yourself. 
Then proceed in that mightily functional method of think¬ 
ing in fellowship. 

Let your motive be to give—to bestow—to impart— 
the best riches of your life to that one. You need not 
seek to receive. That will follow in the plan of life as 
it is in Principle. It is more blessed to give than to 
receive, because it is in the giving that you receive. 
Giving is receiving, in Principle. This method of think¬ 
ing in fellowship is between man and man; man and 
woman; woman and woman, and it extends from kinship 
to fellowship, until all are akin. 

In that method of thinking, the work is by no means 
confined to the visible presence of the thinkers. Each 
person to the fellowship carries from the scene of visible 
intercourse the germs for higher and more potential 
interchange of thoughts when absent. It is the thinking 
in the fellowship of silence, in that psychological “scene 
where spirits blend,” and where “friend holds fellow¬ 
ship with friend” across the sense chasm called distance, 
which ultimately fades from vision, that the real work is 
done, and it is best done without any preconcerted plan. 
Let it be done in the power of silence, and let no word 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


191 


be spoken except in the voice of silence. Such, in part, 
are some of the methods of thinking in fellowship. 

I do not wish to be understood that when students 
meet in the visible presence of each other, in the fellow¬ 
ship of thinking, that the spoken word should be dis¬ 
pensed with. They should exercise, in audible conversa¬ 
tion, and thus train themselves in the art of speech expres¬ 
sion, with all the accompaniments of bodily, arm, hand 
and facial gestures, and the light of smiles, as well as the 
melody of hearty laughter. It is when they are separated, 
that they harvest, in silence, the results of visible inter¬ 
course, and that latter department of thinking in fellow¬ 
ship is wherein the processes are extended to higher 
functions. 

When one has bodily retired from the study of 
others, in social gatherings, his real opportunity begins. 
He may continue the mental intercourse, psychologically, 
to the great profit of himself and those whom he thus 
holds in thought. 

If the reader ask for an explanation of the differ¬ 
ence between love and fellowship, as functional in human 
society, the answer is ready. It is in the full force of 
simplicity. Love is the function which resolves the life 
of the man and the life of the woman, from the divided 
state to the fact of primal individuality, in the duality 
of the full tone of our zone, while fellowship is the 
method of propagation by which those risen individual 
forms of life are wrought into the Invisible Brotherhood. 
As already stated, the marriage union of physical sub vest¬ 
ure life is both symbolic of and functional to, the higher 
wedlock of primal individuality, while human fellowship 
in all domestic and social walks of life is in like manner, 
both symbolic of, and functional to, the risen mass tone 
life of now invisible Brotherhood. 

Thus, thinking in fellowship is preeminently in the 
plan of life, as unfolded from Principle. But one may 
say that all such thinking is going on automatically, and 
unconsciously, in every circle of social and business life, 
continuously. That is a fact. The object of these teach¬ 
ings is to impress the advantages of thinking consciously 
—in volition—in choice, and motive ,and in the science 
of fellowship. That method invests social life with new 
interest, and gives to it the function of unfoldment. When 
one brings to vision the function of fellowship of social 
intercourse, it is seen that the method of thinking therein, 
should be raised to a science. Men and women should 
make the most of their fellowship opportunties. They 
should carry into society the warming cheer of smile and 


192 


THE NEW IDEA. 


merry laughter; the beauty of cleanliness and the love¬ 
liness of a pure heart; the well trained faculties of choice 
in wisdom, and motive, in tune with Brotherly Love. 
Thus prepared, ennobling ideals will flow in harmonious 
language. The psychological feat will be rich and free 
from envy. Never forget to call the morning silence 
vow, elaborated later, into frequent function in the hours 
of fellowship. 

It is by thinking in fellowship that we use all our 
higher faculties, to their greater unfoldment, and engage 
those of the other selves, who are parties t© the process, 
in such a way as to raise them also. Each self partici¬ 
pant in the fellowship carries away some of the good 
things in each other self contacted, and the other selves 
have harvested good things from you. That is the barter 
and trade in life properties by which degrees of Harmony 
are propagated. 


EXERCISE XXVII. 


SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE. 

Involution—Its surpassing functions supplementary to 
voluntary thinking—The subjective and objective 
explained on a higher plane—Thinking in the science 
of Anagoge—Approaching Truth mediately—Reach¬ 
ing Truth on a thorny pathway in unutterable afflic¬ 
tion, or resolving the journey to a series of heavens 
of joy and gladness, peace and plenty. 


THINKING in silence in connection with reading or 
other study is wonderfully functional in a way which is 
not generally apprehended. I refer to the fact that one 
may dwell on certain lines of thought in an apparently 
unsuccessful attempt to solve something in the way of 
a problem, or an experience, or to bring to desired vision 
important hidden facts. Often the task is abandoned 
without satisfactory results, or without any results what¬ 
ever, and possibly after a lapse of hours or days, the 
desired vision or solution is realized unexpectedly. 

That phenomena is in involution, sometimes called 
involuntary thinking, supplemental to thinking in voli¬ 
tion, or by the will. There are secret stages of oscillation 
—secret chambers of propagation—in which mighty 
achievements of unfoldment are wrought, of which pro¬ 
cesses we are not conscious. That is the same as saying 
that when any work, or thought processes, rising from 
desire and propagated in volition towards completion, 
as far as our psychological powers are capable, without 
a final effect, the involuntary powers step in and carry 
the undertaking into full effect. But it is significant of 
something higher than that also. 

We require to examine that phenomena of life very 
carefully in order to bring to vision a transcendent 
method of thinking, one which is the most potential for 
self, and for other selves, of any known to man. I must 
confess that an elaboration of the method of thinking 
under consideration appeals to metaphysics—to those 
marvelous oscillations of Principle which, in the sweep 
of their alterations, extend from the throne of Truth to 
the heart of man, in the lower subvestures of physical 
human life, back to the real spheres of very life. It is 
that method of thinking, wherein man, functioning in his 
mass tone conscious will rise, to a full vision of his infi- 

(193) 



194 


THE NEW IDEA. 


nite potentialities, and commands the winds and the waves, 
and they obey his voice. In that method of thinking man 
rises in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, in the dem¬ 
onstration of the power of Principle, according to the 
degree of his rise, until, functioning in Truth, he sees as 
he is seen, and before the Power of his Word, error, evil, 
disease, affliction and that thing called death hide in the 
darkness of nothing. 

The man Jesus, and thousands of others, in lower 
degrees of unfoldment, functioned in our present spheres 
of life in that method of thinking, and the light of their 
lives filled and thrilled these lower heavens with radia¬ 
tions of glory. 

Some have called that method of thinking subject¬ 
ive; the same authors call another and lower method of 
thinking objective. But, as a matter of fact, very little 
is signified by such terminology. We have heard about 
the subjective and the objective until the world has be¬ 
come tired of them. The words are barren and meaning¬ 
less. They are like the words, “cause and effect,” al¬ 
though the latter term conveys a little more of sense. A 
learned treatise says that the objective is applied to things 
external to the mind, while subjective is applied to the 
mind itself. Hence, says the same authority, an objective 
motive is some outward thing awakening desire, while a 
subjective motive is some internal feeling; objective ideas 
are those suggested by outward things, while subjective 
ideas are produced by internal feelings. 

To resolve all the foregoing to the science of Prin¬ 
ciple. we must go back to the prior, the subsequent and 
the final; we must call back to vision the cause of the 
cause, the cause, and the effect. Please try to see that 
the triad just spoken of pervades all life processes, and is 
the same in the least as in the greatest things. It func¬ 
tions by the triad tones of a single unit; it functions by 
the triad tones of each degree of organization of units 
from an idea to the mass tone Consciousness of rising 
Brotherhood; it functions in thrice ten thousand times 
ten thousand ways in our earth, by the countless tone 
triads thereof; it prevails functionally in as many ways 
in the life organization of a man; it functions by the 
spiritual and celestial triad hemispheres of man’s duality 
—the duality of his higher and lower selves, each of which 
is in a tone triad, as heretofore explained. 

N!ow, the whole orbit of life is in the fact of a triad 
— in the fact of the prior, subsequent and final, by first, 
the substare, or Truth; second, the spiritual triad, and 
third, or final, by the celestial triad. To comprehend the 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


195 


greatest sweep of mass tone oscillations, we must come to 
see alterations of Truth, spiritual oscillations, and celes¬ 
tial oscillations, in mass tone, working out by propaga¬ 
tion, the resurrection of the forms of life to invisible 
spheres. Conforming to ideas of the subjective and ob¬ 
jective, we have, in the triad method of thinking, Truth 
as the prior, man’s duality as the subsequent, and the in¬ 
visible form of life or Consciousness as the final, or effect. 
There is, therefore, the motive in Truth—in Principle— 
the motive in the spiritual—celestial duality, and the 
effect, or the fact propagated, which is an extension, or 
addition to the invisible mass tone life. It is noticed that 
in the method of thinking which we are considering, 
Truth, or Primal Principle is the cause of the cause, the 
spiritual-celestial duality of the life organization, the 
cause, and the invisible Consciousness, or the higher mass 
tone will, the effect. The latter is that “outward thing 
awakening desire.” 

It is true that in all considerations, the motive is ob¬ 
jective, but while the objective motive is applied to 
things external to the mind, it may be higher as well as 
lower than the human psychological organization. Let 
us illustrate: The external or objective motive may be 
some achievement in the realm of sense, such as relief 
from physical pain. That will awaken desire. It may be 
the realization of pleasure in sense. That will also awaken 
desire. It may be an intellectual attainment. That will, 
in like manner, quicken desire. All such motives are 
external to, and objectively below the mind, or psycholog¬ 
ical organism, and in the force of an appeal to internal 
feelings. But the objective may be raised, in aim, until 
motive shall appeal, not only to internal psychological 
feelings and emotions, but to Spirit, Truth and Love, 
which are one in Primordial Principle, in which process 
desire assumes transcendent internal spiritual oscilla¬ 
tions, within its psychological and sentient oscillations, 
until the motive shall become, external to the mind of 
course, but immeasurably above it, even as far above it 
as is the invisible risen life of Invisible Brotherhood ex¬ 
alted above things of sense. 

How shall we characterize such a motive except to 
say that it is in the will of Invisible Consciousness, prop¬ 
agating to unfoldment into the risen mass tone life, Dy 
the evolution of self into the glorious riches thereof. That 
is the most exalted motive possible to rising man, and 
yet it is objective, and external to the mind, but far above 
its common functions. Such a motive awakens the purest 
feelings and emotions of the psychological organism, but 


196 


THE NEW IDEA. 


it functions in a purified desire far above those. It 
reaches through spiritual-celestial oscillations, into the 
very heart of the fountain of life, until it commands the 
resources of Primordial Power, Love and Truth, and 
works out, by unutterable propagations, a wonderful 
measure of regeneration in the rising life of man. 

It is in that method of thinking that man rises out 
of sense, by that science of Principle called anagoge, 
which is an elevation of the psychological organism, 
through spheres purely risen, to a height wherein the 
real—wherein Truth is appropriated. I humbly declare 
that such a method of thinking is possible to man, and 
that when man has unfolded to its God functions, he can 
not only do all things that Jesus performed, but greater 
works than those shall he do. 

Let no one be so foolish as to suppose that he or she 
can quickly assume a trans-human state, emotionally, and 
by the exercise of the higher will, in desire and motive, 
enter into the functions of God-powers. That transcend¬ 
ent state is reached only by thinking to unfoldment in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, in their regular order, 
The rise is step by step, Avith each step of the rise a heaven 
of glory born of practical Brotherhood. 

How completely futile would be an effort to reach 
such a transcendent function in selfishness—for selfish 
ends. The student is invited to contemplate (and he will be 
unable to do so except in disgust) the effort of a man or 
a AA'oman to function in the science of anagoge for money, 
or other personal gain of a material character. Nothing 
can more completely merit the righteous contempt of 
rising man than the offers of his fellows to function in 
the Lord in any alleged healing science for money or for 
price. Humanity requires no other proof of its fraudu¬ 
lent character. “The laborer is worthy of his hire,” but 
the labor of love is not a commodity for human traffic; 
moreover the “hire” here spoken of is not in silver, nor 
in gold, nor even bodily food, but rather the light of life, 
AA'hicli is transcendently more valuable. 

Long and loving thinking, in degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence, often Avith trials and tears; often with heart¬ 
burns and disappointments; often under the fire of ridi¬ 
cule and scoffing; often in the face of desertion and want; 
often in isolation and apparently barren solitude; often 
friendless and hungry; often tempted and discouraged; 
often self-condemned and self-dethroned; often deceived 
and mal-treated; often forsaken and doAA r n-trodden; often 
in suffering and in bonds, but always living on that only 
faith which appropriates things to come in advance of 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


197 


their realization; always in hope; always ready to suffer 
any affliction for Truth's sake; always resting on the 
unfailing plan of life as revealed by Principle; and always 
mounting upward on the wings of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence—all these and more, ten thousand times more, are 
to be met with, experienced, or overcome, before the goal 
is reached. But the marcher on that highway which leads 
to Truth, may always appropriate the saying of Paul, to- 
wit: “The sufferings of this present time are not worthy 
to be compared with the glory which shall be revealed 
in us.” 

But I do not teach that the way to Truth is necessar¬ 
ily a pathway of thorns. It is generally so, however. 
When man unfolds to a clear vision of functional poten¬ 
tialities, he will not only welcome them as helps in dis¬ 
guise, but resolve them to degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, in joy and gladness. When man realizes that he 
must himself become the powers and functions which he 
desires to wield, he will more readily appropriate func¬ 
tional circumstances to his unfoldment. It is in the use 
of methods of thinking—methods of thinking in the sci¬ 
ence of Principle—that man comes to overcome afflic¬ 
tions, and to rise in health, happiness, joy and gladness, 
resolving the mile posts of life's grand journey to a suc¬ 
cessive series of real heavens of peace and plenty. 

It can easily be seen that this highest and most func¬ 
tional method of thinking in the science of anagoge is in 
the grandest and most faithful interpretations of the real 
Christianity. It is wherein the realities of Christian Sci¬ 
ence shine in tones of human unfoldment. It is the key 
which resolves all the symbolic teachings of our Master 
Man to degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which may 
easily be appropriated by mankind in an ever flowing 
stream of life from the only healing fountain. 



EXERCISE XXVIII. 


DUALITY OF THINKING. 

Psychological outlines—Definition of consciousness— 
Functions of the Sentient and Inner Spiritual Heart 
—Conscience—Precept and Concept—Continuity of 
Sentient Life—Duality of spiritual and celestial or 
sentient thinking—Potential nature of the spiritual 
as well as the sentient. 

AS already stated the psychological faculty organiza¬ 
tion of man, which is propagated by the joint thinking of 
spiritual and celestial tones of life, is in one great mass- 
tone in the will That faculty organism is in kindred 
groups, one within the other, so to speak, in regular grada¬ 
tion from the larger to the smaller households. The house¬ 
hold of Sonsciousness and the will includes all. Then there 
is the household of Conscience which comprises the moral 
faculties, and smaller kindred groups within it. Then 
there is the mighty household of The Emotions and Feel¬ 
ings which interchange in waves through the whole life 
from the highest spiritual to the lowest sentient realms, 
set in action at the call of thoughts and ideas, or sensa¬ 
tions, rising and falling in the full scale of tone harmonics, 
and thrilling or soothing every fiber of the life. In these 
mighty tidal waves sentient pleasures and pains rise into 
spiritual emotions of sublime tint and hue, in glows of 
hope or waves of despair. Starting in bodily functions 
and rising through the lower psychological regions, feel¬ 
ings and tremors and passions are met with responsive 
emotional waves from higher spiritual realms, and the 
two currents flux into conscious agitation of exaltation or 
repine. 

Those psychological activities which are working out 
the birth of new faculties, and the unfoldment of those 
already functional, no man can properly correlate and 
classify, but it is known that their functions affecting 
our lives depend, as to the weal or woe of man, upon his 
habits of living, which are the children of his methods of 
thinking. Strange as it may appear all those blending 
and conflicting floods of light and shadow may be con¬ 
trolled by requisite methods of thinking, until the whole 
emotional realm, and region of feelings will be filled with 
light and the music of sweetest harmony. 

To purify those upper regions of life’s invisible and 
( 198 ) 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


199 


incomprehensible activities, it is only necessary that the 
heart be pure. In some transcendent way the heart is 
the source of all life unfoldment. It is the birth place 
of all thoughts and feelings, and is the fountain from 
which all emotions flow r . It is the throne of desire, and 
from that throne proceeds the rule of the universe. The 
kingdom of God is potentially in the heart, and it un¬ 
folds by the continuous birth of new thoughts, which rise 
and fellowship in the brain, in reason and judgment. An¬ 
other class of thoughts is propagated from the oscillations 
of the inner spiritual heart, which rises to fellowship with 
their celestial neighbors. Prom that fellowship the new 
life proceeds. The spiritual thoughts which flow and glow 
in emotional waves are, like the lower units, in personal 
unit forms of life, and in degrees of conscious intelli¬ 
gence. They are infinitely exalted in tone and quality. 
The two classes make one in the invisible risen life. They 
are separated only as to vestures, and a difference of Prin¬ 
ciple. 

It is not necessary, and it is not possible, to com¬ 
prehend, in perception, the marvelous organism of con¬ 
sciousness. We cannot see even its lov r est side. It is 
altogether invisible, but w'e can behold it in its own 
vision, and hear and understand its eloquent silence. Its 
source is in the heart; its seat is in the Risen Life. Of 
the latter, Consciousness may not, as yet, be conscious, 
but will easily become so by thought unfoldment. 

Before entering upon a study of the psychological 
households, by way of thinking exercises, a brief refer¬ 
ence to the functions of percept and concept in their 
relations to methods of thinking, and to each other may 
be profitable. Human perception is in the appropria¬ 
tion and unfoldment of degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, and therefore implicates both the spiritual and 
sentient (or lower celestial side) of man’s duality. Some 
will have it that the spiritual side of man, in any stage, 
is in Truth. That is error. The spiritual and the celes¬ 
tial are both in unfolding degrees of potentiality. The 
lower sentient thinking is that method by which man 
has knowledge through the outer sense and bodily or¬ 
ganism. 

Concept comes of thinking by the psychological or¬ 
ganization of man—the invisible life organization— 
which is propagated by joint spiritual and celestial 
thinking of man’s duality. It is in psychological vis¬ 
ions of Truth. 

At the very outset, let it be said that there is always 
an unbroken chain of connection between the three sys- 


200 


THE NEW IDEA. 


terns of thinking by humans, to-wit: Sentient, spiritual, 
and psychological. Each department may carry on think¬ 
ing processes, by itself, but always and only by implicat¬ 
ing, to some extent, the other two. The two first are, for 
the most part in a joint process. It is error to confound 
the psychological with the spiritual. They are separate 
and distinct. Of course there are the spiritual and celes¬ 
tial sides of the duality of the psychological, or invisible 
life organization of man, but those are in higher organism 
than the spiritual and sentient sides, from which 
the psychological is propagated. It is proper to say that 
the joint thinking of the duality of man connects, by 
propagation, in the psychological organism. 

It should always be remembered that man is three¬ 
fold, to-wit: He is dual by his spiritual and celestial 
sides, and he is psychological, by his rising invisible life 
organization, which is also dual. Other authorities give 
somewhat different applications to the word, Psycho¬ 
logical, but the student will find the plan herein adopted 
much the most satisfactory. Psychology is properly the 
study of the faculties of consciousness. 

Joint sentient and spiritual thinking, or perception 
is in four great divisions to-wit: (1) Physical subvesture 
sensations, (2) full tone physical vibrations, (3) full tone 
mental vibrations, and (4), full tone celestial oscillations. 
Those divisions correspond to the four dual bodily or¬ 
ganizations through which man rises, from the human 
point, on the whole arc of evolution. He now dwells in 
a physical subvesture body; he will next function in a 
full tone physical magnetic ether body; then he will ex¬ 
ist in a mental magnetic ether body; and, finally, in a 
celestial magnetic ether body. Thus his sentient functions 
rise parallel with his spiritual functions through the same 
number of full tone etheric zones. 

It has been supposed that when man passes from 
his present visible status he will go out of the physical 
zone altogether; that is error. His present body is com¬ 
posed of units in subvestures, as already explained, and 
when his visible form of life rises from it, he will enter 
the full tone of the physical heaven. It has also been gen¬ 
erally thought that sentient life, that is, thinking sen- 
tiently will cease with the present visible body. That 
is error also. Man will always and forever maintain 
a sentient side to his life. He will, in the third heaven, 
dwell in an immortal celestial body composed of celestial 
etheric light, and from the standpoint of that body, he 
will function sentiently, but on a transcendently higher 
plane than at present. In the two intermediate bodies 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


201 


he will function sentiently, but on planes much lower 
than the last, and much higher than the present one. 

Again, sentient thinking may be divided into three 
great classes, to-wit: (1) those sensations peculiar to 

the bodily organs, (2) the methods of thinking, or propa¬ 
gation, on the five planes of vibration peculiar to the five 
sense organs, and (3), thinking in physiological psyehol- 
ogy, whereby purely sentient and spiritual sensations, or 
oscillations, are fluxed into the psychological faculty or¬ 
ganism. Thus it is seen that psychological thinking has 
a sentient side to it, just as it has a spiritual side to it. 
In fact the psychological organism which is in the fact 
of invisible consciousness is propagated by the joint oscil¬ 
lations of spiritual and sentient life. Spiritual thinking 
may be classified, by spiritual zones of ether in the same 
way, (except that the scale is higher), that we have di¬ 
vided sentient thinking, with the correlates of the sub¬ 
vesture sensations included. 

Sentient thinking, therefore, taking its classifications 
all together is celestial, and it is all in relative and rising 
degrees of perception, according to the fineness of the 
substance of the body and according to its unfoldment in 
degrees of wisdom. On the other hand spiritual thinking, 
taking its classifications all together, is spiritual, whether 
on the angelic or the divine plane, and is also all in rela¬ 
tive and rising degrees of perception, according to the 
fineness of the substance of the zone, and according to its 
unfoldment in degrees of intelligence. The two processes 
jointly unfold, as stated, into the invisible psychological 
organization, properly called consciousness, where con¬ 
cept rises. 

The final unfoldment of the above duality of man is 
resolved to Truth. A form of life in Truth is Absolute. 
The methods of that unfoldment in celestial degrees of 
wisdom and spiritual degrees of intelligence have already 
been fully elaborated. It remains only, in this connection, 
to explain the functions of perception and conception. 
Degrees of perception and conception make one with de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence. Both are unfolded in 
the potentialities of environment as already explained. 

Both are in degrees of illusion, which is to say that 
they are not really what they appear to be, when brought 
to vision from the standpoint of Truth as revealed in 
consciousness. It is generally supposed that everything 
spiritual is in the full function of Truth. That is error. 
Spiritual degrees of intelligence and celestial degrees of 
wisdom, in corresponding functions, are always equally 
distant from Truth. They work together, in functional 



202 


THE NEW IDEA. 


duality, in unfoldment into Truth. There is no experi¬ 
ence outside of the degrees of that unfoldment. When 
one has grown to be a man he will, from memory call 
up incidents of his childhood, and laugh at the innocent 
credulity of his tender years. It is the same with one 
who has unfolded in degrees of wisdom, and intelligence 
to a summit stronghold of experience. He looks back to 
the days when he “believed” things which now are 
completely exploded. It is the same with the race. At 
one time the people “believed” the earth to be flat; then 
they accepted the theory of its rotundity, or that it was 
convex. Now it is seen that it is convex in perception, 
and concave in concept. 

Neither the perception nor the human conception of 
facts are in Truth. They are in degrees of wisdom and in¬ 
telligence, unfolding us to higher and still higher visions, 
or ideals of Truth, and thus such degrees will function in 
us until we become Truth. 

We cannot correctly say that we perceive, or conceive 
such and so to be Truth. To so think, or speak, is error. 
We may enjoy perceptions and conceptions of Truth in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, but the degree of 
our unfoldment into the psychological consciousness is 
always the measure of the accuracy of our vision. Never¬ 
theless man may come into a very clear vision of Truth, 
potentially, by the exercise of Faith, as will be more fully 
elaborated, but to comprehend Truth in physical subves¬ 
tures, wherein error and evil are the chief functions of 
unfoldment is beyond human powers. That statement 
must be self evident, especially in the light of all which 
has thus far been said. 

Let it be remembered, however, that the higher, and 
purer and more satisfactory our perceptions and concep¬ 
tions of the facts of the universe, the more power and 
peace and happiness we will enjoy. The more rapidly 
we unfold from potentialities towards realities, the 
healthier we will become. After all, degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence are in rising visions of Truth. 


I 


EXERCISE XXIX. 

POTENTIAL EVIL. 

Rise of Mankind by functional error and evil—The rising 
stream of visible forms of life—The mask lifted from 
Civilization—Principle parent to all potential afflic¬ 
tion—How to avoid it—Two classes of sufferings. 


HUMAN afflictions, or sufferings may be classified 
as dispensable, and as indispensable. Those reaching our 
lives in the potentialities of wisdom and intelligence may 
all be dissipated by methods of thinking in Principle. 
The other class referred to are optional. Man may un¬ 
dergo them or he may avoid them, in proportion as his 
unfoldment moves him to undertake work in Brother¬ 
hood, for the rescue and redemption of those who have 
fallen under the ban of error and evil, either from their 
own, or the misconduct of others. 

For some, for many, life is not a continuous sweep 
onward and upward. There is the going backward, and 
downward in efforts to raise and rescue the fallen, but 
in such efforts self life is raised to transcendent heights 
of peace and power. There is, however, a functional 
measure of affliction for those who have unfolded into 
the light of Brotherhood, and who become disobedient to 
its high calling. That is generally functional to duty by 
which it is soon dispelled. I would seek to bring to the 
vision of students that feature of relativity and interde¬ 
pendence which survives from unit life, and is projected 
into the fellowship—the sociological life—of men and 
women. The latter is two-fold. It is in the fact of the 
interchange of life properties as already explained, and 
it is in the fact of giving where there is apparently noth¬ 
ing to receive in return. 

The honored functions in life, so to speak, are bur¬ 
dened with great responsibilities of duty. The one 
“high up” in life is burdened with the “low down set,” 
whether he will or no. He can relieve himself of that 
burden only by resolving those below to his own altitude. 
By the latter performance of duty in the bond of Brother¬ 
hood, he is raised to a correspondingly higher summit of 
unfoldment, and thus his work of love is never com¬ 
pleted. Such is the plan of life as it is in Principle. 
There are so many, or such a variety of grades and types 
of that kind of duty attaching to life, and becoming more 

(203) 



204 


THE NEW IDEA. 


and more imperative with each step of unfoldment, that 
no attempt will be made to enumerate them in this place. 
They are concomitant with every step of the whole orbit 
of life. 

Those duties are all sources of joy and gladness- 
functional to greater heights of power and peace. To 
those who think in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, 
duty is resolved to opportunity. At the last analysis the 
highest duty is the grandest opportunity. The duties, in 
obedience, of life unfoldment are the opportunities for 
further rise. However, duty is not only resolved to op¬ 
portunity, but to degrees of delight. That which once 
was a task, in the potentialities of burden, becomes a 
function of love without an element of labor in it. 

But there are conditions of life in these physical 
subvesture spheres reaching down to utter helplessness. 
Millions have gone to invisible worlds from those condi¬ 
tions. Since man began, the majority of his race appar¬ 
ently has been on the unfortunate side. Only a few 
have lived in the light of life. The sweep of relativity 
has been extended to mighty extremes. The preponder¬ 
ating weight, or burden of life, is where the pendulum 
swings into the darkness of ignorance, oppression and 
want. Only a very short portion of its mighty arc is 
in the light. Human civilization, with its glittering 
crown of science and the arts is beautiful to look upon, 
only while your eyes are fixed upon that crown. A vis¬ 
ion of its lower parts is horrible. They are squalid and 
naked, and its body and limbs are covered with ulcerous 
sores and bleeding wounds. They are gaunt from hun¬ 
ger, and hideous in moral and physical depravity. 

Let us not blacken these pages with a fuller devel¬ 
opment of the awful picture. We all know its real char¬ 
acter. Man, in his highest estate, is so recently evolved 
from such conditions that they are still a memory in his 
interior parts, and he has only to look backward a little 
way, when the objects of his vision appear to writhe in 
the agony of darkness. We see in the dark places of 
human life a veritable hell, but its inhabitants are in the 
relative bliss of ignorance, and, therefore, *their suf¬ 
ferings are possibly no greater than our own. When we 
lift the mask from conditions immediately surrounding 
our own set—the upper tones of civilization—we behold 
even worse functions. Envy is everywhere raising its 
slimy head and darting its poisonous tongue. Jealousy 
is sharpening the destroying blade. Slander is alert, 
with brush and black paint. Avarice is abroad with 
scheme and plot to rob and steal. Man is seeking to 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


205 


devour man. Everywhere may be seen the wreckage and 
debris of broken hearts and ruined homes. Here and 
there Brotherhood raises a cry for righteousness—for 
human equality—for Love, but its voice is soon stifled 
in the blast of unholy trumpets. 

Thus the features of our boasted civilization are 
soon sketched. The truth of the situation is appalling. 
It may be slightly veneered by the deceptive glitter of 
optimism, but the real functions exist all the same. 
Where is the blame? Shall we lay the fault, so to speak, 
at the door of Principle? Verily Principle, in a glorious 
plan of life has produced all that and more. But we 
have scarcely done with the awful picture. It flits in 
brief appearances, in this visible sphere, by generations, 
which go into invisible life almost as quickly as they 
come. There is, to be sure, a two-fold rise, but it is 
slow, and the mighty majority of the human forms of 
life are always on the invisible side, so far as man in 
his present state is concerned. In short we come to see 
that only a mere pinch of life is visible. It passes through 
these physical subvestttfre potentialities, which are ni 
the functions of wisdom and intelligence, but the great 
stream flows rapidly. It tarries not in its rolling flight. 
It enters in the fact of infancy, but disappears in all 
stages of unfoldment, from that of its advent, to what 
we call old age. 

Its forms come in a mighty sweep, and remain long 
enough only to behold a few of each other. A vast 
majority scarcely hear of the multitude. But it is a 
rising stream of life. It descends from its source in 
ages of unfoldment, until the infinite ocean of variety 
of interdependent unit forms swell into evolution, and 
now life is fighting its way unward, pushed from be¬ 
hind by a mighty flood of potentialities called error and 
evil, but which are degrees of wisdom and intelligence in 
disguise. We function in the visible tide scarcely long 
enough to study its budding and blooming plasm, but 
we see, from the vision which we are able to propagate, 
that in the lower spheres of this zone—in the potential 
vestures in which we live—life is secure, not only in the 
continuity of the existence of its forms, but also in their 
rise to higher forms. We see also that the horrible pic¬ 
ture of their conditions—the vision of their civilization— 
which is given in the foregoing paragraphs is resolved 
to those functions by which that continued existence 
and that rise to higher and purer tones, are propagated. 

But that solution does not lessen human duty. It 
augments it. We see in the potentialities of life a mighty 



206 


THE NEW IDEA. 


series of opportunities for unfoldment, by thinking in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, for neighbor and 
for self, even in these subvesture spheres, the improve¬ 
ment of which will quicken our mutual rise. We have 
vouchsafed to us the everlasting opportunity of thinking 
in fellowship. Let us make the most of the present op¬ 
portunity. 

But shal) we manifest no interest in the vast ma¬ 
jority, who have passed to invisible worlds beyond? Our 
first duty is to those in the stream of life nearest to us, 
and their first duty is to us. Nevertheless, it is true that 
all forms of life are rising into one form. Hence Broth¬ 
erhood is to become Universal. 

It is seen from these studies that man, in all past, 
present and future stages of his unfoldment by think¬ 
ing, even as to the units of which his life is composed, 
is self created. That is in the plan of Principle. Hence 
the necessity of its realization. The quicker man rises 
to a comprehension of that truth, and, with it, awakens 
to the means which have been placed at his disposal for 
that creation, the better. Until then unfoldment will be 
very slow. That is why it has hitherto been so feeble. 
With a knowledge of these facts man will rise more 
rapidly. 

As to the stream of life which has gone beyond our 
physical vision, in what way are we concerned with 
that? We are concerned, first, because we shall all very 
soon enter upon its functions. Those potentialities will 
not be the same as the vesture degrees which we have 
appropriated to unfoldment here. They will be higher, 
but in correspondence with the present set. They will 
have simultaneously unfolded with us. With all of us? 
Yes, with all, in relativity. But we are concerned with 
the heaven of life into which we are unfolding, to the 
extent that we desire to know in what way we can ap¬ 
propriate its riches here and now, in connection with 
our potentialities of functional evil, so as to the more 
effectually and speedily rise in power, peace and plenty 
in this world. As we have already seen that is the high¬ 
est method of thinking by humans. 

We have made a considerable circuit, but have at 
length returned to that subject. We have seen how all 
humans are unfolding into invisible degrees of risen 
Brotherhood life. We now see that all the forms of life 
in that transcendent mass tone form are not of the same 
magnitude—not of the same power and glory. Some 
have fitted themselves for higher functions than others; 
one for the highest. We have seen how it is that we 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


267 


respectively function now, by our invisible forms of 
life, which are yet attached to their visible bodies, in 
the risen Invisible Brotherhood. Hence we have direct 
connection in substance with that higher life, by think¬ 
ing in consciousness. 



EXERCISE XXX. 


ALL OR NONE. 

Principle is in Truth and cannot go wrong 1 —It cannot 
fail—Half-built man is not thrown away, but finished 
in the glory of perfection—The strong must help the 
weak or themselves sink into helplessness—All must 
rise or none at all. 


PRINCIPLE never makes mistakes. It never began 
to build a form of life and made a failure of the job. 
It knows no failures. It cannot fail, nor suffer defeat. 
Principle never did evolve a form of life to the human 
state, and suffer defeat at the hands of man's volition, in 
the work of building that life organization. There is a 
doctrine which teaches, in effect, that when Principle had 
evolved the will in man’s psychological and sentient 
organism, the experiment proved to be very destructive, 
in most cases, of the moral tone of man, and, because 
of that, the sentence of death and eternal punishment 
was passed upon him. 

In other words, it is taught that of the great multi¬ 
tude of mankind, there is the ultimate survival only of 
the fittest—of the few—and that a majority are found to 
be worthless, and are, to say the least, cast away into 
oblivion. That would be the same as saying that Prin¬ 
ciple, in unfolding the infinite plan of life, indulged in 
reckless speculation, in that the greater part of its propa¬ 
gations prove worthless. In digging potatoes not even 
the small ones are thrown away by the prudent husband¬ 
man. They are serviceable in fattening hogs, at any rate. 
But according to certain brands of theology underdevel¬ 
oped men and women are of no utility whatever. 

Nothing can be more absurd than the idea that Prin¬ 
ciple propagates forms of life from ultimate microcosms, 
through all the degrees of mass tone organism, to man, 
without discovering that the work was in vain—all in 
error—until the human status is reached. Will the stu¬ 
dent contemplate the ridiculousness of such a theory, for 
a moment? If man fall out of life completely, it must 
be at the hands of the human will. All will agree to that 
proposition. That reaches out to the fact—the absurd 
idea—that Principle created man, and created a function 
within him for his destruction, or a fimction that was 
given inherent powers by -which he could be utterly de- 

(208) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


209 


stroyed. Would not such be a manifest bungle of the 
work of creation? 

In this system of thinking it is taught that Principle 
is cause —the only cause—and that all forms of life are 
propagated by it. Can any one be found to dispute that 
premise? Certainly not. Principle gave birth to Power, 
Love and Truth, and, by the nature of propagation Prin¬ 
ciple is in Truth. It- is plain, therefore, that Principle 
cannot commit error—cannot go wrong. If it be admitted 
that man was built half way up the arc of evolution with 
the intention of throwing him away in human spheres, 
then what was the purpose? What good end could a 
half-built man serve, if thrown into oblivion before his 
final form is completed? That plan will not work at all. 
Either Principle will finish, to perfection, the evolution 
of each form of life, the propagation of which it begins, 
or it is an unsafe life builder. 

All the difficulty that has risen in human perception 
over that whole matter comes of the momentous fact that 
from a certain point in human understanding man becomes 
pre-eminently a self-life builder. From that summit, the 
man, ignoring Principle, plunges into error and affliction, 
and those potential forces continue to push him about from 
pillar to post, until he, through redeeming experience, 
return to the plan of Principle. His disobedience may 
be persisted in until he is degenerated back to his next 
lower pre-human state, but even in that case Principle 
holds him in its everlasting grasp, and again introduces 
him to the functional powers of evolution. There is noth¬ 
ing in the way of failure. It is all a matter of experience. 

Experience is often dearly bought, but it must be 
provided in the plan of life until it functions in raising 
man to a life of fond obedience to the requirements of 
Principle, even should a thousand reincarnations prove 
necessary to produce that result. It is not in the plan of 
Principle that one of its creatures is to be lost. Such 
an event would stop the wheels of creation, and bring 
the universe into complete wreck and ruin. 

Until that doctrine is admitted and proclaimed by 
our race. Brotherhood will make but little progress. 
Why? For the reason that the few who have risen in 
material and intellectual gains, above >the apparently 
worthless mass, have come to look upon the “common 
herd” of mankind as so many mistakes, to be sooner or 
later thrown away. Hence it is that in our day “philan¬ 
thropy” provides universities for the rich, libraries for 
the well to do, and nothing but unrequited toil for the 


210 


THE NEW IDEA. 


vast multitude of God’s so called unfortunate men and 
women. 

But I will not berate the rich. I am opposed to such 
indulgences. They are illy advised and accomplish no 
real good. To amass riches, when it is honestly done in 
the pathway of opportunity and industry, is creditable. 
It is in the dispensing of them, in the use of them, that 
man most greatly errs. This whole matter may be 
brought to a very sharp point, one so sharp that it cannot 
fail to prick the conscience of the so called “higher 
class.” That point is that all must rise, or none at all. 
If a few have been given the advantages of material and 
intellectual wealth, it is for the purpose of qualifying 
them to reach out all the stronger arm of assistance to 
those who are belated on the pathway of life. They will 
do so, or themselves go back to lower tones to become 
themselves legitimate objects of assistance, in those other 
spheres. Brotherhood must prevail. It is the plan of 
Principle, and that one by whom it is pushed aside, will 
sooner or later pay the penalty, at least, of ignorance. 

It appears, sometimes, that it is owing to a want of 
a higher and clearer knowledge of the plan of life, that 
strong men so strangely ignore the claims of the weak. 
If there be one Truth higher than all the others in our 
universe, it is that of the rising realities of Universal 
Brotherhood. That should be held in steady vision, or 
thinking will be in error. 


EXERCISE XXXI. 


EVOLUTION BY DESIRE. 

Rise of physiological and psychological organism in pri¬ 
mal animal forms—Five planes of sentient vibration— 
Simultaneous rise of physical and psychological or¬ 
ganism—Joint action of spiritual and celestial oscil¬ 
lations of Principle. 


AS already stated, the psychological faculties and 
functions of man unfold from prior sentient and spiritual 
sources. Our vision of thinking on the lower spiritual 
side of man’s duality is not clear, but it establishes, in 
connection with lower celestial functions, the oscillations 
of polar energy. In those thinking processes the spiritual 
organism is subjective to the sentient. It will be proper 
to hold the bodily organization of man in vision as in 
two triad sets, one without, the other within—one spirit¬ 
ual, the other celestial. The outmost of each triad, re¬ 
spectively, is in a full state of development in man, while 
the two inner set of organisms of each triad are in a state 
of potential embryos, not so fully unfolded. That must 
be the status of man’s duality, originally. 

We may now bring to vision the processes in unfold- 
ment, in the development of the dual bodily form, in 
its more primal stages. As to the rise in duality, that 
may be held in thought, but it is necessary for the pur¬ 
poses of this exercise, to deal only with the outer physical 
organism, remembering the while, that the inner, and 
higher side of the duality unfolds simultaneously with 
the outer. Each organ of the human body, as also each 
faculty, is dual, and each side of that duality is in the 
fact of a triad. 

We may outline a skeleton of the evolution of the 
bodily sense organs of man, as to the order of their rise. 
That will prove of advantage to students in applying the 
series of thinking exercises which are to follow. It is 
already seen that by this system, the study of psychology 
is more or less experimental, and that it differs from any 
other plan hitherto promulgated. It will be by the use 
of thought organism, in the order, in some instances, of 
its rise, that we shall come to see the relativity and inter¬ 
dependence of the faculty groups ,and that of their 
individual members. In the first place we have the or¬ 
ganic sense functions, oscillating in mass tone, in the fact 
of the lower sentient consciousness, to-wit: 

(211) 



212 


THE NEW IDEA. 


1. —Touch, unfolding from desire to organic form, in 
order that the form of life might know more of the 
tilings touched, and to the faculty of necessity, by which 
the organic form was propagated. In this primal process 
a nervous system began its unfoldment. The single cell 
possessed the functionof touch, hence sentient functions 
began to unfold in that unit organism. 

2. —Taste, unfolding from desire to organic form, in 
order that the primal rising life organization might know 
still more of the things touched, and to the faculty of 
necessity by which the tasting organ was provided; and 
to the faculty of choice as to the particular form of that 
organ. It is seen, from these observations, that faculty 
organism rose, at least, simultaneously with the sense 
organs. It must have been so, as the units were in the 
tones of oscillation, and, therefore, propagated a degree 
of consciousness, or psychological embryos, which was 
their respective degrees of consciousness. It is not the 
intention to follow out the laborious technique of evolu¬ 
tion, or life unfoldment here given, to any great extent. 
The partial elaboration of one process may be applied to 
all. The effort is to bring the student to see how it is 
that the discrete degrees of life, by their tones, propagate 
the mass forms in rising degrees of organism. It should 
always be borne in thought that such processes are in the 
actuality of a method of thinking. As the cells associate 
themselves together, in what may be called sociological, 
or co-operative work, their tones mingle, or flux together, 
in propagation, and the designs or organism which are 
hidden in the plasm of the cells, according to the plan of 
Principle, spring forth into expanding life organization. 
Unfoldment is, in reality, the processes of spinning and 
weaving to the patterns provided by Principle, from 
the potential embryos of life substance. It is a matter 
of real propagation—tone propagation—and that is al¬ 
ways in the fact of thinking. 

3. —Smell, unfolding, by desire, in order that the 
expanding form of life might know more of the things 
touched and tasted. That process implicates desire, 
necessity, choice, and, in some measure, motive; and, of 
course all processes, no matter how primal, involve the 
exercise of the will. These facts are mentioned to show 
that in the evolution of the five sense organs, there was 
the simultaneous unfoldment of the five faculties of de¬ 
sire, necessity, choice, motive and the will. They, as did 
the five sense organs, existed, potentially, in the plasm 
from which they rose by propagation. 

4. —Hearing, unfolding, by desire, in the same way 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 213 

and for the purpose of extending the knowledge of the 
expanding form of life. Why do we say, “by desire?” 
Because desire is the basic functional power of evolution, 
or unfoldment. All things of evolution in these lower 
physical spheres, come, primarily, of desire. Desire was 
born—propagated—by the division, or separation of the 
male and female principles, by which a wider sweep was 
given to the alternations of oscillation in the lower 
spheres of the physical zone. 

5.— Vision, unfolding, by desire, in the same way and 
for the purpose of further extending the knowledge of 
the expanding forms of life. We must not overlook the 
fact that the rise of knowledge of the primal forms of 
life is in the measure of the expansion of the mass tone 
variety appropriated by such forms. It is seen that the 
increase in knowledge is resolved to the appropriation 
of items of life substance—that the appropriation of 
knowledge is in the actuality of life unfoldment. That 
fact of itself affords a mighty reach of study, which the 
student will be able to carry out from the suggestions 
here made. 

The organism thus propagated extended to the full 
limit of the five planes of sentient vibration, or sensa¬ 
tion, and were therefore in mass tone, which is the same 
as saying that in their combined sentient functions, a 
capacity of propagation had been provided sufficient for 
the evolution of the human form tone of life. Desire was 
inherent in each unit form of life which associated to 
propagate the rising form. 

As to the sixth sense, of which much has been said, 
no such function is rising by life unfoldment, except that 
when man comes to function in the mass tone of the five 
senses; that is, when he rises to function in them as one 
distinctly, in which some have already made progress, 
that may be regarded as the sixth, or mass tone sense. 

But there is a vocal organism, auxiliary to the five 
sense organs, which extends the boundaries of knowl¬ 
edge. When desire prayed for still more knowledge of 
the things touched, tasted, smelled, heard, and seen, Prin¬ 
ciple provided the method of speech. Vocal organs were 
developed by use, and the forms of life are, as a result, 
able to talk to each other. That process is, at present, 
carried on by means of the organs of speech, and sound 
waves. Later mental talking, or telepathy, will take its 
place. 

We now see that five fundamental psychological fac¬ 
ulties rose in correspondence with the five organic senses, 
and simultaneously with the latter. All those psycholog- 




214 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ical faculties and sentient physiological organs were 
partly unfolded in the primal forms of animal life, as the 
bodily organism rose, in such a way that it is seen that 
the evolution of the whole was simultaneous. The eye 
appeared in the trilobite of the Silurian geological age. 
The nervous system which is necessary to sustain physio¬ 
logical psychology rose along with brain functions. The 
evolution of the former is resolved to that of the latter. 

It is plain to a clear psychological vision, that the 
wonderful evolution here described was propagated by 
sentient thinking from the lower celestial side, in con¬ 
junction with spiritual oscillations from the lower sub¬ 
jective side. Otherwise the rise of elementary psycholog¬ 
ical and physiological functions would not have been 
simultaneous. It is also equally plain, that the faculties 
of desire, necessity, choice, motive and the will functioned 
in any of the primal forms of animal life, equally with 
the sense organism. Neither were fully developed, but 
they were in corresponding degrees of unfoldment. In 
those early forms Consciousness was on a lower plane— 
on a plane corresponding to the degrees of unfoldment— 
but there was Consciousness, which is to say, there was 
an invisible form of life for each visible one, and the 
expression of that Consciousness in the actions of those 
primal animal forms were in the actuality of the will. 
Of course Conscience was not unfolded in those forms 
of life, because the moral faculties were, as yet, in 
embryos. 

It is pointed out here that the rise of the whole 
human life organization is exclusively due to joint spirit¬ 
ual and celestial thinking, and in a most wonderful co¬ 
operation of each. Man, as we see him today, is the prod¬ 
uct of joint spiritual and sentient thinking exclusively. 
Those subjective and sentient sides of life make one life, 
in one form of life, and the possibilities of such dual 
form of life, by thinking in the plan of life are infinite. 
It is noted in this connection that the mass tone Con¬ 
sciousness of man, which expresses itself in the will, has 
supreme control of those infinite resources. 

What was accomplished in the unfoldment of the five 
planes of vibration, sentiently, by which the functions of 
touch, taste, smell, hearing and vision were evolved, and 
that which was, in like manner, achieved in the evolution 
of the five primal faculties of desire, necessity, choice, 
motive and the will, will be gloriously completed in the 
coming Absolute and Omniscient life organization of man, 
by the same resourceful instrumentalities, to-wit: Spir¬ 
itual and celestial thinking in co-operation, which, at 
the last analysis is resolved to the oscillations of Principle. 


EXERCISE XXXII. 


WHO ARE ANGELS? 

A complete system of thinking in Principle includes 
things physical, intellectual, and spiritual—The angel- 
Man—The Divine Mental, and the Spiritual Celes¬ 
tial—All are angels in the symbolism of scripture. 


IT will readily be admitted that any system of think¬ 
ing involving the functions of Principle must include, in 
its sweep, things physical, intellectual and spiritual. No 
other explanation is necessary as to the reason for con¬ 
sidering sacred scripture symbols concerning angels. The 
plain questions are. Who are angels? What are their 
origin and nature? 

As already stated the angel—the guardian angel — 
from the human standpoint is, the subjective, or spiritual 
side of man’s duality, but, of course, that interpretation 
would not cover the complete scope of the functions of 
angel life as partly elaborated in the scriptures. It does 
explain a wide range of, so called, psychic phenomena, 
wherein man has direct communications with invisible 
worlds. As to the greater part of that, in our times, it 
is resolved to the promptings, and silent voices, in warn¬ 
ing and advice, from the higher angel-self. If, however, 
the testimony of sacred scripture is to be credited, even to 
the extent of definable symbolism, we must find some 
other interpretation—one reaching higher than the higher 
self. 

It cannot very well be said that it was Hagar’s 
higher self that appeared to her, or that the Gabriel of 
the New Testament, who visited Mary was in the fact of 
the spiritual side of her duality; nor was the angel who 
appeared to Joseph in the Temple in the fact of his higher 
self. The same applies to all such angelic appearances, 
including angels who visited Abraham and Lot. What 
then, shall be said by way of interpretation as to that 
latter class of angels, the records of whose functions we 
are wholly dependent upon scripture symbolism for? Let 
us take a case in point: 

A wonderful story is told in the Acts of the Apostles 
as to the superhuman actions of an angel. The record 
says that Herod had put James to death, and had impris¬ 
oned p eter, and that while the latter lay bound in chains 
between two soldiers, at night, an angel appeared and 

(215) 



21G 


THE NEW IDEA. 


awakened him, and led him out of the prison, the iron gate 
leading to the city opening of its own accord. Later, 
when Peter knocked at the gate leading to the home of 
Mary, the mother of John, where a number were gathered 
praying, a damsel reported to those in the house that 
Peter was at the gate. They supposed he was still in 
prison and so declared, but she persisted that Peter was 
at the gate. Then they said, “It is his angel.” 

It appears from the foregoing that the primitive 
Christians entertained the idea that each one of them 
was blessed with a guardian angel. It also appears from 
the story of Peter’s rescue from prison, the account of 
which he gave himself, that after the angel passed 
through one street it departed from him. Then Peter 
says that he came to himself. What does that mean? 

It is plain that until the angel ‘ ‘ departed from him, ’ ’ 
he was not in himself—the lower self—but was function¬ 
ing completely in the higher, or angel-life. I have ex¬ 
amined, as carefully as possible, all records, as to the 
appearances and reported conduct of angels, so called; 
and, when those are submitted to my own vision of life, 
I see nothing which forbids the doctrine that I teach, 
to-wit: That angels are, for the greater part, in the facts 
of the higher selves, so far as the psychic phenomena 
referred to in the foregoing is concerned, but it must not 
be forgotten, in this connection, and as to the other class 
of angelic phenomena, that there are higher creatures 
than those of mankind in the human state. Not only is 
man an angel-man, but he rises by unfoldment to become 
a divine-mental, and later, a spiritual-celestial. That is 
the key which unlocks the apparent mystery of this whole 
angel proposition. In the symbolism of scripture all the 
risen, exalted forms of transhuman life are called angels; 
and, if the “three men” entertained by Abraham, and 
the two who warned Lot to flee with his family from 
Sodom, as well as the angel who delivered Peter, in¬ 
cluding similar demonstrations of “angelic” power, are 
in fact—in the functional eventuations of reliable history 
— it is plain that the services of those higher forms of 
life, in the actuality of risen and unfolded man, were 
drawn upon. 

It is seen from those and like observations in this 
system of thinking exercises, that we have no “missing 
links,” in the continuous stream of the forms of life, 
high and low, which, by unit and organization, flow from 

the Infinite Fountain of Unity, through contending 
variety, into the transcendent Harmony of Invisible 
Brotherhood. It is all a grand, unbroken, continuous 
stream of evolution, or life unfoldment. 


EXERCISE XXXIII. 


PLAN OF LIFE EXTENDED. 

Recapitulation—Functions of Unity, Variety and Harmony 
—Everything 1 is man and man a part of God—Unfold- 
ment of Being into Absolute Life—Functions of world 
thinking—The new heaven and the new earth—All 
degrees of life to “make one” in Harmony—Fellow¬ 
ship of worlds—The finally finished Universe. 


WE have reached that point in our studies whereat, 
according to promise, the Plan of Life may be extended, 
and raised to higher visions of Truth, than I was able 
to do, in the two first exercises of this volume. We now, 
by way of recapitulation, consider the whole orbit of 
creation, from the standpoints of 

UNITY, VARIETY, HARMONY. 

Those three make one in Harmony. Unity is the 
cause of the cause; Variety is the cause, and Harmony is 
the final effect. Unity is incomprehensible to man’s 
present psjmhological powers. It is in the fact wherein 
all things of life dwell potentially, as one distinctly. 
Wherein all things are one thing. We cannot now under¬ 
stand that proposition. We will rise to comprehend it 
fully. 

Variety proceeded from Unity, by propagation, in 
unit forms of life, each one differing from the other in 
form tone, and each in the fact of a fraction, so to speak, 
of one mighty whole. Those unit forms of life are 
thoughts; and, because they are all sparks from one and 
the same Being, they struggle to accomplish a reunion, 
from the fact that they are all infinitely small items of 
wisdom and intelligence, which find it impossible to func¬ 
tion in the powers of their Source, while separated. They 
realize that their native powers can be appropriated only 
by their all coming together into one transcendent func¬ 
tion. Hence, they contend for that goal. That goal, 
which is the finale of creation—of life—is in the, as yet, 
only partly, or but slightly comprehended Form of Life 
called Harmony. That will be understood only in the 
degree that men and women become it. 

In the propagation of life from Being—from Unity— 
with Harmony in view as the mighty purpose of creation, 
a most transcendent plan, or design was formulated in 
the fact and form of Principle. Principle was born an 

(217) 



218 


THE NEW IDEA. 


architect of life, and from its resources the whole plan 
was laid through variety, in order that Harmony might 
be achieved. It is seen that while Unity is incomprehen¬ 
sible by man, and that while the functions of variety are 
understandable by humans, and further, that while Har¬ 
mony is comprehended only by unfoldment into it, the 
latter is transcendently higher and greater than Unity. 
When it is said that God changeth not, that has reference 
to Principle, which is the same in all things, and in all 
processes of creation, and is understandable in rising de¬ 
grees of knowledge. But the student of life—of self— 
cannot escape the conclusion that Being, which is the 
source of Principle, and therefore higher than it, unfolds 
by creation —by the plan propagated from it—into Har¬ 
mony, which is the greater fact. It will not be irrever¬ 
ent to say that, through Principle, in which is the plan 
of life, Being grows, or unfolds, from the status of Unity 
to that of Harmony, and that the processes of that growth 
constitute eternity. 

While man, in his present state, cannot comprehend 
either Unity or Harmony, lie is able to bring to vision 
some of the differences between them. If the student 
will permit a somewhat free use of the sacred word, God, 
we are authorized to say that the one great difference 
between Unity and Harmony is that the first is one God in 
One God, while the last is in an infinite number of Gods 
in One God, each one of which may, by the transcendent 
nature of Harmony, function as the Immutable Whole. 

It may, by some, be considered inexpedient to carry 
methods of thinking so high, but it must be remembered 
that the higher human ideals are cast, the greater man 
will become, provided those ideals are propagated by 
Principle. It is scarcely necessary to appeal to the stu¬ 
dent as to the unfolding power of this system of thinking. 
He or she must already be thrilled by it. That is suffi¬ 
cient evidence of its Truth. 

It is, therefore, to be brought to vision that, in the 
plan of life, each unit form— each primal item of life— 
is in the fact, both potentially, and by the nature of its 
source and substance, in the Supreme fact of God. That 
appeals to the higher Consciousness. It is a part of Ab¬ 
solute Being, and although an infinitely small part, is 
in the fact of its source. If its Source is God, then the 
item of life propagated from it is in the fact of God also. 
That is the nature and function of propagation. 

Now, if man, as to his real form is composed of an 
almost infinite number of those sparks from the Absolute, 
or small particles from the God of Being, in what way 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


219 


can hell and eternal death, or everlasting- punishment, 

be made to fit into the plan of life? Can it be possible 
that the units of Being, in making the journey from Unity 
to Harmony, through potential variety—when reaching 
that grand organism known as man are to be thrust into 
a bottomless pit of everlasting punishment? If so, by 
whom? Could God cast a portion of His unspeakable 
Form into “eternal death?” The proposition is absurd. 
No matter what the potential affliction, the rising form 
of life, according to the plan of Principle, must forever 
continue to rise. 

Those observations, although in partial elaboration 
of the plan of life, are essentially in the propagation of 
higher and purer ideals, towards which one may unfold. 

Turning attention towards the biological fact of 
Variety, our vision faces an infinite study of the wonder¬ 
ful plan of life. It appeals to man strongly, because he 
is in the midst of its contending forees. He may be said 
to have slightly passed the meridian of its processes. If 
we look upon the birth of the units of animal and plant 
forms of life, at the beginning of the Silurian geological 
ages, as at the bottom of the orbit of life, with the whole 
arc of extension, or propagation of worlds and heavens, 
stretching up on one side, and the arc of the evolution 
of man on the other, we must place visible humanity very 
low on the latter arc. We see that from the turning 
point propagation has made the passage of but six of its 
methods, all of which are in the metamorphosis of the 
egg, on a rising scale. Those methods are fully described 
in Dr. Mitchell’s “Evolution of Life.” We are passing 
through the seventh method, by thinking in volition, but 
we do not yet very fully comprehend its full import. 

In the study of that part of the plan of life by which 
the extended worlds were propagated, which is all re¬ 
solved to the evolution of man, in its earlier stages, we 
meet with a long series of chemical changes, wrought by 
tone degrees. That department of life unfoldment pre¬ 
sents a most wonderful rise of unit organism. We do 
not, as yet, know the nature of all the methods of propa¬ 
gation by which the worlds and heavens of our universe 
were propagated. I have been able to but briefly describe 
five of them, to-wit: (1) That by which the substare of 
Principle in Truth was brought forth; (2) that by which 
the unit atom, or full toned single thought was evolved; 
(3) that in which the molecule, or idea was realized; (4) 
that through which the corpuscles, or ideal group was 
propagated; (5) that by which the transcendent little 
cellular organism rose in potential psychology. I have 




220 


THE NEW IDEA. 


not, as yet, been able to master the fourth, or sixth 
method, by which the real crystal is evolved to organic 
life. 

There are doubtless many other methods of propa¬ 
gation standing for intermediate organisms, prerequisite 
to the formation of planets and suns, in mass tone har¬ 
mony, but I already have named, and partly elaborated 
a sufficient scope of methods to establish the plan of life 
unfoldment on the arc of contending variety. Variety 
was propagated to primal existence by the oscillations of 
Principle, but its degrees of organism just referred to, 
came forth in the rivalry of contention, or by the contin¬ 
uous degrees of the tones of the units which, in the first 
stages of process, are heterogeneous, and, in that way de¬ 
grees of harmony rose from the functions of strife. That 
is wherein error becomes functional to the propagation 
of Truth—contention, to that of Harmony. 

If one would bring to vision those primal processes 
in the evolution of life, wherein heterogeneous tones con¬ 
flicted to degrees of Harmony, that one would the more 
clearly see how it is that so called error and evil tones 
of human life conflict, and afflict, to the propagation of 
degrees of Harmony in men and women. When the tone 
radiation of the forms of life flux together, in propaga¬ 
tion, by which those forms are raised to higher powers, 
there is first, the stage of inharmony—the conflict of 
error and evil—as is said in perception, which is concom¬ 
itant to the primal stages of all propagation; and, fol¬ 
lowing that, degrees of Harmony rise in the facts propa¬ 
gated, which are higher than those existing in the things 
from which they were propagated. That is in the fact 
of an element of growth —of life unfoldment. 

We find all our biological foundations of wedlock, 
kinship, fellowship and Brotherhood in the functional 
tones of the variety of the unit forms of life—in those 
methods of propagation by which extending organism 
rose, prior to the birth and existence of cellular unit or¬ 
ganism. If we study the real methods of propagation by 
which the planetary systems were unfolded, not the “sky 
rocket” plans of obsolete cosmogonies, we will come to 
see the supremacy of the polar energy of Principle in 
every step and item of the evolution of life. 

In those earlier stages of life unfoldment there is 
the exclusive work of creating man. Not a single item 
of it was in any other design. Each step of creation, from 
start to finish, if finish there can ever be, is a process of 
building man, and of course that process is resolved, in 
the plan of life, to the unfoldment of God. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


221 


We have already seen how by thinking, which is 
propagation, man is regenerated—transformed—into an 
invisible risen form to dwell in a heaven higher than this 
visible one. We must now extend the plan of life, in 
order to see how it is that all of the six-fold systems of 
worlds and heavens in our universe make one in propa¬ 
gating the New Heaven and the New Earth, also, as yet, 
invisible to man. 

We all know, in some degree of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, that processes are going forward continuously in 
our little world, and in all the sideral bodies of the plane¬ 
tary systems of our universe. We do not fully know 
what the functions of those processes are. I have not 
brought to clear vision, all of them. Many of them be¬ 
come manifest from diligent thinking. We know that 
each heavenly mass tone body is composed of atomic, 
molecular, and corpuscular units. Now, those qualifying, 
words which give the units a certain quality, have ref¬ 
erence only to their physical subvesture tones. It must 
always be remembered that an atom, a molecule, or a 
corpuscle should be held in thought as to its interiors. 
The atom is never very highly physicalized. When atoms 
combine in fellowship in molecular organism, the mem¬ 
brane in which they are housed is more highly physical¬ 
ized. It is still more so in the case of the envelope of the 
corpuscle. 

It is to be noted that those unit organisms are at work, 
not only by their physical subvesture tones, but by their 
interior tones also. An atom works in ten fold organic 
functions, that is to say, it exercises, spiritual, divine, 
and angelic functions, spiritually, by its spiritual tone 
triad; and it exercises celestial, mental and physical func¬ 
tions, celestially, by its celestial triad. That makes six 
tone functions. Then it functions on the full tone of the 
physical zone, in a seventh function, which is wherein 
the six tone powers, in mass tone, are one distinctly. Then 
when the unit descends to function in physical subvesture 
spheres, three other tone powers are added, and when 
all the interior organism works in harmony with those 
outer tone vestures, there is the mass tone of the nine 
functions, wherein they are one distinctly, thus giving 
a ten-fold organism to the almost infinitely invisible atom. 

When one associates those infinite sparks of life, 
which are veritable thoughts, into that little colony of 
life, called, a molecule, and in turn, realizes a community 
of molecules in a corpuscle, which latter unit organism 
cannot exist in less than ninety organic functions, it 
breaks to raptured vision that such thoughts, ideas, and 


222 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ideal groups, of so called molecular planets, are trans- 
cendently functional. What are they doing? Our earth 
is composed exclusively of such wonderful thinking or¬ 
ganisms, each spinning and weaving in the functions of 
conscious wisdom and intelligence. It is the same with 
all the other worlds of the universe. Then we surely 
have a universe of most marvelous activity. All that in¬ 
finite industry is in the actuality of thinking, or propa¬ 
gation. Well, what, are those units in their wonderful 
fellowship, propagating? 

“And I saw a new heaven and a new 
earth; for the first heaven and the first 
earth were passed away, and there was 
no more sea.” 

They are propagating “the new heaven and the 
new earth—making ready and extending, and beautify¬ 
ing a place of abode, for the higher activities of rising 
mankind. That new country is, as yet, invisible to man, 
but it will shortly be revealed with its “Holy City,” 
which is the metropolis or Capitol of the Invisible Broth¬ 
erhood. Suppose we permit the Revelater to continue: 

And I, John, saw the Holy City, new 
Jerusalem, coming down from God out 
of heaven, prepared as a bride adorned 
for her husband. And I heard a great 
voice out of heaven, saying, Behold, the 
tabernacle of God is with man, and he 
will dwell with them, and they shall be 
his people, and God himself shall be 
with them, and be their God. And God 
shall wipe away all tears from their 
eyes; and there shall be no more death, 
neither sorrow, nor crying, neither shall 
there be any more pain; for the former 
things are passed away. And he that sat 
upon the throne said, Behold, I make 
all things new. And he said unto one, 

Write; for these words are trpe and 
faithful. * * * I will give unto him 
that is atheist of the fountain of the 
water of life freely. 

Dear student, there is the coming down as well as 
the going up. The visible and the invisible are making 
one. We are rising into invisible forms of life, and our 
dear old heaven and earth are rising with us. We are 
all, men and women, and heaven and earth, rising and 
unfolding together. All that transcendent rise is achieved 
by thinking. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


223 


I say that the upper and the lower worlds and heav¬ 
ens, and all their inhabitants are unfolding as a mighty 
whole, into the new. A majority—a vast majority—will 
have risen in the way already described, to the new 
heaven and the new earth, before all things make one, 
and mankind on the earth will join in the mighty reun¬ 
ion. But. a considerable company—a little company—as 
some have it, will be found here on the earth, in exalted 
form tones of human life when the old will have been 
completely transformed to the new, and that which is 
and that which is to come, will make one in the risen life. 

Yes, there is, in the plan of life, the finale of the old. 
so far as these visible spheres are concerned. They shall 
all pass away, when the functions of physical subvesture 
tones will no longer be required for the evolution of man¬ 
kind ; and not only these visible tone vestures, but also 
all higher heavens and worlds, which are the higher tone 
vestures of units and mass bodies. They, too, shall, in 
their turn, pass away. All that is of the old shall be 
folded up as a scroll, to give place to the new. It will 
be resolved to the new by thinking in propagation. 

All that is now taking place here, in and on the 
visible earth, and in our visible heaven. It is going for¬ 
ward, thought by thought, item by item, bit by bit, degree 
by degree, and hour by hour, day by day, century by 
century, and will so continue to unfold until the degrees 
of transformation will swell into the reality of the higher 
and risen life. 

It is easily seen that all potentialities of sense of 
these spheres must melt and dissolve, in the measure of 
that rise. All those are functional to that unfoldment, 
and will disappear in the propagation of progress. It 
will not be so very long before error, evil, sickness and 
disease will have completely vanished, and of course, as 
any one can see, that thing called death can have no 
place or function in such a consummation. 

It is recorded that the Lord will come to dwell a 
thousand years among men on the earth. That symbol 
is, when properly interpreted, in the plan of life. In 
those final processes when the visible, and the now invis¬ 
ible shall make one, successively in this, and in each of 
the three higher dual heavens in turn, the life that now 
is and that which is to come will mingle and blend their 
tones in close communion; that is the same as saying 
that those who shall visibly live on the earth will one 
day approach so close to the border land, as to be able 
to enter into the New Canaan, or sufficiently close to it, 
to behold the forms and hear the voices of those grand 


224 


THE NEW IDEA. 


new spheres of risen life. In our rise invisible forms of 
life are, in effect, coming to us, and that process will con¬ 
tinue, until all things shall mingle in Harmony, and make 
one in the reality of Truth. 

If we turn our attention to the activities of higher 
and invisible spheres of life, we can see evidences of 
wonderful progress there. We can see in the transcend¬ 
ent unfoldment of Brotherhood in those worlds the real¬ 
ization of human dreams. Ideal government has become 
a reality there. An injury to one is indeed and in Truth, 
an injury to all, there. There government is of, by, and 
for the people, in reality. In those worlds one citizen 
has the power to appropriate the functions of all the 
others for his welfare. That is the realization of inter¬ 
dependence—its glorious fruits. That is the only inde¬ 
pendence there is or can be on any earth or in any 
heaven. 

It is unnecessary to elaborate. The student can eas¬ 
ily do that for self. It remains only to add, that human 
progress will ultimately transform all that, and ten thou¬ 
sand times ten thousand more, to life here on the earth. 
Nor will the period be long before its full realization is 
achieved. It is all coming to pass in the fact that by 
thinking man is being transformed to the new man, and, 
with that rise, his heaven and his earth, are being propa¬ 
gated to his new dwelling- place. The thinking of man 
is doing it all. 

But we must extend the plan of life to the fellow¬ 
ship and Brotherhood, of worlds. Interdependence is as 
far reaching as the universe, which is infinite. The 
worlds are coming closer together. Their respective in¬ 
habitants, like mariners on the high seas, when their 
craft approach close enough, will speak each other, and 
there will be the higher and wider inter-communication 
of man races, just as there now is among the heavenly 
bodies themselves. Such is the sweep and destiny of 
Brotherhood. The whole universe is unfolding into one 
transcendent form of life in Brotherhood. The goal of 
life is, therefore, but slightly comprehended by man. The 
average man is looking “through a glass darkly.” He 
needs a clearer and a wider vision. That will come by 
thinking in these ideals of Truth. As the vision of man 
is thus extended, he will rise to higher degrees of power, 
peace and plenty, in precisely the same measure. Yea, 
as a man thinketh so is he. 

If one is in doubt as to how to think, let him think 
high, in pure and wholesome ideals, and he will soon 
rise to know the right methods. There is not an adult 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


225 


on the earth who does not know the high from the low. 
He can think about the high, the great, the grand, the 
noble, the pure. That is a good way to start. All else 
will follow. That will be in the fact of seeking the King¬ 
dom, with the result that with such seeking all things 
needful will be added. 

Has the student ever thought of the impetus that 
will be given to man on the earth when he comes to 
exchange ideas with the inhabitants of other worlds? 
Think of that. Think about it every day. Such think¬ 
ing will hasten that grand day. It can’t come in any 
other way. It will be realized in that way. 

If a circle of men and women could be formed in 
our world, say of one hundred, who, at some appointed 
hour in each day, would, together, or otherwise, think 
about such a consummation as that of the interchange 
of thoughts and ideas between the people of the earth 
and those of the planet Mars, in desire, choice and motive, 
attuned to the song of rising life, intercommunication 
between the two peoples would be an established fact in 
less than a generation. That method w T ould become a 
mightily potential handmaid to science. Science is but 
the child of thinking. 

I hear some one say that such thinking would be a 
waste of time and effort. That one probably supposes 
that actions alone can accomplish such a transcendent 
result. It is not only a fact that thinking must propagate 
all such actions, but, what is more, all things are possible 
to methods of thinking. I venture to say that the plan 
of thinking here recommended will give the Martians the 
“hunch,” if indeed they have not already received it, 
quicker and more effectually than all the flash lights 
that can be set to ether shimmers in a life time. Human 
thinking can be sent direct to the hearts of the Martians, 
and they will begin to think back. I am half inclined to 
accept the idea that it is due to the thinking of the 
Martians that I have been able to write these paragraphs. 
They are older and more advanced than we are. It is 
plain, therefore, that the leading thinkers of that little 
planet have been knocking at our big front door for at 
least a century of earth’s time. 

We should answ r er them, and bid them to come into 
our psychological realm, and talk with us, and tell us the 
wonderful story of their unfoldment, and listen to ours, 
What then? We would discover their greater advance, 
and be helped onward in our rising progress. 

Many will, no doubt, ridicule these observations, but 
my experience in methods of thinking convinces me that 


226 


THE NEW IDEA. 


if we are to talk with the people of Mars at all, we will 
need to learn from them, by the interchange of thoughts 
and ideas, in the way I have stated, how to construct the 
necessary mechanical instruments for propelling our more 
formal ideas to them, if, indeed such instruments be nec¬ 
essary. Certain and sure it is, that if we will turn our 
thoughts towards the Martians in good earnestness, in 
proper methods of thinking, they will respond, and, the 
result will be that we will receive new ideas as to plans 
of more formally speaking with them. 


EXERCISE XXXIV. 


SCOPE OF THIS SYSTEM. 

Explanation of the functions of the system of thinking 
exercises formulated in this volume—All work in 
secret and in silence—Importance of the morning 
and evening hours—Functions of sleep—Sacred 
character of the bed chamber—Necessity of its purity 
—Self-respect, and esteem for others, in a full recog¬ 
nition of the “I am.” 


IN' formulating a system of thinking exercises for 
psychological culture, and for the propagation of health 
and happiness, and, in result, for the dissipation of hurt¬ 
ful habits, wc shall study, to some extent the principal 
households of Consciousness, and as far as expedient, the 
more functional members thereof. It is impossible to 
arrange a plan that will conform exactly to the diversified 
conditions of students. Therefore each must work— 
think—in those exercises which appear most suitable. If 
a thinking exercise is hereinafter presented with a view 
to destroying certain habits which the student has not 
contracted, it is obvious that he or she has no part with 
it. Therefore, common sense must be appealed to in the 
selections made. 

Many of the examples given are useful to all. Others 
are for special cases. In the matter of habits, however, 
it is not always necessary to hold in vision any particu¬ 
larly besetting one. If the plan for propagating regu¬ 
larity in every day life, and the psychological system 
formulated with a view to unfolding self into self con¬ 
trol be strictly carried out, all hurtful habits, which have 
not become diseases, will speedily disappear, and the stu¬ 
dent will experience a most delightful measure of release 
from bondage, and enjoy easy bought liberty. When 
habits have been indulged until they have developed an 
acute form of disease, special thought exercise are neces¬ 
sary to their conquest. 

It should be understood, however, at the start, and 
before the start, that unless the student is prepared to 
do something, no good can possibly follow from a mere 
reading and casual study of the system here presented. 
Moreover it should be stated, and strongly impressed, 
that the remedy and the ailment, the required power, and 
the afflicting weakness, do not apparently connect. Let 

( 227 ) 



228 


THE NEW IDEA. 


the student, here and now be warned against any specific 
effort to overcome a specific evil, or affliction. Such is 
not in the plan of life. The physician diagnoses a case 
and locates the source of the affliction, and specifically 
applies a definite remedy. His aim is at the particular 
seat of the ailment, or disease. He functions as a marks¬ 
man, and endeavors to hit the nail on the head. Such 
is the nature and requirements of his practice. 

It is altogether different with effective processes of 
thinking. The aim of those is not towards the seat of 
the trouble, but in the opposite direction. In this par¬ 
ticular, the confidence of the student will be heavily 
taxed, until the science of the system is quite fully un¬ 
derstood. It is because of that fact that these introduc¬ 
tory remarks are thought necessary. 

Here is another point. At first thought, the student 
will look upon this system as necessarily slow in its pro¬ 
cesses, and that long and wearisome waiting will be in¬ 
volved before results are reached. The contrary is the 
fact. A week of faithful work in the system here pre¬ 
sented will accomplish the most astonishing results— 
results so unexpected and transcendent in their effects 
upon the whole life organization, that the consequent 
experience will be in the fact of degrees of new life. 

It is not necessary to expect particular results, nor 
to exercise faith in the system. It is necessary—impera¬ 
tively necessary—that the student actually and thor¬ 
oughly do—work out —the things required. If one con¬ 
sider the system too burdensome, or as likely to consume 
too much time, or as a plan which does not appeal to com¬ 
mon sense, or as a waste of effort, let me suggest that 
he or she give it nine days of thorough, hearty, cordial 
experiment. If that be done the venture will prove a 
surprise, and the student will be quite sure to continue. 

If one say that he is in full health, free from hurtful 
habits, and quite happy and contented with his lot, and 
is therefore not in need of applying this system to his 
own life, let me say that such person is the one who can 
obtain the greatest advantages from it, because he or 
she needs less of remedial thinking, and may at once 
go forward with the grand work of life imfoldment to 
higher powers, and more glorious experiences. 

If, on the other hand, one say that he has so l»ng 
indulged his passions and appetites, and so persistently 
denied invisible functions, that he cannot benefit by the 
attempted practice of remedial thinking, the answer is 
that the system is primarily for him, and that a hearty 
application of it will redeem his life from bondage, and 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


229 


set him free—make him a free man. There is no question, 
in fact, as to just what the system will do, when earnestly 
applied, but there may be some doubt as to whether or 
not the reader will undertake the work, and, even if he 
begin, whether or not he will, at the start, neglect or for¬ 
get. 

It may be held that for nine days the practice of this 
grand system must be carried on by the force—the power 
—of The Will. After that one will not be as likely to 
neglect nor forget to perform the necessary work, nor put 
into hearty practice the required exercises. Man must 
himself make the start. He must begin by using the 
powers he already possesses, no matter how feeble, or 
how robust they may be. 

But the nature of the exercises appeal to all who are 
in a position to undertake them, and nearly all are so 
situated. They are attractive, life giving, and nearly all 
in secret—in silence. One does not require to make a 
show of himself, or of the practice. On the contrary, he 
or she is required—imperatively required—to maintain 
absolute silence concerning the whole matter. The prac¬ 
tice of the system is between himself and his God, or his 
ideals, whichever he pleases-. It is a practice with which, 
at the start, and for the greater part throughout, no one 
intermeddles, in thought; and no one, by presence, except 
those who share the secrecy of your bed chamber. Later, 
exercises in fellowship take place and function, but those 
do not arise until considerable progress is made in silence. 

The author of this system, however, presents it pub¬ 
licly to the whole world. Any one who wishes can take 
it up and practice in it, according to the instructions 
given, or he may reject it, but it is ventured that no one 
—no man, no woman—who carefully reads and studies 
the system will venture to speak lightly, or in ridicule 
of it. Its sacred character is its protection; and as soon 
as its practice has gained even a partial foothold among 
primary or advanced thinkers, it will have hosts of 
advocates and defenders. The author is a living demon¬ 
stration of its mighty power for life unfoldment, from 
error and affliction to health and the riches of liberty 
in rising degrees of wisdom and intelligence. Hence, 
the following exercises in methods of thinking for health, 
happiness, peace and plenty, are most earnestly recom¬ 
mended to all. 

Almost any one can readily see the importance of as¬ 
sembling and propagating thoughts which are peculiarly 
applicable and functional to the two great events of every 
day life, to-wit: retiring for rest and sleep at night, and 


230 


THE NEW IDEA. 


rising in the morning for the activities of the day. It is 
impossible to over estimate the functional forces which 
gather in physical, psychological and spiritual fellowship 
to signalize the opportunities of the retiring and rising 
moments. If the rising and the retiring hours be properly 
improved the day will be filled with joy and gladness, 
peace and plenty, health and prosperity, and the night 
will be a heaven of rest and sleep, filled with the glory 
of delightful fellowship in dreams. 

If one jump, or lazily roll out of bed, hastily or leis¬ 
urely make a careless toilet, and rush, or slowly go forth 
to the duties of the rising day, taking no heed of the 
opportunities which those potential moments supply, the 
day will be of the haphazard sort. The beginning is 
wrong and the result will be in error, and very likely in 
evil. If one, weary, it may be, from the day’s duties, or 
restless from a day of neglected duties, which is often the 
fact, hurriedly disrobe and thoughtlessly tumble into bed, 
the night will, if not full of tormenting nervousness, and 
unpleasant dreams, be barren of those transcendent re¬ 
sults which sleep is appointed to supply. 

Half an hour on rising, and half an hour on retiring, 
will, if properly filled with thinking, unite the morning 
and the evening, the day and the night, into twenty-four 
hours of ideal heaven. Is there one so dumb to the 
simplest facts of life, who can, for a moment, overlook the 
imperative necessity of making full and functional pre¬ 
paration for the eight hours of sleep, in which his lower 
sentient functions are to be suspended, and when his life 
organization is to fellowship, consciously and uncon¬ 
sciously, with invisible hosts of unseen worlds. In a wide 
sense those eight hours are the most important of the 
twenty-four, constituting the full day. It is during that 
period that the psychological organization disconnects its 
myriad etheric fibre tendrils, holding it, in the facts of 
physiological psychology, with the sentient organism, and 
functions in the higher self, in transcendent exercises of 
unfoldment, properly called involution. It is in that 
period that the rising invisible new body is learning te 
walk alone; to function in purely psychological organ¬ 
ism, without the aid of sense perception; to walk, and talk, 
and fellowship with physically unseen multitudes, who are 
its companions, when the lower mass tone consciousness 
is suspended. When it stumbles, or blunders, and falls, 
or takes refuge for support in the sentient organism, there 
is a dream, the character of which is determined by phys¬ 
ical or lower sentient conditions. 

The functions of sleep also propagate to physical rest, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


231 


which, while necessary, is far less important than those 
higher psychological activities which function to higher 
uufoldment only when the realm of sense is dormant. 
Hence, it is seen that there is great need of mental and 
psychological preparation for the hours of sleep.. He 
who can prescribe the necessary formula for that pre¬ 
paration is, in a measure, a benefactor to his fellows. It 
is all important that the psychological organism, func¬ 
tioning in subjective consciousness, and, torn, precipitated, 
and sometimes mal-treated, during the reckless thinking 
of the day, should be composed, and thought into degrees 
of harmony, for its approaching night’s work. It is only 
fair and equitable that sentient functions should, on retir¬ 
ing to rest and sleep, make some reparation of its errors 
during the day, and reach as high a degree of harmony 
with the higher self as possible, so that subjective con¬ 
sciousness may go about its higher work with a clear 
field. 

On the other hand, it is equally important that upon 
rising full preparation be made for the duties of the 
day. The first half hour upon rising from rest 
and sleep is far more important and potential 
than the whole remainder of that day. It may be 
made into a key which will unlock all the possibilities of 
the day. It may be so filled with power and light that 
the day will shine with its fruits, and every step of it will 
be successful—will be in wisdom and intelligence, joy and 
gladness, peace and plenty, health and prosperity. Who 
would not crown the first half hour of the day with phys¬ 
ical and psychological preparation in order to realize such 
a day. If one half hour taken from twenty or twenty- 
four half hours will resolve them to experiences 
of health, happiness and prosperity, will one begrude 
the time? I think not. The trouble about this is 
that people do not know that they may carry with 
them from their bed-chambers, be they humble, or luxur¬ 
ious, each morning, the keys to success for that day. They 
do not believe it. Well, until they have given the system 
a fair trial, they have no right to declare against it. All 
I can say is that there is for the student, in the first half 
hour after waking in the morning, all the germs of a 
heavenly day of joy and gladness, if, by the hearty appli¬ 
cation of certain fixed exercises, those germs are set to 
the tune of self life unfoldment. 

Too much cannot be claimed as the results of the half 
hour so appropriated. A man or a woman going forth 
to the day, from that half hour devoted to silence cove¬ 
nant work, and other psychological exercises, as well as 


232 


THE NEW IDEA. 


physical culture work, will function in powers never be¬ 
fore manifested by his or her life—powers before which 
error and evil will flee and hide, and by which the efforts 
of the day will be crowned with the glory of real success. 
The day born in such half hour will be a child of wisdom 
and intelligence, full of grace and truth, gentleness, kind¬ 
ness, meekness, brotherly love, patience, courage, faith, 
firmness, and prosperity. It will be free from error, dis¬ 
appointment, accident, calamity, or failure. It will be 
full of health, joy and gladness. 

Now let it be said over, and over again, that the first 
and last half hours of the day belong to self, and self only. 
No other has a moral or legal right to take even the 
smallest fraction from them. Do not part with one minute. 
Any system of economics which will not grant to every 
man and woman half an hour in the morning, and a like 
period of time in the evening, free from disturbance of 
any kind, and without trenching on the full eight hours 
for sleep, is an enemy to mankind and should be abol¬ 
ished. One can well afford to give all of his wakeful hours 
to others, provided the two half hours named be sacredly 
reserved for self. 

People, as a general rule, rush into and out of their 
bed chambers too recklessly. They should be the most 
sacred places on earth for both man and woman. The 
sleeping chamber should always be the most artistically, 
and beautifully appointed room in every home. It must 
be remembered that man devotes one third, and more of 
his whole time in his bed chamber. It should be the clean¬ 
est, purest, most attractive, best furnished and most elab¬ 
orately decorated apartment in the home. All the little 
treasures should be collected there—those which are the 
most sacred, and which recall the sweetest memories. 

By all means see to it that the bed chamber is the 
secret soul of the home, the most sacred spot, for you, 
on the earth. It is not for others; it is for you and you 
alone. No one should share its sacred precincts with you 
save he or she who is joined to you in sacred wedlock, or 
close to you of kin, or in the bonds of pure fellowship. 
The bed chamber should be the cleanest room in the home 
—always tidy, inviting, thoroughly ventilated, and easily 
accessible by God’s pure air and sunshine. It should be 
the purest place in the home. To enter its presents should 
be a signal for reverence, self respect and esteem of the 
good, with a full glow of love and affection. 

Let no evil thought enter, or abide in your secret 
chamber. See to it that its precincts are sacred. Let no 
one enter there except those whom you love, and trust, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


233 


and know to be pure in heart. Never enter there yourself 
carelessly, but always with reverence, and with joy and 
gladness, begotten of your high esteem of the glory of life. 

Fortunate, indeed, is the man or the woman who can 
say, '‘This is my secret bed chamber. It is sacred to my 
life.” Think of the millions who are not privileged with 
a place in w r hich they can be alone, and in which they can 
erect an altar to life unfoldment. Alas! think of the 
thousands who have such a blessing and who fail to profit 
by it. He or she who can avail themselves of such a place 
of retirement and solitude, are highly privileged, and 
should profit by its proper use. 

I do not recommend excessive periods of solitude. 
As a rule a short period at morning, and another at night, 
and, if available, another shorter period during the day, 
at the most convenient time are sufficient. 

Certain habits are absolutely necessary to successful 
methods of thinking. The first of these is cleanliness, and 
neatness in person and dress. Bodily cleanliness is equally 
important, in a high sense, with a clean heart. The first is 
functional to the last. The outward life should always 
reflect the inner. Neatness of dress, and care, with grace 
and refinement in speech and conversation, and withal, in¬ 
tensity of manner, softened by gentleness, should charac¬ 
terize the daily life. These things will arise in unfoldment, 
but man should, by thinking, come into such a high es¬ 
teem of life generally, and into such self respect, as will 
cause him to desire to appear outwardly in some condi¬ 
tion worthy of the grandeur of his life within. 

As these habits are cultivated in connection with ex¬ 
ercises of unfolding methods of thinking, the use of pro¬ 
fane, or coarse, or careless speech will naturally disap¬ 
pear, or where it has not existed, higher degrees of grace 
and purity will rise. Other hurtful or objectionable habits 
will depart, without giving notice of such intention, and 
the lifeorganization will loose its burdens, and forsake 
its chains, and gradually walk forth into the light and 
liberty of love and affection. 

One of the early evidences of progress in thinking to 
life unfoldment is the recognition of the, I am. It will 
soon dawn to consciousness that the student is a distinc¬ 
tive personality, differing, in important points and pow¬ 
ers, from every other in the universe—that Principle is 
not building another just like, or anywhere nearly like, 
him or her. He or she is grandly, marvellously, and tran¬ 
scendency distinctive; one by itself, differing from all 
others; one for others to behold and admire, while he or 
she beholds them with love and affection. That recogni- 


234 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tion propagates self respect, and esteem for other selves, 
with an ambition that esteem will grandly reach out to 
him or her self from such others. 

A realization of the I am puts a new phrase on self life 
altogether. It is in the realization that self is in posses¬ 
sion of the whole organism of Principle, on a different 
type, or tone, from all others, and that there has been 
committed to his or her keeping and unfoldment, a per¬ 
sonal plan of life, equal in possibility and glory and power 
to any other, and that to till the full scope of infinite life, 
his or her peculiar form tone is indispensable. That may 
reach out to self importance as well as self respect, and 
if it does no one will be injured, provided its responsibili¬ 
ties in Brotherhood rise with it. It is the truth, in wisdom 
and intelligence an dto that there can be no limitations. 

No progress can be made in self life unfoldment, in 
power, health, prosperity and happiness without a fully 
developed realization, in appropriation, of the I am. 
From the standpoint of the I am function, it is seen that, 
in Principle, man is justly entitled to his complete sup¬ 
ply of every need, and that his supply can be limited only 
by his needs. From the standpoint of the I am, man com¬ 
prehends that he is, by Principle, in the plan of life, en¬ 
titled to perfect health and complete happiness, and that 
if he is not enjoying them in full measure, it is because 
of error which he has the power to crush; he compre¬ 
hends. also, that in Principle, he is rightfully entitled to 
prosperity, and that if he is not enjoying that, it is because 
of error which he also has the power to abolish. 

I say, therefore, that a consciousness of the dawning 
and rising I am, in any life is evidence that such life is 
unfolding in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, accord¬ 
ing to Principle, and, for that reason, such r* person should 
take courage and persist in the work of drawing from the 
inexhaustible riches of the eternal fountain, by scientific 
methods of thinking. 


EXERCISE XXXV. 


MORNING WORK. 

Physical culture and psychological exercises—Sending 
out “good will’’ thoughts to friends and enemies— 
The grand results—Power of Silence—The morning si¬ 
lence vow—Subject for contemplation—Rising to self- 
control. 


WITHOUT a diligent study of all the foregoing, so 
as to bring to somewhat clear vision, the teachings of this 
volume to this point, it will be comparatively useless to 
enter upon the practice of those exercises in methods of 
thinking which follow. We have, the most of us, reached 
a point in these studies from which we should turn back 
and begin anew. When the first, and the second careful 
reading of that which preeeeds has been finished, and the 
thought exercises which follow have been practiced to a 
substantial and effective beginning, the student is ready 
for fellowship study. Classes should assemble under com¬ 
petent lecture leadership, and portions of the volume 
should be read audibly by the leader, and be discussed by 
way of enquiry and explanation, until there shall be 
evolved a consensus of understanding on all the main 
points. 

Prom the beginning of the volume to this point, the 
author has endeavored to present a system of experimental 
study of the plan of life as it is in Principle. From this 
point on the effort is to present a series of exercises in 
methods of thinking to life unfoldment. But let it be 
repeated, without a somewhat full imderstanding of all 
that which preeeeds, that which follows will be of little 
or not great utility. 


MORNING EXERCISES. 

On rising in the morning assume an erect position and 
take light physical culture exercises, according to your 
favorite system, practicing in at least three full respira¬ 
tions of deep breathing, with lips and nostrils both in play, 
then at least two full respirations, deep as possible, with 
the mouth closed, one through one nostril and the other 
through the other nostril, stopping the passage of the nos¬ 
tril which is not used, by one of the fingers being pressed 
against the side of the nose. 

After the physical exercises, be seated, and practice 

( 235 ) 




236 


THE NEW IDEA. 


for five or ten minutes, in that method of thinking to 
heart purity, described elsewhere. 

Enter into the soul of this particular exercise with all 
your emotional thought powers. Have this volume in hand 
and read as you proceed. 

Then advance to the window and look afar. See to 
it that your psychological apprehension reaches beyond 
all things physically visible. That reach of vision is a rise 
from time and sense. Then realize that you are looking 
within yourself, and beholding your higher self, in the 
fact of your own angel. Bring its glorious form to vision 
in your own ideals, and realize that it is yourself, and that 
your visible form conceals it. Resolve in your heart to cul¬ 
tivate a closer communion with that lovely creature which 
is, in reality, your higher self. Practice in that vision of 
your higher self, at least, once every morning at the time 
and in the manner stated, and as often during the day as 
you please. Realize, each time, that that transcendent 
form of life lives and functions within you, and that it 
continuously strives to lead you, to teach you, so that your 
lower self will unfold with its spiritual rise; and, in that 
way your lower and your higher selves are becoming one 
still more glorious invisible form of risen life in the ever¬ 
lasting Brotherhood of our race. That is a vision in de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence, unfolding towards 
truth; and it is health and life giving, and should be prac¬ 
ticed until it becomes a reality. Devote about two min¬ 
utes to that vision in the morning hour, as stated. 

Then let the toilet be made with ease and care, no 
matter how simple. Do not hurry. See to it that you 
look as neat as possible, in token of the higher self. When 
the toilet has been finished, and you are otherwise ready to 
leave your chamber, seat yourself comfortably, facing a 
window, and enter upon your psychological and silence 
covenant exercises. The psychological propulsions take 
precedence, and are in about the following order: 

Rise into consciousness—into subjective, or the 
higher consciousness. Try to function there. Realize that 
you exist by your invisible form of life, in a more glo¬ 
rious form than that which is visible, and that you are 
unfolding from the visible into the invisible, day by day. 
Realize that your invisible form is in the actuality of your 
own higher personal form, and that it is glorious in its 
bright and shining robes of light; and in that way bring 
consciousness—your higher risen self—into vivid psycho¬ 
logical vision, according to the highest ideals of beauty, 
excellence, and nobility, of which you are capable. Re¬ 
alize that that is not the angel form upon which your 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


237 


psychological vision had previously been fixed, but that it 
is the new, physically invisible, form of life in which you 
and your angel both dwell in the risen glory of the New 
Life to which you are so grandly unfolding. Then seek 
to function in that new life, by realizing that, in the higher 
form, you have fellowship with innumerable thousands 
in a glorious Brotherhood, or fellowhood, in an unspeak¬ 
able risen mass tone Form of Life. When that psycho¬ 
logical vision is complete, and as real as it is possible 
for you to propagate, repeat mentally and slowly, holding 
that great mass tone Form of Life in clear vision the 
while, the following or a similar expression of desire: 

Dear Risen Life, my rising Lord, 
my righteous King, thy name is Love. 

Thou art the Infinite Form of Risen Life. 

I am in Thee; Thou art in me. That is 
glory for me and for Thee. I am, and 
thou art. I and thee are one life for¬ 
evermore. Dwell in my heart, and un¬ 
fold my life, until, in Truth I shall be¬ 
hold Thy face. Then— now— in that 
dear face, I shall—I do — behold my 
own. Thou art all and in all. Desiring 
only thee, I have—I am—all things of 
good. 

The above must be so completely committed to 
memory that it will become an integral part of the life, 
and so that it may be repeated automatically, so far as 
the words are concerned. In that way the student will be 
able to concentrate his, or her, whole life forces into its 
real meaning. One must make that little prayer, or ex¬ 
pression of desire, the breath of his or her life. Always 
use this volume to start with and read from it. 

After a slight pause, in which you fellowship with 
risen forms of life, in your own silent, unspeakable way, 
turn your thoughts to earth, and send forth a mighty 
volley of psychological propulsions to those whom you 
may select. Have you an enemy? One who thinks ill of 
you? One who has spoken against you? A person whom 
you have wronged in thought, word or deed? A loved 
one? A sick or suffering friend or enemy? One who is 
in want or distress—any one? Well, single them out, one 
by one. Locate them as nearly as you can in thought. 
Bring them to vision, one at a time, and send to each, in 
vigorous propulsions, from the very heart, a shower of 
helpful thoughts ; thoughts filled with love and affection; 
thoughts carrying ideal blessings; thoughts of forgive¬ 
ness; thoughts expressing help, cheer, joy and gladness, 


238 


THE NEW IDEA. 


health, prosperity, recovery and restoration, as may be 
applicable to each case. That is wherein one rises superior 
to the enemy. He sends thought blessings and best wishes 
for the enemy, and as a result, the evil thoughts of the 
enemy toward him are destroyed before they can func¬ 
tion. 

The student will easily see how to perform that 
branch of the exercise. It is not best to cover too many 
in any one morning. A few with strong and full propul¬ 
sions, of’t repeated to each is better. Those held in thought 
will be greatly benefited, and the tidal wave of good 
things sent out will return to the sender augmented in 
blessings many fold. “Cast thy bread upon the waters 
and it will return after many days.” 

Two or three minutes should be devoted to this exer¬ 
cise. Five minutes will be better. It is one of the most 
functional methods of thinking for self and for other 
selves to which one can apply his powers. More can be 
accomplished for the objects of your love and affection 
in that way than by acts of philanthropy, although the lat¬ 
ter are not to be forgotten. Those who engage heartily 
in this work, always in silence, never revealing to an¬ 
other what has been done, will, in due time, experience 
very pleasant surprises. They will hear good news from 
the objects of their thoughts, and wonder how it came to 
pass. They will be overtaken by unexpected good fortune, 
and will wonder how it transpired. The exercise here 
referred to puts one in tune with the universe; it is a 
mighty readjuster. By it enemies become friends, and 
friends seek to minister to your welfare. Things will 
come to you without apparent effort on your part, and 
you will become a man, or a woman of ‘ ‘ good luck. ’ * 

The student should take that psychological exercise 
into careful consideration, and extend it into every pos¬ 
sible channel, and develop it into a world of utility. It is 
far reaching in its potentialities, and the good will 
thoughts sent out will go forth on an endless circuit, scat¬ 
tering good things in their track, returning to their author 
with many treasures with each round of their grand 
functions. 

When the psychological work is done, the silence 
covenant exercises begin. These are fruitful to self-con¬ 
trol, and self unfoldment, beyond the power of language 
to describe. These exercises are in the power of silence, 
and no word should be spoken concerning them at any 
time, except in the voice of silence. Those remarks have 
a higher signification than that of secrecy, although the 
latter is to be strictly maintained. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


239 


There is the power of silence, speaking from the 
standpoint of the physical worlds, which has a voice, con¬ 
cerning which it has been said, ‘ ‘ He that hath ears to hear 
let him hear. ” We may have opportunity for further elab¬ 
oration of those realities later. 

The student upon completing the psychological exer¬ 
cises may assume any attitude consistent with his or her 
sense of reverence or respect in making a vow. The cove¬ 
nant part of this method of thinking is in its vows. Life 
is itself a covenant, and its bond is the promise, or vow. 
In the method of thinking under consideration, exercises 
are by covenant. In the earlier stages the covenant is with 
self in the power of silence ; later, in fellowship exercises, 
it is between two or more. The latter class of covenants 
cannot be in silence. There is potency in the covenant, 
but the greater function is in its silence. 

In making silence vows, or covenants, the student 
undertakes, by the exercise of his will, to do certain 
things. No one, but self, knows, or ever can know, the 
nature of the covenants made. There is a penalty at¬ 
tached to each vow made, in case silence is broken. 
When silence concerning any vow is broken, it loses its 
force, and the one who thus covenants and thus breaks 
silence concerning it, receives no benefit from it, but if he 
maintain silence, he will receive power to keep the cove¬ 
nant, and that silence will itself, in its own voice, pro¬ 
claim the results of the covenant in self liL; unfoldment to 
higher powers. 

The covenants are entered into, in connection with 
the morning silence exercises, and have reference to self 
conduct for that day only. A new covenant is made each 
morning. These vows, or covenants, are made to sub¬ 
jective consciousness, or to the higher self, and always 
have reference to sentient potentialities, or visible con¬ 
duct, involving the higher functions of life. The covenants 
here spoken of are not made to the Lord. They are in 
functional compact with the higher self, and, in silence, 
work out a wonderful degree of self life unfoldment into 
the invisible form of rising life. They are functional to 
rise out of error and evil, into higher degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, wherein self is given the functions of 
higher powers. These covenants are never in the plan of 
“I will not;” they are always on the affirmative side; 
they always aim in a direction opposite to the habit or 
condition which they are functional to destroy. They are 
not prohibitory, according to the law of Moses, but in the 
bond of liberty, according to the New Commandment, 
which is carried out in love and affection, rather than 


240 


THE NEW IDEA. 


in self denial. And yet, at the start, a measure of lower 
self denial is involved. These covenants are evil habit 
destroyers, and moral habit builders. They develop the 
functions of the moral faculties and provide release from 
that symbol called a “guilty conscience.” 

I present, following, a list of vows, suggestive of 
those to be entered into, in silence, at the morning secret 
banquet table: 

1. —For this day I will be cheerful, speaking kindly 
and gently to all, no matter what the circumstances; 

or, 

2. —For this day I will seek to cheer and help, at least 
one who is in trouble; 

or, 

3. —For this day I will speak only the truth in such 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence as I may be able to 
command; 

or, 

4. —For this day, when I discover myself speaking or 
thinking ill, or evil of any one, I will force myself to 
think and speak something of good concerning that one; 

or, 

5. —For this day I will strive to be all sunshine in my 
home, and out of it; 

°r, 

6. —For this day I will return good for evil; 

or, 

7. —For this day I will permit only pure thoughts to 
enter my life; 

. or ’ 

8. —For this day I will force myself to be continu¬ 
ously employed at something of benefit to myself or 
others; 

or, 

9. —For this day I will think and speak only good of 
my enemies; 

or, 

10. —For this day I will seek only the good of my 
fellow man, thinking and acting towards him only as I 
would that he should think and act towards me; 

or, 

11. —For this day I will think to life unfoldment in 
every leisure moment; 

or, 

12. —For this day I will study, and think to unfold¬ 
ment into a higher, purer and stronger love of my 
neighbor; 


or. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


241 


13. —For this day I will have a kind word and a glad¬ 
some smile for every one whom I meet; 

or, 

14. —For this day I will eat and drink only those 
things which are healthful, and then only in moderate 
measures; 

or, 

15. —For this day I will be a clean, polite, gentle, 
kind, strong, courageous, and industrious man, or woman; 

or, 

16. —For this day I will fill each moment with new 
and healthful thoughts; 

or, 

17. —For this day I will think continually to the 
purification of my heart; 

or, 

18. —For this day I will exercise choice to the highest 
and purest ideals; 

or, 

19. —For this day I will think only in the glory of 
consciousness; 

or, 

20. —For this day I will on every occasion defend 
the honor of woman; 

or, 

21. —For this day I will openly discourage and disap¬ 
prove of every unclean, profane, or evil expression I meet 
with in conversation; 

or, 

22. —For this day I will disapprove of every filthy 
story that is told in my presence; 

or, 

23. —For this day I will frown upon every act of 
dissipation that comes under my observation, and dis¬ 
courage any disposition I meet with to partake of strong 
drink; 

or, 

24. —For this day I will openly disapprove of ex¬ 
travagance or waste; 

or, 

25. —For this day I will openly approve of every act 
of economy and frugality I meet with; 

or, 

26. —For this day I will openly disapprove all false¬ 
hood and sham I meet with, whether in word or action; 

or, 


242 


THE NEW IDEA. 


27. —For this day I will express only gentle and kind 
words, and loving smiles for my wife and children; 

or, 

28. —For this day I will speak only words of cheer 
and encouragement to the weak and disobedient; 

or, 

29. —For this day I will think continually to find some 
way to help the unfortunate; 

or, 

30. —For this day I will live to the honor and glory 
of man. 

In the foregoing thirty sample vows are to be found 
thirty “I will’s,” and not a single “I will not.” I will 
is on the rising scale of life. I will not is in the spirit of 
negation. A thousand other vows might be suggested, 
but the student will, from the above, be able to formulate 
his own. 

Immediately after the psychological exercise, and 
after a few moments silent contemplation, and Vefore 
the thoughts are turned to visible things, for the purpose 
of making the vow, the following expression of desire 
should be said mentally, slowly, and with much feeling, 
in the fact of an appeal to the higher self: 

Dear Angel-self—my higher life 
—my earthly guide, be ever near this 
day to teach me love. May my illusive 
vision rise from sense perception and 
behold Thee all the day. Thou art my 
purer form. May I catch the sweet 
harmonies of thy silent voice, and ren¬ 
der the obedient service to our mutual 
rise, in love and joy, and peace, into 
the higher glorious risen life where we 
shall dwell as one forevermore. 

The foregoing should, as in the former case, be thor¬ 
oughly committed to memory, so that it may be men¬ 
tally repeated, without an effort of recollection, and so 
that the whole force of thought may be in the expression. 
The student should remember that mentally speaking 
any number of words, implies ennunciation, the same as 
if uttered in oral speech. All words should be mentally 
spoken, in the sense of the vocally unspoken word. 

At the conclusion of the above short address to the 
angel-self, let the vow chosen for the occasion be mentally 
spoken, followed by a brief silence, in which the Spirit is 
invoked. 

There is but one other step and the student is ready 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


243 


to face the world. It is that of selecting a subject for 
contemplation during the day. One, upon self examina¬ 
tion will discover that he or she devotes most of the time 
every day to mental quid chewing—to thinking second 
hand thoughts, out of choice and out of volition. That sort 
of thinking is very injurious; it is in evil habit building; 
it is a source of weakness. Therefore a subject should be 
selected each morning for the day’s contemplation, so that 
whenever one discovers self thus “thinking about noth¬ 
ing,” the selected subject may be resorted to. 

From the following list of subjects, one may be se¬ 
lected, and others will be suggested: Love, Power, Truth, 
Life, Wisdom, Intelligence, Potentiality, Vesture, Ideas, 
Realities, Immortality, Brotherhood, Unfoldment, or any 
person, place oy fact of history, the study of which is 
wholesome. 

Thus prepared; thus filled with the spirit of life; thus 
elevated and thrilled; thus functioning to unfoldment, the 
student is equipped to face the busy, heartless world, and 
to put heart and feeling into his corner of it, whether it 
be large or small. He has made the proper start, and in 
the metaphor of scripture, he has taken God with him in 
the most functional sense. 

I will now engage the student’s attention with the 
evening exercise. 



EXERCISE XXXVI. 


EVENING WORK. 

Physical culture and psychological work—Exercise of 
transcendent beauty for the whole family—The songs 
and the home lecture—The expression of Desire—The 
Silence work—Inducing peace, rest and sleep. 


AS already stated, if the morning and evening psy¬ 
chological and silence exercises be thoroughly performed, 
there will be no trouble during the day or night. This 
does not apply to the very sick, of course, or to those suf¬ 
fering in mental and physical helplessness from some dis¬ 
ease. In those conditions patients not only need a phy¬ 
sician, but equalty do they require helpful thought sug¬ 
gestion, in silence, or by the spoken word, and in love 
and affection, from him or her trained in the higher 
thought science. 

But for those in average, or good health, the morning 
and evening work here formulated is a sure guarantee of 
rising health. It is much more than that. It is an unfail¬ 
ing protection against accident, or calamity, or afflicting 
eventuations. It may be a little difficult for the student 
to see just how that is a fact, but it is the truth. It is in 
the latter function that the science of thinking in methods 
of Principle achieves its most marvelous work for life. 
One can easily understand how it is that a life organi¬ 
zation. thrilled by thought emotions propagated by such 
methods of thinking as I am endeavoring to formulate, 
sickness or disease of any kind cannot find an entrance, or 
a lodgment, but, to say that such exercises will function 
to prevent accidents and such evils as are common to 
physical eventuations in every day life is, to the mind of 
the student, probably, less reasonable. 

All that can now be said on that head is that the 
methods of thinking here recommended, bring about a 
glorious embrace, in love and affection, between psy¬ 
chological consciousness, and sentient consciousness. 
Those two personalities, under such circumstances, go 
forth, hand in hand, and that which the higher self is 
able to communicate, the lower self is ready and anxious 
to receive and appropriate in obedience. Prom the last 
remark the student can see wherein the guardian angel 
functions when the lower will is properly receptive. 
Surely the plan of life is transcendently sublime. There 
is, as already stated, the higher psychological mass tone 

( 244 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


245 


consciousness and the will, which is the expression thereof, 
and there is the lower mass tone consciousness and the 
will, which is in expression of the latter, and when those 
two make one in desire, choice, motive, and action, there 
is that transcendent life unfoldment into the Invisible 
Risen Life which is free from sickness or afflictions of any 
kind. For such a life, so unfolding, eventuations of time 
and sense can have no function, except as ministrations 
for good. In such cases hurtful passions and destroying 
appetites sink, as the life rises above, and out of them, 
and man, strong in his rising and unfolding powers 
laughs at the potentialities that formerly afflicted him. 

Where is the poor, trembling, “God forsaken,” help¬ 
less, sinking, dispairing, abandoned drunkard? Let him 
come to this fountain and drink in satisfying and healing 
draughts, and thirst no more! There is life and health 
and happiness for him in these redeeming methods of 
thinking. 

Where are the hosts of victims of other vicious habits 
—the slaves of vice, men and women? Bid them come 
also to the fountain of this volume, which is one of the 
portals to liberty, health, and happiness, and in a study 
of its pages think themselves into the joy and gladness of 
unfolding degrees of wisdom and intelligence. 

Where are the multitudes who are thirsting for the 
new thought, the higher life, with its unfolding Omni¬ 
science—those who are famishing on the husks of obsolete 
ideas? Bid them to this feast at the infinite fountain 
of life, where they may bathe their waiting forms in the 
surging seas of wisdom and intelligence, and sooth their 
anxious longings in waves of thought emotions, which flow 
from psychological and spiritual realms. Bid them come 
with their own thoughts and ideals, and let us combine 
them in a mighty propagation to the higher simple life. 

But now let us take up our evening physical culture, 
psychological and silence work, in the true spirit of life 
unfoldment, and enjoy the feast. We naturally appeal 
to the home first, where the evening exercises can be car¬ 
ried out in the full glory of domestic life. But those 
who have not the advantages of home life, or the privacy 
of a room, each for self are requested to enter upon these 
evening studies as far as circumstances will permit. 

It is in the evening, and in the retiring hour, in which 
the home shines and glows in the real glory of human 
life, or may do so, when the parents and children, and 
sometimes the privileged visitor, join in the transcen¬ 
dent fellowship of kinship. Only kind words and loving 
smiles rule. For the time, all troubles, and besetting 




246 


THE NEW IDEA. 


business cares are laid aside. The school studies are over 
for the present. Domestic cares are conveniently forgot¬ 
ten, and the family—think of it—the Family, the grand¬ 
est of human institutions, enters upon its highest do¬ 
mestic functions. Joy and gladness reign. Games, 
and toys, comic songs and hearty laughter have been aban¬ 
doned, and now it is about time to retire for rest and 
sleep. There must be a half hour preparation for the 
night, so that rest and sleep will be grand, healthful 
and glorious. 

At the proper evening hour, when the family quit 
amusements, games, or other entertainments, it may be 
announced that “We will now prepare to retire.” Then 
the children, and any visitors who may be present, will 
group themselves about the heads of the household, and 
one of some years and experience will proceed to talk 
about the glories of life. Let the story be simple 
enough to be appropriated, at least in part, by the 
younger persons. 

A passage from this volume, followed by pointed 
explanations may prove interesting and profitable. 
Nothing should be submitted that is heavy or dull. By 
no means bring forward ideas of death, for there is no 
such fact any where. The glories of the birth into the 
next higher heaven, where there is no night, no sor¬ 
rows, no pains, no sickness, no separations, and no strifes, 
such as prevail in these lower spheres may be explained. 
Simple lessons in psychology can be made entertaining, 
such as the functions of desire, the ideals of choice, the 
purity of an exalted motive, and the powers of the 
human will. Elementary lessons in Brotherhood will 
appeal to the heart with profitable effect. 

Nothing should be said about error, nor evil, nor 
sin, nor the afflictions of any one. All should be im¬ 
pressed by the duty to see only that which is good, noble 
and grand, and they should be instructed to close their 
eyes and ears to everything which is wrong, or of evil, 
and to hold in thought only that which is pure and 
healthful. They should be told that to think concern¬ 
ing evil things is to tempt evil to enter their lives, and 
that continuous thinking in pure ideals protects them 
from all evil, all vice, all sickness, and all sorrow. 

Cheerfulness, mirthfulness and hearty, melodious, 
ringing laughter should be encouraged, and all ideas 
that men and women and children are naturally wicked 
should be denied and forgotten. On the other hand it 
should be taught and earnestly impressed in gladsome 
words, with zestful smiles, that men, women and chil- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


247 


dren are, by nature, grand and noble, and that by the 
nnfoldment of their lives in successively higher degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, which is wrought by their 
thinking in pure and happy ideals, they will rise in joy 
and gladness. 

Teach the glories and the triumphs of life, and im¬ 
press all that they are personal forms of imperishable 
life, each in the reality of the I am, each unlike any 
other, and each in the fact of the very highest gift of 
the Supreme Creator. Dwell on the glory of life. Paint 
it in the grandest picture in the universe. If evil or 
sin be enquired about, meet it with the truth that “evil 
be to him who evil thinks,’’ and explain that evils and 
afflictions can overtake only those of evil thoughts; that 
those who think of all whom they know in love and 
affection, and good will, whether they be friends or 
enemies, have the shelter and protection of the Almighty, 
and can suffer no harm. 

Impress the idea that good thoughts—that thinking 
about grand and noble things—unfolds one’s life into 
the good, the grand and the noble. Let it be clearly 
taught that thinking in pure ideals purifies and re¬ 
generates the heart and the whole life, and that the 
pure in heart can fear no evil, because they are under 
the protection of all that is good and powerful on the 
earth and in heaven; and that heart, or life purity casts 
out all fear. Let the absolute security of any life which 
is unfolding by thinking in pure ideals be proclaimed, 
and that persons so unfolding are far less liable to sick¬ 
ness, disease, accident or calamity. 

Teach the healthfulness which springs from a pure 
heart: and let it be declared that continuous thinking 
in high ideals, propagates perfect health physically, 
morally, mentally and spiritually. 

Teach and impress the health-giving power of 
cheerfulness and mirth, and give instruction for the 
cultivation of joy and gladness. Explain the power of 
an unselfish motive, and instruct in the glories of Uni¬ 
versal Brotherhood. 

That part of the evening thinking exercises, in 
which all in the home join, should always be of an un¬ 
folding character. Songs, expressive of kindred ties, or 
the beauties of fellowship should, by solos, and other¬ 
wise, be encouraged. The whole family may sing to¬ 
gether, at times, but solos and duets should have their 
places. It is far more unfolding when one, a child, or 
young person, or even an older person sing alone, or in 
the harmony of two parts, with one other. That has the 


248 


THE NEW IDEA. 


best effect upon the others also. Too much instrumental 
music for the evening exercises is inadvisable. If there 
be an accompaniment to the solo or duet, let it be soft 
and low, and let the voice have a clear field. Now and 
then get “mother” to sing one of her favorite pieces 
alone. It will have a charm all its own. 

When the singing has been finished, one of the 
family, not the same one in two consecutive evenings, 
unless necessary, should repeat very slowly, from mem¬ 
ory, in a low, soft tone, the following evening offering 
of desire and thanksgiving, w'hile all the others main¬ 
tain profound silence: 

Dear Father of Life, Our Risen Lord. 

In thee we securely dwell. Thou art our 
life and we are Thee. In Thee we live 
in health and peace and joy. Without 
Thee we can only suffer. In Thee we 
have all things of good. Help us by 
Thy spirit so that our lives may more 
rapidly unfold into Thy precious life, 
which is in the glory of love. We thank 
Thee that Thou art, and that we are 
in Thee. Reveal Thy dear face to our 
vision, so that, in its glory, we may be 
hold outlines of our own, and we shall 
praise Thee evermore. Grant that we 
may this night dwell in temples not 
made with hands, and sweetly rest 
and sleep in Thee. Thus we shall see 
a glad tomorrow. 

At the conclusion of the recital all will retire in si¬ 
lence to their respective sleeping apartments, and enter 
upon silence work. Having been seated, each one, by 
himself or herself will prepare for rest and sleep as 
follows: 

First, after the prectice of physical culture exer¬ 
cises as in the morning work, devote five minutes in the 
method of thinking to heart purity, as explained in an¬ 
other exercise, and enter into the spirit of the exercise 
until your whole life organization is thrilled with the 
purest emotions. Put your whole life into this work, 
and think of purity in holy desire, the grandest ideals 
of choice, in elevating motive, and in the full powers of 
the subjective will. 

After a moment’s meditation in which the lower self 
is raised into a glorious vision of the angel-self, enter 
upon a silent thought exercise in an effort to propagate 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


249 


a clear psychological view of the risen and rising mass 
tone life of Brotherhood in fellowship. Dwell on the 
vision until it becomes real. Bring to view the multitude 
innumerable of the heavenly hosts, with yourself as one 
of them, all in beautiful robes and glad, shining faces. 
Behold their fellowship in the Harmony of Love! Then, 
as far as possible, propagate the whole to one Master, all 
Harmonious forms of life, in a mass tone of glory. Dwell 
upon it in your highest ideals, and then say, mentally, 
“That is heaven for me.” Then, send forth to that glory 
life, psychological propulsions of thanksgiving and 
praise. Then realize that life is the source of power for 
you, and silently repeat. 

“I need Thee every hour, 

Most gracious Lord; 

No tender voice like thine 
Can peace afford. 

I need Thee every hour; 

Stay Thou near by; 

Temptations lose their pow’r 
When thou art nigh.” 

Then realize that all the power, and glory; all the 
health and happiness; all the peace and plenty, which 
are in the Risen Life are yours. That you have a right 
to appropriate those riches; that they are yours by the 
everlasting covenant of life—of Brotherhood. Thus real¬ 
ize the living wealth of your heavenly estate, and the pov¬ 
erty of all things of sense, enter into possession, with 
joy and gladness. Thus, by thinking to unfoldment, en¬ 
ter into the Invisible Life, and as far as possible function 
there to its appropriation. By thinking, propagate the 
scene to reality. That is unfoldment. Become the facts, 
and realize their use. Dwell in those thoughts for two 
or three minutes, and then realize that all those heavenly 
riches are already within you, and that by thinking in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, they will unfold into 
and become your own life, and that your unfolding 
life is a part of the real Kingdom of God. Rise to the 
sublime idea that, “I am”—that you are, in a glorious 
reality, one of those grand forms of life, and that in your 
own estate are many mansions: that you will no longer 
feed and starve on the illusions of sense, but will appro¬ 
priate the real, which is your own by inheritance, which 
is the fact of unfoldment; that all the riches of power 
and wealth which you require are within you, and that, 
dwelling in the Invisible Brotherhood you are rising to 


250 


THE NEW IDEA. 


become the things which you desire; that you are an heir 
to glorious immortality, which heirship is inherent in 
your life. Standing upon those thought foundations, the 
student is prepared to rest and sleep. But if after re¬ 
tiring conditions exist, such as physical, or mental nerv¬ 
ousness, or there are inflowing waves of evil, or afflict¬ 
ing thoughts, which will not easily subside, select a sub¬ 
ject from the plan of life—some one of the many thought- 
exercises in this volume—and think in its unfolding 
power until restful conditions are reached. But a few 
minutes will be required for the purpose. 

Never seek to deliver your life from any affliction, 
small or great, by fighting it, or by seeking to antidote it. 
Depend on the resources of Principle—on thinking to 
the unfoldment of life in degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence. Thus you will rise out of functional evil, and 
experience complete liberty. 

There is a large and intelligent class of people who 
dislike what is commonly called the “religious caste” of 
anything. They prefer that all the problems of life 
should be worked out by the science of mathematics, or 
on the chess board, or in some monistic plan of mechanics. 
They are opposed to so-called religious sentiment, and to 
every phase of emotionalism. Those people forget that 
they are not the whole of life; that the majority of the 
race have evolved an emotional side; that life is properly 
emotional, intellectual and sentient, and that the rise 
from the lower functions of sense perception is through 
the intellectual, and into the spiritual realms. Some per¬ 
sons display emotion only in the treatment of their pet 
animals. Possibly emotions are the best functions for 
self awakening. One thing may be depended on: emo¬ 
tional thinking is absolutely necessary to life unfoldment; 
it is indispensable to the propagation of pure ideals; it 
is the only fuel that can kindle the fires of desire, without 
which there can be no evolution. 

To unfold away from error, evil and affliction, the 
rise must of necessity be into high and pure ideals of the 
forms and functions of invisible life. Those ideals are 
inherently emotional. The forms of unseen life cannot 
be propagated to vision except by emotional thinking; 
nor can such forms become functional in the service of 
man save by an appeal to the emotions. At the last 
analysis emotions are resolved to a union of spiritual 
and sentient oscillations, by which the invisible form of 
life of man is propagated. Spiritual emotions are not 
always relished by an exceedingly robust physical condi¬ 
tion of health, but when that health fails, or falls a vie- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


251 


tim to disease, they must be appealed to for its restora¬ 
tion, or the man of medicine will ply his vocation in vain. 

Intellectual and emotional thinking should go hand 
in hand with each other, as also with sentient thinking. 
Neither one of these alone can make solid progress. All 
should work together. Thus functioning in obedience to 
the highest ideals, subjective life unfolds in Principle, 
and there are expansions of invisible consciousness in 
all its faculty centers. The unfoldment of life, in health 
and happiness, works an expansion of consciousness, 
which latter is in fact of the invisible form of life of 
man. 

However, there is a branch of emotionalism which 
may become functional to evil. I refer to so-called sen¬ 
tient emotions, which are not spiritual, and which cannot 
rise to function in spiritual realms. Those sensations 
often descend to sensuality, or to sensations or passions 
of the flesh. These latter, nevertheless, have their proper 
places in physical sub vesture life, and are expressive of 
sentient consciousness in the objective will. Those must 
be controlled by the subjective will, or senility will re¬ 
sult from their riotous living. 


EXERCISE XXXVII. 

DAILY THINKING. 

Everyday thinking—Involuntary thinking—Want of 
Thought control—Choosing thoughts—Thoughts rise 
from the Heart—Evil thoughts cannot survive in a 
pure heart—The key to health and happiness—The 
banner of heart purity—Heart regeneration by think¬ 
ing. 


OUR approaches to the more systematic study of 
experimental psychology must necessarily be somewhat 
gradual in order that we may resolve our thinking to 
practical use. Man is ever thinking in his daily rounds 
and avocations, whatever they may be, and if he take 
careful note of the activities of his interior parts, he will 
discover a current of thinking which rises in an unbidden 
flow, which he does not consciously originate, and which 
appears to be entirely apart from the immediate consid¬ 
erations in hand. In a word, his self-control is intermit¬ 
tent. For the greater part, he is unconsciously active, 
mentally, while, by short periods, which come to imper¬ 
ceptible terminations, he thinks consciously. 

Psychologists have given us more or less satisfactory 
definitions and explanations of these two currents of 
thinking which alternate, and sometimes reciprocate, and 
as often conflict with each other, resulting in what is 
called absent mindedness. The partly conscious flow of 
thoughts will often push aside the mental work in hand, 
and take complete possession, until, with a sudden shake 
of the head, and a return to volition, by the force of the 
will, the selected work is resumed. That is, no matter by 
what other name science may call it, evidence of a want 
of self-control. 

That condition reaches out to a demand for a great¬ 
er control of self and its many functions. How shall that 
desired end he accomplished? It is one of the most diffi¬ 
cult tasks confronting man in his present state. His fac¬ 
ulties are manyfold, and they are ceaselessly at work. A 
mighty current of thoughts come, from invisible sugges¬ 
tion. That is too plain to be denied for a moment. In 
the conditions named man appears to be oblivious to visi¬ 
ble and audible suggestion. It is therefore evident that he 
lives in the midst of an invisible world of force; that, on 
his every sense and psychological touch, millions of 
( 252 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


253 


thoughts swarm to fellowship in his organization; that 
many of them are in wisdom and intelligence, and many 
more, possibly a great majority, are in unnecessary error 
and evil. It may be that most of those thoughts rise 
from sentient activities, or that unbidden millions enter 
the life organization from invisible space, each item of 
which is in substance. 

Wthout proceeding to further analyze the situation 
under consideration, it is self-evident that man is re¬ 
quired to take those unbidden thought forces into ac¬ 
count, and to equip himself in such a way as to be able 
to choose his thoughts. There is but one way to accom¬ 
plish that. It is by propagating new thoughts— by pro¬ 
viding the thinking organism with all the work it can 
do from its own resources. It is not the idea that all 
thoughts which seek entrance to one’s life shall be ex¬ 
cluded, because thousands from visible and invis¬ 
ible spheres are sending thoughts to us for our good, as 
well as for injury. We should admit and welcome the 
good thoughts, and reject the evil, or injurious multi¬ 
tudes. 

How shall that be done? It is not so difficult after 
all. A pure heart will not admit evil thoughts. They 
will not enter there. They cannot live in a pure heart. 
Now, let it be understood that a thought, whether orig¬ 
inating in one’s heart, by birth, as a new creature, or 
whether coming into the life from an outside source, 
must first find a place in the heart, before it can reach 
the brain to function. Both classes of thoughts referred 
to are dependent upon the condition of the heart for 
their lease and function in the life organization. If 
the heart be pure, only pure thoughts will be propagated 
in its realm, and only pure and wholesome thoughts will 
be admitted there from the outside. If, on the other 
hand, the heart be impure, it will propagate impure 
thoughts, and millions of the same sort will enter it from 
space without. Let it again be emphasized that not a 
single one, nor a multitude of thoughts can reach the 
brain to function there for the weal or woe of man, ex¬ 
cept through the functions of the heart. That is a stan¬ 
dard in fact which one must always conform to. There 
is no deviation from that rule. It is in the plan of Prin¬ 
ciple. Again let it be impressed that if the heart be kept 
pure, all the thoughts which function in the life will be 
pure, and the whole life will be unfolded in purity. 

Have we not found in the foregoing psychological 
facts—facts which cannot be questioned in science nor 
in common sense, the only key— the real key —to health 



254 


THE NEW IDEA. 


and happiness ? Indeed we have. Man should think from 
dawn to darkness, and up to the closing of his eyes in 
sleep in methods calculated to purify the heart. It must 
be kept up every day, and every hour of every day, and 
during the whole life, here, and possibly hereafter. 

I raise the banner of heart purity as the cure for all 
our woes—as the never-failing healing balm. If one come 
to me and say he is down-hearted, mentally; weary, trou¬ 
bled of mind and spirit; a slave to some accursed appe¬ 
tite, or passion; a victim to any evil habit; cranky and 
man toward his wife and children, and every one else; 
given to falsehoods in words and actions; given to pro¬ 
fanity and wicked indulgences, and sick in body, mind 
and spirit; and ask me if I can prescribe a remedy for 
any one, or all of the above human afflictions, I will an¬ 
swer, yes! yes! a thousand times, yes ! I have a sure rem¬ 
edy, one as free as the air; one without money and with¬ 
out price; one which is as broad and deep and sure as 
eternity; one which any man or woman, or any child of 
average understanding can apply, freely, and without 
stint, without danger, and with the certainty of all the 
righteously desired results. What is it ? Practice in that 
method of thinking, which is quite fully described in a 
foregoing Exercise, for the purification of the heart. 
Practice with all thy might and main; all thy powers 
and all thy wisdom and intelligence, according to the 
plan given, and in the exact measure of the success of 
that work-in the exact degree of heart purity which one 
develops, he will, in that same degree, be healthy and 
happy. As one proceeds in that method of thinking, old 
things pass away and all things become new; old habits 
fall off like withering husks, and new ones unfold in the 
glory of health and righteousness. 

Every man and every woman in our world should 
practice in that method of thinking which unfolds into 
heart and life purity, at least in the early morning, 
and before retiring, and in all the leisure moments and 
hours of each day. One will not go far in that kind of 
thinking—in that method of thought unfoldment—before 
results will come thick and fast. There is no use in try¬ 
ing to climb up some other way. As long as the heart 
is impure there will be weakness, and sickness, and nerv¬ 
ousness, and sleeplessness, and pains and afflictions, and 
poverty and want, and disappointments, and heartaches, 
and wicked desires and ambitious, jealouisies envyings, 
fears and sorrows. On the other hand a pure heart is the 
fountain—the never failing fountain—of all the good 
things life can appropriate. From the heart, the whole 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


255 


kingdom of God flows, by unfoldment; and, do you not 
see, that in seeking that unfoldment in righteousness, you 
have the promise of all things. That is Christian doc¬ 
trine, and Christian science. 

Thus, one going forth from the morning silence ex¬ 
ercises into the busy world takes with him or her an 
adequate self-remedy, and self-protection from all afflic¬ 
tions, and from all evil habits. One has only to practice 
in heart purity from time to time, and, in some measure, 
all the time, during the day, and all will be well with 
his life. A man engaged in that method of thinking will 
have no appetite for intoxicants, no desire to feed his 
body on poison, in order to kill his sorrows, because he 
will have none to drown, and no desire for strong drink. 

He will not be a perpetual victim to unbidden evil 
thoughts, and will be free and happy all the day. Thus 
live in methods of thinking to the purification of the 
heart, day by day, until it is regenerated, over and over 
again, through and through, and made pure as the light of 
heaven. Remember there will never come a time until 
the roll call writes your name in the third heaven of 
life and glory, when you will not find something in the 
heart which should be transformed to something higher 
and purer. That work is never done—finished—while 
potentialities reign to unfoldment in degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence. 


EXERCISE XXXVIII. 


THE FOUR FOLD KEY. 

Forms of Life are Duads and Triads—Men and Women 
propagating themselves to New Men and Women— 
Keys to the secrets of thinking—Most simple but 
Wonderful Revelations of Truth. 


LET us now, for a few minutes, study man from the 
standpoint of his three-fold organism. We have thought 
of self as two-fold—as in the fact of duality. We must 
now bring self to vision as a triad. Man is a triad, 
by his celestial, his spiritual and his psychological sides. 
Those facts have already been referred to in connection 
with the subjects inplicating them, but something more 
definite is required in this place. 

It should be borne in thought that all which is 
here said of a man, or a woman, as to his or her triad 
organism, may with equal force and fact be said of a 
single cell, or a single thought, or any other life orga¬ 
nization small or large. It is true of the atom, of the 
molecule, of the cell, of a plant, of a planet, of man, of 
mentals, and of higher creatures. It is a fact which 
applies to all the forms of life, whether in the unit, or 
larger mass bodies, except only finally perfected forms. 

There is first, the celestial organism, which is the 
outmost; second the spiritual organism, which is in¬ 
most; and thirdly, there is the rising new life organiza¬ 
tion, which is higher than either of the other two. I 
call that latter the psychological organism. By all the 
rules of metaphysics, or the science of Principle, the spir¬ 
itual side of the triad is the cause of the cause, the celes¬ 
tial side is the cause, and the rising psychological side 
is the effect. The latter is in the fact of that which is 
created by the joint thinking of the other two. 

Hence it is that the supreme work—the one great 
purpose of the thinking of man—is the creation of the 
new man. It has already been made plain, that the third 
side of the man triad is in the fact of the rising new man. 
If, therefore, man is capable of propagating from his 
duality, a third person, so to speak, which is also dual, 
and which is higher than the form tone of his prior and 
subsequent self, and, if that higher form is the higher 
man, does it not become plain that the achievement is 
transcendentlv higher than any other work in which 
( 256 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


257 


he can engage? Should it not become the one great pur¬ 
pose, aim and object of, so-called, visible man? 

If that work be neglected will not the rising new 
man fail of normal development? Will not the real man 
lose ground, and fall behind, and become unhealthy? 
Will it not become supine, incipient, dwarfed, weak, and 
will it not suffer degrees of disorganization? Is it not 
in the health of the rising invisible form of life that one 
is creating, that we find the key to the health of the 
whole life organization, visible and invisible? Is the 
rising new man not the highest and most potential part 
of the whole life? When it falls behind, from neglect, 
will not the whole life suffer? If the psychological side 
of man is made to famish from neglect; to starve from 
want of pure, wholesome food; to languish for want of 
attention, how can it be otherwise than that all the other 
and lower functions will decline also? 

Can we not see that upon the health of the rising new 
man depends the health and happiness of the whole man, 
physically, mentally and morally? Is not this whole 
question resolved to the grand fact that man, in all his 
parts will be healthy, happy, prosperous, and in the midst 
of abounding plenty, so long as he attend to his supreme 
work of feeding, and developing, and unfolding his ris¬ 
ing new form of life? 

Now, dear student, herein is the key to health and 
happiness, peace and prosperity? Do not overlook it. 
Bring to clear vision the real cat in the picture! Man 
need not bother about his circumstances, nor his trou¬ 
bles, nor his ailments, nor anything else. He has only 
to proceed to replenish and refresh his rising new form, 
by thinking to its higher unfoldment, and all else will 
be well with his whole life, even to the utmost bounds of 
environment. It is sometimes said that one must control 
circumstances rather than be ruled by them. It is also 
a saying that one should make his own circumstances to 
suit his requirements. All that is more or less a mere 
play of phrases. The real facts are that when one’s life 
is in tune with evolution—with the processes of life un¬ 
foldment in the world about him, his circumstances will be 
in harmony with his desires. Man has but little to do 
with circumstances. When he becomes right his circum¬ 
stances will be all right. Man’s circumstances, and. in¬ 
deed, his whole environment unfold with self. He need 
give himself no trouble, whatever, about his circum¬ 
stances. Where there is right thinking in self, circum¬ 
stances will quickly change to conform to necessity. That 
may be depended on, first, last and always. 





258 


THE NEW IDEA. 


I desire that the student shall here see plainly that 
the new invisible and higher man is rising—being prop¬ 
agated—by the thinking of the man behind and below 
it. That is done by the reciprocal, or joint thinking of 
his spiritual and celestial sides, and that latter will be 
more fully explained later in this exercise. Now, while 
one is earnestly engaged in unfolding his life into the new 
form— engaged by thinking in the propagation of that 
form—he will enjoy health and prosperity to their full. 

I simply rest the whole case on that statement. It 
is in Truth. It is the key to all the grand things that 
life can inherit. There is no other. Man need not search 
for anj r other. It is supremely simple. It is not difficult 
of understanding. All one has to do is to enter upon the 
work of thinking to the unfoldment of his new form of 
life. All else that, can reasonably be desired will fol¬ 
low. So long as man will stand firm in volition, on the 
platform of “This one thing I do,” it will be well with 
his life. 

I cannot find language /Strong enough in which to 
express that transcendent /ruth. It is the only key to 
health; it is the highest and best and most effective 
method of thinking. If one begin to think to the un¬ 
foldment of his new form of life, even in the crudest man¬ 
ner, at first, he or she will soon experience an influx 
of poAver, wisdom, intelligence, peace, health, happiness; 
and circumstances will unfold with abounding plenty. 
I stand upon that declaration. The future of this 
Avhole system of thinking rests upon that founda¬ 
tion. Make the experiment in earnestness, in good 
faith, and with zeal, and if it fail, throw this volume to 
the winds, and denounce it. But it cannot fail. It is, 
like Principle, in Truth, and Truth will set you free. 

Does the student enquire: Suppose a man or a 
Avoman be sick, in failing health, in poverty, in Avant, 
Avithout friends able to give necessary assistance, can 
such a person turn to a method of thinking functional 
to the unfoldment of his or her new form of life, and 
receive health and plenty? The ansAver is, yes. That 
is all such unfortunate people need do. It is not the 
is all such unfortunate people need do. It is not the 
idea that God will do the rest, by working miracles. It 
is rather in the mighty functions of such thinking, Avhich 
is God’s plan. One AA r ho is folloAving out a systematic 
plan of thinking, conforming to the requirements of the 
morning and e\ r ening hours, and the plan for daily think¬ 
ing, to the unfoldment of the new form of life, will ex¬ 
perience a succession of happy surprises. Those will 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


259 


come day by daj% not in the manner, nor from the sources 
in which expectation may have functioned, but they will 
come in manifestations of returning, or rising health, and 
floods of prosperity. You are not required to believe, 
nor to expect. Just do the thinking as best you can, 
and stand upon that. 

But tell us how to think in the joint oscillations of 
the spiritual and celestial duality, so as to unfold the 
new man? That is very simple. It is all combined in 
half a dozen words: Think in volition, desire, choice and 
motive towards the thing desired. That has been ex¬ 
plained elsewhere. When one exercises those faculties, 
both the spiritual and the celestial are implicated. It 
cannot be otherwise. Desire alone, when functioning in 
a pure heart, always starts into activity, equally, the 
spiritual and the celestial sides of the life organization. 
Choice has the same function when its ideal standards 
are raised in noble resolutions of volition. Motive is 
the force which propels the processes of thinking to 
completion, and the result is always in its image. The 
things propagated by thinking cannot be higher than 
the motive in which choice fixes its ideals. That must 
be remembered. 

When one sits down to the work of formal thinking, 
and has selected a subject such as the unfoldment of 
one’s form to the higher form, the first thing to be done 
is to practice for two or three minutes in heart purity. 
That is very essential. Then there must be awakened a 
desire to rise.. That requires careful thinking, involving 
some degree of knowledge of self and the higher self as 
taught in the foregoing exercises. Next, in order, is 
the casting of ideals. One must unfold to his or her 
own ideals. Propagate the highest ideals, possible, of 
the higher form of life ,to which and into which you de¬ 
sire to unfold. Then resolve, in both desire and volition, 
to rise. At that point motive is involved. It rises si¬ 
lently, and in the voice of silence, whispers, What is 
the purpose? 

If the motive be selfish, that is, if it be in a desire 
to rise above others, so as to shine brighter and exercise 
higher powers than they, so as to possess an advantage 
over them in the procession of life; or, if it be to exer¬ 
cise power over others in order to reap material gain 
at their expense, there will be no propagation. But if 
the motive be attained to the spirit of Brotherhood, as 
taught in this volume, there will be process, and new 
thoughts will be born, by the oscillations of Principle, in 
a method of which your thinking will thus have become 


260 


THE NEW IDEA. 


active, and those new thoughts will flow into psycho¬ 
logical consciousness to expand and enrich its house 
holds, in a mighty flood of new-born life units. That is 
the method by which one thinks to the unfoldment of 
power, peace, health and prosperity. If the student has 
followed the foregoing closely, and in appropriation, he 
or she lias already practiced in the key method of think¬ 
ing. 

I respectfully urge the student to read the next two 
foregoing paragraphs again, and, yet again, and to ex¬ 
ercise patience and persistence in an effort to think as 
suggested therein. They are short and to the point. One 
should practice in them. Try it again and again. Apply 
the process to a variety of objects. Train self to exercise: 

VOLITION, 

DESIRE IN CHOICE, 
and in 
MOTIVE. 

One may devote half an hour each day in that prac¬ 
tice, for a considerable time, in order to come into pos¬ 
session, functionally, of the real key, by which self may 
think in the plan of Principle. One should not pass this 
exercise until its teachings are thoroughly mastered— 
completely appropriated. 

A person beginning to learn the piano will practice 
for days and even weeks, on the scale, without a murmur. 
Why? Because it is of no use to proceed with higher 
practice until the rudimentary lessons have been thor¬ 
oughly conquered. It is precisely the same with the 
higher practice of thinking. One must learn the scale. 
One must practice in the tones of volition, desire, choice 
and motive, until he or she manipulate them so that they 
will blend in the strength and beauty of Harmony. Prac¬ 
tice diligently on. that short scale, with its four tones. 
We shall have one, by and by, with a larger number of 
faculties to be fluxed into Harmony. One will make poor 
headway with that higher and more complicated scale, 
unless he or she become perfect in the first and more 
simple one. 

Choice cannot function, except in desire, therefore, 
we may properly speak of three faculties, to-wit: Voli¬ 
tion, choice and motive in exact correlation with the tones 
of C. E and G. From the three first all things of life 
proceed; from the last three all things of Harmony are 
evolved. 

My friends, these are the harmonics of evolution— 
the sweet songs of life unfoldment—which are transcend- 
ently beautiful, and wonderfully inspiring. Those shall 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


261 


be grandly elaborated in the printed lecture courses to 
which I so hopefully look forward. We must all take 
up the delightfully unfolding study and practice of har¬ 
monics, as soon as we have laid our foundations for meth¬ 
ods of thinking in the plan of Principle. 

Think of it! Are we not sadly behind, as a people, 
in systematic methods of thinking? Pupils in the higher 
grades of Grammar Schools, should, by simple examples, 
be taught and trained to think in volition, desire, choice 
and motive. When that is done, it will be found that 
they will make process with far less obstacles to be 
overcome than can vre, the children of an older growth, 
who have permitted' our thinking organisms to be run 
in a hap-hazard manner, for years, until they are un¬ 
strung and out of tune. We need to “tune up,” by prac¬ 
ticing in scientific methods. 

All that has been said in this volume up to this point 
has been said in vain if the student go forward from 
this particular exercise without the four-fold key, by 
which methods of thinking in the plan of Principle are 
revealed. In this connection is a small engraving of an 

In concluding this exercise, I urge the student to 
pause, and to go outside of this volume, if that be found 
necessary, in order to propagate to clear vision the 
mighty functions of the four faculty functions named. 
Then practice in their use. Become master of their use, 
and you have the key to all things of good in this life 
and all the life there is to come. 


EXERCISE XXXIX. 


THE NEW CHRISTIANITY. 

A revelation from Principle—Christianity resolved to 
self-life unfoldment into the new self, by which death 
is resolved to a resurrection of the new body—Sim¬ 
plicity of the plan of life. 


I FIND it necessary for the full training of students, 
in effective methods of thinking, even should some of 
them dislike it, to open to clear vision certain facts char¬ 
acteristic of Christ and Christianity. I face a serious dan¬ 
ger at this point. In the first place there is a class of 
thinkers who do not want to hear a thing about Christ or 
Christianity, or religion of any sort. On the other hand 
there is a most important class, who have, to a great ex¬ 
tent, permitted others to do their thinking for them, and 
who resent the slightest attempt to raise interpretations 
of New Testament symbolism to higher ground. I am 
striving with all my heart, and with all my powers of 
thinking, to handle this delicate subject without giving 
offense to either class referred to. If on both sides they 
will concede a little we shall get along all right. 

To the first class let me say that they do not object 
to hearing about the teachings of Buddha, Zoroaster, nor 
of the ancient seers generally. Then why should they 
draw the line against the doctrines of the Nlazarene? They 
answer, It is because such have been so greatly misrep¬ 
resented. To the devout Christian let me say that there 
is the evolution of Christianity. It may as well be ack¬ 
nowledged now as later. We, or our children must do 
so. Christianity was unborn as a functional force in 
human life two thousand years ago. Instead of its de¬ 
cline under the light of science, science is going to make 
it greater and grander than its most zealous devotees ever 
dreamed. 

Science is to raise the teachings, the life example 
and the so-called death example of Jesus to a summit 
of Truth ten thousand times higher than the very best 
brands of theology ever placed them; it is resolving 
Christianity to a system of thinking to life unfoldment, 
in the transcendent plan of Principle, which is ultimately 
to raise man. here on the earth, into Truth, and into the 
New Celestial Principle, by which he shall destroy death, 
and abolish the grave. 


(262) 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


263 


We are to bring to vision the mighty fact that in 
his eighteen years of thinking, in solitude and silence, 
thfe man Jesus, into whose life organization the knowl¬ 
edge of the ages had been gathered to the harvest, un¬ 
folded into Truth—became Truth—after which he un¬ 
folded the New Celestial Principle into his life; that is 
to say, he became the embodiment of it, and by so doing 
abolished death. In both of those mighty triumphs he 
set an example which all men may triumphantly follow. 
In other words, all men are to rise into Truth, and into 
the Celestial Principle, and perform all the works that 
Jesus* did, and even greater achievements than are re¬ 
corded of him. 

Christianity, in all its marvelous functions, exer¬ 
cised by the Master is for man. Those mighty functional 
powers were unfolded by man for man, and the coming 
man of the human race will rise even to higher and more 
wonderful powers. The unfolded potentialities of Jesus 
are pre-eminently in demonstration of the yet sleeping 
and yet undeveloped inherent powers of man, which, 
by following the example he so grandly gave to the 
world, will ultimately unfold in all men, by thinking in 
the plan of Principle. Such is the transcendent utility 
of Christianity. It is a Science —a method of thinking 
in the Principle of Brotherhood, by which man unfolds 
a celestial body from his visible one to the overthrow 
of that thing miscalled death, and to his rise in a res¬ 
urrection wrought by thinking, into the All Harmonious 
Body of Risen Mankind. 

From those' foundations the student will begin to see 
that Christianity is not a sentiment—not a system of emo¬ 
tionalism for women and children only, but a mighty 
fact, or series of facts of the universe, into which man¬ 
kind must unfold. It is in the plan of life, and mankind 
must face it, and reduce it to clear scientific vision. 
Without a full knowledge of it man will come very 
short of thinking in methods of Principle to his rise in 
health and prosperity. 

The elaboration of the method of thinking, which 
I call the unfoldment of the Celestial Principle works a 
still further extension of the plan of life, and brings to 
vision wonderful facts of the universe which had no 
functional existence two thousand years ago. It is noted 
than all rise and expansion of the forms of life are re¬ 
solved to the unfoldment of Principle, and that as prin¬ 
ciple unfolds, it divides its nature into a series of func¬ 
tional powers corresponding to a plan which is all po¬ 
tentially in its Primordial Form. A classification of un- 


264 


THE NEW IDEA. 


folding Principles which have come, and are now coming 
forth from the Primordial Fountain may be made as 
follows: 

1— Primordial Principle. 

2— The Two Principles, Power and Love, called, also, 
male and female. 

3— Truth. 

4— The Celestial Principle. 

5— Harmony, or Brotherhood. 

6— Omniscience. 

It will not be overlooked that the above classification 
represents the six methods of propagation known to the 
evolution of life. The evolution of life is, at the last 
analysis, the unfoldment of Principle, in a way, into 
many Principles, but the foregoing are the six great fun¬ 
damentals. I have called the Fourth the Celestial Prin¬ 
ciple. Of that the student has probably heard but very 
little. It is new. Not only is it new in thought in our 
times, but as to its life unfoldment also. We know, in 
a general way, of all the others named, but as to the 
Celestial Principle, what is that? 

It was born into life—a unit form of life—as the 
substare of the celestial units. By its birth the universe 
was enlarged by the fact of celestial forms of life. At 
the beginning, spiritual Power, Love and Truth were 
chemically combined in the metamorphosis of the first 
primal unit form of life. Immediately subsequent to 
that beginning, Celestial Power, Love and Truth where 
chemically combined in the metamorphosis of the sec¬ 
ond primal unit form of life. That was the birth of the 
Celestial Principle. 

Do you ask for an explanation of the difference be¬ 
tween spiritual and celestial? If so, I reply that it is in 
the fact of a wider separation of Power and Love than is 
provided for in Truth. In Spiritual Truth, Power and 
Love are one distinctly. That is in the fact of Intelli¬ 
gence. In celestial Truth, Power and Love are also 
one distinctly. That is in the fact of Wisdom. Now, 
when we say that spiritual and celestial Power, Love and 
Truth, are respectively, in the facts of Intelligence and 
Wisdom we bring to vision one of the most important 
of biological phenomena. It is seen from that saying 
that the first-born of spiritual Power and Love, which 
is a form of life in Truth, and, that the first-born of 
celestial Power and Love which is also a form of life in 
Truth, are both in Truth, potentially only, with the whole 
work of unfoldment before them at the time of their 
birth. Both units were born in potentiality, and not in 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


265 


perfection. That is an important fact. Hence, Power, 
Love and Truth are not behind man, in the full glory 
of perfection, but ahead of man. We are unfolding to¬ 
wards those mighty facts to become them. 

Now, if I can succeed in bringing to vision in what 
way spiritual intelligence and celestial wisdom are the 
tone potentialities for the unfoldment of both classes of 
Power, Love and Truth named, respectively, I shall tri¬ 
umph indeed. I have said that Power, Love and Truth, 
both spiritually and celestially, exist in unit forms of 
life—in the facts of discrete degrees of life. Hold that 
in steady vision. As such they are the substare units of 
life, in three tones each. By the oscillations of Principle 
(the Two Principles) in each such substare, tone radia¬ 
tion is begotten, in the continuous degrees of intelligence 
as to the spiritual units, and in continuous degrees of 
wisdom as to the celestial units. From that it may pos¬ 
sibly be seen wherein the tone degrees of the substare 
units are in the facts of primal degrees of Wisdom and 
intelligence, unfolding towards Truth. It can be seen, 
that those tones are the beginning of environment, and 
that environment is, in degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence always. Such are the wonderful biological foun¬ 
dations of the plan of life. 

It may astonish the student to state that, in the fore¬ 
going, and in that which is to immediately follow, I 
am laying the everlasting foundations of Christianity, 
such as were taught and lived by Jesus. Hence there 
should be careful study in this exercise in order to see 
the real facts. 

Now, returning to the question of the difference be¬ 
tween the spiritual and the celestial, let it be said for 
the present, that the first is the positive, the last, the 
negative, in a wide sweep of oscillation by which the 
plan of Principle is unfolded. We have seen that the 

1— Principle of Power, 

2— Principle of Love, 

3— Principle of Truth,.. 

were born in potentiality at the dawn of life, and that 
their final unfoldment is ahead of us, and that when so 
unfolded we will have become those Principles by sub¬ 
stance. It is precisely the same with the Celestial Prin¬ 
ciple. 

The Principle of Celestial life is in the fact of an 
outer triad tone garment, or three-fold vesture to the 
spiritual form within. It was propagated in the fact 
of tones—in the potentialities, or continuous degrees, of 
wisdom. The unfoldment of the Principle, jointly with 


266 


THE NEW IDEA. 


the spiritual side, is in the propagation of a celestial body 
of life—a living, thinking, feeling conscious body, which 
will make one, with and become an integral part of the 
whole life, so that it will reach a transcendent state where¬ 
in it will be shed no more. 

How is that accomplished? By tone propagation 
of degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which flux to¬ 
gether in the form of life. In that process wisdom and 
intelligence make one in finally unfolded Truth, which 
is to say, that the discrete and continuous degrees of 
life are resolved to one fact in the new form. That has 
been taught from the start, but possibly has not been 
very fully understood. It is in the fact that the duality 
of life finally becomes one distinctly in Harmony, in 
which the body and all of its interiors are one and in¬ 
divisible. That is accomplished by the joint propagation 
of the spiritual and celestial Principles, which are the 
male and female, unfolded to the higher status of po¬ 
tential Power and Love, as in humans. 

The peculiarities of the life of Jesus consist in two 
great distinguishing facts. In the first place he, by 
thinking in the plan of Principle, unfolded into Truth— 
became Truth; then he unfolded the Celestial Principle 
by which he propagated his new form while in flesh and 
blood, and thereby overcame death. In other words, by 
thinking, he transformed the spiritual and the celestial 
into one risen form of life, and in that way gave effect 
to the Celestial Principle which came forth, potentially, 
in the morning of life, but which had been but slightly 
unfolded until caught up and developed in the life of the 
Master. 

Now, the whole mighty foundation and transcendent 
superstructure of Christianity were all unfolded by Jesus 
into his life, during the eighteen years of his thinking 
in the plan of Principle in solitude and in silence. It 
was revealed to him that by thinking in the joint oscilla¬ 
tions of his highly potential duality he could unfold his 
life into Truth, and so far externalize the Celestial Prin¬ 
ciple as to propagate the resurrection of his visible body 
into an invisible form. By those wonderful achieve¬ 
ments he brought life and immortality to light. 

Those are the foundations and the underlying prin¬ 
ciples of Christianity. It is seen, therefore, that this 
volume is pre-eminently in elaboration of the New Chris¬ 
tianity. It is all embraced in methods of thinking for 
self-life unfoldment into Truth, and into those functions 
of the Celestial Principle, by which death, so-called, is 
abolished, and man rises, through the first resurrection 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


267 


into the New Invisible Form; and in the further methods 
of thinking by which Omniscience and the Harmony of 
Brotherhood are unfolded. The Master partly developed 
those latter Principles, while in the human state, and then 
rose to invisible spheres to complete that great work. 

In the foregoing paragraphs the student has the full 
and transcendent import of Christianity. It consists in 
self-life unfoldment, by thinking in methods of Principle, 
into that immortality which was, potentially, in the plan 
of life since the birth of Primordial Principle. It will be 
seen that Brotherhood is the final triumph of Christianity. 
Complete All Harmonious Brotherhood, and Omniscience 
unfold together. They are as twin Principles. Om¬ 
niscience can function only in perfect Harmony, which 
is the final goal of creation, and that is the Supreme Man. 

There is a sense in which Christianity should be 
thought of as the New Idea of life. It reveals the mighty 
plan of life, and the transcendent powers of mankind. 
It is in the simplicity of self-life unfoldment. It is all 
in methods of propagation by thinking. It is essentially 
inherent in the life of man. It is all within the powers 
of man. It is Principle unfolding in man. 

Nor, does this method of thinking in Christian teach¬ 
ings take one ray of glory from the grandeur of the doc¬ 
trines symbolized in the New Testament. Rather does it 
add life and vitality, and practicability to all that, as we 
shall see. 


EXERCISE XL. 


ORGANIZED INVISIBLE BROTHERHOOD. 

The Individual All—Risen mankind one form of life— 
The second resurrection—The plan of life still further 
extended—Nature of the Constituents of the Risen 
mass tone Form of Life—The so-called “Second Com¬ 
ing.” 


THE student will not be disappointed to learn that 
the study of Brotherhood, especially the organization of 
its transcendent Universal Mass Tone Body, in the higher 
invisible heavens, is the natural subject of this exercise 
as growing out of the previous one. We say that Chris¬ 
tianity, as simplified in the previous exercise, is new, not 
only as to its teachings, but as to its unfoldment into life 
—that it is only'about two thousand years of age. We 
say that it did not exist, except in the potentialities 
of the forms of life previous to that time. We now de¬ 
clare that its higher fruits are only just beginning to be 
realized in heaven and on earth. 

We also say that the Christian principles of life had 
been but slightly unfolded previous to the life, and sym¬ 
bolic death of Jesus; that they take their rise, as to un¬ 
foldment, in his life; that he was the “first fruits of them 
that slept.” Now we must explain that saying and there¬ 
by greatly extend the plan of life beyond anything which 
has been previously said. 

Previous to the conquest of so-called death, by the 
Master, those who had passed into invisible spheres from 
these human tones of life “slept,” awaited the external- 
ization—the unfoldment—in life of the Celestial Prin¬ 
ciple, and the resurrection of Jesus, so that by his post 
ascension functions, they might enter into the fellowship 
of the Risen Universal Brotherhood. That latter achieve¬ 
ment implicates the organization of the Mass-Form Risen 
Life, with the Master as its soul and head; the evolution 
of primal dual individuality, by which the man and the 
woman are joined in everlasting wedlock in invisible 
spheres, and their transformation into the All Harmo¬ 
nious Mass-tone form of life of Universal Brotherhood, 
symbolized in sacred scripture as The Lord. The latter 
is in the fact of the second resurrection, which is achieved 
in spheres invisible to man. 

The foregoing is all without elaboration. That will 

( 268 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


269 


be left for the printed lecture courses which are to fol¬ 
low this volume. It will require more space than has 
been occupied by all the preceding exercises to give full 
force to, and completely bring to vision the wonderful 
plan of Principle in that department of Christianity, 
which, however, is not in any functional part of life in 
the present human state. 

It is true that a study in methods of thinking to the 
tune of Principle, if at all effective reveals to the unmis¬ 
takable vision of the student the nature of the transcend¬ 
ent mass-tone life organization of the Invisible Risen 
Brotherhood of mankind. Some will find it a little dif¬ 
ficult to think of the great and All Harmonious risen life 
of mankind as in the form of the Individual All, or, that 
Universe mass-tone form of life, which is the sum total 
product of the resurrection, and into which all other 
forms of life are rising. 

Our thoughts and affections do not readily respond 
to the idea, that risen mankind is in the fact of an un¬ 
speakable Individual, composed of men and women, who 
have in pairs, united into dual individuality. We forget 
that all the forms of organized life above the ultimate 
microcosm are composed of unit individual and personal 
forms, and of intermediate degrees of organism of such 
units. That rule applies to all forms of animal, and of 
human life, and to the risen invisible mass-tone form. 
The evolution of the forms of life is into one sum total all 
harmonious form properly called Harmony, or Universal 
Brotherhood. 

Now, there is one rule of science which pervades the 
whole orbit of life. It is that a life unit—even a primal 
life unit—is an epitome of the mass-tone form of life 
of which it becomes a constituent. Hence we say, speak¬ 
ing from the standpoint of physics only, that an atom, a 
molecule, and a corpuscle, are in primary, secondary, and 
tertiary, degrees of unit organism, and that each is an 
epitome of our world, as already explained. By the same 
rule of science, we say that the cell is an epitome of a 
man. 

Where shall we find that life organism which, in 
like manner, is an epitome of the risen mass-tone Invis¬ 
ible Brotherhood of all the forms of life. Can we find 
the primal constituent, so to speak, of the risen mass- 
tone life? If so, it will unlock for us much of the nature 
of that glorious form of existence, and enable us to study, 
actually and really, the nature of the Risen Life. 

The student will scarcety be shocked at the boldness 
of this proposition, which is here reverently promulgated 


270 


THE NEW IDEA. 


under the steady light of the fact that Truth is dearer to 
the heart of God than anything else. Yes, dear student, 
we can find, and study, by analysis, and by unfoldment, 
the true, the real, and the living organized constituents 
of the Risen mass-tone Life. We can behold and study 
thousands of them, and we can come to see— to psycho¬ 
logically behold—them, and to study their organisms, so 
as to come into a clear vision of the nature, organisms, 
and functions of the risen mass-tone Invisible Brother¬ 
hood of Mankind. It is that study for which I have been, 
so far, endeavoring to prepare the student. 

The constituent organism of invisible risen mass- 
tone Brotherhood, is simply and grandly the psycholog¬ 
ical organization of man, commonly and properly called 
Consciousness, and in the actuality of the Invisible Form 
of life of man—the real man. We have had much to say 
concerning the invisible life organization of man, and, 
also, as to the manner of its propagation by thinking, 
from visible man. That invisible form is the psycho¬ 
logical organization of a man, or a woman, which, of 
course, is the real man, or woman, although invisible. 
Hence it is that the study of the science of psychology, 
experimentally, is at once resolved to two of the grandest 
facts in all the range of life unfoldment, to-wit: (1) a 
study of the risen mass-tone life of mankind, and (2) 
the more rapid unfoldment of the student into the glories 
of that life. 

A study of psychology, which stops short of a knowl¬ 
edge, by unfoldment, of invisible risen life is the very 
essence of poverty. It is barren and worthless. How 
can one study psychology, experimentally, so as to bring 
into stronger, clearer vision the facts of self-life, and to 
unfold self into higher powers? By thinking in methods 
of Principle, of course. There is no other way. By thus 
thinking the psychological faculty groups of conscious¬ 
ness unfold into higher functions, and visions of Truth 
are extended; a greater breadth of variety is appropriated 
in the life organization and propagated to consciousness. 
That latter process is in the fact of unfoldment, by de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence, towards Truth—to¬ 
wards the real. 

The study of psychology, experimentally, unfolds the 
thinker into the invisible risen mass-tone life, and en¬ 
ables the student to appropriate its riches of life sub¬ 
stance, from which the health and happiness of tfhe 
thinker abounds. All things of Power, Love, Truth, real 
success, prosperity, health, happiness, peace and plenty, 
come of life unfoldment by those methods of thinking. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


271 


One is not required to struggle for particular items of 
prosperity, or happiness. When life unfoldment is in 
progress those are added. In the measure of the unfold¬ 
ment of the concrete life organization, environment cor¬ 
respondingly unfolds. That follows, or is simultaneous. 
Hence every item of advance in the appropriation of 
knowledge is an item of prosperity. As the life is un¬ 
folding into higher visions of Truth, there is renewal of 
substance and consequent health. 

By the rule of science that the smallest organic con¬ 
stituent of any life organization in mass-tone is an epi¬ 
tome of the whole we come to see that the human sub¬ 
jective consciousness, which is the invisible life orga¬ 
nization of man is a type—in an image—of the wonder- 
full mass-tone form of invisible Brotherhood. To know 
one is to know both. That observation raises the science 
of psychology, to its proper level. It raises the science 
of thinking, in the methods of Principle, to its proper 
elevation, and that is the same. It is true that, in the 
broader sense, the whole system of thinking of man, 
when brought under the control of a purified desire, a 
noble choice, an elevating motive, and those expressions 
of volition which make one with the Supreme Will, is that 
process of propagation which unfolds man, by his invis¬ 
ible organization, into the realities of the mass-tone risen 
life. It is seen, therefore, that when human life becomes 
normal; that when it adjusts itself to the plan of Prin¬ 
ciple, it becomes, practically, a Christian life. Again, I 
say, the science of Christianity is resolved to life unfold¬ 
ment by thinking in tune with Principle. 

If the untrained thinking processes of the reader 
finds it difficult to resolve the sum total invisible risen 
mass-tone life to the status of an individual, it is only 
necessary to bring to vision the nature of the psycho¬ 
logical organization of man. That is in a personal form. 
When two of those—that of a man and that of a woman 
—are fluxed into the glory of dual individuality in the 
perfect embrace of Love, a transcendent form of Indi¬ 
viduality, primal in its status in the first full tone heaven 
of ether, is the unutterable achievement. 

As with the invisible unit, so with the whole risen 
mass body. The faculties of Consciousness are in kin¬ 
dred groups, or households, and the whole organism is 
one distinctly by the bond of fellowship, and Brother¬ 
hood. It is in this particular study that the bonds, or 
ties, of relativity and interdependence come clearly into 
vision. The psychological organization of man—his in¬ 
visible life—is a wonderful illustration of rising mass- 


272 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tone Harmony. Principle appears in full function when 
it is seen that the smallest faculty or function can func¬ 
tion in the whole. The whole Kingdom of God, so to 
speak, may be appropriated to its fullest measure, by 
its smallest and weakest constituent. That is the tran¬ 
scendent fact of Brotherhood, founded on the relativity 
and interdependence of the infinite variety of unit forms 
©f life, from which all mass forms in Harmony—Truth— 
are propagated by thinking. That is the science of life— 
of Brotherhood—wherein the strong are appropriated by 
the weak, and independence is resolved to the interde¬ 
pendence of each constituent member. Nlot a single item 
of a mass-form of life in Harmony can be dispensed with. 
Take the smallest fraction of the mass-tone away and the 
whole is destroyed. Such is the sweep of the interdepen¬ 
dence of the forms of life. 

It may be that I have not sufficiently elaborated the 
foundations of interdependence in the earlier portions of 
this volume. Interdependence takes its rise in unity- 
in esse. It also comes of the natures of the primal and 
secondary life units. Those sparks of life all come from 
the fountain of one distinctly. Consequently their na¬ 
tures are to reunite in mass-tone, and it is in the plan of 
Principle that such reunion is accomplished in succes¬ 
sively rising degrees of organization by propagation. 

It is not thinkable that a single spark of unity thus 
propagated from the Absolute, into infinite variety could 
be lost. Each unit is necessary to resulting perfect Har¬ 
mony. That is self-evident. Hence there is the interde¬ 
pendence of all unit and organized forms of life. That 
obtains in every process on the whole orbit of creation. 
It is, as already repeatedly stated, the foundation of 
Brotherhood. When the Great Teacher promulgated the 
New Commandment it was not born of sentiment. Its 
foundation was in the infinite plan of life, as we have, 
from the studies of this volume been quite able to see. 
Brotherhood is the heart and soul of Christian Science. 
It is unfolded from Principle. Man cannot live unto 
himself alone. He must live unto the neighbor, or suffer. 
Brotherhood is the redeeming fact of unfoldment. It 
redeems man from all affliction. Hence the World’s Great 
Redeemer is in the Harmony of Brotherhood. That is 
the nuxus of Christianity. That is the nature of that 
Universal mass-tone risen All Harmonious form of life, 
which, by common consent is called The Lord. 

I have a vision concerning that Infinite Mass-tone 
Life—the risen Brotherhood—with which I venture to 
conclude this thinking exercise. It may be gathered from 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


273 


history that the rise of man is marked by eras or epochs, 
which are in periods of about two thousand years each. 
Their inauguration is marked by a series of events, one of 
which is central to all the others. It is not necessary, 
for the purposes of this explanation, to go back further 
than the life of Buddha, who, forsaking Princehood, and 
the honors of earthly royalty, devoted himself to desert 
solitude, thinking to the unfoldment of his life for a 
period of seven years. At the end of his great work in 
secret, he came forth as a teacher. No one acquainted 
with his teachings, will deny that the Oriental Protest¬ 
antism which he promulgated was in the fact of a sub¬ 
stantial measure of Brotherhood. He protested against 
the doctrine of the evolution of man, by castes, and taught 
what all men were equal, in that, by the requisite observ¬ 
ances, they could rise to the bosom of the Nirvana from 
any one of the castes, independent of the others. That 
he could so teach, even in parables, in the very heart of 
Brahmanism, without suffering crucifixion at its hands 
will for all time stand as one of the marvels of Oriental 
history. 

Without going into an account of the stirring events 
which followed his departure from these lower physical 
spheres, by which his teachings were preserved, even until 
our day, with a multitude of adherents comprising a 
large portion of the race, it may be said that his life 
marks the beginning of a new era in the history of 
mankind. About two thousand years later, the Man of 
Nazareth appeared as a Teacher of Men, and formulated 
higher ideals of Brotherhood. The burden of his iso¬ 
lated cry was, * ‘ Love thy neighbor as thyself, ’ ’ and he ac¬ 
centuated the new command by offering his life, so to 
speak, for his fellow men. That was also the beginning 
of a new era. 

A period of about two thousand years has since 
elapsed. We may, therefore, look for some manifestation 
of life unfoldment, out of the usual order, probably dur¬ 
ing the present century. The human mind, so to speak, 
naturally turns to “the Second Coming.” I shall not 
in this place indulge any speculations as to the several 
“comings” of an appointed Teacher of men. There is 
ground for such events, including and prior to, the earth¬ 
ly life of the Man Jesus, but after long and diligent think¬ 
ing, my vision of things to come, as revealed by Faith, 
has undergone a transformation touching this particular 
matter. I have come to see that our next great event, out 
of the ordinary current of evolution—the next “coming” 
will be in the glory of a transcendent manifestation to 




274 


THE NEW IDEA. 


men of the Invisible Risen Brotherhood. That will prob¬ 
ably not take place in a Personal Visitation from higher 
realms of life, but rather in the opening 1 of a higheway of 
communication between mankind and the Invisible Broth¬ 
erhood. 

In making the foregoing statement, I do so with the 
full understanding that, since the bodily ascension of 
Jesus, who is the organizer of the risen invisible mass- 
tone form of life, there have been spiritual communions 
between visible and invisible forms of life. But should 
an era of life unfoldment be inaugurated by some re¬ 
markable event which will bring visible and risen man in 
closer touch, by which mankind, here on the earth, will 
be able to appropriate, to its greater power, peace and 
plenty, the functions of risen invisible life, it will be 
quite easy to find foundations for it in the plan of Prin¬ 
ciple. 

It is idle to divine as to the particular manner, or 
eventuation by which such a consummation may take 
place, but I am fully persuaded that the result of the 
next overshadowing manifestation of the higher life to 
man will tvork out a closer connection, and a more defin¬ 
ite plan of communication between the two. Man is rising 
here on the earth—rising in the flesh—as well as by prop¬ 
agation, to invisible spheres, and the result of that rise 
must, in the science of unfoldment, diminish the distance, 
so to speak, between visible and invisible worlds. Even 
now, “but thinly the veil intervenes between that fair 
city and (you) me.” Man will not always be blindfolded, 
and dumb to the activities of those who have left his 
ranks to join the invisible hosts. His vision is extending 
in a clearer light, and very soon he will come to behold 
the risen forms of life, and to mingle with them in such 
a way as to appropriate higher powers, and more unfold¬ 
ing degrees of Truth. 

I desire in this connection to make another applica¬ 
tion of the period, or era of two thousand years. I haye 
already said that the present things are symbolic of the 
higher facts. It has been about two thousand years, or 
nearly, since the Invisible Brotherhood of risen mankind 
was organized. That has already been explained. That 
smaller cycle appears to mark a certain degree of mass 
tone unfoldment, not only in visible life, but in invisible 
spheres also. To use a very simple phrase, the age of the 
Invisible Life Organization of Risen Brotherhood is near¬ 
ing a stage of unfoldment when its functions are ready 
for a more advanced stage of the work of “redemption” 
than has hitherto been manifested. Do not overlook the 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


275 


significance of the term “Rising Lord,” frequently used 
in this volume. 

It must be remembered that life had an actual—a 
real—beginning; that during the first vast period of crea¬ 
tion, the worlds and heavens were formed; that during 
the second man was unfolded from cellular embryos; 
that during the third the Invisible Brotherhood was or¬ 
ganized ; and, that during the fourth, which is now dawn¬ 
ing, man will witness to his greater unfoldment, wonder¬ 
ful functions of that Invisible Form of Life. The student 
is reminded that, although the periods of time, so to speak, 
since the birth of life, are incomprehensibly long, life is 
still in the early morning of its unfoldment; that man, 
and even risen man, are yet in swaddling clothes, com¬ 
paratively. This is but the morning hour of creation. The 
noon tide—the zenith which knows no descending sun— 
is far ahead. It is within the power of man to bring it 
near by. 

I desire to call attention to how it is that upon the 
life of visible man depends the eventuations of invisible 
spheres on his behalf. The old saying of the Baptist, 
“Prepare ye the way of the Lord,” is more applicable 
to man today than it was in the time of “One crying in 
the wilderness.” Jesus came and departed, bodily, but 
still there is one crying in the wilderness. The question 
today is, “Prepare ye the way of the Lord.” The time 
is ripe, but man is not ready. The glorious vision of the 
Risen mass tone Life is within easy sighting distance, but 
man will not strive to behold its transcendent beauties. 
He is slothful in the work of unfolding his life, by think¬ 
ing, to the riches of a higher life. 


EXERCISE XLI. 


SKELETON OF THIS SYSTEM. 

Results of the author’s Thinking—The wonderful plan of 
Life—Methods of rising in power, health, prosperity 
and happiness. 


THE student is invited to return very briefly, at this 
point, to a consideration of the creative powers of think¬ 
ing. I call the results of thinking in the plan of life, the 
unfoldment of Principle in the life of the thinker. I say 
that in the resources of Principle are to be found all that 
can enrich and glorify life. The whole of life is in Prin¬ 
ciple; all its possibilities are potentially there. To think 
in methods of Principle is to appropriate those riches, and 
to unfold into knowledge. I now venture to submit my 
own thinking, and its results, in proof, to some extent, of 
the last part of that statement. 

I have, by the exercise of self powers in thinking, 
unfolded a system, in certain degrees of wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence, for the rise of man, which no scientific authority 
in the world can overthrow, and no such authority will 
desire so to do. It is new. It differs widely from any 
other plan hitherto apprehended. It is, from Alpha to 
Omega, a new discovery.. It is manifestly in Truth. It 
is the new-born child of science. It is yet in swaddling 
clothes, but it will soon be dressed in the highest art. 
There can be no doubt about that. The new ideas pre¬ 
sented must engage the attention of those far more able 
to think than I am, and, also, of those who can express 
their thoughts in a much more artistic effect. The result 
of that will be a grand elaboration of the new discoveries 
contained in this volume. 

The reason that all these discoveries have not been 
made long ago, by men better qualified than I am to make 
them, is simply because they did not indulge in the expe¬ 
riment of testing their own creative powers of thinking. 
Let us now arrange, in the most simple plan, and in the 
baldness of a skeleton, the outlines of this new system, 
without a word of explanation or elaboration of any kind. 
It follows: 

1. —The God of Being is Ideal to humans, because 
incomprehensible to them, in their present state. That 
God is prior to life. 

2. —Principle is the first born of esse, and is, there- 

( 276 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


177 


fore, subsequent to Being. It is the link which connects 
esse with existere, and is, therefore, in the fact of cause. 

3. —Principle is the fountain of propagation, and 
therefore a form builder. All life is propagated from 
Principle. 

4. —By primordial thinking, Principle divided into 
Two Principles, commonly called the male and the female, 
but really, Power and Love. 

5. —The Two Principles united their forms of life 
in propagation, and the first triad unit form of life was 
born in the fact of potential Truth, and in the actuality 
of a single thought. 

6. —That first-born is the substare of Principle in all 
unit forms of life. It is in continuous oscillation, or prop¬ 
agation, or processes of thinking. 

7. —By those oscillations, which are in the fact of 
tones, vestures were propagated, by which the substare 
became further organized. 

8. —The substare is in a three-fold tone organism, 
comprising the fundamental tones of C, E and G, which 
are the rates of oscillation of the sparks of Power, Love 
and Truth. 

9. —A tone is in the fact of the rate of oscillation of 
the Two Principles within any unit of life. 

10. —A tone is, therefore, in the fact of polar energy, 
and is the instrumentality of propagation. 

11. —A tone is also in the fact of the continuous de¬ 
grees of any discrete degree, or unit form, or thought, 
of life. 

12. —A tone propagates a vesture commonly called a 
tone color, which tone color, from the standpoint of life 
units, is the beginning of environment. 

13. —A single thought, or discrete degree of life is 
in a certain form. 

14. —All life is propagated from Principle in unit 
forms, or single thoughts. 

15. —Life exists only by its units. 

16. —Each unit of life is a single thought, and there 
is not anything in our universe but single thoughts, or 
organizations of thoughts. 

17. —No two thoughts, or units of life are just alike. 
They all differ from each other in form tones or quality, 
or, as to the rates of oscillation of the Two Principles 
within them. 

18. —The number of life units is infinite, and the 
variety co-infinite with the number. 

19. —Since life was born Principle has continuously 
propagated life units, and will so continue forevermore. 


278 


THE NEW IDEA. 


20. —Each life unit, or single thought propagated by 
Principle comes forth in the actuality of conscious wisdom 
and intelligence and is able to function accordingly.. 

21. —Each life unit so propagated is in individual 
form, and is an epitome of the mass body, of which it is 
the smallest constituent. 

22. —By the oscillation of Principle, tone vestures 
were propagated as envelopes to the units, and by such 
tones the units fellowship one with another in rising de¬ 
grees of organization, in larger and smaller groups. 

23. —By the tone fellowship of units the worlds and 
heavens of our universe were propagated. 

24. —Each life unit propagated makes the journey 
of the whole orbit of life, unfolding from its tones three 
spiritual, and three celestial vestures, and three physical 
subvestures, on a descending, or extending scale. In the 
ages of that extension the worlds and heavens were prop¬ 
agated, in six-fold zones of substance. 

25. —The degrees of unit organization on the arc of 
extension, thinking from the view point of physical sub¬ 
vesture tones, are as follows: 

A. —The substare containing an organism of 
three tone function. 

B. —The atom containing an organism of ten 
tone functions. 

C. —The molecule containing an organism of at 
least thirty tone functions. 

D. —The corpuscle containing an organism of 
at least ninety tone functions. 

E. —The crystal containing an organism of an 
unknown number of tone functions. 

P.—The cell containing an organism of at least 
three hundred and sixty different classes of tone 
functions. 

26. —All units of life, and their organizations are 
alive—organic—and in conscious wisdom and intelligence, 
and know what their respective functions in life building 
are, and how to perform them. 

27. —From the atom, and by atomic propagation the 
worlds and heavens came forth; from the cell and cellular 
propagation, man was evolved. 

28. —Creation is exclusively by the thinking of life 
units, and by that of organized mass bodies of such units 
in mass tone. 

29. —A knowledge of the little problem of mass tone 
furnishes a key to the propagation of Harmony . 

30. —Atomic, molecular, and corpuscular units are in¬ 
finitely small—epitome—worlds; and cells are very small, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


279 


epitorhe, men or women. A single thought must be held 
in vision as one or the other. 

31. —There is no such fact as matter in the universe, 
except in human perception of the physical subvesture 
tones of life units in mass, which in physics are called 
gasses, liquids and solids. 

32. —Not anything is dead. Everything is alive. 

33. —When units, or thoughts, are compressed into 
the physical prisons of subvesture tones, as in the constit¬ 
uents of so called matter, they appear to be lifeless, but 
they are all in organic life, and in the continuous oscilla¬ 
tions of Principle. 

34. —It is in such compressing prisons that their tones 
are quickened and chastened. 

35. —Life units delivered themselves from such com¬ 
pressing prisons by transmutation to cellular forms of 
life, which was the birth of the units of animal and plant 
forms of life. 

36. —In the cellular rise and expansion of animal 
forms, by evolution, to man, the processes involved were 
not merely by the association or grouping of units, but 
by processes of propagation by which new units came 
forth. 

37. —Man, in his present human state is not a dweller 
in the full tone of the physical zone, but in the subvesture 
spheres of that zone wherein he wears a group body, com¬ 
posed, as to the outmost vestures of his units, of about 
one-third gasses, one-third liquids, and one-third solids. 

38. —When man sheds that physical subvesture body, 
in that event miscalled death, he will rise in an invisible 
magnetic ether body to the full tone of the physical 
heaven, provided by thinking in desire, choice and motive, 
he propagate such new form, through the first resurrec¬ 
tion. If he fail to do so, he will go back to the next 
lower pre-human man estate, from which the only return 
to evolution is reincarnation. 

39. —Upon taking possession, in control, of his think¬ 
ing organism, propagated by Principle up to that point, 
without the very effective interference of his volition, man 
becomes a builder of self, and he may build up, or disor¬ 
ganize. He may unfold to higher forms and powers, in 
health and happiness, or he may neglect to do that, and 
wilfully descend back in affliction, for another opportu¬ 
nity to avail himself of human potentialities. 

40. —Human environment is in the fact of the tone 
vestures of units and organizations of life. Those are 
largely in error, evil and affliction, properly called de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence, which man appropriates 


280 


THE NEW IDEA. 

I 

in order to unfold in knowledge and experience. They 
are the functional potentialities of human life, and con¬ 
stitute the pushing force of evolution. 

41. —Man, by thinking in the plan of Principle, may 
unfold through and out of those afflicting degrees, in 
health, prosperity, power, peace and plenty. 

42. —Man unfolds—grows—by thinking in volition, 
desire, choice and motive, by the appropriation of the 
bread of life from environment, which germinates and 
unfolds the germ potentialities within. 

43. —As man unfolds by thinking all his circumstances 
unfold with him. They are a part of his life, in the fact 
of his own particular enviroment, and in degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence. As Soon as man begins to think 
in self-life unfoldment, his circumstances unfold him into 
health and prosperity. 

44. —The marriage union of human spheres is sym¬ 
bolic of the higher wedlock of invisible heavens, where 
the temporarily divided male and female forms reunite 
in the glory of primal, dual individuality. 

45. —The whole orbit of creation is from Unity, 
through functional variety, to Harmony, which latter is 
in the fact of transcendent Brotherhood. 

46. —Man unfolds his life from these spheres, or may 
do so, by the propagation of thinking, into an invisible 
risen form. By that form he enters into the Mass Tone 
Life Organization of Universal Brotherhood. 

47. —Ultimately the risen life and the rising forms of 
life make one on the earth. 

49. —There is no death and no hell. The visible body 
cannot die. At that eventuation, when the invisible form 
passes from the visible one, the latter dissolves into its 
primal units, which continue to function and to live on. 
The invisible form rises to a higher sphere of life, or re¬ 
turns for another opportunity, if the present one has been 
neglected. 

50. —Men and women are propagating themselves into 
new men and new women, and the visible earth and 
heaven are propagating themselves into the new heaven 
and the new earth, which are the dwelling place of the 
new men and women. 

51. —Man, by thinking in the plan of Principle, un¬ 
folds to the perpetual youth of the visible and invisible 
sides of his life organization, here on the earth and in 
the human sphere of life. 

The above are only fifty-one of the high places of the 
new system. It is seen that the elaboration of the whole 
plan, in thinking, is to know self, which to know aright 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 281 

is life everlasting. It is further seen that the system is 
practically new, the only part of the old that is used con¬ 
sisting of links to connect the planks of the new plan 
together, into a grand whole. 

That new system, with all its elaborations in this vol¬ 
ume, and the endless extensions which are to follow 
in other volumes and lecture courses has been unfolded 
by the thinking of the author in the simple plan of voli¬ 
tion, desire, choice and motive. It did not come from 
the study and correlation of the teachings of other vol¬ 
umes. It has been unfolded from environment and from 
within by the persistent thinking of one who, having 
devoted sixty years of thinking in these human spheres, 
finds that all the good things of life exclusively proceed 
from methods of thinking in Principle. 

That system is now presented to thinkers everywhere. 
Those who will practice in it, will find in the fellowship 
of such new thoughts as they will be able to propagate, 
all the power, health, prosperity, peace, happiness, and 
abounding plenty there is in our grand, resourceful uni¬ 
verse. 


EXERCISE XLII. 


SELF REGENERATION. 

The awakening—Results of scientific thinking—How they 
first manifest themselves—Man was never lost—Man 
cannot die—A dead man is impossible—Unfolding 
from evil to cleaner potentialities—The wonders of 
the human heart—God dwells potentially in the 
heart of man. 


IP, in such degrees of wisdom and intelligence as 
one can command, and in the full exercise of the will, and 
also in a hearty endeavor to comply, in thinking and 
feeling, with the spirit of these exercises, and the system 
for morning and evening, and daily thinking has been 
faithfully carried out, f<?r, say, one or two days, by the 
morning of the third day results will appear, first, in a 
feeling of love and affection for the study and the work. 
It will be partly realized that the experiment, if such it 
be, has proved experimental, and there will be a sense 
of self respect, and self consciousness far more pleasing 
than hitherto. The heart begins to feel lighter, and, in¬ 
deed the whole life shares in that feeling, as if burdens 
were being thrown off. If a student in that stage of be¬ 
ginning is asked how he or she feels, on entering the 
breakfast room from the morning exercise, on the third 
day, he or she will involuntarily answer, “I feel happy.” 
No other words will express the facts. 

With that expression it is seen that the new life is 
begun, and that there is little or no danger of neglecting 
or quitting the effort. One in that initial state will have 
strangely delightful feelings, sometimes mingled with 
emotions of expectation. A new interest in self is para¬ 
mount. In some way the student feels better than hith¬ 
erto, and at least begins to feel that life is a richer herit¬ 
age than had been supposed. These feelings will be fol¬ 
lowed by mental inquiries, not always expressed, as to 
the welfare of associates. A new Principle of life is 
springing up and unfolding in the heart. That can plainly 
be realized. 

Should the careless reader interject, at this point, the 
opinion that I am teaching the doctrine of “self regen¬ 
eration,” let him at once be confirmed in that opinion. 
If, in all others he has been in error, he is certainly correct 
in that one. That is precisely what this volume teaches. 

(282) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


283 


It proclaims “self regeneration,” which is self-life un- 
foldment, by thinking, from the cradle, and for infinite 
ages behind it, to the final goal of creation, which is in 
the fullness of the Risen Life. 

The student need not be afraid of that doctrine. It 
is in the plan of Principle. It was unfolded in the full 
glory of psychological and bodily immortality by the 
thinking of the man and the Christ, who was called Jesus. 
There are no reservations, no qualifying conditions in¬ 
volved. It is self regeneration, self unfoldment of the 
infinite potentialities within, day by day, thought by 
thought, unto the perfect day. Does that teaching do 
away with the functions of the Christ, the Spirit, the 
regenerating power, by faith and by works, of the life of 
the Master? Not at all. Those and all that Infinite Pri¬ 
mordial Principle has yet unfolded, or ever can unfold, 
are all grandly and transcendently within man, awaiting 
the vigorous oscillations of his duality, in methods of 
thinking in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, driven 
to action by the mass tone will of Consciousness. How 
could it be otherwise, except in absurd theology, which 
is, for the greater part, a libel upon the New Testament, 
and by which man is declared to be a “lost” and de¬ 
praved mortal, living under the penalty of death and 
damnation more or less eternal? 

Man was never lost. Moreover, he cannot die. Death 
is that one thing impossible to man. There is, after all, 
nothing new in all that. It was taught and exemplified 
in the life of Jesus; and, in the New Commandment, all 
mankind is exhorted to do likewise. He declared that 
those who “believed” on him, that is, those who would 
follow in his footsteps, as to methods of living and think¬ 
ing, should never die, and that they should, as the result 
of their so living and thinking, receive that crown of life, 
which is Immortality and Omniscience. 

Man is not lost, I say! He is right here on the earth 
in a visible form of life; he is in each and all the heavens 
above, in a glorious form of life, visible to those who 
fellowship with him there; he is now, or ever more will 
be, a living member of the Risen Brotherhood. Away 
with that degenerating doctrine which teaches the impos¬ 
sible fact of a dead man, here or hereafter. Man is alive 
forevermore! 

Thus, I appeal to man on the ground of his own 
infinite potentialities, and bid him look within his match¬ 
less and God-like life organization, where he will find, 
potentallv, the real Kingdom, which by thinking, rever¬ 
ently and in love and affection towards the neighbor he 



THE NEW IDEA. 


234 


will unfold into the supreme man. “I and my Father 
are one.” Let man think on, until he can, in the same 
understanding in which those words were spoken, speak 
them for himself. That is the living doctrine which will 
raise man. It was the doctrine of total depravity 
preached and taught in error, and even yet proclaimed 
in expiring accents; it was the doctrine of the penalty 
of eternal death for potential evil, taught, and still here 
and there feebly proclaimed; it was through those un¬ 
fortunate teachings, in error, that man became depraved. 
Now, in the name of mankind, let us have a living man, a 
rising man, a free man, a real God-man! 

O ye, in high places bid man stand erect, and cast 
aside the bondage of potential subvesture functions, and 
rise, day by day, and evermore, in degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence, until he lifts his eternal brow of Omnisci¬ 
ence to receive the kiss of Immortal Brotherhood in that 
new All Harmonious life to which the Absolute is func¬ 
tional. 

Yes, I am feebly teaching brother man to rise, by his 
own God-powers, and, in order that he may start right, 
I am pointing him to his own heart, which is the fountain 
of life. It is full of potential evil—evil functional to 
rmfoldment. What do I mean by thinking to heart puri¬ 
fication? I mean that, by thinking in degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, man may rise—may unfold his life out 
of those functions into higher ones. In the measure that 
he does that he will render evil non-functional in his life, 
and will, therefore live, and rise in health, happiness, 
peace and plenty. It is by thinking in ideals of purity, 
appealing to emotional and spiritual thoughts, that man 
will throw off the illusions of perception, which now 
blind him, and burst the bonds of sense, which now 
shackle his potential powers, and give unto him clearer 
visions of Truth. 

Let us try to see just how, by methods of thinking, 
man may regenerate, renew, transform, and re-create his 
own heart; how he may purify it—cleanse it from all evil. 
In other exercises of this volume may be found outlines 
of the proper methods of thinking to heart purity. Those 
should be read and studied again, in this connection, and 
the student should develop the plan on the lines there 
indicated, to the full expanding limits of his resources. It 
should be remembered, in this connection, that by the 
functions of desire, choice, motive and the will, recip¬ 
rocally oscillating in the heart, new thoughts are born in 
the quality of the ideals to which they are propagated. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


285 


The object of the ideals which are set to thinking in the 
plan referred to, is to provide standards, or moulds, so 
to speak, for the new thoughts which proceed. By that 
system of thinking the substance of the heart is renewed. 
Reference is here made to the inner and higher invisible 
substance of the units. The new thoughts cast off the 
old, and, in a way, take their places. Thus the heart— 
the inner, and finally the whole substance—is regenerated 
—re-created. That is done by thinking. 

It is in the plan of life that all new-born thoughts 
come forth in unit forms, in the heart, in tones, or quali¬ 
ties, to correspond exactly to the tones of desire, choice 
and motive by which they are propagated. That is in 
the science of propagation. Propagating to ideals is not 
a new, nor an untried doctrine. In the method of think¬ 
ing under consideration desire functions in a demand 
for a new heart—a new throne—a new life; choice de¬ 
cides that it shall be pure; and motive, which is behind 
it all, approves, because by such regeneration, the whole 
life will be unfolded to higher degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence—to higher power peace and happiness. Thus 
by a process of faculty functions in the heart, in which 
the whole family of Consciousness in involved, a new, 
pure, clean heart is propagated by thinking, thought by 
thought, idea by idea, unit by unit, form tone by form 
tone; and, hour by hour, and day by day, until old 
things have passed away and all things become new. 

It must be understood that the seat of all the func¬ 
tional potentialities of life is in the heart; not in the 
head. The heart is the fountain of your life. Your Ideal 
God dwells there. Consciousness, and its mighty psycho¬ 
logical household are unfolded there, and, in the trans¬ 
forming fact of self life unfoldment, your Lord and 
King dwell in the heart also. The Holy Spirit, in the 
force and function of Love, or very life, dwells in the 
heart. Yea, the heart, in unfolding desire, appropriates 
all things. It is the source and seat of your life. And 
now, dear student, that heart is ever throbbing, and oscil¬ 
lating in Principle, and sending forth a warm stream of 
life, in the work of bodily renewal. It is outwardly the 
function of visible body builder, and inwardly the source 
of invisible body builder. Do you not see ? The outward 
activity is but a symbol of the inner and higher work. 

Do you ask what is in the heart which gives it life? 
The answer comes from every page of this volume: It 
is Principle. Its pulsations proceed from the oscillations 
of the Two Principles, just as motion always proceeds 
from vibration. The oscillations of Principle are in the 


286 


THE NEW IDEA. 


fact of dual life. Hence the Principle of the human 
heart is the fact of life. It contains the organism of 
Principle, and therefore of life, and of life propagation. 
That organism is put in motion by the combined forces 
of the subjective and objective will* functioning in Prin¬ 
ciple, and when motive and choice are attuned with de¬ 
sire, and all are reciprocally oscillating to life’s grandest 
ideals, there is creation in righteousness—propagation to 
higher life. 

Is it not seen that, by thinking in wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, which man can easily do, he may control and direct 
that marvelous heart organism, and in doing so, appro¬ 
priate from the eternal fountain of substance all things 
necessary for building and rebuilding, generating and re¬ 
generating, his marvelous form of life, to successively 
higher form tones until the goal in Truth is reached? 

It is desired that these observations—these appeals 
in wisdom and intelligence—will awaken the student to 
a realization of nis inherent powers and functions, and 
infinite life possibilities. 

“And I will give them an heart to know me, that I 
am the Lord.” 

“The Lord looketh on the heart.” “Let the heart 
of them rejoice that seek the Lord.” “I caused the wid¬ 
ow’s heart to sing.” “Given understanding to the 
heart.” “My heart shall not fear.” “The heart is 
deep.” Gladness sown for upright in heart.” “Keep 
thy heart with all diligence.” “As he thinketh in his 
heart so is he.” “Ye shall have gladness of heart.” 
“Blessed are the pure in heart, for they shall see God.” 
“Where your treasure is there will your heart be also.” 
“Out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaketh.” 
“Let not your heart be troubled.” “With the heart man 
believeth.” “That Christ may dwell in your heart.” 
“Draw near with a true heart.” “Purify your heart.” 
‘ ‘ The hidden man of the heart. ’ ’ 

I have collected a few flashes from sacred scripture, 
correlated with the teachings of this volume, and espe¬ 
cially with what has been said about the human heart. 
The New Testament commands us to purify the heart, 
and its teachings assure us that the pure in heart shall 
enjoy life’s richest blessings. In the teachings of this 
volume we endeavor to formulate methods of thinking 
for purifying the heart, and, from that datum, for unfold¬ 
ing the whole life in successively higher degrees of wis- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


287 


dom and intelligence, and therefore in rising power, peace 
and plenty. 

I began this exercise with some references to the 
awakening which follows an earnest application to the 
methods of thinking in morning, evening and daily exer¬ 
cises, according to this new system of thought unfold- 
ment, and, as has been seen, the effort is resolved to a 
humble attempt to awaken the general reader—the stu- 
dnt—to his or her opportunities and possibilities. What 
a mighty vision that is of unfolding one’s life from the 
heart within, and from the heart of hearts within the 
visible heart of flesh and blood. Who shall tell us about 
the human heart organism, and its transcendent poten¬ 
tialities? What scientific man possesses that skill? Vol¬ 
umes have been written in elaboration of visible and in¬ 
visible brain faculty organism, until man has been con¬ 
vinced, in error, that the ‘‘seat of the soul,” the fountain 
of life are in the wonders of the cerebral region. The 
brain does not rise above the splendor and magnificence 
of a human, living magnetic battery, but of course it 
will unfold in correspondences, into the functional immor¬ 
tality of the out works of an infinite heart. 

But where are the volumes which have been written 
in elaboration of the grand and dear old heart? We 
find, in human physiologies interesting descriptions of 
that physical organ, but those do not exalt its glorious 
functions very far above the mechanism of a force 
pump. It is left as the inexplicable center of a most com¬ 
plicated human life organization of mere flesh and blood 
and bone. Some physicians have gone as far as to dis¬ 
courage thinking about the heart and its functions ’lest 
that might propagate ‘‘heart disease.” Even in that 
remarkable advice there is a recognition of a close con¬ 
nection between thinking and the heart. 

Dear student, what will be said of me when I declare 
—reverently, I hope—that the human heart contains, po¬ 
tentially, the Living God, within its infinite depths. In the 
riches of its hidden treasures are all life’s degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence, which may be unfolded into all 
the glories of the kingdom of God, as it is in Truth. 
Within its potential folds are unspeakable power, glory, 
love, peace, prosperity, happiness, joy, gladness and 
abounding plenty, which await only the thrilling oscilla¬ 
tions of Principle to spring forth into sublime Omnisci¬ 
ence. 

In view of these facts how can one remain blind and 
dumb to the infinite source of life and happiness which is 
within? If it is possible to unfold such a heart into the 



288 


THE NEW IDEA. 


full fruition of life, by thinking, then, in the name of 
humanity, teach us the requisite methods! I am thrilled 
to noble resolves, to high and lofty ideals of life and 
duty, as I bring to vision that well of living water in 
the heart, which springs up into everlasting life—flows 
forth into the rapturous kingdom of God—responsive to 
methods of thinking adapted to the great work. Think 
of it, a heart which is sinful above all things and desper¬ 
ately wicked, as the result of thinking in error—thinking 
in the appropriation of false doctrines—may, under the 
powers and functions of methods for thinking in the plan 
of life as it is in Principle, rise in regenerating unfold- 
ment into a pure heart, blessed with a transcendent spir¬ 
itual vision which will behold God. It is upon that doc¬ 
trine of sacred scripture as a foundation that I have 
found authority for expressing that prayerful desire: 
“Dwell Thou in our hearts, and unfold our lives, in suc¬ 
cessive degrees of wisdom and intelligence, until, in 
Truth, we shall behold Thy face. Then in that dear face 
we shall see our own.” 


EXERCISE XLIII. 


THINKING IN FELLOWSHIP. 

Invisible Fellowship—Visible Fellowship—Functions of 
social life—Interdependence of all forms of life— 
Beauty and loveliness of woman—Elegance of adorn¬ 
ment recommended when the inner and higher life 
corresponds—Preparing for the social function— 
Fellowship in Invisible Brotherhood. 


WE must at this point guard against a possible mis¬ 
understanding. While it is important in this system, to 
emphasize self powers, it must always be held in steady 
vision that thinking in self alone would be futile, unless 
thinking in fellowship and in the functions of Brother¬ 
hood be implicated. That method is two-fold, to-wit: 
(1) Thinking in fellowship with the visible forms of life, 
and (2) thinking interdependently with invisible forms 
of life. The latter is the same as saying that one may 
think in fellowship with the risen life organizati.ons 
which have gone on to join in the mass tone life of Risen 
Brotherhood. 

We are not only interdependently connected with all 
life in the visible world, but we dwell in the risen mass 
tone life of Brotherhood, psychologically, by Conscious¬ 
ness—by the unfolded Consciousness, which is already 
partly risen. In that way we may function here, and 
with risen forms simultaneously. It is remarkable that 
in the infinite plan of life, man may function both as a 
man, in flesh and blood, and as a partly risen man, with 
his unfolded side in invisible Brotherhood. 

The method of thinking in visible fellowship has 
already been quite fully elaborated elsewhere in this 
volume, but some additional observations in this connec¬ 
tion are thought advisable. I return briefly to the oppor¬ 
tunities for thinking to unfoldment in social functions. 
We are all more or less familiar with that over-taxing 
work of “making the toilet” with a view to attending a 
tea, a dinner, a reception or a “party” of any kind. It 
is hard work, especially for a lady, even if she have the 
skillful services of a maid. The man is generally less 
particular, as he indulges in a smaller variety of dress, 
and society is not quite as exacting as to his appearance. 
But the young woman, and even the elderly woman, 
under prevailing rules, doubly earns all the pleasures, so 

(289) 



290 


THE NEW IDEA. 


called, which she derives from the social function, no 
matter what it is, in the work of dress preparation. She 
must “crimp,” and powder and paint, and practice in 
smiling, for a long time. It is taxing on her nerves. Some 
of it is very foolish, but I am an advocate of womanly 
loveliness, and even beauty, both in dress, grace, and in 
all manner of life expressions. A woman should be 
lovely, and lovable as possible, and beautiful to the last 
degree. Men should not only indulge all that but should 
take an interest in it, and encourage it, to the full extent 
of common sense. A man who doesn’t care whether his 
wife or daughter is lovely and beautiful, both in fact and 
appearance, or not, is without interest in the best things 
of life. Nor do I wish to complain because a woman 
devotes so much time and labor in adorning herself, pro¬ 
vided she develop loveliness within also. 

The final function of woman, in her ultimate rela¬ 
tionship with man, in the dual life of the next zone is 
unutterably transcendent, the chief elements of which 
are loveliness, beauty, adornment, grace, artistic expres¬ 
sion, and the glory of jewels, in the reality of love and 
affection, and these functions are already potential in 
her unfolding life. Hence she naturally takes to the 
beautiful in life. Therefore the symbolism of the beau¬ 
tiful in dress, and loveliness of artistic expression be¬ 
come her life. But one must pity the woman, as well as 
the man, who rushes from the home where the last hour 
has been one of labor and pains in preparation for a 
social function. From ten to twenty minutes should be 
devoted to silent thinking, in the secrecy of the chamber, 
after one is otherwise ready to leave the home, before 
starting for the reception, or other social function. In 
that exercise the life organization should, by proper 
methods of thinking, which readily suggest themselves, 
from what has already been said, be brought into tran¬ 
quillity, and into a high degree of love and affection. The 
heart should be thought into a high state of purity, and 
the emotions should be subdued into gentleness, meekness, 
and a glow of true loveliness. Then the face will shine 
in beauty even through a heavy coating of cosmetics, if 
it must do so, and the carriage will be artistic. Joy and 
gladness in gentle mein should also be propagated. Then 
“our lady” or the man is ready for social fellowship. Not 
otherwise. 

Being thus prepared they are in tune to meet others 
and to fellowship in sweet interchange of thoughts and 
expressions, and to appropriate the social feast. They 
are thus qualified to bestow of their life riches upon those 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


291 


whom they meet, and to receive psychological food in 
return. It is seen from these altogether too brief obser¬ 
vations that the most important preparations for social 
fellowship are not in dress, or bodily adornments. Those 
are necessary, but the other qualifications are indispen¬ 
sable. At the function the gladsome smiles, and the lov¬ 
ing words, to be effective, must flow from a pure heart, 
and if they do, the guests with whom you have fellow- 
shiped will carry you in their hearts for many days, and 
they will love you, which means that you have received— 
won—a mighty power for self unfoldment. The love and 
affection, the esteem and respect of others are the healing 
balm of life for self. They come into your life impercept¬ 
ibly, and win you to higher ideals. 

Thus, visible life fellowship is functional to unfold¬ 
ment. The social function is a sweet angel in disguise, 
when it is free from envyings and jealousies. Those con¬ 
ditions will follow due psychological preparation as sug¬ 
gested in the foregoing. 

The church is a mighty function of social fellowship 
for unfoldment, but we will consider that in connection 
with the more sacred invisible fellowship. The poet has 
well said, “The fellowship of kindred minds is like to 
that above.’’ 

Invisible fellowship in the risen Brotherhood is the 
sweetest and most functional of any, in which man is 
permitted to partake in these lower subvesture spheres. 
Men and women may fellowship in that method in the 
silence and solitude of their closets, or in the sacred 
hours of church worship. 

It implicates thinking to a realization of the facts 
that self is unfolding from a visible to an invisible form 
of life, by degrees; that the invisible form joins in the 
realities of Brotherhood fellowship, with the innumerable 
hosts who have gone, or are going into the mass tone 
life of the new heavenly world; that in that infinite 
Brotherhood, self already dwells and functions; that by 
thinking we lay up the treasure of self in that transcend¬ 
ent kingdom; that in the fellowship of that Brotherhood 
self may draw upon its whole resources and appropriate 
them in a redeeming ( flood of light and life and love to 
its rise from these spheres of potential evil: that from 
that life into which self is rising, self may have all things 
needful to health and happiness now and evermore ; that 
the sum-total of that risen and rising life is in the reality 
of our Lord and King of whom we are rising to consti¬ 
tute an integral and glorious function; that thus the gift 
of life is unspeakably grand; that in the final consum- 


i 


292 


THE NEW IDEA. 


9 

mation of that invisible life is the Real God, who by our 
lives has come and is now coming forth in a glorious 
creation, from Absolute Being to Absolute Life—from 
incomprehensible Unity to ultimately comprehended Har¬ 
mony; that in that life we know and see God because 
we have become embodiments in life of Principle. 

That is true worship in the church or out of it; that 
is the real method of thinking in Christian Science; that 
is the plan of life unfoldment, by thinking, which leaves 
all error, evil, vice, sickness and death behind, and raises 
self to immortality and Omniscience. In that plan of 
life, in that method of thinking each man becomes the 
Christ in the Lord, and God becomes all in all. 


EXERCISE XLIV. 


THINKING AWAY FROM TROUBLES. 

Troubles gTeat and small—The ancient god of trouble— 
Little Troubles tell the story of their functional activ¬ 
ities—Their unreality—They fall behind the rising 
man—Life unfoldment banishes troubles. 


THE ancients held that there was a power in the 
world which they personified as a god, or the god of 
trouble, whose functions were to create confusion, to 
irritate, to disturb, to grieve, to tease, to vex and to 
annoy people generally. It is quite evident, in our day, 
that there is in the world—in life—a fruitful source of 
trouble. The ancients, especially the Persians, had differ¬ 
ent methods of placating their evil gods, some of whom 
were alternately disposed to kindly dispensations and to 
afflicting expressions of wrath. 

Matters have not changed so very much, so far as 
the functions of the god of trouble are concerned, even 
in our day. There is a mightily potential source of trouble 
which is a heritage peculiar to the human race, whether 
it be personified or not. It propagates troubles of all 
kinds imaginable, and afflicts man with them in a con¬ 
tinuous down pour, from the cradle to the grave. Nothing 
in this sphere of life is just exactly as man would like 
to have it. Some things please him better than others, 
to be sure, but nothing satisfies him very long, or very 
perfectly, while nearly everything annoys him more or 
less. 

I wonder if the reader has ever studied the infini¬ 
tude of the great world of suggestion, which pours in 
upon the life of man ten thousand continuous voices of 
threatening, warning, advice and counsel, in an endless 
variety of forms of vexation, in a never-ceasing flood. 
Sometimes suggestion functions as a comforter, but even 
in that office there is, beneath the cloak, a hidden dagger. 
For the most part its mission is to afflict, mostly in little 
things which may be called vexations. They besiege the 
life of man and ruffle his temper, or endeavor to do so, 
from morning until night, and often they swarm about 
his bed and trouble him before and during sleep. Man 
is a bundle of troubles more or less. He is troubled by 
nearly everything, and troubles nearly everybody and 
everything within his reach. 

(293) 



294 


THE NEW IDEA. 


The inquiry is as to the source of all those troubles, 
large and small. Where do they come from? Why do 
they come? Why don’t they stay away, or go out of 
business? I am here referring to the mighty volume of 
little troubles, rather than to more formidable afflictions. 
Now, all those afflictions, large and small, are in the 
plan of life. I have said that man, in his present state 
can comprehend Truth only in degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence, and that the afflictions—the evils—of life 
are in the facts of those degrees. I have also said that 
in these physical subvesture spheres, man measures good 
by evil, Truth by error, and righteousness by “sin.” 
Ordinarily he apprehends Truth only by contrasting it 
with error, and his appreciation, or esteem of good is 
realized by comparisons. His estimate is determined by 
their effects on his life, respectively. 

It is in the plan of life that man shall unfold by 
thinking, in Principle, from one degree of wisdom, with 
its corresponding degree of intelligence, to another, con¬ 
tinuously, resolving his evil environment to higher func¬ 
tions—to something else—with each degree of his rise. 
There is a sense in which, when he rises out of one set 
of troubles he does so in the fact of entering into another 
set. They are not the same ones. He has unfolded away 
from those—left them behind. But he meets with a new 
set. The latter differs from the old troubles. In some 
way they appear to tell him that they are his friends; 
that they have come to goad him along, to keep him mov¬ 
ing and rising, and if he listen, psychologically, he can 
hear in the voice of silence, coming to him out of his great 
world of troubles and afflictions, these words: “We are 
the innumerable items, or degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, which come to you in the mass tone of the Sug¬ 
gestion Schoolmaster. If we did not trouble you, you 
would not be likely to properly esteem peace; if we did 
not afflict, you would not know the value of health: if 
we did not.defeat, you would not have a functional reali¬ 
zation of success; if we did not bring you the cup of sor¬ 
row, you could not appreciate the overflowing bowl of 
joy; if we did not disappoint, you would not know from 
whence the realization of your desires comes; if we did 
not make the way hard you would not know the value 
of victory. We are not real; we function only in your 
perceptions. In that way we are really functional. We 
are unfolding your life through degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence into Truth, so that you will come to under¬ 
stand the plan of life, and, by thinking in Principle, dis¬ 
pense Avith our vexatious functions. Would you be rid 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


295 


of our army of afflictions ? You can easily do so. All that 
you are required to do in order to be completely free from 
our annoying presence is to demonstrate that you can 
yourself, by your own will, desire, choice and motive, 
think out the problems of unfoldment according to Prin¬ 
ciple ,and in the exact measure in which you can function 
in that way you will dispense with our unwelcome serv¬ 
ices. We are in error, and as long as you dwell in error 
you will be in our afflicting companionship, but as soon 
as you begin to rise out of error, by thinking in the glo¬ 
rious plan of life unfoldment as it is in Principle, we 
will part company. We afflict people only while they are 
passing our way; we do not follow them in their rise by 
thinking; we have no poAver to do so. You are a victim 
to our intrigue only while you unwisely dAvell with us. 
Our office is to push you—to afflict you—out of this evil 
realm. We do not wish your presence here any longer. 
This is not your proper sphere. You should rise from this 
place by thinking to unfoldment.” 

That is true of each successive set of envir¬ 
onment, of each fold of wisdom and intelligence. We 
may rise through it all Avithout its functions touching, or 
in any Avay afflicting us, if we will employ our own 
psychological powers in the Avay of life building, but if 
we refuse to do so, Are must reach the same go$l, very 
much more sloAvly, by sufferings. Is it not all plain? 
One who has entered into practical methods of thinking 
to unfoldment, Avith all his desire, and all the mighty 
faculty poAvers of his transcendent life could readily and 
heartily laugh at troubles, but such one has none to laugh 
at. They do not approach him at all. 

It is easy to see that this method of thinking away 
from troubles might be elaborated Avithwut limit. The 
student will readily grasp the plan, and without much 
effort, successfully enter upon its practice. A knowledge 
of the foregoing facts is half the battle. 



EXERCISE XLY. 


THINKING TO HEALTH. 

Unfolding to health and happiness—The “cure” idea— 
Life organization adjustment by thinking—Harmony 
the only cure—Degrees of wisdom and intelligence 
are always in the functions of affliction, until life 
unfolds away from them, or reaches a summit above 
them—Each degree of unfoldment renders the suc¬ 
ceeding one easier of accomplishment—Never fight 
afflictions—External evolution symbolic of internal 
unfoldment—Utility of the physician and of medi¬ 
cine—Thinking in the Principles of Power, Love 
and Truth. 


WITH ‘ ‘ thinking to heart purity, ’ ’ as the motto and 
standard of this system, we may proceed to consider the 
methods by which the potentialities of the heart are un¬ 
folded into health, prosperity, peace and abounding 
plenty. Now, these phrases, such as “health, happiness,” 
etc., become worn from much use, and may all be in¬ 
cluded in, or understood as constituting normal life. 
When life is normal it is happy in Consciousness, and it 
could not be so happy while suffering from any sort of 
affliction. A great many people seek a “cure” for their 
ailments, when there is no such fact as cure. It is a by¬ 
word. There is, in the practice of medicine, alleviation, 
and in surgery that which may be called a cure, but that 
in which a demand for surgery arises is more than an ail¬ 
ment, in the ordinary sense, what is sought to be im¬ 
pressed here is that ordinary ailments, sickness, and com¬ 
plaints which make one weak, miserable and life a bur¬ 
den, need no cure. All that is required is such readjust¬ 
ment of life functions, by thinking, as will raise the life 
organization out of its strife into Harmony—such read¬ 
justment as will bring the life into tune with Truth. It 
is the same with immoral and physically or psycholog¬ 
ically hurtful habits. Never seek to cure those. There 
is no cure for them. It is not in the plan of life to cure, 
or to heal any of those ailments. They cannot rise to the 
dignity wherein they demand a cure. Nor can the life 
organization be “cured” of such ailments, in any sense 
of the cure idea. 

Health, not partial health, but complete and perfect 
health is necessary to a normal condition of life. Please 
follow these ideas to complete appropriation. Life can- 

( 296 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


297 


not be normal unless it be healthy in all respects, to-wit: 
Morally, spiritually, psychologically, mentally and phys¬ 
ically. That includes the whole of it. It is necessary that 
vour life should be perfectly healthy in order to be per¬ 
fectly normal. Please note that the condition of life 
here referred to is in Necessity. That is important. That 
w'hich is necessary to life, in wisdom and intelligence, 
must be supplied. 

Again, when one is in an unhealthy condition, bodily 
or mentally, it is quite easy to arouse desire into func¬ 
tion—into intense action. Then, by the conscious will, 
the psychological faculties convene in council. Desire 
functions first. It calls for normal health. It desires 
complete health in order that the life in which it rules 
shall be happy. Choice decides for perfect health. 
Motive calls for perfect health in order that the life organ¬ 
ization may function to its full mission in creation. 
Necessity comes forward and inquires whether or not the 
life organization has unfolded sufficiently to dispense 
with its present afflicting environment. Knowledge is 
called upon for a report on that. It measures the status 
of the life by degrees of wisdom and intelligence, and it 
may be that reason, justice and judgment decide that, 
unless the life organization, in any degree of affliction, 
seek unfoldment out of those conditions, by proper 
methods of thinking, Principle will not be able to afford 
relief. Principle declares that the plan of life evolved 
from its infinite resources provides a full supply for 
every need, and that the afflictions complained of are in 
functional wisdom and intelligence, and will so continue 
until the person afflicted conform to its plan. Why? 
Because it is in the function of Principle that the life 
must rise, and that if any form of life afflicted will neg¬ 
lect to appropriate the resources of Principle, volun¬ 
tarily, or consequent to the forces of suggestion, that one 
must suffer in order to rise—must rise over the crucible. 

Principle works tw T enty-four hours in each and every 
day. It never is idle. Its oscillations throb from one 
end to the other, and from the heighth to the depth, of 
the universe, continuously. Its infinite pendulum swings 
to and fro propagating every pulse beat, every vibration, 
and every breath of life. It has created the will, and set 
that mass tone faculty to the tune and tone of transcend¬ 
ent functions. It has made that will ruler over many 
things. Its mighty faculty household has been granted 
exceeding great powers, and it has been crowned King 
in Consciousness. It is not in the plan of life that Prin¬ 
ciple shall usurp those marvelous functions, but it is 


298 


THE NEW IDEA. 


in that plan that Principle shall knock at the door of 
Consciousness and the will, in the knockings of sugges¬ 
tion, until the mighty psychological organization will 
arouse to action. It knocks, and knocks, and cries out: 
“Behold I stand at the door and knock. If any man will 
open unto me, I will come in and sup with him, and the 
feast shall be everlasting love.” Principle thus knocks 
in little rappings, properly called degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence, and as properly called error, evil, sickness, 
disappointment, disease, and a whole world of afflictions. 
Those are functional degrees of wisdom and intelligence. 
I appeal to the student not to become weary of that 
phrase. Its complete solution is life everlasting. 

Thus the faculty Council proceeds. The discussion 
takes many turns and involves numerous considerations. 
Those partly outlined in the foregoing are suggestive of 
others which the student can readily supply. It is seen 
that any council of the human psychological faculties 
which the will and desire may summon, on the important 
question of health can have but one conclusion, to-wit: 

. That all afflictions, no matter what their character or 
scope, whether from ill health, or from accidents or other 
eventuations, are in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, 
potential to the rise of man, and that they may all, one 
after another, and sometimes all together, be left behind 
and left below the march and the rise of any form of life 
that will seek diligently the application of methods of 
thinking in Principle. It is in that way that the life will 
unfold out of its afflictions into happiness; and happiness 
cannot exist in the midst of sickness, and other afflictions. 

The student is warned against one thing. One must 
not be discouraged because he or she cannot rise by unfold- 
ment to ideal perfection in one bound. The processes are 
sometimes slow at the start, but they will become more 
rapid as progress is made. There is encouragement in 
the fact that unfoldment by thinking is cumulative. The 
work of each day makes that of the succeeding day 
easier and more functional. 

In this connection I desire to repeat, in part, what 
has already been said. Genuine thought science never 
attacks any particular evil or affliction, or sickness. It 
has nothing whatever to do with afflictions, except to 
comprehend their functional potentialities. I declare to 
the student that when that is done the battle is prac¬ 
tically fought and won. Beyond that, one has only to 
unfold into ideals of health, of purity, of Truth. This is 
the only science in the universe that does not fight evil. 
It has nothing to do with afflictions. It denies them, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


299 


ignores them. It is somehow in the plan of life that the 
more attention one pays to troubles and sorrows, the 
more formidable they become. They are both dignified 
and magnified by attentions of any kind. To fight them 
is to propagate more. They will starve and die when 
forsaken. The Ntew Testament symbolizes all transgres¬ 
sion as “sin,” and teaches that sin should be forsaken. 
How can one forsake evil? Why, by turning to ideals 
of the good. 

Some one tells us that we are born in evil—that we ^ 
are the children of evil. Certainly we are. It is declared 
that all men born of women hath but few days in this 
world, and that those are full of trouble. That is gener¬ 
ally true. It is the business of man to change the last 
part of that declaration, and to resolve his life to immor¬ 
tality, without respect to the world in which he may live. 

It is in the minds of some—too many—that man can do 
wonderful things in the way of material progress, but 
he can do nothing with or for the progress of his own life. 

He can build mighty bridges, steamships, railroads, tele¬ 
scopes, and do everything in the achievements of science 
and the arts, but nothing in the way of life building. 
Why should human life be thus prescribed? If we can 
think to the unfoldment ^f external facts, why not to 
internal things, also? Is it lot a fact that outward evolu¬ 
tion is but the sign—symbol—of inward progress? Can 
it not be seen that one mav externalize his thoughts, and 
the thoughts of others, into material monuments of prog¬ 
ress, and neglect to unfold the life within? 

If we depend upon the physician for health, for bod¬ 
ily and psychological happiness, do we not impose upon 
him superhuman functions? His work is grandly func¬ 
tional, nor will it diminish, for he will rise with all other 
potentialities, making his calling, or much needed pro¬ 
fession, continuous. But the work of the physician is, 
after all, almost exclusively in suggestion. I consider 
it folly to say that the physician, as well as the surgeon, 
will not continue to practice for ages to come, but his 
practice will rise and unfold to higher functions. When 
I hear one at the very threshhold of thought science de¬ 
claring against a wise and prudent use of the physician 
and medicines. I am reminded of the converted drunk¬ 
ard, who, exulting in his new found liberty, enters the 
church for the first time in twenty years, it may be, and 
proclaims against the presence of the symbolic wine at 
the table of the Lord. There is nothing so completely 
non functional as nonsense. 

The physician is not an obstacle to the successful 


300 


THE NEW IDEA. 


practice of honest thought science. He is rather a help. 
On the other hand thought science—which is always 
Christian Science, when in the plan of life according to 
Principle—is an indispensable accompaniment of the pre¬ 
scription and the medicine. It not only supplements, and 
carries to completion the work which the physician can 
at best but begin, but it functions transcendently higher 
than the physician, in that it raises the life above the 
possibility of further sickness, or affliction of any kind. 
It is grandly preventative. 

Returning to the technique of thinking to health 
and happiness, it probably has been seen that Truth 
is involved in the process. We cannot in these subvest- 
ure conditions think or function in Truth. That is the 
final goal of life. But man can think in wisdom and in¬ 
telligence which are the wings upon which life rises 
towards and ultimately into Truth. It is correctly said 
that Truth will make us free. There is a sense in which 
Truth is behind us, and, from what has been said, one 
may conclude that it came forth in the golden morning 
of life. It has been said that Primordial Principle prop¬ 
agated, in duality, to the Two Principles, called Power 
and Love, and that those Two Principles embraced and 
begot a form of life in Truth. That is correct, but, at 
this point, we carry our vision a little higher, and sug¬ 
gestively say that Power, Love and Truth were all 
brought forth in a state of potentiality. They were 
brought forth in Principle. Try to comprehend that faet 
clearly. They were in a state of embryos as to life un- 
foldment. It is the same with Principle itself. At the 
last analysis it is the same with God, Principle, Power, 
Love, and Truth. Whatever of sublimity and reality 
attaches to those mighty facts in esse, we do not as yet 
fully understand. We do understand that whatever they 
were in a Primordial state of Being, they are quite dif¬ 
ferent in life. They began life as potentialities, and man, 
in looking back to their birth can comprehend them in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence only, which is the 
same as saying that he appropriates a knowledge of them 
by ideals, and in ideals only. 

God, Principle, Power, Love, and Truth unfold into 
life by thinking toward ideal potentialities, and they rise 
into reality in life, by the fact of forms of life becoming 
those mighty facts, step by step, and thought by thought. 
The final goal of life is in that unfoldment of life wherein 
a man becomes God, Principle, Power, Love, and Truth. 
Hence, I repeat, those transcendent facts of our universe 
are forms of life, now but very slightly unfolded in us, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


301 


or, to speak more correctly, our forms of life are but 
slightly unfolded into them. Finally mankind will stand 
forth in the full reality of the Living God, and in the 
full and glorious embodiment of Principle, Power, Love 
and Truth. 

It is seen, therefore, that while the Ideal God, the 
Ideal Principle, and Ideal Power, Love and Truth are 
all behind us in esse and in the transcendent birth of 
life, they are all ahead of us in unfolding life, and their 
fullness is in the final goal of life for each one of us. 

We are, therefore, commanded to look forward— 
to look ahead—if we would see those unutterable forms 
of life, and when we would apprehend the potentialities 
from which God and Truth are unfolding in a man, we 
must look within—look into the inner heart. Man’s 
heart is manyfold. Its outer visible sub vestures are in 
flesh and blood; its next inmost is in a grand organic 
state of physical magnetic ether; its next inmost is an 
organism of mental magnetic ether; its next inmost is a 
transcendent organization of celestial magnetic ether. 
Those complete its Celestial organism. Within the last 
named three organisms, are three more spiritual organiza¬ 
tions, to-wit: Within the physical there is the angelic 
organism; within the mental there is the divine organ¬ 
ism; and within the celestial proper, there is the spir¬ 
itual organism, and objective to them all is the rising 
new heart, which is invisible to all the others. Thinking 
of the heart as the whole life, as well as its infinite poten¬ 
tialities, we see that from its transcendent potentialities 
God-life is unfolding. 

At this point we must come to see that there is a 
reality in the source of life as well as in its goal. Po¬ 
tentialities did not spring from nothing. In esse— in an, 
as yet, incomprehensible state of Being—God, Principle, 
Power, Love and Truth reside. We will fully compre¬ 
hend them when we become them in life—when we think 
ourselves into the life of those facts in perfection. Then, 
as said before, esse and existere will make one in tran¬ 
scendent Harmony. 

Let me say to the student, that an appropriation of 
the facts expressed in the foregoing paragraphs to full 
thought oscillations, so that they will enter into the life 
and become a part of it, is in the actuality of that method 
of thinking which propagates to health and happiness. 
There is health in the study of this exercise. It is itself 
the exercise—the method of thinking to health. It is 
in Truth, in such high degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence as will enable one to appropriate Truth—to become 


302 


THE NEW IDEA. 


Truth—in rising measures of freedom and liberty, from 
all potential bondage. I can think of no more effective 
“cure” for life’s ailments and besetments, whether in 
bodily sickness or hurtful habits, than to study this 
Thinking Exercise. One reading of it will not do the 
work. Study it! Dwell upon it. Appropriate it. It 
will make you free in the degree of your understanding 
and love of its teachings. 

Dear student, I give you this exercise for health. 
May you study it until it thrills your life to unfoldment, 
in joy and gladness. Realize that, as your potentialities 
rise and bloom in the sunshine of Truth, you leave be¬ 
hind and below former functions, and enter into the 
freedom of health and happiness. Think your life, from 
the foundation of this exercise, into normal, rising con¬ 
ditions, and you will be happy, which is to be in the full 
bloom of health. 


EXERCISE XLVI. 


THINKING TO PROSPERITY. 

Keys to success—Prosperity is for the citizen of the invis¬ 
ible kingdom—That kingdom real but unfolded from 
ideals—The means and the end—The glorious king¬ 
dom of unfolded mankind—Man now dwells in a 
land flowing with milk and honey, but is generally 
unconscious of the fact—Principle treats man to 
a succession of pleasant surprises. 


CAN one think himself or herself into prosperity? 
Certainly. Prosperity cannot be reached in any other 
way; nor do I mean by that that man simply thinks 
out business plans in wisdom and intelligence and exe¬ 
cutes them in prudence and persistence, and that pros¬ 
perity comes from those methods only. Those are nec¬ 
essary, but as a rule, they are in vain. Something else 
is necessary to success. What is the real secret of suc¬ 
cess? That is to the point. I ask the student to in¬ 
dulge, in some degree of patience, a quotation from the 
New Testament, and a few words of elaboration con¬ 
cerning it, and then all will become plain. The secret 
of success, with abounding prosperity, will be an open 
book. They follow: “Seek ye the kingdom of God; 
and all these things shall be added unto you.” It is 
well known that “these things” referred to in the fore¬ 
going from Luke 12:31, have reference to material, as 
well as higher, blessings. 

The question is, how can one overtake prosperity 
by seeking the kingdom of God. We must first deter¬ 
mine what the kingdom of God is. It is not a land, 
located in a far country, flowing with milk and honey, 
and abounding, in all the good things of life, where an 
Ideal God rules in love—a land which, we should seek 
in journeyings afar. It is not that. It is not an ideal 
heaven prepared for man by some one aside from him¬ 
self and his own efforts. It is not a place to which 
man may go to dwell on leaving a sin cursed earth—a 
place where there is perpetual rest and rejoicing—a 
place, with many mansions, created by unseen hands. 

What is the kingdom of God? It is unfolded man¬ 
kind-unfolded life. It is, first, in the human heart, 
and forevermore, in that which is unfolded from that 
heart. The kingdom of God is created by human think- 

( 303 ) 



304 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ing, and by all thinking of the forms of life, unit and 
otherwise, behind man. Yea, it is more. It is created 
by the thinking of the forms of life, visible and invis¬ 
ible. It is in the fact of unfolded human life, from the 
visible to the invisible heavens. Of course, the whole 
universe, visible and invisible, is the kingdom of God. 
It has all been unfolded by thinking to ideals—the worlds 
and heavens by the thinking of the units, and the new 
invisible worlds and heavens, by the thinking of the 
visible ones in mass tone. Man has been created by 
the thinking of unit, and organized thoughts, and the 
new invisible man by the thinking of visible man in 
mass tone. Thus the invisible worlds and heavens and 
invisible man are the kingdom of God to which the 
above quoted passage has reference. 

That is a grand and glorious kingdom, in which 
the Lord rules as Master and king, but that land and 
that king are in our hearts. We unfold them by think¬ 
ing in the plan of life. We are to seek that kingdom. 
That does not mean that we are to make a long journey, 
because it is here in our midst. However, we cannot 
see it in the functions of sense vision. It is a dominion 
out of human sight, but not afar. It is on our every 
psychological touch, and plainly within the vision of 
psychological consciousness. 

It is a land full of riches and honors, and lofty func¬ 
tions. Its most humble inhabitant is ten thousand times 
ten thousand mightier than earth’s greatest monarch. 
There is no want there. Every need is satisfied by an 
abundant supply. There is no night there. Everlasting 
day rules. There is no sickness, or sorrow, or affliction 
of any kind in that kingdom. All its people are in per¬ 
fect health, overflowing with joy and gladness; and each 
one is continuously thrilled by self achievements in pros¬ 
perity. Science and the arts flourish in the glory of risen 
life. The people all rejoice in the reality of Brother¬ 
hood, founded on the surpassing equality of relativity 
and interdependence. They live and function in kindred 
and fellowship groups, and all in one transcendent mass 
tone form of life in the Harmony of Love. 

The Lord, or King, of that kingdom comprises the 
whole of the people. They all dwell within their Lord, 
that is to say, they together, in the sociological compact 
of infinite Brotherhood, each functioning according to 
the type of his quality, and the whole, in the relativity 
and interdependence of infinite variety, compose that 
Brotherhood. He rules, and his rule is, as one can see, 
the rule of the people. That is the self government of 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


305 


the kingdom of God, of which, as before stated, visible 
human government should be more grandly symbolic. 

But the land, or heaven in which the people dwell, 
is in degrees of glory to correspond with the grandeur 
of its inhabitants, whose living robes and jewels reflect 
the light which everywhere radiates without consuming 
glow. The mass tone of that Brotherhood propagates a 
pure white color, and there the people no longer need 
the sun and stars for light. Rivers of life flow in streams 
of health, wherein is the healing of the nations which 
seek that kingdom. Peals of melody swell in waves of 
sublime music from pole to pole of that happy land. 
Evil has no place or function there. It is a righteous 
kingdom, and the people think evermore in Principle, 
propagating unit forms of Truth, that flow in the actu¬ 
ality of living nectar and ambrosia, of which the glad¬ 
some people partake, and are satisfied. 

0, says the student, that is an ideal heaven—an 
ideal kingdom of God. It is beyond human appropriation. 
Another may say, “One must die to reach such a king¬ 
dom.” In the first place, that kingdom is not ideal; it 
is unfolded from ideals; in the second place, no one is 
required to die in order to reach it. Any one who wishes 
may enter that land and function in that life here and 
now. He is already in that grand Brotherhood by his 
invisible subjective consciousness, and nothing remains 
for him but to become conscious of the fact, and to func¬ 
tion there. 

Do I hear the student say: “Let us go back to earth 
and function there?” O, how suspiciously afraid people 
are of ideals. They are ever crying for the things which 
they can touch, and taste, and smell, and hear and see. 
They must have a kingdom of God in Sense, or they 
will have none at all. They must physically behold it or 
they will not accept it. That brings us to a mighty 
truth. It is this: He who will not accept the kingdom 
of God, except in sense perception, will never accept it. 
It is only by coming to see, psychologically, the glorious 
kingdom which man is unfolding, that he will be able 
to unfold it. or to unfold his life into it. The real king¬ 
dom of God is not in sense. Man’s permanent temples 
are not in vestures of sense. They are in psychological 
realms of substance, where the sentient and the spiritual 
flux into the invisible forms of life. 

But there is a glorious, sentient side to the promise 
in the scripture quotation given at the outset of this 
exercise. It is that those who seek to unfold their lives 
so as to expand the kingdom of God, shall receive, with- 


;og 


THE NEW IDEA. 


out the seeking, “all these things,” referring to all 
things necessary to a happy, healthy, prosperous life of 
plenty here on the visible earth. That promise is in the 
plan of life, according to Principle, and cannot fail. It 
is not that its terms are to be twisted so as to conform 
to visible poverty and want. It is not in the idea that 
the downtrodden and the poor of earth should learn 
to live on less, and to deny themselves of the luxuries 
of time for recreation, study, and amusement, and the 
procurement of all that is needful to this life; nor is 
it in the absurd doctrine that one must needs sutler here 
in order to be happy hereafter. It does not flow in the 
human inequality plan of master and servant. All those 
ideals are in error. They have been formulated and 
taught in the interests of class, and the abominations of 
J servitude. Slavery is not yet half abolished. But, glory 
be to the functional powers of thinking, its chains are 
becoming weaker. 

The plan of life is that one who seeks, with all the 
heart, to unfold his or her potentially grand life into 
the kingdom of God, shall not want for the things need¬ 
ful of earth. It is not that one shall seek the kingdom 
of God, in order to obtain “these things.” In that 
experiment, he or she will receive neither. But to seek 
the kingdom for the kingdom’s sake, is to have all 
things needful and to have them in abounding abund¬ 
ance. Principle does not ask one to believe that doc¬ 
trine. The very idea of exercising faith to the end here 
considered implicates selfishness, or what is far worse, 
it indicates such a degradation of life as would bring 
the higher into servitude to the lower. 

Nor need one dismiss all desire for worldly means. 
That is not called for. The point about that is that 
material possessions should always be sought as a means 
to a higher end. In that way they may be sought in 
connection with seeking the Kingdom. That is saying 
it all. Now, if one seek the Kingdom of God—seek to 
unfold his life into it—and at the same time seek material 
prosperity as a means to enable him to induce others 
to do likewise, or to the more effectively spread a knowl¬ 
edge of the riches of that Kingdom, he or she will abund¬ 
antly prosper. Just try the experiment, and you will 
see for yourself. 

I do not lay so much stress on the function of faith, 
in connection with methods of thinking, as most writers 
do. I emphasize faith as necessarily functional to cer¬ 
tain stages of man’s rise, but for one who is in the slime 
of evil, or in the throes of affliction, I would not pro- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


307 


claim faith. Rather would I command him to think. 
There is more safety in thinking to the best ideals which 
even the impoverished heart can propagate, than in any 
struggles, however honest, to exercise faith in human 
creeds. 

If one will diligently seek to apply such methods 
of thinking to unfoldment as are here laid down, he or 
she will prosper in all things of this world, as well as in 
the higher and grander things of invisible life. 

“Whosoever shall seek to save his life shall lose it.’’ 
If one seek to live always in his present state he will 
fail. He cannot continue as he is. He must rise. If 
he seek to save his life to himself alone he will lose it. 
His life belongs to the neighbor. If one seek material 
prosperity to gratify the flesh only, he will multiply 
error, increase afflictions and propagate terrible obsta¬ 
cles to the realization of happiness. We see those who 
are in our day seeking to barter their riches at the door 
of Principle in exchange for happiness. But that com¬ 
merce is a failure. Principle will not permit its temples 
to become market places. One cannot draw the life blood 
from God’s poor, and devote it for the dissemination of 
science and find the Kingdom of God, except through 
awful affliction. Our eyes do not behold all the suffer¬ 
ings of man. 

The grandest thing about the material prosperity of 
the thinker, which crowns his pathway with glory, is 
that it comes without leaving the sting of poverty and 
want in its source. “All things work together for good 
to them that love the Lord.” Principle delights to sur¬ 
prise its children. It often disappoints just before the 
dawn. Its gifts are always a relief, and are therefore 
all the more functional. He who sets about the work of 
thinking to unfold his life into the Greater Kingdom— 
greater because of the addition of his own grand life, 
taking no thought of the things needful for the lower 
life, will find that life filled with successive and happy 
surprises, rising from the unfoldment of his environment,. 
Principle is not stingy, neither is it profligate. 


EXERCISE XLVIL 


NATURALNESS. 

How to become natural—To be right within is to be 
all right without—The mask of affectation—It is 
the inward, invisible person who smiles, and laughs, 
and talks and walks, or such expressions are a sham 
—The visible body a disguise—Foundations of per¬ 
petual youth. 


WHEN one expresses, in any way, that which is not 
a part of his or her unfoldment, that one is self placed 
at a great disadvantage. It is probably a greater defect 
in the bearing of a man than of a woman. That may 
be because the world, by long cherished custom, grants 
to a woman, without objection, a wider latitude for affec¬ 
tation. That, however, should not be the case. One 
should always stand, in all things, upon the solid ground 
of naturalness. If an attempt be made, by smiles, words, 
manners, demeanor, or actions to express tones of life 
which are not a part of the life organization, by unfold¬ 
ment, such expressions are always in the fact of a failure. 
There is no real force in them. 

If one will become right by right thinking, their 
natural expressions—their unbridled manners—will be 
all right. It is the same with every force that can con¬ 
tact one’s life organization from without. If one be in 
Harmony within, nothing from without can disturb, an¬ 
noy or afflict. On the other hand, if the invisible part 
of one’s life be harmonious—in tune with Truth—its 
expressions will be best, and most captivating, when com¬ 
pletely natural. That which is here said applies with 
equal force to the woman and to the man. 

All shams of expression, Avhether they come forth in 
looks, smiles, bearing, words or actions, are manufac¬ 
tured to order, for the purpose of hiding conscious de¬ 
fects in the life within, which is the real life. People 
sometimes say, within themselves, that they wish they 
could appear like so and so—talk like them, smile like 
them, walk like them, act like them. Thus they begin 
to think. Now, see how quickly those thoughts find ex¬ 
pression. Before they are conscious of the fact they are 
talking, smiling, walking, and acting in imitation of those 
people. That is affectation; that is sham. Where is the 
sense in one copying the expressions of another? In the 

( 308 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


309 


first place, it is theft. Then, it may be that those whom 
they strive to imitate stole their modes of expression from 
another. One can easily see that society would become 
both flat and shallow by such misguided conduct. 

As young people move out into society they discover 
their own defects in the light of the more perfect expres¬ 
sions of others. What then? As a rule they begin to 
imitate. They affect the expressions of others, but as 
they cannot reproduce what they have tried to copy, 
perfectly, they endeavor to satisfy themselves with a 
poor imitation. Thus, it is said, they learn. Learning is 
very proper in its rightful sphere, but no human can ever 
learn to express what is not in him or her. 

It must be admitted that one who is disorganized, 
or, who has become discordant within—one who has 
fallen behind in the work of life unfoldment by proper 
methods of thinking—will naturally seek to disguise their 
real status under a mask of affectation. Until they find 
out how to overcome their defects, they are excusable 
for doing so. But, by such a course, they rob themselves 
of life’s greatest joys. As soon as they apply themselves 
to thinking in the plan of unfolding their lives to the 
best ideals of expression which they find themselves able 
to propagate, they will discover themselves in posses¬ 
sion of something abiding within which is worth express¬ 
ing. That will propagate a new joy. Happy, indeed, is 
the person who can truthfully say, “I am growing and 
unfolding within.” As soon as a little progress is made 
on that line there will be no further attempt made at 
disguise. 

One who is beginning to unfold within is very much 
like a child who has been provided with a new dress. 
They will desire to show it. They will want to wear it. 
I have figured out in my own way of thinking, that at 
least one-half of the smiling and laughter of young peo¬ 
ple in parlor gatherings is “put on.” There is but little 
joy and gladness in it. Some of it is real and wholesome. 
You can easily tell when it “rings true.” When smiles 
and laughter come from the unfolded life within, there 
cannot be too much of either, but I am compelled to say 
that when such comes to pass, both will be diminished, 
and laughter will cease to compete with a brass band. 
The smile will be sweeter, and the laughter will ring 
with a purer and a softer melody. 

City young people, in the middle classes of society, 
are transforming laughter into screaming. There is, as 
a rule, very little gentleness and sweetness in it. It is 
boisterous, unnatural and betrays, to the careful thinker, 




310 


THE NEW IDEA. 


a poverty of inward life, which is mechanically illus¬ 
trated by pounding on the bottom of an empty tin pan. 

Dear young people, you can never learn how to 
smile, or to laugh. It is impossible. Those accomplish¬ 
ments unfold only by thinking in methods of Principle. 
It is more than probable that young people have never 
realized that great fact. Smiling and laughing are real 
expressions of the tones of the inward life, or else they 
are shams, and shams are of no good to any one. The 
sham smile and the sham laughter, although automatic 
in habit, will never make any one happy. 

It is the same with all other forms and tones of life 
expression. They must stand for inward realities, or 
they cannot rise above the worthlessness of an empty 
show. It is the invisible man or woman who smiles, and 
laughs, and talks and walks, or else the smiling and 
laughing and talking, and walking are in falsehood. This 
visible body, with its wonderful sentient organism, is 
a most astonishingly convenient mask. Within it we 
hide a multitude of moral and intellectual deformities 
and short comings. If the mask were torn off, and the 
invisible form of life could, in that way, be revealed, 
what a terrible shock would result. It would be seen 
just how neglectfully, how careless, and how shamefully 
one treats the higher self—the new and rising form which 
each is appointed to unfold by thinking. It is doubtless 
a matter of the wisdom of Principle that our vision is 
limited. One sometimes wishes he or she could look 
into the upper and purer spheres of now invisible life, 
but if that vision were granted it would reveal condi¬ 
tions within which are, as yet, better in hiding from the 
gaze of self and other selves. 

What has here been said to young people, may, from 
another standpoint, be said to the older grown. But that 
last word may be in error. Have many not ceased to 
grow in more senses than one? It is a most remarkable 
fact that physical maturity, which is in even eventuation 
with the full exercise of volition, desire, choice and 
motive, rises at a point where the life organization be¬ 
gins, at least outwardly, to decline. Is it not possible, 
even probable, that if man should, from the point named, 
date the beginning of a new era of life unfoldment within, 
by thinking, such a course would at least, arrest the 
decline, and perpetuate unimpaired physical and intel¬ 
lectual manhood. This paragraph is worthy of long and 
serious study. Within its small boundary may be one 
of the most important discoveries of any age. I strongly 
advise those who are rising to middle age to put this 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


311 


new idea to the test, and if they do, some of them'will 
succeed in confirming the greatest discovery since the 
birth of the human race. 

If man, at that point wherein he has attained his 
full physical growth, shall enter upon the unfoldment 
of the new man within, will not the visible outer man 
live on continuously, to the full extent and measure of. 
his internal unfoldment? Is there not in that brief in¬ 
quiry the real secret of perpetual youth? The author 
answers in the affirmative. It may require one, or pos¬ 
sibly two generations, to perfect, in form and practice, 
the necessary methods of thinking. But there is no other 
limitation. That great subject is partly elaborated in 
the following exercise. 


EXERCISE XLYIII. 


PERPETUAL YOUTH AND HEALTH. 

A marvelous Revelation—All visible forms of life in the 
actuality of physical subvesture tones—They appear 
different in perception only—Death is swallowed up 
by their unfoldment into the higher and invisible 
sides of the concrete forms of life—Importance of 
the lower physical—Perpetual youth and health eas¬ 
ily attained and maintained by thinking in proper 
methods. 


WE reach the highest thought summit of the vol¬ 
ume in this exercise; and, also that method of thinking 
which most strongly appeals to man. Every now and 
then some one sets up a claim to the discovery of the 
secret of “perpetual youth.” In that respect the sub¬ 
ject has been twin brother to so called perpetual motion. 
Man continues to delve into these two problems, and, 
every now and then it is announced that one of them has 
been solved. As to the latter, it is already discovered 
in the fact of life. The oscillations of the Two Prin¬ 
ciples in life units, and mass bodies thereof, is the only 
source of perpetual motion. It is the source and con¬ 
trolling power of all natural motion in our universe. 
The motions of the earth correspond exactly with the 
oscillations of the units, and unit organizations of which 
it is composed, and by which they are propagated re¬ 
spectively. Life is perpetual motion. 

But the most astonishing fact is that normal life is 
always in perpetual youth. It is only abnormal life that 
becomes old, senile, and decrepit. When I had brought 
to clear vision the so called secret of perpetual youth, 
the first thing that flashed across my mind was that the 
discovery is not so much in that of the plan by which 
that greatly desired blessing may be realized, as it is 
in the processes by which it is prevented or defeated. 

Perpetual youth of the visible body, and of the 
whole invisible life—of the whole life organization, vis¬ 
ible and invisible, is natural. It proceeds naturally bv 
a compliance with the demands of the plan of life. It 
is in the destiny of man. That it does not prevail in the 
human race today, is due to a perversion of the simple 
plan of life—to a disregard of the manifest commands 
of Principle. Just as soon as man conforms to the de- 
( 312 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


313 


mands of Principle, he will live in perpetual youth, here 
on the earth, both as to his visible body, and as to his 
higher invisible life organzation. Neither will ever be¬ 
come old, nor decline towards decay and dissolution. 

That is a bold statement, but it is in Truth. It is 
according to science; it is in the plan of Principle. It 
is without qualification. It is the Truth. The body of 
Jesus did not, and could not, suffer dissolution—the dis¬ 
persion of its units. By the crucifixion his invisible form 
was precipitated from the visible one, but it immediately 
returned to that body, and propagated it to the risen 
form, leaving nothing behind. We shall come to under¬ 
stand that more fully later. 

That example was set for the emulation of man 
generally. It is in the plan of life that men and women 
shall rise to perform all the works that Jesus did, and 
to achieve even greater wonders. Those who insist on 
investing the life organization of the Nazarene with 
functional potentialities which are not the heritage of 
all mankind, do the Master and mankind, both, a great 
injustice. The sole difference between the man Jesus, 
and men of our day, exists in the difference in their 
respective degrees of unfoldment. He was not what he 
could not prevent, but he was, grandly and transcend- 
ently, that which, by thinking in Principle, he gloriously 
became. He was self-made in the highest, fullest, and 
grandest acceptance of that term. 

We start with the self-evident premises that perpet¬ 
ual youth, of both “body, mind and soul,” is in the fact 
of normal, natural life, and that old age of the visible 
body is abnormal and unnatural. The latter is unnec¬ 
essary, and conies wholly of an abuse, and a defiance of 
the plan of life. If man will conform to the plan of life 
he “shall never die,” neither as to the visible body, nor 
in the higher departments of his wonderful life organi¬ 
zation. That I shall be able to clearly bring to vision 
in this exercise. 

The student will, no doubt, wonder at the plain, 
“matter of course” manner in which I am dealing with 
the most transcendent fact of human life. The suppo¬ 
sition, no doubt, in his or her mind, is, that the perpetual 
youth here spoken of is concomitant only to the risen, 
transformed life in spheres higher than the human. 
Nothing of the sort. I teach the perpetual, continuous 
life, in everlasting health and happiness, joy and glad¬ 
ness, peace and plenty of man here on the earth, and. I 
repeat, that this doctrine reaches out and includes the 
visible body of flesh, blood and bone. 


314 


THE NEW IDEA. 


All that has been said in this volume, up to this 
time, is in a plan calculated to prepare the student not 
only to understand, and appropriate that doctrine, but 
to practice in it, to the unfoldment, in liis own life, of 
health and happiness, in perpetual youth. But at this 
threshold the reader must be warned against the possible 
idea that one, no matter what his age, or psychological 
condition in correspondence therewith, can jump up into 
the status of perpetual youth and health by a single 
thinking bound, no matter what the method. That is 
not possible. 

Let us first examine into the causes which have 
pushed man out of the natural channel of perpetual 
youth and health, and then we shall be the better pre¬ 
pared to enter upon methods of thinking to their prop¬ 
agation. 

Prom the standpoint of physical subvesture life, man 
enters the human state in a visible body, which is prop¬ 
agated for him, in our times by the transcendent func¬ 
tions of wedlock. He is born into human life, from the 
next lower man sphere, by the propagation of the think¬ 
ing of his invisible form, jointly with maternal thinking, 
which mutual thinking, or propagation, is in the actuality 
of the reciprocal alternations of the spiritual and celes¬ 
tial Principles, which are Power and Love, commonly 
called the male and female functions. 

When the infant human comes forth in a visible 
body, thus propagated, a most wonderful work of cre¬ 
ation has been wrought, the period of its achievement 
covering, however, but a brief space. In that short time, 
so to speak, the life organization has risen from the 
next lower pre-human man estate to the threshhold of 
the human spheres, in a new form ; that is to say, the life 
organization has received a new body to fit its more ad¬ 
vanced form. But it must be remembered that those 
processes are not merely resolved to the encasement of 
an invisible life organization into a visible physical body. 
They reach out infinitely beyond such functions. The 
whole sweep of physiological psychology is here involved. 
Dr. George Trumbull Ladd would require to but slightly 
revise his volume entitled “Physiological Psychology,” 
to bring it into perfect harmony with these teachings. 

In the secret chamber of propagation, where the new 
form is raised to a higher mass tone, by the thinking 
in fellowship of the almost infinite number of units en¬ 
gaged in tfie co-operative work, the following results 
of creation are accomplished: (1) The rising invisible 
form is clothed by garments made from physical sub- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


315 


vesture tones, which are spun and woven—propagated 
—by the thinking in fellowship of units which them¬ 
selves are garmented with physical subvestures; (2) by 
those processes all the units, high and low, composing 
the rising invisible form are raised a tone higher, wherein 
their vestures are changed; (3) thus it is seen that in 
receiving a human body, the whole life organization is 
raised to a new metamorphosis. 

Such are the wonderful functions of physical sub¬ 
vesture tones, and that is their highest mission in de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence. 

I ask permission to digress a little at this point. 
The average student Avill read the foregoing paragraph, 
and probably say, “I cannot understand that.’’ I should 
be greatly disappointed were the result in any other fact. 
This volume would be of little real service, if by a first 
reading one could rise to its full and complete under¬ 
standing. It is by rising, in persistent thinking, that one 
will come into a clear vision of those doctrines of Truth, 
and, of course, in that way, the student must realize a 
corresponding unfoldment of his or her life organization. 

Let me tell you briefly of my own persistence in 
thinking these great facts into psychological vision. In 
the first place, I put the questions to self, “Is perpetual 
youth and health of body in the plan of life? Is it in 
Principle? Is it in Truth? Of course the true answer 
could come only in the exercise of Faith. Faith cannot 
be exercised in a fallacy. It functions only in Truth, 
and its voice cannot lie. Instructions are given else¬ 
where in this volume for the exercise of Faith. 

Faith answered all of the foregoing inquiries in the 
affirmative. That was not an easy, nor was it a short 
exercise. I devoted years, off and on, so to speak, at 
that work. The long time required rose from the fact 
that I did not, then, know how to exercise Faith. I had 
not then unfolded the method. The student can easily 
do that from instructions given in this book and in that 
way profit by the struggles of another. 

As soon as I came to know that perpetual youth and 
health, for man now and always was in the plan of life 
by Principle, I sent out into the heights and depths, 
and breadths of potential environment, the ringing ques¬ 
tion, “Tell me how, by thinking, the mighty blessing is 
attained?” I kept knocking and knocking at the doors 
of environment with that question, for a long time. 1 
practiced on desire, in volition, choice and motive, day 
by day. I worked faithfully in secret and in silence. 


31t> 


THE NEW IDEA. 


I knew it would not do to tell any one what I was think¬ 
ing to unfold. That would have worked ruin to my 
efforts. Hence I maintained silence. I brought the full 
functions of the power of silence to my aid, and listened 
long and patiently for its voice in return. It finally 
came in an overpowering flood of light. That no human 
being could describe by words. 

But the task was not easy. It was performed 
through and over many obstacles. Many discourage¬ 
ments crossed the pathway. When the second year of 
effort ended, I had some light, but there were more clouds 
than light. I became very much discouraged. I felt that 
if my family and friends had known how I was occupy¬ 
ing much of my time and devoting my best energies, 
they would have been alarmed. But I said nothing. I 
determined to think on. Of course, I realized that I had 
probably not unfolded sufficiently on other lines to be 
able to receive so great knowledge, and acting on those 
thoughts, I made effort to prepare myself. 

As the light began to dawn, the facts of reincarna¬ 
tion appeared to monopolize the whole vision, and I was 
confused by a host of apparent contradictions. Facts 
would not harmonize, and, in the conflicting vision I was 
almost ready to quit. I exercised the functions of per¬ 
sistence and patience. In that effort I developed persist¬ 
ence almost abnormally, and unfolded patience, which 
had always ^>een very feeble, into robust functions. I 
began to exercise Faith without much effort, and motive 
was raised to a lofty standard. I lost sight of self, and 
thought only of benefits to mankind. 

One day—it was the Sabbath—I did my hardest 
thinking, but clouds rose and I gave up the effort, but 
not in despair. In some way I had complete Faith. 
About 10 o’clock that evening, while walking the floor, 
and apparently doing little or no thinking, consciously, 
a flood of light burst on my raptured vision and I saw' 
the whole grand plan of life in its mighty infinite sweep. 
Perpetual Youth and Health were the central figure— 
that from which everything else appeared to radiate. I 
w r as much afraid that the clear vision would depart, or 
fade, and I began to write. I transcribed it, as far as I 
w'as able, as rapidly as possible, but it did not fade. It 
still abides. It became a fixed part of my life. It is 
brighter and clearer today than when its realities, in 
their first functions, overcame my physical strength. 

But how shall I reduce that vision to cold type, so 
that the student will behold it in concepts all his own? 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


317 


Let us return to that point where I asked permission 
for this digression. I had concluded a paragraph bv 
saying that: “Thus^it is seen that in receiving a human 
body, the whole life organization is raised to a new meta¬ 
morphosis.” The technique of human propagation by 
which the invisible forms of life, rising from the next 
lower pre-human man spheres are transformed to the 
human mass tone is of transcendent functions. It is a 
method of propagation, by thinking, wherein Principle, 
by its wonderful oscillations, spins and weaves a form 
of life in a high degree of Harmony. It is the first form 
of life, on the rising arc of evolution, wherein all the 
vesture tones of life are fluxed together in a metamor¬ 
phosis containing active potentialities, sufficient in then- 
scope for self-life unfoldment, by the exercise of volition, 
desire, choice and motive. That should be brought to 
clear vision. 

Now it is plain—self-evident—that all those tone 
functions should be unfolded as a whole—all together— 
into a mass tone rising life. Wherein do we find biolog¬ 
ical authority for thinking to unfold one set, or a part, 
of such tone functions, leaving another set to fall behind, 
and to become impotent? Nowhere. 

Again, it must be remembered, in correlation, that 
in the transformation, by which the human metamorpho¬ 
sis rose, there was a transposition of the duality of con¬ 
sciousness; that is to say, the new and more expanded 
consciousness—the invisible psychological organism- 
rose from the new form, with the spiritual side in the 
subjective, and the celestial side in the objective, or 
rather, with the first in potential control, and the last in 
functions of potential obedience and reciprocity, where¬ 
as, prior to that, the reverse was in the plan of life, and 
in force. That transposition is wherein self—the higher 
and lower selves of man’s duality—join in spiritual and 
celestial thinking, by which the higher invisble form of 
self is self propagated. Think on those points, until in 
some measure, they are brought to vision. 

Now, by this plan, which is in Principle, the whole 
life, body, mind, and soul, or, both its spiritual and celes¬ 
tial triads, rise simultaneously, or in tone correspond¬ 
ences. That sort of rise, or life unfoldment, is natural. 
Any other plan of rise, or attempted unfoldment, is un¬ 
natural and abnormal. 

That rise, or unfoldment of the life organization is, 
of course, by its units. Please try to see that very plainly. 
Then, in the unfoldment from subvesture spheres to the 
full tone of the physical zone, the units shed their plivsi- 


318 


THE NEW IDEA. 


cal sub vesture tones, by which, in reciprocity with the 
higher functions, the unfoldment is accomplished. When 
it is said that the units shed their lower tones, that, of 
course, reaches out to include the whole visible bodj^. 
One will easily see how that is a fact. Now, those sub¬ 
vesture tones are not shed, in the sense of being left be¬ 
hind. They are withdrawn, swallowed up, if you please. 
In other words, they cease to exist by ceasing to function, 
because they function only as degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence and only in functional perception. 

It is necessary to understand, fully, each step of that 
unfoldment. Such cannot be accomplished in one read¬ 
ing, but it grandly will be achieved by study—by 
thinking. 

We say that the unfoldment, or rise, of the whole 
life as here stated is by thinking in the methods of Prin¬ 
ciple, and that the degrees of that rise are imperceptible 
in perception. We do not perceive each degree, or step, 
or fold, of that rise. It is by unfolding degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence, which are, in the facts of tone 
potentialities. Do you not see the grandeur of the pro¬ 
cesses of propagation by thinking? It is in comprehend¬ 
ing this part of life unfoldment, that a knowledge of 
unit organism, as taught in earlier portions of this vol¬ 
ume, become functional. 

We must now bring forward other steps in this won¬ 
derful plan. There is, after birth, a double period of 
infancy and childhood. In those periods the human body 
—the whole human form of life—unfolds from the func¬ 
tions of the suggestions of environment, and from the 
swelling germ plasm composing the concrete form. In 
those stages, Principle achieves a mighty work of crea¬ 
tion. By spinning and weaving from the substance of 
life plasm, the new human metamorphosis is unfolded, 
physically, celestially, spiritually, and psychologically. 
It should be remembered, and brought plainly to vision, 
that the psychological unfoldment here spoken of can 
proceed only by the rise and unfoldment of the physical, 
the celestial and the spiritual. The measure of the ex¬ 
pansion of the former is always the exact measure of the 
unfoldment of the three latter. All are one fact in 
process. 

I have not so implicated the functions of the physical 
heretofore, because we have held those in vision as a 
part of celestial forces or faculties, but there is an impor¬ 
tant sense in which physical subvesture tones function 
independently and jointly with all other potentialities. 

As stated elsewhere, that grand work goes on until 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


319 


psychological faculty functions are unfolded to a degree 
wherein consciousness, or the higher invisible life organ¬ 
ization, with the full reciprocal co-operation of the lower 
duality, takes control. That is wherein subjective con¬ 
sciousness, functioning in the will, becomes, or should 
become, supreme. That point, in human life is generally 
designated by the general term of “years of understand¬ 
ing,” or the age of “moral responsibility.” It is wherein 
duty, founded on motive, reaches out to the obedience of 
all the lower, to all the higher functions. 

At this point let me declare, bluntly, that it is be¬ 
cause that particular status of man’s life is passed care¬ 
lessly, and without a knowledge of its obligations, and 
transcendent opportunities, that men and women appear 
to die, bodily. It is because the physical subvesture 
tones are not unfolded in correspondence with the un- 
foldment of the higher tones. The student should devote 
hours of thought to the last two sentences! They signify 
more than will appear by a first, or second reading. 

When the whole thinking organism is handed over 
to the control of volition and the other faculties which 
function in obedience to it, there should be an awakening 
to the responsibilities and opportunities which then 
grandly rise. That transition state of human life is of 
transcendent importance. Almost everything of life 
hangs upon it. Its duties and possibilities are grand be¬ 
yond the powers of any language to express. Their neg¬ 
lect is productive of all the old age and so called death, 
which are in the world today. 

If, when one reaches those years of rising and un¬ 
folding understanding—years wherein psychological fac¬ 
ulties begin to function consciously, with conscious re¬ 
sults—there should be careful practice and training in 
methods of thinking calculated to unfold the whole life 
organization harmoniously; and, if that training and 
practice be kept up continuously and systematically, 
through these spheres, the next higher spheres of life 
would be entered much more grandly than Jesus entered 
them. There would be no apparent death of the body, 
when the boundary lines are crossed, and no aches or 
pains, or old age, before the crossing of the so called 
Jordan. 

Why do your visible bodies clog up and appear to 
die? The reasons could not all be elaborated in a volume 
twice the scope of this one. It is, in the first place, be¬ 
cause the lower tones are not unfolded, by proper meth¬ 
ods of thinking, into the higher unfolding functions; it 
is because men and women do not diet properly, and so 


320 


THE NEW IDEA. 


on. Dear student, think of this: We are not supposed 
to propagate the same grade of thoughts of the people 
of a thousand years ago, but higher and grander 
thoughts. Then how is it possible to eat the same physi¬ 
cal foods that men and women ate a thousand years ago, 
and do so? Do you not see that there must be the simul¬ 
taneous rise of the whole life? How can we have higher 
psychological foods, unless the psychological faculties 
are unfolded so as to appropriate them? How can the 
lower sentient and physical tone functions of life be un¬ 
folded, while they are weighted down, and imprisoned by 
gluttony? We have no business with most of the stomach 
foods indulged a thousand years ago, or with more than 
a tenth of those which would be utilized by the changed 
conditions. Is it in reason that even the human stomach, 
from a physical standpoint, can be expected to rise to 
higher functions, in keeping with the demands of evolu¬ 
tion, while it is surfeited three times a day with foods, 
most of which are properly functioned only in the stom¬ 
achs of the lower animals? 

The whole question of diet is of vast importance. 
J^ext to the functions of climate, diet has had more to 
do with the evolution of the human and the animal races 
than anything else. Read Dr. Mitchell’s little volume on 
the “Evolution of Life,” for proof of that statement. 
While man continues to be a flesh eater, he must, meta¬ 
phorically speaking, expect that his body will be com¬ 
pelled to suffer the dispersion of its units in that alto¬ 
gether unnecessary event miscalled death. Man, as a 
rule, takes but little interest in his physical body, and 
cares less as to the character or quantity of the physical 
foods he forces into its stomach, provided they produce 
temporarily pleasant sensations. 

Suppose man begin a study of the human body, and 
in thinking to unfold into a knowledge of it, he come to 
see in what wonderful way there is the intermingling 
and fluxing together of all its tones into mass tone, the 
result will be that vision will be extended to the fact that 
all the tones are necessary to an affective mass tone. In 
the earlier portions of this volume mass tone is elabor¬ 
ated. The student has use for that knowledge in this 
connection. I desire, here, to impress upon the student 
the great fact that when a life organization, such as a 
human, rises into mass tone with the physical subvesture 
tones left out, there is not that unfoldment of the visible 
part of the body which works out its perpetual growth 
and health. If what is intended to be conveyed in that 
last sentence can be appropriated to full understanding, 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


321 


then the student is in possession of the key to this whole 
problem. 

Doctrines have been promulgated in our world 
reaching out to a denial of things of the flesh—a lower 
self denial which has resulted in banishing from thinking 
processes, the transcendent functions of lower physical 
tones. That has gone on until man has come, in some 
measure, to deny the so called physical body, or lower 
physical tone functions, as to their utility in life unfold- 
ment. That classification known as “the world, the flesh 
and the devil,” is unfortunate. The world is all right, 
the flesh is indispensable to the rise of man, and there is 
no devil, except in an obsolete perception. We must 
come to understand that physical, even subvesture phys¬ 
ical functions are equally important in human evolution, 
with the higher tones. The latter cannot properly be 
unfolded to still higher functions, imless by the co-oper¬ 
ation of the former. 

When, by a proper and functional respect and ap¬ 
propriation of physical subvesture tones, in methods of 
thinking, there is bodily renewal, and when that pro¬ 
ceeds in exact correspondence with the renewal of higher 
functions, the body keeps pace with the unfoldment of 
the whole life, and bodily decay, with its ailments and 
afflictions, is impossible. As long as one is careful to 
unfold all sides of the life organization—all the tones of 
his form of life, equally, and in harmony, that thing 
called death cannot overtake him. 

In this connection we must call attention to present 
conditions which have come into function from long 
misuse of the faculties and powers of life. Take the 
average man at the age of forty-five, or even at forty, 
and, it will be seen that the lower physical side is in a 
state of congestion, wherein there is but little or no 
process. The units are oscillating slowly and intermit¬ 
tently. Their outer vesture tones are dark, and practi¬ 
cally nonfunctional. Thus the outer body i« clogging up 
and falling behind, and that will go on until, by that 
expulsive effort called death, it is thrown off altogether, 
to suffer the dispersion of its units, without their being 
unfolded into the mass tone of the invisible part of the 
life organization. That is another sentence which de¬ 
mands long and careful study. 

I do not teach that there can be a full measure of 
perpetual youth and health, to the complete overthrow 
of that event called death, in the life of one who has 
reached or passed middle age. without thinking in the 
plan of Principle for the unfoldment of the whole life 


'•22 


THE NEW IDEA. 


organization, but I do teach that the work can be taken 
up at any stage with most transcendent results, to the 
extent of a renewal of bodily tones in health, and a meas¬ 
ure of youth, so as practically to abolish the afflictions 
of old age. On the other hand, I sincerely teach that one 
commencing to think in proper methods, as years of un¬ 
derstanding dawn, and continuing so to think, on a 
rising scale, there will be for that one, perpetual youth 
and health, and the crossing of the boundary line, not 
from old age, but in robust conditions of health, which 
go along in the life organization to rise with it. 

Those, you say, are mighty achievements. Indeed, 
and in Truth they are. But the student must be fully 
persuaded that when men and women come to think in 
these degrees of wisdom and intelligencce, those results 
must follow. Think of this: The whole plan of life was 
t propagated by thinking in Principle. It is not, as yet, 
one-half unfolded. Is it not plain that the other half 
will be unfolded by man to conform to his desire, choice, 
and motive, functioning in volition? Who has yet 
grasped the mighty creative functions of human think¬ 
ing? Is it not seen that the future is all hidden in our 
ideals? Then it is important that they be cast in those 
moulds which Principle supplies, so that by thinking in 
the methods of Principle, we may the more speedily un¬ 
fold into them. 

I hear some one asking, “ What will become of the 
visible body when death is overcome in the victory of 
life, with all its attending hosts of functional percep¬ 
tions?'’ The answer is very simple. Its tones—and its 
tone potentialities and all that there are in it—will have 
been unfolded into the rising form of life. Nothing will 
be left behind. Such is the mighty plan of life. 

The student should practice in that method of think*- 
ing which resolves all things visible to physical sub¬ 
vesture tones, which tones are the instrumentalities of 
propagation, and which, in the plan of life, rise into the 
forms of life propagated by them. Such are the mighty 
functions of tone environment. There is no other kind 
of environment, high or low. 

It is within the possibilities of men and women, by 
thinking in methods of Principle, to unfold their evil 
tones—their tones of error, evil, affliction, old age, and, 
finally, that thing called death—into the glory and health 
of perpetual youth. They should begin that work most 
earnestly and at once. 

It is plainly seen that the limits of a single exercise 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 323 

are far too contracted for the elaboration of such a 
grand subject as perpetual youth. Therefore the neces¬ 
sity of the printed lectures and thinking schools which 
appear necessary to carry this whole system to higher 
ground. 


EXERCISE XLIX. 


THE HUMAN SONG. 

Not anything in the universe but tones—A tone is a 
thought—The blending of tones is in the actuality 
of thinking—Harmonics the key to self-life unfold- 
ment in perpetual youth and Health—Technique of 
thinking in Harmony—Neither sickness nor old age 
can find a place in the Harmonious form of life. 


FOLLOWING to a still higher summit, the line of 
thinking of the next previous exercise, and with a view 
to bringing to vision the technique of the proper method 
of thinking for life unfoldment in continuous youth and 
health, I must now declare that the whole life organi¬ 
zation of a man or a woman, or that of any other creat¬ 
ure, high or low, is composed exclusively of tones, de¬ 
grees of mass tone, and, as a whole, a sum-total mass 
tone. The latter is continuously expanding. 

That vision of the form of life is in Truth. It does 
not abolish the true idea of substance. A real tone— 
the tone of which the mechanical or vocal tone is but an 
expression is substance. A single tone of any form of 
life is discreted in a substare organism of Power, Love 
and Truth, each in a separate tone, or rate of oscillation, 
and the whole three in one primal mass tone. That is 
the ultimate mass tone. That substare unit is prior to 
the atom. When that substare tone is clothed with nine 
vestures, as in the case of the atom in physical subvest¬ 
ure spheres, it is in ten tones, as heretofore stated. Nine 
of them flux together into one mass tone, which is the 
tenth. 

A tone spins and weaves a vesture membrane which 
discretes it from anything else. Hence a tone is a dis¬ 
crete degTee of life. Its oscillations are in the fact of 
continuous degrees, as heretofore stated. They are called 
continuous, because the oscillations of the Two Princi¬ 
ples called Power and Love never cease. All tones are 
in relatively and interdependence with each other, from 
the highest to the lowest. The reach of relativity and 
interdependence is infinite. So also is the variety of 
tones. A tone is a thought, always. There is nothing 
in our universe but tones; nothing but thoughts. 

The lowest tones in our universe which enter into 
the life organization of man are those of the physical 

( 324 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


323 


subvestures. They are. by the sparks of their radia¬ 
tions, coarser than any of the higher tones. 

At the last analysis our universe is one Mighty, In¬ 
finite Harmonious Mass Tone, and that Transcendent 
All-Form is continuously rising and expanding. When 
we reach the harmonics of evolution, as we shall do in 
our lecture courses, we shall be in a delightfuly inspir¬ 
ing sphere of thinking. 

Now, for a base of thinking in Principle, let your 
thoughts reach out to the idea that the whole human 
life organization is composed of an infinite number of 
tones; and. they may be held in perception as very 
small, spherical, or oval points of life. It will be re¬ 
membered that no two of those tones are exactly alike, 
even in the same class. From and including the lowest, 
to and including the highest, there are twelve classes of 
tones in our universe. The ten tones of an atom are 
one within the other, the finer within the coarser, as to 
nine. The mass tone of that unit includes them all 
in one. 

The infinite number of discreted tones in a human 
form are fluxing together in continuous propagation 
which is in processes of thinking, and. from those proc¬ 
esses a new form of tone life is continuously rising. That 
is in the fact of evolution or life unfoldment. It is quite 
evident that such unfoldment should bring into potential 
functions each and all of the tones composing the pres¬ 
ent life, in order that the new and rising mass tone form 
shall be perfect. It is just as plain that when all the 
tones of the present form are in full function there must 
be a normal condition of that form. A normal condition 
is a healthy state. On the other hand, when a consid¬ 
erable number of the tones composing the mass form 
are allowed to become dormant, or non-functional, an 
abnormal condition must follow. An abnormal condi¬ 
tion is an unhealthy state. From what has been said 
in this exercise, it is easily seen that either a normal, 
or an abnormal result of thinking must extend to all 
parts of the tone organization. When a single note, or 
fraction thereof, is dropped, the harmony point reachea 
must be, to that extent, imperfect, or discordant. 

Discord in the otherwise great song of a human life 
organization is error, and therefore parent to evil, sick¬ 
ness, disease, old age, and that which is called dissolu¬ 
tion. The study of harmonics is, therefore, necessary 
to assist one in thinking in proper methods. A form 
tone of human life is a song. Thinking in Harmony is 
the grandest and most eloquent melody. It is in the 


326 


THE NEW IDEA. 


highest power of silence. The voice of that silence thrills 
the whole life to action—to higher processes. How 
could that song be perfect in all its parts with the bass 
notes left out? In an important sense they are the 
foundation,. 

It is seen from those observations that in joint 
spiritual and celestial thinking, not only is the celestial 
side indispensable, but the lowest sentient part thereof. 
One must function in physical subvesture tones. That 
is the point. The higher, one must do, without leaving 
the lower undone. It is plain that from the starting 
point of variety, the whole question of life unfoldment 
is resolved to progress in Harmony. The student must 
become harmonious. How? By thinking in the plan of 
Harmony, which is the plan of life. Do you not see 
from all that has been said in this volume up to this 
point, that to think in Harmony is to become harmo¬ 
nious? “As a man thinketh so is he.” 

We are now in a position to bring to vision, in a 
clearer light, what is meant by joint spiritual and celes¬ 
tial thinking. We bring into the light the triad tones of 
the spiritual side of our duality: then the triad tones of 
the celestial side; then the triad tones of the physical 
subvesture annex to the celestial. As we think of those 
three sets, or three different triads of tones, they each 
and all begin to sing—begin to function—in response to 
such thinking processes, in propagation, to the rising new 
form, and we can psychologically see the new risen tone 
units passing into that new life, as we so think. That 
is the method. Do you not now feel, as you study these 
facts in appropriation, that knowledge is unfolding with¬ 
in you? 

By that method persistently practiced in love and af¬ 
fection, which are the wings of Principle, there is the 
renewal of the whole life organization. One so thinking 
must soon rise out of ailments and all sorts of affliction. 
Old age and its infirmities cannot find a place to func¬ 
tion in life while its song is harmonious. 

The technique of renewal— unit-tone renewal—should 
be held in steady vision. It consists in the fact that by 
the fellowship thinking of tones, new tones are propa¬ 
gated, and the old ones are cast off. or swallowed up. 
They disappear in the fact of renewal. Renewal is re¬ 
generation. 


EXERCISE L. 


REALITIES OF EVOLUTION. 

Real source of the new—Birth of new facts—The think¬ 
ing of a thousand years ago largely obsolete now— 
Man is changing—The devil, and hell—Their ex¬ 
tinction—Death is also to be abolished—Potential 
evil, sickness and disease are passing out—The great 
new fact of the Universe. 


LET US turn from the regular channel of these stud¬ 
ies for a few minutes, to contemplate another line of 
thinking, also potential to unfoldment. It will enable 
ns to see the real source of the new in thought. 

Those who cling to the old things of life, opposing 
new interpretations of Truth, and discouraging the dis¬ 
covery of new facts are reminded that evolution is produc¬ 
ing—propagating— new facts, day by day, year by year, 
and century by century. There are facts in existence to¬ 
day which had no place in life a year ago, or a century 
ago. Not all of the forces which enter into human life 
to affect its progress in our day existed since time began. 
Most of them are new. That is not said merely as to 
their discovery, but as .to their birth and existence. 

Many of the diseases which afflict man in our times 
have come into existence within a hundred years. They 
had no force, and did not function previous to that period. 
Their germs were actually born within a century. 

The same may be said of many of the most potent 
forces in life. Progress is widening, as well as advancing, 
in its sweep. How can the present generation be content 
with the thinking of one or two thousand years ago. In 
those days many of the facts and functions of life which 
now prevail did not exist, and it is fair to assume that 
the students of those times knew nothing about them. Not 
only is that the case, but nearly every form and function 
of life which then obtained has since changed—unfolded 
to something different. The man of today, and the man 
of two thousand years ago, differ in many very impor¬ 
tant essentials. Man does not think now as he did then. 
He does not propagate the same kind of thoughts. He 
has unfolded to the propagation of higher thoughts. 
Science, which is one of the most important factors of 
modern stages of evolution, is rapidly changing the char¬ 
acter of man, and the whole range of environment. 

( 327 ) 



328 


THE NEW IDEA. 


Hence, we say that the teachings of two thousand 
years ago, concerning the facts of life, cannot be appli¬ 
cable in our times, except when interpreted in the light 
of the changes and advances wrought by life unfold- 
ment. It is not necessary to go back more than a thou¬ 
sand years to secure the full function of contrast in that 
respect. How could the teachings of a thousand years 
ago be utilized today, except they be modified to conform 
to the new conditions of life? That fact applies to every 
department of knowledge. 

Less than five hundred years ago the race had a 
real hell, and a veritable devil. Today they have neither. 
The devil is dead and hell has been fumigated, so that the 
territory where once it was located is appropriated to 
useful purposes. Man, for the better and more advanced 
part has unfolded away and above those once potential 
evil forces. It is plainly taught in this volume that the 
items of potential evil cease to exist even in perception, 
whenever man is unfolded so as no longer to require the 
functions of such potentialities. 

Those two monsters have gone. We speak scientifi¬ 
cally when we say that the devil is dead. Something 
cannot die. Nothing can. Other potential evil forces 
are rapidly following. Already man begins to see that 
evil, disease, and death exist only in potential percep¬ 
tion, and that they are all doomed to extermination. 
They soon will be expelled from life root and branch. 

Hence, can we not all plainly see that old things are 
passing away and that all things are becoming new? 
How, then, can we live on the old? To do so induces the 
most miserable state of poverty. Jesus taught in the 
potential degrees of wisdom and intelligence of his earth¬ 
ly generation, else how could those who were contempo¬ 
rary with him have comprehended his teachings? Is 
it not plain that the symbols in use in those days must 
be resolved to visions of Truth in harmony with our more 
unfolded degrees of wisdom and intelligence? How stu¬ 
pid in us to suppose that the potentialities of five hun¬ 
dred, or a thousand years ago are still potential in the 
lives of the more advanced millions of our race! Have 
we not seen that those potentialities unfold? They are 
the tones of propagation which are resolving man to 
higher degrees of life. They must-unfold—become some¬ 
thing else, as it were—in order to continue functional 
for the unfoldment of man. 

Within two thousand years the most transcendent 
form of life in our universe has been organized. It had 
no existence in organic mass-tone life when the Man of 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


329 


Nazareth was born. I refer to the Invisible Brother¬ 
hood. That transcendent, All Harmonious organization 
of Risen Life, is now extending its glorious form through 
the first, second and third heavens of ether substance, in 
the fact of The Lord. That is the New Creature— the 
great consummation of Creation. It is in the early morn¬ 
ing of its organized mass-tone life. It is the new fact 
of creation—the unutterable Lord and King propagated 
from the potential riches of Principle, by the thinking of 
Mankind; and as man comes to think in higher degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, that glorious Form of Risen 
Life will rise more rapidly and become more transcend¬ 
ent in Glory and Power. That consummation of man¬ 
kind is the Rising Lord and Rightful King of the uni¬ 
verse. 

We say that the teachings vouchsafed to man two 
thousand years ago could not have thrown any consider¬ 
able light on that New Creature. It is true that Jesus 
opened the eyes of Peter, James and John to a Vision 
of things to come on the mount of transfiguration, but 
they did not understand its full purport. Flashes of 
inspiration, so-called, gathered from the rising floods of 
Faith, in the lives of seers and prophets revealed faint 
outlines of the coming “Lord of Lords, and King of 
Kings,” but that was all. Now we are able to bring the 
transhuman picture into plainer vision, and, as we rise 
by unfoldment, psychological vision is revealing its 
mighty realities. 

Thus we see, at least, clear cut outlines of the des¬ 
tiny of man. Thus Truth, while still to humans on the 
earth, in the fact of transfiguration, is slowly breaking 
into our vision, in strengthening outlines. Is this of ours 
not after all a gladsome day? Man, in the mad rush for 
material possessions, finds little or no time to look up 
towards the hills from which his strength comes, but 
invisible forces are generating and, in due time, the veil 
will be rent, and man will be confronted by a manifesta¬ 
tion from that Almighty Risen Life Organization, where¬ 
in the generations of the past so grandly dwell; and he 
will not only see the light, but hear the heavenly voiee, 
calling, “Saul, Saul, why persecutest thou me?” Then 
men will turn from their mad struggle after the perish¬ 
able, to seek that which fadeth not. 

Yes, man is rising into new conditions, and is soon 
to pass through the throes of conflict and sociological 
darkness, generally antecedent to the inauguration of a 
new and more glorious era. 


EXERCISE LI. 


NUXUS OF CHRISTIAN SCIENCE. 

The spirit is the substance life of the Lord—It is shed 
into the hearts of mankind by thinking to the ap¬ 
propriation of the life of the Risen Brotherhood— 
The rise of the Invincible Brotherhood dependent 
upon the thinking, or unfoldment of mankind. 


WHAT is spirit? In the earlier portions of this 
volume something has been said in answer to that en¬ 
quiry, but without elaboration. We have spoken of spir¬ 
it as very Life, Love, Truth, and as proceeding from 
Eternal Being through Principle into life. Human think¬ 
ing to spirituality is prone to hold the spirit in vision 
as a direct emanation from an unknowable God. Hence 
we meet with such expressions as the Spirit of God, the 
Spirit of Truth, the spirit of life, the Spirit of Christ, 
the spirit of man, and so on. Those terms are susceptible 
of different meanings. Without discussing them here, 
we proceed to enquire into the origin and nature of that 
spirit which Jesus said would fill the lives of his dis¬ 
ciples, in response to desire, as soon as he had risen and 
taken his place in the Lord. 

I have endeavored to explain that man, by thinking, 
unfolds an invisible form of life into the risen mass-tone 
life; that by his partly unfolded invisible life organiza¬ 
tion properly called consciousness, and the will, man is 
already, by substance and function a constituent of that 
risen mass-tone life of transformed humanity. Through 
that channel he has access to the riches of the real king¬ 
dom of God. He may think in the Lord, as already ex¬ 
plained, and when he does so in a purified heart, and a 
purified motive there is “shed abroad’’ in that heart—in 
that life—a flood of Light and Love, of Power and Truth, 
which are unspeakable. Man becomes filled with the 
Spirit, in that way, until his vision of life is clear and 
rapturous. It gives him a new life, a new heart, and 
he awakens to the thrill of regeneration in joy and glad¬ 
ness. Now, in that process, there is the appropriation 
of the life without—the life of risen Brotherhood—the 
Spirit substance of the Lord—just as there is in a lower 
degree, the appropriation of the spirit of life from visible 
fellowship; and, that which is in that way appropriated, 
by thinking in desire fluxes with the potential embryos 

( 330 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


331 


within, and there is the unfoldment of regeneration, or 
the regeneration of unfoldment, which ever you please. 
They are both one fact. 

That is the Spirit for which Christians pray, whether 
they are conscious of it or not. It is substance—the sub¬ 
stance of the Lord—the substance shed by the fellowship 
of Brotherhood in the Lord life, which propagates a 
germinating, healing, cleansifag, power-giving flow of 
pure, fine thoughts of spiritual substance, which per¬ 
meate the heart and life of man, propagating to new and 
exalted thoughts, in his rising life organization. It is in 
that way and from that source that man, by thinking in 
desire in the risen life, while here in flesh and blood, may 
appropriate the pure thoughts of the Lord, to the propa¬ 
gation of immortality in his own life; and man may well 
call such an inflow of pure life, “the descent of the 
Spirit.” I do not seek to change the terminology, only 
to elucidate the fact, so that man may more effectually 
think to the appropriation of that Spirit life. It is all 
resolved to man appropriating to unfoldment, the re¬ 
deeming regenerating thoughts of the risen life of man¬ 
kind. Please dwell on the latter sentence. It is life- 
giving. It is healthful. It is the higher salvation. 

That is a method of thinking which a man or a 
woman may safely employ in the church, or in the soli¬ 
tude of his closet. He who so thinks “believes” to some 
purpose. To believe is to think. Belief without thinking 
is dead. To exercise belief is to think, and to think is 
to unfold into knowledge. .That is the sort of belief 
that Jesus taught. 

Now, dear student, try to realize that man appro¬ 
priates the Spirit when he fellowships by consciousness, 
in the risen life of humanity, properly called the Lord; 
and that such appropriation is in the fact of thinking 
the thoughts of that transcendent mass-tone form of risen 
life, to the propagation of new and higher thoughts in his 
own life, whereby he unfolds it into higher degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence, health, power, and peace. That 
method is the nuxus of true Christian Science. 

But it must be remembered that the Risen Mass- 
tone life of mankind is, in great part, dependent upon 
visible man for its glorious rise and expansion. It is by 
the unfoldment of visible man into it that the invisible 
mass-tone life rises. Such is the sweep of interdepend¬ 
ence; such the grand plan of life. 


EXERCISE LII. 


CONSCIENCE. 

What is Conscience?—Psychological outlines—Principle 
all pervading—Sentient, or sub-consciousness—The 
Righteous Judge is the Risen Conscience in Mass- 
tone—Error and Evil exist in Perception only. 


AS WE! continue these exercises, in thinking, which 
implicate experimental psychology, it is hoped that the 
student is somewhat prepared for them from a careful 
study of all that precedes. The question is before us, 
What is Conscience? We have already seen, psycholog¬ 
ically, the fact of Consciousness. The other question 
naturally follows. What is the difference between Con¬ 
sciousness and Conscience? 

Methods of human thinking, or, more properly, meth¬ 
ods of thinking in the science of any Principle of which 
humans are capable involve all the psychological facul¬ 
ties of the life organization. Some of those functions 
are employed more than others, according to desire, 
choice and motive, but all are brought into activity, 
more or less. 

On the psychological side it is the same with breath¬ 
ing, and its accompanying heart pulsations. A full res¬ 
piration, directly and ultimately brings into function 
every unit of which the life organization is composed, 
some of them more, some of them less, but all in a 
measure of relativity, in one great mass tone vibration. 
Breathing is in the facts of vibration and motion both. 
It is produced by the oscillations of physically vestured 
units in mass-tone, and that mass-tone propagates to mo¬ 
tion; hence respiration. 

It is the same with a planet, such as our earth. The 
mass-tone vibration of its infinite number and variety 
of molecular and corpuscular units propagates to mo¬ 
tion; and, first, the earth breathes, and next it proceeds 
to motion on its orbit. That vibration, that breathing, 
and that orbital motion are all in conscious intelligence 
and wisdom, to which each unit is contributory. All 
vibration, and all motion, except those peculiar to mechan¬ 
ics in our universe, are in Principle, and as much expres¬ 
sions of intelligence and wisdom as are the processes of 
talking by humans. The only difference is in the de¬ 
grees expressed. The earth cannot go wrong; a man can. 

( 332 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


333 


We must come to see the origin and function of that 
difference. 

We are privileged by strong and instructive visions 
of the facts of life in the study of mass-tone. An elabora¬ 
tion of mass-tone breathing, as above stated reaches out 
to a mighty realm of thinking replete with rich rewards. 
It is the same with the sentient mass-tone. There is a 
mass tone of the five senses, which humans have not yet 
come to make use of, to any great extent. Its rise is per¬ 
ceived, and, hence, some say a sixth sense is unfolding. 
When humans come to function in the lower sentient 
mass tone consciousness, they will be able to tell us, for 
example, the contents of a parcel, by touching its outer 
covering, equally as well as by looking at its enclosures. 
One sense, that farthest from the one generally used to 
determine the matter, is all that is necessary. By sen¬ 
tient mass-tone, all the senses function as one. 

We often hear of objective consciousness, or sub¬ 
consciousness. What is that? It is the mass-tone of sen¬ 
tient functions—the mass-tone of the five sense percep¬ 
tions. It is error to suppose that, with the rise of the 
forms of life to the full tone of our zone, sentient con¬ 
sciousness will disappear. It will simply rise to a higher 
plane. The sentient side of life will always prevail, and 
in the final or upper celestial zone, it will function in the 
immortal celestial body, in a transcendent organism of 
fluid light. 

There is not only the sentient consciousness but, by 
its expressions, there is the sentient will. The correla¬ 
tions between the higher and lower selves in that re¬ 
spect are complete. There is the will of the invisible 
mass tone consciousness, and the will of the sentient, 
or sub-consciousness, and when ihose two make one in 
harmonious action, there is unfoldment into the Invisible 
Brotherhood, and the renewal of youth and health. 

There is also the consciousness and the will of the 
spiritual side of man’s duality which is in complete 
correspondence with the sentient, or celestial conscious¬ 
ness. 

We are concerned, at present, with a study of that 
phenomena, and with the general functions of group 
mass-tones, in order that we may bring to vision the 
origin and functions of Conscience. Therefore,, I call at¬ 
tention to the mass-tone of the spiritual side of life. The 
sentient side has simply been referred to in passing. 
There is a mass-tone of the spiritual side of man’s duality, 
which has been recognized through many past ages. In 
classical mythology it is called Psyche, meaning the soul. 


334 


THE NEW IDEA. 


In mystics, Psyche is a lovely maiden, known as mistress 
of Eros, or Cupid, but it lias generally been held in mys¬ 
tic lore as personifying the soul. The spiritual and ce¬ 
lestial mass tones make one. However, a mistake has, in 
all ages been made as to the fact of the soul. It is not 
the mass tone of the spiritual triad of man’s life organi¬ 
zation, but it is in the fact of the new man— the invisible 
psychological organism of consciousness, which latter is 
propagated by the joint thinking of the spiritual and 
celestial functions of man’s duality. 

There is a personality to every functional mass-tone, 
just as there is to the rising human invisible form of life, 
and to the Great Invisible mass-tone life of Humanity. 
We now come to the psychological organization of man. 
It is in one great invisible mass-tone form of life properly 
called Consciousness. The whole is in a transcendent 
fact of personality, and each one of the innumerable 
groups of faculties composing it is in the functions of an 
individual form of life. These latter are in family or 
kindred groups. The will, and its household is the whole, 
because the will is the expression of Consciousness as 
already stated. The groups composing Consciousness 
are each in a mass-tone peculiar to its sociological organ¬ 
ization. Now, we know that there is the moral faculty 
group. That is a most transcendent unfoldment—a won¬ 
derful community of faculty individuals—each in the 
glory of conscious wisdom and intelligence, because each 
is in the fact of a lesser mass-tone, and therefore must 
propagate to its own invisible consciousness. 

What shall we call that individual which is in the 
fact of a mass-tone of all the moral faculties of a human ? 
Of course the student is already able to answer cor¬ 
rectly by saying: Conscience is the consciousness of the 
moral faculty group of the human psychological life or¬ 
ganization. To those who have risen to even primary 
methods of psychological thinking—thinking in even 
the old fashioned methods of psychology—nothing could 
well be plainer than that. It is self evident. And yet 
the author doubts very much whether the student has 
ever, aside from these teachings, been led to see just 
what Conscience is. It has always been held that Con¬ 
science was, in some way, related, or connected with' 
Consciousness, but now, not only is that relationship 
settled, but we see just what part of Consciousness Con¬ 
science is. It is the Consciousness of the moral faculty 
group of the human psychological organization. More¬ 
over, the student has probably never, outside of this vol- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


335 


ume, received a satisfactory explanation of the fact of 
Consciousness and The Will. 

We now can see what is meant by the voice of Con¬ 
science; how it is that Conscience speaks to Conscious¬ 
ness-appeals to Consciousness, and to all the faculties, 
respectively, within its mighty mass-tone. Science is 
correct in defining Conscience as Consciousness. That 
it does, primarily. It is not the whole of Consciousness, 
but rather that part which is the mass-tone of the moral 
faculty group, and which, as such, functions to inform 
the sum-total Consciousness of a human, as to the char¬ 
acter of his motives and actions. Science has also de¬ 
fined it as “the moral faculty;” or, “the moral sense.” 
Those definitions are close to the mark. It is all the 
moral faculties in mass-tone. Science has hitherto not 
been as fortunate in its definitions of the greater fact 
of Consciousness, as already has been seen. 

The moral faculties function to teach duty and ob¬ 
ligation; they determine the character of intentions and 
actions, by which functions there is revealed through 
consciousness a vision as to their righteousness or wrong¬ 
fulness. It is by the voice of Conscience that virtue and 
vice, good and evil are revealed to Consciousness. That 
observation faces us with an important consideration. 
Can evil and vice enter the invisible life organization 
and function there? If the higher Consciousness is in 
the fact of the invisible form of life of man rising from 
the visible one, in propagation, and if such invisible 
form of life associates and fellowships in the fact and 
function of the Lord: and, lastly, if evil and vice are 
propagated into that invisible rising form of life then 
there must be evil in the Lord. 

It is seen from what has been said in previous Exer¬ 
cises that there is a difference between the invisible 
forms of life which pass from the human stage of action 
to invisible spheres. Those which passed on before the 
unfoldment of the Celestial Principle wrought the mighty 
achievement of the second resurrection, did not, as already 
explained, join into the risen mass tone life, until after 
that event. Those who have passed into invisible forms of 
life since the inauguration of the resurrection may rise 
more directly into the Lord to function there in degrees 
of rising and expanding Consciousness. The latter, how¬ 
ever, implicates a formative period of life there corre¬ 
sponding, in a way, to infancy here. 

Now let us bring to vision the function of Conscience 
in the Consciousness of the man, and correlate that with 
the faculty work of Conscience in the All Harmonious 


336 


THE NEW IDEA. 


risen mass-tone life organization. The function of Con¬ 
science in a human is to reveal that which is right in 
motive and choice, as well as that which is wrong. When 
the human, or lower will indulges the wrong, that is 
an act of disobedience, because the conscience of Con¬ 
sciousness, rising in a mass-tone of the moral faculties 
pronounces it to be wrong. What is meant by that? In 
what w r ay is the disobedience of the mandates of Con¬ 
science wrong? In this way: the process in disobedience 
propagates to an effect—to a result—which cannot be 
accepted in the higher Consciousness, and it is, therefore, 
promptly and properly ruled out. Nothing unclean, or 
that which maketh a lie can enter there. 

The method of thinking now under consideration 
has brought the student face to face with the Judgment 
Seat. We see "wherein Conscience has risen from a mass- 
tone faculty of the psychological organization of man, 
to the function of the Righteous Judge in the Invisible 
Brotherhood. Hear the w r ords of Peter: “And he com¬ 
manded us to preach unto the people, and to testify that 
it is he "which was ordained of God to be the Judge of 
quick and dead”; and the "words of Paul: “Henceforth 
there is laid up for me a crown of righteousness, which 
the Lord, the righteous judge, shall give me at that day. 
and not to me only, but unto all them also that love his 
appearing;” and John: “For the Father judgeth no 
man. but hath committed all judgment unto the son;” 
and again, Paul: “We shall all stand before the judg¬ 
ment seat of Christ.” We see, therefore, that the Ce¬ 
lestial Principle unfolds Conscience, the crown of the 
human moral faculties, into the fact and function of the 
Righteous Judge in the Lord. It is noticed in this con¬ 
nection that the righteousness of the judgment of Risen 
Brotherhood consists in the mighty fact that the Judge 
was created by man—was unfolded by mankind, through 
the mass-tone of its moral faculties—and that his will is 
therefore the mass-tone will of the unfolded moral sense 
of all mankind, and is, consequently, in the highest con¬ 
cept of self-government. That is the Judge and the 
Judgment of which human courts are or should be, grand¬ 
ly symbolic. 

Is it, then, to be understood that when invisible man 
rises from the visible form, he must appear before the 
Righteous Judge, and if found guilty before the bar of 
unfolded conscience, be self-condemned and cast into 
hell? Nothing of the sort is taught by the symbolism of 
scripture, or by any other system of Truth. The Right¬ 
eous Judge and the righteous judgment function effect- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


337 


ively in the process of propagation, by which man is 
transformed from visible to invisible life. It should be 
remembered that the Celestial Principle functions in a 
resurrection of a human life from error and evil into a 
high degree of Harmony in Truth; and that conscience, 
now unfolded to the status of the Righteous Judge, joins 
in the process of that resurrection, implicating Justice, 
and the entire moral faculty household. 

It has been shown that we “lay up our treasure*'— 
our risen invisible life organization—in the heaven of 
Brotherhood, thought by thought, item by item, unit by 
unit, hour by hour and day by day. It is not all accom¬ 
plished in any one function, but by continuous processes. 
In those processes of propagation is foimd the bar of 
conscience—the bench of the Righteous Judge—past 
which no evil thought can rise. Thus purged from “sin” 
—from error and evil—only that which is in Truth can 
rise into the first heaven, or degree of risen Harmony 
mass tone. 

In that transcendent resurrection, all the potential¬ 
ities of physical sub vesture life—all its environments of 
error, evil, vice, disease, affliction and death—are re¬ 
solved to a new set of vestures—to a new environment— 
to new and higher potentialities. Old things have passed 
away, and, behold, all things become new. It has already 
been pointed out that there is a resurrection—a ti’ans- 
formation of the environment, or potentialities—as well 
as of the more concrete form of life. Thus it is seen that, 
in crossing the boundary line which divides physical 
subvesture forms of life from those which rise into the 
full tone heaven of physical ether, there is entered and 
passed through the transforming stages of the Principle 
which changes the tones as well as the discrete degrees, 
the vestures as well as the vestured, and the potentiali¬ 
ties as well as the form of life, for which they function. 
That is the same as saying that error and its long train 
of evils and afflictions, which have, up to that time func¬ 
tioned for the rise and unfoldment of man, by sentient 
perception, no longer exist, because those illusive degrees 
which gave them their only existence, are no longer in 
force—are superseded by higher forces. 

We are now able to bring the office of the Celestial 
Principle to clearer vision. It is in the fact of rising 
victorious over our lower perceptions and resolving them 
to higher degrees of wisdom and intelligence. Jesus was 
tempted in all points like unto us and was yet without 
sin. In other words, he rose above the functions of 
sentient perception. He lived in a state of subjective 
life wherein physical subvesture potentialities could not 


338 


THE NEW IDEA. 


serve him. He had unfolded above them—out of their 
reach. He unfolded out of perception, and its illusions 
into the real. 

We live and function, for the most part, in.those 
lower degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which are in 
illusion, and which unfold to higher planes of concept. 
We cherish, so to speak, in those degrees, a vast realm 
of error, evil ; disease, affliction and death, which are 
potential to our rise, but which have no existence outside 
of our illusive perceptions. They are exclusively in the 
facts of physical subvesture potentialities, which are not 
real, but which are really functional to our unfoldment 
to higher degrees of wisdom and intelligence, wherein 
they will have faded from vision. When we rise above 
them, they no longer exist. 

I may be asked, How about an evil thought? What 
becomes of it? An evil thought is evil only in functional 
perception. When our methods of thinking unfold our 
lives above its plane of perception its vestures of evil 
are gone. They do not rise, only as they propagate to 
something higher. Evil thoughts propagate to righteous 
thoughts in the proportion that we unfold into pure 
ideals; and all evil is functional, in perception, to that 
end. Again, I say, it is the unfoldment into the Celestial 
Principle, by which we rise above error and evil, and 
overcome those functions, by resolving them to degrees 
of the real, which, of course, is done by our rise into 
the real. Both are one and the same fact. The man and 
his environment unfold together. They are one life. 

And now the student no doubt asks, Is not this whole 
volume, and all its teachings in the functions of percep¬ 
tion only—a system in percept rather than in Truth. 
Decidedly so. It is a system of teaching in degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence, so conformable to the plan of 
life—to the plan by which we unfold from potentialities 
—to the rise of life in Principle—that its study will 
break illusive chains, and, in the name of Truth, liberate 
struggling faculty life from the functional bondage of 
perceptions, and raise them into clearer light. The Bible 
is the same in Principle. 

It will be well for the student to remember that 
man is, as yet, and comparatively speaking, very low 
on the arc of evolution, or unfoldment. Man has not yet 
reached the first full tone of the lowest zone of ether. 
He is yet in the swaddling clothes of the physical sub¬ 
vesture body. He is climbing the ladder of evolution, and 
the rungs upon which his hands and feet depend for 
stepping stones are potential degrees of wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence which ultimately propagate to Truth. 






EXERCISE LIII. 

FAITH. 

What is Faith?—How is Faith exercised?—Confidence, 
Trust, Reliance, Belief and Expectation—Oft be¬ 
trayed confidence becomes weak and discouraged— 
Faith grandly comes to the relief—Functions of 
knowledge—Faith cannot be exercised concerning a 
Fallacy—Test of Faith—Its exercise in the Heart. 


THINKING to develop confidence in self, in environ¬ 
ment and in life generally is important. Confidence is 
that which is to be exercised. It is like belief, or, is the 
same fact, with a very slight difference, in that it implies 
trust. Confidence, trust, reliance, belief, and expectation 
implicate action. They are an important faculty group, 
which rise or fall, functionally, by use. The use here 
implied is thinking, of course. Knowledge is the founda¬ 
tion of the existence of that faculty group. The degree 
of one’s confidence in a thing is the degree of knowledge 
of its reliability. If knowledge reveals that thing to be 
unreliable confidence in it is impossible. It is exactly 
the same with belief, or trust. Those functions exist in 
correspondences with knowledge. Through degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence the life organization is unfolded 
in experience, or knowledge. By that unfoldment confi¬ 
dence finds sure ground for its functions. 

Man is often unable to decide—judgment often in a 
state of doubt—as to the exercise of confidence in per¬ 
sons and apparent facts which appeal to it. If there be 
a method of thinking which will enable judgment to cor¬ 
rectly decide when confidence should be exercised, affirm¬ 
atively, or when it should be withheld, it is certainly 
important that man should be able to practice in that 
plan. It is seen that man may exercise confidence on a 
false foundation, and meet with disappointments which 
are often sorely afflicting. When that is often repeated, 
the faculty becomes weak and discouraged, to the extent 
that it will often refuse to function, even on the most 
convincing evidence. Reason and judgment sometimes 
deceive confidence, and trust is betrayed in its own house¬ 
hold. From such experiences the faculty group to which 
confidence belongs becomes timid and suspicious. Sus¬ 
picion mingles with fear, and trust refuses to function. 
Those conditions may. therefore, arise when there is no 
warrant in Truth for them, and that wholly from a 

(339) 



340 


THE NEW IDEA. 


want of knowledge. It is true that confidence ventures 
beyond knowledge, but the experiment should be guarded 
by caution. The latter facult)' saves confidence many a 
fall, but it frequently stumbles notwithstanding. It is 
noted that confidence unfolds in functional degrees of 
love and affection. It is in the temperature of love. One 
who confides in another to any great extent entertains 
emotions of love and respect, with esteem, for that one. 
Where these exist, in a strong measure, confidence func¬ 
tions spontaneously, and reason and judgment are often 
ignored. 

Hence it is seen that confidence should be unfolded 
only in connection with caution, reason and judgment. 
Those observations are sufficient to direct the student in 
the proper method of thinking for the unfoldment of con¬ 
fidence. It must be remembered that confidence and trust 
are both zealous. The faculty of zeal is developed from 
them, and is a connecting link between psychological 
energy and confidence. That observation faces us with 
the fact that zeal, without knowledge, is often dangerous. 
Zeal should be unfolded by constant use. It lubricates 
the activities of consciousness and the will, but it should 
always be unfolded jointly with caution, reason and judg¬ 
ment. 

How shall that be done? We see that unfoldment in 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, by which functional 
experience is evolved, knowledge rises and thus confi¬ 
dence and trust stand upon caution. But even caution, 
with the complete resources of reason and judgment at 
its back, can, at best, only warn of danger. It is the 
same with reason and judgment. What the student de¬ 
sires is some unerring rule by which confidence may be 
exercised in safety, where the facts warrant its exercise 
at all, or by "which one may withhold it, when there is 
no foundation for its use. 

These considerations call for an elaboration of Faith, 
in such a way that the student may readily distinguish 
between it, on the one side, and confidence, trust, reliance, 
belief and expectation on the other. The latter and 
others are in a faculty household by themselves. Faith 
stands alone, but it is that faculty into which all the 
others named flux, and function in mass tone wisdom and 
intelligence. That is important. Faith, in a wide sense, 
bears the same relationship to the faculty household just 
named, that conscience bears to the household of the 
moral faculties. Both are in the fact of mass tone, and 
both function in much the same way. Conscience is a 
never failing guide to the extent of its light. Faith is also 
without error, and is always in the light. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


341 


A man may say that his confidence has been be¬ 
trayed ; that his trust has been violated; but he can never 
so speak of his Faith. It is error to think or say that 
your faith has been deceived. Faith cannot be deceived 
— cannot err. Hence it is all important to distinguish 
between Faith, and any one or all of its faculty house¬ 
hold. 

It is now seen that when one is about to function 
in confidence, trust, belief, reliance or expectation, and 
reason and judgment are in doubt—as to the advisability 
of the same, or whether they are or not, all that one has 
to do is to resolve the whole household of Faith, to-wit: 
Confidence, trust, belief, reliance and expectation, etc., 
to its mass tone of Faith, and the difficulty is gone. One 
will either exercise Faith in the proposition, or he will 
not. If not, he can have nothing to do with it, except 
in error. If he can it is a fit subject for his confidence. 
Care must be exercised in order not to mistake confidence 
for Faith. It is all too easy to commit that unfortunate 
error. 

At this point knowledge is functional. One must 
know the difference. It is not an easy task to make that 
difference plain to the understanding. I can only make 
my best effort. It is said by St. Paul that Faith is the 
substance of things hoped for. We have, therefore, 
license to say that Faith is the substance of those things 
w T hich are in expectation. If one expect something, which 
he will not receive; he may exercise confidence that he 
will receive it, or that the desired event will take place; 
he may trust in it; he may rely upon it: he may believe 
in its approaching realization; but he cannot exercise 
Faith in such expectation. Because he cannot exercise 
Faith in that which is not to take place, if he proceed 
to think in the proper method by which Faith may be 
exercised, when there is no foundation for it. In that 
case, expectation will at once cease to function. 

There is probably no more important faculty in the 
entire psychological household than Faith. It is like 
another form of Truth. It is Truth expressing itself to 
human understanding. It must not be forgotten that 
Faith works by substance. That is true of every faculty 
of consciousness. A faculty functions by its tone, and 
the aura, or radiation oscillated from it, in the fact of 
tone, is substance. That substance fluxes with the whole 
faculty family, and there is realization in all which are 
reached by that substance. That is true of the mass tone 
faculty of Faith, but even in a higher and more trans¬ 
cendent sense. 

When anything is approaching in the life of man, it 


THE NEW IDEA. 


34^ 

matters not whether it be in his environment, or whether 
it is welling up from the potential heart, the substance 
of its radiation—its tones—precede it, and enter into the 
whole life, and thrill it into realization before the com¬ 
plete advent of the thing itself. It is not the shadow that 
is cast before, but the substance of the tone radiation. 
When those radiations enter consciousness there is the 
exercise of Faith, but there remains the important fact 
of becoming actively conscious of that activity. Nothing 
is wrought in consciousness by the mere exercise of 
Faith, until Consciousness becomes conscious of the fact. 
That distinction is frequently made in this work, and the 
student is reminded that it should be clearly understood. 

Thus, confidence, trust, reliance, belief and expecta¬ 
tion may readily be corrected by the exercise, or failure 
to exercise, Faith, in reference to anything concerning 
which those faculties may function, whenever the proper 
method of thinking is adopted. Observe how simple the 
process it. Anything held in confidence, trust, reliance, 
belief, or expectation is in full function in the heart. It 
could not be anywhere else. It is in that sense a treasure. 
It is in desire. That is self evident. Confidence, trust, 
reliance, belief, and expectation, are all functions of the 
heart as well as of the brain. They are in the brain only 
as they rise to function in the outworks. Their seat and 
substance are in the heart. 

We now have them in thought, in consciousness, 
where they really are, and where the thing concerning 
which they function is also located, to-wit: in the heart. 
It is seen that when one reduces an expectation to heart 
reality, it will vanish with the unreal, unless it exist in 
fact. If the student is carefully following these obser¬ 
vations, and appropriating them in the understanding, 
he or she is now practicing in the first stages of the 
exercise of Faith. From this point all is easy. The thing 
concerning which confidence, or trust, or reliance, or 
belief, or expectation is functioning is in the heart, and, 
hence in desire. 

It is quite easy to see how all things affecting our 
lives find their way into the heart to function there for 
self life unfoldment. Such entrance to the heart of all 
things of great personal concern is not only potential 
but real. If a loved one pass from these visible to invis¬ 
ible spheres of life, the event takes place in the heart of 
the bereaved one more effectively than anywhere else. It 
is the same with important expectations, with our hopes 
and our fears. 

It now remains to be seen how expectations unfold 
from the heart in the exercise of Faith, when they are 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


343 


founded on fact, or exist by substance, and bow, when 
they are without foundation in Truth, Faith cannot be 
exercised concerning them. In the first place it is seen 
that a fallacy—that which is false-^cannot unfold, be¬ 
cause it exists only in perception, and there is no sub¬ 
stance-nothing to develop. On the other hand, an item 
of substance—a fact—a degree of life—can unfold; and, 
what is more, a perception is functional to its unfold- 
ment. If the desire of the heart be enlightened; if it 
be founded on knowledge; if it be in necessity; if it be 
in harmony with the facts of the universe, Faith may 
be exercised concerning it in a dual function, to-wit: (1), 
one may realize its actual approach even to appropria¬ 
tion in advance of its bodily presence, and (2), that exer¬ 
cise hastens its unfoldment. 

Let us see how those phenomena take place. When 
the desire of the heart is concerning that which is real, 
by thinking in Principle, it swells in germanating oscilla¬ 
tions permeating the life organization with its radia¬ 
tions of substance, and, in that wav there is unfolding 
realization; there is the exercise of Faith, and he or she 
who so thinks and realizes, knows that confidence is 
founded on fact. “Therefore, I say unto you, what 
things soever ye desire, when ye pray, believe that ye 
receive them, and ye shall have them.” That scripture 
is quite fully explained in the remarks immediately pre¬ 
ceding it. To believe is to exercise belief in a method 
of thinking as already explained, and if it is concerning 
a necessity, or a reality, or anything which will tend to 
make life more healthy, or happy, it will be unfolded in 
the exercise of Faith. 

There is no limit to be prescribed to that method 
of thinking; none whatever. “Whosoever shall say unto 
this mountain, be thou removed, and be thou cast into 
the sea; and shall not doubt in his heart, but shall believe 
that those things which he saith shall come to pass; he 
shall have whatsoever he saith.” Herein we have the 
infinite possibilities of life unfoldment, both of the life 
within and the life without; both of self and self envir¬ 
onment. The method of thinking here taught applies to 
both. It doesn’t make any difference what your moun¬ 
tain may be, whether in the fact of ill health, or some 
supposedly incurable disease, or an impending calamity, 
or some awful condition of circumstances from which, 
in perception, there will appear to be no possible deliv¬ 
erance. There are no afflicting facts or conditions of 
life possible to these potential spheres which may not be 


344 


THE NEW IDEA. 


removed and cast into the sea of oblivion by thinking to 
the exercise of Faith. 

It is said that “faith is the gift of God/’ and because 
that is said, people sit down and pray for Faith and 
await its coming. It does not come in that way. It re¬ 
sponds to proper methods of thinking, by which desire 
unfolds in the heart, until the whole life feels the thrill 
of germinating power. That is itself Faith in exercise, 
and when that occurs there is no possible failure in its 
track. It shows that desire is founded on necessity- 
on fact—and when that is the case there is no power in 
or under heaven which can stay the result of thinking. 
To think is to exercise Faith. To the exercise of Faith 
there is no limit. It may and will heal self and others, 
open the eyes of the blind, cause the lame to walk, the 
lepers to rejoice in its cleansing tide, and quickly abolish, 
or destroy every form of affliction, want, or weakness 
possible to man. 

All that is in the fact of self-life unfoldment. It is 
in nothing else. I desire above all things that the student 
will come into that clear psychological vision which will 
enable him or her to see that the outward, and some¬ 
times visible conquests of life, in the realization of desire, 
no matter what they may be, are always and forever, 
but the outward symbols of inward unfoldment. No 
matter what outward visible achievement may unfold 
responsive to thinking in desire, the reality of that un¬ 
foldment is always within the life. Visible or outward 
achievements are but signs of inward conquests. The 
mountain is always within. Its outward appearance is 
in perception only. It is the same with its removal. The 
process, in reality, is within the life. At the last analysis 
all environment is within. It is external in perception 
only. 

Now we see how, by the exercise of Faith, one may 
test the reality, or practicability of confidence, trust, 
reliance, belief, or expectation, and how by thinking in 
desire, with knowledge, one may unfold self and envir¬ 
onment life, which are one fact, into power, health, 
peace, happiness and prosperity, which are also one fact. 

Once more it is seen that, in unfolding from desire 
by thinking, which is by the exercise of faculty powers, 
one has little or nothing to do with the particular thing 
sought to be overcome. It is all a question of life unfold¬ 
ment. If one seek first, last and all the time, to unfold 
self through rising degrees of wisdom and intelligence, 
everything needful will be added in abundance. That 
is the glorious plan of life. 



EXERCISE LIV. 


REVERENCE. 

Reverence, Love, Affection, Respect and Esteem—Neither 
fear nor awe should be developed in Reverence— 
Fear should be denied and cast out—Indifference 
hard to overcome—It ultimately propagates fear. 


REVERENCE is a faculty sometimes fully developed 
in the psychological organization of man, but most gen¬ 
erally only slightly unfolded, and, as a rule, that inade¬ 
quate degree of unfoldment is not in the proper propor¬ 
tions of its constituent functions. For instance, the 
average faculty of reverence, as developed in our times, 
is in the nature of profound respect and esteem, mingled 
with fear. Fear should never be mingled with rever¬ 
ence. Fear is a function by itself, and is largely sentient. 
It is not, strictly speaking, one of the moral group, and 
should never be so developed. It is a painful emotion 
excited, or propagated, by the apprehension of impending 
danger, which is wholly in perception. Its auxiliary 
functions are anxietj r , solicitude and dread. Fear has 
been theologically defined as “the trembling and awful 
reverence felt towards the Supreme Being,” and, “to 
have a reverential awe.” 

Fear is in functional perception, and true life un¬ 
foldment leaves it behind, or dissipates it. It should, 
in that way, be denied. It is a potentiality which dis¬ 
appears from life as soon as it has performed its mission, 
but unfortunately it is too generally cultivated and cher¬ 
ished, in error, rather than overcome in wisdom and 
intelligence. It is a condition, not a. faculty. It exists 
only in the presence of its cause, and, therefore, always 
exists in error. The way to treat fear is to discover its 
cause, and, then, to remove that. That process puts an 
end to fear. Fear is generally excited by the function 
of Conscience, when intentions and actions are condemned 
as facts of disobedience. That cause is removed in the 
exercise of duty, which is in the act of appropriating 
opportunity. 

True reverence is never mingled with fear, Rever¬ 
ence is a profound respect and esteem propagating to 
love and affection. It is a true faculty of the moral 
group, and should be unfolded without fear. Fear is an 
evil germ which destroys reverence, and renders that 

(345) 



346 


THE NEW IDEA. 


faculty barren of good results. Man should unfold the 
faculty of reverence in love and affection, towards the 
highest ideals of respect and esteem. When reverence 
functions in love and affection—in respect and esteem— 
it casts out fear, and develops moral courage. Courage 
is as many sided a faculty as there are vesture potentiali¬ 
ties to a form of life in the lower physical spheres. There 
is physical courage, mental courage, psychological cour¬ 
age, moral courage, and spiritual courage. Courage 
should be developed along with the unfoldment of rev¬ 
erence, with respect and esteem. 

Eespect and esteem sometimes function separately. 
One may, in wisdom and intelligence, respect the man 
and despise his actions. However, love and affection 
are inseparable. It is seen that when life is unfolded in 
true reverence there will be profound respect, esteem, 
love and affection for Truth, and such respect and esteem 
for the potential forces of life which unfold its form into 
Truth, as will work out their true estimate, or value. 
The latter is the same as saying that we should esteem 
functional conditions rising from error, only to the extent 
of overcoming them, by thinking them out of our lives. 
Those are processes in wisdom and intelligence. 

It is seen, therefore, that there is the household 
of reverence, with its kinsfolk of love and affection, re¬ 
spect and esteem, etc., just the same as there is the 
larger household of conscience, combining all the moral 
faculties, and the still larger household of Consciousness 
combining all the psychological faculties, with the will 
expressive of all. 

Man unfolds faculty functions to greater powers by 
their use. That is very important. We can practice 
in love and affection, until those faculties will glow and 
thrill a life organization; it is the same with respect and 
esteem, with sublimity and veneration. In that way 
reverence is unfolded symmetrically, in wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence. If in thinking about those grand facts of life, 
one is awakened to a sufficiently high function of desire, 
the will will respond as the expression of Consciousness, 
which is in the full power and function of all the fac¬ 
ulties, and that one is thus qualified to think to the un¬ 
foldment of any one, or all of the psychological faculties. 
The way is plain. It is seen, in this connection, that a 
knowledge of life—of methods of thinking—is,necessary 
to that awakening 1 of desire which will be functional. 

Such an awakening is necessary to destroy indiffer¬ 
ence. Indifference is a function something like fear, as 
to its origin and continuity, but its opposite as to effects. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


347 


Fear destroys; indifference is a condition propagating to 
stagnation, or indolence. It is generally a child of ignor¬ 
ance. It is resolved to force and action by desire, when 
desire ceases to be in a condition of indifference. When 
ignorance of the facts of life limits the vision of desire, 
leaving for it narrow bounds of choice, and no power to 
propagate ideals, there must be an awakening. Some 
function in suggestion is necessary to arouse the desire. 
That may be a spiritual or a sentient function. Unless 
it is exercised towards the man he will remain indiffer¬ 
ent, without choice, without preference, without concern, 
without attention, without taking anything into partic¬ 
ular account, without recognizing the significance or 
importance of anything. That is the most unfortunate 
condition into which a life can lapse. In that condition 
a man is said to be neither particularly good, nor very 
bad; not inclined to one side, party or choice more than 
to another; he is neutral, lukewarm, feeling no interest, 
anxiety, or care: he is unconcerned about himself. 

In this condition man is indeed a fit subject for fear, 
but he is also indifferent to that emotion. He is careless, 
negligent, disinterested, apathetic, insensible, cold. That 
is the nuxus of agnosticism. Those conditions mapifest 
themselves in a want of interest in self more than any¬ 
thing else. That is an awful state of poverty. That 
kind of poverty is most prevalent among the people gen¬ 
erally. It is almost universal. Nevertheless the people 
are indifferent to their condition. It is hard to awaken 
a man so that he can see anything beyond the hum-drum 
of his every day round of business and domestic duties. 
Once dead to his possibilities he cares little or nothing 
about them. He has “finished his education” and quit 
systematic study. Whether his were merely common 
school, or college days, it matters not. He is a business 
man now, burdened with commercial and domestic obli¬ 
gations, and must be let alone. He must not be bothered 
with too many new ideas; he has no time for them. The 
newspaper is his heaven of rest and recuperation, and 
the office, or forkshop are the only scenes of his unfold- 
ment. 

It may be that he wins material gains and builds 
for himself a home, and is able to live in what is com¬ 
monly called luxury and ease, or it may be that, in spite 
of plodding industry, he struggles in the depths of want. 
It makes very little difference. In either case he is deny¬ 
ing himself the real bread of life, and in his efforts to 
appropriate happiness, is living on husks. His higher 
self is famishing from hunger and thirst for the real 
bread and water of life. He, and those dependent upon 


348 


THE NEW IDEA. 


him, are really feeding on the crumbs that fall from the 
master’s table. 

If man could be awakened to his great opportunities; 
if he could comprehend the mighty plan of life of which 
he is the soul and center, and becomes its chief architect, 
in harmony with his destiny as it is in Principle; if he 
would but seize his own life powers and think himself 
more rapidly, in unfoldment, towards omniscience; if he 
would but become a student again, and apply himself 
to the study of Principle—to thinking new thoughts in 
the propagation of his life in wisdom and intelligence, 
to higher spheres, while here on earth; if he would 
cease to allow others to do his thinking, and come to 
realize that each man must do his own thinking, or fall 
behind in the general rise of the race; if he would but 
awaken to the fact that by thinking—thinking in the 
science of life unfoldment—he could have all things of 
good;—if men and women generally could be aroused to 
the full import of the facts here stated, what a heaven 
of health and happiness, peace and plenty this old earth 
would become. 

Of course it will one day become such, because human 
potentialities will ultimately unfold mankind to that 
summit, but most of us will have lost infinite opportuni¬ 
ties. It is only a question of unfolding in volition, in 
joy and gladness, by this conscious use of self powers, or 
more slowly unfolding in affliction. 

But returning to our subject of reverence, the devel¬ 
opment of that mass tone faculty does not properly in¬ 
voke awe. We should unfold a Christian reverence which 
finds an abiding foundation in love. To love the neighbor 
as one loves self, will propagate actions toward the 
neighbor as one would desire the neighbor to act toward 
him, and in that way Brotherhood will become real. Rev¬ 
erence, in the true spirit of equality, is wherein love and 
affection, respect and esteem abound. In the love of one 
another we have Brotherhood, and fellowship, with joy 
and gladness. Thus true reverence casteth out fear, and 
sheds the oil of gladness in our hearts. 

Without the unfoldment of true reverence, with 
respect and esteem, love and affection, for the neighbor, 
which is indeed and in truth, the highest reverence to¬ 
ward God, one cannot think to the successful unfold¬ 
ment of his invisible life. It is seen that man may easily 
adopt a method of unfolding any one of his faculty 
functions; and also a method of destroying any one of 
those afflicting conditions which rise from error, by 
thinking in the plan of life as it is in Principle.. That 
being the fact, nothing remains in the way of success 
but prompt action on the part of desire and will. 


EXERCISE LV. 


SOCIAL SCIENCE. 

Biological Foundations of Relativity and Interdepend¬ 
ence-Wonderful cellular Fellowship—Analogy of 
the community of life units in a man or a woman, 
and that of the larger units of men and women in 
the larger community—Abnormal development pro¬ 
duces affliction—No safety except in Brotherhood— 
Obligation and duty—Their Sweep—Need of socie¬ 
ties for thinking for life unfoldment—Reforms. 


WE must briefly consult our biological foundations, 
and bring them into clear view, from the standpoints of 
all forms of life, before we enter upon thinking exercises 
in social science. We must have a complete understand¬ 
ing of the sources of obligation and duty. In that way 
we will come to see what is and what is not obligation, 
and what is and what is not duty. Obligation is first; 
duty follows. 

What is the nature of obligation? It is all wrapped 
up in the necessity of complying with demands of Prin¬ 
ciple, or the plan of life. In that compliance is the per¬ 
formance of duty. A knowledge of the plan of life, as 
it is in Principle, is requisite to a proper understanding 
of obligation. That which is said to be in obligation and 
duty, whch is not to be discovered in the plan of life, 
may safely be disregarded. 

Into what department of biology shall we go in order 
to see plainly the foundations in Principle of obligation 
and duty toward our fellows? The answer is that we 
have only to study the science of relativity and interde¬ 
pendence, in its applications to the unit forms of life, 
and their more primal organisms. From that we shall 
clearly see the sweep of obligation and duty in its nor¬ 
mal functions among humans. Today that obligation is 
scarcely acknowledged, and that duty but slightly per¬ 
formed. 

One who has made anything like a study of the 
preceding thinking exercise will require but a few hints 
in order to recall, vividly, the nature of relativity and 
interdependence. As to the first word, it is only neces¬ 
sary to say that all the forms of life of our universe, 
including worlds, planets, animals, men and women, and 
all other ceatures are related to each other. They are 

( 349 ) 



350 


THE NEW IDEA. 


all akin. They all proceeded from the same Father- 
Mother creator. Some are higher than others by their 
degrees of unfoldment, but all enjoy the same possibili¬ 
ties. They are all potentially equal. They are all of 
the same blood. They are all rising, although some are 
belated, or did not begin the journey of evolution as soon 
as others, to join in the glory of Perfect Harmony of one 
transcendent form of life. As to the second word—inter¬ 
dependence—we see in a clear vision of the biological 
fellowship of life units that no one can live and prosper 
alone. Each one is dependent upon all the others of 
infinite variety for a continuance of its life. That applies 
to all forms of life, units or the organizations of units. 
It is in the plan of life. 

Now, from the same source of knowledge, we see 
that there are forms of obligation and duty to self, as 
well as to the neighbor, but the neighbor comes first. 
The new commandment does not say to love thyself as 
thy neighbor, but thy neighbor as thyself. So it is seen 
that the neighbor is first in order. 

There is a beautiful story drawn from the riches of 
natural history, and based on research of German sci¬ 
entists. It is said of the primal cells of the Silurian geo¬ 
logical age, that they attempted to spin and weave cloth¬ 
ing for their tiny bodies, from the substance of their own 
forms. That was the attempt to perform work specific¬ 
ally for self. It proved a failure. Finally a cell, seeing 
that it could not succeed for self, experimented on one 
of the other cells nearest to it. That one was its neigh¬ 
bor. By a little effort it succeeded in clothing the neigh¬ 
bor with a convenient membrane which served to protect 
its tender form from the coarser elements round it. When 
the task was finished the cell that made the experiment 
discovered that itself was also clothed—that in the per¬ 
formance of work for the neighbor it was itself equally 
blessed—that giving is receiving. 

It is clearly demonstrated, and will be admitted by 
all, that one cannot live alone. A single thought could 
not function by itself to any degree of unfoldment. If 
Principle had propagated but one unit and stopped at 
that one, there could have been no worlds and heavens, 
and no men and women. It is because Principle will 
forever propagate life units that life is everlasting. Here 
is a new idea : The all is in all of the units. It is not in 
any one, nor in all of them but one. It requires all— all 
that now exist, or that will ever hereafter come forth. 
Now, possibly, for the first time, we understand the 
meaning of that old phrase, “all in all.” The first all 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


351 


here referred to is unity or Being. Tlie second all is 
variety; the third all is Harmony. Not anything is lost. 
The propagation of units will continue as long as there 
is substance in Being. Thus the supply of variety must 
forever meet the demands of Harmony. Please contem¬ 
plate those facts long and carefully and you will never 
again question the soundness of the doctrine of the im¬ 
mortality of life. Dear student, what do you think of 
that new idea of an old Truth? 

That is all said in order that I may extend vision 
to the nature of variety. In that we shall find the key 
which unlocks the Secret of Brotherhood, and that of 
obligation and duty among men and women. As was 
stated in an early part of this work, in some way, and in 
a way which most of us can plainly see, but cannot find 
words to express, each life unit, and organization of such 
units is not, at any one stage, completely satisfied, or 
absolutely contented. Why is that? It is because they 
are all on a journey and cannot rest from the work, very 
long at one time, until it is completed. That journey is 
from variety to Harmony. Why is there not complete 
satisfaction—contentment—until the journey is finished? 
Because one is in some way lonesome until that one 
reaches the fellowship of its kinsfolk! Can you not see? 
When it was in unity, it was in the Oneness of Being. 
When sent forth as a spark, and later an organization of 
sparks, from the first all, it became discontented. In 
the spirit of the Homing Pigeon it seeks its home. It can 
reach that goal only in fellowship with its neighbors. 
There must be the union of effort. 

Men and women are in the facts of organizations 
of such imits, and thus in communities of millions, all 
united in one form, and enjoying a foretaste of Harmony 
—of home—they are marching on. The interdependence 
of the units in the life organization of a man, or a 
woman, reaches out. in all respects, to the interdepend¬ 
ence of humans composing the community. In the sense 
of mass tone, the fellowship of units, and that of the 
larger mass tone organizations, is the same in Principle. 
They are all akin and all dependent upon each other. 
When they attempt to become independent, they are gen¬ 
erally in ignorance of the biological Truth that the only 
real independence there can be in our universe is founded 
on interdependence. The true element of interdependence 
consists in the fact that you are dependent upon all of 
the neighbors, and all of the neighbors are, in turn, de¬ 
pendent upon you. If you have the bread and I have 
the water, we are interdependent, which reaches out to 


352 


THE NEW IDEA. 


the only independence there can be in the universe. Inde¬ 
pendence is in the equality of interdependence. But that 
has already been sufficiently amplified. 

Any community of humans is happy and prosperous 
in the exact proportion of its Harmony development in 
mass tone; and, it is unhappy and non-prosperous in the 
exact measure of its discordant condition. What is true 
of the man is also true of the community of men and 
women. Any attempt to unfold one side of the life of 
a man or a woman, to the neglect of some other portion 
of that life organization, will always produce disorder, 
disease and finally, so called, death. It is precisely the 
same with the community. 

When a man harnesses his strongest functions in the 
service of his weaker faculties, in order to unfold them 
into harmony with the more advanced, there is a return 
to normal conditions, and health and happiness abound. 
It is the same in the case of the community. Abnormal 
development in the man or the community is unnatural, 
and a violation of the plan of life. It produces affliction, 
not only of the weaker portions, but, ultimately of the 
stronger. There is no safety, no health, no happiness 
worth a name except in the Harmony of Brotherhood. 

The “survival of the fittest” is functional to the 
ultimate survival of all, else it propagates disorder and 
afflictions for those who appear to survive above their 
neighbors. Anj' attempt to rise that abridges personal 
liberty is discordant. It must sooner or later come to 
ruin, in the ruin of others. There is safety only in Broth¬ 
erhood. 

The boundaries of obligation and duty are co-ter¬ 
minal with those of interdependence. If one can demon¬ 
strate that he does not sustain interdependent relations, 
by nature, with the lower animals, and, indeed with all 
things high and low, then lie has proven that he is under 
no obligations of duty toward them. If man is not in 
some functional measure interdependent with the dog, 
the cat and the horse, he may, with impunity, kick, ill- 
treat and beat them, respectively. It is seen, however, 
that man is held, by interdependent bonds of relation¬ 
ship, with all the forms of life below, above and round 
him. The radiations of his respect and esteem must, 
therefore, become and remain spherical, or, after the 
manner of the star of unity, whose radii flow in all direc¬ 
tions. Such is the bond of relativity and interdepend¬ 
ence-such the sweep of obligation and duty. 

A knowledge of those facts enables man to think in 
a method of interdependence, by which he propagates 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


353 


his own life into harmony with all other forms of life, 
and rise to conduct himself in a kindly spirit toward 
every one and everythin". It is an awful crime to pre¬ 
cipitate a human form of life out of its visible form, by 
violence. Have we sufficiently considered the fact that 
it is an act of great disobedience to “destroy life” of any 
kind? When men and women come to think and act in 
the spirit of love and affection toward the visible forms 
of life round them, those occasions wherein one is justi¬ 
fied in taking life of any kind, will greatly be dimim 
ished There is a mighty power in genuine love and 
affection which overcomes and negates the anger of men 
and the ferocity of animals. It is not sufficient to affect 
those feelings by mere enforced outward actions. The 
expressions must be real—natural. 

If flesh eaters can find condemnation in nothing else, 
they have it in full force, in the fact that their diet impli¬ 
cates the taking of life of animals and birds. In some 
way the violence necessary thereto finds its way into 
the life tones of the flesh eater, and develops discordant 
tones in that realm which are destructive of bodily health. 
There is, therefore, a wide range of social science, which 
takes its rise from harmonious conditions of the man 
or the woman. The abiding foundations of the physical, 
moral and intellectual, as well as the social health of a 
community rest in Harmony—the harmonious conditions 
of the personal lives of its members. 

The social mass tone life of human communities, 
in our day is covered all over with “flags of reform.” 
Men and women, ministers, teachers, physicians, and 
sometimes business men, are banded together in society 
efforts, to force certain changes for the better in human 
conduct. There is the fight against the liquor traffic and 
the whisky habit; t.hat against the traffic in virtue; that 
against corruption in municipal government; that against 
dishonesty in business and disobedience of law. The 
objects sought to be realized cannot be questioned. The 
aim of the reformer is generally all right. But the ques¬ 
tion of method must be open to discussion, until there is 
a mighty change in that respect. 

It is not that present methods should be radically 
changed at once. That could not be done. It is rather 
that they should go forward about as they are, until they 
can gradually be supplanted by higher methods. 

Is the grand old church doing its duty quite as func¬ 
tionally, by harnessing the police forces of cities to the 
punishment of offenders, and the closing of objectionable 
places, as it would be doing were its ministers, and the 








354 


THE NEW IDEA. 


noble men and women allied with them, engaged in train¬ 
ing people how to think for self-life unfoldment? It is 
proper and right to enforce righteous law against evil 
doing, but that process will be very slow in drying up 
the sources of evil. Evil forces may, in that way, be 
damned back for a time, but they will, ever and anon, 
augment and break loose again, in one form and another. 

The real solution for the social body is thinking for 
life unfoldment. It is not only in the thinking of the 
few, but that the few who can think to some purpose, 
will engage in a work by which thinking will spread. I 
must earnestly recommend a test of the New Christianity, 
which is the old and genuine article in new bottles, from 
which men and women can more conveniently drink. It 
is partly elaborated in this volume. 

We need all the reforms that now obtain; and should 
encourage them, but the whole people need, above every¬ 
thing else, schools or societies for life unfoldment by 
thinking in the plan of Principle. 


EXERCISE LVI. 


THINKING TO COURAGE. 

Unfolding in courage—Physical, mental, moral and spir¬ 
itual courage—Courage is in the fact of the Heart— 
The heart always the measure of courage—The pit¬ 
iful state of the weak heart—The almightiness of 
the strong heart—Processes and methods of think¬ 
ing which will transform a weak heart into one of 
courage and power. 


WHAT is courage? It is the heart. If one have 
heart he or she will have courage in precisely the same 
degree. In the matter of courage everything depends 
upon the condition of the heart. If the heart be normal, 
the courage will exceed that of a lion, physically; and, 
mentally, psychological]}', morally and spiritually it will 
be a stranger to fear. 

When the heart is weak, or out of tune, the whole 
life organization is weak, full of fear, and forebodings, 
and in a state of ill-health in every organ and faculty. 
When the heart is normal—harmonious—the man is full 
of spirit, heroism, bravery, intrepidity, valor, gallantry, 
daring, firmness, hardihood, boldness, dauntlessness, and 
resolution. In short courage, or normal heart is that 
mass tone of the life which enables it to face and to en¬ 
counter, victoriously, all perception dangers and difficul¬ 
ties, with firmness, and without fear. 

When the heart is weak or out of tune ideals will 
not be lofty and their standards will vacillate. A fixed 
purpose in high motive is impossible, and resolution will 
waver and tremble in self-created alarms. With a weak 
heart there is no solid ground anywhere. To close the 
eyes in an effort to induce sleep is to approach a yawning 
precipice. For the weak heart there is danger at every 
turn. For the courageous heart all is serenity and tran¬ 
quility. 

It is unnecessary to elaborate further. Human ex¬ 
perience is at hand with its voluminous testimony. Thou¬ 
sands. yea, millions, are longing for an opportunity to 
exchange their poor, weak, trembling hearts for stout, 
firm, courageous ones, which experience no fear, and 
sink not under a load of forebodings. In some way the 
weak heart understands that its fears are fictitious— 
without foundation in fact—and yet there is no deliver*- 

( 355 ) 



S56 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ance in that knowledge. Its functions do not exceed that 
of a phantom. In that condition the heart realizes that 
it is in chains of cruel slavery. Day by day, and night 
by night, there are afflicting forebodings present in the 
function of those troubles which do not eventuate. Ten 
thousand enemies attack the weak heart, and mercilessly 
persecute it. Approaching old age reveals a grim visage, 
and the unrealities of death stalk in the despairing vision 
like an army of demons. 

Faith will not function from the weak heart, and 
expectation is filled with threatening failures. Confi¬ 
dence seeks in vain for a resting place, and there is no 
reliance upon available functions. Life is ripening to 
despair. If there is one thing in our spheres of life more 
than another which is a proper object of pity, it is a 
weak heart. On the other hand, nothing can be more 
desirable than a strong, harmonious, valiant heart—a 
heart full of courage and firmness. The latter is free from 
every sort of affliction, and its vision of life is full of 
hope. It lives and functions in a health-giving realiza¬ 
tion of the grandeur of life. It beholds life’s conquests 
unfolding in self, and is thrilled with joy and gladness by 
them; it carries itself erect and is proud; it knows no 
fear; its germinating Faith radiates to every extremity 
of the life, filling it with the spirit of conquest: it “laughs 
at impossibilities and cries it shall be done.” 

Now, it goes without the saying, that if there be 
a practical method of thinking available—one that the 
average man or woman can practice effectually—that will 
transform a weak, sinking heart, into a strong, courag¬ 
eous one, he or she who will train men and women in 
that method is a benefactor of mankind. Without doubt 
a practical, effective method is available to all who can 
think. Nothing is necessay for complete deliverance but 
the practice of that plan. 

Again, what is courage? It is the heart of a faculty 
household. Let us contemplate some of those faculties 
whieh flux their tones into the mass tone of Courage. I 
give the following list: Decision, analysis, firmness, con¬ 
stancy, perseverance, steadfastness, fortitude, boldness, 
purpose, determination, heroism, bravery, intrepidity, 
valor, valiantness, gallantry, daring, hardihood, stout¬ 
ness. dauntlessness, etc. It is seen that courage is the 
head of a numerous and important faculty household. In 
it they all function, and, as in the case of all faculties, 
they function from the heart. 

Now, one suffering from a weak, irresolute heart, 
can at least function in desire—a desire that each mem- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


357 


ber of the household of courage be developed so that the 
mass tone of that household, which is courage, be made 
strong. The method of thinking should be to exercise a 
strong desire for unfoldment of those faculties. Then 
follows thinking in necessity. It is 'easy to see that such 
unfoldment is necessary. The heads of all the faculty 
households will readily agree to the necessity of the pre¬ 
vailing desire. Even the will cannot withhold its func¬ 
tions. Conscience at once proclaims the righteousness of 
desire, and motive declares the purpose to be the unfold¬ 
ment of the whole life tone consciousness, and, thus, 
Faith begins to exercise, and the thrill of radiations from 
process is felt. Courage already is unfolding. 

In connection with the line of thinking above indi¬ 
cated, there should be brought to vision the infinite re¬ 
sources of life—of the heart—until there is a heartfelt 
Consciousness that the hitherto poverty stricken heart 
lacked only a knowledge of its own potentialities, and the 
ready means within its reach for their appropriation. 
With a realization of the hitherto hidden riches of the 
heart, which reveal themselves responsive to thinking in 
Principle, there is a sense of self condemnation that self¬ 
life has been famishing while there was enough and to 
spare within its own inexhaustible storehouse. Having 
become thus aroused—awakened—the heart reaches out 
in desire to the life riches of the invisible fountain and 
appropriates therefrom. 

By thinking thus in continued practice, courage de¬ 
velops, and very soon a flood of light bursts into the 
psychological organism that the aforetime weakness of 
the heart was all in perception, as were all resulting 
afflictions. In that way the chains of slavery are broken, 
and Truth functions, potentially, to a lease of liberty. 
As one proceeds in that method of thinking there are 
successive steps of unfoldment, until the thinker seizes 
the true idea that he has all along been a victim of error, 
which error, because he did not seek Truth, bound him 
with fetters. While those fetters functioned in degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, to push the victim up into the 
light, their afflictions, which he did not comprehend, 
caused him great sufferings. 

It is quite evident that one cannot thus think in vain. 
Even while the student runs along these lines in a hur¬ 
ried first reading, preparatory to their study, the thrill 
of rising life must surely be felt. There is life—self¬ 
life—unfoldment in thus thinking, because the method 
outlined excites oscillations of Principle in the heart, and 
those processes have propagated all the power, peace and 


358 


THE NEW IDEA. 


plenty which is known to life, and whatever is in store 
for life in future ages must rise from the same source. 
There is no other. We must propagate ourselves into the 
things we desire—must become those things by unfold- 
ment—or we never can realize them. 

One must not expect to think self from the awful 
thralldom of a weak, vacillating heart to complete free¬ 
dom—to a heart of power and courage in a half hour’s 
practice. With some the processes may be slow, and a 
little stubborn, at first. With others, they will be more 
rapid. Persistence will win a glorious victory in each 
case. Failure is impossible. The student will realize that 
all which is said here is in suggestion, and he or she will 
endeavor to extend these exercises on practical lines. 

One thing is absolutely certain: He or she who has 
the power to think possesses the functions accessary to 
self-life unf'oldment into final and complete Omnipotence. 
Omnipresence and Omniscience. 



EXERCISE LVII. 


THINKING TO PEACE. 

Peace—Its faculty household—Peace and Harmony- 
Methods of thinking for their development—The 
study of the life scale of harmonics the key to Har¬ 
mony unfoldment. 


PEACE is also head of a faculty household. It has 
been personified in all ages, and like all other great mass 
tone faculties, may be held in vision as applying to the 
community, the state, the nation, or to the whole race, as 
to its functions, as well as to man, and to the invisible 
all. Peace is that mass tone function into which are 
fluxed the tones of tranquility, serenity, calm, repose, 
quietude, order, reconciliation, harmony, concord, mild¬ 
ness, gentleness, etc. The degree of peace which is en¬ 
joyed by any life organization is the degree of harmony 
to which such life has been unfolded. Harmony propa¬ 
gates to peace—in peace. Its unfoldment involves the 
development of all other faculties. Peace reigns in the 
highest degree in a life organization which has appro¬ 
priated to its use the greatest breadth of variety and 
welded that variety into Harmony. That is expressing a 
great deal. It is the whole of evolution. Man was 
evolved to his present status by the association of 
thoughts in organization, one degree of organism suc¬ 
ceeding another, each one a little higher and more ex¬ 
tended than the other, until man was reached. That 
plan of life continues until the complete goal of creation 
is attained. 

In each of the foregoing degrees of organism referred 
to, a certain range of variety is included, and fluxed into 
a more or less harmonious state. In man we have the 
greatest, the most extended association of variety of any 
of the visible forms of life, not, of course, excepting our 
planet. Now, it is seen that the degree of Harmony into 
which the variety of a life organization is fluxed in any 
metamorphosis is the exact measure of the Peace which 
that life enjoys. Hence the expression: “Peace and 
Harmony.” 

The almost infinite sweep of variety of unit form 
tones—thoughts—of life comprehended in the metamor¬ 
phosis of man is beyond the powers of conscious think¬ 
ing. No rule has yet been evolved from Principle by 

( 359 ) 



360 


THE NEW IDEA. 


which any estimate can be made. Nevertheless, the whole 
of that variety is subject to the rule of the Conscious 
Will. It obeys, collectively, and individually, the mass 
tone voice of Consciousness and the will, when that voice 
is expressed in Principle. It is plainly seen that a method 
of thinking which unfolds the life organization to rising 
degrees of Peace is preeminently a work of Harmony 
building. That may, in one respect, be regarded as the 
highest method of thinking in Principle. It reaches, in 
its sweep, out over the whole orbit of devolution and eve 
lution, and involves God and n^n and the whole sum of 
creation. 

It is not, however, the most difficult method of think¬ 
ing to practice, because it cannot be specifically under¬ 
taken until there has been evolved a decidedly functional 
measure of unfoldment of the whole psychological 
organism. 

It is impressed, in this connection, that internal and 
external Peace, so far as its effects upon self-life are con¬ 
cerned, are the same. The latter is but the outward sign 
of the inward fact. The unfoldment of Harmony within 
the life organization is also the development of Harmony 
in environment. They are both one and the same fact. 
Harmony within always is harmony without. It is the 
same with Peace. 

The method of thinking by which peace and harmony 
are unfolded in any life involves the study of harmonics, 
the keys to which are fully explained in the foregoing 
pages. 


EXERCISE LVIII. 


POWERS OF THINKING. 

Putting- one’s thinking powers to a test—Systematic work 
—Think out the little problems of life for self—Ask¬ 
ing unnecessary questions—Breaking away from sug¬ 
gestion—An incident of the power of thinking—Man 
must do his own thinking or starve—Another cannot 
appropriate knowledge for you—How to overcome 
indifference. 


IT may be that the reader has never put his or her 
thinking powers to the test, and is, therefore, not experi¬ 
mentally aware of their potency. If people depend 
wholly on the knowledge of others, as is far too gener¬ 
ally the rule, they will soon reach a state of helpless 
dependence. No matter what they see or hear, if it is a 
little outside of their understanding, they quickly ques¬ 
tion the person who happens to be available, for an ex¬ 
planation, instead of thinking themselves to a solution 
of the little problem. That is an injurious habit. More 
than half the things thus inquired about may be fully 
revealed to consciousness by a little thinking. When that 
method takes the place of inquiry, whenever practicable, 
the results are very gratifying. The person forming that 
habit will soon discover that he or she possesses powers 
of which they have been ignorant. 

If one will set apart half an hour from each day in 
which to test his thinking capacity, by selecting any fact 
of the universe, as a subject, with which he is not familiar, 
or concerning which he can propagate a desire for more 
knowledge, and, in silence and alone, make effort, in his 
own way, to bring a further knowledge of its nature and 
functions to vision, by thinking, he will be astonished by 
the progress he will make. If the reader ask, Why strug¬ 
gle it out alone? Why not ask the nearest one who is 
likely to know, and be done with it? The answer to that 
is instructive. By thinking it out one puts his thinking 
organism into use, which is the only method, in Principle, 
of its unfoldment—its rise to higher functional powers. 
Of course, when informed concerning the fact of which 
further knowledge is desired, thinking follows, and there 
is a measure of unfoldment, but it will be far greater 
when one has conquered the problem by self. 

The idea to be impressed here is that one may, in that 
( 361 ) 



362 


THE NEW IDEA. 


manner, develop strong psychological powers, so as to 
be able to think, without suggestion, to a great extent, 
and in that way secure the key by which to tap the foun¬ 
tain of infinite knowledge within. Man has been pushed 
up to his present condition by potential suggestions of 
various kinds, until he has come to lean on such prompt¬ 
ings for mental support altogether. It should be under¬ 
stood that a great goal in man’s evolution is to be able to 
break away from the support of suggestion and to walk 
alone. That power is unfolded by degrees, and man 
learns to think alone in rising measures. At first the 
progress will be slow, and there will be repeated ref¬ 
uges sought in suggestion, but, by persistence, victory 
will crown the effort. 

Now, dear reader, that is another way of saying 
what has already been so often repeated in this volume, 
to-wit: That by unfoldment in thinking we leave per¬ 
ception potentialities behind, and rise to higher degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence. Whenever man learns to 
think so as to unfold the knowledge Avithin his life 
organization, he has reached a summit in life whereon 
he may mark the beginning of a new era. I say, when¬ 
ever he has trained himself to do that by his own volition. 
There is a wide difference between unconsciously think¬ 
ing onesself up the hill of evolution, and so rising by 
thinking in volition. The first is in the fact of being 
pushed up; the last in the reality of self-rise. 

It may appear absurd to the student, but let us 
suppose that one so trained to think, who has never taken 
up the study of human physiology, applies himself to that 
difficult task in the full strength of desire, by well con¬ 
sidered choice, and a lofty motive, moved so to do by the 
powers of the will, what will be the result ? Remember, 
such student has no recourse to books, or to suggestion of 
any kind. He appeals to self-powers exclusively. He 
will not appear to make much headway for a time, and, 
for some days, his hour, or half hour of daily thinking in 
solitude, will appear to be utterly barren. After a while 
he reaches a vision of his own physiological organism, or 
some portion of it, without being able to determine just 
when, or how it came. He naturally wonders whether or 
not it is in accord with fact. He appeals to Stewart, or 
Raymond, or Kirk, or some one of the authorities on hu¬ 
man physiology, and lo! he finds his vision to be remark¬ 
ably correct. 

It is related that one who was thus carrying on si¬ 
lence study for unfoldment was approached with a prob¬ 
lem. ‘‘Tell me,” he demanded, “just how honey is made, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


363 


and I will be convinced that you can unfold your life into 
a knowledge of something of which you knew nothing at 
the start. You will not be able to find any book that 
will, in this day, (the time referred to) throw any light 
on the subject. Hence you will be on your own re¬ 
sources. ’ ’ 

The student answered by the question, “Then how 
will you know whether my solution is in truth or error?’'’ 
The man replied, “We will submit it to the faculty of our 
university,” was the response. The proposition was 
agreed to. In a few days the student had unfolded into a 
clear vision of the problem submitted. He said: “The 
first bee that visits the flower obtains no honey. He is 
the lancer bee. He lances the nectary of the flower, leav¬ 
ing a ferment, and departs. The nectar, as a result of the 
lancing, flows, and coming into contact with the fer¬ 
ment, is caught up into a process of fermentation, and the 
honey so propagated is disereted in a membrane in the 
form of a small bead. Later the sack bees gather these 
honey beads and carry them to the hive. Honey is the 
joint product of the flower and the bee by propagation.” 
That solution stands unchallenged to this day. 

From these observations the student will come to see 
how it was that the ancient seers unfolded to such wonder¬ 
ful degrees of knowledge. It was by thinking, of course. 
Man has the same power today, with the advantages of 
scientific principles to guide him. The trouble with the 
race, today, is that all the thinking is committed to a few, 
so-called, professional people, while the multitude give 
their lives up to business. A change is demanded in that 
respect. Each one must do his, or her, own thinking. No 
one can think for another. It is impossible. 

It is the duty and privilege of each person in any gen¬ 
eration of the rise of man, to appropriate the full tones 
of all the degrees of wisdom and intelligence in the world 
in his day. That is the same as saying that he should un¬ 
fold to all the knowledge of the race of his time. Other¬ 
wise he will go into the next heaven of substance so 
much behind in life unfoldment, and will be detained in 
the lower spheres of that zone, until he rises to the re¬ 
quired status. Man must, by his own personal thinking, 
keep pace with the evolution of life, or become inharmon¬ 
ious in his relations with all life around him. That ob¬ 
servation is probably not understood fully by the student. 
It is not so much that a man must keep pace with other 
men, but with the evolution of life substance of his 
sphere. His unfoldment should be in the fact of the rise 
of substance on his every touch. 


364 


THE NEW IDEA. 


The environment of man is rising—unfolding—and 
the pace and measure of that unfoldment should be the 
pace and measure of the evolution of each person ming¬ 
ling in the tones of that environment. When that is not 
the case—when some fall behind—they become out of tune 
with the universe, and consequently suffer. It is by think¬ 
ing to unfoldment that man readjusts his life, and brings 
it into harmony with the facts—with the rise—of the 
universe. Man should realize that the appropriation of 
knowledge is, for him, the process of bringing a larger 
variety of substance life into his form, and unfolding in 
tune with the evolution of life generally. 

One should not be discouraged by the realization that 
he or she is greatly behind others. One is liable to com¬ 
pare his own status with the great leaders of thought— 
with those in the picket lines of unfoldment—and to con¬ 
clude that he is so far behind that his chances are at a 
disadvantage. Such person should look behind and below 
himself, for a moment, and he will be certain to discover 
that the degree of his evolution is greatly above the aver¬ 
age. Besides this is the early morning of life. The start 
is but begun, comparatively. The journey of life is all 
before us. The morning is scarcely breaking. Man is still 
in the darkness. He sees through a glass darkly. He is 
yet in the darkness of perception illusions of the lower 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, but there is steady 
light ahead. No one has made much advance as yet. The 
work ahead which is to be accomplished is infinite. Each 
has a full opportunity and a clear field, and infinite re¬ 
sources for all that is to come. The point is that man 
may become awakened to his opportunities. 

To obtain, to appropriate, more knowledge, is to 
possess more of life by substance. No man can do that 
work for you. Another may obtain learning for you, and 
do your higher mathematics, keep the books and records 
of your business for you, design and direct the building 
of your houses, your ships, and your railroads, while you 
look on and learn, but another cannot appropriate for 
you the tone degrees of wisdom and intelligence by which 
knowledge, or life unfoldment is achieved. The latter 
comes only of your own thinking. 

Man must rise by thinking —self thinking in voli¬ 
tion—or he will rise more slowly and more inharmon- 
iously. An element of industry, of work, is necessary. 
Man must do. Indolence and idleness must be overcome, 
and man must unfold to a spirit of productive action. 
Paul told the Thessalonians that if any among them would 
not work, neither should they eat. The higher applica- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


365 


tion of that doctrine is in force today, and will continue 
functional evermore. How can one eat the bread of life 
except by thinking, and doing all that thinking impli¬ 
cates? Man must think in order to eat—in order to ap¬ 
propriate knowledge, to the unfoldment of his life. To 
think effectively is to work—to do any and all things 
with might and main, that the hand findeth to do. 

Indifference to duty to self breeds neglect of self. That 
propagates to a state of poverty and want. Nothing will 
remove indifference and neglect of self but a higher and 
more rapturous vision of the glory and possibilities of 
self life, and such vision can be propagated only by 
thinking. 





EXERCISE LIX. 


PSYCHOLOGICAL POINTS. 

Psychology—Observations on the standard text books— 
When thinking is tiresome—When it is not—Think¬ 
ing is working—No rest except in physical sub ves¬ 
ture spheres, because nothing is weary—Thinking in 
Principle prevents insanity—Need for a change in 
methods of human thinking—All food is appropri¬ 
ated by thinking—Science and philosophy—Analy¬ 
sis and synthesis—Organic life of so-called matter. 


THE STUDENT must not regard any of the forego¬ 
ing, or following thinking exercises, as a treatment of the 
subjects implicated in the science of systematic psychol¬ 
ogy. The plan has been rather to resolve the study of 
thinking to experimental psychology for practice, and to 
employ methods of thinking in harmony with Principle. 
No attempt is made in this work to elaborate any system 
of psychology conforming to the dictums of modern sci¬ 
ence. The author may not he qualified for such a task, 
and even if he were, the objects sought could not be 
reached in that way. 

Modern psychologies such as have been produced by 
the thinking of James, Ladd, and others, do not greatly 
assist the average student in real methods of thinking. 
They leave us in darkness as to the source and evolution 
of psychological faculties. They venture but little to en¬ 
lighten us how the faculty organism is unfolded in hu¬ 
mans. They do give us however, voluminous elaboration 
on the functions of physiological psychology, and of psy¬ 
chological faculty organism proper. In those deductions 
there is an absence, not only of the evolution of faculty 
organs in their early formative state, but of such classi¬ 
fications as would properly recognize the zone, or tone 
qualities of life substance. 

They do not recognize the unit of substance as an 
organic form of life, with interdependent tone functions, 
hence they fail to see the real Principle which guides in 
the evolution of the mental functions of man. That, ap¬ 
plies also to the higher psychological development. Mod¬ 
ern psychologies provide very heavy, and almost fruit¬ 
less study. They are for that reason not satisfactory. 
They do not hit the nail square on the head. They are 
( 366 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OP THINKING. 


367 


therefore burdensome, tiresome, and lack life unfolding 
power. 

When is thinking tiresome? When it is purely sen¬ 
tient, or in physiological psychology. Thinking in pure 
psychology cannot make man tired. Only the physical 
can become weary, and even that must be exclusively con¬ 
fined to physical subvesture substance, commonly called 
matter. On the contrary thinking psychologically, in 
methods of Principle is invigorating, strengthening, and 
life giving. It cannot make the thinker weary. It revives 
him and renders his life organization more powerful. It 
provides the life organization with psychological food, by 
its appropriating and propagating functions, and re¬ 
freshes the inner man. 

Only the outward psychological faculties work on a 
physical base. Only sentient thinking directly implicates 
physical subvesture organism. Even the higher celestial 
thought activities are interdependent^ independent of 
physical functions, and when those flux with spiritual 
faculty powers, the tired feeling is precluded. All psy¬ 
chological development—psychological faculty building 
and expansion—rises by the use of already partly de¬ 
veloped thought organism. Psychological evolution can 
make no progress in a state of idleness or imaginary rest. 
There can be no such fact as rest above physical subves¬ 
tures. Even in the full tone physical zone there is no 
rest, and therefore one eternal day, because nothing in 
that zone of life can become weary. Weariness is con¬ 
comitant only with the physical subvesture body. A risen 
form of life could not become weary. 

In a recent volume on “An Outline of Psychology,” 
the first sentence of the text reads: “Knowledge is the 
product of leisure.” The very contrary is the fact. 
Knowledge is appropriated in industry and in no other* 
way. There is no such fact as leisure except in a narrow 
relativity. Knowledge is unfolded in degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, by thinking, and thinking is the father- 
mother of all industries. He who thinks in volition, choice, 
motive and the subjective will is never at leisure and 
never tired. More than that, he who begins to so think 
in the plan of Principle, while sane, will never become in¬ 
sane. It is thinking in error and evil—thinking about 
nothing, to use a common phrase—which propagates in¬ 
sanity. The author goes still further and declares that 
thinking in methods of Principle, as set forth in this 
volume will turn back and dissipate the current of 
hereditary insanity. 

It may appear to the idle thinker—the thinker who 


THE NEW IDEA. 


'388 

feeds only on the thoughts of others—that the claim 
which we set up, to-wit: That thinking in methods of 
Principle, in volition, as soon as it becomes general will 
abolish the unfortunate human asylums, hospitals, alms 
houses and jails, but, nevertheless that is the only sure 
remedy for such evils—evils in the sense that they are 
products of thinking in error and evil. That is self evi¬ 
dent. 

It is, in like manner self evident, that a great change 
—a great reform—in methods of human thinking, is de¬ 
manded in our day. The race, or a large portion of it, 
has reached a psychological stage wherein such is neces¬ 
sary. Man is ripe to harvest such a change. He should 
rise in thought science to appropriate invisible foods, and 
partake in diminishing quantities of visible foods, except 
such as come in the tones of harmonics by tone colors, 
and the higher light. Man is living, or famishing, on too 
much visible bread. He is starving his affections by turn¬ 
ing his back on invisible foods. Let us have more of the 
latter and our appetites will demand less of the former. 
That branch of psychology has been sadly neglected on 
the pages of nearly all of our modern scientific text books. 

Man rises exclusively by the appropriation of foods. 
He can rise in no other way. When he comes to under¬ 
stand that the most potential foods are appropriated, 
digested and assimilated, by methods of thinking in the 
plan of life as it is in Principle, he will enter upon a new 
era of life unfoldment replete with human conquest. 
There are innumerable grades of life foods to be thus ap¬ 
propriated, but the highest is that of which man may par¬ 
take by thinking in fellowship with the Risen Brother¬ 
hood. All the forms of life are akin, and all are one life. 

If these sayings are regarded as a medley of science 
and philosophy, neither being exact, and the whole out¬ 
side of the boundaries of the systematic schools, let us 
reason a little about that. There was a time when human 
“knowledge was indeed a medley of fact and fancy.” 
Later a strong line was drawn between science and phil¬ 
osophy. The plan of science is, in a general sense re¬ 
solved to analysis. It is said that all the sciences find 
their source in analysis. That which at first appeared to 
be simple turns out, by analysis to be compound. By that 
process substance is divided into smaller parts, each a 
little more simple than the mass; these, in their turn, to 
smaller and simpler, and so on, until elements—molecular 
elements—are reached. Then followed the discovery 
that all “matter” is of molecular—elemental—constitu¬ 
tion. Now, dear reader, we are but extending the beaten 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


369 


paths of analysis—of science—in discovering the unit con¬ 
stitution of molecules, and raising visible analysis, which 
is by weight and measure, for purposes of necessary pro¬ 
portions, to tone analysis, by which we apprehend, in 
scientific philosophy, the organic life of primal units, and 
boldly declare them to be single thoughts. It is evident 
that this branch of science will be further developed by 
spectral anaylsis. We are content to adopt the spirit of 
synthesis, where analysis cannot penetrate, and to stand 
on that foundation until a more advanced analysis comes 
to our relief. When it arrives it will grandly sustain our 
positions. 

It is safe to say that a “dead” molecular world, with 
its inorganic units, is far more unscientific, today, than 
is my position that all forms of substance (matter) unit 
and mass are marvelously organic, and gloriously alive. 
Further, that they possess conscious wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, and as actual thoughts know what to do and when 
to do it, in the performance of their respective tasks in 
form-life building in obedience to human volition. If the 
student will exercise just a little patience, I will en¬ 
deavor, a little later, to submit quite conclusive proof 
of this contention from admittedly scientific works at 
hand. 



EXERCISE LX. 


THREE FOLD CONSCIOUSNESS. 

The celestial, the spiritual, and the psychological sides of 
mass tone consciousness—Its wonderful Organism- 
Man self-created by thinking. 


THE interdependent three-fold Consciousness of a 
human presents a most difficult, but very interesting, 
problem. Taking it as a whole, and including its three 
sides, it is celestial, spiritual and psychological. Now, 
each of the sides of that triad consciousness is itself 
three-fold. Let us examine the nature of that peculiar 
organism. The first classification follows: 

1— Celestial, or sentient consciousness. 

2— Spiritual, or subjective consciousness. 

3— Psychological, or the higher subjective conscious¬ 
ness. 

The first is the mass tone oscillations and radiations 
of the celestial triad of the unit, or organization, to-wit: 
The physical, mental and celestial tones, including at 
their base the physical subvesture tones. Thus, in sen¬ 
tient consciousness there are the fluxing together in mass 
tone of four classes of tones. 

The second is the mass tone oscillations and radia¬ 
tions of the unit, or organization, to-wit: The angelic, 
divine and spiritual tones, including at their base angelic 
subvesture tones. The latter, I am, as yet unable to elab¬ 
orate. Thus, in spiritual consciousness there are also 
four classes of tones. However, both the first and sec¬ 
ond are regarded as triads, because the sub-tones are 
drawn up by unfoldment into the others. 

The third is the finished product of the joint mass 
tone oscillations of the other two. It is the new invisible 
man— that psychological organization of risen life which 
has passed through the first resurrection. That latter 
applies to a human who is unfolding his life through suc¬ 
cessive degrees of wisdom and intelligence, by thinking 
in the exercise of volition, desire, choice and motive, 
toward the goal of Truth in Harmony. 

The first and second consist in the invisible sides 
of man’s duality. There is the invisible celestial side, 
as well as the invisible spiritual side of human duality. 
Those two sides function as one distinctly in the propa- 

( 370 ) 




NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


371 


gat ion of psychological consciousness, but separately and 
jointly in all other oscillations, alternately. 

Now, man may live without propagating, in volition, 
a very high psychological organism. Again, he may so 
exist as to disorganize that which Principle has evolved, 
before reaching the years of obligation and duty.. That 
already has been explained. It is impossible for one to 
so think and live that, at middle, or old age, psychological 
consciousness will be in the same state in which it existed 
when the thinking organism was passed over to self-con¬ 
trol, or self consciousness. It must either rise higher 
or sink lower. It cannot remain stationary. 

It is seen from the foregoing that when we speak 
of the Consciousness of a human we cover a most won¬ 
derful organism. It is transcendent even beyond ordi¬ 
nary comprehension. All the kindred groups, or psycho¬ 
logical households of the new man, after a certain stage 
is reached are self created, by thinking, so that when a 
man or a woman steps forth from the visible form, and 
begins to function in the new man or the new woman, 
he or she presents to the creator a self made form of 
life. That is the highest glory of God which a human 
life can propagate. Therein is the living witness that in 
the creation of life units Principle performed its most 
exalted work. 

It is to be noted that the three-fold consciousness, 
as defined in the foregoing, is functionally one in a hu¬ 
man. The natural processes are the unfoldment of the 
celestial and spiritual sides of man’s duality up into the 
psychological. While that process is going forward 
Consciousness is three-fold in the sense stated, but when 
that propagation is finished, or brought to an end by the 
departure of the invisible from the visible form, in that 
event usually called death, there is generally, I appre¬ 
hend, important changes wrought in Consciousness. 

We should consider those changes, as far as they 
can be revealed to our vision. In the cases of infants 
and youth, before wilful degeneration can be wrought, 
the invisible duality of the present human form will pass 
into the psychological organization; and the whole will 
experience the completion of life unfoldment in inter¬ 
mediate invisible spheres. In the cases of fully devel¬ 
oped humans—humans who have risen to maturity phys¬ 
ically and intellectually—if the new form has been un¬ 
folded, by thinking, as set forth in previous exercises, 
the same will occur, with less to be done in intermediate 
spheres. In the latter, however, where the invisible 
psychological form has been disorganized and degener- 


372 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ated by wilful disobedience, it cannot be detached, and 
will not rise from the lower duality, at the dissolution 
of the visible body, but will remain a part of it, and the 
whole life will go back to the pre-human state before 
referred to, in order to find another opportunity for 
human evolution. 

That partial repetition of what has previously 
been said is for the purpose of considering the 
whole problem from the view point of consciousness. It 
is plain that Principle does not function to deprive man 
of the glory of self-life unfoldment by self. Prom the 
starting point of “years of understanding,” so often re¬ 
ferred to in foregoing exercises, it is the plan of life that 
man shall function as a builder of self. If he refuse to 
do that, or, by willful thinking in evil, works out a 
disorganization and degeneracy of his moral and other 
faculties, he must fall behind. This volume presents a 
plan of life unfoldment in the plan of Principle which 
triumphs over reincarnation, as well as over death. That 
is important. ‘‘Work while it is day, for the night 
coineth when no man can work” with precisely the same 
opportunity which is now available. He will have to go 
back into the darkness of night, and await another op¬ 
portunity to return to human spheres of rising light. 

Man’s one great business in human spheres is to 
unfold his naturally rising life into the glory of expand¬ 
ing psychological consciousness, where he will be secure, 
and wherein he will enjoy youth and health forevermore. 




EXERCISE LXI. 


SPARKS OF SCIENCE. 

Warning against rehabilitating the old—The visible and 
the invisible defined—Another explanation of “mat¬ 
ter”—Illusions of appearances—Marvelous strength 
of the next higher body—Inherent forms of full tone 
physical magnetic ether—Man unfolding to Omnipo¬ 
tence and Omniscience—From the beginning of life 
in the next higher zone man unfolds as a constituent 
of the Mass Form of Invisible Brotherhood. 


LET me warn New Thought people against building 
on old foundations—foundations in obsolete science. I 
have observed considerable of that within the past few 
years, and I wish to correct such a tendency. It must 
be remembered that we need a mighty reform in methods 
of thinking in what is called science. Especially is that 
the case concerning the science of physics. 

It is very plain that when our metaphysics are wrong, 
our ontology will be in error. We must stand squarely 
on Principle, and unfold in tune with the pure melody 
of its oscillations, or we will become discordant. The 
foundations must be in Principle, else the superstructures 
will be unsafe. It is quite easy for one who rests on 
those foundations to think correctly, and to detect error 
in the thinking of others. Thinking is either right, or 
it is wrong. It must be one or the other. 

When the student hears one discoursing, in the lan¬ 
guage of much learning, about matter, and declaring, 
for example, that matter is primarily invisible, then vis¬ 
ible, and, finally invisible, he or she can rest assured that 
such person is learning mad, and in a poverty of knowl¬ 
edge. True, an ancient Hindu work called the Bhagavad 
Gita, says: “Matter is invisible in its primordial state, 
visible in its intermediate, and invisible in its final state.” 
That is symbolic. Now observe how T easy it is to inter¬ 
pret that symbol properly. In the first place, we must 
substitute the word substance for that of matter. Then 
we must understand that the words visible and invisible 
are used wholly from the view point of humans. Already 
we have won nearly the whole battle. Now let me ren¬ 
der the Hindu idea in the terminology of the new idea 
of things: Substance is invisible in its primordial state, 

( 373 ) 


374 


THE NEW IDEA. 


to humans; it is visible to humans by its physical sub¬ 
vesture tones, in mass bodies. That is its most extended 
state. Substance is invisible to man in all its tones 
which are higher than those of which human visible 
bodies are composed. 

That explanation, in the light shed on the science 
of physics, by this volume, is very satisfying. I am sin¬ 
cerely anxious, more so than language can express, that 
the average man and woman shall come to understand 
the teachings of this volume as clearly as possible. For 
all past generations, science has been the possession of 
the very few. By this volume its foundations will be¬ 
come the heritage of the many, and on those foundations 
men and women can build in the science of ontology by 
their own thinking. 

It is the business of modern scientific thinking to 
interpret ancient symbolic lore. We cannot accept it 
literally. We must unfold it, by thinking, to clearer vis¬ 
ions of Truth. If the ancients possessed more knowledge 
than we do. it is our own fault. It is because we are 
too indolent to think. It will not do to guess at things. 
We must unfold into the facts we desire to know, by 
thinking. 

I would like to comment on a score or more of recent 
new thought publications, which seek to promulgate a 
new science, so to speak, by rehabilitating the old with 
bright ideals, but I do not wish to give even the shadow 
of offense. My own effort will, no doubt, suffer from 
severe criticism, but where that proceeds in honesty, it 
will be from misunderstanding. Some may not readily 
see the “cat in the picture.” They will fail to grasp 
the sweep of this new system. As soon as a full under¬ 
standing of these teachings is appropriated, adverse crit¬ 
icism will be disarmed. 

That is not expressed in a spirit of egotism. It is 
simply a fact. The system of tone analysis developed in 
this work, by which the nature of substance, and that of 
the physical subvesture tones thereof, called matter, are 
elaborated, is higher and grander than human thought 
has been able hitherto to reach. It affords a key to a 
new and more satisfactory plan of dynamics, and raises 
the “conservation of energy” to higher interpretations. 

I am advancing in years, and must soon reach that 
point wherein, from hereditary forces, if from nothing 
else, I shall be compelled to leave these subvesture tones 
of wisdom and intelligence behind, but I greatly desire 
to remain long enough to elaborate one, or more lecture 
courses, in further elaboration of these teachings. These 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


376 


two covers are, by far, too elose together for that work. 
There is so much that, for the present, must remaiu un¬ 
said. I can now only write from the standpoint of foun¬ 
dations. We must have a more complete superstructure 
later. 

Going back to the first paragraphs of this exercise, 
one may see from a little study that the question rises, 
to-wit: Is not so called visible matter continuous in this 
■way; as it unfolds upward to higher qualities, man rises 
with it, and, as taught in this volume, the higher, will, 
in that way, always be visible to the rising man? In 
other words, are not the finer and higher tones matter 
as well as the lower? Yes and no. In the first place, 
the lower presently visible tones are not matter. They 
only appear to be matter to sense perception, which is 
in degrees of unfolding potentiality. There is no such 
fact as matter in the idea in which it is comprehended 
in perception. The lower degrees of wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence—those appropriated in lower folds of rising life 
—are illusive in comparison with unfolding realities. In 
sense perception, things are not what they appear to be. 
By unfoldment we leave those appearances— those per¬ 
ceptions—behind and below. They make for knowledge. 
They are functional to our unfoldment into knowledge. 

There is, I repeat, no such fact as matter. There is 
only substance. We can comprehend substance only by 
the appropriation of its degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, which are in rising tones. We must come to see 
just what degrees of wisdom and intelligence are. They 
are the tone radiations of substance, and therefore them¬ 
selves substance. 

I generally use the term, wisdom and intelligence, 
in that form, on a rising scale, but, from the standpoint 
of extension, intelligence is first. Intelligence knows; 
it is the potential substance of knowledge. Wisdom 
knows how. Please think on those life unfolding state¬ 
ments, and appropriate them. Intelligence and wisdom, 
are, in a way, but other words for Power and Love. 
Power is force; Love connects that force to use. Intelli¬ 
gence is force also; wdsdom controls that force in proc¬ 
esses of utility. The tone forces and their uses, in life 
unfoldment are, therefore, in the facts of intelligence and 
wisdom. They are in unfolding degrees of tone sub¬ 
stance; they are appropriated in the unfoldment of 
knowledge. All that is in processes of thinking—in the 
actuality of propagation. 

As man rises, by thinking, wdiich thinking is in the 
actuality of the appropriation of the tones of intelligence 


576 


THE NEW IDEA. 


and wisdom, lie enters into— becomes— higher substance. 
That goes forward in tone degrees of intelligence and 
wisdom. The two in joint oscillations know and know 
how, respectively. It is seen here that the units of sub¬ 
stance are all alive, and in the facts of conscious wisdom 
and intelligence, or the know and the know how forces 
of life. 

It is seen that when tone unfoldment is natural, or 
normal, it appropriates and absorbs, drawing up, with 
it, through propagation, the tones which are the instru¬ 
mentalities of that propagation, and which become new 
—other facts—by such propagation. In that way the 
lower visible tones of substance rise to new and become 
invisible to humans, but not invisible to risen humans. 
“Marvel not that I say unto you, ye must be born again.” 

Man appears to be composed of, and to be sur¬ 
rounded, on every side, by matter. That appearance 
rises in functional perception, and that function will con¬ 
tinue until that appearance is dissolved, and resolved to 
higher degrees of knowledge by substance. That will 
continue until facts will no longer appear, but become 
and exist in the realities of Truth. That is evolution; 
that is life unfoldment. 

Nearly the whole fabric, or system, of science is in 
perception—in degrees of intelligence and wisdom. It 
is in the facts of the know and the know how, which 
shed an increasing flood of light into the thinking organ¬ 
ism of man. Science, after all, is in symbols. We are 
called upon to interpret those, by methods of thinking 
in Principle. It is true that as we unfold into and be¬ 
come the higher tones, we shall behold them, and that 
will continue until, not only the substance of Primordial 
Principle, but that of the new unfolded Principle will 
become visible. Substance is continuously rising to 
higher qualities. That is resolved to the expansion of 
man’s rising vision. They are one and the same fact— 
they make one. 

Students must therefore propagate the teachings of 
modern science to higher degrees of the real, by thinking 
in methods of Principle. At best modern science is but 
symbolic—but suggestive—of those loftier concepts. It 
is most useful when employed as items of suggestion. In 
that way it becomes the instrumentality for more sys¬ 
tematic thinking. 

The chemistry of physics is a most useful science 
for the purpose just named. In that department of sci¬ 
ence analysis, for a long time, and even yet, for the 
greater part, finds a convenient stopping place at mole- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


377 


cular elements. Those are said to be in the free state. 
Well, that is true, so far as gaseous physical sub vesture 
tones are concerned, but no farther. It is not the fact 
with the molecular units of solids. The units of liquids 
are corpuscles. Liquids are always in a compound state, 
and are, therefore, not molecular, by their units, but may 
be resolved to molecular units. Take any of the molecular 
elements, said to be in the free state, in solids, such as 
gold, silver, lead or zinc. Science says that the mole¬ 
cules of zinc, for example, are zinc—nothing else. It 
teaches the same, as to the. so called, free state units of 
all solids. 

Now, when those solids are volatilized, the molecular 
units composing them rise back to a gaseous state from 
which they were originally propagated. The liquid vest¬ 
ures, or tones, are dissipated as they rise through the com¬ 
pound state. Can science give us the names of the mole¬ 
cules of these gases which rise from the volatilization 
of gold, silver, lead and zinc? What are we to call those 
elements after volatilization? Does volatilization disor¬ 
ganize the molecules and precipitate them to atoms? If 
so, what shall we call that more primal free state? The 
atoms cannot be atoms of gold, or of silver, or of lead, 
or of zinc. Those so called free state tones are gone. 
We are in a more primal field when in atomic spheres. 

Now, here is a rule which must be applied to all 
chemical processes, and to the characteristics of all tone 
units. It follows: The characteristics, or powers, of any 
unit of solid “matter,” rises from the proportions which 
the interior and higher tones of such unit bear to each 
other. It is all a matter of proportion. There is, there¬ 
fore, a molecular free state, and an atomic free state. The 
latter is more primal, more simple, than the former. They 
are not the same. 

When the molecules of gold are resolved to their for¬ 
mer gaseous state, if they can be precipitated to that, 
without being disorganized into atoms, what should they 
be called? Would they, in mass, properly be called, the 
gas of gold? It may be that the volatilization of 
metals precipitate their molecular constituents to atoms. 
If so, a more primal free state has been reached. That 
proves that the atomic constituent of a molecule of gold 
is not gold at all, but something else. No one yet knows 
what that something is by name, but, from this volume 
one may determine its unit tone organism. 

When molecules are resolved from the solid or gas¬ 
eous state, or so called free state, to atoms, the further 
resolution of those unit forms to a more ultimate state 


378 


THE NEW IDEA. 


is by the disrobing of vesture tones. That may be done, 
in natural processes until the naked substare of the 
tones is disclosed, but. if such could be done by chemical 
processes, which, of course, is impossible, that substare 
would immediately re-propagate another set of triad 
vesture tones. 

It is all said, in short, when I declare that the pow¬ 
ers of substance units, are, at the last analysis, dependent 
upon the tones of their substares, and the proportions 
which their interior tones bear to each other. It is all 
a matter of interior tone organism, and in the proportion 
which the different classes of tones bear to each other. 
That is the Principle of tone analysis. Study along these 
lines will enlighten us concerning the science of physics. 

I am not as yet certain, but am strongly inclined to 
the belief that atoms do not, individually, propagate 
physical subvesture tones. It is by molecular organism 
that they descend into these lower spheres. Hence, only 
molecules and their subsequents in organism propagate 
subvesture tones such as gases, liquids and solids. 

I hold that what is called magnetism is the lowest 
full tone physical fluid, and that it is of atomic constitu¬ 
tion. It is the most powerful substance wearing full tone 
physical vestures in the subvesture spheres. It propa¬ 
gates to electricity. It is correct to say that the next 
higher outer bodies which humans will wear, after de¬ 
parting from these lower tones, will be composed of 
magnetic ether, or a fluid similar, if not identical with, 
what we call magnetism. But that will not all exist in 
atomic metamorphosis. It is in cellular metomorphosis, 
of course, corresponding to the physically subvestured 
cell which has been unfolded to the full tone physical 
state, or, in a state wherein its outer vesture is composed 
of magnetic fluid ether. 

Hence one easily comes to see the marvelous super¬ 
human powers of the next higher body. Man, in that 
state, will enjoy full tone physical strength and energy 
in degrees of purely physical power ten thousand times 
higher than those in which he is now able to function. 
The strength of the next higher physical body of man 
is transcendently great. In that body he can move from 
one point to another, anywhere within the limits of the 
great zone of full tone physical ether, at will, by the 
power of his life organization, without conveyance, or 
any outside agency. 

The next higher is the full tone physical body. Man 
will ultimately pass from that into a mental magnetic 
ether body, composed wf the same substance of which 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


379 


ordinary thoughts now functioning in the cerebral re¬ 
gion of a human consist. Then, as already explained, 
he will pass from that into a body of celestial light, con¬ 
sisting of the highest magnetic ether fluid. In all those 
great zones of his rise, by unfoldment, the bodily powers 
of man will increase, on the cumulative plan of Principle, 
and his higher psychological organism will rise in corre¬ 
spondences. Thus man will unfold into Omnipotence and 
Omniscience. His final body, in the Master zone, is as 
yet beyond our vision. It will be in the Harmony of 
Truth. 

In all that rise, after the full tone physical zone is 
reached, man will bodily dwell in, and as a constituent 
of, Invisible Brotherhood, and will unfold in that trans¬ 
cendent mass tone form of Risen Mankind. 


EXERCISE LXII. 


DEATH AND HELL. 

Old symbols of death and hell resolved to the new— 
Failure of man to appropriate sub-physical tones the 
cause of affliction—Man should learn how to breathe, 
and to exercise the functions of hearing and vision 
—The appropriation of higher physical foods— 
Methods of bodily renewal in youth and health. 


IN the new and higher thinking which comes of 
self-life unfoldment, we soon reach those higher degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, by the appropriation of which 
we are able to see that there is no death and no hell. 
Later, when we unfold to the first, second, and third at¬ 
tainments, and come to understand what those symbols 
really stand for, in those visions wherein the old is trans¬ 
formed to the new, we see that, although relieved of all 
ideas of barbarity, there are mighty facts, in the plan 
of life, which old ideas of death and hell symbolize. 

The old symbols are very crude, but they all have a 
forceful significance. It will not. do to say that those 
teachings, which elaborate an orthodox death and hell, 
are false. It is proper to say, concerning them, that the 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence in which those old 
ideas were propagated, are no longer functional for en¬ 
lightened mankind. The error committed in those now 
obsolete theologies is not so much in facts, as in the 
interpretations, and understandings of facts. Less than 
a thousand years hence the same may properly be said 
of the highest interpretations of our day. 

Man can never rise in psychological vision, above 
the possibilities of the tone degrees of wisdom and intel¬ 
ligence of the substance of that zone of which his body 
is composed, while he dwells in that body. He may con¬ 
tinuously unfold the tone functions of that body, in a 
plan of unit renewal, productive of continuous youth and 
health, but his visions of Truth must ever be circum¬ 
scribed by the tone unfoldment of his body. That is 
another new idea of this volume. 

If one undertake to unfold his higher self, in a dis¬ 
regard of the needs of his visible body, he will make 
unsatisfactory progress. The whole life must be un¬ 
folded in harmony and together. It is, therefore, seen 
that no one can depend upon his or her visions of Truth, 

( 380 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


381 


unless that one has unfolded the whole life organiza¬ 
tion, as to all its departments, in beauty of Harmony. 

At one time we emphasize the paramount necessity 
of unfoldment into the invisible psychological form, but, 
in the next step, it is seen that such unfoldment impli¬ 
cates the rise and development of the visible body. Life 
is many sided, and we must gradually come to see all its 
sides. All that has been said by way of instruction as 
to methods of thinking, and, is here said in connection 
with the evolution of the symbols of death and hell, is 
in order that I may lead the student into the higher vis¬ 
ion by the route of physical subvesture tones. In that 
way our understanding of those important facts will 
reach its highest summit. 

I lay down the following biological proposition: Let 
us say that, for a period of ten thousand years, for ex¬ 
ample, the human race fails to appropriate from physical 
subvesture tone environment more than three-quarters 
the normal demand, and, during the same period contrib¬ 
utes thereto the normal supply. Would that unequal sup¬ 
ply and demand not propagate a surplus? Nlow what is 
the nature of that surplus? It, of course, consists of 
units of some degree of primal organism, each of which 
wears one or more sub-physical tone vestures. How is 
that surplus finally disposed of? Old earth is wiser than 
man. It takes care that the supply and demand of mole¬ 
cular units are always equally balanced. That is not 
now the case with cellular units, the two classes of which 
can find unfoldment only through plant and animal forms 
of life. 

Are animal or human cells being propagated in a 
larger volume of supply than there is a human demand 
for? No, not if the appropriation of those wonderful 
units, by mankind, were up to the proper mark. The 
supply is normal. The use far below what it should be. 
In what way does that surplus afflict man? Does it 
afflict man? It certainly does. We can see that those 
unused units are knocking at the ten thousand thousand 
doors of man’s life organization in efforts for entrance, 
that they may function there. We appropriate an abnor¬ 
mal supply of them, in a few kinds of physical stomach 
foods, but, for the greater part, ignore the others. In 
that way the body is weakened by an over supply in one 
direction. 

But in the sanatory department of hygiene man 
misappropriates alarmingly. He has not yet learned how 
to breathe. He inhales into his lungs whatever happens 
to come along. As a- result pulmonary ailments and dis- 


382 


THE NEW IDEA. 


eases abound. Man should be trained to breathe in san¬ 
atory science. The student must here distinguish be¬ 
tween sanatory and sanitary science. The former is that 
science not only pertaining to, but conducive of, health. 
Breathing sanatorily is that method by which the lungs 
receive, in their final chambers, only these substances 
which, when transmitted to the heart, are conducive of 
health. By that method—by proper methods of breath¬ 
ing —the higher and more functional tones of sub¬ 
physical vestures are appropriated. Sanitary science 
pertains to health. Sanatory science produces health— 
is a source of health. 

The limits of this volume will not permit of more 
than some general hints on the proper methods of breath¬ 
ing. Elaboration in this department must be deferred 
until the printed lecture courses are forthcoming. I can 
now only call attention to the fact that breathing, and 
heart oscillations are always working jointly. The lungs 
and the heart are wonderfully interdependent. All 
thoughts are born in the heart. The supply of substance, 
therefore, comes from breathing. That is another new 
idea in wisdom. It is plain from what has just been said 
that a proper method of breathing is all important. 

Physiologists know that any single inhalation is, at 
the last analysis, two-fold. It is double. It, in a way, 
comprehends two, or a part each, of two inhalations. Of 
course not all that is inhaled is exhaled. The secret of 
proper breathing is largely in exhalation. It is in the 
fact of being able to throw back, before it enters the 
heart, all that which seeks to remain which is unhealthy 
and injurious. Strange as it may appear, that part of 
breathing is accomplished by thinking. That method 
of thinking is auxiliary to thinking for heart purity, 
which is explained elsewhere. It is thinking to the re¬ 
jection of that which is unclean. Cleanliness is Godli¬ 
ness, but that more particularly refers to the inner life. 
That kind of cleanliness comes exclusively by thinking. 

Attention is here called to still another new idea. 
It follows: New thoughts are propagated in the heart 
by the entrance of germ thoughts through the lungs, by 
breathing, from without. Those are the positive, or male 
thoughts—units of life in cellular form. They fellow¬ 
ship with the germ thoughts in the heart—with the germ 
plasm composing the potentialities there. Prom that fel¬ 
lowship new thoughts are born, in form and tone, to 
conform to ideals and motives. It is, therefore, plain 
that one should exercise great care in admitting only 
the proper class of tone units from without. That is 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


383 


done by a process of breathing in connection with par¬ 
ticular methods of thinking. 

Man, as a rule, not only breathes unsanatorily, but 
he hears in precisely the same way. He does not know 
how to reject, without appropriation, discordant sounds. 
It is quite easy, by proper methods of thinking, to so 
reject discordant sounds, that they will not reach con¬ 
sciousness at all, to disturb the life. The plan almost 
suggests itself. As soon as inharmony, in sound, enters 
the outer ear drum, by atmospheric waves, one may 
think it out again, before it has disturbed the nervous 
system, or produced inharmonv in the inner life. It is 
denied entrance to the life to injure it. 

The same is precisely the case with vision. No one 
—no power on earth—can force man to see anything. 
He can exclude whatever he wills from both physical and 
psychological vision. 

On the other hand, one, by proper methods of think¬ 
ing, may appropriate the pure and healthful, in breath¬ 
ing, hearing and seeing. Those three are mighty func¬ 
tions of higher food appropriation. When those are 
working with full force, in harmony with proper thought 
oscillations, the higher physical subvesture tones are 
appropriated to the unfoldment of health, physically, 
mentally, morally and psychologically. In those methods 
man is making full use of his human opportunities. By 
feeding upon such foods, the stomach will be refreshed 
and renewed with less than a quarter of the material 
food usually forced into it, and bodily renewal will 
abound. 

By so living and thinking that “hell upon earth” 
will be abolished, so far as physical afflictions are con¬ 
cerned, and death will finally be overcome. It is in vio¬ 
lation of the plan of life that the body is driven to dis¬ 
solution. It is in harmony with that plan that the body 
enjoys continuous renewal and rise in health and youth. 
From the foregoing it is seen that man is himself respon¬ 
sible for all the death and hell there is on earth. 

Now, as to death and hell elsewhere, they are both 
resolved to a refusal to accept the plan of life, and the 
consequent going back to the next lower pre-human man 
estate for reincarnation, and a return to evolution. Thus 
in the new ideas of facts there is still a measure of death 
and hell, but, by proper methods of thinking, man will 
completely abolish those. 


EXERCISE LXIII. 


KEY TO SUCCESS. 

A simple method of thinking that any one can practice 
with the sure result of health, prosperity and happi¬ 
ness. 


THE cultivation of kindly feelings towards others 
unfolds into most astonishing results. As already stated, 
thinking in kindness, in love and affection, and in well 
wishes towards others, including friends and enemies, 
unfolds, in man, the germ of almightiness. It propagates 
to a sense of complete security; it unfolds the life into 
safety; it disarms all opposition, and delivers from evil 
of all kinds. Thus thinking in silence is far more func¬ 
tional than any deeds of kindness which man can per¬ 
form, although, as heretofore stated, the latter should 
be encouraged and practiced. 

It is noticed that thinking in kindness and well 
wishes is first. It is prior to kindly actions. It comes 
first. The reasons why more good is accomplished in that 
way than by actions are, first, that the motive is quite 
sure to be founded in a spirit of Brotherhood, and, sec¬ 
ond, thoughts are more potent factors than actions. 

The foregoing ideas are partly in repetition for the 
purpose of impressing here the fact that such methods 
of thinking, work out a very high degree of adjustment 
between man and his environment. If this volume could 
bring about a mighty change in the prevailing methods 
of thinking in that respect, among people generally, it 
would achieve the most potential reform ever inaugur¬ 
ated among men. Such a reform is more to be desired 
than the abolition of slavery by force, in any or all of 
its forms. That is said because, as soon as such methods 
of thinking become the general rule man’s injustice to 
man will disappear. 

I am justified in declaring that if a man or a woman 
will devote half an hour each day, as nearly as possible 
at a fixed time, to thinking in secret and silence, in well 
wishes, and desire for the health, prosperity and happi¬ 
ness of particular persons, enemies included, one at a 
time, that one would achieve greater results for self and 
for mankind, than by any and all other efforts com¬ 
bined. There is really no limit to be placed upon the 
results of such a practice. 

( 384 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


385 


If any one will indulge a careful self examination, 
and note the tendency of his or her thinking, regarding 
others, for one day, that one will be astonished by the 
fact that the burden of human thinking is not in bless¬ 
ings toward the neighbor. The greater volume of it is 
in returning evil for evil, evil for good, in envyings and 
jealousies, in wishes that the neighbor will not succeed 
in this or that undertaking, and so on. Even the dear 
women, who for the most part, and as a general rule, are 
better, morally, than men, think in envyings of the suc¬ 
cess of each other, and sometimes go so far as to think 
that “it serves her right” when one has made a mistake, 
or a failure. Men spend much of their time thinking 
out schemes for taking undue and unfair advantage of 
each other. 

Now, dear reader, here is one test which all can 
make as to the soundness of the teachings of this volume. 
Each one who reads these lines can set aside ten minutes 
out of the hours of each day for the kind of thinking 
here spoken of. I suggest that it be anywhere between 
six and ten o’clock in the morning. No one will know 
anything about it. Let it be in silenee and in secret. 
Try it for one month. Put your whole heart in it. I 
want the man or woman who considers himself or herself 
as unlucky, or non-prosperous, to make this experiment. 
If such one will practice as here stated for one month, 
that one will be overtaken by a series of successive suc¬ 
cesses, and happy surprises. That one will become pros¬ 
perous and “lucky,” and a new and brighter prospect 
■will open. 

All who read this, and who, after they have heartily 
engaged in the practice of thinking in kindly wishes for 
others, as recommended, are most earnestly requested to 
write the author, personally and privately, as to their 
experiences. Such letters will be returned to the writ¬ 
ers, if that request be contained in them, and their con¬ 
tents will be held sacredly private. In reply to such 
letters the author will respond with instructions and an 
invitation, in compliance with which such persons may 
become members of the S S S, or Silence Science Society, 
which is to engage in very important thinking in inter¬ 
dependence. 

In this short exercise every one will find an oppor¬ 
tunity, not only to test the genuineness of this system, 
but the wonderful powers of self advancement, 
by thinking in the plan of life—the real plan of life. 
If it be said that thinking in the method just described 
will be gTandly conducive of prosperity, health and hap- 


386 


THE NEW IDEA 


piness, and that most promptly, in response to such 
thinking, the reader may doubt. If so, or whether or no, 
let the experiment be made. It will do no harm. I 
declare that it is one of the unfolding keys to success, 
from every view point that success can be legitimately 
considered. It will work a complete change in your cir¬ 
cumstances for the better; it will open the way to com¬ 
plete victory on all lines. Try it, and if your life has 
been barren, it will bloom in the glory of riches; if it 
has been a series of defeats, it will become a succession 
of triumphs. Don’t tell any one about it, but take up 
thinking in wishes for the health and prosperity and 
happiness of those whom you know, especially those who 
are struggling in want and with troubles, including 
enemies as well as friends. Enter into it at stated times, 
and be as regular as possible as to the times set for such 
work. Do not be intermittent, or vacillating. Be per¬ 
sistent and with the whole heart. 

This exercise is a vast fortune to all who will enter 
into the work of thinking recommended. It is very 
simple. Any one can do it. No one can conform to the 
plan, heartily, and fail. 


EXERCISE LXIV. 

HINTS TO THINKERS. 

The gTeat and glorious way of life—Man in possession 
of all Principle, all Power, all Love and all Truth, 
potentially—He may unfold into them and become 
them, by thinking in Brotherhood. 


I HAVE chosen the plan of alternating the subjects 
of these exercises, presenting in one instance, methods 
of thinking which are somewhat difficult, and, in an¬ 
other,, those much easier to comprehend. That is done, 
even at the expense of a more homological classification, 
in order that, by variety, students will find their faculty 
functions employed, not continuously on any one line, 
but, by a system of alternation, on many trains of think¬ 
ing, in the course of this study. 

I have truthfully said that thousands and tens of 
thousands of men and women throughout our country 
are making effort to rise to higher and more effective 
methods of thinking. They are each and all conscious 
that in some way they possess a vast fund of knowledge 
which they cannot express, and in which they cannot 
function. They know that they must think that inherent 
knowledge out in the fact of unfoldment. They are face 
to face with the little problem of How. Each one of 
the whole multitude, thus struggling, is fully convinced 
that he or she does not possess the key —does not know 
how to the extent desired. This volume provides a sys¬ 
tem of keys for that purpose. 

In order to possess those keys functionally it is quite 
necessary to grasp this new system as a whole; to un¬ 
derstand its foundations. When one meets with new 
thoughts —new ideas—propagated by others, they are not 
expected to appropriate them in the exact tones in which 
they are received. They should receive and re-propagate 
them in different powers and qualities altogether. Sug¬ 
gestion would be quite barren unless it is appropriated 
in that way. I am not expecting—not desiring—that 
students will receive the ideas promulgated in this vol¬ 
ume, and pass them along to others in the same form 
tones in which I impart them. The idea is that readers 
will, from what is here said, propagate ideas of their 
own, with these as functional suggestions. 

The psychological vision of things, or facts, propa- 

( 387 ) 



388 


THE NEW IDEA. 


gated by one should become quite another thing when 
regenerated by the thinking of another, although, of 
course, both are the same in Principle. One who does 
not know how to propagate new thoughts from sugges¬ 
tion reads and studies very largely in vain. 

It is impossible for two persons to propagate, by 
thinking, the same ideas concerning any one fact. They 
must differ, just as the powers and functions of their 
respective Thinking Organizations differ. Nlot only is 
that a fact, but each successive Thinker raises those ideas 
higher. The last thinker is the best thinker on any par¬ 
ticular subject, provided he have the key to the proper 
method. 

It is possible that the student may have reached con¬ 
clusions in error from the teachings of this volume re¬ 
garding the substance of ideas and ideal groups. An 
idea propagated by the thinking of any one is in the fact 
of an organism, and if it be in Truth, or such degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence as unfold to Truth, it finds 
a place in the psychological organization as a functional 
power. Now, suppose one send that idea to another, by 
what I designate as a psychological propulsion, it does 
not depart from the life organization of the sender. It 
is not in that way. One may send, practically, the same 
thoughts—the same ideas—to a thousand, and still re¬ 
tain the originals. It must be remembered that each idea 
sent out on any mission, is propagated from the ideal 
group, or faculty organism, of him or her sending it. 
The sending does not deplete nor impoverish the source. 
On the contrary it enriches and unfolds the faculty from 
which it is sent by the fact of use. 

The little word, use, is of great significance from a 
psychological standpoint. The more a faculty is kept 
in use the stronger and more resourceful it becomes, 
except that, by the constant use of any one function, to 
the neglect of others, there will be abnormal and hurtful 
development, reaching out to inharmonv. One should 
so think as to use all their faculties, at least in turn. In 
that way there is normal unfoldment of existing faculties 
and the birth, or development of new ones. 

When one sends an idea to another in such persist¬ 
ence that it succeeds in finding entrance, through the 
heart, to the life organization to which it is sent, it 
propagates new thoughts, by its tone radiations, in fel¬ 
lowship with the units, or groups, among which it be¬ 
comes a fixture. In that way we give to. and, in the 
same way. receive from, another. It is in that way that 
you give of your life to the neighbor, and he, in turn 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


389 


bestows upon you. By thus giving, which, is in the fact 
of idea propagation, you enrich the life of the neighbor, 
and expand and unfold your own. 

It must not be supposed that by sending ideas to 
others from an ideal group organism, or faculty of your 
own that you are losing anything. The more you give 
the more you receive. That is not all. Each idea, even 
concerning some fact, which one sends out, differs more 
or less from the other, so that by the propagation of 
variety, one expands his own variety, which is the fact 
of unfoldment. 

Here is another point. Each new idea propagated 
and sent out is in the fact of a new birth—new substance 
—and yet it was in the potentialities of Principle ‘‘before 
the world began.” It is impossible to impoverish the 
resources of Principle. They are inexhaustible. To that 
fact add this: Principle oscillating by the thinking of 
any human, is the same as the oscillations of Primordial 
Principle. There is no difference. Principle is the same 
in the least as in the greatest things. When Principle 
oscillates in a man, it is the same as when functioning 
in the highest creature of the universe. Hence it is 
seen that no limits can be placed on the powers of man 
while he commands the resources of Principle. 

I wish that the reader, if he feel discouraged and 
cast down, would stop and think for a few minutes 
on the foregoing paragraph. Think of it. Man is in 
control of Principle. He can set its oscillations to the 
tune of his own choice of ideals. He can think in voli¬ 
tion to the music of his own “sweet will.” That means 
that he can unfold his life, item by item, by the actual 
propagation of new substance, infinitely. Now, if that be 
the Truth, how can one place a limit to the rising pow¬ 
ers of man? It is the Truth, as any one who can think 
can see. Therefore, the claims set up in this volume as 
to the unfolding Omniscience of man rest on the ever¬ 
lasting foundation of Principle. 

Surely it is in Truth that I exalt the potentialities 
of man, in Brotherhood, to the summit of his Creator. 
Can the student not see that all t h i n gs come by think¬ 
ing. The rise of life by thinking is as sure as Principle. 
It is in Principle, and Principle is in Truth. It is plainly 
shown in this volume that all Principle, all Power, all 
Love are in Truth, and are it. Hence, man unfolds, by 
thinking, in the plan of Principle, through Power and 
Love, into Truth, and becomes Truth. If there is no pow¬ 
er in such ideals, then there is none in Principle—none 
anywhere. 


390 


THE NEW IDEA. 


How could any creature be higher, potentially 
than man? Is it not seen that man is the all, by his 
unfolding potentialities? Is it not seen that the unfold- 
ment of a man is resolved to the evolution of mankind, 
in all the ages, past, present and future? Therefore is 
it not a settled fact of scientific philosophy that man will 
ultimately unfold to a greater fact than his source? 

It is in the plan of life that man may best reach 
that goal by methods of thinking which will make every 
step of his rise a heaven of joy and gladness. It was 
Tom Moore who said, “as we journey through life, let 
us live by the way.” That utterance is, at least, sym¬ 
bolic of the Truth. It is abnormal and unnatural that 
man should suffer. The natural plan of life provides 
happiness for him. If he is not happy, it is because of 
a wilful perversion of that plan. It is the result of wrong 
thinking. If one would be prosperous, healthy and hap¬ 
py, let him or her think in Brotherhood. That method 
of thinking will very soon resolve us all to one kin, and 
our cup of joy and gladness will overflow. One will get 
rich in that way a thousand times quicker than by rob¬ 
bing the neighbor. 

Man must propagate wealth and health by thinking. 
Environment abounds in wealth and health. All one is 
required to do is to appropriate those blessings by think¬ 
ing in Principle. Is it not seen that all health, all youth, 
all wealth, and the whole sum-total of plenty are over¬ 
flowing in Principle? Principle is yours! 


EXERCISE LXY. 


OUR RELATIONS WITH THE DEPARTED. 

Valuable hints to Thinkers—Pre-human, human and post 
human spheres defined—Their interdependence—Hu¬ 
mans in flesh and blood may behold and talk with 
departed humans as soon as the latter have risen to 
function in the new consciousness—Misunderstand¬ 
ings concerning so-called death—Not the license of 
disobedience, but the liberty of unfolding Principle. 


MANY, probably a majority, who take up this volume 
for reading and study will regard its teachings as in 
speculative philosophy. That is to be expected. It is 
only natural. However, as already stated, the student 
may easily, by the methods of thinking taught, put these 
doctrines to the test, by unfolding into them. If that 
cannot be done; if the student of these pages cannot, by 
unfoldment, come to see that the ideas here propagated 
are in rising degrees of wisdom and intelligence, the vol¬ 
ume is of no use to him or to her. 

The present exercise will, of course, at the start, 
be looked upon as speculative philosophy, but if all that 
has been on the foregoing pages be appropriated to an 
unfoldment into a clear vision, what is said here will 
readily be accepted. 

We come now to think concerning the scope of inter¬ 
communications between humans and unseen life orga¬ 
nizations above and below us. We narrow this exer¬ 
cise to the next pre-human race, on the descending scale, 
and to the members of the invisible Brotherhood, and 
those in intermediate stages which lie between us and 
that heaven. That is done in order to prevent confusion. 
In the first place, I lay down this proposition. Com¬ 
munications, by humans, with unseen forms of life is 
eo-extensive with interdependence, and, therefore, with 
obligation and duty. The only disputable question that 
can rise is in reference to the method and character of 
those communications. 

To what extent those communications are accompa¬ 
nied by bodily appearances and the spoken word of and 
by usually, unseen forms of life is a problem of surpass¬ 
ing interest to all humans. We have a vast volume of 
testimony, in words, from a great multitude, no doubt 
honest in their conclusions, to the effect that they have 

( 391 ) 





392 


THE NEW IDEA. 


seen and talked with the departed— those who have pass¬ 
ed from these sub-physical spheres. In ordinary parlance, 
“they positively believe what they say.” They speak 
from experience. But no man is under any obligation to 
accept, as Truth, the experience of another, which is re¬ 
vealed to him only by the word testimony of another. 
He must enter into the same experience before he can 
be honestly convinced. For example, if by methods of 
thinking outlined in this volume, students cannot unfold 
their lives into health and happiness, then its teachings 
cannot be depended upon by those who honestly make 
the experiment. It is plain that no one is commissioned, 
in the plan of life, to do your own thinking, seeing and 
talking. You must do that for self. 

That which another alleges he can do, which you 
cannot rise by unfoldment, to perform, is a fallacy; it 
is false. Of course, one may have unfolded to experiences 
transcendently higher than another, but the way is open 
for that other to reach the same summit. It is only a 
matter of climbing by thinking. In that work sugges¬ 
tion may prove very useful. 

I now lay down another proposition: Human com¬ 
munications with those who have, through the second 
resurrection, entered the mass-tone body of Invisible 
Brotherhood are purely psychological, and in the sub¬ 
stance of the highest subjective consciousness. They 
cannot be by bodily appearances, nor by the spoken word, 
as we understand those phenomena in sense perception. 
The only exception to that rule, if, indeed, exception 
there can be, is when, in the wisdom of that risen mass- 
tone form of life, one of its own members is sent on 
some extraordinary errand to humans in the economy of 
the Lord. Those members are “as the angels of heaven.” 
They are risen humans who have unfolded into the body 
of Invisible Brotherhood. Man has communication with 
those transcendent forms of life in the science of ana¬ 
goge, as already stated. 

That disposes of one class of communications, and 
leaves us two others to deal with. First, there are those 
who have departed human life on the rising scale, and 
who have not yet entered into the Sociological Body of 
Invisible Brotherhood, but who are, as yet, in spheres ly¬ 
ing between the human and the heaven of the latter, 
where they are unfolded through the second resurrection, 
into that transcendent mass-tone body, and where primal 
individuality, in everlasting wedlock of the male and 
female forms, is achieved. Secondly, there are those who 
have departed human spheres on a descending scale, and 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


393 


who, because of willful neglect and disobedience have not 
unfolded the new man or the new woman, and are there¬ 
fore resolved back to the next pre-human state for re¬ 
incarnation, and a return to evolution in human spheres. 

Now, if there be Truth in the alleged phenomena 
of communications by humans in the flesh with those who 
have departed from the flesh, by bodily appearances and 
by spoken word, it must be in respect of the two classes 
just named, or of one of them. We must, in the first 
place, declare that those who have gone back to the first 
prehuman estate could not take their human psycholog¬ 
ical consciousness, or human experience, along with them. 
That would necessarily have dissolved and resolved to 
life units—become disorganized by degeneration. Hence, 
that class of creatures could have no knowledge of their 
former existence in these spheres. They would stand in 
about the same status in which they existed before their 
first or prior entrance to human bodies. There is a pos¬ 
sibility that the second experience of human evolution 
will be more fruitful on account of the previous one. 
Certain it is, however, that such form of life would not, 
in that state, be able to identify and recognize their kins¬ 
folk from whom they had departed in this. They will 
be able to so function in a future state of evolution. They 
are the belated ones who will arrive at home over the 
highway of obedience when they have learned its lesson. 
I do not think that the class of communications referred 
to can take place between humans and those who have 
gone back for re-entrance to human unfoldment. 

We are now narrowed to those who have departed 
this life, and who have not yet entered the society of 
Invisible Brotherhood. As to the nature of human com¬ 
munications with that class, I am not prepared to deny 
the claims of those who, by proper methods of thinking, 
unfold to a very close contact with such rising creatures. 
It is certain that they are not, as yet, raised very high 
above humans in the purer walks of this life. Indeed, I 
am ready to affirm that humans may enter into communi¬ 
cation with them to their comfort and to the advantage 
of those among us who seek to do so from proper mo¬ 
tives. 

I do not see however, that such can be done until 
the departed have existed in the next higher sphere long 
enough to enable them to function in the new and rising 
consciousness. I maintain that there is a period corres¬ 
ponding to human infancy, but how long that continues 
from the standpoint of our time I am unable to determine. 
That is a formative sphere, one in which, as already stated, 




394 


THE NEW IDEA. 


a most important department of life unfoldment is 
achieved. It is certain that, after a period next succeed¬ 
ing what is commonly called death here, be it long or brief, 
those partly risen humans function in degrees of con¬ 
sciousness which extend beyond their own particular 
sphere. We can see how that is the fact. They exist in 
the psychological consciousness by which they rose to a 
sphere a little higher than this one, as to substance, or 
tone, and that organism is rising towards the heaven of 
substance of invisible Brotherhood which they are prepar¬ 
ing to enter. Hence they can see psychologically into 
spheres both above and below them to the extent of com¬ 
prehending those facts which exist by substance, but, of 
course, they do not any longer know of those things which 
do not survive with them; they do not, in their new en¬ 
vironment have knowledge of those potentialities left be¬ 
hind, which can no longer function for their rise. 

They enter the sphere in which they dwell by a new 
birth, but that is due to the fact that humans have not, as 
yet, sufficiently unfolded, in these lower spheres, to over¬ 
come that event called death. Later humans will enter that 
formative sphere without experiences the afflictions of 
that death-birth. From that observation, it is seen that 
they have knowledge, after rising to consciousness there, 
of facts which exist here. I hasten to say that the inter¬ 
ruption of consciousness in making the passage from this 
to that sphere, which I hold to be in the fact of an infancy, 
corresponding to infancy here, is due to the faulty unfold¬ 
ment of life which still prevails among men and women 
who live visibly on the earth. To be precipitated from 
the outer physical body in that event now misscalled 
death, which is the result of some measure of willful diso¬ 
bedience, and a greater degree of neglect, the rising new 
man is left in a condition somewhat nonfunctional, and 
emerges therefrom by unfoldment wrought by his new en¬ 
vironment. It is seen that evolution is becoming more har¬ 
monious-more perfect—as the result of human thinking. 
Some day, when “we no longer need the sun and stars for 
light,” we will come to understand how it is that man is 
self-created. 

When I speak of evolution becoming more perfect, I 
do so in the idea of the higher unfoldment of Principle. 
It must be held in steady vision that life works the un¬ 
foldment of Principle. That is the sum total of the plan 
of life. As Principle becomes more and more unfolded, 
life becomes correspondingly more and more functional in 
Power, Love and Truth. All that is to be brought about 
by thinking—by the thinking of humans and other crea¬ 
tures in higher spheres to which we are unfolding. 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


395 


Now, those spheres of life into which humans unfold 
in that event commonly called death are near by. They 
are not so greatly exalted as many suppose. Man does not 
rise into the highest, heaven of glory, in a single bound. 
Life there is very much as it is here, only a little higher, 
and with a broader and grander prospect. There are 
struggles there as well as here. We go into that sphere 
with a new outer body, and because it has not been suf¬ 
ficiently unfolded here, it is weak, and there is the necessi¬ 
ty of learning how to walk. It is to be noted that every¬ 
thing of life there is by unfoldment the same as it is here. 
The scale is higher, to be sure. In other words, one is in 
the higher tones of the same scale, but the first steps in 
the next sphere succeed immediately the last steps taken 
here. Nothing is accomplished in the death-birth but a 
change of form. All else is done by thinking—by propa¬ 
gation. When men and women come to think themselves 
into those next higher spheres, by proper methods, so as 
to completely abolish the sudden dissolution of the sub¬ 
physical body, and so as to throw it off, bit by bit and 
item by item, in a system of renewal already elaborated, 
there will be no such event as death, as we now have it, 
but men and women will consciously enter the next higher 
sphere, thus abolishing those formative stages which now 
prevail, and which bring about that period of infancy, 
so called. 

Those observations which are in degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence bring to vision the nearness of the next 
higher sphere of life. Metaphorically speaking, one can 
reach into it by extending the hand. It is closer than 
that. It is partly within us. We are in touch with its 
throbbing life every hour. Then why should we not have 
communication with its inhabitants? Alas! That com¬ 
munication has already been established by millions of 
those rising creatures. The trouble is wholly with us. 
We do not respond to them. Why? Because we have 
been taught not to do so. 

I have for forty years wondered why that is so. I 
have asked people of every rank for an explanation and 
have received none. We speak of the dead, so-called— 
cruelly so-called—in whispers. In the presence of the so- 
called mortal remains of a human, we generate feelings of 
awe and bend reverently, and speak only in whispers. We 
say, foolishly, that the body is dead, and that the spirit 
has gone to God, who gave it. All that is rank nonsense, 
except only the reverence. The awe is in error, the body 
is not dead, and that which has gone from our presently 
clouded vision is the new man, or the new woman, who, as 



396 


THE NEW IDEA. 


soon as he or she stands forth in the new rising conscious¬ 
ness will be as ready to talk and laugh with us, as ever 
he or she were while in flesh and blood. How many of us 
await that awakening to enter into communion with the 
departed ? How many of us, mothers and fathers, sisters 
and brothers, and other kinsfolk, send to them, daily, 
helpful thoughts to hasten that awakening? Not many. 

Why ? Because we have been cruelly taught that they 
are dead. It may be that, in some cases, they have gone 
back for another opportunity to improve the golden age 
of human life, but, even in that event they have not 
gone beyond our helpful thoughts. That should be re¬ 
membered. But if they have gone out on a rising plan 
of unfoldment, and we are in doubt about it, we will soon 
be able to know, because, if we do not very soon follow 
them, we may call them close enough to our psychological 
touch to press them to our hearts in the old time love and 
affection. Why should man in flesh and blood—man in 
the visible human state—not continue in fellowship with 
those who have gone from his circle of friends and ac¬ 
quaintances—from his own household? They have not 
gone very far, nor very high. They are all near by. 

The reason is found in the power of teaching and 
believing in error. In all the teachings of the Christian 
era, we meet with a reverential hush! When we enquire 
about those who have passed to other spheres, we are told 
that if they died in the Lord, and that if we die likewise, 
we shall, probably, meet them and know them by and by, 
and over yonder, beyond the Jordan of death. That is 
error, because there is no death. We are told that it is 
wrong to even think about the dead, except as to their 
lives before death; that we must not follow them with 
our thoughts or seek to commune with them after death; 
that to do so would be wicked disobedience. All know 
that that is the prevailing teaching promulgated in the 
name of Christianity. 

Jesus died for man. That is the teaching of the New 
Testament. It is the Truth, if by that symbol it be un¬ 
derstood that he simply and voluntarily took upon himself 
to suffer the pain of being violently percipitated from the 
outer physical body. But we know that he did not die, in 
a death sense, at all, but lived on after he “died” more 
gloriously than before. We are taught that we should 
seek Him to know Him after His so-called death. Why 
should we not seek to know others after so-called death? 
There is no doctrine in science that forbids it; none in 
the New Testament; none in unfolded Christianity; none 
any where, except in error. 


-1 







NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


397 


As a result of that false teaching a mighty chasm has 
been created between those living in flesh and blood and 
those living in the next higher bodily substance. It is a 
gulf wide and deep. As all can see, that separating phan¬ 
tom never was in wisdom and intelligence. It never could 
rise to function for man’s unfoldment in any degree of 
tone potentiality. As a result of that error those who 
have passed beyond our sphere find it almost impossible 
to awaken the attention of humans, while, on the other 
hand men and women refrain from seeking communica¬ 
tion with their departed friends and kinsfolk in a fear 
lest they offend their God. 

Is it not high time that this darkness were dispelled, 
and that a mighty flood of light were poured in upon our 
relations with the next higher and the next lower spheres 
of life? It must be remembered that the human sphere 
of life is the connecting link between both. If a human 
has gone back to the next lower sphere, can the thinking 
of humans who know he has so gone back, not assist him 
to the more speedily rise again? If, on the other hand, 
when humans have risen to higher spheres of light, and 
come into the possession of functional consciousness there, 
can men and women not seek and receive assistance from 
them? Wherein is there any abridgement of that fellow¬ 
ship? There is none. Interdependence, with its bonds 
of obligation and duty reach out, in its mighty sweep, over 
the whole orbit of life, from Unity to, and including, in¬ 
finite variety, and from variety up to the transcendent 
summit of harmony, wherein is the Living God. So-called 
death may temporarily interrupt consciousness, but it can¬ 
not, but for a moment, so to speak, break the chain of in¬ 
terdependent fellowship which is an infinite girdle of the 
Universe. W T lien evolution has become more perfect, by 
the greater unfoldment of Principle, interdependent 
thinking will be without even a temporarily missing link 
anywhere in the endless chain. 

As soon as it becomes known that men and women 
of this and the next higher sphere, as well as those of the 
next lower sphere can think interdependent^, for the 
good of each other, and that such thinking may be car¬ 
ried on in righteousness, a mighty flood of liberating light 
will break, with joy and gladness, into these now unnec¬ 
essarily dark human degrees of potential wisdom and in¬ 
telligence. I cry not for the license of disobedience, but 
for the full liberty of Principle. 

Thus, by thinking to the sweet music of the oscilla¬ 
tions of Principle, human shackles will dissolve, and man 
will rise free to think in all the tones of life, until the 







398 


THE NEW IDEA. 


radiations of his thoughts will become like the radii of the 
stars, and shine in all directions. We need not be afraid 
of the creeds, dear students. They do not bind us in 
Truth. They shackle us in error. There is not a creature 
propagated from the Eternal Absolute, high or low, except 
man, in some form, and that man is alive now, and has 
been alive since the birth of life in the golden dawn of 
time, and will remain alive forevermore. Man must ever 
maintain interdependent thinking relations, in obligation 
and duty, to man, no matter how widely he may be sepa¬ 
rated from other men, by degrees of harmony organiza¬ 
tion, or by discordant waves of tone life. That thing 
called death cannot function to interrupt interdependent 
thinking, but for a moment, and that moment must achieve 
its annihilation. 



EXERCISE LXVL 


HUMAN PREJUDICE. 

A New Duality of faculty functions—The real is always 
paired with the unreal—Unfoldment of the real a 
continuous battle—Thinking to overcome prejudice 
and to unfold fairness. 


ATTENTION is called to the fact that all of the ris¬ 
ing faculties of the human psychological organization have 
their opposites. That is a kind of duality not previously 
referred to in this volume. It may as well be stated in this 
connection that many of the functions of the thinking 
organisms of man have not yet unfolded into the full 
status of faculties. They are just budding from potential 
plasm. Nearly all of the feelings and emotions are in that 
primal state of development. They are not completely 
definable. But even those are accompanied by their oppo¬ 
sites. Those opposites are negating forces, in perception. 
They function in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, to 
test and to try the strength of the regular faculties, and 
in that way, to promote their growth. It is that which 
overcometh that wins a higher place. Rising life is a series 
of little and large conquests. 

It is in the plan of life that all rise, and that unfold¬ 
ment consists in overcoming obstacles. The obstacles are in 
degrees of potential wisdom and intelligence. They af¬ 
flict until they are overcome. Let us look, for a moment, 
at the way in which faculty functions are paired, to-wit: 

Courage is paired by fear; hope by despair; peace by 
strife; harmony by discord; reliance by doubt; trust by 
suspicion; fairness by prejudice, and so on, ad infinitum. 
It is in that way that the real and the unreal join in a bat¬ 
tle for the mastery in the life of man. Why is that a 
fact. It is because, in Principle, the real is unfolded by 
unreal forces; Truth is reached on the ruins of error; 
goodness appreciated and appropriated through the forces 
of functional evil; peace rises from the death of conten¬ 
tion; hope rises by crushing despair; courage unfolds in 
the overthrow of fear, and so on. Evolution could not 
proceed by any other method. Principle has unfolded 
that plan, and man must accept it. 

Each of the moral faculties of man is paralleled by an 
evil function. They are side by side, and in continuous 
struggle for victory. If the evil forces prevail, the moral 
( 399 ) 



400 


THE NEW IDEA. 


faculties are subdued. If the latter triumph, evil func¬ 
tions subside. Psychological unfoldment is a continuous 
battle of functions, real and unreal. The real is realized 
in the exact measure of the overthrow of the unreal. 


When the psychological organization of a human 
takes leave of the sub-phvsieal body, it leaves the unreal 
functions of its sociological compact behind. They do not 
follow it, but as the new consciousness of the partly risen 
form of life begins to function, another set—a higher 
system—of unreal functions form to take their places. 
Error does not all dissolve with bodily dissolution. It 
functions in the next higher sphere, but in a different 
way. It will continue in force, in some form tone, until 
the life organization becomes Truth. 


The immediately foregoing paragraphs of this exer¬ 
cise provide an important method of thinking, and they 
lead us into another. I have said that fairness is opposed 
by prejudice. Let us look at the significance of that func¬ 
tional pair, to-wit: 


Fairness, 

Candor, 

Frank, 

Ingenuous, 

Impartial, 

Honest, 

Propitious, 

Open. 


Prejudice, 

Prejudgment, 

Bias, 

Harm, 

Damage, 

Detriment, 

Mischief, 

Disadvantage. 


Let us suppose, now, that we are face to face with 
one whose prejudices outweigh their functions of fairness, 
two to one. Then suppose, still further, that a new 
proposition—a new idea— is presented to that one. How 
will he dispose of it? In prejudice of course;—that is to 
say, he will prejudge it, and that with bias, to its great 
harm, and damage, and detriment, in mischief, and to a 
disadvantage to himself and the New Idea, On the other 
hand, suppose the New Idea to be laid before a man of 
fairness; he will dispose of it in candor, frankness, in¬ 
genuousness, impartiality, honesty, and propitiously. 

What proportion of the more enlightened people are 
fair and candid, and what proportion of them are preju¬ 
diced and biased? Who is able to answer? Certainly a 
great majority decide all things in prejudice. When one 
is prejudiced he has an unreasonable predeliction for, or 
objection to, anything—an opinion or leaning adverse to 
anything, without just grounds, or before sufficient knowl¬ 
edge. A prejudiced person will prejudge the teachings 
of this volume, for example, without reading more than 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


401 


two paragraphs of its contents. Such a judgment is not 
worth the name, whether it be for or against them. 

We should, therefore, reach out after a method of 
thinking by which to unfold fairness and impartiality. 
Honesty belongs to the same group of faculties. All peo¬ 
ple are more or less prejudiced. It is epidemic in the 
human race, and has been ever since man became human. 
It is certainly not decreasing very rapidly. We are, for 
the greater part, dishonest and unfair in our everyday 
judgments of facts and things. We need to cultivate fair¬ 
ness, candor and common sense. All that one is required 
to do, as to this method of thinking, is to appeal to motive. 

It is a matter of self-examination, with an appeal to 
conscience. Prejudice is one of the most stubborn forces 
of life to overcome. It clings to one like a “second na¬ 
ture. ” It is the most deceitful of all functions. One will 
be quite ready to make oath on the sacred scriptures that 
he or she is not prejudiced—not in the least—when, as a 
matter of fact, that one is a bundle of prejudices. It is 
most difficult to be fair and candid about any thing, and 
almost impossible to do so, towards one against whom 
there is a shadow of dislike. 

One should spend hours thinking to unfold fairness. 
It is quite easy to do that. The student sees plainly what 
the method is. But there must be a high degree of heart 
purity propagated before one can really desire to be fair 
and honest in even little things. To become fair minded 
one has only to think in the “golden rule.” 

If the student will examine this double exercise care¬ 
fully, he or she will discover how closely potential evil has 
interwoven its functions with the unfolding realities of 
life, and how thorough methods of thinking must be in 
order to disengage them. 


EXERCISE LXVII. 


SCIENTIFIC SUPPORTS. 

Support in the writings of recognized modern scientific 
men—Evolution of body and mind inseparably united 
and from same sources—Natural selection resolved to 
unfoldment—Solution of all difficulties found in the 
complex tone organism and infinite resources of life 
units—Nature of Principle accountable, by its oscil¬ 
lations, for all types and varieties of the form tones 
of life. 


IN compliance with the promise at the conclusion of 
a previous exercise, let us proceed to deal with the scien¬ 
tific teachings of others, recognized as authorities, in order 
to see. if possible, that all scientific research points to the 
conclusions contained in this work. All scientific authori¬ 
ties now agree that the theory of the evolution of the 
body, as taught by Darwin and others is according to fact. 
It is also generally accepted that the evolution of the mind 
proceeded in a parallel column with that of the body. Some, 
however, look upon certain mental faculties as having 
risen outside the functions of the natural selection of life 
unfoldment. Darwin comes to the rescue and declares 
that “just as the body of man has been evolved by one 
continuous process from the germ-palsm upwards, so 
mind, in complete association, has been similarly 
evolved. ’ ’ 

At the start I wish to call attention to the fact that 
all proneness of our teachers to separate body and mind 
in the process of life unfoldment rises from the failure to 
understand the nature of life units. If Darwin had 
brought to vision the organic life of the units of substance, 
so as to see that all the cpialities of life—of thought poten¬ 
tialities—were potentially in and within the other vesture 
folds of the units—he would have given to the world a 
broader and more satisfactory system of evolution, and 
extended it to invisible worlds. His natural selection 
theory would have been resolved to the unfolding degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence of units, and his survival of 
the fittest would have been recognized as the same fact. 

Dr. Romanes, after elaborating mental evolution in 
animals, “compares the faculties and functions noted with 
those found in man,” and concludes, “that so far as emo¬ 
tions are concerned, it cannot be said that the facts of 

( 402 ) 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


403 


animal psychology raise any difficulties against the theory 
of descent. On the contrary, the emotional life of' ani¬ 
mals is so strikingly similar to the emotional life of 
man . . . the similarity ought fairly to be taken as 

direct evidence of a genetic continuity between them.” 
On the contrary Wallace holds that such faculty fimctions 
as genius, mathematics and traits of higher intelligence, 
could not have been unfolded by natural selection; and 
Mivart taught that while the body was evolved, the mind 
was a separate and distinct creation. But let us hear 
Mivart and we shall find the key to this whole difficulty. 
He says: ‘‘But high as man is raised above the rest of 
nature, the very limitations of his reason, considered in 
the light of the highest ethical aspiration of his being, 
demand something beyond nature—a divine revelation. 

How plain it all is. Those scientific scholars could not 
discover in the “vivification of matter” the source of 
man’s higher faculties. They are to be commended for 
that. Had they brought to psychological understanding 
the fact that the divine, as well as the spiritual, and the 
angelic as well as the celestial substances were within the 
units of life, hidden in the physical subvestures which 
they called matter, they would have readily understood 
that evolution, which is life unfoldment, was capable of 
evolving the highest invisible form of life known to a 
heaven of immortal glory, from those infinite units. 

Professor Huxley also declared that the ethical side 
of man could not be unfolded by natural selection, and he 
did so for the same reason given in the last paragraph. 
A class of scientific men declare that “organisms instead 
of being hand made and purposive, are machine-built by 
machines, and operated when built, by forces outside of 
themselves.” Commenting on that theory J. W. Thomas 
says: “What these forces are does not appear to be very 
manifest, and no hint is given that they are intelligent in 
character. When the origin of a cell is under considera¬ 
tion, and “why it does not remain stationary when ma¬ 
turity is reached, the answer is that the energy which 
built it will not leave it alone.” That energy is styled 
“polar energy.” and after being provided with this lucid 
explanation, we are told that those who have attributed 
the phenomena of sexual union development to the ac¬ 
tivity of polar energy are certainly on the right track.” 

The foregoing must prove quite conclusively to the 
students of this volume that I am “on the right track.” 
Polar energy is the fact of life as unfolded from Principle, 
and the more the light of science is poured in upon that 
fact, the stronger and clearer and more convincing it will 


404 


THE NEW IDEA. 


become. Nothing can be more convincing than the in¬ 
herent power of the cell to nnfold. It is not denied that 
environment is functional to that unfoldment although 
environment is propagated by cellular organizations. 

Spencer, whilst admitting the function of environ¬ 
ment as a factor in evolution, points out that ‘"there are 
internal relations as well as external, and that evolution 
can only proceed perfectly when the inner relations cor¬ 
respond with the outer.” The same fact has already been 
elaborated in this volume, but in a clearer light as to 
what that environment is. As some of my students may 
be aware, Drummond taught that environment was the 
principal force in evolution. He says: “the secret of evo¬ 
lution lies, in short, in the environment. In the environ¬ 
ment, in that which things live, and move and have their 
being, is found the secret of their being, and especially of 
their becoming.” If that doctrine is not quite fully elab¬ 
orated in this volume nothing is. I have explained that 
man is evolving into his works, in an image of the creator, 
or comformable to the plan of life, and is in reality becom¬ 
ing those works—that environment. At the last analysis en¬ 
vironment is vesture propagated from Principle. Thus 
evolution unfolds from within and without. 

J. W. Thomas, author of “Spiritual Law in the Nat¬ 
ural World,” “Intuitive Suggestion,” etc., says: “If we 
ask how the ancestors of man obtained the knowledge that 
the had correspondence with their environment, and the 
power to discriminate between good and evil, all, we are 
told, entered animal form without, like the carbonic acid 
gas enters into the growing plant. We know, however, 
that the oak is not an oak by virtue of its environment, 
nor did it become an oak because carbonic acid gas, oxy¬ 
gen and the vapour of water entered into the growing 
plant. The same chemical elements feed the elm and 
the oak; hence, from whence came their characteristic 
differences?” The same author observes: “Drummond 
saw the difficulty and declared that there w r as but one 
source of everything in the world. They (the social, 
moral and religious forces), came from the same source 
as the carbonic acid gas, the oxygen, the nitrogen and 
the vapour of water.” These also, he declared “visit 
the plant in the order in which the capacities for them 
unfold, and according to the measure in which these ca¬ 
pacities can contain them.” 

Thus it is seen that one school of science teaches 
that the capacities to receive unfold within, while the 
food for development flows in from without to their fill. 
It is true that unfolding life substance is both within 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


405 


and without any form of life, but the secret of all un- 
foldment and development is found in the manifold riches 
of the life units whether within or without. The Sub¬ 
sequent Cause—Principle—is both within and without 
man. It resides as a substare to every life unit in the 
universe, and at the last analysis there is nothing but 
life units, vestured and unvestured in this universe. Each 
one is in the fact of a thought, and possesses conscious 
wisdom and intelligence. That settles the whole matter; 
and, as any experienced thinker can see, without such life 
substance units, each containing “polar energy,” creation 
would be a failure, and science would prove a vain in¬ 
dustry. 

In the matter of variety—in the matter of the oak 
and the elm, and the difference between them—Drum¬ 
mond needed only a vision of unit life variety by pro¬ 
portion as taught in this volume. It is seen, therefore, 
that an understanding of the interior tone qualities of 
the invisible life units is all that is necessary to lift mod¬ 
ern science out of its tangle. It is noted in this con¬ 
nection that the riches of variety of the form tones of 
life unfolded from Principle provide infinite resources 
for the evolution of all types of men known to history, or 
to our present age, as also types of genius yet to be un¬ 
folded which will far exceed the past or the present. 

Thomas observes that genius is found in the animal 
kingdom as well as among men. He says: “The pigeon 
is a genius. . . It is a ‘seer’ of direction, a ‘cal¬ 

culator,’ not of figures but of direction.” The same, he 
says is true of forest Indians. He also points out that 
as opportunities for direction, by sense functions rise 
the intuitive capacity declines. It is self evident that man 
not only intuitively lives in environment, but that it is 
an integral part of his life. 

I also find strong support for the positions taken in 
this volume from the observations of Thomas, to-wit: 
“Telepathy is the coming event, the next development.” 
Then he says it is a new name for an old endowment, 
and a nearly lost faculty of suggestion by sense. It is 
not of sense, but is rising by unfoldment, by thinking to 
the tune of Principle. But in the following, Thomas 
excells: “If the records of the past are of any moment, 
and the conclusions of psychic science of any weight, 
there is a realm within the world of matter, and in 
closest touch with it, wherein all knowledge is stored 
— knowledge of the future, as well as of the past—knowl¬ 
edge that is perfect, accurate and reliable. It is the door 
of correspondence with this region which wants opening, 



406 


THE NEW IDEA. 


and the removal of rust from its hinges is the next 
development.” 

Is not the present volume functional to the opening 
of that door? Have I not shown that the units of which 
man is composed, physically, mentally, morally and spir¬ 
itually, consist of life within life, the finer within the 
coarser, successively, up to absolute substance, and that, 
because of such facts, man already possesses infinite 
knowledge; and, further, that all he requires is the 
unfoldment of that knowledge to consciousness? Surely 
the methods of thinking of this book are already crowned 
with victory. 

I now call attention to some observations of Thomas, 
which are manifestly in error. He says: “If after atoms 
of matter were formed they were found, subsequently, to 
repel each other, and execute certain movements, then it 
is evident that the First Cause must have ‘suggested’ that 
the atoms should possess such functions before they could 
act accordingly.” That is very far from the Truth. 
Primal atoms—thoughts—born of the oscillations of Prin¬ 
ciple, are not “matter.” They are of the highest spiritual 
ether, and only their seventh, eighth, and ninth vestures, 
which are in the fact of physical subvestures, could be 
called matter. The primal, or any other, atoms, vestured 
in the ether clothing of any zone of substance, contain 
within their own unit forms of life, the tones, or organ¬ 
ism, necessary for functional action. Nor did their parent 
Principle suggest anything to, or for, them whatever. 
Principle was transmuted into each one of them, as is the 
fact in all processes of propagation, and, therefore, and 
because of that supreme fact, and as the result of nothing 
else whatsoever, each such atom, or each such single 
thought, possessed inherently, and as an integral part of 
its own life, conscious wisdom and intelligence. Environ¬ 
ment had its birth in the tones of the primal etheric 
atoms, which transmuted themselves into vesture life, 
which provided a set of environment peculiar to the re¬ 
spective zones of ether, and those are the vestures of life, 
which, in our zone, embrace all the institutions of human 
civilization—all the tones of mankind. 

Again, Thomas says: “If the next step in the evo¬ 
lution of a planet was the liquefaction of a portion of the 
gaseous matter, brought about through the combination 
of certain atoms to form molecules, then this could only 
result because the First Cause ‘suggested’ that the atoms 
should be endowed with the ‘affinity’ to combine.” Away 
with such incomplete, deficient, and unsatisfying methods 
of thinking. They are crude and calculated to confuse 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


407 


and cripple psychological processes. There is no shelter 
from condemnation in the first word, “if.” The first 
steps in the evolution of a planet were the unfoldment, 
of vestures from the tones of the units, by which each 
such unit became an epitome world. But all that has 
been fully explained on previous pages. It becomes plain 
at every step of the study of modern science that the 
system is totally inadequate, and will remain so, until 
the tone, or life organic constitution of the primal and 
vestured atoms, or life units, is recognized. Without that 
foundation, in Principle, planet, or man building can make 
no satisfactory progress in science. Indeed, there can 
be no real science without such recognition. 


EXERCISE LXVIII. 


UNDER THE LIGHT OF SCIENCE. 

Further support from recognized Scientific men—Prin¬ 
ciple not the God of Being, but subsequent—The tone 
organism of atomic units the only open door—Intel¬ 
ligence and wisdom substituted for law—Life not 
physio-chemical, but the polar energy of Principle— 
Planets but mighty eggs for the hatching of cellular 
forms of life. 


HERBERT SPENCER said: “The Power univer¬ 
sally manifest to us through phenomena, alike in the sur¬ 
rounding world and in ourselves—The Power ‘in which 
we live, and move, and have our being’—is, and must for¬ 
ever remain, Inscrutable; yet the existence of this inscrut¬ 
able Power is the most certain of all truths.” The above, 
with, ‘ ‘ and must forever remain, ’ ’ left out, appeals to the 
rising intuition of man. Spencer did not, of course, know 
all things, which is to say that he had not, in his life, in 
flesh and blood, unfolded all knowledge to conscious¬ 
ness. He only partly understood the science of life un- 
foldment from Principle. He, as with all his predecessor 
and successor scientific men, confused Principle with the 
God of Being. So-called Christian Scientists do the 
same. Principle is not the First Cause—not the cause of 
the cause. Rather, it is the subsequent, or the Cause. 
All life phenomena are effects. The God of Being is be¬ 
coming the Living God through Principle. Principle 
is the source of all propagation—all polar energy—and 
from its infinite oscillations all things are created. It is the 
First Cause, working through Principle, the life func¬ 
tional cause, by which we have forms of life. 

Speaking of the inscrutability of Power, it is over¬ 
looked by Spencer that Power is in many qualities. There 
is the Power of Principle; the spiritual Power, proceeding 
from it; the divine Power, proceeding from that; the An¬ 
gelic Power, proceeding from that; the Celestial Power, 
proceding from all those; the mental Power, proceeding 
from the new Principle, inherent in the Celestial; the 
mental Power proceeding from that; the Physical Power, 
proceeding from the mental; and, lastly, physical sub¬ 
vesture Power, proceeding from the physical proper. 
The latter is not inscrutable. It is practically knowable. 
Now, the different qualities of Power came forth from 
( 408 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 409 

Principle in atomic and molecular devolution. Man 
rises through them all, by unfoldment, by evolution, in 
cellular forms of life, and comes to know and appropriate 
each quality in turn, until, finally, he knows as he is 
known. Thus, in the goal of unfoldment, nothing is 
inscrutable to man. 

We generally assign the name Creator to the God of 
Being, but, technically, it should be applied to Principle, 
Who is subsequent to the First Cause. 

Thomas says: “Astronomy teaches us that masses 
of matter move, and that this motion is not erratic or 
chance-like, but perfect, and regular, and continuous. 
There is perfect continuity of motion in the heavenly 
bodies. It is found, also, that the great forces' common 
to the matter of this planet act always in an unvarying 
manner. The lines of action of each force is termed the 
law of that force. ’ ’ At this point the author quoted gives 
his views concerning the laws governing matter. 

Now, dear student, there is no longer any mystery 
concerning the sideral bodies, nor the origin, and source, 
and continuity, of their respective orbital and other mo¬ 
tions. It has been seen in this volume that each such mass 
body of substance is composed of invisible units, and that 
each of the latter is a form of life, possessing conscious 
wisdom and intelligence; that each is in actual oscil¬ 
lation peculiar to its tones; that each degree of organism 
above the primal atoms, such as molecules, corpuscles, ete., 
is in degrees of mass-tone, and that the whole is in one 
mighty mass-tone, by united, interdependent oscillation. 
The vibrations of the units and of the whole in mass- 
tone propagate to motion, and that motion is guided and 
directed by the conscious intelligence and wisdom of 
the whole. It is seen, therefore, that the earth, or any 
other planet, is not at all likely to run into a neighboring 
world. Men often run against each other, because they 
can see only in one direction at a time, whereas a planet 
is not dependent upon any one, or all, the senses for its 
guidance. It moves in propagations of its oscillations in 
Principle, and cannot go wrong, because it does not pos¬ 
sess a free will, which is constantly battling Avith poten¬ 
tial evil, as men and women are. Nor does this system 
of thought ignore the interdependence of all heavenly 
bodies. Science has, heretofore, ignored the conscious 
wisdom and intelligence of the heavenly bodies, and, ap¬ 
parently, forgotten that orbital plans unfold from Prin¬ 
ciple. It should be remembered that there is no law, 
as usually held by science, in such matters, except the acts 
of the units and mass bodies, in relativity and interde- 


410 


THE NEW IDEA. 


pendence, according to the potential wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence of Principle propagated to all units, and unit 
organizations. Those degrees gradually unfold by the 
oscillations—the thinking—of such units in mass-tone. 

We might thus follow all modern scientific works on 
biology, psychology, or the higher metaphysics, step by 
step, and paragraph by paragraph, in an endless work of 
correcting their deductions in the same w r ay. It is only 
necessary here to state, as the student begins to see, that 
the substitution of the conscious wisdom and intelligence 
of life units—atoms if you please—for law puts an end 
to all our troubles. With that new discovery science is 
resolved to a new light, and is raised to higher ground. 

It is also seen, in the light of this discovery, that all 
processes in the science of chemistry and analysis are re¬ 
solved to the wisdom and intelligence of the units in 
chemical combination—to their tone oscillations in the 
plan of Principle. 

The whole range of dynamics, and the functions of 
compression, as well as the generation of physical energy, 
so-called, come within easy vision, by the application of 
the conscious life of units of substance. I have said that 
each of the primal units, by vestures, makes the journey 
of the whole orbit of life, from the very poles of Primor¬ 
dial Principle, down through the solid world and back 
again, in the grand work of creation. Planets, originally 
composed of atomic, molecular and corpuscular forms of 
life exclusively, are in the facts of mighty eggs, from the 
compressing, heated hells of which, cells are propagated 
in higher and wider tones. World building is but the pre¬ 
paratory stages of cellular life propagation. All the 
worlds were built that cells might come forth in a higher 
metamorphosis of form than that to which the atoms, 
molecules and corpuscles—the thoughts, ideas and ideal 
groups of atomic life—could otherwise unfold. By the 
cells and cellular forms of life higher thoughts, ideas and 
ideal groups have been evolved. It is true that the human 
faculties unfolded, or yet to be unfolded, were poten¬ 
tially in atomic degrees of organism. All that need be 
added is that, by cellular forms of life, a higher stage of 
their unfoldment is accomplished. 

Sir William Hamilton said that, “Life is energy, and 
Conscious energy is Conscious life.’* That is a safe propo¬ 
sition because it does not involve very much. However 
it is much better than the proposition that life is energy 
and that the nature of that energy is physio-chemical. 
The latter is purely mechanistic. There is really nothing 
of importance expressed in the term “phvsio-chemical 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


411 


energy” except that which applies to physical subvesture 
substance, somethimes called matter. We see at once that 
physio-chemical energy pervades all so-called inorganic 
substance. That cannot be satisfactorily accounted for 
by the science of physics. It demonstrates that there is 
no dead world and that all matter, or substance is alive. 

Dr. Carus says: “Nature is not dead; it is alive; it 
bears in its bosom the germs of life, and will develop them 
in the course of the natural process of evolution.” Alex¬ 
ander says: “There appears no reason why the process 
of the development of organic life from the mineral 
kingdom may not be going on today.” Herbert Spencer 
says: “The separation between biology and geology 
once seemed impassible, and to many seems so now. But 
every day brings new reasons for believing that the one 
group of phenomena has grown out of the other. * * 

The chasm between the organic and inorganic is being 
filled up.” I respectfully ask, how? And boldly answer, 
because there is no such fact as inorganic substance in the 
universe. Life is in the polarity of Principle. That is 
the all of energy on all zones of substance. The “Intui¬ 
tive Suggestion” theory is gone, v T hen it is remembered 
that any suggestion to lifeless matter implies intelligence 
on the part of atoms and molecules in order to appropri¬ 
ate suggestion. In that event intuitive suggestion is re¬ 
solved to environment and correspondence therewith. 

I feel inclined to continue correlating the teachings 
of this volume with the doctrines of modern science, in 
order to show the soundness of my positions as to the in¬ 
finite nature and potential functions of atoms and their 
organisms, but the student can easily resort to his own, 
or to a public library, and carry on the delightful work 
to his entire satisfaction. It is surely settled that the 
only open door is through my discovery of the tone or¬ 
ganism of atomic life, and therefore its conscious wisdom 
and intelligence, potentially, at least. 


EXERCISE LXIX. 


THINKING IN GLORY. 

A short story of creation—Its two golden mornings—The 
first and second births of form—Man as a creator— 
The glory of man is the glory of God. 


ONE may adopt a method of thinking to unfoldment 
in glory. That may, at first, appear a little out of place. 
But it is a most elevating and invigorating plan of think¬ 
ing. If one will follow the steps of creation from the 
birth of Power, Love and Truth, or, from the evolution of 
the primal microcosm of very life, step by step, until the 
unfoldment of the six great classes of worlds and heavens 
are finished, that one will accomplish two great results, 
to-wit: (1) he will have replenished his knowledge of 
the methods of creation, and (2) he will have risen to a 
very healthful appreciation of the glory of Principle, 
from the wonderfully rich resources of which it all pro¬ 
ceeded. 

On the other hand, if the student will, in like man¬ 
ner, consider those steps of creation which fill the earth 
with the glory of man, he or she will marvel at the 
achievements of Principle wrought by mankind in voli¬ 
tion, desire, choice and motive. Those are two mighty 
chapters of biology. The first is completed, as to its vis¬ 
ible appearances; the second is but begun. 

We see, as to the first, the unfathomable skill of Prin¬ 
ciple, in the propagation of life units. When those 
transcendent units come forth, in their tones of conscious 
intelligence and wisdom, if there is another universal 
system older than ours, its exalted inhabitants must have 
looked upon the achievement in wonder and amazement. 
They were the “angels” who desired to enquire into the 
matchless undertaking. A creature of sufficient wisdom 
could see from the nature of those units of life, the whole 
plan of creation. That is hidden from humans except as 
they unfold, in knowledge, by appropriating the sub¬ 
stance of those units. 

What a glorious morning was that in which life was 
born. A new light burst upon the vision of the creator, 
when in the eloquence of silence he said, “let there be 
light and there was light”—when the oscillations of Prin¬ 
ciple within those units sent forth glittering radiations 

( 412 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


413 


of glory in the fact of light. That was a most transcend¬ 
ent beginning. That was the beginning—the birth of life. 

If the student will, for a few minutes, psycholog¬ 
ically contemplate the grand glory of that morning, when 
the rising and expanding floods of light broke forth from 
the unit creatures, just born from the oscillations of 
Principle, he or she will be thrilled by that propitious 
start of creation. We think of those primal units as in¬ 
finitely small, but when we remember that size is only 
a perception of physical subvesture tones, and that it 
is resolved to quality by life unfoldment, we come to 
look upon those units as beautiful creatures, each in the 
actuality of functional life; and we see their numbers 
rapidly increasing until their fellowship, in the mass 
tone of their radiations, begin the propagation of worlds 
and heavens. 

What a transcendent industry was that. Principle 
went forth in each creature and functioned in a tune 
and a tone peculiar to the conscious wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence of that form of life. No two were the same. They 
were gloriously different from each other. They fellow- 
shiped in degrees of organism by which they proceeded 
to propagate the great foundations of the universe, in 
the grand facts of worlds and heavens. 

As creation proceeded, the unit creatures became, by 
their tone vestures, two-fold, three-fold, six-fold, and, 
finally, nine-fold, to each of which items of progress the 
three-fold tones of Power, Love and Truth, forming a 
substare, must be added in the sense of the inmost. Thus, 
the tone plasm of, as yet, unseen worlds and heavens, 
was spun and woven by the oscillations of Principle 
within the unit creatures. It was the work of propaga¬ 
tion, and it was all in the glory of creation. 

Finally, the world systems of the universe were fin¬ 
ished. Then a new class of unit creatures were propa¬ 
gated, called cellular forms of life. They came forth in 
the coarse, rough clothing of physical sub vesture tones. 
Within their wonderful metamorphosis, each of those 
units were in the tones of seven classes of Power, Love and 
Truth, the one within the other, the finer and higher with¬ 
in the coarser; and over all, as a protecting and 
functional vesture, were the tones of physical subvesture 
Power, Love and Truth. In the latter, Power functions 
very low; Love oscillates in desire, and Truth exists only 
in potential degrees of wisdom and intelligence in percep¬ 
tion. 

That was a new morning of life—a new birth of life. 
We now see the glories of the first morning repeated, but 




414 


THE NEW IDEA. 


on a grander scale. Life had reached a degree of un- 
foldment—a harmony point—wherein a new form arose. 
It was a metamorphosis of greater functional potentiality 
than had hitherto been discreted in one unit form. It 
has already been somewhat fully described on the fore¬ 
going pages. From that birth on, we have, on a higher 
scale, a repetition of the history of creation which pre¬ 
ceded. The cells, by their wonderful oscillations, in har¬ 
mony, unfolded to psychological and physiological organ¬ 
ism. They repeated the fellowship processes of their pre¬ 
decessors, and, instead of building worlds and heavens, 
they evolved man, and they are still engaged in that 
glorious work. 

All of the preceding stages were in the elementary 
processes of man building, but now the animal and plant 
kingdoms unfolded, and today we have them with man 
at the top. We say that, considering life has turned 
from the arc of extension to that of evolution, man is 
a little more than half built, but, from the standpoint 
of the human state, the great work has just begun. 
Nevertheless, man is not only unfolding to higher form 
tones, but is himself becoming a wonderful creator, in 
an image of his Father-Mother Principle. He is not only 
beautifying and rendering more comfortable and con¬ 
venient his visible earthly abode, but, jointly with the 
thinking of his mother earth, he is creating the new 
heaven and the new earth, not yet visible to humans, and 
unfolding his own form of life into the glories of Invis¬ 
ible Brotherhood. 

Contemplate, for a few minutes, the visible works 
of man, as seen in the institutions of civilization, includ¬ 
ing the sciences and the arts. From that it is plain that 
man is casting up a mightly tone highway which is 
propagating his race to Omniscience. As we thus be¬ 
hold the rise of man, we see the unfoldment of God. That 
is a mighty reach of thinking, but it is in degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence unfolding into Truth. 

Such is the glory and grandeur of the plan of life 
which is unfolding from Principle; such is the glory of 
man, which is the only glory of God that can be un¬ 
folded from this universe. Truly, the kingdom of God 
is in the potential heart of man, and with its unfoldment 
man is coming into the possession of all things. 

From this short thinking exercise, the student may 
be able to secure a stronger grasp of life, and a clearer 
vision of its grandeur. It is indeed a method of think¬ 
ing in glory. It is to be hoped that it will thrill and 
awaken the life organization of the reader to more per- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


415 


sistent resolves in thinking to the unfoldment of his or 
her own form of life. The object is to awaken desire to 
higher and more effectual functions, to magnify, and 
purify, ideals; and to elevate motive. 

If one have the “blues,” or is cast down, or discour¬ 
aged, let that one think in glory according to the tones 
of this fexercise; and, possibly, the best way to do that is 
to study the foregoing paragraphs until, by unfoldment, 
that one will rise to appropriate higher suggestions. 
Such thinking must surely tend to strengthen and en¬ 
rich ideas of self-life. Dear student, think in glory now 
and then. It will prove a source of joy and gladness. 


EXERCISE LXX. 


RIGHT AND WRONG. 

An important correlation—Right in wisdom and right in 
Truth—The straight, curved, and crooked lines— 
The golden rule of the ages—Brotherhood revealed. 


POSSIBLY we can best formulate an exercise for 
thinking on the opposites of right and wrong by the fol¬ 
lowing correlations, to-wit: 

Right and Wrong. 

Intelligence and Wisdom. 

Power and Love. 

The average reader, no doubt, fully understands the 
significance of the term, right and wrong. At least, he 
thinks he does. But let us see. Is it a fact that while 
right is right, and wrong is wrong, a thing may not be 
right and not be wrong—that it may be neither? Sup¬ 
pose we say that intelligence is right, and that, scien¬ 
tifically speaking, wisdom is neither right nor wrong. Or 
suppose we say that intelligence is always right, as far 
as its degrees extend, and that wisdom may be functional 
to both the right and the wrong. Again, suppose w r e say 
that Power, disassociated from everything else, is in the 
fact of intelligence, and that Love, so separated, is in 
the fact of wisdom. 

Let us now think to unfoldment concerning these 
things. At the last analysis, right is straight. Like 
Power, or Intelligence, it is the straight line. In the 
original Chinese geometry, the straight line is called the 
right line. When we say that a particular act of any 
one is right, we might be understood to mean that it was 
the wisest thing to be done under the circumstances, or, 
that it was morally the right act to perform. Hence, we 
have two kinds of right, to-wit: one kind in wisdom, an¬ 
other in ethics. The latter is the true thing to do. An 
aet done in wisdom may also be in love. It may be the 
wisest thing to do, and it may be done in love and affec¬ 
tion, but it may not be an act in Truth. On the other 
hand, it may not be a wrong act in any sense. Wisdom 
does not necessarily negate the righteousness of an act, 
nor does a wrong act become in any measure right be¬ 
cause performed in a degree of wisdom. Precisely the 
same may be said of love. 

As before stated in this volume, wisdom is to intelli- 
(416) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


417 


gence—right—what the curved line is to the straight 
line. Love is to power in the same relation. Both func¬ 
tion to use. 

The geometry of right and wrong is resolved to the 
straight and the crooked lines. The geometry of intelli¬ 
gence and wisdom is illustrated by the straight and the 
curved line. A circle is a straight line curved to its great¬ 
er use. At the last analysis, they make one. A crooked line 
is neither straight nor curved, therefore, wrong is neither 
right nor wise. In our potential and functional degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, it is not always easy to deter¬ 
mine whether an idea, or an act, is merely right in wis¬ 
dom, or right in ethics, and that difference is sometimes 
a cover for license to do wrong. That condition has been 
met by the teachings of the ancients, which hold good 
today. Confucius said, “What you do not want done to 
yourself, do not do to others.” In a previous gen¬ 
eration of our race the Hindu proverb ran thus: 

“This is the sum of all true righteousness: 

Treat others as thou wouldst thyself be treated. 

Do nothing to thy neighbor which hereafter 
Thou wouldst not have thy neighbor do to thee.” 

Five or six hundred years later, Jesus commanded, 
“Whatsoever ye would that men should do to you, do 
ye even so to them.” 

Those “golden rules,” which are one and the same 
command, come with great functional power to supple¬ 
ment our psychology. We can find no cover in wisdom 
for license to do wrong when another is implicated by 
the act, while we think and live in the light of the 
“golden rule.” One can safely stand on that foundation 
always, because it is in the fact of Brotherhood. J. N. 
Lamed is the author of a little volume entitled, “A 
Primer of Right and Wrong,” in which he says: 

The power of self government, with which we are 
endowed, is not to be called a gift. It is an almost 
incredible Trust. It not only trusts our own destiny 
to ourselves, but it actually trusts, or seems to trust, 
the whole final outcome of God’s creative work to our 
treatment of it. This earth, at least, is put into our 
hands, to make what we will of it and of ourselves, 
its inhabitants. It is stored with all possible helps to 
us, in natural forces and materials; we are given intel¬ 
ligence to find out and to use them for the enrichment 
and beautifying of our lives; we are given the under¬ 
standing of a Rule of Right in our conduct toward each 
other that will keep us in perfect harmony and happiness 
of work together, for the common good; we are drawn 
toward action in accord with that rule by a feeling ere- 


418 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ated in us, which will not let us forget it or violate it 
without willful intent; but (and here is the grandeur of 
the part we perform in creation) we are trusted with 
the freedom to do with all this what we will. The 
outcome, good or evil, is what we and our fellows of 
the human race, past and future, are helping, or have 
helped, or will help, to make it. The glory or the shame, 
of triumph, or failure, in the creation of mankind is to 
belong to the race itself. 

The above extract from a most lovable little book 
rings true. It breathes the spirit of the teachings of this 
volume. It is needless to picture here what would be 
the condition of the human race if the Golden Rule were 
applied. Brotherhood would reign supreme and pros¬ 
perity would abound. What I am most concerned in is 
the teaching of those methods of thinking which will 
unfold men and women into the right, not only as it is 
in wisdom, but as it will be in Truth. As soon as man 
comes to think right he will act right. At present only 
a few people think they are bound to others by the ever¬ 
lasting ties of obligation and duty. Hence, we see that 
the study of right and wrong brings us to the same grand 
summit, to-wit: Universal Brotherhood. 


EXERCISE LXXI. 


THE BREAD OF LIFE. 

Tones of environment—Classification—Life foods—Ap¬ 
propriating thoughts—The original man—All things 
produced by nature—The foods of Civilization—All 
environment alive—Its song and speech—Invisible 
environment. 


THE relations of man to his environment have never 
been fully explained, nor does any book extant provide 
anything like a full elaboration of the facts of environ¬ 
ment. It is said that man has correspondence with envir¬ 
onment. What does that mean? We think of corre¬ 
spondence from two standpoints, to-wit: (1), that of a 
resemblance which one fact bears to another; and, (2), 
communications, or an exchange of thoughts and ideas 
between two forms of life. Both ideas are properly im¬ 
plicated when we speak of man’s relations to environ¬ 
ment. The latter is especially so. 

The facts of environment have been partly elabor¬ 
ated on many of the foregoing pages, but that has not 
been as fully done as could be desired. More extended 
explanations are not within the scope available. All we 
have to do with that subject here is to say that environ¬ 
ment is exclusively composed of the propagations of the 
different degrees of organic life—mass tone forms of 
life—which have become external to those forms, in the 
facts of tones. Speaking from the standpoint of man, his 
external environment may be divided into the (1), vis¬ 
ible, the (2), invisible, and the (3), risen invisible. 

Those three classes of environment constitute the 
Bread of Life. Man must feed upon them all in order to 
rise. The appropriation of that bread, or life food, is 
in the fact of feeding upon the life without. When the 
bread without is appropriated into the life organiza¬ 
tions of men and women, arid digested and assimilated 
to all the interior parts, by thinking, there follows life 
unfoldment. 

It is very plain that a knowledge of environment— 
the bread of life—facilitates its appropriation by man. 
It is well known that many of the best physical foods 
were for a long time overlooked, or neglected, by man 
owing to a want of knowledge of their utility. That is 
essentially the fact with the higher life foods. It is ex- 

( 419 ) 



420 


THE NEW IDEA. 


pedient that man should “discover”—know about—the 
higher foods, and become trained in methods for their 
ready appropriation. That is all resolved to the science 
of thinking. 

It is necessary, in this connection, to extend the gen¬ 
eral application of the food idea. Thoughts are food. 
Thinking is in the actuality of supplying food to the life 
organization. Well chosen thoughts are well selected 
food. Now, there is a sense in which unit forms of life, 
of every type of variety, and every grade of quality, by 
vesture, are continuously on man’s every touch. They 
enter his life form to expand it, in sound and vision, and 
through the gateways of every sense organ and psycho¬ 
logical faculty. Now, dear student, those unit forms are 
real thoughts and ideas, but they are to be divided into 
two classes, to-wit: (1), those which have been born into 
a human life organization, through the heart, and prop¬ 
agated from it, through the brain, to enrich or impoverish 
environment; and, (2), those which have not as yet ex¬ 
perienced that process. 

We sometimes say that this or that man is not orig¬ 
inal, or that he is decidedly original. The original man 
is one who appropriates new thoughts, and propagates 
them to new ideas. The non-original man is one who 
famishes on old, or second-hand thoughts. By proper 
methods of thinking, one may choose his thoughts up to 
a high point of originality, which is the same as saying, 
to a high degree of unfoldment. But I hear some one 
say, the original man or woman is that way naturally. 
To be sure. All things come of nature. Mother nature 
is the inexhaustible storehouse from which we draw our 
daily bread—the bread of life. Thoughts, old or new, 
do not come from any other source. 

Communications, to and from persons, are in the 
facts of thoughts and ideas, passing through some por¬ 
tion of environment, and that is true of visible, audible, 
and invisible and silent communications. All such are 
also, in a higher sense, in the facts of foods. Fortunate 
is he who can, by thinking, receptively appropriate from 
environment the messages existing there for him. 

The whole world of environment, visible and invis¬ 
ible, is in degrees of potential wisdom and intelligence, 
and man, in his present state, feasts upon its tone sub¬ 
stance. He should do so more and more. It comes into 
his life in the tones of books and pictures, the lecture and 
the sermon; and in the school rooms, the children ban¬ 
quet daily from its elementary potentialities. In the 
colleges, by the oscillations of thinking, some of its 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


421 


higher tones are propagated and appropriated, in the 
facts of the sciences and arts. 

Colors and light pour forth from natural and arti¬ 
ficial sources, and the music of harmonics swell from 
vocal organs and from mechanical instruments, expres¬ 
sive of the oscillations of Principle in invisible spheres, 
from which mankind appropriates potential food. In¬ 
deed, the whole world of environment is alive, in delight¬ 
ful songs and the beauty of colors, and is talking to us 
in millions of voices, in light and shadow, and in innum¬ 
erable forces which minister to our good. In such an 
environment man practically inhales the substance of 
knowledge with every breath. It fills his life organiza¬ 
tion by an inflow of ether life, constantly raising him 
to higher and nobler resolves. 

Yes, indeed, human environment is alive, and is 
filled with the spirit of life which we unconsciously ap¬ 
propriate. Man is in the midst of rising life. There is 
no death anywhere, except in his unreal, but functional, 
perceptions. It is sought, therefore, to prompt men and 
women to methods of thinking which will purify their 
visions, so as to enable them to distinguish between 
illusive perceptions, and the realities to which they func¬ 
tion to unfold them, in order that their rise may become 
more rapid, and more replete with happiness. 

In invisible environment are all those forms of life 
which we fellowshipped with in these spheres of sense, 
and millions more, all anxiously waiting to extend the 
helping hand. But so far, man practically ignores their 
invisible presence. He has been taught, in a way, that 
they are dead; that they have been reduced to ethereal 
spirits, which are stored away in the bosom of the Abso¬ 
lute, to await a resurrection of their aforetime occupied 
physical subvesture bodies, for which they could have no 
further use while time and eternity endure. They think 
and speak of them in solemn whispers, accentuated by 
sighs and tears, and relapse into a state of awe. How 
foolish that all is. Such ideas were, no doubt, in func¬ 
tional degrees of wisdom and intelligence in ages gone, 
but does the human heart not long for something better? 

It is cheering to know that one day—a day not now 
so very distant—men and women, in the flesh, will 
fellowship, in the comforting and ennobling realities of 
thought and vision, with the not departed, but Risen 
forms of life. The scales of belated human perceptions 
will soon fall from the over-clouded visions of mankind, 
and the realities of now invisible forms of life will bloom 
into full view. The so called spiritualism of these poten- 


422 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tiai spheres will soon unfold to higher realities, of which 
its present functions are partly symbolic. 

Visible man is akin with all the life of our universe, 
whether it be in discrete forms of harmony, or in the 
tones of environment. He gives and receives, by think¬ 
ing, to and from it all. 


EXERCISE LXXn. 


THINKING AWAY FROM DEATH. 


Mankind, by thinking on a lowly plane, 

Rose slowly into life. Great burdens brought 
He from the clouded vale below. They dwarfed 
His form, but clung he strongly to their weight ; 
Nor did their galling yokes release his hold. 

Alas! those heavy burdens were, by plan 

Of skill infinite, fixed, potential to 

His rise. Prized highest of the loads he from 

Primeval spheres tugged up the hill of life 

Was Death—of all his woes the one most dread; 

But clings he to that phantom plague today. 

With that grim monster ghost, and not whit less 
With other foes, be they by flood, or drought, 

Or tempest rage, or holocaust; nay, or 
Calamities, of kind, be what they may, 

Both large and small, the one great rule prevails; 
’Tis that by conquest, man in time subdues 
Them, one by one. They each and all are in 
Degrees potential to man’s rise; the rise 
Of man is measured by their overthrow. 

Created by man’s evil thoughts, each by 

His conquest opens doors through which such foes, 

In evil forms, depart this life. 


How great 

The plan of life! By conquests in that plan, 

As seen by that Example, grandly given, 

Man conquers death, and all the woes of life, 

By thinking in unfoldment of his tones 
To higher powers and more exalted planes 
Of Omniscience; nor could he thus unfold, 

Except such foes he entertains, and then 
Thrusts forth from life! O, when shall man behold, 
In vision clear, the truth, that evil serves 
Him only when its unrealities, 

By thinking, he unmasks? You ask: Is this 
An idle scheme of metaphor, and thus 
Unreal as to facts? Old death itself 
Is all that is unreal in this muse. 

A day draws near, resolving night and death 

( 423 ) '■*! 




424 


THE NEW IDEA. 


To fullness of the life of noon. When time 
Is full: When this appearing sheath its work 
Hath done; when it no more can function to 
The unseen form of life within, to raise 
It higher in the scale of Harmony; 

When this grand body can no longer hold 
The higher life in its unfolding flight; 

Then higher man—the man as yet unseen— 

The real man within, will lay, in peace, 

And by Volition’s power, his outer form 
Aside, or, by unfolding plan, 

Renew it into higher life, 

And stand forth grandly in the newer form, 
Transcendent from a Second Birth. Self-born 
A second time; thus man will conquer death. 

As with the first, so with the second birth, 

Except that in the first the mighty work 
Was wrought by unit thinking, and thus void 
Of mass tone Consciousness, expressive of 
“I Am.” Continues that the same until 
This day. But man’s unfoldment will resolve 
All things of process to the Conscious will. 

The Great Example wrought His second birth; 

Nor was their even shock, less broken chain 
Of conscious will; Volition’s rule took charge 
And shaped the great event, at every step 
Of life’s high propagation gain. As yet 
Sub vesture life its pend’lum swings on a 
Potential arc, suspending Consciousness 
In sleep, and in the fact miscalled a death; 

But rising Omniscience will set to tune, 

Harmonious and true, conforming to 

The plan of life, the reign of Conscious Will, 

Through and triumphant over every law, 

So called. Thefe will man’s voice, exultantly, 
Demand and say, “O death where is thy sting?” 
O grave, quit thy victorious boast. 


Those words 

Of Truth are authorized by Him by whom 
The mighty triumph over death was wrought, 

When he declared that man would rise to do 
Far greater works than He had done, and could 
Not tarry to perform. 


EXERCISE LXXIII. 


THE MARRIAGE UNION. 

Prom Love, courtship and wedlock to the real marriage 
union—From wedlock to the family and the kindred 
circle—The fluxing together of the invisible husband 
and wife in one form of dual individuality—The 
risen life a counterpart, as to units and organiza¬ 
tions, with visible society. 


VERY few people have yet come to realize the won¬ 
derful sweep and potential riches of that transcendent 
institution of life which we call the marriage union. It 
takes its rise in Love, Courtship and Wedlock, in these 
physical subvesture spheres, and rises, fluxing two di¬ 
vided male and female forms of life into one glorious 
undivided dual form of individuality, in the next higher 
heaven, where it joins the Universal Brotherhood of risen 
life, as a member of the body of the Rising Lord. Visible 
wedlock, in our sphere, is beautifully symbolic of the 
higher, as yet, invisible marriage union. It is not always 
potential for the latter, but, as life unfoldment prog¬ 
resses, it will become so, in a much more general appli¬ 
cation. 

In many instances—far too many—the civil mar¬ 
riage contract accomplishes only a partial protection to 
society, and a conformity to the best sentiments of civ¬ 
ilization ; and, as to the home, and the propagation of the 
race, with, possibly, only occasional experiences of the 
higher union. However, one cannot safely judge as to 
that matter. Of the visible marriages in our sphere, many 
more of them than are generally supposed may extend 
to the real union. It is true, however, that the marriage 
union of the man and the woman here, no matter to what 
life realities it may ultimately extend, is but a symbol of 
the higher and the real. 

It must not, for an instant, be supposed that these 
teachings undervalue the visible institution of marriage. 
It is transcendent in its functions for the evolution of 
civilization to higher ground. Wedlock and the home 
are the grandest features of human life, because the most 
functional for good. They are the highest ideals of 
Christianity, when considered from the standpoint of 
their symbolic power in pointing mankind to the higher, 

( 425 ) 



426 


THE NEW IDEA. 


as yet, invisible marriage, and the mansion home kindred 
groups of risen life. 

It is the function of these pages to point out how, 
by methods of thinking in the great plan of Principle, 
man and woman may unfold to a higher consummation 
of the marriage union, even here in physical subvesture 
spheres of flesh and blood. To do this, we may profitably 
consider biological facts as revealed in the evolution of 
life. It is laid down in these doctrines, by way of prem¬ 
ises, that all the unit and mass forms of life which have 
existence prior to the birth of the animal and plant 
kingdoms, are in dual individual forms, which is the 
same as saying that they are male-female in one undi¬ 
vided form, and as to processes of propagation, are in 
the fact of Love. As already explained, the cellular 
forms of life are divided by a method of propagation 
called fissoin, and from that primal point in the life 
of animal and plant forms, evolution is in parallel col¬ 
umns—divided columns—the one male and the other 
female. By that method of propagation, the faculty 
function of desire rose, which gave a wider sweep to the 
alternating forces of life unfoldment, conformable to the 
necessities of physical subvesture evolution. 

That separation into male and female forms of life— 
or the divorcement of the Two Principles which existed 
in embrace, in prior dual forms of life—prevails in phys¬ 
ical subvesture spheres. On the whole arc of the crea¬ 
tion of the worlds and heavens of our universe, the forms 
of life, unit and organized, are dual, each form, both 
unit and organized, containing both male and female 
functions. The same characteristics of life prevail for 
humans in all zones of ether substance—in all heavens, 
or worlds above these physical subvesture spheres. In 
other words, the man and the woman, by their units, re¬ 
unite in the Second Birth—in the “second resurrection” 
—and make their appearance, so to speak, in the full- 
tone of the physical ether zone, in a glorious form of 
Dual Individuality. 

Please observe the significance of the word re-unite. 
That is one of the profound facts of biology. The infi¬ 
nite character of life units—thoughts—extends to all gen¬ 
erations of such units. Those units, say of the fourth 
generation, in propagation, are, by kindred ties, in an im¬ 
portant sense, the same original units. These new units 
of life, being higher and grander than the parental ones, 
and yet the same ones by lienage, reunite in the facts 
propagated to the invisible form of life of the man, and 
the woman, and in propagatory processes, subsequent to 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


427 


the release of the invisible from the visible forms; and 
thus, in a wonderful dual form, that is one distinctly, the 
real marriage is consummated. 

It is very plain that such marriage is not only a 
privilege, a duty and a necessity, but that none but such 
dual forms of life can enter, bodily, the mass-tone life of 
the Invisible Brotherhood of risen life. Those processes 
of propagation should proceed in this life, where oppor¬ 
tunity is afforded; and they will proceed in that state 
existing subsequent to the release of the new life from 
the visible husk, and before functioning bodily in the 
Risen Lord; but in too many cases, possibly a great ma¬ 
jority, little or nothing is done on those higher lines of 
courtship in this lower world. The future will make 
amends in that respect. Every day is transferring the 
work of invisible worlds to this visible sphere, and as 
unfoldment proceeds the two will be resolved to one pro¬ 
cess. Our symbols are gradually being resolved to 
realities. We are rising by unfoldment, and environ¬ 
ment is rising with us. 

The processes of the “resurrection,” by which man 
unfolds, by thinking, to the risen invisible form of life, 
may and should be entered upon, jointly, by the husband 
and the wife, so that their now separate forms of life will 
unfold into one dual form of invisible individuality. In 
that way the real marriage is reached of which it is said, 
“Whom God hath joined together let no man put asun¬ 
der.” That is the real courtship—the second and the real 
marriage union. 

It has already been seen how, by thinking, in the 
dual fellowship of wedlock, the man and the woman ex¬ 
change life substance qualities, until they become “flesh 
of one flesh and bone of one bone,” so to speak. That 
metaphor does not apply to visible flesh and bone, in near¬ 
ly so great an extent as to the invisible psychological or¬ 
ganism of Consciousness. Hence by working out the prob¬ 
lem of Love, in its propagations to harmony, by the pro¬ 
cesses of thinking, desire unfolds to Love, and is swal¬ 
lowed up in, or resolved to it, in which the new form of 
life rises in individual duality. 

The student has already seen how, by thinking, the 
“first resurrection” is wrought, thought by thought, item 
by item, and day by day; he is now quite able to see how, 
by the same methods of thinking, those thoughts and 
those items of life substance are blended, by the higher 
conjugal ties, and fluxed into the higher Harmony, which 
is the consummation of Love. Surely such methods of 
thinking as these propagate a closer union between the 


428 


THE NEW IDEA. 


husband and the wife, and strengthen the lower as well 
as the higher kindred ties. 

When the home of wedlock becomes the home of the 
family circle, conjugal and kindred ties are enlarged, 
expanded and enriched. Hence it is that, from wedlock 
to the family, and from the family to the wider kindred 
circle, fellowship finally extends to the whole race, past, 
present and future. Those rising groups may profitably 
be correlated with the rising degrees of organism in a 
life organization, such as that of man. We see how these 
latter rise to invisible worlds, collectively, in one orga¬ 
nization, and by the same vision of Truth, we see how the 
family, the kindred groups, and finally the whole race 
rise, collectively, and in the larger organisms, into the 
wonderful organization of Invisible Brotherhood. Thus 
the forms of life, by unit, and by all degrees of harmony 
organization rise to invisible worlds, with each unit, and 
each organism and each fellowship and kindred circle 
unbroken. There is, therefore, a sense in which the man 
and the woman continue forever distinctive, and yet, as 
one distinctly. It is precisely the same with the fact of 
the Lord. The constituents of that unspeakable form of 
life, from the smallest unit, including all the degrees of 
organism, and fellowship circles, continue forever dis¬ 
tinctive, and yet as one distinctly in the fact of Harmony. 
It is, therefore, seen that Harmony is the unutterable 
consummation of Love. On the arc of the orbit of evo¬ 
lution desire is resolved to love, and Love to Harmony. 
The latter is the most transcendent fact of risen life. 

May I not venture the belief that such methods of 
thinking as are partly elaborated in this exercise will fill 
the home with joy and gladness, and the true spirit of 
Love which is Harmony. If any man will venture to tell 
me that this is not science, I will answer that it is the 
essence of synthetic philosophy—so pure that the un¬ 
folding life of man or woman will respond to its drawing, 
lifting power the same as to the voice of Truth. 


EXERCISE LXXIV. 


POWER OF HARMONY. 

Variety in a state of contention, or potential error— 
Its weakness—The inharmonious man—The harmo¬ 
nious man—The pulling, lifting force of Love—High 
ideals of life develop Love—Love propagates to Har¬ 
mony. 


VERY much has been wisely said concerning the 
Power of Love, but few have closely brought to vision 
the Power of Harmony. There is a marked difference be¬ 
tween the significance of those terms. It would seem that 
variety is primarily in a state of contention, or strife, and 
that such contention is functional, in fact, to the propa¬ 
gation of Harmony. We all realize that there is weakness 
in contention. In other terms, when the organism, fac¬ 
ulty and otherwise, of the life organization is out of tune- 
out of normal degrees of Harmony, man is weak, incipient, 
of little courage, fretful, and of small force of character, 
or none at all. 

The question with which we have to deal here is, 
How, by thinking, one may quickly resolve his life orga¬ 
nization from a condition of inharmony to one of Har¬ 
mony—to one in tune with the Spirit of Love—the spirit 
of the risen life. We are all conscious of the unpleasant 
fact that when inharmonious, man is out of joint, and at 
war with his environment—with everything and every¬ 
body. In that state the whole world appears wrong, and 
everyone at fault. Inharmonious man sees nothing in 
life to love, and is out of confidence with self and all other 
selves. Not even the kiss of the morning sun is welcome, 
nor can it stir emotions of fond appreciation in his troub¬ 
ling heart. He realizes that he is not loved in his own 
home, nor abroad. He is without love and affection for 
those in association with him, and is painfully conscious 
that, in some way, he has become isolated from all ideas 
of human Brotherhood, and stands alone and is lonesome. 
He has no power over any one or anything. By his in¬ 
harmonious condition he has disconnected his life from the 
mighty procession of evolution, and is reduced to a fact 
of obstruction. 

Inharmonious man is not popular. His views and 
opinions are not liked. He is ever denouncing social con¬ 
ditions, and preaching ideal anarchy. He differs from 

( 429 ) 




430 


THE NEW IDEA. 


everything and everybody, and is always carrying a chip 
on his shoulder. If he cannot raise a quarrel, or a dis¬ 
pute, he is disappointed. The world has no place for him. 
Everything he sees or hears is at fault, because his un¬ 
derstanding of facts is in error. The man of inharmony 
is full of error, and he sees all things in error. He is at 
outs with everything. 

I am reminded of the humorous minister who once 
preached a sermon, which he divided under three heads. 
“First,” he said, “this world is wrong side up. Secondly, 
it must be brought right side up. Thirdly, we are the 
boys to do it. And the application of the sermon is that 
there is one infallible way of relieving the boredom of 
life, of getting out of our own skin and ridding ourselves 
of our discontent, and that is by going out into the world 
and trying to set that world a little more the right side 
up.” His application was in error. The world is not, at 
any time, wrong side up. The inharmonious man sees 
it in that way, because he is himself wrong side up. It 
is the beholder who should be brought right side up, and 
“he is the boy to do it.” 

On the other hand the harmonious man—the man 
whose life organization is, by its trillions of units, in mass- 
tone, oscillating in harmonious tones—is strong, agree¬ 
able, full of force, and courage, and at peace with all en¬ 
vironment. He is filled with the elements of popularity, 
and is, by nature, a leader of men. He meets with a cor¬ 
dial welcome wherever he goes. The glad hand is prof¬ 
fered him from every side. His presence is sought and 
cherished, because he has no troubles to talk about, or im¬ 
pose on others. He is never in want, but always ready to 
bestow. In some way his storehouses are full and over¬ 
flowing. He is neat, clean, and of a gentle unobtrusive 
mein. He is not disturbed by expressions of error and 
evil about him, nor can he be induced to engage in argu¬ 
ment or dispute. His statements are always qualified, so 
as not to propagate offense, and his manner, without 
exception, in the preferment of others, rather than self. 

He is pre-eminently characterized by an easy, full 
and natural respect for others, which he manifests without 
affectation. There is the light of life in his presence, and 
when he departs from the company of people, their good 
will and best wishes follow him, which are the best guar¬ 
antee of his continued happiness. He is generally healthy, 
and full of cheer, and seldom if ever finds fault with any¬ 
thing. He never complains, and generally meets the com¬ 
plaints of others with winning smiles. He is free from 
troubles, and is never disconcerted by the troubles of 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


431 


others. He is harmonious, which is the same as saying 
that he is unfolding in joy and gladness, which is the 
privilege and the duty of all mankind. 

Of course, all that is said in the foregoing of the 
man may be understood as said of the woman also. 

Again the question, How, by thinking, may one quick¬ 
ly resolve his life organization from a condition of in¬ 
harmony to one of Harmony—to one in tune with the Spir¬ 
it of Love? It is a fact that while some enjoy a high 
degree of harmony, continuously, others are vacillating, 
or alternating between the two extremes, while a great 
majority of the race are in a more or less constant hetero¬ 
geneous state of organization, physically, mentally and 
psychologically. It is taught on these pages that the con¬ 
tending variety of unit forms of life, appropriated in 
any life organization, are at first in the relativity of ad¬ 
justment, and that a measure of strife among t?iem is 
necessarily antecedent and functional to such re-adjust¬ 
ment as will reach out to Harmony. The contention of 
variety, in any life organization, is the pushing force, 
in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, propagating to 
Harmony. Those processes of propagation are attended, 
always, with greater or less degrees of apperception. The 
functions of life unfoldment, by thinking, are, to substi¬ 
tute methods of progress in harmony, characterized by 
joy and gladness, for the afflicting push of functional er¬ 
ror and evil. 

It may as well be stated in this connection, that 
functional error and evil are the pushing forces of sen¬ 
tient perception life, and that those forces are in degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, unfolding to knowledge by 
experience. On the other hand, Love, which propagates 
to Peace and Harmony, is the pulling force of the evolu¬ 
tion of life. It is in error and evil—inharmony—that one 
goes through the world pushing everybody and every¬ 
thing, thereby filling environment with afflicting retorts. 
When one pushes he is always pushed in return. That is 
in the nature of relativity and interdependence. Hence 
the Master taught men to love one another. 

The pushing force of evolution is in degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence; the pulling force is Love, germi¬ 
nating one’s form of life to unfoldment. It works out to 
Harmony, and its banner is peace. Love not only casts 
out all fear, but all want of a proper respect and esteem 
of others. It raises the life to higher degrees of Har¬ 
mony, and draws others to the support of one’s plans 
and purposes. “And I, if I be lifted up from the earth, 
will draw all men unto me.” Thus we see no only the 


432 


THE NEW IDEA. 


pulling, but the lifting power of Love. Now, pulling 
and lifting are forces superior to that of pushing. The 
former are in love and affection; the latter in error and 
evil. 

It is remarkable that in the evolution of life unfold- 
ment in these lower spheres the push is chiefly the func¬ 
tional force. It is now self-evident that it should not be 
so—need not be so. Man should seek to discover and ap¬ 
propriate the pulling, lifting forces. Those are at his 
service for the price of thinking. The question put in 
this exercise, and repeated is now answered. One has 
only to develop Love—unfold his life in, and by Love, 
in order to harness the pulling, drawing, lifting forces 
which unfold man to a high and rising state of Harmony. 

How? Well set about thinking to the propagation of 
the wonderful grandeur and glory of life. I have made 
a discovery. It is that we have nothing in our universe 
with which to compare, or to contrast, the transcendent 
fact of life. That is because there is nothing in the uni¬ 
verse but life. There is n® death. That is a hurtful, 
dwarfing perception of potential evil. Hence life cannot 
be contrasted with death, except in error. The real appre¬ 
ciation of life rises from an understanding of the I am. 
It must not be forgotten that a true appreciation of life, 
and its mighty unfolding powers, begets and develops 
Love. One should project high ideals of life, and unfold 
self into them, by thinking. In that way Love will abound 
in the propagation of Harmony, Peace and Power. 


EXERCISE LXXV. 


THE LIGHT OF LIFE. 

How light is propagated—Its source in the tone oscilla¬ 
tions of Principle—Its rise in the tone environments 
of man—Man creates all the light—Man creates ev¬ 
erything in the Universe but Principle, and he un¬ 
folds that to higher realities. 

IT is recorded by Moses that in connection with the 
beginning of creation, God said: “Let there be light, 
and there was light.” That is a most significant saying, 
considered in connection with the doctrines of this vol¬ 
ume. To one who understands the nature and source of 
light it would appear that Moses were directly inspired, 
but when it is remembered that he had access, through 
Egyptian and other libraries, to the teachings of ancient 
Oriental lore, which had been harvested by the silent 
thinking of Hindu philosophers, the real source of his 
knowledge is revealed. Aside from that, Moses was 
himself a somewhat profound thinker, and we know that 
all knowledge ultimately comes to him who thinks in 
methods of Principle. 

It is here pointed out that the most successful think¬ 
ers of any age experience great difficulty in expressing 
their psychological understanding of things, so that the 
average thinker can understand them. Thinking must 
become mutual, else expressions of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence are in vain. 

Moses knew from the ancient knowledge he had ap¬ 
propriated that light came from the same source as life; 
that God was the author of life and light. He did not 
understand just how, technically, they proceeded from 
Absolute substance, by the oscillations of Principle, but 
in some way he realized that the light of life was sub¬ 
sequent to life. He said that “in the beginning God 
created the heaven and the earth; and the earth was 
without form and void; and darkness was upon the face 
of the deep.” It was. as it were, subsequent to all that 
that light came forth. 

In a beginning, which stretches from the birth of 
the first unit form of life—the first atem—the first 
thought—to the completion of the worlds, Moses com¬ 
prehends in a single sentence. That “beginning,” as 
we plainly see, covers a vaster stretch of time than all 

( 433 ) 


434 


THE NEW IDEA. 


the ages subsequent to it. The evolution of plant and ani¬ 
mal life to man, and the propagation through the first 
resurrection of an infinite mass-tone of Invisible Brother¬ 
hood are all as of yesterday, when compared to the prior 
work of creation. The new heaven and the new earth, 
invisible to humans while in these lower spheres were 
not begun until the birth of cellular life on the visible 
earth, because the latter had not, until then, been com¬ 
pleted as to its unspeakable mass-tone. 

But now, let us see in what way the light of life was 
created—propagated. That is very simple. The light of 
life, as already stated, is in the fact of tones and also in 
that of an environment to life. AVhen the first unit form 
of life came forth from Principle, it was in the fact of 
an individual. We really have a beginning to life. There 
is the first-born of life, although possibly thousands are 
born every second, from the sense perception point of 
time. That first-born unit was not only in Individual 
Form, but in the facts of tone, and tone-color. It is seen 
that Principle transmuted its own form-tone of life to 
the new-born unit. Principle came forth in the unit, con¬ 
sequently it was in a rate of oscillation peculiar to its 
high spiritual life substance. , 

We have seen that those primal units are purely 
spiritual; that they are in the fact of a substare to all 
vesture forms of life; that they are in three tones—the 
three fundamental tones of harmonics. Of course the os¬ 
cillations of the Two Principles within the new-born unit 
constitute its tone, and that tone is in the fact of a 
tone-color—in the fact of an aura, or radiation, or primal 
environment. Now we use the phrase, tone color, because, 
in the lower spheres, the light jfropagated to human or 
animal vision is in some degree of color, high or low, but 
it must be brought to vision that the tones of the primal 
spiritual units propagated to pure white light, which 
is the source of all tone colors in our universe. 

How gloriously bright, therefore, must be the vesture 
robes of the primal unit thoughts of the spiritual heaven. 
They consist of the radiated substance of the spiritual 
units, anc of course are living robes. Think of it, dear 
student, you can make your tone as high as your ideals 
can reach, and, in that way propagate an invisible vesture 
gloriously bright. It is seen from these observations 
that a human can, by thinking, purify his life organiza¬ 
tion, until its tone radiation—his expressions of his think¬ 
ing—shall become brighter and brighter “until the per¬ 
fect day.” 

It is seen from what has been said that no man has 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


435 


seen light at any time, no more than he has seen its Cre¬ 
ator. Pure, primal light is far, far beyond the apprehen¬ 
sion of human vision, but we see it in color propagations 
from its infinite substance, which reach us through vesture 
tones of lower life. The oscillations of Principle com¬ 
posing a primal spiritual life unit, are in a rate per sec¬ 
ond, so to speak, infinitely beyond human conception. 
Those oscillations reach into the substance of the foun¬ 
tain of absolute spirit, and propagate it to unit forms of 
spiritual life, and, in turn, from those forms into radia¬ 
tions glittering in the true glory of purity. Those tones 
are the light of life—the primal light—the true light of 
the world. We say that such light is caught up and 
propagated in the blue tone color by the oscillations of 
the divinely vestured units, but when we use the word, 
blue, we should remember that human vision cannot be¬ 
hold the primal divine blue—only devolutions from it, 
such as are manifested to physical vision. It is the same 
with the successive tone colors, down to the red. It 
is daily observed that the incandescent electric light, when 
the current is at a low rate of oscillation is of a dark 
reddish color. Increase the power, by which the rate of 
oscillation is increased, and the light rises to a bright 
orange color. It can be raised even to the yellow. 

It is seen, therefore, that humans dwell amidst the 
lower vesture environments, or tones. Things are seen 
through a glass darkly, but our vision becomes brighter 
as we unfold, by thinking, through successive degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence, and as we thus rise to closer 
relationship with realities. But I hasten to say in this 
connection that our present vesture tones are potentially 
real, and that as, by thinking, we come to see the real, we 
likewise ourselves become real in the same degree. Thus 
we become our thoughts, yea, we are composed exclusively 
of thoughts, and those thoughts unfold to higher light by 
their use, in rising degrees of wisdom and intelligence. 
Thus through our tones we eventually arrive at the place, 
so to speak, from which the units composing our life or¬ 
ganization started at the beginning of life, but in a very 
different fact. We will have, in that event, been resolved 
from Unity, through Variety, to Harmony. Then we shall 
behold the true light, because we will have become it. 

It will be interesting to notice that man creates his 
own light. That is a subject for profitable thinking. From 
the symbol of Moses, one might say, metaphorically, that 
the creator began the work of creation before “daylight,’' 
and created the light incidental to that work—that light 
was consequent upon that work. That is not only the 


436 


THE NEW IDEA. 


truth as to the propagations of Principle, as explained, but 
it is true, as well, concerning the thinking of man in his 
present human mass tone state; and also as to the prior 
thinking of the successive grades of life unit organism of 
which he is composed. 

The light of life rises from the tones of the forms of 
life; and the tones are propagated by the oscillations of 
Principle in such forms. The oscillations of Principle are 
always in the fact of thinking, and thinking is always in 
the actuality of progagation. Hence man has created all 
the light there is in the universe. In fact the only thing 
in our universe which man has not created, by thinking, is 
Principle. He received that at the hands of Principle it¬ 
self, but by thinking unfolds that to higher realities. Prin¬ 
ciple comes forth from Absolute substance in a way and 
manner we are unable to comprehend in our present state 
of life, except that we are authorized to say that the na¬ 
ture of esse is such that it can be only in the other fact of 
existere. That is the at present incomprehensible nature 
of the Cause. 

It is true that the physical light, or tone-colors of 
our heaven, are all created by man—are the result of 
thinking. That does not apply only to the light appre¬ 
hended in physical vision, but to that higher light of the 
world which resides in our civilization and its splendid 
institutions, in the fact of propagated environment; and 
also to that still higher light—the light of the risen life— 
the light of the spirit—which enlightens our understand¬ 
ing, and germinates our potentialities to unfoldment, 
in processes of regeneration to higher spheres. It is 
all said when we declare that man propagates his own 
tones by thinking in methods of Principle, and that those 
tones compose the all of human, and the higher environ¬ 
ment of invisible worlds. The student should dwell on 
these observations, until his own understanding will be 
enlightened, to the extent that he will be able to bring 
to vision the truth, that by thinking man will ultimately 
be resolved to the highest light. . Then he will be able to 
see and to understand all things. That consummation is 
the fact of Omniscience. 

Man, to day, begins any new work—any new enter¬ 
prise—in doubt and darkness. By thinking, and express¬ 
ing his thoughts in actions, the light of success dawns, 
and in an image of the Creator he is able to say it is “very 
good. ” The light is consequent upon progress; it is the 
fact of achievement in our realm. 

Thinking to the unfoldment of the light of life, 
which, of course, is thinking to life unfoldment gener- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


437 


ally, is transcendently health giving. It is in the fact 
of the appropriation of more and higher life. In earlier 
portions of this volume, I have endeavored to express the 
fact that thinking to the standard of high ideals is in 
the fact of thought renewal—the propagation of new 
thoughts. Is it not now plain that by thinking in the 
methods of the plan of life, man creates all environment, 
no matter how exalted in tone, and is, by the evolution 
of thinking, being resolved to, and through that envir¬ 
onment, in successive degrees of wisdom and intelligence, 
into the everlasting Omniscient, now invisible, Brother¬ 
hood. 


The light of life 

Is, spark by spark, and tint by tint, and hue 
By hue, and thought by thought, unfolding to 
The flood of noon—a noon whose glowing sun 
Unfolds the perfect day. 


EXERCISE LXXVI. 


MEMORY. 

How to keep it youthful, healthy and vigorous—A most 
simple explanation of the faculty of memory—The 
true psychology of memory—How it functions— 
Method of thinking for unfolding that faculty. 


HOW shall one think so as to improve, unfold or 
strengthen the faculty of memory? That is an important 
question. It can be answered only by inquiring in what 
way that function exists. It already has been stated, in 
effect, that the whole psychological organization of man 
is in the fact of an association of ideas, in kindred groups. 
Suppose we repeat that in another way, and say, Con¬ 
sciousness is an organism of thoughts and ideas in kin¬ 
dred groups. Each thought is disereted; each idea is 
discreted; each ideal group is disereted; each kindred 
household of groups is discreted; and, finally, the whole 
is discreted. 

All those departments of the sum-total organism are 
in relativity and interdependence. They are in socio¬ 
logical compact—in a community of interest. Hence the 
psychological organism is an association, with all of the 
functions of society. Those facts should be clearly under¬ 
stood, in order to reach a proper vision of the fact and 
function of the faculty of memory. 

The association of ideas, and ideal groups here spo¬ 
ken of, constitute the sum-total of one’s knowledge. It 
will be keenly remembered that I have frequently said 
that man has infinite knowledge, and that it is for him 
to unfold that knowledge into consciousness; therefore, 
consciousness is the storehouse of your knowledge, and all 
of it at that. You possess no knowledge outside of the 
substance of the psychological organization. It is all 
stored there. 

I now call attention to the science of that organiza¬ 
tion. It is in a perfect classification, in relativity and 
interdependence. Please propagate that important fact 
to clear vision by careful thinking. I repeat, it is in 
kindred groups. Those facts—those items of knowledge 
—which are akin to each other, are grouped together. 
Then, again, those groups, or households, bear peculiar 
relations to each other, and those are associated in larger 
colonies in the order of their relativity. Thus the sum- 
( 438 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


439 


total is made up. Each item thereof is in relativity and 
interdependence. 

The student has, no doubt, been somewhat aston¬ 
ished at the statement that all the knowledge possessed 
by any one human is stored, and classified, as above 
stated, in the psychological organization, by substance. 
It is all in the fact of units of substance, or thoughts. 
I must call attention to a fact which forces itself for 
attention at this point.. It is that knowledge only partly 
unfolded—items of knowledge—facts—which have not 
been fully appropriated, or completely propagated, are, 
in like manner, but partly functioned in the psychological 
organism. Hence, the necessity for the complete work of 
unfoldment. Thinking to the appropriation and unfold- 
ment of knowledge in consciousness should be thorough 
and complete. It is not enough that partial understand¬ 
ing be had. In that case, the items of knowledge will, 
sooner or later, lapse back into disorganization, and pass 
out. They must become deeply rooted, and reach out to 
an integral part of life. Otherwise a poor memory will 
result. 

Now', the faculty of memory is that focal center of 
consciousness, which, at the bidding of desire and choice, 
working in volition, may at any time present to view any 
item of knowledge or experience in the psychological 
storehouse. It simply pulls the cords of association, and, 
as we have seen, consciousness is so classified, that mem¬ 
ory can, at any time, respond to any call for such items 
of knowledge as are in the great storehouse wherein it 
functions. All that is necessary is a proper call. The 
call must be in suggestion. Memory cannot remember 
without some hint as to the things desired to be recalled. 

It is plainly seen from the above that memory works 
by the functions of relativity and interdependence. That 
pair of words has often been used in this volume, and, 
I trust, with good results. It is all now very plain to the 
student just what memory is, and the manner in which 
it functions. 

How shall one improve memory? That is quite easy. 
A method of thinking is at hand for that purpose. It 
is most effective. It easily can be seen that, unless there 
be the continuous work of renewal propagated in the 
psychological organism, there w r ill be the going back, the 
decline, and the falling out. On the other hand, when 
the thinker is busily engaged unfolding new items of 
knowledge into consciousness, there is the work of re¬ 
newal in the whole region, and its health and youthful¬ 
ness are maintained. The new functions as food to the 


440 


THE NEW IDEA. 


old, and both rise to perfect functions. Here we meet 
with another support to our doctrine of perpetual health 
and youth. 

It appears to the author that nothing could be plainer 
than the foregoing. I have shown just what memory is, 
how it functions, and how, by thinking to self-life unfold- 
ment, it may be renewed, and perpetuated in full 
strength; and I have done all that in a very few words. 
The student has only to think to the continuous unfold- 
ment of all his faculty functions, to keep them all in 
complete function, and to raise them, continuously, to 
higher and stronger forces. 

If your memory is weak or faulty on any line, be 
sure to remember that your knowledge on that line has 
been allowed to fall into disuse. All that need be done 
is to work out renewal on that line, by thinking, and 
memory will fimction to complete satisfaction. Memory 
itself always is normal. I mean the specific faculty of 
memory. The deficiency is in allowing the faculty house¬ 
holds of the psychological organization to fade by dis¬ 
use; and, in failing to supply this absolutely necessary 
food of new items of knowledge, daily. Without the lat¬ 
ter memory will famish, which is the same as saying that 
all the other faculties will decline, because, as we have 
seen, memory implicates, in its functions, all the house¬ 
holds of consciousness, if not all at once, then all, in turn. 

One has only to feed the psychological organism with 
the food of new thoughts, day by day, and evermore, and 
all will be well with memory, and with everything else 
pertaining to the whole life organization. 


EXERCISE LXXVII. 


APPERCEPTION. 

A Scientific Discovery—What the gTeat psychologists 
have failed to do has been achieved by one who never 
beheld, as a student, the inside walls of a College— 
Triumph of unit life system. 


ABOUT ten years ago the idea of apperception took 
possession of psychology, in the higher schools of the 
country, and became a decided fad. But it was one of 
the most disappointing fads that ever entered the peda¬ 
gogics of any country. Prom the way the “discovery” 
was advertised the teacher was led to believe that it con¬ 
tained and revealed a most important secret of science. 
On reading an explanation, he or she was surprised to 
find that it was only an unsatisfactory explanation of the 
manner in which things are received into the human psy¬ 
chological organization. 

Professor James, of Harvard, lecturing on psychol¬ 
ogy to teachers at that time, referred to the then new 
fad as follows: “It verily means nothing more than the 
act of taking a thing into the mind. It corresponds to 
nothing peculiar or elementary in psychology, being only 
one of the innumerable results of the psychological proc¬ 
ess of association of ideas. * * * The gist of the matter 
is this: Every impression that comes in from without, 
be it a sentence -which we hear, an object of vision, or an 
effluvium which assails our nose, no sooner enters our 
consciousness than it is drafted off in some determinate 
direction or other, making connection with the other 
materials already there.” 

I regard Professors James and Ladd as head and 
shoulders above all other psychologists and physiological 
psychologists, respectively, but the former, with all his 
wonderful sagacity of thinking has come short in his 
definition of apperception. He is on the right track, but 
does not go far enough to reach the seat of the real meat 
in the cocoanut. Neither did the German scientists com¬ 
prehend the significance of the word, and, as it was not 
understood, interest in it soon died out. The explana¬ 
tions given by those authors who undertook to incorporate 
teachings concerning it in text books, were not satis¬ 
fying, and the interest which had been awakened in it 
soon faded out. 


( 441 ) 



442 


THE NEW IDEA. 


What is apperception? It has been left to one who 
never beheld the inside walls of a college, as a student, 
but who has been compelled to rely upon methods of 
thinking for self-life unfoldment, for knowledge, to make 
the discovery. Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary gives a 
slight cue, as also does the definition of Professor James. 
The former defines apperception as, “the mind’s percep¬ 
tion of itself, as the subject, or actor, in its own state.” 

Now, I wonder how many of my students, who have 
traversed the foregoing pages, and from the cues here 
given, already have come into an appropriation of the 
full scientific significance of the doctrine of apperception ? 
Probably all of them, because abundant foundations have 
been laid for the purpose. 

Apperception is that natural science in which unit 
thoughts, and ideas function, on entering the psycholog¬ 
ical organization of a human, in which, by their own 
inherent conscious wisdom and intelligence, they know 
their respective places and functions in that organism, 
and how to assume them. That, dear reader, is the real 
cat in the picture; that is the soul, heart and core of 
apperception. That definition establishes the supremacy 
of this system of thinking, and raises it to a practical use 
not hitherto reached. 

It is a most important branch of science. It demon¬ 
strates that all man has to do is to appropriate and prop¬ 
agate new thoughts, and those new items of knowledge 
will, themselves, find their proper places, and perform 
their destined functions, in the psychological organiza¬ 
tion. That is wherein Harmony rises from inharmony, 
as already stated. Thousands of new thoughts may enter 
the human form of life every hour. They swarm in upon 
the rising organism like bees in a hive. In finding their 
respective places, in relativity and interdependence, or 
sociological association, there is a measure of contention 
—a degree of strife. That is always antecedent to a 
higher degree of Harmony. That is wherein, so called, 
error works for Truth. 

It is now seen that the marvelous classification of 
thoughts, ideas, and ideal groups, including the greater 
households, or kindred circles, of consciousness, spoken 
of in the next preceding exercise, is wrought by the 
conscious wisdom and intelligence of the unit thoughts, 
and their respective rising degrees of mass tone Harmony. 
At the last analysis it is all in the processes of propaga¬ 
tion, which is the only creation there is in the universe. 
Creation is life unfoldment. The latter is evolved by 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


443 


methods of thinking in tune with the oscillations of Prin¬ 
ciple. That is saying it all. 

The science of apperception may be illustrated by 
the growth and development of such a city as that of 
Seattle. Within the last ten or twenty years about 200,- 
000 people have located in that city. They represent 
every trade, business, industry, profession, art and sci¬ 
ence. As they came into the city, one by one, or in small 
groups, they found functional places in the rising life of 
the growing city, by their own conscious wisdom and 
intelligence. 

They distributed themselves here and there, in this 
profession, or in that trade, in this business or in that 
industry, until they all settled down into harmonious 
action ,each doing his or her part in the great life of the 
unfolding metropolis. It is the same with the life units 
and life unit groups which enter the psychological con¬ 
sciousness, or organism, to function there. They them¬ 
selves find their appointed places—places and functions 
for which their tones are best adapted—by their own 
conscious wisdom and intelligence. 


EXERCISE LXXVIU. 

RELATIVITY OF SPACE AND LIFE. 

The substance of space—Esse and Existere—Principle 
the vesture of the Absolute—All life a vesture of 
Principle. 


What is space? Science says it is extension, inde¬ 
pendent of anything which it may contain. That does 
not satisfy. Of course, space is something; it cannot be 
nothing. There is no such fact as nothing. Then space 
is substance of some kind or character. It is something. 

This volume teaches That life is substance, and, pri¬ 
marily, in unit forms; that the primal units are infinitely 
small; that the nine-fold vestured atomic units are far 
beyond the powers of the microscope; that all life units, 
vestured or unvestured, exist in space; that all substance 
units are in individual forms. Human thinking natur¬ 
ally inquires as to the nature of that substance in which 
unit forms, or organized forms of life, live, move and 
have their existence. Those in physical subvestures can¬ 
not be united so as to leave nothing in the way of space 
between them. That applies to units as well as to mass 
bodies, and, in a less degree, it applies to the highest 
spiritual units. 

Looking at our universe psychologicaly, that is, 
through the understanding of consciousness, we see two 
great classes of substance composing it. One is life, the 
other, the Absolute Substance of Being, which is in esse. 
In other words, within the boundaries of our universe 
all is esse, or existere —all is Being or life. Esse, or 
Absolute Being, is that fact we call space. It is the 
All, not only of Being, but of life, because it is the source 
of the latter. As already stated. Principle is the First- 
Born of esse. In its birth is the birth of life—atomic 
life—thought life. 

It is not evident that Being thinks. That which is 
behind Principle does not think. It is one distinctly, in 
the fact of unity. Whatever of process takes place in 
Absolute Being is not comprehensible to human psycho¬ 
logical powers, in the present state of man. It is prop¬ 
erly said to be, as yet, incomprehensible. However, the 
substance of Being is not unknowable; it is simply above 
and beyond the reach of human thinking peculiar to vest¬ 
ure life substance. In that respect the vesture is a veil, 
which, however thin to the highest forms of life, is im- 

( 444 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


445 


penetrable, and can be lifted only by resolving it to the 
form of life of which it is a tone vesture. The vesture is 
the tone, and, as such, is the source of environment. 

Thinking began in the birth of Principle. Thinking 
—the power to think—is potentially in Principle, and its 
evolution gave birth to the Two Principles, called Power 
and Love, or the Male and Female Principles. By their 
birth, thinking became a fact of life. In a way—a real 
way—thinking is the fact of life, and life is the fact of 
thinking. In other words, life itself is the fact of prop¬ 
agation, and propagation is the fact of life. To that the 
ideas of form and tone must be added. The tone vest¬ 
ure begets environment, and environment resolves all 
forms of life to higher forms. Those facts have already 
been elaborated. 

The worlds were not begotten on the sky rocket plan 
of Cosmogony. There is no one focal point of esse at 
which Principle has its mighty throne, and from which 
life units pour forth in an infinite stream of propagation. 
Principle is everywhere, as a covering, or envelope of 
Absolute Being, and, therefore, primal life units proceed 
everywhere, and by their three fundamental tones, from 
which all other tones proceed, they fellowship to propa¬ 
gate other tone vestures, and to build the worlds and 
heavens of ether plasm, which becomes the abode of man, 
because man is propagated from those worlds. 

Of course, the entire infinite universe of life is within 
the substance of esse —primal space—and that Absolute 
substance penetrates and permeates all life substance, and 
the forms thereof. Thus, life floats in Absolute substance 
in all its forms and draws its sustenance from it, through 
the portal of Principle. 

We say that there are seven classes of worlds or 
heavens in our universe. They are, beginning at the 
bottom, or outmost, (1), the physical subvesture worlds 
or heavens; (2), the physical ether worlds or heavens; 
(3), the mental ether worlds or heavens; (4), the celes¬ 
tial worlds or heavens; (5), the angelic worlds or heav¬ 
ens; (6), the divine worlds or heavens; (7), the spiritual 
worlds or heavens. Those classes of worlds rise by tone 
vestures, and we hold them in perception, except the 
first, as great zones of ether, the one above the other, but 
they are really the one within the other, the finer within 
the coarser. 

What is said in the last paragraph of worlds or 
heavens must be applied to each fully vestured, or partly 
vestured, life unit. Whatever is peculiar to world life 
is in like manner peculiar to unit life. Each unit is an 


446 


THE NEW IDEA. 


epitome of the whole. A life unit may function primar¬ 
ily, without vesture, but its first act of life will be the 
propagation of a vesture; it may function in one, two, 
three, four, five, six, and, in physical subvesture spheres, 
in seven, eight, or nine vestures. That has already been 
quite fully explained. 

All vesture life must be regarded as an environment 
of the substare. That tone vesture environment resolves 
the substare from the portal of Principle, in fellowship 
organization, with innumerable millions of others, to the 
Living Man, taking up all the tone vestures into the 
higher life, and into the risen environment. All environ¬ 
ment, low or high, is in the fact of potential degrees of 
wisdom and intelligence, which, bjr thinking—oscillation 
—unfolds into knowledge, until Truth is reached, and, 
finally, into the Supreme Fact of Omniscience. Thus all 
the processes of creation are in methods of thinking. The 
foregoing is said here at the risk of some slight repeti¬ 
tion, in order to bring the plan of life to clearer vision. 

In a general way, the constitution of the forms of life 
on the descending arc of the orbit of life is atomic, while 
on the ascending arc—on the arc of evolution—it is cel¬ 
lular. Into the latter expanding units, molecular atomic 
colonies have been transmuted, by the thinking of atomic 
and molecular mass tone organisms, by which also the 
worlds were built; and, by the thinking of cellular organ¬ 
isms, in fellowship, plant and animal life organizations 
are evolved. The wonderful mass tone organism of the 
cell has already been quite fully elaborated. 

From what has been said in this volume, the student 
will be able to bring to vision, on his own account, the 
beautiful household fellowship of atomic molecules in 
the palaces of corpuscles, the substance of which is spun 
and woven from those propagating tone functions, and 
to discover the functions of corpuscular forms of life. It 
is from the diligent and persistent study of this volume 
—not merely from a casual reading of it—that the stu¬ 
dent will unfold to clearer visions of life and of Truth. 
In the measure of that unfoldment, he or she will enjoy 
health, happiness, peace and plenty. 


EXERCISE LXXIX. 


MAN, THE ALL. 

Man and environment—World life—Man the creator of 
himself and of his heaven—The new heaven and the 
new earth—There is nothing aside from man in onr 
universe. 


THE worlds, or heavenly bodies, and their interde¬ 
pendent motions, afford man a wonderful system of sci¬ 
ence, or study, called astronomy. But it should be re¬ 
membered, that the whole plan is in sentient perception. 
Nevertheless, it is of great utility and withal, functional 
to man's unfoldment. The science of astronomy is a 
potential force of world environment. From that obser¬ 
vation the student can see that, at the last analysis, all 
things of life, visible and invisible, constitute the envir¬ 
onment of Primordial Principle. Those things, of course, 
include the visible and invisible worlds. 

Man enjoys correspondence and communication with 
his own peculiar environment, and with the whole envir¬ 
onment of mankind, and is himself an item, or constitu¬ 
ent of a larger and different environment. Hence it is 
that all things of life, from the smallest microcosm to 
any degree of the Cosmos are in the functions of envir¬ 
onment to each other. 

Environment must, therefore, be classified with re¬ 
spect to the forms of life from which it proceeds. The 
civilization of the human race—the externalized tones 
of mankind—the institution and works of man compose 
the environment of the race, and the whole must be di¬ 
vided, in some way, not at present fully definable, as 
the real and the unreal. Thinking of man as not a part 
of the earth, but as a separate creature, he must, in a 
measure, be classed with the winds, and the invisible 
molecular elements which surround the earth, and affect 
it, or are affected by it. Man is an item of planetary 
environment, but as the highest thinking power of the 
earth he is rapidly becoming its governing force. We 
have a parallel to that fact in man himself. In the meas¬ 
ure of his unfoldment, man, by thinking, takes control— 
thought control—of his life, and builds it in character 
and tone to correspond with his own ideals. We have 
only to extend the rule. Mankind, being the psycholog¬ 
ical, or higher thinking organization of this planet, will, 

( 447 ) 



448 


THE NEW IDEA. 


in the measure of his evolution, take control of the earth, 
and mould it to conform to his ideals. 

It is taught in this volume that man, by the fellow¬ 
ship thinking of the units which compose his form of 
life, controlled by the volition of consciousness, propa¬ 
gates an invisible form of life which becomes his invis¬ 
ible heavenly treasure, and which is the real life. It is 
now taught that by the fellowship thinking of the mole¬ 
cular units composing our planet, a new invisible earth, 
with a corresponding heavenly environment, is in like 
manner propagated, and in the same way in which our 
visible planet is the home of visible man today, the new 
earth in that manner propagated, will be, and is now the 
home of invisible risen mankind. The new home and the 
new man appear to be evolved in such relativity and in¬ 
terdependence, that they rise together. 

There is very much, after all, to be drawn into the 
understanding by the symbol of place. “Let not your 
heart be troubled; ye believe in God, believe also in 
(man) me. In my Father’s house are many mansions. 
If it were not so I would have told you. I go to pre¬ 
pare a Place for you.” The question at once follows, 
In what way is risen man functional to the evolution of 
the new earth? The answer is at hand. It is in the in¬ 
visible psychological life organization of man where the 
highest and most potential thinking is done, and as all 
things are created by thinking, it is plain that the Place 
—the new heavens and the new earth—which had been 
propagated up to a certain stage of evolution, required 
the handiwork of risen skill to prepare it for the abode 
of the Invisible Brotherhood—invisible only to the inhab¬ 
itants of physical subvesture spheres. The student is 
reminded here that the risen Brotherhood did not func¬ 
tion in mass tone until its Head and Master took his 
exalted Place for which he had prepared himself. But 
that is not the place of sense perception. It cannot be 
measured as to its length or breadth, heighth or depth. 
It is a city out of human sight, eternal and in the 
heavens. 

It is only necessary to add here that the Place re¬ 
ferred to is prepared by man for man—propagated by 
the thinking of visible and of invisible man. 

Thus we are introduced to a new and more exalted 
environment than any which has yet been considered. 
It is an environment of invisible life with which man, 
while yet in the flesh, may have functional communica¬ 
tion. 

We are, therefore, ourselves, builders of our lieav- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


449 


enly homes—of our mansions above—and that which is 
transcendently more exalting, we are the builders and 
propagators of ourselves, who shall inhabit those 
mansion homes. It is marvelous, but nevertheless true, 
that man, although, for the most part, unconscious of it, 
has, for ages, been building his own heaven, and think¬ 
ing out the resurrection of his own life organization to 
that heaven. That heaven will scarcely exceed the high¬ 
est of human ideals, but, to that status must be added 
the improvements which the actual inhabitants have 
wrought, and are extending, and will forever raise to 
higher glories. Your heaven is, of course, what you 
make it. 

The idea that here presses for attention is, Can man¬ 
kind not enter consciously upon such glorious work 
with grander results than have heretofore been achieved? 
It should be remembered, in this connection, that man’s 
works are dual. His earthly mansions are but symbols 
of the heavenly and invisible. His visible works are but 
outward signs of the higher invisible creations of his 
genius and industry. The duality of all life—of envir¬ 
onment—is a most rapturous study. 

But now we come to see that there never has been, 
is not now, and never will be anything aside from Man 
in our universe. The birth of Primordial Principle from 
the incomprehensible source of life is the birth of poten¬ 
tial man; in every atom, vestured or unvestured, it is 
man; in every molecule, it is man; in every corpuscle, 
man; in every cell, man; in every degree of organization 
in animal species, man; in the human state, man; in world 
forms of life, man; in the whole universe, man; in the 
final consummation of creation, man. Not anything is 
being created but man. 

Man is the all of creation—the all of life. Whatever 
is behind creation, as the source of life, is drawn up and 
forward through propagating Principle, into propagat¬ 
ing man, and will continue to rise in and with man, until 
man unfolds into the full glory of Omniscience. 


EXERCISE LXXX. 


POWER, LOVE, TRUTH. 

God, Principle, Substance, Tone, Power, Love, Truth, 
Intelligence, wisdom, knowledge, environment, the 
Lord, and, finally, the Living God. 


THE GOD OF BEING, the God behind Principle, 
will remain Ideal, and incomprehensible until mankind 
is resolved to the Living God, when man will know all 
things. The nature of Principle is a legitimate subject 
for thinking because its characteristics are coming forth 
in our lives, by the unfoldment of knowledge, through 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which latter are in 
the facts of our rising tones. 

We have said that by the oscillations of Primordial 
Principle an, at present, incomprehensibly fine fluid, 
called ether, is propagated in unit forms of life. Those 
are infinitely small, and transcendently fine in tone qual¬ 
ity. Principle transmuted its own life—its own nature— 
its own potentialities—into each of those wonderful units, 
which are all in the actualiy of unit forms of life, or 
primal single thoughts. In that way those units are in 
undivided form tones, and possess conscious intelligence; 
and, later, by virtue of the Celestial Principle, conscious 
wisdom also. 

I will be asked why I have adopted the word, ether, 
to stand for the tone substance of spiritual and celestial 
life units. In the first place, there is no other applica¬ 
tion available that conveys, even by association of ideas, 
anything near human conceptions of such transcendent 
facts as are here sought to be brought to psychological 
vision. Ether is defined by Newton, as a thin, subtle 
substance, much finer than air, which some philosophers 
suppose begins from the limits of the atmosphere, and 
occupies the heavenly space. “There,” in the words of 
Dryden, “fields of light and liquid ether flow.” The 
word “liquid” should have been “fluid.” The latter 
raises to a higher conception. 

Of course, the heavenly life substance called ether 
will not be confounded with the ether of chemistry, which 
is a very light, volatile and inflammable fluid, produced 
by the distillation of alcohol, or rectified spirit of wine, 
with an acid, and generally with sulphuric acid. It is 
so volatile that when shaken it is instantly dissipated. 

( 450 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


451 


Nevertheless, there is an analogy between the two, just 
as there is between all physical and higher ethereal states 
of substance. 

I adhere to the etheric idea for invisible substance, 
because of its grand associations, and yet, of course, the 
word falls very short of conveying the real fact. Ether 
is always associated with the heavenly, the celestial, and 
is made sacred in ideas of “ethereal messengers.” Ether 
is sometimes used as synonomous with spirit. It is Pope 
who says: 

“Vast chain of being, which from God began, 

Natures ethereal, human, angel, man.” 

Thus I call that fine, inexpressably high fluid plasm 
of life which came forth from the portal of Principle, 
propagated to unit forms by oscillation, or polar energy, 
ether. The substance of the highest life is, therefore, in 
primal etheric forms—unit thoughts—and in extending 
and expanding organisms of such atomic units. 

Having thus, briefly, disposed of substance, we come 
to consider the form tone of primal life units. We have 
already, in the earlier exercises of this volume, partly 
elaborated form tones, but in this connection we may 
carry our thinking to higher degrees of wisdom and in¬ 
telligence. A single thought—a single unit of life—the 
“ultimate atom,” if you please, is a tone, or a form 
tone. Its substance is in the fact of a tone, and the 
whole is in a fixed form, or quality, according to the 
degrees of wisdom expressed by such tone. It is like 
saying that a unit form of life is a little tune, or song, 
and that such song augments and expands with the 
rising degrees of organization of such units. 

But we should now come to see exactly what the 
tone of a unit of primal life is. It consists in the sub¬ 
stance radiations produced by the oscillations of Prin¬ 
ciple in such unit. By the “polar energy” of the unit, 
substance is radiated from its body, creating for it an 
environment—a primal environment—a vesture. It re¬ 
quires a little effort, perhaps, with some, in thinking 
to unfoldment, to a clear vision of this fact. But in 
this short paragraph the student has the key which 
unlocks to a clear understanding of the whole bundle 
of mysteries which stalk forth in such terminology as 
“degrees of wisdom and intelligence,” “vesture life,” 
“knowledge,” “environment,” “civilization,” etc. 
These facts are all propagated by the tones of life units, 


452 


THE NEW IDEA. 


whether in miniature for the unit, or in larger degrees 
of volume for mass bodies. 

The facts and processes of propagation are in the 
tones, and that which is propagated is in higher form 
tones. In one of the earlier exercises of this work on 
tone vestures, the author felt at its conclusion that he 
had been unable to express, in the clear and effective 
manner desired, the ideas involved. He is yet unable 
to do so with the force and exactness so much needed. 
It is possible that when it is said that the God of Being 
really dwells in his works, and through them is trans¬ 
muted, by propagation, to the Living God, and that, in 
the same way, man potentially lives in his works, and is 
through them, evolved to the Risen Life, the whole facts 
of creation processes are conveyed in my highest pos¬ 
sible terminology. Man will be evolved to a state where¬ 
in his now apparently lifeless thought externalizations 
will become living realities—a part of the real man — 
yea, the whole of the real man. 

Human thinking processes are challenged to a con¬ 
ception of how it is that substance, form, tone, oscilla¬ 
tion, or “polar energy,” and the fact of very life, are 
all one and the same fact. That is the same as saying 
that the concrete form of life and its environment are 
one fact in Truth, just as all the forms of life, high and 
low, and all environment, are one life. The division is 
in perception—in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, 
only. It will not now be completely clear that the fact 
of life and the substance thereof are one fact, but it is, 
nevertheless, true, that every fibre of substance is in 
the actuality—the function—of life. 


POWER. 

Neither Power, Love, nor Truth are to be regarded 
as faculties of the psychological organization of Con¬ 
sciousness and the Will. They transcend, but are inher¬ 
ent in all faculty functions. Power and Love are the 
two first born Personal forms of life, and in their joint 
life functions they are the all of Principle. They are 
the poles of Principle in every form of life, unit or or¬ 
ganized. They are, in actuality, the male and female 
Principles in propagation. They are in eternal wedlock, 
and are the parents to every marriage union in the uni¬ 
verse. Everything in a form of life, aside from its unit 
substare of Principle, in substance, is in the fact of tone, 
or tone vesture, and proceeds from the substance of the 
substare. 

It is difficult to consider Power and Love apart 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


453 


from each other, but for the purposes of a thinking ex¬ 
ercise, an effort will be made to do so. However, the 
thinker will naturally have both in his thought trains, 
the while. Power is the essential side of “polar energy” 
—the positive side of life. By itself, or acting alone, it 
is void of utility. In that function it would be force 
without function. In harness with Love, Power is the 
faculty of doing anything; the faculty of motion, or of 
producing change. It is ability. The action of Power 
in humans proceeds from the will. A form of life void 
of the will could not exercise Power, but all forms of 
life possess, at least, a potential will, and may, there¬ 
fore, exercise Power. Active Power manifests itself to 
sense perception in touch, taste, smell, hearing and vis¬ 
ion ; it manifests its functions in visible things in 
Silence, as in thinking, or by any faculty activity not 
orally or visibly expressed. The existence of Power is 
not determined by sense perception, because man has 
Power to speak when he remains silent. Power may 
appropriate that which is without the form of life in 
which it dwells,, or it may extend to other bodies that 
which is within. It may receive or give. 

Power, as the positive side of “polar energy,” 
dwells in every unit form of life, and in every mass 
form, visible or invisible. It is the energy by which 
psychological activities exist. It is the positive pole of 
all life. It is the integral half of that fact called life, 
but is non-functional when separated from the other 
half. Power cannot function, in use, by itself. In this 
connection we must assist psychological vision by cor¬ 
relating Power with Intelligence, and Love with Wis¬ 
dom. In order to do that, we must see, first, that there 
are 

1— Absolute Power and Love. 

2— Spiritual Power and Love. 

3— Divine Power and Love. 

4— Angelic Power and Love. 

5— Celestial Pow'er and Love. 

6— Mental Power and Love. 

7— Physical Power and Love. 

8— Sub-physical Power and love, or desire. 

On the other hand, there are only 

1— Absolute Intelligence. 

2— Spiritual Intelligence. 

3— Divine Intelligence. 

4— Angelic Intelligence. 

There is no such fact as Celestial Intelligence. The 
celestial and the spiritual are equally interdependent 


454 


THE NEW IDEA. 


with Power and Love. Therefore, that which assumes 
the functions of Intelligence, so to speak, in Celestial 
zones, is Wisdom, so that, instead of using the word 
intelligence, in continuing the above classification, we 
say 

5— Celestial Wisdom. 

6— Mental Wisdom. 

7— Physical Wisdom. 

8— Sub-physical Wisdom. 

When the spiritual and the celestial unite by mass 
tone polarity, as is done to propagate psychological fac¬ 
ulties, or the invisible life organization, the results are: 

1— Physical-Angelic Wisdom and Intelligence. 

2— Mental-Divine Wisdom and Intelligence. 

3— Celestial-Spiritual Wisdom and Intelligence. 

Now, those degrees of wisdom and intelligence are 

the compound tones radiated from spiritual and celes¬ 
tial forms of life, by the oscillations of Principle, in joint 
propagation. That is wherein the spiritual and the 
celestial join in everlasting wedlock to be resolved to 
the Risen Life. The resurrection is born of that joint 
propagation, by the fluxing of the poles of spiritual and 
celestial Power and Love, each of which oscillates in 
triangular vibration, and both together in six great 
functions. 

It is in the study of Power that we will come to 
hear, psychologically, the voice of silence, and appre¬ 
hend the unspoken word. A mass tone form of life, such 
as a man, or a woman, should cultivate silent articula¬ 
tion and pronunciation. That is talking in the power of 
silence, by psychological propulsions—by the unspoken 
words, but clearly and silently uttered in forms, or 
thought organisms, which go forth to do the bidding of 
those who propagate them. Christ is called the Power 
of God, because it is by the new Celestial Principle, in 
fellowship with Primordial Principle, that the whole re¬ 
sources of esse are drawn on in the propagation of the 
risen immortal forms of invisible life. 

The question of immortality is as to the form tones 
of life and not as to life in its final perfection. Life 
cannot die. The point is as to the continuity of some of 
its partly unfolded forms. 

It is in the spiritual and celestial joint oscillations 
that environment is propagated to the higher life—that 
it shares in the resurrection. Power and Love, thinking 
in the fellowship of the spiritual and celestial triads, 
resolve their source into the Living Sod. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


455 


LOVE. 

Thinking to the unfoldment of stronger Love is the 
most transforming implication of Power possible to man. 

“Thou shalt love the Lord, thy God, with all thy heart, 
and with all thy soul, and with all thy mind.” 

“Thou shalt love thy neighbor as thyself.” 

Love is the fulfilling of the law, because it resolves 
Power from the savagery of its untamed primal nature 
to functions of kindly wisdom. Thinking of Power, 
alone, as Intelligence, we can easily see how Love re¬ 
solved Intelligence to Wisdom. Power is the straight 
line; Love curves that straight line to the circle—to 
functions of utility. Power is positive; Love negates it 
by functions of affection, and is the higher of the two. 
The relations existing between Power and Love are the 
very same, functionally, as those regulating the interde¬ 
pendent life of man and woman. 

Love transcends Power, but, of course, works by it. 
It has the Power to dissipate all fear from a form of life, 
which Power alone cannot do. Thus Power, by Love, is 
transcendently higher than by itself alone. It is by the 
functions of Love that man is able to exercise wisdom in 
the apprehension of the beautiful, the pure and the 
worthy. Love has its seat in the heart. The heart is 
the temple home of Love and her children. In its outer 
vestures the heart manifests, or expresses, Love in all 
the variety of dual desire. Desires are in potential de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence, some of them working 
out life unfoldment in potential evil, but when desire 
unfolds to Love it is purged of all evil—leaves all so 
called evil potentialities behind and below. Love cannot 
function in evil. It is like Principle, from which it is 
unfolded, in that it is always in Truth. Love holds 
Power within its warm folds, and compresses it to higher 
tones. It is that function of life wherein alone Power 
can obey a righteous motive in the will. It is only in 
Love that Power can work life unfoldment, in degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, to higher summits of knowl¬ 
edge. 

Love is the infinite life bond which holds all the 
forms of life, unit or organized, into one transcendent 
whole. It is seen from a study of the earlier exercises 
of this volume that Love is the link that binds Power to 
Truth, because the propagation of Truth was from 
Power, through Love, and, as in human experiences, 
Mother Love is the bond between the father and the 





456 


THE NEW IDEA. 


child. The student should think on that fact until it 
reaches out to the infinite life bond which makes all 
akin. 

Love is the mother of Wisdom. Wisdom was born 
of the New Celestial Principle, and her function is to 
harmonize all the children of variety into the eternal 
mass tone form of Truth. The household of Love em¬ 
braces all the children of God, born of the oscillations 
of Principle, whether in unit or in organized forms of 
life, wherein, in functional wisdom, they are resolved 
to the realities of Brotherhood; and wherein also they 
are propagated to higher forms. It is through the wis¬ 
dom of Love that we come into a vision of the nature 
of the Supreme Being, rather than through the intelli¬ 
gence of Power. He that hath wisdom hath Love. Love 
is pure. Love is in the heart. The pure in heart shall 
see God. God is Love, and Love is God. Love is very 
life, always in Truth. Its radiations of wisdom fill the 
whole life organization with the true Light—the Light 
of Life. The highest Love is in the fact of the Spirit— 
the Spirit of the Lord. The latter is in the fact of Spirit 
radiations from the oscillations of Principle in the Risen 
Lord of Life, which men and women appropriate, by 
thinking, in joy and gladness, to the regeneration of 
their hearts and lives, and by which the Invisible Broth¬ 
erhood is propagated to the Living God. 

Truth is verity. Truth is reality. Truth is absolute 
freedom from afflicting degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence. It is the portal of Principle from which Omni¬ 
science is delivered to life. Truth is the highest sum¬ 
mit to which man can unfold in a body of flesh and 
blood. It is that degree of unfoldment in which all per¬ 
ception functions are superseded, and in which man 
exercises complete power over them—over the elements 
of the visible world. In Truth man will exercise Omnip¬ 
otent power, and be able to live in the freedom of 
Harmony. 


EXERCISE LXXXI. 


SPECIFIC METHODS FOR SPECIFIC PURPOSES. 

Two mighty propositions solved—The source of pain 
and affliction—Unfolding the God within—A refuge 
from contention—The technique of unfoldment. 


PROPOSITION: All pain, or sickness, or afflic¬ 
tion, is propagated to sense perception, by the inharmo¬ 
nious, or discordant conditions, within the life organiza¬ 
tion. Nothing in the nature of suffering, so to speak, 
can afflict a harmonious life organization from without. 
When one has, by proper methods of thinking, brought 
the whole life organism into complete Harmony—the 
complete Harmony possible to its degree of organism— 
no evil can afflict that one. He or she cannot suffer 
pain; cannot become sick; cannot be afflicted in any 
way. And if that condition of life be maintained 
through each of the succeeding degrees of rising organ¬ 
ism, man cannot die bodily, nor in any other manner. 

Moreover, in the exact measure of one’s Harmony 
will the degrees of that one’s freedom from such eventu- 
ations exist. Because of the inharmony of man’s life 
organization, and from no other cause, whatever, will 
he suffer pain from a violent blow on the most sensi¬ 
tive part of his body. The perfectly harmonious human 
cannot suffer pain, nor affliction, from any circum¬ 
stances, or eventuations whatever. He will generally 
escape injury, in an accident of any kind, in which he 
may be involved, but even if by it, his invisible life or¬ 
ganization is precipitated from the visible one, it will 
be without pain or suffering. 

It is the same in the small as in the great eventua¬ 
tions of life. The exemptions from pain, injury, sick¬ 
ness and death are always in the exact measure of one’s 
Harmony. It is a most transcendent plan of life which 
constitutes man, by nature, king and ruler over all cir¬ 
cumstances and eventuations of his environment. That 
is natural. It is not because man rises to function in 
supernatural powers at all; it is because he has risen, 
by thinking, to unfoldment. to the full status of his 
nature. When one has, apparently, experienced a mirac¬ 
ulous escape from accident, or calamity, that, so called, 
“good luck” is always by natural processes; it is in 
the nature of the inner life, and not directly due to out- 

( 457 ) 



458 


THE NEW IDEA. 


side assistance, except as the latter is the instrumental¬ 
ity in natural processes. Everything depends on the 
condition of the inner life. 

That is not difficult to understand when we come 
to remember that all environment—ail circumstances— 
all external eventuations, are in degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence, unfolding life into higher knowledge. Just 
as the earth, by the wisdom and intelligence of its units 
in mass tone, does not go wrong, or run into another 
planet, so, in like manner, the tones of man’s environ¬ 
ment, contact him in love and affection, wisdom and 
intelligence, when his life is in harmony with them. And, 
in whatever sense those may be discordant, from the 
wrong thinking of man, they are powerless to disturb, 
or afflict, the fact of Harmony, whether it be in the life 
organization of a man, or in any other form. 

It should be quite plain that a form of life in Truth 
cannot be afflicted by any adverse life force. Truth is 
an element of Harmony. The latter is the higher fact 
—the transcendent form in which Power, Love and 
Truth all dwell together. 

If one say that such a state of perfection cannot 
be reached, in appropriation, by man, while in flesh and 
blood, my answer is two-fold. In the first place, it is 
not required that your harmony shall reach any higher 
than the harmonics of those tones possible of appropria¬ 
tion to your present form of life; and, in the second 
place, you will be exempt from affliction, as stated, in 
the exact measure of the Harmony unfolded in your life. 
Hence, every rising degree of Harmony unfolded will 
yield its proportionate harvest of good things. It is not 
necessary to the feast that man shall be perfect. 

Methods of thinking to self-life unfoldment in Har¬ 
mony are very important. In the first place, man must 
realize that there is much more to be gained by right 
thinking than by anything else. He must study the fact 
of Harmony. On the pages of this volume are many 
lessons in the science of Harmony. All that has been 
said about the propagation of variety from unity, and 
about the propagation of Harmony from rising degrees 
of mass tone variety, is for that purpose. The idea of 
many, functioning as one distinctly, must be fully com¬ 
prehended and effectively appropriated. Moreover, man 
must think himself into knowledge in all directions. He 
must unfold all the variety possible to his degree of 
organism. He must not be content with any one line or 
department of knowledge, but must seek to flux into 
Harmony as wide a scope of variety as possible. He 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


459 


must unfold all his faculties by thinking—by their use 
—and reach out to the development of new ones, or to 
bring those just dawning ,into more functional use. It 
will not do to sing one piece of music—one song—all the 
time. That one implicates, to their use, only certain 
tones, or tone fractions. We must practice in order to 
appropriate other tones; and that work must extend 
and expand until the capacity of one’s life must neces¬ 
sarily itself expand to make room for more. 

There are those who will say that this volume would 
be all right, if the, so called, religious part of it were 
left out. If that had been done, the student of these 
pages would have been cut off from the greatest source 
of thought appropriation. Without the fellowship of 
creatures of unseen worlds, man’s thinking powers 
would be limited, indeed. 

Again, man must learn to trust in his thoughts, and 
to rely upon his powers of thinking, and to put confi¬ 
dence in the desired results, to the extent of expecting 
those things to follow which he desires, in proper motive. 
That is not Faith. It is the exercise of those faculties 
which constitute the household of Faith, to their greater 
use, and, therefore, to their higher development. 

Emotional thinking to high ideals of the grand, the 
noble, and the pure, propagate a functional solvent by 
which the inflowing variety is fluxed into Harmony. The 
spiritual side of man’s duality must be appealed to, so 
that intelligence and wisdom will combine in the prop¬ 
agation of higher thoughts. There is one characteristic 
of degrees of intelligence, which are spiritual, that, pos¬ 
sibly, I have not sufficiently developed. One might fall 
into 'the error of supposing, from what has been said, 
that intelligence is only force—only the straight line of 
Power. It must be remembered that intelligence is al¬ 
ways right to the extent of the degree of its unfoldment. 
It cannot be wrong. In conjunction with celestial wis¬ 
dom, spiritual intelligence supplements wisdom with the 
idea of right. Wisdom provides the methods; intelli¬ 
gence propagates it to righteousness. 

PSYCHOLOGICAL REFUGE. 

PROPOSITION: Proper methods of thinkihg to 
self-life unfoldment are not practiced, merely by forcing 
out of consciousness, by the will, injurious thoughts. A 
scientific method of thinking in Principle is not put into 
practice by fighting away discordant thoughts. But 
little can be accomplished in that way. One might 
resolve, in the fullest functions of volition, until doom’s 



460 


THE NEW IDEA. 


day, that he or she will exclude evil thoughts—discord¬ 
ant thoughts— from their psychological organizations, by 
merely changing the subject under mental consideration. 
That can do but very little. It is necessary to actually 
think in Principle—to the plan of life. One must adopt 
a method of thinking to ideals, in volition, choice, desire 
and motive, so as to propagate new thoughts, by which 
new substance is creatively added to the form of life. 
In that way, and in no other, can one unfold the life out 
of and above discordant thinking. There must be think¬ 
ing to renewal— a method of thinking which will work 
cellular renewal—actual regeneration of the substance 
of life. 

A mighty secret is involved in connection with the 
foregoing. That secret is the key to a very important 
method of thinking. I call it a secret, because it appears 
to be hidden from the psychologists. At any rate, they 
do not appear to lay much emphasis upon it. It consists 
in a change easily accomplished by the will—a change 
of the source of one’s thinking. Let us examine this 
proposed change very carefully. All thinking may be 
divided into two great methods, to-wit: (1), thinking 
from suggestion external to the psychological organiza¬ 
tion; (2), thinking from causes internal to that 
organism. 

As to the first class of thinking, choice is to be ex¬ 
ercised in volition, as to what items of suggestion arising 
outside of the life are to become the subjects of think¬ 
ing in any measure at all. Of the world of incidental 
suggestion on every hand, the greater part of it must 
be denied. Choice, in volition, must raise a barrier to 
most of it. It is all calculated to provoke thinking, but 
only a small part of it, and, under some circumstances, 
none of it affords proper food for thinking. 

It is, perhaps, true that in our day, the great volume 
of thinking, by humans, is from exterior visible and 
audible suggestion. There should be a great change in 
that respect, and that is the change I am considering. 
The more primal forms of life below man were evolved 
by thinking exclusively, one may say, from the sugges¬ 
tions of incidents external to the mind. The world of 
environment around them ,with its incidents and event- 
nations, provided the only sources of mental food. They 
were wholly dependent upon them, except, of course, as 
thinking consequent upon such causes were supple¬ 
mented by processes of involution. 

I now raise the proposition with which we made the 
start, and say that a change is demanded in methods of 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


461 


human thinking, from external to internal suggestion. 
That is all important, and should be most carefully con¬ 
sidered. As long as the mind of man is left to the mercy 
of suggestion from environment, it must, of necessity, 
be beaten about from pillar to post, and remain a foot¬ 
ball for discordant phenomena. At best, one half the 
energies of the will will be required to fight away 
assailing incident. A refuge must be found for the ris¬ 
ing life of man which will deliver him from the evils 
of environment. The suggestion of the latter, both in 
good and evil, is by no means all visible. Much of it is 
invisible. Evil forces, in suggestion, flow into the life 
of man, from invisible, as well as visible, incident, and 
he needs a shelter of refuge from that. 

Environment, visible and invisible, is a mixture of 
good and evil forces, with which man is in continuous 
correspondence, psychologically appropriating its tones, 
in an effort, it may be, to function in such powers of 
choice as will enable him to reject the unwholesome 
food, and accept the wholesome. At best, he is in a per¬ 
petual fight in making selections, and in spite of his 
most careful discriminations, much of that which is in 
evil tones finds its way into his life, to annoy and to 
afflict. Those pushing forces should be functional in 
leading man to seek a higher and purer world of sug¬ 
gestion. That is what they are for. 

As long as man attempts to winnow a full allow¬ 
ance of psychological foods, from visible and invisible 
environment, external to his life organization, just that 
long will he be in the throes of conflict. It is not that 
he shall turn exclusively to the higher food source, but 
that he shall do so in measures sufficient to unfold his 
life into higher degrees of Harmony, Power and Peace, 
by which he shall be able to appropriate the “life with¬ 
out,” separating the wheat from the chaff with little 
or no effort. 

Man’s refuge, under such circumstances, is in that 
fountain of suggestion internal to his life. There is a 
fountain within —a well of living water springing up 
into everlasting life, pure and health-giving. What is 
that? What is the nature of that mighty world of un¬ 
folding suggestion internal to the mind—that manifold 
internal fountain of the human heart, which draws its 
“liquid life” from the everlasting springs hidden in the 
very Source of Life? 

Dear student, in answering that question, we once 
more enter into the glory of this new system of thinking. 
Why have we devoted so much space, and expended such 


462 


THE NEW IDEA. 


persistent energy, in an elaboration of the interior func¬ 
tions of single thoughts—the units of life? From those 
somewhat laborious deductions, have we not come to 
see that the real wealth of life is within the unit, within 
the various degrees of unit organism, within man? If 
not, I have labored in vain. But we have so come to 
see and to understand. Hence, when I say to the stu¬ 
dent, to turn the processes of thinking to the interiors 
of the human life—the human heart, he or she already 
knows of the unutterable riches which are hidden there. 

Man’s outer, or exterior tones, are but the husk. 
Within is the inexhaustible six-fold mine of real gold— 
of real potentiality. Do you not see that all the riches 
of life are within, and that the germinating foods of 
exterior environment are to be appropriated in the ex¬ 
clusive work of unfolding the pearls within? I have 
so often employed the word. Unfoldment, that the reader 
may have become weary of the repetition. Why do I use 
that word at all? Because all rise of human life to 
higher powers consists in the unfoldment of the higher 
and richer interior tones of the infinite units, of which 
his life organization is composed! 

I most earnestly desire that the student will come 
to share the enthusiasm of the author concerning these 
grand data of human life. Such thinking as we are here 
and now practicing enriches science, and glorifies un¬ 
folding Principle. It banishes strife, transforms weak¬ 
ness and fear to power and courage, and projects human 
vision to the summits of the eternal hills. 


THE GOD WITHIN. 

PROPOSITION: The infinite resources of man con¬ 
sist in the fact that God is unfolding within him. 

Continuing that method of thinking by which the 
immediately foregoing paragraphs are characterized, we 
come to consider in what way man is to more effectually 
unfold the riches of life within him. He has been feed¬ 
ing on the husks, so to speak, of external environment, 
long enough. Let him now turn the forces of his life 
to the riches of the life within. 

As man, by thinking, brings to vision the beauty 
and strength of his interior tones, their oscillations 
quicken, and their radiations expand, thereby swelling 
into unfoldment, until they rise into clearer outline. 
Thus we mine the treasures within by thinking. Very 
little progress in that direction shuts off the inflow of 
discordant thoughts from exterior functions, and when 
they do gather about the entrances to our lives, only the 
healthy will venture to come in. Those which are un- 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


463 


clean, and, therefore, destructive to health and youth, 
dare not venture into the rising light of Truth. They 
seek the darkness. Thus unfolding from within, the life 
is full of light, and nothing will venture to enter it, 
except that which is pure. 

By such methods of thinking—by thus unfolding 
the God within you—you rise in Power, Love and Truth, 
into ascending folds of Harmony. As one after another, 
the interior vestures of the units are broken and fluxed 
together, their tones mingle in a mighty work of propa¬ 
gation, expanding consciousness, and contributing to the 
invisible form of life. It is in that way that the new 
man rises from the old one. In those processes of unfold- 
ment, by thinking in the plan of Principle, sickness and 
disease are left behind and below, and there is the 
renewal of youth and health in every unit of the whole 
life. 

It is plainly seen that by such thinking the entire 
substance of the life organization, body, mind and soul, 
is rapidly changed to higher tones. The old is cast off; 
or transformed, and the new rises into grander func¬ 
tions. Thus there is compliance with the injunction. Be 
ye transformed by the renewing of your mind. 

Herein is the secret of self-life unfoldment. This 
is the method of thinking that swells one’s interior 
hidden riches, until they bloom into the foliage of life. 
By such thinking man not only realizes that the King¬ 
dom of God is within him, but enters into its glorious 
possession, by externalizing its riches. By such proc¬ 
esses human environment is purified and unfolded also. 

Man has been over-appropriating. He has been 
cramming his life organization with anything and ev- 
everything he could get hold of, and giving out little or 
nothing in return. From that practice he has become 
packed, until he is out of form, and out of tune. Let 
him begin to externalize, and thereby unload some of 
his hidden treasures. 

So far man has been dealing only it sub-physical 
vesture tones. The other and richer six folds of his 
units are lying practically dormant, except only as they 
have been slightly and abnormally unfolded into the 
invisible psychological organism, by a vacillating and 
pushing force. It must come to be seen that the lowest 
tones of the units of which man is composed were in 
outmost oscillation—visible life—when man began hu¬ 
man functions. The unfoldment of the interior and 
higher tones of those wonderful units must come at 
the command of man’s volition. 

In what exalted state of Power will man arrive at 


464 


THE NEW IDEA. 


when all of the interior tones of his units have been un¬ 
folded into functional life? Truly his glory will fill 
the earth! His great possibilities are best seen from a 
contemplation of the riches of the infinite units of 
which his life organization is composed. By bringing the 
nature of those to vision, man provides himself with a 
psychologically visible foundation of his marvellous po¬ 
tentialities. In that way he comes to know what his re¬ 
sources are, and where they are. In that way he sees 
that the gift of life is, in reality, the gift of God Him¬ 
self. 

Self-life unfoldment, in so many words, means get¬ 
ting the riches out of your hidden life into expanding con¬ 
sciousness, by which the new man is created. That is 
the great goal of human thinking. By that method of 
thinking man rises into health and happiness, and into 
all departments of his higher and better ambitions. 

Thinking to unfold the units of life within is like 
turning on the sunshine upon some spot of earth that 
has been covered or hidden from its golden rays, until all 
signs of plant life have disappeared. The germinating 
radiations of solar light quicken the germs of the soil, 
and they svrell and unfold to leaf and flower. It is plain 
that each unit of the life organization, infinitely small, 
but potentially great, is six-fold, exterior to its sub¬ 
stare, and interior of its subvesture tones, which latter 
are alreadj" in full play. The awakening of those six 
vesture folds, so that they will break open in blooming 
life is precisely what is meant by unfolding the riches 
of life within. Of course the processes of that unfoldment 
are in the actuality of thinking. 

The first item in that method of thinking consists in 
bringing to vision the facts concerning the inner qual¬ 
ities of life of the unit thoughts of which man is com¬ 
posed. A study of these paragraphs will propagate to 
that knowledge, and as degrees of that knowledge are 
appropriate, the inner folds—vesture-tones—of the units 
unfold, or come forth, and flux together, extending mass- 
tone consciousness in all directions. 

When that work is in vigorous progress, one may 
safely turn on the streams of light and shadow from ex¬ 
terior environment. Thus the inner and outer forces— 
foods—will flux together in building the life into higher 
degrees of Power and Harmony. 

The student should read, re-read, study and re-study 
this double exercise, and connect its two sides until they 
will Make one in the rising Harmony of his or her own 
life organization. 





EXERCISE LXXXII. 


SOURCE OF SUCCESS. 

All material riches; all intellectual progress; all moral 
wealth are unfolded from the inexhaustible sources 
of Principle, which are hidden in the interior folds 
of the unit tones of which the human life organization 
is exclusively composed. 


PROPOSITION: All the good things of life—all 
good fortune—are hidden in the potential folds of the 
infinite life units of which a human life organization is 
composed, and they are realized in the exact measure of 
the unfoldment of those units, by thinking. 

That is a far-reaching proposition. It is in Truth. 
The work immediately in hand is to explain how and in 
what way it is in fact. The doing of that is, of course, 
resolved to a method of thinking in Principle, as we shall 
see. In the first place, I put this question: Where did 
all the items of man‘s material, intellectual and moral 
progress come from? They did not rise from nothing. 
There is behind them the fact of source. What is that 
source ? 

It is self-evident that if a man set out to achieve 
success— success in business, success in intellectual at¬ 
tainments, or success in the science of ethics—he will 
make better and more certain progress, by knowing the 
source from which the desired prosperity is to proceed. 
Think about that, dear student, a little while. That 
proposition is in the nature of common sense. If one 
undertake to snatch the items of prosperity or success, 
or those of material progress, out of swiftly passing en¬ 
vironment, by feats of intellectual agility, he may fail, 
or he may come into possession of that which, of right, 
belongs to another. He may obtain that which is not his 
own, and in that ease it will not fit into his life, and will 
cause him trouble. 

It is manifest that if man would succeed—would win 
material riches, or intellectual powers, or moral excel¬ 
lence, he must apply to the natural source of such bles¬ 
sings, and not look elsewhere to obtain them. That also 
appeals to common sense. What is the source of such 
much desired and valuable things of life? Is it in the 
superiority of one man’s abilities over another? Can real 

(465) 



466 


THE NEW IDEA. 


success arise from that source known as inequality? Not 
at all. 

Is there one source from which material progress 
comes; another from which intellectual attainments rise; 
and still another from which man receives moral excel¬ 
lence? The answer is that they all come from one and 
the same source, just as the oak and the elm come from 
the same fountain of life substance, although they differ 
from each other; and just as the fish, the mammal and 
the man unfold from one and the same source of 
life, although greatly differing from each other; and, 
lastly, just as a plant and an angel come forth, by un- 
foldment from the same source of life supply, although in 
vastly different qualities and powers. 

We see, therefore, that material riches, intellectual 
progress, and moral rise all come from the same resource¬ 
ful spring of life. Those methods of thinking which will 
unfold either will best unfold all, because when one seeks 
to develop one side of his life, more than another, it is 
always done at the expense and to the injury of that 
other. 

We now reach a most astonishing summit of Truth. 
That man who -can think—the one who has risen high 
enough to think in degrees of wisdom and intelligence, and 
in volition, desire, choice and motive, to the unfoldment 
of self should never be in a poverty of material, intellect¬ 
ual or moral success. He should always live in health, 
peace and plenty, and if he does not, it is his own fault, 
and not that of another. It is seen that the source of 
all those good things which man needs and desires is 
within him. It is in the God within. It is in the ves¬ 
ture folds—in the tone vestures—which constitute the 
interiors of the life units of which his life organization, 
body, soul and spirit, is composed. By the unfoldment 
of those man comes into possession of all things. 

Do not be troubled about what you shall do, in order 
to win success. Rather be interested in how you shall 
think. If the thinking be in the plan of Principle, actions 
will take care of themselves. They will follow as the nat¬ 
ural expressions of the unfolding life. If one think right 
his actions will be right. 

The student may experience a little difficulty, at 
first, to propagate to clear vision, by thinking, just how 
it is that all human environment, all the items of human 
civilization, with the progress in sciences and arts, and 
all the great structures and fortunes which man has 
achieved have been unfolded, bit by bit, thought by 
thought, spark by spark, and item by item, or dollar by 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


467 


dollar, if that expression be desired, from the interior 
riches of the units of life composing his partly visible 
form. But, from what other source could those results 
have come? Of a truth there is no other source. When 
those riches are unfolded into the mass-tone life there 
follows externalization. Think on that. The wealth of 
life within blooms into externalization by thinking to its 
unfoldment. 

I have said that science is the application of Prin¬ 
ciple to process, and that art is the result of that process. 
We now realize that to be a fact in a new light. By that 
process—that method—of thinking in the plan of life the 
riches within unfold and bloom in the externalization of 
art. That is the method by which all works of art; all 
grand pictures and paintings; all works of literature; 
all sculpture; all great structures; all the comforts and 
conveniences of civilization and civilization itself; all 
material wealth; all intellectual rise; all moral advance¬ 
ment,—that, I say, is the method by which it all was pro¬ 
duced. Thus, in a way, the riches of life are passing, 
from invisible to visible spheres; and then, in turn, they 
rise to higher invisible worlds, propagating man along 
with them to his everlasting home. 

Now, after all that, does the student think that I 
have too often used, or too persistently impressed the 
terms self-life unfoldment, or thinking to self-life un¬ 
foldment. That is the one and only business in which 
man can rightfully engage, because in that he achieves 
all things. In that way he purifies and extends his vision 
of life, so that the things which unfold to vision rise 
with the rise of man, and remain forever visible to him. 

But we desire something more practical, says the 
reader, and he adds, by way of enquiry, Are the earnings 
of the daily laborer—the pittance from which he sup¬ 
ports his wife and children—unfolded from the God 
within? Do those scanty blessings rise from the unfold¬ 
ment of the life units composing the man? Certainly they 
do and in no other way. The measure of success in all 
things of life is the exact measure of that unfoldment. 
No qualifications are required in this connection. True, 
some have been unfolded higher and broader and to a 
more potential use of their powers than others, but all 
have equal opportunity in potentiality—in resource. The 
relativity and interdependence of the forms of life is a 
wonderful study. The student has scarcely begun that as 
yet. 

All things of life come by life unfoldment, and the 
latter is achieved by thinking. There can be no possible 


468 


THE NEW IDEx\. 


exception to that rule. It is seen from what has been 
said that in the achievement of the three-fold rise of 
man, to-wit: (1) in material riches; (2) in intellectual 
possessions; and, (3) in moral wealth, he becomes a val¬ 
uable contributor to environment, and thereby providing 
life foods for the neighbor. It is from such thinking, 
on your part, that I may rise to appropriate the tones of 
your life, to my own more substantial advancement. 
Surely the plan of life is transcendent! 

Thus it is seen that man feeds on the life within 
and without, but it must always be remembered that his 
appropriations from environment must be made with 
a view to unfolding the riches of the life within. Other¬ 
wise there will be little or no rise of self-life. 

This exercise is not elaborated, nor illustrated at 
all. I prefer to allow it to stand in its present form. In 
its present forceful state, it will provide a world of study. 
From it, the student may think to the unfoldment of his 
or her own life, by extending its implications to higher 
ground. It provides a method of thinking on solid 
ground. It is in the plan of life, as any one can plainly 
see. It is not only in wisdom and intelligence, but in 
Truth. 

It is hoped that readers and students will put these 
methods of thinking to a test. They are invited to try 
them by way of experiment, so that they will be able to 
speak from experience concerning them. 


EXERCISE LXXXIII. 


PROFITABLE DISCUSSION. 

Substance not material—Materiality only symbolic— 
Choice in Volition—Feelings and Emotions—A moral 
effort—Salvation by repentance—The free will— 
Functions of Motive—Actions cannot propagate un- 
foldment—The will is subsequent. 


LET us, students and author, enter into a discussion 
as to the drift of these studies; and, in doing so we may 
profitably consider the teachings of modern psychologists. 
I have taught the substance of life, of ideas and of con¬ 
sciousness, or the invisible psychological organism. I 
have said that the will is the fact of the expressions of 
consciousness; and, of course, that is not substance, but 
it is by substance. I have distinguished between sub¬ 
stance and matter, saying that the latter has no existence, 
except in the illusions of sense perception; and yet. I ven¬ 
ture to say, that there are those who, because I declare 
for the substance of thoughts and ideas, will declare that 
I am a materialist. 

I am not a materialist in any sense of that word er 
epithet. In short I declare most positively against any 
such existence as that of materiality of any kind or 
quality. It is true, I speak of the tone vestures which are 
propagated from the substares of life units as ether sub¬ 
stance, but in almost every such reference, or with more 
than sufficient frequency to establish a general rule, I 
characterize those vestures as degrees of wisdom and in¬ 
telligence. I have said that those degrees are not Truth, 
but potentialities functioned to the unfoldment of life 
into Truth. I have said that a form of life in Truth is 
substance, but that that substance is incomprehensible. 

I have spoken of the substares of life units as in the 
facts of Power, Love and Truth, but have explained that 
they were but potentially so, and that it requires the 
journey of the whole orbit of life, with all its experiences, 
to unfold them into the Truth of Harmony. I have said 
over and over again, that these teachings were in potential 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, for the unfoldment 
of the life organizations of students. Hence, I refer to 
the respective tones of substance, and to the discrete de¬ 
grees of life behind those tones, in perception, speaking 
of them as in degrees of ether life. I have even gone as 

(469) 



470 


THE NEW IDEA. 


far as to explain why I pressed the word. Ether, into 
service, giving its sacred associations as the reason. 

I have, time and again, distinguished between real¬ 
ities and potentialities, saying, as I here and now re¬ 
affirm, that the former are, in the present status of hu¬ 
mans, incomprehensible. I have said that we can compre¬ 
hend realities—Truth—only by becoming them, by un- 
foldment. I now, once for all, distinguish between the 
realities and the tone potentialities of substance, and 
again declare that it is by the functional powers of the 
latter that man unfolds into the former. So-called ma¬ 
teriality is a perception only. When students come to 
comprehend the relativity and interdependence existing 
between realities and potentialities, by the functions of 
which life unfoldment is achieved, they will no longer 
indulge ideas of materialism, which can have no exist¬ 
ence except in sense perception. 

I have made my best efforts to explain how it is that 
things which do appear to our senses, and which have 
no real existence, are functional by such appearance to 
the extent that they exist by their effects. That may 
appear paradoxical, but it is not. It is not, thus and so, 
in the idea that something can proceed from nothing, but 
that, by the illusions of sense perception, facts appear 
to be what they are not, by which appearances percep¬ 
tion becomes functional. It is the perception of it, and 
not the illusive fact or thing, which does the work. 
Hence, we have substance, in perception, which we will 
raise to quite another fact by unfoldment; and that rise, 
is, at the last analysis, resolved to the rise of ourselves, 
and not only, but it is achieved by and through functional 
perception. 

It is in that way that we are, as well as were the 
ancients, in their day, compelled to emploj r a great meas¬ 
ure of symbolism for the purpose of conveying our ideas 
to others. Language is not unfolding in strength and 
genius as rapidly as are ideas. New facts are unfolding 
which have not. as yet, found adequate expression in 
language, and which are only beginning to express them¬ 
selves in human character. 

Now, dear reader, I have said that the thing which 
moves is substance, but the fact of moving—motion— 
is not substance. At the last analysis, and in the realm 
of reality, all is substance. There is no motion there. 
But that is going too far—going beyond our average 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence. We must teach, if 
teaching we are able to do at all, in degrees of wisdom 
and intelligence, which are the tone potentialities of 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


471 


vesture life. In other words, we must function by per¬ 
ception. I desire that the reader will mark the foregoing 
paragraphs, so as to be able to turn to them quickly, at 
any time during the study of this volume, whenever the 
idea of materialism rises in his or her thoughts, as the 
result of these teachings. 

Turning to our proposed discussion proper, I call 
attention to the fact that our most profound modern psy¬ 
chologists do not appear to comprehend the function of 
mass-tone. It is seen that without a complete understand¬ 
ing of that function one cannot grasp, or propagate, 
proper ideas concerning the human will. When I say 
that all of the faculties of consciousness expressing them¬ 
selves in mass-tone constitutes the will, a new light is 
let in upon the science of psychology. That light cannot 
be apprehended without a knowledge of the functions of 
mass tone as it is in the fact of propagation. Now, let me 
quote Prof. James, from his deductions concerning the 
will. He says: “There is no sort of consciousness what¬ 
ever, be it sensation, feeling, or idea, which does not di¬ 
rectly and of itself tend to discharge into some motor 
effect.” In other words, action, or movement of some 
kind, hidden or visible, is the result. That is the same 
as saying that consciousness is continuously expressing 
itself in the will, by which life unfoldment becomes ex¬ 
ternal. That is the result of the mass-tone of the psycho¬ 
logical faculties, by which something is propagated into 
action. It all goes to show that actions, or conduct are 
the result of thinking, rather than the reverse. 


SUBSTANCE OF ORGANISM. 

Prof. James’ great system of psychology can, with 
some few exception, easily be made to fit into this new 
system. He says that, as between the ideas themselves, 
on the one hand, and the conduct on the other, there is 
room for a third intermediate principle of activity, like 
that called the will. That, as plainly will be seen, teaches 
the organic construction of the psychological organiza¬ 
tion, and, in the ideas of those who go about with an 
anti-materialistic chip on the shoulder, praying for some 
one to knock it off, that savors of materialism. It has 
been with some little difficulty fhat Prof. James has de¬ 
fended himself against that false charge. To such people 
let me say that life is not nothing. It is something; it 
is substance, but that substance, in its highest qualities 
is incomprehensible to humans. However, it is not ma¬ 
terial. Nevertheless, its lowest tones—the physical sub¬ 
vesture tones appear in the fact of materiality. 



472 


THE NEW IDEA. 


There appears to be, among a very important and 
highly educated class of people, on spiritual lines, a dis¬ 
position to relegate the facts of life to the mysteries of 
that realm called nothing. They appear to desire that 
life shall be as little understood, as little comprehended, 
as possible. They will not even consent to the use of 
symbolism, thereby implicating perceptions of the vis¬ 
ible, to illustrate the facts of the invisible. For such I 
have patience, it is true, but sometimes I am compelled 
to leave them to roam in their chosen fields of nothing 
and nowhere, until they, of their own accord, will return 
to the symbols of that which appears from which to rise 
into that which does not appear to sense perception. 

Let us go still further and say that ideas themselves 
are in potential degrees of wisdom and intelligence func¬ 
tioning in perception. They are the functions which 
unfold into realities. They are in the facts of unfolding 
Principle, which began its own life, in the human state, 
in potentiality. The whole psychological organization 
is in potentiality, but it rests on Principle, functions in 
Principle, unfolds Principle. When Hume said that ideas 
are themselves the actors, the stage, the theatre, the spec¬ 
tators and the play, he left Principle out. He overlooked 
its functions altogether. He should have said that all 
the processes of ideas, whether in the fact of actors, the 
stage, the theatre, the spectators, or the play, are in the 
applications of Principle, by which the plan of life is un¬ 
folded. 


CHOICE IN VOLITION. 

In lecturing to a class of teachers ten years ago, Prof. 
James, explaining the nature of the will, said: 

“Our volitional habits depend, then, first, on what 
the stock of ideas is which we have; and, second, on the 
habitual coupling, of the several ideas with action or in¬ 
action respectively. How is it when an alternative is 
presented to you for choice, and you are uncertain what 
you ought to do? You first hesitate, and then you delib¬ 
erate. And in what does your deliberation consist? It 
consists in trying to apperceive the case successively by 
a number of different ideas, which seem to fit it more 
or less, until, at last, you hit on one which seems to fit 
it exactly. If that be an idea which is a customary fore¬ 
runner of action in you, which enters into one of your 
maxims of positive behavior, your hesitation ceases, and 
you act immediately. If, on the other hand, it be an 
idea which carries inaction as its habitual result, if it 
ally. Itself with prohibition, then you unhesitatingly re- 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


473 


frain. The problem is, you see, to find the right idea 
or conception for the case. This search for the right con¬ 
ception may take days or weeks.” 

The foregoing reaches out to choice in volition, im¬ 
plicating apperception. So far as it implicates the lat¬ 
ter, the will, in its ordinary functions, is not involved. 
That is an important distinction. The will should ordi¬ 
narily be thought of as in the fact of the expressions of 
the whole psychological organism in mass-tone. But it 
may be held as the expression of such whole, or any one 
of the kindred groups, or households of consciousness, 
or, finally it may be thought of as the expression of a 
single idea. The latter is generally in the fact of apper¬ 
ception, and is applicable to the functions of choice, in 
that particular department of volition. It covers the case 
of the choice of ideas referred to in the foregoing quota¬ 
tion. 

What I desire to call attention to here, are the proper 
processes of thinking, which should arise in the facts of 
deliberation referred to. In a proper method of think¬ 
ing, or deliberation, in such a case apperception works 
automatically, which is the same as saying that selection, 
or classification is accomplished by the conscious wisdom 
and intelligence of the units of the larger mass-tone con¬ 
sciousness. But we must now see in what way that should 
take place. It is in error to suppose a case wherein de¬ 
liberation can proceed in choice of ideas for “days and 
weeks.” That might occur where the habitual method 
spoken of is depended upon, but in a proper method of 
thinking all that is abolished, and results are overtaken 
by a shorter and more satisfactory route. To depend 
upon the “habitual coupling” of ideas is a dangerous 
resort. From that error is almost sure to rise. There 
is no progress, no element of unfoldment in “habitual 
coupling.” It should not be relied upon. True that is 
the usual method, but it is in error, and leaves reason 
and judgment to continue in the poverty of doubt. 

What is the new and better method of functioning 
in choice by internal volition, or by those functions of 
the will which units, or ideas exercise in apperception? 
To answer that question effectively, I must call attention 
once more to the fact that as new thoughts, new ideas en¬ 
ter the psychological organism to function in life unfold¬ 
ment, there is the contention, or strife, or rivalry among 
them, in getting into proper classification, or association, 
with the organization of thoughts and ideas already there. 
That is the natural process. No danger of error exists 
in those processes. The difficulty, when difficulty does 


474 


THE NEW IDEA. 


arise, comes from the disorganized condition, or inhar¬ 
monious state of the whole organism, or some department 
of it, in which the new thought, or the new idea has come 
to function. 

It is not in the plan of life, as it is in Principle, that 
one should, by the mass-tone will, undertake to supplant 
functions of apperception. That science will take care 
of itself when the organism of ideas already possessed 
are in the fact of Harmony, or in a healthy degree of that 
transcendent goal of life. 

It is seen, therefore, that all the deliberations and 
hesitations of choice, above spoken of quickly disappear 
when one applies his fimctional powers to methods of 
thinking for the unfoldment of Harmony. Whenever 
the choice of ideas becomes difficult, arfd reason and judg¬ 
ment, which work jointly in deliberation are overtaxed, 
or find the way difficult, the student may rest assured 
that the whole trouble comes of the discordant state of 
the psychological organism. In that case it only remains 
for him or her to think so as to unfold Harmony and 
the difficulty will disappear. In the measure of Har¬ 
mony within, outward expressions of consciousness will 
be in righteousness. Thus methods of Principle cover the 
whole moral, as well as the intellectual aspect. 


FEELINGS AND EMOTIONS. 

I cannot resist the opportunity for making another 
selection from the deductions of Prof. James, along the 
same lines. He says: 

“The proper conception, the true head of classifica¬ 
tion, may be hard to attain; or it may be one with which 
we have contracted no settled habits of action. Or, again, 
the action to which it would prompt may be dangerous 
and difficult; or else inaction may appear deadly cold 
and negative when our impulsive feeling is hot. In either 
of these latter cases, it is hard to hold the right idea stead¬ 
ily enough before the attention to let it exert its ade¬ 
quate effects. Whether it be stimulative or inhibitive, 
it is too reasonable for us; and the more instructive pas¬ 
sional propensity then tends to extrude it from our con¬ 
sideration. We shy away from the thought of it; . 
and we need a resolute effort of voluntary attention to 
drag it into the focus of the field, and to keep it there, 
long enough for its associative and nearer effects to be 
executed. Every one knows only too well how the mind 
flinches from looking at considerations hostile to the 
reigning mood of feeling. ” 

I have taken the last quotation in order to deal with 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


475 


its last sentence. All else already has been met. Now, 
as to moods of feeling. That is to the point. It is not 
overlooked that the source of feelings and emotions is 
in the mass-tone consciousness. The condition of the lat¬ 
ter, as to harmony or inharmony, accounts fully and com¬ 
pletely, for the status of the former. Normal feelings 
and emotions cannot flow from a discordant state of the 
psychological organism. Hence, while the latter is in a 
state of contention of its households, or of its ideas, 
“moods of feeling” will be at war w T ith each other, and 
with ideas. That unfortunate condition is removed, and 
one of harmonious action takes its place by methods of 
thinking calculated to propagate the whole organism to 
higher degrees of Harmony. That is all that will be found 
necessary in such cases. I cannot impress too strongly 
upon the student, the necessity of developing Harmony. 
It is functional to the overthrow of all our psychological 
troubles. It is the solvent which lubricates processes, 
and propagates to proper moral effects. 

Again Prof. James says: “Once brought, however, 
in this way, to the center of the field of consciousness, 
and held there, the reasonable idea will exert these effects 
inevitably; for the laws of connection between our con¬ 
sciousness and our nervous system provide for the action 
then taking place. Our moral effort, properly so-called, 
terminates in our holding fast to the appropriate idea.” 

I protest against thus unrighteously over-taxing vo¬ 
lition. It is not fair to burden the will with such details. 
All that savors of the old school of punishments for defi¬ 
cient abilities. If the organism of consciousness, or of 
that portion of it wherein the new idea has come to 
function, be itself in a harmonious condition, it will not 
be necessary to drag it “to the centre of the field, and to 
hold it there” until it functions in apperception. That al¬ 
ready has been made plain. The second idea in the last 
quoted paragraph reaches out to physiological psychology, 
in that the connection between our consciousness and our 
nervous system “provides for the action then taking 
place. ’ ’ That is wherein psychological processes, by prop¬ 
er methods of thinking, implicate physical subvesture 
tones, and work out bodily unit renewal in perpetuating 
youth and health. “Our moral effort” does not “ter¬ 
minate in our holding fast to the appropriate idea,” but 
rather in our welcoming it with love and affection, when 
it has been admitted in choice, to a harmonious house¬ 
hold of consciousness. Thus the apparent necessity for 
violent force to be exerted by the will over ideas is com¬ 
pletely abolished, as it should be, and as it will be, w T hen 


476 


THE NEW IDEA. 


we are unfolded to more correct ideas of psychological 
phenomena. 


A MORAL EFFORT. 

But, I now call your attention to a paragraph in one 
of Prof. James ’ lectures, that requires more than ordi¬ 
nary attention. It is in the following terms, to-wit: If, 
then, you are asked, In what does a moral act consist 
when reduced to its simplest and most elementary form? 
you can make only one reply. You can say that it consists 
in the effort of attention by which we hold, first, to an 
idea, which but for that effort of attention would be 
driven out of the mind by the other psychological ten¬ 
dencies that are there. To think, in short, is the secret 
of the will, just as it is the secret of the memory.” 

I will venture to reconstruct Prof. James’ definition 
of a moral effort or act by saying, It consists in unfolding 
the psychological life organism into such degrees of har¬ 
mony that consciousness cannot express itself in anything 
but righteous action; it consists in developing the psy¬ 
chological organism to that state of agreement, or har¬ 
mony of its parts, including everything, from ideas to 
ideal groups, and from ideal groups to kindred house¬ 
holds of mass-tone faculties, and from the latter to the 
sum-total organism, so that apperception may function 
as to the first, in finding proper associationsthat, ac¬ 
complished, by proper methods of thinking, moral action 
will proceed in the natural order, the very same that the 
day succeeds the dawn. That is a moral effort in think¬ 
ing, productive of a moral act. 

A moral action forced upon consciousness, by the 
expressions of the will is in the old time method of train¬ 
ing, and is void of self-life unfoldment, in its better re¬ 
sults. But if volition be employed by desire in choice, 
and in motive, to the propagation of the Harmony of the 
psychological organism, two mighty results will follow, 
to-wit: (1), Apperception will function freely by the 
conscious wisdom and intelligence of thoughts and ideas, 
and, (2), the entire mass-tone consciousness will express 
itself through and by the outer will in moral action. 

That is the nuxus of moral effort. It is in thinking, 
by the proper method, conforming to Principle, by which 
Harmony is unfolded in the psychological organism. It 
is hardly necessary to call your attention to the fact that 
all inharmonious conduct, and all conduct in error rises, 
or proceeds, from the discordant conditions of conscious¬ 
ness. or of the invisible life organism of man. You may 
work out the most abstruse problems of psychology, con- 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


477 


forming to habits or otherwise, and you may extend such 
deductions to every item of associated life, and to the 
interdependent behavior of ideas, until you are heart and 
head weary, and nothing will be accomplished of use to 
a man or woman in practical every day life. I do not 
say that a knowledge of such things is not functional. I 
do say that a knowledge of the greater principles, which 
govern in such methods, are more important. If one 
would improve and render more abiding the foundations 
upon which moral actions rest, let him seek to remove 
discordant conditions already existing, in the psycholog¬ 
ical realm. Nor does an effort in that direction consist 
in forcing discordant elements from consciousness. It 
is rather in an opposite direction. One has nothing 
whatever, to do directly, with the inharmonious condi¬ 
tions which may now exist. The burden of effort must 
be in resolving, by proper methods of thinking, the 
inharmonious state to one of Harmony. When that is 
accomplished, inharmony will no longer exist and un¬ 
righteous conduct will no longer proceed. 

It is seen from these observances that all error, evil, 
sickness, disease, inharmonious conduct, and other ob- 
jectional and destructive practices, proceed from, and 
are the children of, a discordant consciousness. Too 
much emphasis cannot be laid upon this doctrine of “The 
New Idea.'’ Many will be inclined to think that such 
vast consequences cannot legitimately rest upon a single 
principle. But, let me say, that the Principle of Har¬ 
mony is the ultimate triumph of life. All things may 
safely rest upon, and securely abide in, Harmony. When 
one has unfolded his or her life into a higher degree of 
Harmony, there is peace and harmony in the psycholog¬ 
ical organism, and in the whole range of environment ; 
and everything that proceeds from the psychological 
organism, by and through the functions of the will, will 
be, in righteousness, in health, in prosperity, and in 
abounding plenty. 


SALVATION BY CONFESSION. 

I again quote from Professor James’ lecture, the 
following well remembered illustration concerning the 
drunkard, whereby it is attempted to be shown that the 
unfortunate victim finds salvation from his disease by 
discovering the right name for it. He says: “The hack¬ 
neyed example of moral deliberation is the case of an 
habitual drunkard under temptation. He has made a 
resolve to reform, but he is now solicited again by the 
bottle. His moral triumph or failure literally consists 



478 


THE NEW IDEA. 


in his finding the right name for the case. If he says 
that it is a case of not wasting good liquor, already 
poured out, or a case of not being churlish and unso¬ 
ciable when in the midst of friends, or a case of learning 
something at last about a brand of whisky which he 
never met before, or a case of celebrating a public holi¬ 
day, or a case of stimulating himself to a more energetic 
resolve in favor of abstinence than any he has ever yet 
made, then he is lost. His choice of the wrong name seals 
his doom. But if, in spite of all the plausible good names 
with which his thirsty fancy so copiously furnishes him, 
he unwaveringly clings to the truer bad name, and ap- 
perceives the case as that of ‘being a drunkard, being 
a drunkard, being a drunkard, his feet are planted on 
the road to salvation. He saves himself by thinking 
rightly.” 

But little comment concerning the foregoing is re¬ 
quired in this connection. It would appear from it that 
the drunkard finds salvation by confession. At the ex¬ 
treme he confesses that he is a genuine drunkard, and, 
having found the right name for his disease, or having 
confessed to the truth concerning his condition, he is 
on the road to salvation. That is salvation by confes¬ 
sion, implicating repentance, no doubt, because confes¬ 
sion without repentance would be barren of results. I 
do not under value the potentiality of that “right think¬ 
ing,” by which the drunkard discovered the proper name 
for his slavery, nor do I wish to belittle the functions of 
confession and repentance, but no one or all of those 
things Avill redeem the life of that unfortunate victim. 
Those he should do, but the more important things he 
should not leave undone. The right thinking by which 
he unearthed his real condition to consciousness must 
be projected to methods of thinking by which his life 
organization will be unfolded out of the disease and its 
environment. He must, by proper methods, think him¬ 
self away from the old, and into the new, by which he 
leaves the old behind and below. In that way the dis¬ 
ease can no longer reach him. He has unfolded out of 
it, and all like circumstances of environment. The sub¬ 
stance of his life organization, so to speak, is changed— 
unfolded—regenerated, and the hurtful habit, with its 
temptations, has been thrown off with the old. It is no 
longer functional in his life, because he has risen above 
such potentialities. 


THE FREE WILL. 

In speaking of the freedom of the will, or the doc- 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


479 


trine of free will, Professor James says, “But after what 
we have just seen—namely, the part played by voluntary 
attention in volition—a belief in free will and purely 
spiritual causation is still open to us. The duration and 
amount of this attention seem within certain limits in¬ 
determinate. We feel as if we could make it really more 
or less, and as if our free action in this regard were a 
genuine critical point in nature—a point on which our 
destiny and that of others might hinge. The whole ques¬ 
tion of free will concentrates itself, then, at this same 
small point: ‘Is, or is not, the appearance of indetermin¬ 
ation at this point an illusion?’ ” 

It is seen from the above that we are to understand 
the real element of free will, to consist in our being able 
in volition, to give to any particular thing or idea, con¬ 
tinuous attention. In other words, we are to under¬ 
stand that, if we do not have the power, by the will, to 
rivet attention upon a given thing, in choice, then we 
have not freedom of the will. On the other hand, if we 
have the power, by desire, in volition, to force our at¬ 
tention upon a given fact or idea, we thereby demon¬ 
strate the freedom of the will. 

I do not think that the doctrine of the freedom of 
the human will hinges upon that fact at all. In my 
vision of the plan of life, and of thinking in that plan 
for self-life unfoldment, I see that the freedom of the 
will functions in the choice of ideas, as to right and 
wrong, and as to the functional powers of desire in 
motive, by which consciousness places before it a goal 
of life, toward which to unfold, or to express itself, as 
against the choice of another goal, in the opposite direc¬ 
tion, that implicates the idea of rewards and punish¬ 
ments. In the first goal we see the attainment of hap¬ 
piness ; in the second goal we see sorrow and affliction. 
By the will functioning in choice, in desire, and in mo¬ 
tive, we have the power to choose as between the two 
goals named. That power which we may exercise in voli¬ 
tion. functions in choice, and not in the fact of the will 
forcing attention upon any one thing. In fact, if by 
the will, the attention of consciousness is forced toward 
a particular object, or idea, against the desire of choice, 
it would destroy the element of freedom. Free will, so 
called, is in the ability of choice to decide, as between 
tw r o courses, or opposites, and not in forcing attention 
upon either. Choice must be free to function in its own 
volition, or there is no freedom of its will. 

I now call your attention to a psychological fact 
not generally understood. An explanation of it follows: 


480 


THE NEW IDEA. 


There is a mass tone consciousness and the mass tone 
will of a human psychological organization. Then there 
is the mass tone of every faculty household of conscious¬ 
ness, and there is the mass tone will of every faculty 
household. Choice is a fundamental faculty, and the 
head of a household of faculties, and is in the functions 
of the mass tone of a faculty group. Now, there is the 
will of that mass tone faculty group, and this great doc¬ 
trine of free will, which has been, for so many ages, mis¬ 
understood, consists in the fact that choice, being the 
head of its faculty household, functions, or expresses 
itself, in a will peculiarly and distinctively its own. 

The free will of man, the freedom of man’s will, 
consists in the freedom of choice in volition. It is the 
freedom of choice, expressing itself to the mass tone # 
consciousness, in its own free will. 

Expressions of the will, which are peculiar to choice, 
are received in the larger mass tone consciousness, of 
which that of choice and its will are already a part. 
Nlow, when choice expresses itself in its own will, that 
expression is subject to the mass tone, and along that 
line are a vast range of phenomena with which we are 
not now concerned. But the bed-rock doctrine of the 
free will of man, as taught in theology, is not only the 
function of choice, which is a mass tone faculty, but in 
the will of choice, which is the mode of its expression. 

It is seen from this brief elaboration, that the seat 
of the freedom of the will, or of the freedom of choice 
has not hitherto been generally understood. In fact, 
very few psychologists, if any, distinguish between the 
great human mass tone will of mass tone consciousness, 
and the conscious will of the households of that sum- 
total consciousness. It is seen that, in this new system, 
we have the key to great discoveries, in the fact of our 
classification of the sum total consciousness, into 
thoughts, ideas, ideal groups, kindred households, and 
finally, the mass tone consciousness. Now, there is a 
consciousness and a will peculiar to each of those de¬ 
partments, and they all function independently, interde- 
pendently, and finally, in mass tone. 


FUNCTIONS OF MOTIVE. 

Spinoza taught in the Ethics that anything that a 
man can avoid, under the idea that it is wrong, he may 
also avoid in the notion that something else available to 
him is right. Professor James seems to think along these 
lines in some portions of his psychological teachings. The 
same idea appears to be the heart and soul of a volume 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


481 


entitled, “Right and Wrong Thinking,” written by 
Aaron Martin Crane. There is virtue in the plan of 
forcing one’s self, as far as possible, in thinking to high 
and noble ideals, and in that way rising above the lower 
and hurtful thoughts. It was in this idea that Professor 
James exhorted his class of teachers to induce their 
pupils to think in that way. He said, “Get them habitu¬ 
ally to tell the truth, not so much through showing them 
the wickedness of lying as by arousing their enthusiasm 
for honor and veracity.” I am teaching the same thing, 
but this system goes beyond that standard. 

The idea is that one shall think in volition by desire, 
choice and motive, to some ideal standard, to which the 
attention shall be directed, with the motive of unfolding 
the potentialities within one’s life to higher powers. 
Herein is where motive functions in forcing the atten¬ 
tion upon the higher ideal as a standard. Motive func¬ 
tions in that the object of so thinking is to unfold the 
life to greater power and glory. Without that motive 
functioning in volition, the holding of attention to an 
ideal, no matter how high, would not be fruitful of any 
great good. It is seen from these observations that func¬ 
tions of motive are all important. 

I have said in another place on these pages, that the 
effect of any process of thinking will be in the exact 
quality of the motive which functions to such a process. 
Now, it is all well enough to force one’s attention toward 
an ideal, by the exercise of volition, but that alone does 
not reach out to the fuller and better psychological con¬ 
ception. It is noted that every process in thinking 
involves motive. Motive is a mighty functional power 
in the exercise of choice in volition. When it is ignored, 
there is no process worth the name. Thinking out of 
motive is fruitless. 

To induce students to think in high ideals of choice, 
by the volitional power, as a mere matter of habit, such 
as telling the truth, by habit, rather than lying by habit, 
is, after all, in motive to some extent. But, in that ease, 
motive is not sufficiently brought to attention. It should 
be impressed that the method of thinking under consid¬ 
eration depends for its results upon the motives of desire 
and choice. The motive should be elevated into clear 
vision. If the desire be to tell the truth, then the motive 
must be to unfold the life organization into Truth, and 
when that motive functions to unfoldment, the thinking 
process under consideration is complete and perfect. In 
any other way, it is imperfect, and will come short. 


482 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ACTIONS CANNOT PROPAGATE UNFOLDMENT. 

It is error to suppose that life unfoldment can be 
forced by the exercise of the will. It is by the will that 
the organism is set in motion, or in process by which 
the desired object is realized; and yet that is not so 
much a fact as the other idea, to-wit: the will, that is 
the mass tone will of the whole organism of conscious¬ 
ness, is rather the expression of that consciousness than 
anything else. Those things propagated by conscious¬ 
ness, or, bv the psychological organization, pass out in 
an expression or action, properly called the will. It is 
by that that process takes place. The various and sev¬ 
eral wills, internal to the psychological organism, and 
peculiar to the various households thereof, function as 
to expressions of those households. Now, the expression 
of any process is in itself that process. It is not, there¬ 
fore, proper to say that a process can be forced by the 
exercise of the will. To thus speak is not scientific, and 
is not a proper conception of psychology. 

Psychological processes express themselves in voli¬ 
tion but they are set in motion by desire in choice and 
motive, and the results are expressed in the fact of the 
will. Hence, we say that Professor James does not tell 
the whole of it, when he says, “Thus the sovereign vol¬ 
untary path to cheerfulness, if our spontaneous cheer¬ 
fulness be lost, is to sit up cheerfully, to look around 
cheerfully, and to act and speak as if cheerfulness were 
already there. If such conduct does not make you soon 
feel cheerful, nothing else, on that occasion, can. So to 
feel brave, act as if we were brave. Use all our will to 
that end, and a courage-fit will very likely replace the 
fit of fear. Again, in order to feel kindly toward a per¬ 
son to whom we have been inimical, the only way is 
more or less deliberately to smile, to make sympathetic 
inquiries, and to force ourselves to say genial things. ” 

Cheerfulness cannot be propagated by the force of 
the will, by simply forcing one’s self to sit up cheer¬ 
fully and to look cheerfully, and to act and speak cheer¬ 
fully, when such sitting up, and looking, and acting, and 
speaking are a sham. Such conduct cannot make one 
feel cheerful. To act as if we were brave, by the force 
of the will, when we are cowards, will never make us 
brave. Such methods express nothing. When the will 
attempts to force process in that way, there is no proc¬ 
ess and, therefore, nothing to express. We cannot come 
to feel kindly toward anybody by forcing a smile to 
them. Shams of conduct, no matter by what genius 
they may be displayed, cannot work unfoldment of the 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


483 


life into those facts. Life unfoldment does not come by 
imitation, nor by shams of any kind. 

How does it come ? It proceeds in this way: Desire 
functions in the choice of ideals; motive functions to 
process. Thus, desire and motive, in ideals of choice, 
function to unfold the potentialities within the life, which 
unfoldment expresses itself in volition. 

It will not do to emphasize the will at the expense 
of, and in such a way as to obscure the functions of those 
faculties, of which the will is but the expression. I lay 
down the following psychological rule of process in think¬ 
ing, to the unfoldment of self-life, to-wit: Desire func¬ 
tions in the propagation of thoughts, and thought trains, 
in harmony with ideal standards and with motive. We 
must lay more stress upon desire, which is the basic 
function faculty of all life unfoldment, in physical sub¬ 
vesture spheres. Desire functions in choice and motive, 
and expresses itself in volition. The student should come 
to see the importance of desire, the supremacy of choice, 
and the overruling mastery of motive. If those are ig¬ 
nored, very little can be accomplished by the functions 
of the will. 


THE WILL IS SUBSEQUENT. 

When it is said that desire functions in volition, 
that means that any process of thinking in which desire 
is the chief function, the effects are discharged by the 
will; when it is said that choice functions in volition, 
that means that any process in which choice is the chief 
function, the effects are discharged by its will; and, 
when it is said that motive functions in volition, that 
means that any process, of thinking in which motive 
is the chief function, the effects are discharged by its 
will, and so on with all other mass tone faculties. The 
will of such faculties is after the fact of such processes. 
It is never before the fact. It is either in or subsequent 
to such processes, and never prior. The will is in the 
fact of rising and discharging radiation which proceeds 
from thought oscillations. 

When it is said that a thought has power of its own 
will, to oscillate—to function—it should be said that it 
functions in that power by desire, choice and motive, 
in volition, which latter may be rendered, to-wit: in its 
own expressions, or motor effects. 

It is indeed a new system of psychology which places 
the will subsequent to thinking processes, rather than 
assigning to it a prior functional place. However, such 
is the fact. The will is in the radiations propagated by 




484 


THE NEW IDEA. 


the oscillations of thinking. It is the force inherent in 
continuous degrees of life, the source of which is in 
Principle. The student is urgently advised to bring these 
phenomena to clear vision. Those facts transform and 
transpose modern psychology, but they are in Principle 
and in Truth. 


FEELINGS AND EMOTION. 

It is Mrs. Hannah Whitall Smith who teaches, in 
effect, that to act faithfully, is to have faith. She says: 
“It is your purpose God looks at, and your purpose, or 
will, is, therefore, the only thing you need attend to. 

* * * Let your emotions come, or let them go, just as 
God pleases, and make no account of them either way. 

* * * They really have nothing to do with the matter.” 

It is a delicate matter to criticise the writings of an 
excellent woman, who has written as valuable a book 
as “The Christian’s Secret of a Happy Life,” and yet, 
duty demands that a mild correction be administered. 
The difficulty with the Christian world today, is, that 
it is outwardly acting faithful, without the possession of 
any genuine faith. What is faith? Faith consists in 
those radiations oscillated from its mass tone faculty 
household. It is the expressions of that group of facul¬ 
ties, comprised in the household of faith, and is a fact 
of the will of that household. I do not believe that 
acting faithfully, that is, shaming faith, will ever prop¬ 
agate faith in a human life organization. Faith is prop¬ 
agated by thinking to the functional activities of those 
faculties in the household of faith, consisting of fidelity, 
reliance, trust, confidence, belief, expectation, and so ou, 
and, when all those faculties in that kindred group func¬ 
tion in harmony, that reaches out to a mass tone process, 
called faith. To function in faith by action, forced by 
the will, so to speak, cannot propagate to real faith. 

As to one’s purpose or motive, it is all right to say 
that those should be attended to, but one might have the 
purest motives and the highest purposes, and if those 
do not function to unfoldment, the motives and the pur¬ 
poses will weigh but little as to their value. It will not 
do to say that your emotions are of no account, and that 
they have nothing to do with the matter. It is incum¬ 
bent upon this method of thinking that it should pro¬ 
duce by propagation such a degree of harmony in 
the psychological organization, that your feelings and 
emotions will be in tune with your motives and purposes. 
Feelings and emotions are just as essential to life unfold¬ 
ment, as any other branches of thinking. When the 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


485 


whole realm ef consciousness has been propagated into 
a higher degree of harmony, emotions and feelings will 
be pure and healthful. If I mistake not, God looks upon 
feelings and emotions just as well as upon desires, mo¬ 
tives and purposes, because the former flux into the 
latter, and provide the essence of their lives. 




EXERCISE LXXXIV. • 


THE ORGANISM OF CONSCIOUSNESS. 

Each single thought, idea, ideal group, kindred group, 
and finally, the whole psychological organization is 
in the fact of consciousness and the will—Interde¬ 
pendence of the visible and the invisible—Physio¬ 
logical psychology. 


FROM a study of the next preceding exercise, we 
have unfolded ourselves to think in a method which will 
propogate to clear vision the whole psychological organ¬ 
ism of a human. Let us do that. When we say that that 
organization is invisible, w r e mean that it is not within 
the functions of the human eye. We can see it all plainly 
in the highest psychological vision. Please distinguish 
between the two methods of sight apprehension. 

Anything is visible to the sight apprehension of its 
own substance. For that reason, we exercise psycholog¬ 
ical vision. That is to say, we can, functioning psycho¬ 
logically, see the psychological organization. 

I say first, that the invisible psychological organiza¬ 
tion of a human, is the real man or woman. That form 
which is visible is the outer husk. The real man or 
woman is in that organized form of life, wherein all 
our faculties and functions dwell. 

That whole organism consists of tones, and mass 
tones, and one sum total mass tone of the whole. The 
smallest functional unit in that organization is that of 
Spirit, which is incomprehensible as to its own form 
tone. The next smallest unit is a single thought. In the 
state in which the latter exists in the organism of con¬ 
sciousness, it is nine-fold, to-wit: it exists by its substare 
of three tones, known as. Power, Love and Truth. Then 
over that, by way of vestures, are the tones of spiritual, 
divine and angelic, Power, Love and Truth, respectively. 
Then over all that, there are celestial, mental and physi¬ 
cal, Power, Love and Truth, respectively. That sub¬ 
stare, and all those vestures, are in the facts of associa¬ 
ted tones. The next smallest unit organism in conscious¬ 
ness is an idea, which cannot contain less than thirty 
single tones in association, or in sociological fellowship. 
The next smallest unit organism, or that next succeeding 
an idea, is an ideal group. That latter is somewhat anal- 
agous to a family circle. The next organism above that 

( 486 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OP THINKING. 


487 


of an ideal group, is called a household, or kindred group, 
which includes several ideal groups, and is in the fact 
of a fellowship circle. Such is the status of the mass 
tone psychological faculty, such as Faith, Choice, Mo¬ 
tive, and so on. Conscience is in the largest household 
of consciousness. It contains within its folds all the 
moral faculties, with those higher feelings and emotions, 
which flux their tones together. We call the entire or¬ 
ganism, consciousness, and thinking of it as a whole, in 
the fact of those processes, by which mass tone propa¬ 
gates, we see the effect of those processes proceeding in 
the fact of the human will. 

Now, there is the fact of consciousness, and the will 
of each unit, of each idea, of each ideal group, of each 
faculty household, and, finally, of the whole mass tone 
organization. Such is the marvelous organism of con¬ 
sciousness, or of the invisible man or woman. 

From a little contemplation, it is seen that the invis¬ 
ible organization of a man or woman does not, after all, 
differ so very much from that of the visible. They are 
both organized on the same principle. Speaking of the 
visible organization, the one great difference between 
that and the psychological form is that the units com¬ 
posing the former are vestured by physical subvesture 
tones, while in the last they are invisible. The invisible 
man or woman is constituted in the same way already 
stated, except that the units of the organism of which 
it is composed are without physical subvesture tones. 

Now, there is a wonderful interdependence existing 
between the visible and the invisible organisms. The 
science which treats of that relationship is called, phys¬ 
iological psychology. Professor George Trumball Ladd has 
given the world a most remarkable elaboration of that 
science. It is the best and most complete work which I 
have found. It has already stood the test of many years, 
and is likely to be the foundation of that study in this 
country for many years to come. 

I desire to say a word or two relative to the won¬ 
derful relativity and interdependence existing between 
the visible and invisible man. In the border land between 
the two, there are wonderful possibilities. When that 
border land, which consists in a wonderful tone blend¬ 
ing, from below and from above, comes to be fully ex¬ 
plored, it will be seen that by the joint functions of the 
visible and the invisible, there is being evolved a new 
bodily form which functions to the new form of life, in 
about the same way that the visible body functions at 
the present time. 


488 


THE NEW IDEA. 


I say that the visible body of a human, as we sec 
him or her today, consists in the physical subvesture- 
tones of the units. I say that the next body, the physical 
ether body, which man will wear upon shedding the 
present visible one, will consist of the physical ether 
tones of the units of that new body. 

Please give due attention to this idea of tones. The 
smallest unit of life, and every degree of organism of 
units, rule throughout the universe, and the universe itself 
consists of tones and mass tones. There is nothing else 
except that incomprehensible substance from which those 
tones proceed, by the oscillations of Principle. But it 
must be understood that the tones themselves, or the 
items of which they are composed, are in substance, by 
the same Principle, from which that process is propa¬ 
gated. Substance is high, or low, in quality and powers, 
according to the vesture quality thereof. It is all sub¬ 
stance in Principle, and the differences in the quality of 
tones are in perceptions, or in degrees of wisdom and 
intelligence. 

All tones and mass tones are in the facts of tones, 
or the degrees of tone organism. We think of a discrete 
degree of substance, in which the fact and substance of 
Principle is contained, and of the tone radiations pro¬ 
ceeding therefrom, by the oscillations of principle, as in 
continuous degrees, but every item of a tone exists in the 
fact of a. discrete degree, or of a new tone, propagated 
by Principle from such a discrete degree of life. That 
is a conception loyal to the facts of life, but that con¬ 
ception is itself, in degrees of wisdom and intelligence. 

I call those tones the degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence in which we function, by thinking, to life unfold- 
ment. By thinking, we unfold the units of which we are 
composed, in such a wav, that the interiors thereof are 
developed, fold by fold, into higher substance. That 
process is in the fact of propagation, by which that which 
is unfolded becomes another fact somewhat like it was 
before it was unfolded, but higher in powers. In that 
respect the element of progress is in propagation, the 
technique of which we can plainly see, but cannot find 
language to express. In that is the secret of the Crea¬ 
tion. 

The psychological organism of a man takes absolute 
possession of the whole man, visible and invisible, and, 
when we have unfolded to a sufficient degree of func¬ 
tional knowledge, we shall, by the powers of desire, 
choice, motive and volition, be able to so unfold the 
entire mass tone form of life, body, soul and spirit, that 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


489 


it will all proceed to rise in Harmony together, and in a 
way that will abolish the present unwelcome dissolution 
of the visible body. 

There is that fact in the psychological organism, or 
in the human form of life, called the I AM. I shall now 
explain to my students just what the I AM is. There is 
the mass tone of everything, and of course there is the 
mass tone of Principle. I have explained, on the fore¬ 
going pages, that Principle transmuted its substance and 
its nature to every unit of life which it has propagated. 
If those units propagated by it flux together all their 
tones in degrees of mass tone, Principle, itself by its units, 
fluxes together in a mass tone Principle of the human 
form of life, and that mass tone principle is the I AM. 
It is that transcendent fact of life which has direct access 
to the eternal fountain of life. Principle is in the fact 
of that substance which actually connects esse with 
existere, and, as I have repeatedly stated, Principle is 
the same in the least as in the greatest things. Principle 
changeth not. Principle is the same in man, as in the 
highest forms of life, in the universe. Hence, Principle 
has access to the eternal fountain of life. The mass tone 
of Principle in man, as just explained, is in the fact of 
the I AM, through and by which, man has access to his 
Creator, and to all the resources of his Creator. 

The I AM is that core, or inner soul of man, from 
which everything of his life proceeds, and by which he 
is, himself, now and for ever more, a distinctive creation, 
which creation, is in the fact of God, although not in the 
fact of the sum total of the Creator, except through the 
functions of Brotherhood. There is the final mass tone 
of Principle in that form of life called the Universal 
Brotherhood. That is the fact w r herein the God of Being 
becomes the Living God. 

Hence, dear reader, I find a still more ultimate sub¬ 
stare to life than that already described, consisting of 
Power, Love and Truth. It is in the fact of Principle, 
which unfolds into all the tones of life, and which tones 
flux together in the final goal of life, to the complete and 
perfect revelation of God in man, and by which man 
marvelously becomes the fact of that Revelation. As 
already explained, in such degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, as I have been able to command, the invisible 
organization of man, called consciousness, or the psycho¬ 
logical organism, is the new man, or the rising man, and 
when that new man stands forth, completely delivered 
from physical subvesture tones, it will wear a body com¬ 
posed of units, the lowest of which will w'ear pure phys- 


490 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ical ether vestures, or tones. All the processes necessary 
to that unfoldment are in the oscillations of principle, 
properly called thinking, in the functions, or faculties, 
of desire, choice and motive. Those succeeding bodily 
elevations, by unfoldment, by which man is raised, finally 
to omniscience, will be by the same methods of thinking. 
Principle rules triumphantly on the whole orbit of life. 

We shall presently consider the personality, and, 
finally, the individuality, of invisible man. 


EXERCISE LXXXV. 


MAN-CREATED SOURCES OF LIFE, 

Many sources of life from which to choose—Man creates 
them all except one—That one is the Eternal Foun¬ 
tain-Man does not create, but he unfolds that one 
—Necessity of training desire, choice and motive— 
By discovering the Real Source of Life, man forsakes 
affliction and rises in joy and gladness, Peace, Health 
and Plenty. 


NOTWITHSTANDING all that has been said on 
previous pages, there is more than one source of life. 
Indeed, there are so many sources that one has a pretty 
wide field in which to chose. If one does not like his life 
in its present form, he may change the source from which 
it proceeds, and thereby produce a different form. Lil¬ 
lian Whiting says that, “Every individual is simply the 
result, the exact sum and amount, of the causes he has, 
by his own series of choice, set in motion.” 

It is a fact that desire, choice and motive, in voli¬ 
tion, may propagate their own sources of life, and lay in 
store a vast collection of causes, to be drawn upon as 
required. In that way one may build his own form tone 
of life to suit his own choice. Indeed, that is the gen¬ 
erally prevailing rule in human life. Man creates his 
own causes, and because they do not produce what he 
desires most, which is happiness, he is constantly draw¬ 
ing on new causes from his collection, by way of experi¬ 
ment, in search of the goal so must needed. 

It is seen that ideal standards most easily propa¬ 
gated, and most conveniently developed into tones of 
character, are of a type which flow from discordant 
environment in the form of suggestion. Just as certain 
as desire holds to a set of ideals, in choice, without ele¬ 
vating motive, just so sure will he develop a tone of life 
in harmony with the tones of those ideals. They become, 
to him, a source of life of his own creation, and he 
draws therefrom a complete equipment of human char¬ 
acter. That is said in order that the student may real¬ 
ize the mighty functional sweep of choice in desire, not 
restrained nor regulated by proper motives. 

Through unfolding degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, by which experience is dearly bought, man finally 
appropriates sufficient knowledge to enable him to make 

(491) 



492 


THE NEW IDEA. 


a wise and a right choice of the only true source of life— 
a source which is not of his own creation. By degrees 
of wisdom, in experience, he thus chooses wisely; by 
degrees of intelligence, also in experience, he chooses 
rightly. The latter teach righteousness; the former im¬ 
part wisdom. 

About the only thing which man cannot create, by 
thinking, is the one and only true source of life. He 
discovers that by experience, as a rule. He does create 
all other sources of life—all the sources in error and evil. 
Knowledge by experience, which is knowledge by un- 
foldment, is the tried and proved pathway. It is gen¬ 
erally a way through many afflictions. At any rate, 
afflictions abound, until by their use, he discovers the 
true source of life. As soon as that glorious result has 
been achieved, the pushing force of affliction leaves him, 
and he begins to function in the pulling, drawing, lifting 
forces of Love, with abounding health, joy and gladness; 
peace and plenty. 

It will do one no harm to consider, for a few min¬ 
utes, what proportion of our race is feeding upon evil 
tones, today. How many out of the total number living 
in visible bodies, now, are drawing their life foods from 
sources created by themselves; and, how many are draw¬ 
ing the sustaining and unfolding food from the unfold¬ 
ing source of Principle, which they did not create, but 
which they may develop and unfold into the glory of 
righteous and immortal character? Think about that. 
Then, there may, in wisdom, be added to that, the idea 
that the proportion of our race which is drafting sup¬ 
plies of life from sources of their own ereation, is the 
exact volume of humans who are traveling backward to 
the first lower pre-human man estate. The bright side 
of the picture is that the number of humans who are 
drawing supplies of life from Principle in Truth, which 
is the unfolding plan, is the precise number who are 
traveling forward and upward to higher and invisible 
spheres, where reincarnation into physical subvesture 
tones is unknown. 

From the foregoing observations, it is seen that the 
faculties of desire, choice, and motive need special train¬ 
ing. They require knowledge sufficient to enable them 
to function wisely and truly, in the plan of Principle 
in Truth, for without that, those faculties must function 
in such degrees of wisdom and intelligence, as will pro¬ 
vide them with that knowledge, by experience, in afflic¬ 
tion. It is the function of this volume to provide a 
method, or methods, of thinking, which will enable stu- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


493 


dents thereof to avoid the latter. The idea is that one 
may go direet to the eternal fountain of life, in Truth, 
by functioning in a pure desire, a wise and true choice, 
and, therefore, in a righteous motive, and there appro¬ 
priate the true life, which casteth out all fear, all afflic¬ 
tion, all sickness and all death. In that way, afflicting 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, which push humans 
up or down, may be swallowed up in the grand victories 
of a wise and true choice. 

The plan already has been fully elaborated, but may 
be repeated here to the extent of saying that all one has 
to do, as a safe start, is to cultivate heart purity, in 
the methods of thinking given for that purpose. Then 
ideal standards will shine with the glory of a golden 
choice, and glow with the fervor of an exalted motive. 
All else will follow. 

I have developed this exercise, in a rather peculiar 
way, up to this point, in order to prepare the student 
to consider that transcendent fact which I call the Heart 
of Consciousness— the heart of the invisible human psy¬ 
chological organization, which is the real man. It is a 
fact that the psychological organism of man has a real 
heart, at its very center. None of the psychologists have 
developed that branch of the science of psychology. We 
will now proceed to do that. I venture to say, here, that 
the student is not very much surprised at the turn this 
exercise is taking. He has become accustomed to discov¬ 
eries of this kind, and is ready for whatever may hap¬ 
pen along such lines. However, it is probably most expe¬ 
dient that we take up consideration of the psychological 
heart in the next succeeding exercise. 


EXERCISE LXXXVI. 


PERSONALITY OF PSYCHIC ORGANISM. 

Next higher form of a human incomprehensible—Rise of 
Form—Incidents of Transformation—The new Eyes 
and Ears—Unfoldment of vestures—Physical Powers 
of New Body—Revelations of the new man—The 
marriage reunion—The New Heart—Love takes the 
place of Desire in the new man. 


THE following exercise is in the tones of, so called, 
speculative philosophy, and is introduced with a view 
to experimental thinking. It is not capable of complete 
demonstration in synthetics, and yet it is plain, from all 
that has been said, that I am justified in projecting 
thought trains along those lines. Beyond question the 
data of this exercise is brought to vision by thinking in 
the plan of life as it is in Principle. The student will 
find psychological health by thinking along these lines. 

THE psychological organism of a man does not only 
contain a real heart at its center, but it exists in a 
personal form, and comprises about all of the physiolog¬ 
ical, and psychological organ and faculty features of vis¬ 
ible man, with many more added, hut in relatively higher 
substance, and, therefore, in higher powers. Yes, indeed, 
the psychological organism of the man, commonly called 
consciousness, maintains a magnificently organized phys¬ 
iological side. 

I have already explained that the outmost vestures 
of the units composing a visible human, consist of phys¬ 
ical subvesture tones, commonly called gases, liquids and 
solids. When those vestures are shed, or drawn up in 
unfoldment, the units composing the new man will be 
without those sub vestures, and will exist in outer vesture 
tones of pure physical magnetic ether. That is the same 
as saying that the next outer body is composed of physi¬ 
cal magnetic ether. The outer body of a form of life 
always consists of the outer tone vestures of its units. 
That rule prevails all the way up the arc of evolution. 

The outer body is always the husk, or shell, of the 
egg, in which the higher rising form is developed, un¬ 
folded, and hatched. That which comes forth is not in 
the form of the egg, but rather in that of Principle which 
propagated the rising life. In the case of the propagation 
of humans, by reincarnations from the last pre-human 
( 494 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


495 


man estate, we do not know what those forms are. They 
are wisely hidden from human vision. In propagations 
from human forms, which we behold, to the next higher 
forms, the new rising forms are also hidden, temporarily, 
from our view. We do not know, as yet, just what those 
new forms are like. We do know that they are very 
much higher and more perfect than human forms; and 
we also know that they contain all the organism, with 
certain exceptions, where human organic functions be¬ 
come obsolete, of humans with much more added; and, 
we know that the whole is in a transcendently higher 
state. 

It is quite easy to see what portions of the physio¬ 
logical organism are left behind. One set of those be¬ 
come non-functional by the resolution of desire to love, 
which is accomplished in that wonderful transformation, 
by which divided male and female forms of life, are prop¬ 
agated to dual individuality. But those phenomena may 
best be explained by oral lectures to divided male and 
female classes. 


RISE OF FORM. 

The advance of the form of life realized in the new 
man consists in the unfoldment of a wide range of new 
organism, of both physiological and psychological tones. 
That is wherein the elements of change arise. There is 
the advance, the progress of unfoldment. Such is the 
method of Principle in propagation. 

Possibly a great majority of my readers were of the 
opinion that the transformation from the visible to the 
invisible form of life of a man worked out a complete 
release from physical tones; and, that the physical, with 
the whole embodiment of human physiology, is dropped, 
or thrown off altogether. Such a conception is in error. 
The manner of the evolution of the physiological side of 
man is from physical subvesture to full tone physical 
tones; next, from full tone physical to mental magnetic 
ether tones; and, finally, from mental magnetic ether, to 
celestial magnetic ether tones, or to the substance of the 
units of pure white light. 

Correlated with that evolution there is the unfold¬ 
ment of the spiritual side from angelic to divine, and 
from divine to spiritual ether tones. It must be remem¬ 
bered that there are subvesture tones to the angelic, di¬ 
vine, and spiritual full tones, the same as there are to 
the physical, the mental, and the celestial full tones of 
ether. * Those intermediate states, or tones, are every¬ 
where implicated in life unfoldment, as we plainly see. 



496 


THE NEW IDEA. 


For example, humans are now functioning, jointly, in 
angelic and physical subvesture tones. As already elab¬ 
orated, the spiritual and the celestial vesture and sub¬ 
vesture tones propagate jointly, in relativity and inter¬ 
dependence. Spiritual Power, Love and Truth, always 
function interdependently with celestial Power, Love 
and Truth, which is the same as saying that degrees of 
spiritual intelligence unfold, jointly, with degrees of 
celestial wisdom. 

Thus, the new and rising man is possessed, function¬ 
ally, of a physical side. That raises the science of physio¬ 
logical psychology to higher ground. It is all a matter 
of the interdependence of celestial and spiritual tones, 
which flux together, by thinking, into the new man, in 
the fact of propagation. 


FUNCTIONS OF DUALITY. 

I am very anxious that the student shall bring to 
clearer vision the organism of life units, and especially 
of their spiritual and celestial dualities; and to correlate 
that organism with that of the larger mass tone forms 
of a man or woman. It may be that the reader has al¬ 
ready done that, but it is very essential that, in all re¬ 
spects, the organism of the unit and that of the larger 
organization of units, be held in thought, in parallel 
columns. That will aid the understanding in the work 
we have in hand. I have many times delved into the 
riches of Professor Ladd’s ponderous volume, entitled, 
“Outlines of Physiological Psychology,” and in those 
studies I have often thought what a transcendent volume 
he could write, by employing the keys which the teach¬ 
ings of this book supply. They open to clearer vision, 
the wonderful interdependence between the physical, 
the mental, and the higher celestial; and also of the rel¬ 
ativity and interdependence of those three, with the spir¬ 
itual triad above them. If I had the years, in the flesh, 
before me, I would gladly undertake to qualify myself, 
by a more thorough study of his grand book, so as to 
carry its splendid teachings to the higher realm. It 
would be a comparatively easy task, and the study a 
most delightful employment, grandly unfolding in its 
powers, but it would require years of patient work. I 
would most respectfully suggest, in this paragraph, that 
Professor Ladd give us, even yet, a small volume along 
these lines. His book to which I refer, reaches very close, 
in its teachings, to the wonderful border land here re¬ 
ferred to. 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


497 


INCIDENTS OF TRANSFORMATION. 

In the study of physiological psychology, one must 
remember that there is a great difference in the relation¬ 
ship existing between the physical and purely psycho¬ 
logical organisms of the human, as he is constituted in 
the visible life, and of the physical and the mental organ¬ 
isms as they will exist when the outer physical body is 
thrown off. In thinking of that relativity and interde¬ 
pendence, as it is constituted in the present human form 
of life, one has to deal with the angelic subvestures of 
the spiritual zone, and the physical subvestures of the 
celestial zone. In the study of the higher psychological 
psychology of the new man. after he will have left the 
present visible body, one deals only with the full tone 
vestures of the physical, on the one hand, and the full 
tone angelic vestures of the spiritual zone, on the other. 
The latter is less complicated, and, although physically 
invisible, as to its substance, may, even in our present 
state, be brought to a most transcendent psychological 
outline vision. 

Considering the invisible form of life of a human, 
both before and after its release from the outer physical 
body, we say that it possesses an organism containing a 
heart and lungs very much the same as the present partly 
visible organism. The new man will breathe and main¬ 
tain a circulatory system very much as he does at pres¬ 
ent. The blood corpuscles which will circulate through 
his organism, will be devoid of that membrane consist¬ 
ing of visible sub vesture tones, but will be supplied with 
a fluid membrane of physical magnetic ether. It is be¬ 
cause of that fact that it cannot be brought to human 
vision, even by the science of optics. 

The new man will breathe almost the same atmos¬ 
phere that the old man breathes, as we see him today. 
The difference is that the lungs will be transformed to a 
higher and more perfect organism, and the elements 
which he will inhale will not contain physical subvesture 
membranes, by which the outer clothing will be composed 
of purely physical magnetic ether. Thus, they will be 
in the actuality of a light, pliable fluid, so that the new 
man will inhale the very same atmosphere that he appro¬ 
priated while in the visible body, except that it will not 
be in the fact of subvesture physical tones. 

To make the last observations plain, it is hardly nec¬ 
essary to call your attention to the vestures of the units 
which compose what we humans call atmosphere. It is 
known that units of nitrogen and oxygen, as they are 
available to humans, are in fact of a substare, over which 


498 


THE NEW IDEA. 


are seven vestures. The outer membrane of those units 
consist of physical vesture tones, and they are called, in 
the science of physics, gaseous. That latter tone vesture 
will not be concomitant with such units constituting the 
atmosphere which the new man will appropriate after he 
leaves the physical sub vesture body. 

It is quite easy to see, from these observations, the 
nature of the next body which a human will wear. The 
outer vestures of the units of which it will be composed, 
will consist of pure physical magnetic ether tones. In 
a sense, the great difference between the partly risen 
human, and the human in the present state, consists in 
the fact that he will have finished, or ceased, to function 
in physical subvesture tones. With that change, a rise 
of form and the powers of life will take place, as already 
explained. 


THE NEW EYES AND EARS. 

The new man will have eyes and ears, the same as 
the present man, except that they will be in a more 
transcendent form, and will function in higher powers. 
By his eyes he will be able to bring to vision the tone 
vestures of physical magnetic atmosphere which is 
now invisible to humans. But his vision will not extend 
beyond that. He will no longer hear by sound or sound 
waves, but will apprehend by magnetic shimmers. It is 
a fact that man may already hear magnetically. I have 
camped upon a glacier, in the far North, and have met 
with others who have done the same, and have heard 
what appears to be sounds arising from the progress of 
that glacier. Of course they are not sounds in the lower 
physical sense. They are magnetic expressions of mag¬ 
netic forces. Hearing by the new and rising man will 
be in the same way. 

We already see that the organism of the present 
inner human eye consists of two triangles, laid upon 
each other, forming a six-pointed star. At the three 
angles of the first, are three magnetic color fountains 
in the facts of red, yellow and blue; at the angles of the 
other triangle are three color fountains of orange, green 
and violet. The processes of human vision are in this 
wise: there is propagation from six color fountains into 
the purple, or mass tone color, which constitute the pupil 
of the eye. The outer tone vestures of the fountain, 
which vibrate into the pupil, will not exist in the eye 
of the new man, but the outer tone vestures of that new 
eye will be in a higher and more transparent substance. 

The higher organism of the present human ear is 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


499 


about in the same way. The outer and inner drums are 
in the facts of triangles, with magnetic fountains in color 
tones at the angles, by which sound waves are trans¬ 
muted to consciousness. In the new ear those fountains 
will be more sensitive, by dropping the outer vestures, 
and the new ear will be able to apprehend movements, 
or tones, by magnetic shimmers. Thus, one might go on 
describing the physiology of the new man to almost any 
extent. 


UNFOLDMENT OF VESTURES. 

There is one fact, however, which the above obser¬ 
vations do not fully explain. On the arc of life unfold- 
ment, commonly called the arc of evolution, of the orbit 
of life, progress is not at all in the dropping, or shed¬ 
ding of vestures, but rather in the fact of propagation, 
by which there is drawn up from the vesture, from which 
the discrete form of life emerges, an unfoldment from 
its substance, which is fluxed mto and with the higner, 
into a new fact, with higher powers. There is in the 
extension of vesture tones, and in their unfoldment, the 
progress of propagation by which the new is evolved 
from the old in the fact of growth. It is wherein life 
becomes new by every pulse beat of the oscillations of 
Principle. 


PHYSICAL POWERS OF NEW BODY. 

But it is in the psychological organism of the new 
man, after release from the visible body, that we meet 
with the most transcendent phenomena. The transfor¬ 
mation from the old to the new body is, of course, very 
great. As to physical strength, the new body is ten 
thousand times more powerful in all respects. It is mag¬ 
netic in a very high degree, and exercises the marvelous 
powers inherent in physical magnetism. We cannot now 
see that substance, but we behold its effects in electricity, 
which latter is a devolution from physical magnetism. 
Thus an exhibition of power by the new body toward 
of the electric current, which, by desire, and choice, in 
things below it, would be in some such display as that 
proper motive, it could propagate at will. By its mag¬ 
netic power, man, in the new body, can be in any loca¬ 
tion desired, at any time, passing from one point to 
another within the vast zone of its own substance, by 
merely moving to the tune of magnetic shimmers. And 
all that when man has but unfolded into a full tone 
physical body. What then shall be said of his bodily 




500 


THE NEW IDEA. 


power capabilities, when he has risen to dwell in a body 
of upper celestial magnetic ether—to function in a body 
of pure light. 

In the psychological realm of the new man we meet 
with a succession of revelations. Present human facul¬ 
ties will unfold into correspondingly higher powers, and 
will expand to wonderful functions. An almost infinite 
number of new faculty functions will rise, by unfold- 
ment, into another visible form of life, propagated in a 
way precisely similar to that in which the present human 
psychological organism is unfolded, to-wit: by thinking 
in the plan of Principle. That still higher new form of 
life reaches out to the glory of the Divine-Mental. 

It is in the next new bodily form—that next higher 
than the human, that man will enter into the full tone 
functions of the Angel-Man. He is now, in human 
spheres, functioning as an Angel-Man, but only in sub- 
angelic and sub-phvsical tones. In the next higher form 
man will function in the complete glorv of the Angel 
Man. 


MARRIAGE REUNION. 

The most transcendent function of full tone physical 
life is that consummation called the marriage union of 
the man and the woman, of which physical subvesture 
wedlock is only symbolic. By that transcendent union 
the man and the woman become one individual dual form 
of life. That is not only a real marriage imion, but an 
at present, incomprehensible reunion of the man and the 
woman, by their units. It is beyond the powers of any 
language to express, even in moderate tones, the un¬ 
speakable facts which may be revealed to human con¬ 
sciousness by thinking in the plan of Principle. Think 
for a minute, in the full power and function of silence, 
where no item of the lower sense can disturb. Then go 
back with me to the glorious morning of the Second 
Birth of life, when the cellular units of the plant and 
animal kingdoms came forth! 

I have already given a brief account of how, in an 
attempt to clothe their tiny bodies, the father-mother 
cells—the primal dual cells—divided their forms of life 
into male and female forms. We see how evolution has 
carried those divided forms up through all the tones of 
physical subvesture spheres, in parallel columns. Now, 
we know that all evolution, or unfoldment of life is by 
life units, in mass-tone. The original units that were 
thus divided are to be restored by reunion, but in that 
re-union of Harmony, the restored form of life is vastly 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


501 


different from the original. However, there is the line 
of descent, or ascent. The fact of leinage prevails. Kin¬ 
dred ties are handed down from generation to generation 
of life units, so that the marriage reunion of the full tone 
physical zone is resolved to a union in fact, of the units 
of the two life organizations, and the man and the woman, 
become a woman-man; they join in unfolding into primal, 
dual individuality. 

I am not expecting that the average student will, 
on the first reading, be able to comprehend that which 
now follows, but he or she will unfold into a clear vision 
of these facts by thinking to unfoldment. In the crea¬ 
tion of the universe by propagation, life units, and mass 
bodies come forth in duality. They were born in the 
facts of the Two Principles, in perfect embrace. In the 
extension of that idea, the universe was divided into 
spiritual and celestial hemispheres. That was done to 
give a wider sweep to the pendulum of oscillation. The 
full achievement of that plan was accomplished in atomic 
and molecular spheres, but it was reached when cellular 
units w T ere divided, with the male Principle in one-half, 
and the female Principle in the other half, of each unit 
so divided. That division prevails all the way up the 
arc of evolution, until the utmost limits of physical sub¬ 
vesture life are reached. Then, as those units enter the 
full tone, by mass bodies, they reunite, both by unit and 
mass-tone, into their former state of the perfect embrace 
of the Two Principles. How could a tone be full, while 
one half is over there, and the other half over here? Do 
you not see that man from the mass-tone point of view is 
but half a tone, and the woman the same? In these lower, 
inharmonious spheres the tones of life are divided, and, 
transcendent as it may appear, they cannot become com¬ 
pletely harmonious, until they join with other fractional 
tones, in such a way as to constitute a full tone. 


NATURE OF THE FULL TONE. 

Now, it begins, no doubt, to dawn on the mind of the 
student, why it is that we call the physical zone full 
toned, and, why we think of these subvesture spheres as 
in fractional tones—in sub-tones. 

The processes by which the male and female forms 
are wrought into the glory of duality work out a most 
transcendent rise of the dual form, so that as soon as 
the marriage reunion is consummated, the new form is 
ready to enter the Body of Invisible Brotherhood forever 
to remain a constituent thereof. In the processes of prop¬ 
agation by which Individual Duality is accomplished are 



502 


THE NEW IDEA. 


hidden the mystery of the second resurrection. After 
the unspeakable dual form has entered the transcendent 
mass-tone body of Brotherhood, the rise, or unfoldment 
of its life is in the fact of the Rising’ Lord. Within that 
incomprehensible body the new man will unfold success¬ 
ively into two other bodies, one in the substance of the 
divine-mental, and the last, in that of the spiritual celes¬ 
tial zone. The rise after that is into the archetypal or 
triumvir Heaven of completely unfolded Power, Love and 
Truth, which therein make one in the Absolute Life of 
Harmony. Therein mankind is in the mass-tone Harmony 
of the Living God— The all of Finished Life. 


THE NEW HEART. 

As stated, the transformed heart functions in the 
new man. That is the fountain of life for the new man, 
the same as it now is for a human. It is always the seat 
and source of the personal or individual form of life. 
The new dual heart— dual by virtue of the embrace, or 
reunion of the male and female Principles—works out a 
new and most transcendent fact of life. When that de¬ 
gree of Harmony is reached, the chief force of life un¬ 
foldment will no longer be in desire, but in the glorious 
functions of Love. In that transformation the pushing 
force of wisdom and intelligence will have been resolved 
to the drawing power of Love. 

Love will have taken the place and function of de¬ 
sire in the new man. That is because of the new duality 
which rises in the transformed life organization. It 
comes, as stated, by the reunion of the Two Principles. 
Hence it is seen that the real marriage union which is 
achieved in the next higher sphere is a biological fact; 
that it is in the plan of life. 

Therefore, the transformed heart of the new man is 
wherein the real marriage union is consummated. It is 
a reunion of hearts, which for so many ages have throbbed 
out the unfoldment of life, separately, and which now 
come to beat as one —to function as one distinctly. I am 
sure that a study of that new heart is in a method of 
Principle, because it already exists, potentially, in the 
inner folds of the heart of the man and that of the wom¬ 
an, as we have them today. That observation helps us 
to realize that no study of the human heart is complete 
that does not implicate the present heart of the man, and 
the woman, because those two are to become one heart. 

That is certainly a key to great discoveries. Stand¬ 
ing on that foundation I desire once more to emphasize 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


503 


the mighty fact that the presently divided human heart, 
and the coming dual heart are, in reality, the foundation 
of those wonderful potentialities of Power, Love and 
Truth, which, by their unfoldment, in methods of Prin¬ 
ciple, are to raise man, and the dual man, to the final 
summit of unfolded Principle. 

The foregoing, after all, is not speculation—not spec¬ 
ulative philosophy. It breathes the synthetics of the 
facts of the universe, so far as our developed and appro¬ 
priated degrees of wisdom and intelligence can bring them 
to psychological vision. I am aware that the conception 
is new, as is nearly everything else in this volume, but, 
when we come to have more complete elaborations in lec¬ 
ture courses, we will all enjoy plainer, clearer and strong¬ 
er visions of these facts. I am persuaded that this may 
become one of the most profitable thinking exercises of 
the volume. 


EXERCISE LXXXVII. 


INTEGRITY-HONOR-TALENT. 

All virtues may be unfolded from the human heart— 
Talents come forth, by thinking 1 , from the potential¬ 
ities of the heart—The unutterable riches in the 
depths of the human heart. 


INTEGRITY is wholeness, or health; honor is self- 
respect; honesty is the straight, or shortest line between 
man and man; talent is riches. The question is, By what 
method of thinking can those virtues be unfolded into 
the life and character of man. That method follows: 

First, obtain a knowledge of integrity. Come to 
know its meaning; its worth; its power. Then desire 
integrity; then make it your choice; then resolve to un¬ 
fold into it, and to become it. See to it that your mo¬ 
tive, in all that, is that you esteem integrity for its in¬ 
trinsic worth, or because of its wholeness, or moral health. 
Thus thinking to your best and highest ideals of integrity, 
it will gradually unfold into your character. The same 
process applies for the unfoldment of honor, but with 
talent, a different process is required. Emerson says that 
every man who moves into a city with any talent in 
him gives to every man’s labor in that city a new worth, 
and that, if a talent is anywhere born into the world, the 
community of nations is enriched. 

How may one give birth to talents within him, so 
that he may function in them? 

It was the Roman Emperor, Marcus Aurelius Anto- 
nius, who wrote, “If nothing appears to be better than 
the Deity which is planted in thee, . . . give place 

to nothing else.” If one realize that he or she is with¬ 
out talents, such as appear in most others, and naturally 
desires to possess such functions, and feels dejected and 
miserable in the lack of life’s riches on those lines, what 
shall be done? It is said that talents are not acquired; 
that they are born. That is true. 

Then, if one cannot acquire talents, shall he be 
compelled to suffer his days out for the need of them? 
Not at all. Set about it and have them born. To do that, 
the first requisite is to realize that the Source of life 
is within you; that God is potentially in the human heart, 
and that your heart is human, at least. Now, it is not 
an easy matter for some to realize that God is within 

( 504 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


505 


them. Why? Because the Deity is deeply buried under 
a whole lot of ruins and wreckage piled high through 
wrong thinking—thinking in error. It is necessary to 
clear away that debris, so that man can see deep down 
into his own fathomless heart. 

He must begin by thinking into a knowledge of his 
heart. He must get down, or up, into it, as the case may 
be. He must explore its hidden chambers, and store¬ 
houses, and, in doing that he will be surprised by many 
discoveries. He will find rich treasures in his heart, al¬ 
though thickly covered with rust and decay. The search 
will not long be continued before the heart will begin to 
yield up its potentialities. 

As one item of knowledge after another is brought 
into association, and as the inner organism of the heart 
begins to throb with life, it is seen that its pulsations 
spring directly from the oscillations of Principle—that 
the fact of Principle is really in that hitherto considered 
barren and worthless heart. Thus thinking, it is a little 
later realized that one may exercise such control over 
the organism of Principle in the heart, by the functions 
of desire, choice and motive, as to cause it to propagate 
—to give birth to— anything which choice may desire, 
including talents. 

In that way and by such processes of thinking a cold, 
practically lifeless, barren and unfruitful heart, becomes 
warm, full of rising and unfolding life, yielding the most 
valuable fruits. Feelings and emotions spring up, respon¬ 
sive to such thinking, and bloom into radiations of Faith, 
casting up a highway, over which the light of success 
spans many arches of promise. That is the dawn of 
courage into which hopes are resurrected. Something 
new already is being born. At any rate there is a new 
light, and it proceeds from the heart, because its radia¬ 
tions germinate feelings and emotions there, which quick¬ 
en into resolution. 

Desire is encouraged and choice starts to function. 
Hope becomes more buoyant, and the heart begins to 
throw off its heavy load. Burdens roll away, one after 
the other, and a better prospect of life comes gradually 
into vision. That is a process of mining treasures from 
the human heart which has so long been neglected and 
despised. 

Man may thus dig up the richest food from his own 
heart. It is really a fountain of wonderful treasures, 
whereas he has regarded it only as the source of fore¬ 
boding and trouble. As the manifold tones of the heart 
begin to radiate, responsive to right thinking, new tones 


506 


THE NEW IDEA. 


arise, finer and more powerful than the first ones; and 
the deeper the thinking reaches, the nearer it approaches 
to the inner Deity which is hidden there. The idea is 
to persist in those methods of thinking which quicken 
the inner tones of the heart into oscillation, so that their 
riches will unfold into functional powers of life. In 
that way the better things unfold, and the disagreeable 
functions pass away. 

Now, talents are intellectual abilities. They are nat¬ 
ural, as well as acquired. They belong to the realm of 
knowledge, as well as to that of learning. If one have 
not the opportunities of acquiring items of learning, in 
large measure, they always have opportunities for think¬ 
ing, and may therefore unfold knoAvledge, from the heart. 
It is not unfolded from the head. Talent is ability. At 
the last analysis, it is faculty. All faculties are unfolded 
from the heart. Even the faculty of genius is unfolded 
from the heart, although certain human types of life 
find the latter more difficult than others. There is the 
fact of the variety of human forms of life. No two are 
just alike. 

It is plain, therefore, that by thinking in methods 
of Principle, one who starts with but few and very mod¬ 
erate abilities, may become talented. Those riches are 
really in the potentialities of your heart, and by thinking 
in proper methods, they will unfold, more and more 
abundantly. No limitations should be prescribed to the 
possibilities of such thinking. The heart is rich— not 
poor—and those riches belong to you. Your duty is to 
unfold them. 


EXERCISE LXXXVIII. 


HOW TO LIVE. 

All wholesome pleasures recommended—Eight hours for 
sleep, six hours for work, two hours for study, and 
eight hours for enjoying life by wholesome and pleas¬ 
urable amusements in fellowship—Joy and gladness 
the wings of life unfoldment. 


FROM all that has been said in this volume, the 
student might come to suppose that life is to be one con¬ 
tinuous round of hard thinking, for the unfoldment of 
the potentialities of the human heart, and that there is to 
be no place for amusements, and such other diversions, 
as are calculated to make life enjoyable, day by day, in 
fellowship with others, in out-door and in-door experi¬ 
ences. That is not the case. There is to be the thinking 
and consequent actions in wholesome pleasures of all 
kinds. Human fellowship is glorified by entertainments, 
amusements, games and diversions of all kinds calculated 
to excite interest and pleasure. 

One begins with the cultivation of cheerfulness and 
mirth, and extends that line into wit and humor, joy and 
gladness, and laughter provoking entertainments. The 
course of life, from that point, practically takes care of 
itself. You may be able to appropriate wholesome food 
from all sorts of enjoyable avocations, many of which 
would be twisted into functions of evil, or not appre¬ 
ciated, when the life organization is discordant, or out 
of tune with the best things of every day experience. 

Men and women should so manage the disposition 
of their time as to be able to classify it as follows, to-wit: 
Elight hours of each twenty-four for sleep; eight hours 
of each day for productive work; and eight hours of each 
day for pleasure and social intercourse. Thus it is seen 
that one should devote fully one-half of their wakeful 
hours of each day to those incidents of fellowship, by 
which enjoyment is realized. The latter is imperatively 
essential to health and happiness. 

Very little thinking will convince anyone that eight 
hours of every twenty-four should engage self in the 
actual work of business, industry, or profession, by which 
to earn, and accumulate the necessaries of life. Indeed, 
I am of the opinion that the working period of each day 
should be reduced to six hours, and that the two hours 

( 507 ) 



508 


THE NEW IDEA. 


which would remain, in that case, should be devoted to 
such duties as arise from eating and drinking at meals. 

I must insist that of the eight hours set aside for 
pleasurable and profitable diversions, at least two hours 
should be sacredly devoted to study. Nothing can be 
more important than systematic study to every man or 
woman, during the whole period of their life in flesh and 
blood. The study should not only be systematic as to 
homeletics, but should be assigned to certain set periods, 
or hours, of each day. It will not do to let the study 
hours come after everything else has been provided for. 
They are of paramount importance, and should have 
their regular places, undisturbed. One great difficulty 
with the human race, or the more enlightened portion 
of it, is that when school days are over, study is, for a 
greater part, thrown aside, in the idea that the education 
has been completed, and that nothing remains but to en¬ 
gage in business or domestic and social duties. If men 
and women would devote a certain period of each day 
to systematic study, along the lines of thinking in meth¬ 
ods of Principle, to self-life unfoldment, they would live 
longer, happier, and become much more useful in the 
world. 

I hold to the doctrine that, aside from eight hours 
of sleeping, one should fill every other minute of the day 
with such thinking and expressions, in actions, as will 
prove to be useful. There should not be an idle minute— 
not one. I venture to say that a half-hour lost in idle¬ 
ness will, as a rule, undo the work of two hours. It is 
not in the idea that one shall labor every minute. In¬ 
deed, I do not believe that a man or woman should ever 
labor for so much as one minute, when in health and 
strength. I am opposed to the Principle, so to speak, of the 
idea unfolded in the word, labor. Men should come to dis¬ 
tinguish between labor and work. Work is never labor, 
when those who perform it are in a harmonious state of 
life. It is only the discordant, the disorganized, the in¬ 
harmonious, and, therefore, the weakling 1 , who in error 
resolve their work to the drudgery of labor. Work is 
always in the fact of righteousness, or right actions. 
Right actions may always be performed in desire, choice, 
and high motive. It is altogether unnecessary and always 
in error, that one is obliged to force self to the perform¬ 
ance of duty. The harmonious man or woman will see a 
golden opportunity through every door that opens to the 
performance of duty. In that respect, duty is always 
in the fact of opportunity. Thus thinking and living, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


509 


life is resolved, in all its obligations and duties, to joy 
and gladness. 

He or she who seeks to pile up into their own pos¬ 
session, the visible tones of life, generally called material 
riches, forgetting that those things, while necessary, 
should always be considered as the means to a high end 
in motive; and regarding them as the end of life, or as the 
source of real happiness, will discover that they will not 
propagate to real health and happiness. The accumula¬ 
tion of material wealth is laudable, and should be en¬ 
couraged, on every hand, but one should always remember 
that such things are useful only in so far as they, by 
uses, propagate or unfold one’s life to higher powers. 

Men and women should think, to the full extent of 
their powers, to become light and happy hearted. Life 
is serious to be sure, but if one will think deeply, it will 
soon appear that there are few occasions for that kind of 
seriousness which reaches out to sorrow. One should not 
mistake earnestness and zeal for seriousness, unless the 
latter word be interpreted from the standpoint of its 
better significance. It is only the discordant person who 
is serious in the fact that he is continuously in a state 
of foreboding, or in the condition of expecting something 
disagreeable to happen. The harmonious person will al¬ 
ways be filled with joy and gladness, and will always live 
in the expectation of realizing greater heights and depths, 
which arise in the overflowing cup of joy and bowl of 
gladness. If your heart is always unfolding it is likewise 
running over with joy and gladness. It has been observed 
that I use those two precious words, over and over again; 
and in concluding this very brief exercise, I again impress 
upon the reader the advantages of unfolding his or her 
life in joy and gladness, which are the wings of life un- 
foldment. J 



EXERCISE LXXXIX. 


GOD’S PEOPLE. 

Different grades or classes of man—The four great types 
above and including humans—The numerical strength 
of perfected mankind—Marvelous functions of unit 
interdependence—Sources of Brotherhood and Har¬ 
mony. 


SUFFICIENT lias already been said, as to the char¬ 
acter of the finished forms of life, which function as 
constituents of the Universal Mass-tone of Brotherhood, 
in perfected Harmony. There are four grades, or classes 
of mankind existing below those, and including humans. 
That is not inclusive of the pre-human races of man. The 
former, as already stated, are in the facts of physical sub¬ 
vesture humans, physical full-tone angel-men, mental full- 
tone divine-men, and spiritual full tone spiritual celes¬ 
tial-men. There are types of men peculiar to the sub¬ 
vesture tones of the three great zones of substance, as 
already stated, but of these we have not been able to 
propagate a very clear vision up to this time. 

What I desire to call attention to, particularly, in 
this exercise is the infinite number of God’s people—the 
numerical strength of finished mankind. 

It is a biological fact that when one man and one 
woman unite in the everlasting wedlock of duality in 
the full tone of the physical zone, they become the first 
Individual Man. We do not have an undivided man, until 
that status is reached. It is seen, therefore, that, in one 
sense, there are but half as many individual men, as there 
are human men and women. That is the truth, viewing 
the matter from the standpoint of the new duality. 

From that status there is no further diminution of 
the numerical strength of mankind. Of course there is 
the oneness, or sum-total individuality of all life in Har¬ 
mony, but as a constituent of that All man will maintain 
his expending individuality for ever and ever. 

The question which here rises is this: is there any 
rule of science by which we can find a basic Principle 
for determining the final numerical strength of mankind? 
Yes, there is such a rule of science, and it is quite simple. 

The understanding of that rule will propagate 
to a new and grand vision of relativity and 

( 510 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


511 


interdependence in the Brotherhood of Harmony. 
To reach that understanding we must realize, as 
far as possible, the infinite number of the unit 
forms—thoughts—of life propagated by Principle. 
Of course that infinitude is not comprehensible, but 
that fact impresses us with its greatness. Now, we have 
seen how those units fellowship in the propagation of 
degrees of organism, in life unfoldment, until man is 
reached. All we have to do is to come to see that each 
unit of infinite variety, in turn, fellowships with all the 
others, in building a form of life such as man, peculiar 
to its own potential tones, until the round of infinity has 
been reached. By working out that problem you have 
the sum-total number of humans, and by dividing that 
sum by two, you have the total number of higher forms 
of man. 

It must be remembered, however, that the division of 
the unit, which was experienced on entering into sub¬ 
physical evolution, only temporarily doubled the num¬ 
ber of the units of variety, and that, by their reunion, 
in the full tone of our zone, there is the same number of 
individual men that there is of individual, or undivided 
units. Hence, by dividing the total number of male and 
female humans by two, we still have the total number of 
original, or undivided units, or original individual units. 

It is desired, once more, to bring to vision the rule 
by which the total number of individual men of the next 
higher sphere is reached. The rule consists in the fact 
that each individual life unit has the power to function 
in the life of all the others, in turn, or simultaneously. 
That is true of the larger unit organizations, such as per¬ 
sonal men and women, or such as individual men-women 
of the next higher sphere. That is the mighty fact, wherein 
the relativity and interdependence of all the forms of life, 
work out the greater fact of Harmony. It is, also, in the 
other transcendent fact, that each individual form of 
life, whether unit or organized, is the I am. 

It is probably not profitable to attempt at this time, 
to carry this method of thinking to higher ground. We 
have at least, once more, brought to vision, the sources 
of relativity and interdependence, obligation and duty, 
and the transcendent facts of Brotherhood and Harmony. 
We can see that our thinking is not in vain—that we are 
rising to the appropriation of more life. That is the le¬ 
gitimate results of thinking in the plan of Principle. All 
God's people are one people. They are rising to the One¬ 
ness of Absolute life. 


EXERCISE XC. 


THE GOD WITHIN. 

The Deity within the Human Heart—Faulty methods of 
Prayer—Christian ideals—Man himself possesses the 
functions of self-life unfoldment, and may use them 
by self-powers. 


IT is a very narrow, and certainly a very clouded 
perception which distinguishes between self-regeneration, 
and regeneration by the Holy Spirit. From all that has 
been said on these pages, up to this time, the author feels 
that the student should, by this time, be able to bring 
to clear vision the fact that self-regeneration, and re¬ 
generation by the Spirit are one and the very same pro¬ 
cess. 

All that has heretofore been said about the wonderful 
self-powers of a man, or woman has been so said in 
order to emphasize that part of the work which one 
must do by the exercise of desire, choice and motive. 
But by the exercise of those functions, in volition, which 
man by himself has the power to do, he appropriates the 
elements of the higher life through the functions of the 
heart, and unfolds them into the glory of a regenerated 
and re-created personal life. 

The regeneration and re-creation here spoken of are 
achieved in the secret mysteries of propagation. We can¬ 
not understand, in our present state, all the hidden forces 
of propagation. We simply know from the higher obser¬ 
vations of psychological vision, that it transforms the 
old into the new, and that the new is possessed of higher 
and greater powers than the old. We are not in doubt, 
however, about the latter fact. We know it to be in 
truth, but we cannot fully explain the technique of that 
transcendent process. 

Very many of the previous passages of this volume, 
calculated to exalt and magnify man's self-powers, have, 
no doubt, to some extent, shocked the sensibilities of the 
Christian human heart. But those persons must be re¬ 
minded that everything which has thus been said is in 
Truth. It has been taught from the earliest ages of man, 
that the Deity is in man; that the unfoldment of man in 
righteousness is the unfoldment of God in man. Never¬ 
theless, when one comes to elaborate the methods of think¬ 
ing, by which that unfoldment is propagated, the devout 

( 512 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


513 


Christian reader, from a false sentiment, raises objec¬ 
tions. It has come, in error, into the thinking of man¬ 
kind, that we are over here, and that God is over there, 
and that we must receive everything of goodness in this 
life, from over there. In some way Christian thinking has 
separated man from God. That is a hard thing to say. 
It is the truth. It comes of the errors of man made 
theology. 

What I am trying to do, in this volume, is to abolish 
that unfortunate separation. It is true that man, in the 
present mass tone state of his degrees of Harmony, is 
infinitely below wKat he will become when he has un¬ 
folded his life into perfect Harmony. But that does not 
change the fact that he must unfold the God within him, 
by which he will himself come into the possession of all 
things. 

I have been careful to explain that the God within 
the human heart is potentially there—in the fact of poten¬ 
tialities. Now, we cannot appropriate our Creator, nor 
can we rise into a God-like life, by going out of self, in 
efforts to reach up to the God above us. That is much 
the greatest of human errors. It is well known that man, 
in almost all the prayers of his pure desires, reaches up, 
or looks beyond, the tones of this world, to an ideal per¬ 
sonal God or personal Savior. It is the object of these 
teachings to lead the student to discover the difference 
between fruitless emotions of that kind, and fruitful feel¬ 
ings and emotions and thinking, which stir and unfold 
the potentialities of the human heart. The attributes 
of God come into the life of man, to purify and to glorify 
it, and to make it grand and powerful, through the human 
heart. They cannot reach our lives by another route. 
They are already in the human heart in the embryos of 
potentialities, and they are ready to germinate and un¬ 
fold responsive to proper methods of human thinking. 

One cannot appropriate and unfold the-God within, 
by closing his eyes to his own wicked heart, and by open¬ 
ing them toward the heavens above. That is not a process 
of life unfoldment, according to this plan of Principle. 
The work of appropriating and unfolding the good things 
of life must begin in the heart, no matter how wicked it 
may be. Nothing whatever, can be accomplished in the 
way of unfoldment, into high degrees of Power, Love 
and Truth, until the heart is made pure—until the heart 
is transformed from darkness to light, and from impuri¬ 
ties into newness of life. 

The old tones of the heart must be transformed into 
newer and higher tones. That can be done only by 


514 


THE NEW IDEA. 


thinking in desire and choice, which are fimctional to 
unfoldment to those higher facts. To achieve that, we 
deal with the potentialities of our own hearts, from which 
we may reap a grand harvest. That is better than for 
us to undertake to appropriate things which are already 
perfect. It is seen that man must unfold from one degree 
of wisdom and intelligence to another, step by step, and 
fold by fold. He cannot be transformed in an instant. 
He must rise from the potentialities of self-life, in which 
are all the riches of eternal life in embryos. 

The foregoing observations are in the essence of the 
common sense of life unfoldment, as Well as in the science 
of Principle. The student is able to see that that is a 
fact. Old time methods of thinking should become obso¬ 
lete, in our day. They should be permitted to pass out. 
We should not cling to them. We should strive to appro¬ 
priate the new methods, or the better plan. Let us be 
candid. It is in truth that more than one-half of the 
most honest and fervent Christian praying that is done 
in our day, ignores the human heart, altogether, and looks 
to an Ideal God for deliverance, or for the supply of 
those things desired. 

Man generally prays in this wise: He asks for health 
and for the health of the neighbor. He lays full stress 
upon his own unworthiness to receive anything. He 
tries to realize that he is only a legitimate object of pity. 
He humbles himself, and calls himself a poor, miserable 
sinner, and perhaps he is. However, he has no right tw 
be miserable. He prays for many things; for the peace 
of nations; for the healing of the sick; for the comfort¬ 
ing of the distressed; and, for the salvation of his soul. 
He makes no request for the body, and, by inference, at 
last, he despises it. He asks God to do everything for 
him, and sometimes he prays for power to do a few 
things for himself; but as a rule, he leaves the carrying 
out of all work which he desires to have done, for him 
and others, to the energies of his Creator. In that respect 
his prayers are not very kindhearted. 

Now, man should work a transformation in the ter¬ 
minology and tones of his prayers. The kind of praying 
I have been speaking about may do some good. It has 
done good. It should not, and must not be undervalued. 
In short, it is the very best that the average man knows. 
If man knew better, he would pray better. The best kind 
of praying that one can practice is the best kind of 
thinking he is able to perform. If he turn to his heart, 
and think about that, and strive, by thinking, to unfold 
that, he will be going at the work in a practical manner. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


515 


By thinking to pure ideals, to his best and highest ideas 
of God, he will purify his heart, and as he proceeds, in 
that work, the heavy burdens will fall from his heart, 
and he will experience a measure of deliverance and lib¬ 
erty. By thinking in proper methods, he will discover 
that he has the power by psychological organization, to 
unfold the God within, and as he proceeds in that work, 
his hands find plenty to do, in the doing of which, all 
the blessings he asks to have God deliver to him, bodily, 
w’ill be grandly realized by himself, and for the objects 
of his prayers. 

I now call attention to a very important line of think¬ 
ing, without which my ideas of the Supreme, as elabor¬ 
ated in all of the foregoing, would be fatally misunder¬ 
stood. 


EXERCISE XCI. 


THE ULTIMATE SUPREME. 

A Revelation from Infinitude—God, the Supreme God, 
and the Ultimate Supreme God—The Supreme Prin¬ 
ciple of the universal system of the several Universal 
systems, and the Twelce Ultimate Supreme Princi¬ 
ples of the Twelve mass-tone Universal systems of 
the Supreme Universal systems—The embodiment of 
the Twelve Ultimate Supreme Principles is in Ulti¬ 
mate Supreme God. 


FROM the standpoint of our universe, there is the 
Supreme, and the Ultimate Supreme. In order that 
proper reverence may be exercised, in thinking, toward 
that Being Whom we call God, I desire to bring to vision 
the Government of the archetypal Heaven of Glory, as 
far as we are permitted to do so. In order to do that 
our thinking must run backward, over the orbit of infin¬ 
itude, in the following way: 

The immensity of our universe, and the ultimate 
vastness of the sum-total of universal systems in eternity, 
are beyond comprehension, but we know the Principle 
upon which that immensity rests, and, therefore, its trans¬ 
cendent plan. We say that there are as many planetary 
systems in our universe, as there are units of life com¬ 
posing any one of them. That is the same as saying that 
each ultimate unit of infinite variety may function, in 
turn, in fellowship, with all the others, until there comes 
forth a system of worlds for each such alternation. That 
plan places the number of the systems of worlds in our 
universe on the infinite scale, and provides for the com¬ 
plete Harmony of the sum-total thereof. 

Then, again, there are as many universal systems of 
worlds, each differing from the other, as there are world 
systems in our universe. There are just twelve great 
mass tone systems of universal systems of worlds, over 
which the Twelve Principles preside, respectively. Each 
one of those unutterable Primordial Principles is the 
Embodiment of the Eternal God of its own universe; and 
the Embodiment of the Twelve is the Alpha and the 
Omega, the Beginning and the End —the forever Unknow¬ 
able, and Ultimate Supreme Good—Hie All. 

Thus, in a very few sentences, I have expressed my 
vision of Infinite Creation, and of the Ultimate Supreme 

(516) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


517 


God. If the reader of the foregoing pages has' felt that 
I have made a freer use of the Sacred and Holy Name of 
the Ultimate and Eternal Ore, let it now be understood 
that, in those references, I have held in thought the God 
of our Universe only—the Principle of the universe of 
man, Who is subsequent, by two generations, to one of 
the Twelve Principles, and begotten, in line, by it. The 
embodiment of one of the Twelve Principles is transcend¬ 
ency higher than the God, or Principle, of our own uni¬ 
verse, and the Embodiment of the Twelve is that Unutter¬ 
able One, before whom the highest creatures of the 
archetypal heavens of glory, of all the universal systems 
in mass tone, veil their faces and cry Holy, Holy, etc. 

There are the triumvir heavens of our universe, 
wherein perfected Power, Love and Truth dwell together, 
by Principle, in the transcendent fact of Harmony. That 
latter is Our God. There are the archetypal heavens of 
the mass tone universal system in an unspeakable and 
incomprehensible Triad, which we call the Supreme God, 
and “know no more.” Then there are the twelve-fold 
heavens of forever incomprehensible glory, by which the 
Twelve Principles of the Ultimate twelve systems of uni¬ 
versal systems dwell, the Ultimate supreme embodiment 
of which dwells in a Heaven of Glory forever exclusive 
and alone. Concerning that forever incomprehensible 
Being 1 , man cannot profitably think, in physical subvest¬ 
ure degrees of wisdom and intelligence, beyond a most 
reverential recognition of the Ultimate Supreme I Am. 

In that beautiful vision of creation, we are permitted 
to approach the God—Principle—of our own universe, 
with a True heart, and, in the words of the greatest human 
Teacher and Example, say, Our Father. 

Hence, it is seen that my teachings do not even rise 
above the triumvir heavens of our own universe, where 
perfectly unfolded Power, Love and Truth, abide as one 
distinctly, in the fact of the Subsequent of one of the 
Supreme Principles. They do not venture into the Sacred 
and Supreme archetypal heavens of the Twelve, much 
less even the footstool of the Ultimate Supreme. They 
ore, therefore, in due reverence and respect of the higher 
sacred facts of creation, and of that forever incompre¬ 
hensible Fact behind and above all Life. 

We do not comprehend the nature of but one of the 
Twelve Ultimate Primordial Principles—that one from 
which was propagated the Primordial Principle which 
functions as the God of our universe, and we bring that 
One only to faint outline vision, mediately, through our 
own Father Principle. Each of the Twelve Ultimate Su- 



518 


THE NEW IDEA. 


preme Principles differs, in Nature and Powers, from 
any one, and from all the others. 

The student is reminded that we have the twelve con¬ 
stellations, the twelve stones, the twelve tribes of Israel, 
the twelve apostles, the twelve elements in a cellular unit 
organism, and so on. The study of symbolism, in which 
we all shall engage, somet ime, soon, I hope, is transcend- 
ently beautiful. 

The idea of a plurality of Gods will, of course, not 
arise in the thinking of the student, in connection with 
the above. The true idea is in the fact of a succession, 
or unfoldment, of Principle. The very essence of crea¬ 
tion is in the unfoldment of Principle. That process in¬ 
cludes all others. That Great Principle—one of the 
Twelve—from which the mass tone universal system to 
which ours belongs, propagated to our own Principle— 
the Principle by which the universe of man came forth. 
It is all in the division, or devolvement, or extension of 
Principle, first, from the Ultimate Supreme to the Su¬ 
preme, and from the Supreme to our own Primordial 
Principle. All came from the incomprehensible, and un¬ 
utterable Ultimate Supreme Twelve Principles, the em¬ 
bodiment of which is the Only God. From the Twelve 
Ultimate Supreme Principles, universal systems pro¬ 
ceeded, each system of systems differing from the other, 
in the same way that each of the Twelve differs from one 
another. Those differences are incomprehensible. We 
know T only of that Principle from which our own universe 
is unfolded. 


EXERCISE XCII. 


MICROCOSM AND MACROCOSM. 

The sweep of creation from the ultimate atom to world 
life—Functions of the egg-—The earth a mighty egg 
—The hatching process—Man’s thoughts control the 
elements, and he is responsible for all physical event- 
nations—Experimental thinking. 


FROM the microcosm to the cosmos comprises that 
sweep of creation embracing the whole orbit of the life 
of our universe. The smallest atomic unit of life—a sin¬ 
gle thought—with only a spiritual vesture, or tone en¬ 
velope, is a microcosm. That word, by its common use, 
applies to such unit, in its rising grades of organism, to 
molecular, corpuscular, and cellular forms of life, in 
any one, or all, successively, of the six etheric vestures, 
or the three physical subvestures, and also to man. Even 
man is said to be a microcosm. In the same sense our 
planet is a microcosm, because it holds the same relations, 
from a molecular or corpuscular standpoint, to the uni¬ 
verse, that a man does, from a cellular point of view to 
the all, or Universal Brotherhood. 

From the ultimate, or primal atoms—from the primal 
spiritual thoughts—to the consummation of our universe, 
is a mighty sweep of creation, in all of which Principle 
not only rules, but functions as the creator. It is already 
plain to our vision that Principle works, and produces 
forms of life, exclusively by its polar energy, or by prop¬ 
agation. If we study the six methods of propagation 
manifested in our physical subvesture spheres, and cor¬ 
relate them with the evolution of animal life, to man, 
we at once discover that the secret by which each higher 
and more extended organic form of life succeeded the 
one below and behind it, is hidden in the method by which 
each succeeding form is propagated. In that study we 
at once see the important function which the egg fills in 
the great plan of evolution. There is a sense in which 
all propagation, in animal and human life, is by the egg. 

In this connection, I desire again to call attention to 
the significant words, atom, molecule cell and corpuscle. 
In this work I employ the word, corpuscle, as signifying 
the smallest organic constituent of any compound. That 
constituent, the corpuscle, contains within its membrane, 
a number of molecules, each one of the latter being com- 

( 519 ) 



520 


THE NEW IDEA. 


posed of a colony, smaller or larger, of atoms. Such is 
the nature of organic corpuscles, wearing liquid, or solid 
vestures, in these sub-physical spheres. 

Attention is now called to the fact that a corpuscle 
is an egg. Speaking from the standpoint of our planet, 
which is of corpuscular constitution, that is a molecular 
egg. Such eggs eventually hatch into cellular forms of 
life—unit cellular forms—and concomitant with that 
process they propagate also the new heaven and the new 
earth. That is the dual business in which molecular cor¬ 
puscles are engaged while functioning as constituents of 
our earth. 

From those observations it is seen that our planet 
is a mighty egg, from which is hatching a new planet, as 
well as man. Man is not hatched from the earth in a 
full grown state, but he comes forth in cellular units, 
which, by fellowship, or organic association, unite to 
propagate degrees of animal life organization, until man 
is evolved. It is held in vision, therefore, that the earth, 
functioning as an egg, gives birth to a new invisible earth, 
or planet, and propagates mankind to inhabit, first, the 
visible world, by its visible forms, and, secondly, the 
invisible world, by its invisible mass tone forms. 

Now, the protoplasmic animal cell is called a cor¬ 
puscle, and science declares that an egg is a true cell. 
We see that the function of an egg is in that of propaga¬ 
tion, essentially. Thinking of the earth as a great cor¬ 
puscle, we come, by the rules of propagation, as revealed 
in the plan of Principle, to observe that it functions in a 
series of hatchings and re-hatchings. It gave birth to 
man, by his units, by the oscillations of its molecular cor¬ 
puscles, from which unit cellular eggs were hatched, and 
now we may see how it propagates man’s second birth- 
how it evolves mankind to the risen invisible Brother¬ 
hood in the fact of resurrection. 

Mankind is not, to any great extent, yet ready for 
the study of “cellular cosmogony,” or that system of 
thinking by which it is revealed, first, that the earth is a 
great corpuscle, or egg, with all mankind within its shell, 
or crust; and, second, that man, as a thinker, is thinking 
his way through the potentialities which envelop him, 
and by those hatching processes, will soon emerge into 
the freedom of a higher fluid plasm. 

Let us, by way of thought experiment, consider our¬ 
selves within the earth, and that its surface upon which 
we live and move is concave, and, further, that, we have 
not, as yet, set foot upon its outer convex surface. By 
that experiment a world of revelations enlightens our 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


521 


understanding. We see how, by mass tone motion, prop¬ 
agated by unit oscillation, a stone, or an apple falls to 
the ground and remains there; we see how men and 
women—how animal life—how the evolution of man— 
provide a psychological organization for Mother Earth, 
and perform the functions of its higher thinking; we see 
how men and women function as thoughts and ideas 
within the earth, and that, in the higher sense, the earth 
thinks, by the thinking of its thought organisms, such as 
men and women. In the same way the microcosm is think¬ 
ing for the cosmos, until life within life, the microcosm 
within the cosmos functions until the infinite universe 
is resolved to one interdependent constituent life organi¬ 
zation. 

Holding this method of thinking to be, as yet, purely 
experimental, we can see how, by it, the character of man 
rules and shapes all eventuations in, and contiguous to, 
our planet. Speaking of man, we say that as he thinketh 
so is he; that the power of mind over body is potential 
to health or sickness, peace or strife. The relations be¬ 
tween man and the earth are precisely the same as 
between mind and body in man. The thinking of man 
is, therefore, responsible for all eventuations in the ele¬ 
ments surrounding him. They constitute the mass body 
of mankind. 

If one say that the foregoing experimental method of 
thinking defeats itself in the one fact that the vision of 
man could not apprehend the plurality of worlds were 
he located within the crust, or shell of the earth, I 
answer that when the illusions of sense perception have 
been sufficiently left below, by man’s unfoldment to 
higher degrees of wisdom and intelligence, he will not 
only comprehend, to full understanding, the now percep¬ 
tion difference, between a visual straight line and a me¬ 
chanical level line, but he will appropriate to complete 
understanding, also, the wonderful functions of sense per¬ 
ception illusions, through which we now see darkly, and 
through which we now unfold, by the functions of such 
illusions, and will continue to so unfold until we shall 
behold the real face to face. 


Think on, O man, and thus 
By thinking rise to higher planes of light. 

Unfold the God within thee, thought by thought, 

And thus become the Fact that in thee dwells. 

Truth, by degrees of wisdom hails afar; 



522 


THE NEW IDEA. 


Intelligence, also potential, will 
Increase thy knowledge store of Bread 
Of Life, until Omniscience and thyself, 

Unfolding, will make one. 

Tis morning in 

Thy life, O man. The dawn has but begun. 

That lower vesture body worn in pride, 

But swaddling clothes, at best, soon will aside 
Be cast; and living robes, in grander form 
Be draped in folds of light, thy color-tones 
To radiate. Not until then (but then 
Is now, and now is then in real life), 

Will Primal Individuality, 

The first degree of dual life in thee, 

Be grandly wrought. So bright is that new form, 

The second birth that wrought the mighty change, 

Thy new-born tongue will praise. “Nor was it death 
“The transmutation wroguht. The monster died 
“With sense perception phantom hosts,” is now 
The Silent echo from that sphere of light, 

To waiting man below. 


Think on, O man! 

By thinking in the plan of life that thing 
Called death, itself will die; yea, man here on 
The Earth will be resolved to dual life— 

To “life beyond the grave.” In that high state, 
Omniscience, rising in expanding flight, 

The here and the hereafter will resolve 
To one 

In high ideals of 

The Truth, by thinking, man unfolds into 
The real Brotherhood, wherein mankind 
Becomes the Lord of Life. Thus thinking on. 
Regenerating waves transform the heart, 

To purity, thereby extending, tint 

By tint, and hue by hue, the dawning light. 

Until man’s vision unseen worlds and their 
Grand people shall behold. 


Think on, O man! 

The civilization so rightly now 

Thy boast, is but the first gray streak of dawn. 

Potential of the day. Its rise it takes 
Amid illusions of subvesture spheres. 

And swells from zone to zone of ether life. 

Augmenting glory’s crown; transforming man, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 

Through living, propagating tones, we call 
Environment; and thus unfolding is resolved 
To higher man; and higher man to it. 

That fact we call environment unfolds 
From sphere to sphere, on evolution’s scale, 
Until its tones, sent forth in waves of thought. 
By thinking man, become the living facts 
And forms of life created by mankind. 

Thus man, in image of Ideal God, 

Into his works resolves; yea, God and Man 
In joint creation work make one—that one 
The living, everlasting and complete 
Omniscient man. 


523 


EXERCISE XCHI. 


VOLITION AND THE WILL. 

Human volition—Immanent and Emanant—The volition 
of Planets and Suns—Radiation—Motor effects— 
Orbital Principle of thinking- processes—Fluxing 
effects of the joint radiations of Suns and Planets— 
Actual Life of Heavenly Bodies—Functions of envir¬ 
onment—Free Will not in Planets or Suns, but in 
Man—New vision of Intelligence and Wisdom— 
—Sources of force and motion—The new dynamics. 


WE now enter upon a more advanced and higher 
method of thinking, for which it is believed the foregoing 
rather heterogeneous classification and treatment of sub¬ 
jects have prepared us. The author, ,by this volume, ap¬ 
peals to the average man and woman, rather than to the 
scientific specialist. That has been done in work-a-day 
methods of thinking, so to speak. From this point, the 
scientific man—the man of modern science—will be more 
at home in our companionship. 


HUMAN VOLITION is the result of an act or exer¬ 
cise of choosing or willing; a state of choice. It is an 
elective preference of choice functioning in desire. That 
definition is pretty much founded on Webster, which 
authority further defines volition as in two classes, to- 
wit: immanent and emanant. The first is when desire 
has become settled in a definite, or fixed choice; the sec¬ 
ond is when there is an expression of that choice in con¬ 
duct or action. On the other hand, science says that the 
will is the power, or faculty of the soul, by which it is 
capable of choosing; the choice made; desire; purpose. 
To will is to exercise an act of volition; to choose. 

In the exercise of this book entitled, “A Profitable 
Discussion,” there is a brief elaboration of the will, or 
volition, which I desire to repeat here in a more extended 
form. As was stated in that connection, there is the 
volition of a single thought, of an idea, of an ideal group, 
and of the whole of Consciousness. Those volitions may 
all be placed under two heads, to-wit: those which are 
fixed, or determined within their respective discrete de¬ 
grees, and those which are expressed in action, or other¬ 
wise. Both are in the fact of process, or propagation. 

An immanent volition propagates to a fixed choice. 

( 524 ) 




NEW TONE METHOD OP THINKING. 


525 


In other words, choice in desire propagates to the volition 
of a fixed purpose. If that purpose is not expressed be¬ 
yond the limits of the twin faculties of desire and choice, 
it is an immanent choice, but if it be propagated to action, 
or conduct, it must, pass through the functions of a great 
number of faculties, and, finally, be discharged by the 
mass tone will into action. That latter is called an ema- 
nant choice. 

Those distinctions are made for the purpose of en¬ 
abling the student to see that the functional degrees of 
expression of an idea, or any faculty of psychological 
consciousness, are not only manifold, but interdependent 
in the order of succession. Choice cannot function, ex¬ 
cept in some degree of desire, and in some measure of 
volition, but the latter may not propagate it, for the 
time being, beyond a fixed purpose in idea, within the 
faculties of desire and choice. Beyond that, there are 
degrees of volition—expression—implicating other facul¬ 
ties, by its new tone radiations, and stirring them to co¬ 
operation functions, in successive order, until the idea 
goes forth in the more complete propagation to conduct 
or action. 

Those observations provide a very satisfactory ex¬ 
planation of psychological processes. One may go even 
behind the volition internal to desire and choice, and in¬ 
quire as to the cause of the new idea thus springing up 
into purpose. That may be in the external suggestion of 
environment, or it may have risen by a method of think¬ 
ing, by which new thoughts and ideas are propagated 
from the potentialities within the heart, but in the latter 
case, there must be appropriated the food from environ¬ 
ment, in order that propagation may function to comple¬ 
tion. 

That is said in an effort to explain more fully how 
it is that new thoughts are born in the heart, where desire 
and choice function. In thinking to the propagation of 
new thoughts and ideas, by the inherent powers of desire, 
by its own internal volition, there is propagation to 
choice, and choice functions in motive. 

Now, the immanent, or emanant, volition of desire 
and choice are both subsequent to the facts of desire and 
choice, the latter, more so. Hence, it would appear that 
some cause other than volition must function to start a 
thinking process. If volition is always after the fact— 
always subsequent to, thinking, how can it become the 
producing cause thereof? That important point must 
be brought clearly to vision. Environment is all in the 
facts of the motor effects—willing effects—of thinking. 


526 


THE NEW IDEA. 


It is both visible and invisible, audible and inaudible. It 
proceeds, item by item, from the psychological organism 
of man, by way of the products of propagation, and re¬ 
turns again to that organism for further functions, either 
in the way of suggestion, for the propagation of new 
thoughts, or as the food to be appropriated from without 
as a flux to process. But it does not return, by its units, 
in the same form tones in which it was discharged. By 
fellowship, the new born units propagated, by thinking, 
within the life, unfold in environment, and thus process 
is made perpetual. We shall examine that fact a little 
later. 

I now ask the student to look at the fact of volition, 
or the human will, from a scientific standpoint, which 
will disclose to us the source of all the force and motion 
there is in our universe. Possibly, this view of the sub¬ 
ject will also enable us to see the vast functional power 
of thoughts and of thinking. I ask you to bring to vision 
the far distant twinkling star, which we are told is the 
sun of a solar system, very much the same as our own. 
Why does that star, and our own sun send forth radia¬ 
tions of heat and light? 

Now, I wish the student to think of an infinitely 
small and invisible thought, functioning in the heart, or 
head of a human, and to bring it to psychological vision 
as in the fact of a sun or star. The only differences be¬ 
tween the single thought and the star, or sun, are as 
to magnitude, or extent of organization, and the fact that 
the former is of cellular composition, while the latter is 
of molecular constitution. I am now correlating a single 
thought, or an idea, with the sun. We may be able to 
assist comprehension in that way. 

The sun is in motion of its own inherent force, and, 
in relativity and interdependence with other planetary 
systems. Its units are oscillating and radiating, and, as 
a result, the whole mass is moving—-in motion—and send¬ 
ing forth a mighty volume of radiations in the fact of 
light and heat in all directions, spherically. If it did not 
radiate, it would not move. The fact that an innumera¬ 
ble number of streams of light and heat radiate from 
every square inch of its vast surface, is in the other fact 
of volition. Those radiations constitute the motor dis¬ 
charge, or effect, of the thinking going forward in the 
sun, by its units, which make up the other fact of its 
unfoldment. 

The motor effects, or radiations of the sun, flow forth 
to the planets belonging to its system, and those planets, 
from those motor effects, begin to unfold also. From a 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


527 


cold, so called, dead state, the planet takes on a garment 
of soil. Prom that soil, vegetation, and, finally, fruits 
arise. Vines and fruits follow in their regular order. 
Thus, as the forms of plant life come forth, cells are 
born, and man is evolved. 

In the first place, the earth, or any other planet, was 
formed, bit by bit, item by item, thought by thought, unit 
by unit, which bits, items, thoughts or units were propa¬ 
gated—radiated—from its sun. Then those things just 
mentioned follow. Now, everything of plant, animal, and 
man formation, did not proceed from the sun. When the 
earth reached a certain stage, it began to help itself— 
began to do something for self. It responded by its own 
thinking, and its radiations fluxed with those from the 
sun, in the fellowship of propagation. It was in that way 
that cellular units came forth, and that the plant and 
animal kingdoms arose. It was by the joint thinking of 
the sun and its child, the planet. Their tones fluxed 
into higher forms of life. First, animal forms, then man 
forms, arose. As we can plainly see, that is all brought 
to pass by the joint thinking of Father Sun and Mother 
Earth. 

The force that produced those wonderful effects was 
the joint volition of the Sun and the Earth. The will of 
the Sun, and the will of the Earth, in the facts of their 
respective motor effects—radiations—join in a transcend¬ 
ent work of propagation to those grand effects which we 
every day behold and admire. Such is the nature and 
effects of the interdependent thinking of suns and plan¬ 
ets throughout the infinitude of universal systems. 

Is it not now plainly seen that one may as properly 
speak of the mass tone will, or volition of the sun and 
the earth, as of a human? There is no difference, in 
Principle, between the two, because Principle is a unit 
and universal, the same in the least as in the greatest 
things. Then, there is the internal volition of the con¬ 
stituents of the sun and the earth, each with its motor 
effects, by way of radiation, which it transmutes into 
the mass tone volition or radiation. Thus, the will of 
any unit, or mass body, whether it be a microcosm, a 
sun, a planet or a man, consists in its expressions—in its 
motor discharge—in its radiations. Those effects are all 
propagated by the thinking of the units, or unit organ¬ 
isms, of such bodies. 

Look upon the forms of life on our earth, in plants, 
animals and men, and say, if you can, that the units, and 
unit organisms, composing the sun and the earth, are 
not all alive, and each in the actuality of conscious wis- 


528 


THE NEW IDEA. 


dom and intelligence! How could such wonderful exhi¬ 
bitions of life proceed from a dead sun and a dead earth ? 
Such a conception cannot be made to fit into the plan of 
life anywhere. It is not in science; not in common sense; 
not in Truth. The sun and the earth, and all the suns 
and all the planets, and everything else under and above 
the suns, are alive, and in consciousness, wisdom and in¬ 
telligence forevermore. 

We must think of the processes of life as in an orbit 
—an orbit of one process, an orbit of several processes, 
or an infinite orbit of all the processes of life. That orbit 
is in this way: desire functions in choice and motive in 
their respective volitions, until the final motor effects are 
delivered into environment. Then those effects return 
to the heart, by their own natures, their own wisdom and 
intelligence, and the same process is gone through again, 
but on a higher scale. Thus, volitional power is perpet¬ 
ual, and perpetually augmenting. Once the circuits are 
started, it is seen that, of their own natures, they are 
perpetual. 

As to the start of life, we have already seen that that 
comes of the primordial unfoldment of Principle, in the 
fact that the cause of the cause, the cause, and the effect, 
all dwell together in one distinctly, and are it. 
That fact called Unity is behind and above life—is the 
Source of life—and is incomprehensible. In present de¬ 
grees of wisdom and intelligence, man must always meet 
with the incomprehensible, but he continuously invades 
that, with conquest after conquest, and will do so, until 
he resolves his life to the fact of the Principle of our 
Universe, which is the embodiment of Power. Love and 
Truth. 

We can plainly bring to vision all the processes— 
augmenting processes—of power, force or energy, in man, 
and in our world generally, but we cannot, as yet, com¬ 
prehend the first cause, or the ultimate source of either. 
We will know that source when we have unfolded into, 
and become it. 

The source and function of motive have not yet been 
fully elaborated. Motive is that which moves. It is not 
merely the fact of motion, but the fact that keeps motion 
going. It is the perpetuity of motion, and, also, that 
energy which resolves motion to continuously rising func¬ 
tions. There are, therefore, the functions of motion—the 
motives of motions. Those are in the fact of the per¬ 
petual refunetionings, of discharged new born thoughts, 
by which they return to the human heart for re-birth to 
higher powers, thus entering into, returning from, and 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


529 


re-entering the world of environment, and the human 
heart alternately, in the perpetual motion of propagation 
and progress. 

Thus, motive incites to action and to motion—to con¬ 
duct, which is in the fact of that which is partly un¬ 
folded. Motive, therefore, determines choice, fixes the 
mold and character of choice, by internal volition. 

We must now bring to vision the one great difference 
between planetary and human volition. Planetary voli¬ 
tion is without freedom—not in the fact of the freedom 
of choice. The free will, which is exercised in choice 
only, as already explained elsewhere in this volume, is 
not concomitant with atomic, and molecular thinking, or 
unfoldment. That rises from the embryos of cellular 
plasm. It is in the dawn of that which is generally called 
the psychological. 

Hence, it is that the will of the earth, or any planet, 
or sun, is always righteous. It always functions in right¬ 
eousness. In its units, intelligence predominates—rules. 
By the internal volition of its units, intelligence is never 
disputed by wisdom. Intelligence is always right to the 
extent of its degree of unfoldment. Each degree of intel¬ 
ligence is in the fact of the straight, or right, line. Each 
degree of intelligence unfolds in the fact, of the extension 
of that line. Hence, the earth, or any other planet, or 
heavenly body, cannot, go wrong. It is always in the fact 
of righteousness, and has, therefore, no need of the func¬ 
tions of choice between right and wrong, because it can 
know no wrong, and is, therefore, never required to 
choose. The earth, or a sideral body of any magnitude 
or condition, is without the function of choice. 

It is in volition—in the fact of the will—by its units 
and mass tone, but never in desire or in choice. It can¬ 
not function in desire, because its unit organisms are in 
the perfect embrace of the Two Principles, which is the 
fact of Love, whereas divided male and female cellular 
forms of life are in the functions of desire, choice and 
motive. We can see that humans, which are in the facts 
of cellular or divided male and female forms, function by 
degrees of intelligence and wisdom, and that the former 
degrees are spiritual, as to man’s duality. Those degrees 
are always in righteousness, and never in error, but they 
are not right to the full extent of their possibilities, 
except by further unfoldment. They are simply right to 
the extent of the degrees of their unfoldment, and that 
fact will be concomitant to every step of their rise. 

Degrees of wisdom, which are celestial, and always 
in motive, in cellular forms of life, such as animals and 


530 


THE NEW IDEA. 


men, do not function in atomic-molecular bodies. They 
belong to the realms of cellular life, wherein we see de¬ 
sire, choice and motive rising in its plasm. Those are 
higher functions—functions in wisdom. There is a re¬ 
markable conception in which the functions of wisdom, 
appear to transcend those of intelligence. The faculties 
of desire, choice and motive are inherent in degrees of 
wisdom. The freedom of choice is in wisdom, because 
in the exercise of that function, we see the personality of 
the human form of life unfolding into self-consciousness 
—self-functions—the exercise of self-powers by self, 
which is resolved to self-life unfoldment by self. All that 
is wherein wisdom functions in methods of thinking in 
the plan of Principle, by which the inner tones of the 
units of life are unfolded into the higher mass tone. 

I turn once more to the interdependent thinking of 
suns and planets, and other heavenly bodies. That is for 
the purpose of further considering the source of force 
and motion, and, briefly, the whole problem of dynamics. 
The source of, all dynamics, both kinematic and kinetic, 
or static, is in the fact of volition, or the will. All voli¬ 
tional forces, or energies, in these sub-physical spheres, 
rise, or proceed from the compressing functions of phys¬ 
ical subvestures. The extraordinary energies of the Suns 
of our universe proceed in that way. The source of all 
physical energy is in the compressing functions of tone 
vestures. 

Let us go back to the fact of our own primordial 
Principle—the unit Principle of our own universe. We 
say, first, that it is in the fact of the oscillations of the 
Two Principles, into which it divided by propagation. By 
those oscillations, a primal vesture in Truth was propa¬ 
gated, which functioned to restrain, or compress, the 
tone oscillations of the Two Principles, called Power and 
Love, or Male and Female. The six etheric tone vestures 
which come forth as envelopes, over and round that, still 
further compressed the now multitudinous oscillations 
of all the internal rates of the overfolding vestures. 
Finally, the greater compression came in the outmost sub¬ 
physical vestures. We can see that fact in the phenom¬ 
ena that the earth, by “consolidation,” decreased its di¬ 
ameter from about 45,000,000 to 8,000 miles. That vest¬ 
ure compression of the oscillations, or tones, of Principle, 
in substance units, worked out—produced—propagated— 
vast energies, or forces ,in our earth. The outmost ex¬ 
pressions—motor effects—of those forces reach man in 
the form and fact of physical magnetism, which propa¬ 
gates to electricity, and all other forms of energy in our 




NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


531 


world. Of course, physical full tone magnetism is not 
the ultimate source of power, of force. That ultimate, so 
far as our powers of apprehension go, is in the compressed 
oscillations of the Two Principles which function as a 
substare to each unit of substance life. That form of 
energy, which is concomitant to heat, rises in the same 
way. Heat and power, both propagate from the compres¬ 
sion of unit tones. 

By natural processes, the vesture compression of the 
unit organisms composing a sun, is vastly greater than 
that concomitant to those of a planet, hence the greater 
heat and energy of those central bodies. Prom what al¬ 
ready has been said, it is plain that all such heat, energy, 
and force, are in the fact of volition, or the will. I pre¬ 
fer to apply the former word, volition, to the internal 
forces of units, and unit organisms, and that term, the 
will, to the mass tone forces of the whole, as expressed 
by the mass body. Let volition stand for the energies 
immediately resultant from internal, or unit processes, 
and the will represent external mass tone expressions of 
power and force. 

The orbital principle of motion, or energy, or force, 
or power, is wherein we see that no unit, or mass body 
of life—form of life—is depleted by radiations, or the 
expressions of its volition, in so called motor effects, and 
wherein we also see the rise of such forms of life by the 
propagation of thinking. That already has been ex¬ 
plained by the nature of those items discharged from a 
mass body, by the will, into environment, to return to the 
life organization, for further and higher functions, thus 
making the rising rounds of that orbit of spiral effect. 
That is the orbital nature of methods of thinking in the 
plan of Principle. 

We are now, I should say, in a very satisfactory state 
of psychological tone to take up the work of thinking 

in desire, choice and motive. 


EXERCISE XCIV. 


DESIRE, CHOICE AND MOTIVE. • 

Origin of those Faculties—Their functions in relativity 
and Interdependence—How all other faculties pro¬ 
ceeded from the functions of desire, choice and motive 
—Motive is cause—Functions of degrees of Intelli¬ 
gence and Wisdom—Self control is by motive. 


WE should now be able to see just how desire, choice 
and motive rise into the status of faculty functions, and 
function in volition and in the mass tone will. Desire is 
a new faculty, born into life with the evolution of cellu¬ 
lar plasm. It could not have unfolded into life, except 
by the separation of the Two Principles, which had hith¬ 
erto prevailed in perfect embrace, and which still so 
obtain, in all prior units and organisms. By that method 
of propagation, by which the primal ovum cell was di¬ 
vided, and male and female cells come forth, the faculty 
of desire rose in both. That was the origin of that fac¬ 
ulty. 

As desire began to function, it immediately propa¬ 
gated to choice. It found in the primal unfoldment of 
cellular life the dawn of wisdom. Desire functioned to 
its own unfoldment in degrees of wisdom, which were 
supplemented by tones of intelligence, hence choice of 
desires came forth, because desire very soon became man¬ 
ifold in wisdom. Besides, by the interjection of intelli¬ 
gence, there rose the right and the wrong of things—of 
processes. In other words, thinking could be achieved 
in more than one way—in more than one method. While 
intelligence completely dominated in the prior forms of 
life, wisdom now intervened with its genius, providing 
more than one method for the unfoldment of the poten¬ 
tialities of Principle. 

It was in that way that desire found it possible to 
function in a choice of ideas. The freedom of volition 
rose at that very point of evolution. It was wherein de¬ 
sire became functional in chosing between two or more 
methods of unfoldment. Hence, choice is subsequent to 
desire. It is an extension of desire in wisdom, and that 
extension evolved to the unfoldment of a new dual faculty 
—dual because of its spiritual and celestial triads. The 
first was right always. The second had the choice of 
being right, or wrong, in wisdom. 

( 532 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


538 


It is quite easy to see, from what already has been 
said, how necessity unfolded, and how all the other fac¬ 
ulties followed, in their regular order. The faculty func¬ 
tions which unfolded subsequent to desire and choice, 
were all in necessity, in order that choice might function 
in wisdom. It is seen that choice involves reason, judg¬ 
ment, decision, resolution, deliberation, etc., etc., together 
with all the moral faculties, and the mass tone of that 
household in the fact of conscience. The necessities of 
choice, in desire, gave rise and unfoldment to all the other 
faculties of consciousness. They followed in order that 
desire might function in choice, and, therefore, in wisdom. 
How plain it all is, after all. The study of psychology, 
experimentally, is not only full of riches, but replete with 
the grandeur of simplicity. There is nothing very com¬ 
plex, or puzzling, about it, when one approaches its prob¬ 
lems in degrees of wisdom and intelligence. 

The psychological organism rose from the birth and 
association of new thoughts. That is the foundation of 
the New Thought Idea, and of all psychological unfold¬ 
ment. The rising form of life propagated such new 
thoughts, as its limited stock of wisdom and intelligence 
could supply, in desire, and. in unfolding choice, and 
those new thoughts associated themselves together, in 
the science of apperception, to form faculty functions. 
At first, those functions were crude—something like the 
early portions of this volume, with which we began this 
transcendent study—but, by the functions of the orbital 
plan of Principle, volition and the will wrought them 
into rising degrees of Harmony. 

Those primal faculties unfolded into higher powers 
by the renewal of propagation. Those rose by the prop¬ 
agation of new thoughts, and by the association of those 
thoughts into ideas, ideal groups, and, later, into kindred, 
or household groups; and, they may and should continue 
to rise and unfold into higher powers and functions, by 
Ihinking, day by day. That rise is by the functions of 
propagation—thinking—in the orbital plan already ex¬ 
plained, by which new thoughts go forth from the birth 
chambers of the heart, through the force of volition and 
the will, to function in environment, where they are 
raised higher; and, from which latter, they return to the 
heart in higher form, to be propagated still higher, and 
thereby to unfold the faculties of the psychological organ¬ 
ism to greater powers. 

In that orbital plan of thinking, the thoughts and 
ideas, which compose the psychological organism, do 
not depart from it. They are renewed and unfolded by 


534 


THE NEW IDEA. 


such processes, just as environment is renewed and un¬ 
folded by them. That is the transcendent plan of life. 
It is all in the grand science and plan of faculty and 
environment building from the dawn of desire, upward, 
forevermore. That is life unfoldment, within which is 
self-life unfoldment, by self. 

It is now quite plain, from the foregoing elabora¬ 
tions, how* it is that the forms of life rise, expand and 
unfold, by the appropriation of the life without, and 
fluxing it with the life within, in propagation. Those 
processes have now become familiar. We are next to 
consider methods for the control of those processes for 
the benefit of self and the neighbor. 

Controlling is restraining, or regulating influences, or 
actions. Control is regulation. To exercise control is to 
function in motive. Now, let us see about that latter. 
Motive is that which incites to action, or determines the 
tone of choice. It propagates to an idea, which controls 
another idea, inhibiting, or molding it in choice. Motive 
is more than all that; it is Principle, in that it is cause. 
It functions in the power of control, by which it will 
resolve, or change, the form tones of an idea, giving to 
it a different purpose than that in which it may have 
originally come forth. Motive is cause, in the fact that 
it has the power to change the nature of ideas. That is 
a type of control, or a method of cause which is most 
significant. There may have been propagated ideas, filled 
with purposes of doing this or that, but when subjected 
to motive, the purpose of those ideas change, and the 
ideas are carried out on different lines, or altogether re¬ 
strained from further proceeding in volition. 

Hence, one should seek to control his entire psycho¬ 
logical organism by motive. Now, by thinking, in reason 
and judgment, or deliberating in choice, which is the 
same thing, one may correct any purpose, in error, by 
the application of motive. One has only to examine his 
state of consciousness, by deliberation, in order to dis¬ 
cover the bent of volition. If that, upon deliberation, be 
found to be in an unwise direction, the processes may 
be changed, or reversed, by motive. It is very easy to 
raise motive in tune with righteousness. That is done 
by thinking in a method calculated to purify the heart. 

One has collective powers, by which he may pro¬ 
ceed to think to such ideals of purity as will unfold, and 
turn loose, the highest feelings and emotions in the heart. 
With the start of that work, motive is raised, and it rises 
higher and higher, as such thinking is persisted in. In 
that way, motive functions as a right cause. It is seen 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


535 


that motive is cause, and that it will always be pure and 
righteous in the measure in which the heart is pure. That 
fact applies alike to desire, choice and motive, but desire 
and choice, by themselves, cannot propagate to effects. 
Motive must function; and, as already stated, the char¬ 
acter of motive determines the character of the effects of 
desire and choice. 

If one would unfold, by thinking, to higher powers, 
great peace and harmony, and, therefore, into more per¬ 
fect health, all that is required is to practice, in thinking, 
to the propagation of heart purity, and motive will re¬ 
spond in the functions of cause, not only to produce 
effects, but to shape those effects in harmony with the 
right. It is in that way that error is abolished, and that 
man unfolds into higher summits of knowledge. 

It will be seen that the most exhaustive system of 
psychology that can be promulgated resolves itself to 
experimental heart purity—to the purification of the 
fountain of life. Without that, psychological processes 
will be in vain. When man is exhorted to exercise his 
will powers in practically forcing his psychological or¬ 
ganism to think in a work of heart purity, the orbital 
plan of thinking is held in thought, by which there is 
achieved continuous renewal of every faculty center. The 
will works on the plan of an orbit, both supplying, in 
appropriation, of the food without, and propagating to 
renewal and unfoldment within. Surely those processes 
are made plain. They are in the plan of life, which is the 
only science there is. 


EXERCISE XCV. 


SADNESS AND SORROW. 

Feelings and Emotions of grief, sorrow, sadness and de¬ 
spair are functional degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, working life unfoldment into joy and gladness 
—Repentance resolved to choosing in motive. 


WE NOW come to consider one of the most difficult 
of psychological problems. It is the most difficult, be¬ 
cause it is largely confined to feelings and emotions. In 
the realm of feelings and emotions, we are lost in a maze 
of thinking, wherein the higher sentient and spiritual 
functions flux and blend in waves of relativity and inter¬ 
dependence which we cannot accurately define and clas¬ 
sify. We can only bring them to conform to the plan of 
Principle, and in that way, we come to see their natures. 

I refer to those feelings and emotions which we call 
grief, sadness, sorrow and despair. Sadness and sorrow 
are the opposites of joy and gladness. I have, all through 
this volume, impressed upon the student that it is his or 
her privilege to propagate floods of joy and gladness, 
so that they will continuously rise from the heart. But, 
as I say, there are periods and circumstances in which 
grief, sadness and sorrow will flow. Those conditions 
and experiences are peculiar to physical subvesture tones, 
and they come and go like the alternations of light and 
shadow. They are the higher and finer degrees of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence, which are functional to the unfold¬ 
ment of man. They are potential to life unfoldment. 

In order to profitably consider the origin and func¬ 
tions of grief, sadness, sorrow and despair, we must bring 
to vision the fact that the whole phychological organism 
of man is within the heart. It functions as the fact of 
the brain, but its seat is the human heart. It is self- 
evident that the unfoldment of the heart to higher de¬ 
grees of purity, day by day, is the only preventive to the 
rise of grief, sadness, sorrow and despair. I have given 
that subject long and patient thinking, by the best meth¬ 
ods I am able to employ, and I am irrevocably settled, as 
the result of such thinking, in the conclusion that all 
psychological pain arises from a degree of disorganiza¬ 
tion and degeneration of the moral faculties, which are 
grouped in the household of conscience. May I not say, 
in truth, that all grief, sadness, and sorrow, and despair, 

( 536 ) 





NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


537 


arise from the causes just stated, or from a neglect to 
unfold the moral faculties, by thinking to the purifica¬ 
tion of the heart? The student will remember the exer¬ 
cises of this volume, implicating degeneracy of the moral 
faculties, by which a human declines to such a degree, 
that his life organization goes back to the next pre¬ 
human man estate. It has been explained, I say, that 
one, by thinking in error, and in evil, and in ideals of 
vice, to the degeneration of his moral faculties, which is 
in the science of “sin,” goes downward and backward, 
instead of unfolding forward and upward. That is the 
source of all sorrow. 

As the transcendent units of life, which have been 
associated in the science of apperception, to build the 
moral faculties, are dispersed by thinking to degenera¬ 
tion, they produce in the heart, feelings and emotions of 
grief, sadness, sorrow, and despair. Those terrible con¬ 
sequences are in the motor effects of disorganization and 
degeneration. I am well aware that there are those who 
may object to that proposition. They will say that we 
have sorrow, and grief, and sadness, in the functional 
facts of bereavement. When one near and dear to the 
human heart passes from this visible world to the invis¬ 
ible spheres, there are consequent feelings and emotions 
of grief and sorrow. Surely, you say, that such feelings 
and emotions are not evidences of moral disorganization ? 
On the contrary, you say that they are in the functions 
of those higher sympathies inherent in heart emotions. I 
am quite ready to distinguish between the functions of 
sorrow propagated in the latter way, and those of grief 
and sadness propagated by thinking in evil; and yet, I 
am bound to declare that the brooding over any sorrow, 
or any grief, no matter from whence it springs, when it 
is permitted to propagate into despair, will work out 
the degeneration of the moral faculties, to their weakness, 
in such a degree as to destroy the higher functions of 
life. In other words, there are processes of thinking- 
processes of emotional thinking—other than those in evil 
and vice, which can destroy the power of moral functions. 
Those other methods, here spoken of, are in the facts of 
thinking persistently, or carelessly, or irresolutely, in 
grief and sorrow. 

One must, in some way, come to see the sources and 
functions of grief, sadness, sorrow and despair, and they 
must bring them into vision as potential degree of wis¬ 
dom and intelligence for life unfoldment. In this way, 
and by such methods of thinking, those hurtful feelings 
and emotions will be dispelled, and the whole life organ- 


538 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ization will rise out of them into returning joy and 
gladness. 

In the foregoing observations, I have laid this whole 
proposition before the student in precisely the way I 
have desired, and in that way, I trust, I have formulated 
a very effective method of thinking for self-life unfold- 
ment, That method of thinking which will dispel feel¬ 
ings and emotions of grief, sadness, sorrow and despair, 
is one far the most functional for the unfoldment of 
power, peace and happiness that anyone can engage in. 
It is error to indulge feelings and emotions of grief and 
sorrow. Such indulgences are destructive of the powers 
of one’s life, and, therefore, work out a measure of moral 
weakness and consequent disorganization. No matter 
what the source of the sorrow may be, or how keenly it 
may function, it is the duty of the Thinker to find, or 
to bring to vision the functional degrees of its wisdom. 
The student may rest assured that the sorrow, no matter 
what it is, is functioning in wisdom. It is for the good 
of him or her who suffers from it, and the suffering will 
disappear, in the exact measure by which one realizes 
the mission of that sorrow. The functions of grief and 
sorrow, when brought under the steady light of wisdom 
and intelligence, are resolved to those forces which un¬ 
fold one’s life and which resolve it to experiences of joy 
and gladness. The careful Thinker will understand me 
when I say there is the joy of sorrow and the gladness 
of sadness. Those conditions arise at that point where 
the sorrow and the sadness are resolved, by thinking to 
propagation, into joy and gladness, to the turning point 
in evolution, where, by thinking, the functions of sor¬ 
row and sadness propagate to joy and gladness. 

It is very plain that it is not in the plan of life that 
one should indulge sorrow over the deeds of others, or of 
our ancestors, no matter how near or remote, beyond 
that point wherein we have come to comprehend their 
functions. That last idea reaches out to the whole ques¬ 
tion of what is usually called salvation by repentance and 
faith, in what has been achieved for man in the propaga¬ 
tion of the plan of life. It is recorded in the New Testa¬ 
ment that, “Two men went up into the temple to pray; 
the one a Pharisee and the other a Publican. The Phari¬ 
see stood and prayed thus with himself, Lord, I thank 
Thee that I am not as other men are, extortioners, unjust, 
adulterers, or even as this Publican. I fast twice in a 
week. I give tithes of all I possess. And the Publican, 
standing far off, did not lift so much as his eyes unto 
heaven, hut smote upon liis breast, saying, God, be mer- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


539 


ciful to me, a sinner. I tell you, this man went down 
to his house, justified, rather than the other; for every¬ 
one that exalteth himself shall be abased; and he that 
humbleth himself shall be exalted.” 

It must be remembered, in the first place, that the 
Master, in uttering those words, was speaking by par¬ 
ables; and yet that parable of the Pharisee and the Pub¬ 
lican may be accepted in its literal meaning. We have 
nothing whatever to do with the Pharisee, in this con¬ 
nection, because, he was not in sorrow. We have to do 
with the Publican, because he was in sorrow. He real¬ 
ized that he was a sinner, and his prayer was the expres¬ 
sion of repentance. So far as he was able to do so, and 
to the extent of his light and knowledge, he realized that 
he had not only transgressed the law, but that, by his 
methods of thinking, he had worked out a disorganiza¬ 
tion, and a measure of degeneration, of his moral fac¬ 
ulties. Such a realization is the proper point at which 
a man or a woman should exercise repentance in sorrow, 
until repentance and sorrow function to a change of the 
methods of thinking. Just as soon as the functions of 
that sorrow and repentance work out a change in the 
methods of thinking of the modern Publican, he discov¬ 
ers, welling up within his life, the germinating forces 
of joy and gladness. Thus the functions of sorrow and 
sadness, consequent upon such deliberations, as enables 
a man to realize the source of that sorrow, and further, 
qualifying him to function therein to life unfoldment, 
he turns away from its source, or cause, and reaches 
out to a new source, or cause, which transforms his sor¬ 
row and sadness into joy and gladness. 

All that sorrow rises from wrong thinking, by think¬ 
ing in error. One may disorganize and degenerate his 
moral faculties, and remain unconscious of the same, 
until he is awakened by sorrow and sadness, which func¬ 
tion to that awakening; and, into his turning away from 
those methods of thinking which produce that sorrow 
and sadness, and to the turning toward the better sources 
of life. By the latter act, or method of thinkiug, there 
is a renewal, or unfoldment, of the moral faculties, into 
greater powers and functions, and sorrow, through re¬ 
pentance, which is a turning, or choosing, of the right 
as against the wrong, which is the source, functions to 
effects in joy and gladness. 

Thus it is seen that all sorrow, sadness, or grief 
function to the turning away from the sources of such 
afflictions, feelings, and emotions, by which they are 
resolved to feelings and emotions of joy and gladness. 


540 


THE NEW IDEA. 


We are, therefore, resolved back to the doctrines upon 
which I have firmly stood through this whole volume, 
to-wit: That all afflictions, no matter of what class— 
no matter whether they consist in feelings or emotions 
arising from extraneous circumstances, or from sickness, 
accidents, or other afflictions—are in functional degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, which work out life unfold- 
ment. The quicker a man or a woman comes into a 
knowledge of the purposes hidden in afflictions, accord¬ 
ing to the plan of life, as it is in Principle, the sooner 
the sorrows resultant therefrom will be resolved to the 
joys of life. In other words, emotions of sorrow and 
sadness are functional degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence. When those functions work out to repentance, 
they propagate to a turning away from the sources from 
which sorrow arose. The word repentance, in this con¬ 
nection, means turning, or a change, in the course of 
thinking, or action. 

Thus, by a discontinuance of wrong thinking, or think¬ 
ing in error, will be entering upon a method of thinking 
in the plan of life, by which all our griefs and sorrows 
and sadnesses will be changed into unfolded joy and 
gladness. Those processes consist in a practical use of 
the functions of choice, in desire and motive, by which 
there is life unfoldment, rather than the former disor¬ 
ganization and degeneration. The plan of life, after all, 
is very simple. It is all resolved to the transcendent 
orbital plan of Principle. 


EXERCISE XCVI. 


GENERATIONS OF PRINCIPLE. 

An exercise for expansion as well as rise—Symbolism of 
the Twelve, the one hundred and forty-four thousand, 
etc.—The coming- together in Harmony of Universal 
systems—Conceptions of immensity—Man must ex¬ 
pand as well as rise, psychologically. 


IT WILL assist us in comprehending the great fact of 
life unfoldment, if we consider the subject from the stand¬ 
point of the Generations of Principle. The first generation 
of Principle came forth from the Ultimate Supreme One, 
into the twelve Ultimate Supreme Principles. By that 
propagation the Ultimate Supreme Being was divided into 
Twelve Emanations, or Principles, which came forth, in 
Extension, to constitute the life of the Ultimate Supreme 
archetypal heaven. Of course the Ultimate Supreme One 
was not, in any way, impaired or depleted by that propa¬ 
gation. 

The Twelve Ultimate Supreme Principles thus propa¬ 
gated to archetypal life, or ultimate primordial life, may 
be regarded as each in a transcendent Individual Form— 
undivided as to the potentialities of such form, which are 
infinite, to the extent of the full requirements of the Su¬ 
preme universal systems which were propagated from 
them. Thus the Twelve are the first generation of Prin¬ 
ciple. From each of those ultimates, twelve other Prin¬ 
ciples, which I call the one hundred and forty-four Su¬ 
preme Principles were propagated. Those latter are in the 
fact of the second generation of Principle. Just as the 
Twelve differ from each other, so also do the one hundred 
and forty-four differ from each other. 

Thus we have twelve Ultimate Supreme Universal Sys¬ 
tems, and one hundred and forty-four Supreme Universal 
Systems, proceeding from the Twelve. The latter were di¬ 
vided each, respectively, into a thousand, so that the uni¬ 
versal system to which ours belongs contains 144,000 uni¬ 
versal systems. The great universal system of which our 
universe belongs is in the third generation of Principle. 
Our own universe is propagated from one of the 144,000, 
and is called the Principle of Propagation. 

As human thinking cannot, at present, extend beyond 
the functions of our own Principle—beyond the potentiali¬ 
ties of the Principle of Propagation—we cannot compre¬ 
hend the nature of life in other and higher universal sys- 
(541) 



542 


THE NEW IDEA. 


terns of creation. It will be noted that Power, Love and 
Truth, and, therefore, all forms of life within our universe, 
are in the fourth generation of Principle, counting from 
the ultimate Extreme Twelve. The divisions of the Prin¬ 
ciple of propagation, which is our own Father-Mother 
Principle, within our own universe may be held in thought 
as in a new, or more local series of generations. They have 
to do with the processes of life unfoldment within our own 
universe. 

In all generations of our race which have risen to a 
partial knowledge of Principle, it has been defined, or per¬ 
sonified, as God. Even our modern Theologians, and 
Thinkers in all departments of Psychology and Christian 
Science hold Primordial Principle as one with God. From 
all that has been said up to this place in this volume, it is 
seen that such is not a vision of the facts of the universe, in 
Truth. I have said, at the very beginning of this volume, 
that Principle is subsequent to God, and from what is said 
in this exercise, and in a previous one on the “Ultimate 
Supreme,” it is brought to psychological vision, in strong 
outlines, that the Primordial Principle of our universe is 
in the third or fourth generation from the Ultimate Pri¬ 
mordial Principle, in line of propagation. 

It would be somewhat confusing to consider our own 
Primordial Principle as in the fact of God. Such an idea 
would give us 144,000 Gods, instead of the 144 000 Prin¬ 
ciples, from which proceeded the 144,000 universal sys¬ 
tems of the infinite universe, and of which our universe is 
a constituent. An extension of the same idea would give 
us 144 Gods, representing the 144 Supreme Primordial Prin¬ 
ciples, from which the 144 Supreme Universal Systems 
proceeded. A still further extension of that idea would 
give us twelve Ultimate Supreme Gods, representing the 
twelve Ultimate Supreme Universal Systems of infinitude, 
which latter, of course, include all the universal systems 
of immensity, together with their respective solar systems. 
Then human ideas would have to conceive the consolida¬ 
tion of the Ultimate Supreme Twelve, into One Ultimate 
Supreme God. That would give us a plurality of Gods, 
which, of course, is unthinkable. 

Now, let me say that the human idea of the plurality 
of Gods arose from the faets partly elaborated in this 
exercise. It must be understood that the entire volume 
of symbolism of all the civilizations of mankind repre¬ 
sent real facts of life. They are not created in fancy, or 
by imagination. The symbolism of the ancients repre¬ 
sent real facts, and the work of our generation, and those 
which will succeed us, is to interpret that whole wonderful 
collection of symbols, under the steady and increasing' 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


543 


light of science. Once more, I remind the student that 
the study of symbolism is one of the most wonderful and 
fruitful, within all the range of methods of thinking pos¬ 
sible to humans. It is endless, and when one has entered 
into it sufficiently to be able to manipulate it’s wonder¬ 
ful forces, all things become plain. 

For example the Bible tells us of the 144,000 who 
shall be living upon this earth in perpetual youth and 
health, and in the. actualities of joys immortal, in con¬ 
nection with certain events which will terminate our 
present perceptions of time. It is plain that the Revel- 
ater brought to vision the 144,000 Principles, each dif¬ 
ferent from the other, all of which proceeded in the line 
of propagation, from the Twelve Ultimate Supreme Prin¬ 
ciples. From this we come to see the significance of the 
twelve candle-sticks; and, thinking on these lines, will 
lead into a wide vision of similar symbolism. 

We are not yet ready to consider the nature of life 
unfoldment in its wider sweep, by which all things be¬ 
come one; and when we are we will more fully understand 
the symbol of the 144,000 who may be living in the tri¬ 
umvir heavens of the great universal system, which was 
propagated by the 144 Supreme Primordial Principles. 

To make these things a little plainer, let me call at¬ 
tention to the fact that the unfoldment of the Twelve 
Ultimate Supreme Primordial Principles was, first, by way 
of extension, or a division, into the fact of variety. That 
is sometimes called devolution. Secondly, unfoldment is 
in the fact of evolution, by which there is a gathering 
together, by propagation, into Harmony, of all that in¬ 
finite variety. Hence it is that within the unutterable 
Body of Ultimate Harmony there will dwell, in the fact 
of Ultimate and Immortal Individuality, every Princi¬ 
ple wrought by devolution throughout immensity. That 
gives some faint idea of the rising sweep of Ultimate 
Harmony. 

In the evolution of life, by which variety is wrought 
into Harmony, there is the coming together of life units, 
by propagation, as in a man, or a planet; and also, the 
coming together, in the same way, of universal systems. 
Hence, at the point of unfoldment by evolution, wherein 
the 144,000 universal systems make one, there will be 
144,000 separate and distinct Harmony creatures, as the 
product of unfoldment, who will themselves unite into 
the greater Bodily Harmony of the 144 Supreme Primor¬ 
dial Principles. Thus it is seen that all the forms of life 
propagated into variety are maintained by unfoldment 
into the greater fact of Harmony. 


544 


THE NEW IDEA. 


If the foregoing observations accomplish nothing else, 
they will bring to our vision the wonderful sources of the 
symbolism of the ancients, and of that of our day. A 
thousand years hence, the teachings of today will be re¬ 
garded as somewhat in the nature of crude symbolism. 
It is quite impossible that students of life unfoldment in 
our day should be able to grasp the full sweep and sig¬ 
nificance of symbolism. It may be said that, in a wide 
sense, the spinning and weaving, and the warp and woof, 
of psychological subvesture degrees of wisdom and in¬ 
telligence, in the tones of which humans unfold, are all 
in the actualities of propagated symbolism. 

But we must also come to see that symbolism un¬ 
folds from potentialities into rising degrees of reality. 
There is, in a sense, the reality of symbolism. Symbols 
are real in the sense of their potentialities for life un¬ 
foldment. They themselves unfold into realities. In that 
sense man is a symbol unfolding into degrees of reality. 

I do not wish to pursue this thinking exercise until 
we are led into a maze of ideas, wherein classification is 
not possible. For that reason we have probably proceed¬ 
ed far enough on these lines. The central idea is to reach 
out by way of developing and strengthening our psycho¬ 
logical organisms, by attempts to grasp the wider sweep 
of evolution. The foregoing are simply outlines of the 
infinite plan of life as they sometimes rise out of our 
methods of thinking, and while we are cautioned not to 
pursue them too far, we are, on the other hand, to en¬ 
courage them sufficiently to unfold in expansion, as well 
as in rise. There is the rising into expanding processes 
of evolution. We should seek to expand as well as to 
rise. There is an element of selfishness in the rise, impli¬ 
cating the, I AM; and there is a grand element of Broth¬ 
erhood in expansion which makes man akin to all 
things of the infinite, ultimate universe of life. 

At the last analysis, all the immensity of universal 
systems spoken of in this thinking exercise is potentially 
in any one human heart. 


EXERCISE XCVII. 


A FLAME OF LIGHT. 

Desire, choice and motive function to both the organiza¬ 
tion and disorganization of the psychological organ¬ 
ism—Death the result of false teachings—The Hid¬ 
den Man of the Heart—A human power that is higher 
than the will—How to function in that power to 
the regeneration and resurrection of the new man. 


WE must bring the psychological organism of con¬ 
sciousness to vision once more, in order to study the act¬ 
ual processes by which faculties are organized and dis¬ 
organized, in the exercise of desire in choice and motive. 
Strange as it may seem, the very same functions of life 
produce both organization and disorganization. We have 
already seen how desire functioned, as a base of psycho¬ 
logical operations, to propagate choice and motive, and 
all the other faculty functions. We may, therefore, easily 
bring to vision those processes by which desire, choice 
and motive,, function to the degeneration of the invisible 
life organization, and the visible physiological organiza¬ 
tion, also. 

Desire, choice and motive may build up, or they may 
destroy—they may organize or they may disorganize. 
They join in the function of life building, or in that of 
life destruction. They may be controlled to either proc¬ 
ess, just as one, in processes of volition, proceeds to 
purify, or to degenerate, the heart. The orbital proc¬ 
esses of volition and the will, in the plan of Principle 
are at the command df Principle itself. A human may 
function in Principle, by his inherent powers of Principle, 
which powers are behind and above volition. In other 
words, man may control volition and the will, and through 
those functions control his thoughts and ideas, also, by 
the direct functions of Principle itself. 

That is another new idea. Why should man not as 
readily control his will, as his thoughts and ideas, by 
which volition and the will are themselves propagated? 
It is noted here that I again distinguish between volition 
and the will, holding to the view that volition is the 
motor expression of the internal faculties of conscious¬ 
ness, while the will is the mass tone motor effects of the 
whole psvcliological organism. 

It is Principle which itself dwells in man, by mass 

(545) 



546 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tone, constituting the I AM of a personal form of life 
such as a man, or a woman. Let us now think for a 
few minutes from the standpoint of the I Am —from the 
standpoint of the God, or mass tone Principle within, and 
it will come to clear vision that man is in actual posses¬ 
sion of a functional power, by which he may control every 
other fact and function of his life, including thoughts, 
ideas, faculty functions, volition and the will. That is 
our final summit in these outline psychological exercises. 

It is noted that from the start up to this point, I 
have continuously kept ideas of Principle before the mind 
of the student. In all that I have been careful not to 
disclose the direct function of Principle, or try to do so, 
until due preparation was made so that would be effect¬ 
ively done. I have repeatedly said that Principle was the 
same in the least as in the greatest things—the same func¬ 
tionally, in men, as in the highest creatures of the infinite 
universe. Possibly that has not been fully understood. 
Some of the rather vague observations in the next pre¬ 
ceding exercise, concerning the generations of Principle, 
were made in an expanding plan, in the hope of making 
that fact more perfectly understood. I trust it lias not 
altogether failed in that respect. 

Each spark of the Ultimate Supreme, I Am, is the 
same, functionally, in the fourth, fifth, or hundredth, or 
thousandth generation, as in the first. Principle, there¬ 
fore, is that spark of Ultyjiate Supreme Deity in man, 
by which he is Almighty, to the extent in which he be¬ 
comes trained to function therein. It is the Ultimate Su¬ 
preme Source within as well as without. It is that soul 
of the human form of life, from which thoughts and voli¬ 
tions flow. 

The student will say that this is indeed a most 
peculiar volume, and its author a most unique thinker. 
A while ago I was placing the Ultimate Supreme God at 
an infinite distance from man, in order to satisfy ideas 
of reverence of students. In doing so, I exalted, by all 
the powers of my own methods of thinking, the Sublim 
itv of the Ultimate Supreme One, above the puny poten¬ 
tialities of a human creature. Now, I bring that unut¬ 
terable Being into the very heart of man. 

It does not appear to me that I could accomplish 
my design in any other way. Possibly I shall fail by the 
chosen method. I hope not. I certainly will not in all 
cases. Man requires to be dealt with in precisely that 
way. In one sense he must think of himself as a poor, 
miserable sinner, lost, and damned, and with the curse 
of death upon him. and with the prospect of hell before 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


547 


him; in another, he must regard himself as in possession 
of the God of Gods, inherently, with the potentialities 
already unfolding that shall raise him to the life of the 
eternal hills. 

Man is changeable in his moods of feeling and 
thinking. At one time he is God, at least potentially; at 
another, he is an outcast on the highway of evolution, 
without hope, and w T ith the prospect of eternal death, or 
complete annihilation. Such is the sweep of the alterna¬ 
tions of good and evil potentialities in man. He possesses 
possibilities of descent, as well as ascent. He realizes 
his powers to sink into everlasting depths, or to rise into 
eternal heights—function in the glory of joy and glad¬ 
ness, or the despair of sorrow and sadness. 

Thus man is located emotionally and psychologically, 
on a straight line, which may be projected in either the 
direction of right, or that of wrong, infinitely. He is 
confused by his possibilities. He appropriates the wrong 
so easily that he appears to himself to be its complete 
embodiment, and in that illusion, he lives in the full 
fruition of self condemnation. But, in the measure that 
he appropriates from the other radius, he conceives him¬ 
self to be an integral and indispensable fraction of the 
sum-total of all good. 

It is not to be wondered at, in the light of these 
facts, that man has promulgated, for his own special 
use, theological moods of thinking. In his helplessness, 
he clings to the idea of Salvation by Faith, in its most 
literal construction, leaving for himself nothing what¬ 
ever to do, but to exercise the functions of self-condem¬ 
nation. The strangesi part of all that is that he tries 
to realize that his lost condition is due to the wrong 
thinking of a man and a woman, ancestral to his present 
life wlirt livprl a hundred thousand years ago. Tba* 
imwwpr. together with the fact that men and womp” 
have been thinking in error and evil ever since, is the 
real fact. By the thinking in error of so many genera¬ 
tions, his condition is one of such dire helplessness, that 
despairs of helping himself in any way. He decides 
for the most part, to leave his unfortunate life in the 
hands of an incomprehensible God, and to those who are 
supposed to have won the divine favor, taking for his 
share of the work of his ultimate salvation, the job of 
self condemnation. He nas thus Deen going forward- 
backward—for a great many thousands of years, crying, 
“poor, miserable sinner,” and so he has come to be. How 
could it be otherwise? 

From a thousand years of life in a visible body in 


548 


THE NEW IDEA. 


the days of. Methuselah, he worked—thought—himself 
down to three-score and ten in King Solomon’s time, and 
to an average of thirty-two in our day. That is a pretty 
strong and conclusive demonstration of what man can 
do by wrong thinking. We have very few living illus¬ 
trations of what man could do in the opposite direction 
by right thinking. That is unfortunate. But man has 
accomplished more than that by wrong thinking. He 
has developed, by the wrong use of wisdom, the genius 
of rascality, with due polish, and refinement, so that, to¬ 
day, man devours man, by a system that promises greater 
shortening of the, so called, allotted physical life of man. 

A few people in our world who have allied them¬ 
selves with what is called the “New Thought,” are push¬ 
ing hard for recognition, and to disseminate higher meth¬ 
ods of thinking among the people, in order that there will 
rise higher and better types of life. One of them, Eliza¬ 
beth Towne, writes: “Already we are on the line—for¬ 
ever up grade, the average length of life being now ten 
years greater than it was a generation or two ago. We 
are living longer because we want to. We shall live 
forever as soon as we want to hard enough. There will 
be a lot of folks overcoming death about the same time. 
A hundred and forty and four thousand of them, the 
Bible says.” 

But now, how shall we, by functioning in the fact 
of the Principle within, so control desire, choice, motive, 
and volition, and everything else, that we may readily 
unfold, on right lines, and come into the actual posses¬ 
sion—the real possession—of youth, and health, and hap¬ 
piness, and hold on to them? That’s to the point. Away 
with the old idea that we are condemned, miserable sin¬ 
ners, and everything of that sort. Ring out the old and 
destroying habits of wrong thinking, and ring in the 
new methods of right thinking. 

At this point we meet with a difficulty. We cannot 
undo the w'ork of a hundred thousand years, in one or 
two generations. Principle won’t do that. I must tell 
the truth about that. There is no good in painting the 
picture in false colors. They would fade and be forgot¬ 
ten. We must be satisfied with rising measures of sal¬ 
vation. Herein is where heredity floods successive gen¬ 
erations with its afflictions. The curse of death, and all 
its associated evils have come down through ages of man. 
but they cannot taint Principle. That is the same yes¬ 
terday, today, and forever. The curse of heredity can¬ 
not run in the blood of Principle. It inherits and func¬ 
tions in all the nobility, ability, power and genius of its 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


549 


most remote ancestry, even unto, and including, the 
embodiment of the Twelve Ultimate Supreme Principles. 
It is as pure, and strong, and holy, and grand, and power¬ 
ful, in the human heart, today, as it was in the Ultimate 
Supreme morning of life. 

Mark well what is here said! There is nothing in 
the highest heaven of glory, where the Ultimate Supreme 
God resides, forever hidden from the vision of all below, 
purer than that spark thereof which is within man, and 
from which all his tones, in power, health and prosperity, 
may radiate in the grandeur of rising life. That spark 
within the human heart is in such potential riches that 
it may be radiated, by proper methods of thinking, into 
living, rising, expanding tones, until it will fill all the 
heavens of all the universal systems of infinitude, with the 
power and glory of its unfoldment. 

Remember the mighty plan of Brotherhood! One 
spark of the Eternal, no matter how small, is able to 
function in the powers of all the other sparks, that ever 
have, or ever will, come forth through our mighty Prin¬ 
ciple of Propagation, into the life of the infinite universe. 
It is the one and only ultimate source of all human, and 
trans-human tones. It is the supreme ruler and king over 
every human tone of life, and those ideal mass tones 
called desire, choice, motive and volition, readily become 
obedient instrumentalities in its hands to will and to do, 
whatsoever that infinite spark may dictate. 

Man has only to discover that spark—that ultimate 
tone—within the human heart, and to permit it to func¬ 
tion, or to make room for its radiations, and unfoldment 
will follow as a mighty rushing flood. That spark within 
is the “pearl of great price,” the treasure of the heart, 
the fountain of all the good in the universe; and. through 
the light of its radiations, man’s vision may be trans¬ 
formed, until, beholding the unutterable face of the Lord, 
he will see clear outlines of his own. 

No man, in the past, no man in the present, has, or, 
in all the future ever will, functionally discover that won¬ 
derfully potential spark of life, by thinking in ideas of 
a. lost, damned, or other helpless state. 

As long as man thinks that he must die, he will die! 
As long as he thinks that he is low and depraved, and 
wicked, and lost, he will function accordingly. As long 
as he thinks that he is a poor, miserable sinner, he will 
be one. By such methods of thinking he builds impreg¬ 
nable walls round the only real fact of his life, and is 
compelled to function in the outworks, where all is afflic¬ 
tion, decay and death. But if he appeal to that hidden 


550 


THE NEW IDEA. 


power within, the bonds which shackle it, and prevent 
its radiations from regenerating the outer tones, will 
break asunder, and a new flood of iight, and power, and 
peace will swell into functional activity, and a New Prin¬ 
ciple will take control of the whole life— new, because 
hitherto rendered non-functional by methods of thinking 
which do not appeal to its powers. 

As stated in earlier portions of this volume, man is 
not wicked, and degenerated, by nature. In his natural 
state he is grand, and noble, in every fiber of his form 
of life. By unnatural processes—by abnormal thinking— 
he has become wicked and degenerated. He has risen 
intellectually, but his intellectuality is hollow, or filled 
with the slime of moral degeneracy, which is continu¬ 
ously breeding disease and, so called, death. Theology 
has thrown round him a formidable Avail of Thou shalt 
nots, until, in a spirit of false conquest, he exhausts his 
remaining energies in efforts to scale that Avail, and to 
capture the hideous god Avithin its circling fastness. He 
has. by the same functions, been robbed of personal lib¬ 
erty, Avhich in his present state he cannot safely be 
trusted Avith. Man made laAvs seek to enforce human 
righteousness and Brotherhood, neither of which can 
ever prevail, except by the unfoldment of the infinite 
treasure Avithin the human heart. 

And what lias produced that terrible human condi¬ 
tion? Nothing save thinking in the ideals of man-made 
theology, Avhich teach that the heart of man is naturally 
Avicked, and full of undeveloped sin— natural sdin! 
There is no natural sin! Sin is unnatural! Sin is abnor¬ 
mal! It is a child of error! When man returns to nat¬ 
ural methods of thinking, he will, in the degree of that 
return, become natural. By that return he Avill rise out 
of sin, and above wickedness. He will no longer steal 
from the neighbor under the cloak of religion, Avhich, 
for the greater part, in our day, is far more ceremonial 
than in the times of the laAV-observing Pharisee. 

When man changes his methods of thinking concern¬ 
ing self, and comes to realize that, by nature, he is grand 
and noble, and God-like; that Avithin him there dAvells 
all the functional poAvers of at least the God of our uni¬ 
verse, potentially, he Avill begin to unfold and to rise. 
He Avill never be able to do so, by thinking in present 
ideas of natural human depravity, which are in error. 

The question that now faces us, is as to how, or by 
what method, within the yet remaining powers of man, 
he may clear away the rubbish of error by Avhich he has 
become totally blinded, and awaken the God within, or 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


551 


rather, to open a way by which the smothered radiations 
of that transcendent spark of Deity may find expression 
into the outer tones of the human form of life, to regen¬ 
erate and transform them from abnormal to natural con¬ 
ditions. 

It appears to me that efforts in that direction, 
through the functions of desire, choice and motive, in 
volition, are not always effective—not easily within 
reach—and nearly always so strongly inhibited by inter¬ 
posing functions of deliberation, that man finds himself 
in a maze of confusion from which his best laid plans 
become abortive. They are, to say the least, involved in 
many serious difficulties, at the start, some of which are 
scarcely definable. 

A method opens, however, in another direction alto¬ 
gether. It is in the suspension—the complete suspension 
—for the time being, of all the functional powers of de¬ 
sire, choice, motive and volition, and a consequent relaps¬ 
ing into a state of repose, by which the Power of Silence 
assumes control of the life organization, long enough to 
enable the God within to communicate, by the voice of 
Silence, with the psychological organism. It is a fact 
that when all sentient and mental functions are suspended, 
the soul speaks in the voice of Silence. That is the same 
as saying that the inmost Principle, the core of the life 
organization—the inmost germ, or substare of the psycho¬ 
logical organism of consciousness—functions to the trans¬ 
formation and regeneration of the whole life, best and 
most effectively, when other processes, which at best must 
be in error, are suspended. 

In other words, the soul, so called, often functions 
best and most effectively, when all the tones of the life 
organization surrounding it are in a state of complete 
repose, or inaction—in silence. That is because the outer 
tones of the life are in error. Error cannot apprehend 
Truth. That part of the life in error—the outer vesture 
portion, cannot hear or see the inner and finer radiations 
of the substaxe— cannot hear the voice of silence of the 
inmost Principle—cannot see the purer, clearer light of 
its radiations. 

The spark of Deity -within only appears not to be in 
function because its pure radiations cannot be appropri- 
ateck'by the error tones of the outer vesture life. By 
error the functional connection between the spark within 
and the coarser tones has been broken. The task to be 
accomplished is to connect up between the inner and 
outer functions of the heart so that the finer and real 


552 


THE NEW IDEA. 


radiations of the inmost spark will flux with the outer 
tones to regenerate them. 

The idea is to cease talking to the God within, and, 
for a time, to permit that fountain of life to talk to us. 
We need expressions of that fountain within towards 
us, rather than so much volition from without toward it. 
As soon as we apprehend the “still small voice”—the 
voice of the silence of the soul—from the God within, 
the work of the transformation and regeneration of the 
outer tones of life begins. At that point, or very soon 
after, one may effectively develop the inner spark, and 
the whole life, in methods of thinking in desire, choice 
and motive, in volition. 

Most humans, I say, have reached such results by 
thinking in error, that there is no longer a connecting 
link between the substare of life, and the outer spiritual 
and celestial tones. The latter have come to function in 
error to the extent that they can no longer appropriate 
the higher life, because they cannot function by it. The 
former are in very high degrees of Power, Love and 
Truth, the latter in tones of error. By that, the two sides 
of life have become disconnected, and unfoldment of the 
higher potentialities within has ceased. It is only the 
outer tones which are in function, and those processes 
are in error, and evil, from wrong thinking, as explained. 
Therefore, that point has been reached whereat the outer 
tones should come to rest—should lapse into complete 
repose, and remain completely dormant, until awakened 
into action by the thrilling, purifying, regenerating tones 
from the higher self within. 

That process is symbolized by the new birth, in mod¬ 
ern Christian theology. It is at least an awakening in 
regeneration. As the hitherto unapprehended, and non- 
appropriated higher radiations flux with the outer tones, 
there are emotional thrills of joy and gladness, which 
supplant the aforetime feelings of sorrow, sadness and 
affliction, and the life begins to rise in health and hap¬ 
piness. The object to be accomplished by the processes 
above named is that the radiations propagated by the 
oscillations of the substare of the inner Principle, may 
reach all the outer vesture tones, in a work of continu¬ 
ous renewal in self-life unfoldment. Thus, when the 
unfoldment of the life, in the plan of Principle, has been 
interrupted, or broken off, there is the necessity of such 
tone readjustment as will connect up the outer vesture 
tones with those of the substare, so that there may be 
reopened access to the eternal fountain. 

That is a most important turning point in the life 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


553 


of man. It has taken a great many thousand years of 
wrong thinking to break off the connection between man 
and the inner fountain of the human heart, and it will 
require a decided effort, reaching over a little time, with 
the attendance of something in the way of struggle, to 
restore that transcendent intercommunication. However, 
it is in this exercise, and in the more immediately fore¬ 
going that we discover the secret of human power— 
the fountain of human health, happiness and prosperity. 

I have prepared a set of instructions to guide the 
student in methods of thinking to repose—to the suspen¬ 
sion of the oscillations of his outer tone vestures—by 
which the inner Principle of the heart can function to 
awaken the life to a realization of its condition of error, 
so as to restore regular processes of unfoldment, but those 
can best be explained in oral class lectures. It is only 
necessary to state here that compliance with those instruc¬ 
tions work out a complete surrender of all things of 
sense, and all tones of perception, of the life organization, 
to the higher and inner, and real self—to the spark of 
Principle, which is the inmost substare of Power, Love 
and Truth, which is the first embodiment of Principle in 
our soul life. 

It will be profitable, at this point, to review, in 
thought, the whole system of tone classification and analy¬ 
sis of this volume, by which I have elaborated from our 
Principle, the substare, or soul of a life organization, and 
the six, or nine-fold vesture tones propagated from that 
substare. That organism applies to life units, and to 
all mass tone organizations of such units. From that the 
student will bring to vision, as never before, the great 
utility of this new system of science. It is at this point 
that the whole work unfolds to vision as an elaboration 
in science, and in pure synthetic philosophy. 

I may be told, at this point, that my surrender idea, 
by which the functions of the substare of a human life are 
made available for regeneration and unfoldment, is very 
close to the theological idea of evangelical conversion. 
Let us see wherein the differences exist between the two. 
The old idea is that the human heart is wholly wicked, full 
of sin, and completely lost; that man must receive a new 
heart.’ I teach that the substare, or soul of that heart, 
is an embodiment of Principle, in the form tones of 
Power, Love and Truth, and is pure and holy; and, that 
within that substare, there dwells in the glorious riches 
of potentiality the whole transcendent kingdom of God. 
That is a mighty difference to begin with. 

Then, I teach that man, by methods of thinking in 


554 


THE NEW IDEA. 


desire, choice, motive and volition, may unfold the life 
riches of that substare, by resolving its transcendent 
radiations into the outer tones which vesture it, to regen¬ 
erate them, and unfold them, and the whole life, substare 
and all, into higher Power, Love and Truth, or that he 
may fail to do that, by the functions of desire, in choice 
and motive, by which all the tones surrounding, and 
vesturing the substare become clogged, and clouded, in 
error and evil, so that connection between them and the 
inmost triad is broken, or completely severed. But I 
do not teach that the latter processes can disorganize 
and degenerate, the inmost embodiment of Principle of 
Power, Love and Truth. Only the triad spiritual, and 
the triad celestial tones, and the outer physical subvest¬ 
ure tones can be thus disorganized and degenerated. 

Hence, by regeneration, a human receives, or ex¬ 
periences, a transformation of all the outer tones of his 
heart, by which they are brought into harmony with the 
eternal tones of the substare, or rather, by which those 
become, once more the extended radiations of that of the 
substare. By thinking in error, the outer tones of the 
heart become discordant and degenerated. In that way 
they decline into sources of affliction—into sicknesses, 
and diseases, and, finally, to physical subvesture dissolu¬ 
tion. The mass tone of those outer tones becomes the 
source of disease germs, and from it all ill-health and 
suffering flows. On the other hand, the fountain of a. 
pure heart propagates only to health and happiness. 

It always must be held in steady vision that the 
functions of a disobedient desire, or choice, or motive, 
cannot work out a disorganization of the substare of 
Principle within. Principle cannot become discordant 
by the thinking processes of its outworks. It is by the 
tone radiations of Principle that the outworks, in clouded 
conditions of error, and disorganization, may be regen¬ 
erated. That process cannot be reversed. 

If one’s heart has become disorganized and degen¬ 
erated, as to all its spiritual and celestial, and physical 
subvesture tones, it is only after processes of regenera¬ 
tion, as here described, set in and begin to function to 
produce natural and normal conditions, that spiritual 
and celestial oscillations can work out the unfoldment 
of the rising invisible life organization. That is impor¬ 
tant. If the discordant and degenerated state of the 
moral faculties, proceeding from wrong thinking, is not 
transformed by the regenerating functions of right think¬ 
ing, and that right thinking is not continuous, there will 
be no resurrection of the human form of life through the 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


555 


functions of the psychological organism. That, with its 
attendant consequences, has already been quite fully 
explained. 

Hence, it is seen that a human, in the average state 
of today, is in a degree of moral degeneracy, as to the 
outer spiritual and celestial triad tones, as well as to his 
physical subvesture tones. That condition has proceeded 
from wrong thinking, consequent upon teachings in error, 
for which man-made theology is largely responsible; and, 
unless there be the awakening 1 to regeneration, on the 
plan herein elaborated, there will be no resurrection of 
the bodily life of the human, from his present potentiali¬ 
ties, but rather, the going back for a repetition of his 
present opportunities. 

Principle does its part of the work, perfectly. Man, 
by and through Principle, must do his part of the work, 
perfectly, also. No matter what his condition may be 
today, he may experience the awakening, into processes 
of regeneration, by the methods above elaborated, and 
proceed to make such regeneration continuous, in the 
propagation of the rising invisible form of life, by way 
of the continuous resurrection, into a higher form of life; 
and, he may resolve each fold of that unfoldment, to 
succeeding heavens of joy and gladness. 

By following out the plan of thinking of this exer¬ 
cise, one may enjoy the fullest measure of continuous 
youth and health, wealth and happiness, possible to the 
present generation. 


EXERCISE XCVIII. 


BODILY IMMORTALITY. 

Biological grounds for the continuous life of the human 
body—Transposition of human duality—Functions 
of diet—A Fable—Possible results of flesh-eating— 
The unfoldment of Principle. 


I WILL, of course, be asked, as to the biological 
foundations upon which I rest the doctrine that humans 
will rise to effective methods of thinking, in the result 
of which, they will reach a summit of power whereon 
they will no longer suffer the dissolution of their physical 
subvesture tone bodies; and, to that inquiry, I promptly 
answer, Upon the transposition of the duality of con¬ 
sciousness, or, that of the psychological organism, which 
is accomplished in that rise unfolded during the life of the 
five pre-human man races. 

Probably, in those forms next preceding the birth 
of human forms of life, and certainly, prior to the birth 
of the first race of pre-human man, in all animal life or¬ 
ganizations, the sentient side of the duality of conscious¬ 
ness, or psychological organisms, was predominant, or in 
the subjective. In such creatures, the spiritual side of 
the duality was but slightly unfolded, and the lower 
tones of the celestial side ruled all thinking processes. 
By that method, the changes concomitant to rising forms 
—that change implicated in the rise of each fixed and 
intermediate species—worked in a plan by which a 
physical subvesture body was shed for each such change. 
But when the transposition of the spiritual and celestial 
sides of the form of life was completed, and the spiritual 
became subjective, as in humans, the plan of life under¬ 
went a change, so that, by proper methods of subjective 
thinking, it became no longer necessary to shed subvest¬ 
ure physical bodies. 

Our accounts of the primitive humans are very 
meager, but Moses, gathering what he could from Orien¬ 
tal lore, at the hands of the Egyptians, who had harvested 
a considerable store of it, tells us that the more primitive 
humans lived for long periods, some of them about a 
thousand years. It is plain to my vision that one of the 
causes which worked to the dissolution of the outer 
form clothinff body was in that unfortunate choice of 
food by which primitive man introduced to himself a 

( 556 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


557 


flesh diet. Along with that, man began to think in 
error, and, as we plainly see, that method of thinking 
brought about the cumulative plan by which the results 
of such thinking produced a rapid shortening of the 
period of life in the sub-physical body. 

There is a fable, now extinct, that the temptation 
of the Garden of Eden came in the following form: Eve, 
out of curiosity, experimented in a diet of flesh, in the 
absence of Adam, or while he was out in the fertile 
valleys gathering wild fruit and vegetables. In that way 
she kept the secret from Adam for some time. After a 
while the flesh diet produced a change in her appearance, 
and Adam pressed her for an explanation. At length 
she divulged the secret, and induced her consort to par¬ 
take of the same diet. Thus, that thing called death 
came upon the race, because the succeeding generations 
partook of flesh. I do not claim for that fable even the 
dignity of symbolism, but I introduce it here simply to 
give emphasis to the importance of diet. That, however, 
already has been sufficiently elaborated elsewhere on 
these pages. 

It is probably expedient to say something more on 
the functions of the transposition of duality, already re¬ 
ferred to. That is the supreme source of bodily immor¬ 
tality. We can see that to be a fact in the life of Jesus. 
He unfolded subjectively, in the functions of the higher 
side of his duality, to the extent that he came into con¬ 
trol of physical subvesture elements, and, therefore, of 
his own body. By his spiritual powers he developed the 
celestial Principle, until he was able to absorb, by trans¬ 
mutation, and resurrection, his lower physical tones, and 
in that way to propagate his visible body, and his whole 
life organization, to an invisible form of life of higher 
powers. 

Thus, we see that, by the unfoldment of the spark 
of Principle within the human heart, it may be fanned 
into a flame that appropriates all the lower physical tones, 
bv which there is the unfoldment of the sub-physical 
tones—the unfoldment of the visible body—simultaneously, 
and in harmony with the other portions of the life organ¬ 
ization. That is the process of unfolding the celestial 
Principle previously referred to. By the unfoldment of 
the celestial Principle, there is bodily immortality. That 
is not in the fact that the visible body will experience 
no change, but rather in the fact that it will undergo 
a continuous process of changing, as to its tones, contin¬ 
uously rising higher and higher, in harmony with the 
unfolding changes of the higher substances of the life 


558 


THE NEW IDEA. 


organization. It is in those processes that the celestial 
Principle functions, and unfolds. 

I can find no biological grounds for the claim that, 
when the higher Principle of life is in active play, the 
outer visible body should not unfold in harmony with 
the higher portions of the life organization. Nor, do we 
meet with any obstacles to the promulgation of the 
doctrine of the perpetual life of the rising sub-physical 
body, in making the transition of that boundary line 
which is drawn in perception, dividing physical subvest¬ 
ure, from full tone physical tones of substance. As soon 
as our thinking—methods of thinking, are brought into 
harmony with the unfolding plan of life, the unfoldment 
of man, body, mind and soul, will be continuous, and, 
without a single interruption of consciousness. That 
latter is not concomitant, however, with the shedding, 
by dissolution, of the visible body. 

It is possible that from the observations of this 
and the next preceding exercise, the student may fall 
into the error of concluding that there is not the actual 
and real unfoldment of the substare Principle within the 
heart of man. It is a fact, that the whole sum-total of 
the evolution of life is resolved to the unfoldment of 
Principle. 


EXERCISE XCIX. 


PANTHEISM. 

Ideas of Pantheism exploded, or, resolved to proper con¬ 
ceptions—Difference between God and the tone effects 
of our Principle—The Plan of Life made plain—The 
life of our universe proceeded from but one of the 
Twelve Ultimate Principles. 


“PANTHEISM!” shouts the reckless critic, who 
may not have read more than a single exercise of this 
volume. I have exploded materialism completely, and 
transformed idealism into proper conceptions of degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, which unfold potentialities 
to realities; and, now, I face the epithet of pantheism. 
Science defines pantheism as the doctrine that Goa con¬ 
sists in the combined forces and laws manifested in the 
existing universe. That is a very plain, simple explana¬ 
tion. 

At first sight, that definition would appear to appeal 
to consciousness; and, indeed, there is a measure of re¬ 
sponse to such an appeal from consciousness. But the 
doctrines taught in this volume are not pantheistic, in 
the smallest degree, in the sense of the doctrines usually 
grouped under that head, as we shall now see. I hold, 
of course, to the following: first, that God externalized 
his nature and character in the Twelve Ultimate Primor¬ 
dial Principles. One of those was in the transcendent 
nature of the Principle of Propagation. We cannot 
safely divine, indeed, we are unable to divine, in any 
measure, as to the nature of the other eleven. 

By the unfoldment of our own ultimate primordial 
Principle, the supreme primordial Principle of propaga¬ 
tion came forth; and from that, the primordial Principle 
of propagation, of oiir universe, came forth. Now, the 
combined force, and, so called, laws of our universe, con¬ 
sist in the motor effects, so to speak, of that Principle, 
by unfoldment. In a proper conception of the fact of 
potentiality, the forces of our universe came forth from 
Principle, and Principle from God. Those tone potential¬ 
ities came forth from Principle, by the unfoldment of 
extension, and thev are now, in the actualities of degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, unfolding in evolution, and 
in the Principle of Harmony toward their source. In 
that unfoldment of evolution, there are the elements, or 
( 559 ) 



560 


THE NEW IDEA. 



processes, of creation, in propagation, by which those 
tone potentialities are unfolding to successively higher 
tones, toward the new faot of Harmony, which is the 
goal of creation. 

We look upon the visible tone forces of our universe, 
and without a proper understanding of their potentiali¬ 
ties, and in the illusions of perception, we sometimes, but 
always in error, say that they constitute God. That is a 
Deification of the outer, or physical subvesture tones of 
nature which is wholly in perception. It is in error, as 
is already seen from the foregoing. It is error to look 
upon the processes of propagation—the successive tones of 
the processes of creation as in the fact of Good, or God, 
because they are always in functional error, or, in poten¬ 
tial degrees of wisdom and intelligence, by which the un- 
foldment of Principle is propagated. It is irreverent, 
and in a want of a knowledge of the functional nature of 
perceptions, to hold to the ideas of pantheism, in the sense 
of which I am speaking. On the infinite orbit of life we 
behold, even psychologically, a multitude of tone processes, 
and forces, visible by their radiations, which are not, by 
any means, in the fact of God. They are the tone forces, 
and tone processes of creation, and those which are visible 
to us are in error, not inherently, but by the illusions of 
human perceptions. 

It would be error to say that the clock on the mantel 
is a man. It is not a man; it is but one of the externaliza- 
tions of man, propagated by thinking. There are two 
senses in which that clock is alive. First it is alive by its 
solid vestured units, as explained in the earlier portions 
of this volume; it is alive in the fact of its tone forces; 
it is an item of environment, and in that way potentiallj' 
alive, or in the fact of a functional force. But it is not 
the man who fashioned it in Principle. In the same way, 
but in an infinitely higher sense, man is alive and func¬ 
tional, as an item of higher environment, but he is not 
God. At the last analysis all things of life are in the tones 
of the environment of God; and, those tones are propa¬ 
gating the Greater God of Harmony. 

As a symbol pantheism is in outlines of potentiality. 
When interpreted in the light of the foregoing method of 
thinking it is resolved to its true status. In an extreme 
sense, the works of man are in the facts of man; and, in 
the same extreme sense, the works of Principle are them¬ 
selves in the facts of Principle; likewise are the works of 
God in the facts of God, in the same way. There always 
is, however, difficulty in practicing in methods of think¬ 
ing on the backward scale. Tracing tone potentialities 







NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


561 


backward, we see that all things come from God. Follow¬ 
ing these tone potentialities, on the rising scale of evolu¬ 
tion, we more easily can bring to vision the transcendent 
fact that they are all unfolding, by propagation, through 
degrees of wisdom and intelligence, according to the plan 
of Principle, into the Living God of Ultimate Universal 
Harmony. 

It is error to regard the immediate motor effects of 
propagation as in the fact of the Ultimate Source of the 
Principle of that propagation. Such, however, is in the 
idea of pantheism, which is in error. Thus it appears 
to me that this volume closes, forever, the voice of mate- 
realism, idealism and pantheism. The first and the last 
will speedily fade from human perceptions altogether, 
while the second has already undergone a complete trans¬ 
formation in this volume. Ideas, propagated from a re¬ 
generated human heart, in desire, choice, motive and vo¬ 
lition, are to be depended upon, as functional for self¬ 
life unfoldment. 

It must also be carefully remembered that the tone 
effects of our Primordial Principle of propagation, form 
no part, except in ultimate Harmony, of the tone effects 
of the one hundred and forty-three thousand other pri¬ 
mordial Principles which proceeded, with our own, from 
the Ultimate Supreme Twelve. By that rule it is seen 
that all the tone effects of our universe, together, do not 
constitute, except in the ultimate degrees of life un¬ 
foldment, the sum total of the potentialities of the Twelve 
Ultimate Principles. There is no room for pantheism in 
such a conception as that. 


EXERCISE C. 


PHYSICAL THINKING. 

Education and Training of the Bodily Organism—Func¬ 
tions of Exercise, Massage and Diet—Meat diet dis¬ 
approved—Dangers of abnormal physical develop¬ 
ments—Unfoldment of all the functions of the life 
organization, simultaneously and in harmony recom¬ 
mended. 


BECAUSE nothing has been said, up to this point, 
on the subject of physical culture and training, the reader 
may have concluded that I undervalue that important 
branch of education. I do not; but I consider it of less 
real utility when carried on by itself, than when it is 
accompanied by methods for mental and moral training, 
and psychological unfoldment. I hold to the doctrine that 
the education of a man, or woman, or a child, should in¬ 
clude all departments of the life organization—that the 
development of the physical, the mental, the moral and 
the psychological, should proceed together and simulta¬ 
neously. 

No man ever was made strong in all departments of 
his life organization by book-study alone. One must think 
physically as well as intellectually, in order that there may 
be the unfoldment of the whole man, or woman in har¬ 
mony. Over-brain-work, or over-heart-work, without the 
accompaniment of muscle exercise produces weakness, 
sickness and old age, just as over-muscle work, unaccom¬ 
panied by heart and brain exercise will propagate weak¬ 
ness, sickness and old age. On the other hand proper 
methods of exercising the physical, the mental, the spir¬ 
itual, the moral, and the psychological functions and fac¬ 
ulties, respectively, will propagate perpetual youth and 
health. 

It so happens that in the books, physical culture and 
training are treated by themselves, separate from consid¬ 
erations of other departments of the human life organiza¬ 
tion. For that reason, more than from any other, that 
department of culture and training is carried on by itself, 
and separate from all other branches of education. In a 
Avide sense that applies to every branch of education, in 
this way: moral training is in a department by itself—in 
church and in the theological college; mental training is 
largely confined to the public school, and to the scientific 
(5621 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


563 


college; physical education is concomitant with the gym¬ 
nasium and the field of sports. 

By that classification, and the wide separation of 
those classes of culture, man has come to separate, or 
divide his life forces accordingly, when as a matter of 
fact, a human life organization is in such interdependence 
as to its principal parts, that they must all unfold to¬ 
gether, or the whole life will become discordant and dis¬ 
organized. Harmony rises from the functions of relativity 
and interdependence, and when those are ignored there 
is discord, weakness, and sickness. I desire to impress 
those facts strongly. 

When man begins to clog up and grow stiff, and 
sore, physically, the very same conditions generally rise, 
simultaneously, in his mental, moral and psychological 
realms, whether he happen to realize it or not. 
In such a case he sometimes seeks relief in a gymnasium. 
That would be the proper thing to do, if, at the same 
time, he apply himself to proper mental and moral think¬ 
ing for psychological unfoldment. In that way he would 
experience great relief, and a return to rising measures 
of general health. In any other way, he receives but lit¬ 
tle, or no permanent benefit. 

In a little book, by J. P. Thornton, entitled, “Train¬ 
ing,” it is said: “I want to call particular attention 
again to the close connection between brain and brawn. 
Without getting into any unfortunate condition of men¬ 
tal exaggeration, watch out all the time whether your 
brain works as well as do your muscles, for you might 
exhaust the first. Moderate exercise, for beginners, 
is, then, the golden rule. As you go on with your work, 
your mental power—the possibility of securing the stimu¬ 
lant-should increase. When you find it failing, and you 
are listless, make up your mind that you have been over¬ 
doing it. Stop for a while, or work with the utmost 
moderation, until the proper balance is restored. You 
can see now, in many ways, that power really exists in 
your brain, and how it is almost always the directing 
agent. ’ ’ 

That is to the point. It is in proof of what I had 
just said. Brain unfoldment and muscle development 
must go along together, or both will fail. If moral and 
psychological unfoldment accompany those processes, it 
is still better. In that way the life organization rises 
into the power of Harmony, which is the most fruitful 
source of strength. 

We may profitably consider, for a few moments, the 
various methods necessary to promote physical thinking. 


564 


THE NEW IDEA. 


I use the word, thinking, in this connection, advisedly. 
Any method of physical training that does not implicate 
the processes of oscillation in the units composing the 
physical body, is a failure. At the last analysis, think¬ 
ing is in the fact of the oscillations of the Two Prin¬ 
ciples in the substare of each unit of life, whether in 
the human body, or elsewhere. It also includes the 
vibrations of the vesture tones surrounding the substare 
of the units, which latter are set into action by the oscil¬ 
lations of the substare. It is by those processes that 
there are propagation and renewal of those units into 
higher powers, and, therefore, of the mass tone body. 

I have already pointed out that all infoldment, or 
development, of functional powers, is by their use. The 
functions of heart pulsations, and breathing by the lungs, 
are the foundations of physical unit renewal in any 
body. These movements implicate and propagate oscil¬ 
lation in every unit of the human body. Thus it is, that 
a form of animal or human life is provided by nature 
with its own system of perpetual motion. In that way, 
there is use, or exercise, throughout all the parts of the 
body. 

It is seen, therefore, that Principle is a wonderful 
body builder. It recognizes the necessity of continuous 
process among the units of a mass tone body, and has 
provided a fundamental organism for that purpose. 
Everything is in the fact of life by its invisible units; 
and, in the nature'of life, those units must continuously 
oscillate to their renewal and unfoldment, in the facts 
of propagation. It is quite necessary to entertain that 
vision of the facts of life, in connection with what we 
may call physical education, or training, or develop¬ 
ment. 

So much for wliat nature, or Principle, has done, by 
way of an elementary system of physical education. 
Now. there is the work of self-development of self, phys¬ 
ically, by the exercise of desire, choice, motive and voli¬ 
tion, the very same as in the higher departments of a 
life organization. Those latter are generally spoken of, 
as processes in volition. They consist of three great 
methods, as follow, to-wit: (1), physical exercise; (2), 
massage; (3), diet. 

By exercise, in and out of the gymnasium, and in 
the field of sports of all kinds, and by a wonderful sys¬ 
tem of scientific methods for physical culture, there 
arises muscular development; the strengthening of the 
heart; the growth of the tissues, and the general sweep 
of bodily renewal, reaching out to the purification and 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


565 


renewal of the blood, the bone, and every part of the 
visible body. Many volumes have been printed and 
published, giving the technique of methods of physical 
training, which are very useful, and should be resorted 
to, by people generally, for instruction in that branch 
of physical education. 

Care should be taken, however, that physical educa¬ 
tion is not carried forward to abnormal development of 
the body, or of the bodily organism, at the neglect or 
expense of the higher functions of the life organization. 
It is quite an easy matter to effect an abnormal growth 
or development of the muscles. Two evils result from 
that. In the first place, it works an injury to the higher 
mental organism, and in the second place, it is always 
followed by a relapse, or decline, in that muscular de¬ 
velopment, which injures the muscular organization. 
Thus, once more, I emphasize the danger of carrying on 
physical education and training entirely separate from 
the unfoldment of the whole life organization, harmo¬ 
niously. 

The second division of the methods of physical de¬ 
velopment, I have properly called, massage. That may 
be regarded as the functions of physical magnetism. It 
works out a use, or renewal, of the units of the body, 
while the whole mass tone body is in a state of repose. 
There are a great many methods by which magnetism 
may be administered to, and appropriated by, the human 
physical organism. I call attention to the fact that the 
physical human body, both by its units, and in mass 
tone, is essentially magnetic. The first purely physical 
tone vesture of the units of the body, within the physical 
subvestures, is of pure, physical, magnetic ether. As 
with all the tones of life, magnetic processes respond to 
each other. Massage is that kind of manipulation which, 
by the appropriation of magnetic forces from without, 
the magnetic functions of the units within are stirred 
to action, and there is consequent development and re¬ 
newal of those units. I am sure that the student will be 
able to see the utility of such processes. When the units 
of the body have become sluggish and inactive, there is 
the degeneration of stagnation, and the body becomes 
clogged up and the muscles, soft and weak. By a proper 
system of massage, there will be a quickening of the 
oscillation of the units, through magnetic forces, which 
work out the vigor and health of bodily organism. 

The third great department of the methods of physi¬ 
cal development consists in diet. In this connection, 
many volumes might be written. In the first place, atten- 


566 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tion is called to the function of foods in the evolution 
of life, not only in the animal species, but in primitive 
man. It is only by a complete knowledge of those facts 
that we can come to see the wonderful functions of diet¬ 
ing in our own day and generation. Probably the two 
greatest functions for the evolution of man from the 
animal races are diet and climate. I have commenced a 
study along those lines, correlating it with the diet of 
the Japanese. It is acknowledged that the Nippon race 
is one of the most hardy, physically, of any in the world. 
We all know that the diet of those people is very simple, 
consisting, for the greater part, of different applications 
of the flour of rice, vegetables and fish. For 2,500 years 
they have not partaken of a meat diet. 

It is seen from a study of the evolution of man, in 
those pre-human stages, that he was developed mentally 
and morally, very largely, by selecting a diet of honey, 
eggs, vegetables, nuts, and cereals. The carniverous spe¬ 
cies of animals did not show a high degree of cephalic 
development. The line of ascent and unfoldment of 
cephalic functions is in the herbiverous species. Hence, I 
am inclined to the opinion that a flesh diet, in the human 
race, has had more to do with shortening the period of 
human life, and bringing about the final dissolution of 
the physical body, in that event commonly called, death, 
than anything else. I cannot get away from the conclu¬ 
sion, that, when a flesh diet was introduced among men, 
it came in the fact and function of “the forbidden fruit.” 
I have already hinted at that conception in this volume, 
and I desire to repeat it here with more emphasis. It 
is not clear to us, from the records of history, at what 
point humans began the use of a diet of animal flesh; 
but, to my vision, the account given by Moses of the 
temptation of the garden of Eden, by which the penalty 
of death passed upon all men, is, at least, symbolic of 
the advent among men of a diet of flesh. 

Moreover, I hold to the idea that in the proportions 
that a flesh diet is abolished in the use of mankind, in 
that same proportion will the days of his life in flesh 
and blood be lengthened. The human race could not 
engage in a more fruitful process than by experimenting 
on that line. A meat diet, more than any other, tends 
to propagate undue heat, and to clog the wheels of physi¬ 
cal vibrations. It should be abandoned. 

With the abandonment of a flesh diet, it will be 
easier to reduce the quantity of the stomach foods. That 
is very necessary. Men would be stronger and more 
rugged in every respect, physically, if the quantity of 
food taken into the stomach were reduced by at least 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


567 


one-half. The human stomach is the most completely 
over-loaded and over-burdened, and over-taxed organism 
of the human body. For that reason the human stomach 
is usually out of order, and greatly disorganized. It 
cannot conveniently dispose of its excessive supply of 
material food, and, as a consequence, the whole physical 
organization is clogged up and rendered ineffective. 

I have already called attention to the fact that by 
the destructive indulgences here spoken of, the evolution 
of the human stomach is hindered and obstructed. It is 
by the careful selection of diet, that the stomach will 
unfold into higher functions—unfold to the appropria¬ 
tion of higher foods. There is more in that latter point 
than the student has probably heretofore credited it 
with. If the human race, or a large portion of it, would 
enter upon a complete revision of diet, gradually, but as 
rapidly as possible, wonderful results, in deliverance 
from ailments and afflictions, would follow. That un- 
foldment would reach out to mental and moral improve¬ 
ments. 

Thus, it is seen that physical education and training 
—that physical unfoldment—should proceed simulta¬ 
neously and harmoniously with mental, moral, and 
psychological development. In other words, there should 
be the physical thinking 1 of the' units composing the 
human life organization, as well as the mental, moral, and 
psychological thinking of the same. Those processes 
should proceed altogether, and as one harmonious proc¬ 
ess. In that way perpetual youth and health will follow. 


EXERCISE Cl. 


THE ORBIT OF LIFE. 

The arc of extension—The arc of evolution—Extension 
by the rule of Principle—Elaboration of the spiritual 
and physical sub-zones—Their interdependence— 
Duality of the sub-zone—Man thinking himself up 
the arc of evolution. 


WE REACH the climax of these studies in this all 
important exercise. It is that method of thinking which 
harvests all that has been said in this volume, into one 
mass tone study. I had intended to devote some space 
and effort to the elaboration of climate, as we have it 
on our planet, and by that method, to show the functions 
of climate in the processes of life unfoldment, but all 
that is implicated in this exercise, so that a separate 
effort in that direction is unnecessary. 

I will now ask the reader to come with me in a 
journey over the whole orbit of life. That will be in¬ 
structive. It will be in the process of expanding our 
psychological organism, and raising its vision to higher 
ground. 

Let us, in the first place, propagate, as best we may, 
some sort of conception of the Infinite Ultimate and 
Supreme Being. Then, let us bring to vision the fact, 
that from that Unutterable Being, there proceeded twelve 
Supreme creatures, each in an individual form of life, 
called a Principle. By that unfoldment, the twelve-fold, 
archetypal heavens were brought forth. 

When that work of creation was completed, the 
twelve Principles unfolded, each by dividing itself 
twelve times, resulting in 144 supreme universal systems. 
It is to be noted, in connection with this, that our own 
Ultimate Supreme Principle of propagation, divided 
itself twelve times, so that there are, twelve Supreme 
universal systems by propagation. By the same rule, we 
come to see that there are 143 Supreme universal sys¬ 
tems which have come forth, by other methods than 
those of propagation. Concerning that, we are unable 
to think. Until we have unfolded into the Brotherhood 
of all things, we cannot comprehend anything concern¬ 
ing those 143 Supreme universal systems. We, there¬ 
fore, return to the consideration of the twelve Supreme 
universal systems which came forth by twelve different 

( 568 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


569 


methods of propagation. We say, in that connection, 
that each of those twelve Principles of propagation di¬ 
vided a thousand times, which gives 144,000 great uni¬ 
versal systems of propagation, of which our own is a 
constituent. 

Now, it is seen that there are 144,000 great universal 
systems for each of the other 143 Supreme universal sys¬ 
tems, making 20,592,000 universal systems, or including 
our own, 20,736,000 great universal systems. If we 
carry out the same ratio, by which to determine the 
number of planetary systems within our own universe, 
we will be able to place the latter at 20,736,000,000, but 
we do not, as yet, know the multiple by which that latter 
sum total is estimated, nor are we certain, beyond a 
doubt, as to the multiple by which the number of great 
universal systems is ascertained. We are certain, indeed, 
as to that point by which we have 144,000 Supreme uni¬ 
versal systems, but no further. However, the ratio of 
increase given is sufficient for our conceptions of im¬ 
mensity. 

By the same rule of extension, the science of number 
enables us to determine the number of individual units 
in our own universe, by tone classification. I do not 
wish, however, to carry this proposition of the infinitude 
of variety beyond that point which will give to the 
human psychological organism, a proper conception of 
the infinitude of unit variety, first of our own universe, 
and then of the propable 20,736,000,000 universal sys¬ 
tems, possibly, something like our own. We cannot 
make even an approximate estimate of the number of 
units in our own universe, much less of the infinite sum 
total. That conception of unit variety is necessary in 
order that we may reach out to a vision of the riches 
of Ultimate Harmony. It is noted, in this connection, 
that each one—each unit—of life, in all that infinite 
multiple, is in the fact of a thought, the organism of 
which has already been explained. 

I now call attention to the fact that each such unit, 
by its own inherent tone vestures of conscious Avisdom 
and intelligence, has the power to unfold, and become 
a unit of successively higher powers. The latter proc¬ 
esses are propagated by felloAvship with other units. It 
is seen that, because each unit differs from all the others, 
in quality of tone, there is the fact of relativity and inter¬ 
dependence. Relativity and interdependence arise from 
the fact that those units all proceed from the same 
Ultimate source, and from the other fact, that they 
differ in powers from each other. 


570 


THE NEW IDEA. 


I do not implicate the rise by propagation of tone 
vestures in this connection, because that already has 
been explained. However, the foregoing observations 
bring us to what we may call the lower terminal of the 
arc of extension, or devolution, by which the infinite 
variety of unit forms of life was achieved. Now, what 
here has been said concerning the mighty sweep of this 
arc, may not be correct as to particulars and numbers, 
but it is in the plan of Principle. In all that has been 
said in the foregoing, our method of thinking is loyal 
to the plan of life, and to Principle. 

At that point we enter upon the other great arc of 
the orbit of life, called the arc of evolution. Of course, 
this is a partial repetition of that which has hitherto 
been said, but, it is on a much larger and higher scale; 
and, it enables us to more effectively appropriate what 
has previously been said in this connection. 

I desire, here, to make an effort to distinguish be¬ 
tween the processes of extention, or devolution, and the 
processes of evolution. Both are in the facts of life un- 
foldment. There is, however, the idea of the division of 
Principle, to be held in vision as to the arc of extension; 
and there is the other idea of union, or reunion, to be 
held in thought as to the arc of evolution. But, in that 
connection, we must ever bear in mind that the items 
reunited in evolution are not at all in the same powers 
and functions in which they were first left by extension 
or division. On both arcs of the orbit of life, there is 
a growth, or unfoldment, of the life units by propaga¬ 
tion. That latter fact is true of those universal systems 
which came forth from the Ultimate Supreme Principle 
of propagation. But as to the units of all the other uni¬ 
versal systems, such processes are due to some fact other 
than that of propagation, concerning which, we can at 
present have no comprehension whatever, nor would it 
profit us in our present status, to be able to extend our 
vision into those realms. 

I have already quite fully elaborated the functions 
in creation, of the infinite number of units which consti¬ 
tute the variety of our own universe. Each student, for 
himself, will be able, from all that has been said, to 
bring to vision the wonderful functions of propagation, 
which is the fact wherein progress, or growth, arises. 
It is the fact wherein old things become new things, or 
rise to higher forms with greater powers. Prom what 
has been said, the Thinker will be able to unfold to 
vision, in these connections, those wonderful processes 
of creation by which Harmony is achieved, with Unity 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


571 


as the starting point. To think diligently on these mat¬ 
ters is to unfold one’s life into greater powers, and to 
extend vision to the higher facts of the universe. Such 
thinking produces health and strength, and delivers from 
all the tones of affliction. 

Processes of unfoldment on the arc of evolution are 
in the fact of Harmony building. Those processes impli¬ 
cate an almost infinite number of harmony points, or 
degrees of harmony organization. Each of those har¬ 
mony points is in the fact of mass tone. I have already, 
in the earlier portions of this volume, brought to some¬ 
what clear vision the nature of mass tone. When, by 
certain processes of evolution, units are gathered to¬ 
gether in mass tone, or in any degree of harmony, there 
is propagation. Propagation rises always in the fact of 
mass tone. 

Thinking from the standpoints of the plant and ani- 
man kingdoms, each fixed and intermediate species is a 
mass tone, or harmony point. Indeed, the atom, so 
called, is a mass tone, or harmony point. It is the same 
with a molecule and a corpuscle. Again, it is the same 
with the cell. Again, it is the same with a planet, or 
with a man. Degrees of organism which are everywhere 
displayed on the arc of evolution, are all in mass tone, or 
harmony points, from which higher and more expanded 
mass tones, or harmony points, are unfolded. 

As I have said, the animal, or human cell, is a mass 
tone, or harmony, point of organism. Two or more 
cells, in association, constitute a higher organism, or 
mass tone. Now, each of the successive organisms on the 
whole orbit of evolution, below man, is a harmony point, 
or a mass tone point. Our planet is the highest visible 
molecular harmony point reached for us in our own plan¬ 
etary system; and, man is the highest cellular harmony 
point reached, that is visible in cellular evolution. All 
forms of molecular life higher than our planet, in powers 
and tones, are invisible to the human physiological eye; 
again, all forms of cellular life higher than man, are 
invisible to the human eye. 

We see how, by the gathering together of life units, 
in fellowship and in organisms, the forms of life are 
expanded. That expansion is due to the gathering into 
any one form of life, a successively larger number of 
units, and also, to the Principle of propagation. The 
two ideas must be held together. Evolution does not 
consist merely in the association of units, but, in the 
fact that those units are, by propagation, raised to higher 
form tones. Thus, the dual rise of the forms of life 


572 


THE NEW IDEA. 


implicates growth, or progress, including the element of 
creation. It is continuously in the process of unfolding 
the new from the old forms, and, in that other process 
of the gathering together of the units of variety. 

The orbit of evolution is marked, at convenient 
points, by a change of mass tone forms. That process 
implicates the disappearance of mass tone forms, from 
physical vision, and their reappearance, in higher forms, 
to physical vision. Those processes are concomitant to 
the evolution of the forms of life below man. That 
event in which the mass tone bodily form disappears is 
commonly called death. That event in which it reap¬ 
pears, in a higher form, is called a birth. Those events, 
I say, are concomitant to evolution below the human 
status. 

When humans depart these spheres they do not re¬ 
appear again to physical vision, but rise into the next 
higher zone of substance, and wear pure physical ether 
bodies, which are invisible to the organism of physical 
sub vesture tones. The exception to that rule is, that 
when a human has become disorganized and degenerated, 
by a willful neglect of opportunity, that one goes back 
for reincarnation, but does not reappear in human 
spheres during the life of any one generation of men, 
and probably not for many generations. 

I desire, in this connection, to direct attention to 
What is commonly called climate, in its functions for the 
evolution of pre-human man, especially in those higher 
animal forms of life, of the man type. It is well known 
that, at a certain period in the life of our planet, there 
was a marked change in respect of the fact of a temper¬ 
ature. Prior to that, the temperature of the poles was 
about the same as that of the equator. Indeed, it was 
the same all over the earth. But when animal life had 
reached a certain stage of unfoldment, climate was 
inaugurated that further unfoldment might be carried 
forward. From universally even temperature, the sea¬ 
sons arose with their extremes of heat and cold. Science 
has not yet fully inquired into the causes which produced 
that distribution of the temperature in the world, which 
we call climate, but it is clear to our vision that it came 
to pass as a result of processes of unfoldment in our 
planet. If we can come to understand what those proc¬ 
esses, or changes, wrought by the growth of our planet 
that produce climate, are, we might the more readily 
understand the functions of climate. I call attention, in 
this connection, to the “nodding motion” of the earth. 
It is known that that motion produces the four seasons 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


573 


of spring, fall, summer and winter. The “nodding 
motion” of the earth appears to be its gait, or carriage, 
in walking, so to speak, in the journey of its orbit around 
the sun. It is observed that that gait is almost exactly 
the same as the gait, or carriage, of a man in walking. 
Man, in walking, sways to the right and to the left, with 
each step. We know that our planet is in a form of 
life, and that it moves on its orbit by motion propagated 
by the oscillation of the units of which it is composed, 
and by its mass tone will. It is the very same in the 
walking of a man. All motion of the body is propagated 
by the volition of the units composing the body, and 
by the mass tone of that volition, called the will. 

It would appear from the foregoing, that the “nod¬ 
ding motion” of the earth did not begin until the four 
seasons were inaugurated on the earth. However, that 
may be, we see that the inauguration of the climate of 
our planet worked a wonderful change in the life of 
animals. 

Of course, the student will not confuse ideas of the 
four seasons with those of the fact of climate. Climate 
covers the entire phenomena of alternating extremes of 
heat and cold, including meterological eventuations of 
all kinds, such as the actions of the wind, precipitations, 
storms, droughts, etc. Any, and all of those may be 
experienced in any one season, although, of course, they 
are more concomitant with some seasons than others 
Most meteorological phenomena rise from extremes of 
temperature, and those latter proceed, primarily, from 
the compressing functions of physical subvestures. 

I call attention, in this connection, to the fact that 
all eventuations in physical sub vesture spheres are, in 
a large measure, dependent upon the thinking of hu¬ 
mans; and, that is becoming more and more the fact, as 
the tones of man rise to higher functional powers. 
There is a wonderful interdependence existing between 
human thinking, and the thinking of units outside of 
human life organizations. That applies to the units com¬ 
posing our planet, and to those which constitute what 
we call the physical heaven. Man is coming into control 
of all thinking* below his own status, and in a short time, 
comparatively speaking, the thinking of man will reach 
out to a complete control of all those departments of 
thinking below him. 

In this connection, there is a wonderful field for 
study. From that study, it will be clearly brought to vision 
in what way, by the human will, man will control the 
progress and its results, of everything visible about him. 


574 


THE NEW IDEA. 


He will do that by the power of the human will. It has 
already been said that the motor effects of the thinking 
of man are discharged into environment, by the processes 
of the human will. AVhen those effects come into proper 
tones, they will more and more effectually flux with the 
visible and invisible tones of human environment to con¬ 
trol it, and to unfold it. 

When the extremes of heat and cold began to be 
felt among the mammal races, they separated, each spe¬ 
cies betaking themselves to a climate suitable to their 
requirements. That was a wonderful phenomena of life. 
Some of the animal races gathered in equatorial coun¬ 
tries, and some in temperate zone regions. Those which 
located in temperate zone localities, where extremes of 
heat and cold prevailed, developed mentally, far more 
rapidly than those who sought places of abode in equa¬ 
torial regions. 

It is seen from those observations that the first 
functions of climate resulted in a distribution of the 
races of animal life, in accordance with its alternating 
degrees of temperature. Great results followed. The 
foods supplied by nature in temperate zones were more 
functional to the development of the cephalic functions 
and powers. Especially was that the case as to the nuts 
which, in those periods, abounded in the Northern tem¬ 
perate zone. By the use of that food, the mental powers 
of the higher man types of animals developed very 
rapidly. 

Thus, we see the interdependence between planetary 
and man life. The same force prevails today. Hence, it 
is incumbent upon humans to discover in exactly what 
way those extremes alternate to his physical and higher 
unfoldment, and to apply them accordingly. The selec¬ 
tion of climatic conditions began within the animal races, 
and is projected into the human race, but there is not in 
the exercise of that intelligence, the attention paid to 
the matter, by humans, that is demanded. It is not that 
man should become nomadic, like his ancestors, but that 
he should select a location in which to live, the climatic 
conditions of which are suited to the demands of his life 
organism. When that is done; that is to say, when man 
locates himself in that particular place on the earth, the 
climate of which is best suited to the demands of his 
health, it will be found that he has more accurately 
complied with the demands of human progress. 

Before passing further up the arc of evolution, I 
desire to remain long enough in physical subvesture 
spheres to make some further important observations 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


575 


therein. The student is aware that humans dwell in the 
higher spheres of physical subvesture tones. 

There is something very remarkable as to the bound¬ 
aries of that sub-zone in which we dwell. We may re¬ 
gard it as an are, and as at the bottom, connecting the 
arc of extension or devolution, on the one hand, and the 
arc of evolution on the other. In other words, one end 
of the sub-physical zone is in variety, and the other is in 
rising degrees of Harmony. In many respects, that little 
arc which connects the two great arcs of evolution and 
devolution, is the most mysterious and difficult to solve, 
as to its tones, of any department of life unfoldment. It 
is the little zone constituting the connecting link between 
the extension of variety, and the harvesting of that va¬ 
riety, in degrees of harmony. 

It contains within its wonderful tones, the second 
birth of life. In other words, animal and plant life were 
born in physical subvesture tones. In that way, it be¬ 
comes xranscendently important. xYt the top of the arc 
of extension, we have the birth of the unit forms of life. 
All the way down that arc, we have expansion, by way 
of the extension of variety. We hold ideas of division 
in respect of that extension. 

Down in our own physical subvesture zone, we find 
that extension of variety came to an end; and we also 
find that variety began to assemble therein, in propaga¬ 
tion, which is the beginning of Harmony. At that turn¬ 
ing point, where variety began to propagate Harmony, 
cellular units were born, and that was the beginning of 
animal and plant life. We must now think of the phys¬ 
ical subvesture tones, as in the fact of a physical sub¬ 
tone, or as a zone for which we have no parallel in the 
life scale of harmonics, which has been evolved by the 
thinking of humans in the development of the science of 
Harmony. In other words, we have no harmonic tones 
below the tone of C. The only way in which we can cor¬ 
relate the tones of the physical sub-zone with the scale 
of harmonics, is to project downward, another scale, just 
as we do in projecting upward a higher scale, above the 
central one. Man is naturally inclined, as to his thinking 
in harmony, to rise. The inclination is to enunciate notes 
in an ascending scale, in the tones of C. E, and G, suc¬ 
cessively, than to express the same fundamentals in the 
order of G, E, and C. 

In some way, as we rise into the higher things, we 
leave behind the old, or the lower things. Hence, we do 
not appear to be able to comprehend those tones, which, 
in a psychological sense, are below the tone of C, in the 


576 


THE NEW IDEA. 


life scale of harmonics. All we can do is to duplicate 
the tones above C, on a lower scale. It is so arranged 
in the plan of life that a human can only function per¬ 
fectly in a scale of tones corresponding to those of which 
his life organization is composed. Let me illustrate: 
Because man has a physical body, consisting of physical 
subvesture tones, he can function in a scale or octave 
corresponding to those tones; and, because he has a psy¬ 
chological organization, which is in the substance, chiefly, 
of the next higher zone, he can function in the scale 
succeeding that representing the tones of his body. But, 
beyond that, he cannot go, in either direction, while in 
the human state. 

We see the importance of that lower arc, or sub- 
zone, in the fact that when life unfoldment made its turn 
from devolution to evolution, the turning was in the 
fact of a second birth of life. Hence, we have the sec¬ 
ond morning, of creation, or the second birth of life, in 
our sub-zone. Prior to that, life units consisted, as to 
form, of a substare, an atom, a molecule, a corpuscle, and 
a crystal. By the turning, here spoken of, the cellular 
form was born, which was a new organism of transcend¬ 
ent functions, from which psychological life arose. 
Everything which existed in prior unit forms of life was 
fluxed into the potentialities of the cell, and it became a 
new datum for the unfoldment of life. 

We see that the evolutionary stages of progress in 
the sub-zone, include everything, from, and including, 
the birth of cellular forms of life, to man. That range 
of unfoldment includes six great fixed species below man, 
and an innumerable, or unknown, number of interme¬ 
diate forms. It also includes man, himself, in his human 
form. 

Now, parallel with that order of evolutions in our 
sub-zone, is another column of invisible evolution, thus, 
constituting the duality of subvesture tones. That is 
the same as saying that there is a sub-zone of the lowest 
full tone spiritual zone, in three great divisions, corre¬ 
sponding to the physical sub-zone, which is also in three 
great divisions. To make this plainer, let us divide the 
diatonic scale of harmonics at a point just above E : , and 
place the two halves in parallel columns. Then, let us 
say, for convenience, that we have, on the left, C, E, 
and G, and, on the right, corresponding to each, D, P, 
and B. In this connection, we regard A as the mass 
tone of them all. Now, below C, there are three sub¬ 
tones for which we have no name; and, below P, we 
have three sub-tones for which we have no name. Each 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


577 


of the pairs of those sub-tones are interdependent. In 
that way, I trust, I have brought the duality of the sub¬ 
spiritual and sub-physical tones into plain vision. 

Now, when the forms of life in our sub-zone disap¬ 
peared from physical vision, as explained in a previous 
part of this exercise, they went into the spiritual sub¬ 
zone, and when they reappeared again, they came back 
into the physical sub-zone, to resume physical subvest¬ 
ure bodies. Thus, I have been able, by the immediate 
foregoing paragraphs, not only to explain the duality 
of our sub-zone, but to make quite clear, the going and 
coming of the animal forms of life, to and from the lower 
spiritual and physical sides of the dual substance tones. 

It may be well to call attention, here, to the fact 
that the three full tones, or zones of substance above the 
sub-zone, are interdependent in the same way, to-wit: 
C with D; E with F; and G with B. That latter concep¬ 
tion, which is in accordance with the plan of life, 
reaches out to a complete elaboration of evolution of 
the forms of life above human man. In our lecture 
courses, which w T e hope to carry out, we shall deal with 
the whole mighty arc of evolution above man, and reach 
into that new mass tone heaven of Harmony, which is 
above all the full tone vestures of that arc. 

In the foregoing paragraphs, I have referred only 
to the unfoldment of life on and in our own little planet. 
In order to extend and rise psychologically, we must 
think of the life unfoldment of the other planets of our 
system. Not only that, but w r e must extend thought to 
the simultaneous unfoldment of all the other planetary 
systems of our little universe. Not only that, but we 
must extend our thinking to the simultaneous unfold¬ 
ment of the planetary systems of other universal systems. 
And, we must think along that line until we include all 
the great universal systems of the infinite universe, until 
w r e have unfolded them all in thought to the beginning, 
or to the boundary of the Supreme universal systems. 
Then, we must carry thought still higher, and unfold the 
forms of life until we reach the boundary of the Ulti¬ 
mate Supreme universal systems. And, finally, we must 
extend thought until v r e unfold those into the All of 
Harmony. 

When we have done that, we have completed the 
journey of the orbit of life. It is seen from the fore¬ 
going outlines that all things of the infinite universe 
came forth from one thing; that there is the rise and 
progress and unfoldment of each of the preceding 
things; that there is the coming together, by propaga- 


578 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tion, of all those facts of variety on the arc of evolution, 
until all those preceding things, again become one 
thing; and that latter thing, Ultimate Harmony. 

Thus, we have made the journey, hurriedly, and by 
outline, from Unity, to and through variety, into and 
through degrees of organism and harmony, into Ultimate 
Harmony. That is the orbit of creation; that is the All 
of life. 

In the study of this volume, we will have prepared 
ourselves for a more thorough study of that mighty 
orbit. Why should we study and think in the processes 
of that orbit? Because we are an integral part of 
that orbit; and, because it is, by so thinking, and only 
by so thinking, that we shall ever be able to complete 
the journey of that orbit. 


EXERCISE CII. 


HIGHER CONTROLS. 

Revelations about so called spiritualism—Possible com¬ 
munications with departed humans—Methods neces¬ 
sary—Love and affection the wings on which to rise 
to them—No limits to the functions of Love and 
Affection. 

IN THE foregoing exercise, I have said that man 
will come, by thinking, to exercise such functional pow¬ 
ers over his environments, and over everything below 
him, as to be able to control and shape, to a great extent, 
everything in environment and below him. Now, sup¬ 
pose we transfer the standpoint of that conception, from 
our own position, to that of the next higher forms of 
life, which have risen from this sphere. Then, shall we 
not be able to say, that the higher forms of life—forms 
higher than man—if you please, are in a position to con¬ 
trol us and to shape our destinies. 

May it not be possible that each human is, today, 
being led and controlled, by a higher creature, and that 
such control will become vastly more functional for our 
good, when we came to understand and to co-operate 
with that higher controlling power? Is the interdepend¬ 
ence functional between humans and risen man, not of 
such a character as to be of utility to us? 

I wish, in this connection, to assume that departed 
humans who have risen to functional consciousness in 
the next higher zone, are already seeking and guiding 
us humans, to the utmost of their powers, which powers, 
however, are circumscribed only by our willful or ignor¬ 
ant neglect to avail ourselves of such opportunities. It 
is in the fact that when we shall come to understand 
these things more completely, and to look to that higher 
source for practical assistance, we shall receive it in 
abundance. 

We have in our world, and as a part of human ex¬ 
periences, a development along the lines of what is com¬ 
monly called Spiritualism. We have the medium, with 
his or her invisible Controls. Men and women, every¬ 
where, are flocking to those mediums for counsel and 
advice, and they are persuaded that they receive, in 
some instances at least, that for which they pay in dol¬ 
lars and cents. We know that a vast volume of that 
phenomena is in the illusions of sense perception. It 
may be honest enough, on the part of the mediums, as 

( 579 ) 


580 


THE NEW IDEA. 


it generally is on the part of patrons. But, I am bound 
to say, from a somewhat extended observation, that a 
vast proportion of that practice is spurious, in one way 
or another. 

However, all that does not do away with the biolog¬ 
ical foundations for practical communications between 
the here and the hereafter. We have seen that the rela¬ 
tivity and interdependence of all forms of life are such 
as to provide sufficient scientific foundations for the view 
that man may come into such relationship with risen 
man as will be of vast utility to him. To that end, it is 
unnecessary to awaken interest among those of the next 
higher zone. That already exists. It is only necessary 
to stimulate the necessary thinking activities of humans 
to bring about the desired results. 

If I should be asked to suggest some methods by 
which humans may make progress in the direction herein 
indicated, I would not begin by discouraging the use of 
the honest and competent medium. But, I would begin 
by suggesting that men and women should not seek to 
establish thought communication between themselves 
and the more recently departed, whether they be near 
of kin, or otherwise. On the contrary, it appears to me 
more practical to seek communication with those whom 
we know, either from the pages of history, or otherwise, 
who departed from this sphere of life, not from this gen¬ 
eration, but, from at least, a previous one. I have al¬ 
ready given sufficient reasons for that. 

There is not sufficient space left to me in this vol¬ 
ume to go into an elaboration of the methods of thinking 
for the purpose of establishing a profitable connection 
between visible and invisible man. I have devoted much 
time and energy to that department of thinking, and 
must leave the results reached to be dealt with in future 
efforts, either in lecture courses or otherwise. 

I will, in this place, only refer to one or two incidents 
of my own experience. I find that in any effort to ap¬ 
proach, or to bring to vision, a departed human, it is 
essentially necessary that one should not only know, as 
fully as possible, the life and character of that departed 
one, but should entertain, for that one, the highest emo¬ 
tions of love and affection. On that foundation, any person 
can safely stand. I do not hold that it is best to make an 
attempt to enter the upper spheres of life, in an effort 
to communicate with any one who may come along your 
way. I hold that such an experiment will end in failure. 
It is necessary, in the beginning, to single out some par¬ 
ticular person known to the Thinker, and to study that 
character until one entertains the strongest respect and 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


581 


esteem of that one. Then, an effort may be made, wholly 
in the expectation of establishing communication with 
that particular person. 

Now, I see that such communications between a 
human and a risen form of life, when the later has en¬ 
tered into the invisible mass tone life of Brotherhood, 
can be established only through the mediation of the 
Risen Head of that invisible mass tone body. It may be 
possible, however, to establish communication with one 
who has departed this life, and who has not risen to that 
exalted station, as has already been described. I am, in 
this place, extending thought along that line, a little 
higher. 

It will be noticed that, in all the range of this vol¬ 
ume, I have avoided relating personal experiences of my 
own, except in a general way, and except in the one 
instance of my efforts to bring to vision the facts con¬ 
cerning the possibilities of perpetual youth and health. 
However, I have a very wide range of personal expe¬ 
riences concomitant with efforts to establish communica¬ 
tion between myself and risen forms of life. That ex¬ 
perience, I do not care to relate on these pages, for 
various reasons. I desire to deal only with those facts 
concerning which, I can appeal to the functional think¬ 
ing of the student. He, or she, can receive very little 
benefit from the related experiences of others. However, 
in future lecture efforts, and possibly in other publica¬ 
tions, I may undertake to elaborate my own experiences 
along these lines; and when I do that, others will dis¬ 
cover that my own plan and progress, on those matters, 
differ very widely from anything that has yet been given 
to the world, on the subject. 

I will, in this place, only refer to facts which will 
appeal to the student. One may reach higher spheres of 
life, to apprehend activities of life therein, only by sus¬ 
pending the outer bodily functions and thinking exclu¬ 
sively in the psychological organism, by which higher 
substance is contacted. When that is done, the rise must 
be achieved on the functional wings of love and affec¬ 
tion. By the vibrations of those wings, man may rise 
toward the object of his love and affection, to a more 
transcendent extent; and, in doing that, he may win 
the attention and the love, and affection of the object 
of that rise. In that way, he, or she, will be able to 
establish communication with the particular person held 
in the love and affection of the Hidden Man of the Heart. 

The student will readily be convinced of the practi¬ 
cability of the process just described. To such an effort, 
no man has a right to prescribe any limit. Its possibil- 


582 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ities are as boundless as the sweep of relativity and inter¬ 
dependence, and as high as the reach of obligation and 
duty. 

But, dear reader, there is a whole world of thinking 
to Harmony for self-life unfoldment, before experiences 
of the kind just described can be profitably undertaken. 
There may be those who desire to do, what they call 
great things, and to function in the higher spheres of life 
before they have learned to function effectively and 
harmoniously in these spheres in which they bodily live. 
To such, I have the admonition to give, that they will 
utterly fail. Man must first come into personal har¬ 
mony with his own environment, and with his own outer 
tones, before he can function from the inner heart, with 
the inhabitants of higher worlds. The burden of effort 
for humans, for years to come, should be in the direction 
of unfolding each self, by self, to higher powers, and 
into greater Harmony. There is more utility in settling 
down to the glorious plan of self-life unfoldment, as it 
is in Principle, than in any attempt to take the wings 
of the morning and to fly away to spheres of glory 
beyond practical use. 


EXERCISE CIII. 


EVOLUTION OF THE SOUL. 

Most sacred Human conception—Evolution of the soul, 
or Substare, of Power, Love and Truth—Animal and 
human souls—Male and female souls—Dual souls— 
Jesus possessed a Dual soul—Secret of His higher 
Power, Love and Truth. 


IN' concluding this volume, I find it necessary to 
make some observations concerning the evolution of the 
soul. That is expedient in order to connect up some of 
the important lines of thinking in which exercise has 
already been had. The evolution, or the unfoldment of 
life, reaches out to body, mind and soul, and into the 
whole psychological organism. Evolution is not con¬ 
fined to the body, by any means. It reaches to the whole 
life, and implicates every department of the life organ¬ 
ization. 

As we have already seen, there is the soul, or sub¬ 
stare, of the primal life unit. It consists of Power, Love 
and Truth, as unfolded from primordial Principle, and 
is an individual soul. In other words, it is not divided. 
When cellular forms of life come forth, the soul, or sub¬ 
stare, of each of such units was divided into male and 
female souls, as already has been explained. Now, the 
soul of cellular units of life is in the fact of the poten¬ 
tialities of Power, Love and Truth, which are the embodi¬ 
ment of Principle. It has been seen that such unit soul 
is enveloped by a series of tone vestures, or potential 
bodies. From the elaborations of this volume, it is made 
plain that the soul will wear three etheric dual bodies, 
after it sheds the so called sub-physical body. We have 
already shown that the present physical body is dual. 

With reference to such bodies, it should be stated 
that, by the unfoldment of life, those tone bodies func¬ 
tion, in turn, to the unfoldment of the soul, or substare, 
within. Do not overlook the fact that there is the evo¬ 
lution, or unfoldment, of the soul, and that, in the final 
goal of life of Harmony, soul and body make one. 

There is the sense, of course, in which the soul of 
any form of life, from the fact of Principle, by the souls 
of the unit forms of life, of the animal and human races, 
are in the fact of an unfoldment of the potentialities of 
Principle, by which Principle divides into the Two Prin- 
( 583 ) 



584 


THE NEW IDEA. 


ciples of Power and Love, and by which those two em¬ 
brace and propagate a form of life in Truth. The soul 
is that form of life just named. It is in the nature of 
potentiality. In other words, Power, Love and Truth 
compose the soul, in such unfolded potentialities, that in 
the final goal of life, they reach Omniscience. 

It already has been explained that the primal un- 
foldment of Power, Love and Truth, from Principle, into 
the fact of a soul, or substare, of a form of life, did not 
reach beyond the status of potentiality. That conception 
lays the foundation for the evolution of the soul; and we 
see that the outer vesture tones, which envelop the soul, 
are contributory to that evolution. And, we further see, 
in that connection, that those outer bodily tones are 
propagated from the substare, and, after passing out 
into environment, they return to it again, to its unfold- 
ment, in experience. 

The soul unfolds and expands from two great causes, 
to-wit: Prom gathering into itself other souls, or sub¬ 
stare units, by which it reaches out to the fact of mass 
tone; and, also by unfoldment, in the fact of tone prop¬ 
agation, by which it rises from one degree of poten¬ 
tiality to another, until Power, Love and Truth unfold 
into the perfect Harmony of Omniscience. 

Hence, there is the soul, or substare, of the primal 
unit of life, as already stated. Then, there is the unit 
mass tone soul, or substare, of the single cell. In the 
primal unit of life, the soul was individual. In the 
primal cytula, or ovum cell, the soul was also individual. 
But, in protoplasmic, or divided cells, the soul in each is 
personal—not individual. An individual soul is not di¬ 
vided, as to Power and Love. A personal soul is a male 
or female soul. The male and female souls, which pro¬ 
ceeded from the individual soul, of the single cell, re¬ 
main divided throughout the evolution of the forms of 
life until the topmost boundary of the sub-physical zone 
is reached. Upon entering the full tone physical zone, 
they unite in everlasting wedlock, as already has been 
explained. Male and female souls rise in parallel col¬ 
umns through all the stages of evolution of animal life, 
and through human spheres, until the individuality of 
the next higher zone is realized. 

There is a lofty and sacred human conception which 
finds in the plan of life, the evolution of a transcendent 
form of life, from the primal dual cell to man and to 
trans-human spheres. I have said, with considerable 
emphasis in this volume, that the only difference between 
the man of Xazaretli, and any other human, consists in 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


585 


their respective degrees of life unfoldment, both upon 
entering, during, and upon leaving these spheres of flesh 
and blood. There is, however, revealed to vision, in a 
most sacred conception, another difference—a difference 
of most transcendent significance—but it is also a differ¬ 
ence of degrees of unfoldment. That difference is in the 
fact that while all humans are divided into male and 
female forms of life, that one form, to which reference 
is here made, was in dual individuality, or undivided 
life, from its birth into this hour, and forevermore. A 
clear vision of that sacred and supreme fact brings us 
into a realization of the trans-human powers exercised 
by that one, while here on earth. A human psycholog¬ 
ical organization has the power to bring to vision the 
extraordinary functions, in Power, Love and Truth, 
which may be exercised by the new individual risen form 
of life, wherein one man and one woman will rise into 
the fact of dual individuality. By the same rule, we can 
bring ourselves to see the super-human powers, which 
would be exercised in human spheres, by such a dual 
form of life. The Master was in the fact of that trans¬ 
cendent duality, and it is in that most marvelous form 
of life that His wonderful powers were hidden. 

A vast range of biological data may be brought to¬ 
gether and harvested into a glorious realization of the 
fact herein dimly outlined, but all that must be left to a 
future effort. The student will see, from what has been 
said, that in this most astonishing revelation, man has the 
key which unlocks the super-human character of Jesus, 
and which opens for him, the door through which he is 
to pass by unfoldment into future glory. 

The careless reader—not the student—may now say 
that this volume contradicts itself in the fact that, here¬ 
tofore, it has been declared that the possibilities of the 
unfoldment of a human are equal to those of the Great 
Teacher, and that the degree of the unfoldment reached 
by either, at any one time, is the only difference between 
them. That is the fact. I have already pointed out, that 
by means of the second marriage, by which individual 
duality is accomplished for man and woman, human life 
will come into all those greater possibilities. And, I have 
also plainly taught that that higher marriage union may 
proceed between husband and wife here on the earth. 
That duality is one of the great goals to be reached by 
human unfoldment. In future generations, it will be real¬ 
ized to its fullest extent by visible forms of mankind. 

It will be found, by a careful study of these teach¬ 
ings, that they work out a complete and harmonious sys- 


586 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tern of evolution and of self-life unfoldment. Nothing 
has been left out. There are no missing links. Some of 
the links, however, have been developed more than others. 
It is a broad system, as broad as life, and it provides a 
study, the scope of which is infinite. Its development is 
but begun. It will require a whole generation to raise 
these teachings to the summit to which human thinking 
may quite easily exalt them. It must be remembered, 
however, that Principle pays as it goes along, and that, 
by thinking in the plan and methods of this volume, the 
student will be rewarded day by day. Men rise in life, 
through degrees of wisdom and intelligence, toward 
Truth. Truth in Harmony is the first goal; Omniscience 
the final. 


SOUL EVOLUTION. 

Technique of Soul Unfoldment— There is one hard 
place in this volume. It is wherein one must bring to 
vision, in life unfoldment, the fluxing together of unit 
souls into the rising and expanding degrees of the mass- 
tone soul. I have, therefore, arranged, in skeleton form, 
some of the more prominent characteristics, or turning 
points, in the evolution of the soul, until the human soul 
is reached. The same rule applies on the arc of soul 
unfoldment above humans. I shall repeat this skeleton 
plan, in any connection in this work, where that appears 
to be necessary, so as to save the trouble of turning back, 
every time to this point, in order to refresh the memory. 

1— Principle is the portal through which the fountain 
of life is propagated from esse to existere. As the units 
pass that threshold they each assume, from the mould of 
Principle, a, certain form-tone, different from each and all 
the others. 

2— The primal propagations of Principle were in the 
units of Power and Love. 

3— Primordial Principle is in the fact of potential em¬ 
bryos, and all primal units propagated by it are in the 
same state. 

4— When Primordial Principle had divided into the 
Two Principles of Power and Love, its work, as Primor¬ 
dial Principle was finished, except as to the everlasting 
continuity of that work. 

5— All propagation beyond that point was achieved 
by the Two Principles. 

6— The first propagation by the Two Principles was 
by which a substare form of life in Truth was begotten. 

7— That form of life is the primal soul. 

8— Primordial Principle transmitted its nature, one 




NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


587 


half to Power, and the other half to Love, so that to¬ 
gether, or in the sum of them both, their potentialities are 
equal to those of the parent Principle, in the sum total of 
all the primal units of life that ever have, or ever will 
come forth from that parental fountain. 

9— Primordial Principle was not in the fullness of un- 
foldment, but in the wholeness of potential embryos neces¬ 
sary to complete unfoldment into Omnicience, or Absolute 
life. 

10— It was the same with its children, called Power 
and Love, and with its grand child of Truth. They were 
each and all in potentiality. 

11— The number of the primal units of Power and 
Truth, already, and yet to be, propagated, is infinite; so 
also is the number of secondary forms of life in potential 
Truth. Each differs from the other in form tone. The 
functions of oscillation already have been elaborated. 

12— Thus we have primal souls in the facts and func¬ 
tions of potential embryos. They are the data, the begin¬ 
ning points of soul unfoldment. 

13— The primal soul was in three fundamental tones, 
known to the scale of harmonics as C, E, and G. It very 
soon expanded into the functional use of six other tones, 
and a little later to three more, making twelve in all. 

14— From that primitive state, the soul has unfolded, 
until, today, one of the highest human souls comprehends 
an innumerable number of tones. The final soul will em¬ 
brace them all—the form tones of the Ultimate Infinite 
Universe. 

15— We now hold in vision a single primal soul, in the 
three fundamental tones of Power, Love and Truth. As 
we think of it existing in the highest dual heavens—the 
highest dual spiritual-celestial heavens, it is provided with 
a double tone vesture body, to-wit: an inner spiritual body 
of spiritual Power, Love and Truth, and an outer body of 
Celestial Power, Love and Truth. The soul within that 
double, or dual body, is in the three fundamental tones 
of primal Power, Love and Truth, and is itself dual. Later, 
we see that single dual soul clothed with a three-fold 
body of spiritual-celestial, divine-mental, and angelic- 
physical tones. Thus all of its tone bodies are dual. That 
is important. It should be brought to clear vision. 
Finally we see that same single soul clothed in a 
fourth dual body of sub-angelic Power, Love and 
Truth, and sub-physical Power, Love and Truth. 

16— All those bodies are in potential degrees, or tones, 
of intelligence, as to their upper, or inner sides, and in po- 


588 


THE NEW IDEA. 


tential degrees, or tones, of wisdom, as to their lower, or 
outer sides. 

17— It must be remembered that as the single primal 
soul began to propagate tone-vesture bodies, as aforesaid, 
it also began to fellowship with other primale unit souls 
which, in like manner, propagated tone bodies for their 
respective uses and functions. 

18— When three or more of these come together in 

fellowship, or in joint propogation, two mighty facts, 
or processes were realized, to-wit: (1) The primal souls 

and bodies of such fellowship circles propagated new 
souls and bodies; and (2) such new souls and bodies 
were by that propagation fluxed into a new metamor¬ 
phosis of one mass tone soul and body. 

19— That is precisely the fact of the animal or hu¬ 
man cell. The primal cell is in the fact of a mass tone 
male-female, or dual soul and body, while the proto¬ 
plasmic cells are in the separated facts of male mass tone, 
and female mass tone souls and bodies. 

20— This, in the birth of the unit organism of animal 
and human forms of life, there was, first, the gathering 
together, by way of interdependent, or sociological asso¬ 
ciation, in the plan of apperception, of many single 
primal souls, with their respective four-fold bodies; and, 
secondly, the division of them all, on the boundary lines 
dividing their respective, spiritual and celestial sides., 
resulting in male mass tone souls, and female mass tone 
souls, as aforesaid. 

21— That wonder work of propagation, by which, 
first, a dual mass tone soul come forth; and, secondly, 
male and female mass tone souls rose, characterized the 
glory of the morning in which the second birth of life 
transpired. 

22— From that event, mass tone souls rose in separ- 
ted dual columns, but when a certain stage of soul un- 
foldment is reached, male and female souls reunite into 
the individuality of duality. 

23— In some wonderful and incomprehensible way 
the soul of Jesus of Nazareth had unfolded to that trans¬ 
cendent duality, or was always in that powerful status; 
and, it is in the plan of life that the souls of one man 
and one woman shall become the same, for all mankind. 
That is the secret of the coming power, and ultimate 
omniscience of the rising human soul. 

24— The unfoldment of the soul on the arc of evolu¬ 
tion, from and after the second birth of life, up to the 
human soul status, is by the continuous fluxing of cellu¬ 
lar unit souls into the mass tone soul, by propagation; 


NEW TONE METHOD OP THINKING. 


589 


and, that is the method in force among hnmans of the 
present generation. Further, that method will continue 
all the way of the arc of evolution, only, that later on, 
in spheres now invisible, mass tone souls will flux to¬ 
gether into the larger mass tone Harmony, of duality. 
Already that latter process is going forward imper¬ 
ceptibly. 

25— -There is the unfoldment of the four successive 
bodies jointly, simultaneously with the soul. Man should 
unfold soul and body together. That is achieved by the 
joint oscillations of the spiritual and celestial triad tones 
of the successive bodies, by which the latter propagate 
the rise and expansion of the soul. Thus the tones of 
the successive vesture bodies, which were propagated by 
the oscillations of the soul, return in propagations there¬ 
to, by the orbital plan of Principle; and, in' the latter 
processes, the soul is raised and expanded. In that way 
there is the renewal of the whole man, body, mind and 
soul. 

26— By the unfoldment of the soul, the body is un¬ 
folded; by the unfoldment of the body, the soul is un¬ 
folded. The processes are mutual. The finale of that 
evolution is the invisible new man, wherein soul and 
body become one integral and undivided whole. 

Any one who will master the foregoing twenty-six 
short paragraphs, so as to bring their teachings to clear 
vision, will, in that result, possess the key to acomplete 
understanding of all the doctrines taught in this volume. 
Each student should familiarize himself, or herself, with 
each item in the foregoing, so as to be able to recall, 
any one or all, at will. The student will find it a handy 
ready reckoner for almost constant use in the study of 
these pages. 


EXERCISE CIV. 


EVOLUTION OF DUALITY. 

Division and reunion of Principle—Significance of those 
transcendent processes of Unfoldment—The final 
duality of the Two Principles in One form of Life— 
The unfoldment of Power, Love and Truth. 


WE reach the conclusion of this volume in au Exer¬ 
cise of Thinking in the evolution of duality. We first 
had the duality of Principle, by division, by which the 
Two Principles came forth in the facts of Power and 
Love. Those united to propagate a form of life in Truth. 
Then, by processes of creation, the celestial Principle 
came forth, which worked a wider separation of the Two 
Principles. As a result of that, spiritual Power and Love 
begot a form of life in Truth; and celestial Power and 
Love begot a form of life in Truth. 

In that way spiritual Power and Love, on the one 
hand, and celestial Power and Love, on the other propa¬ 
gated forms of life in Truth. The first were in intelli¬ 
gence, the last in wisdom. Thus, prior to the birth of 
animal, or human forms of life, all life organisms were 
divided into two great classes, somewhat as they are 
divided today, to-wit: (1) into spiritual, and (2) into 
celestial forms. In a way that was a sexual division also. 

It is seen that processes functional to creation were 
in the joint, or reciprocal action, or oscillation of the 
spiritual and celestial sides of the duality of units, and 
organized forms of molecular life. There could be no 
process without that joint oscillation of duality. It is 
the very same in all things today. Thinking has ever 
been, and forever will be, by the joint, or interdependent 
oscillations of the spiritual and celestial Principles—by 
the alternating processes of wisdom, and intelligence in 
propagation. 

At the birth of animal life—at the birth of the cel¬ 
lular unit, that division assumed a new aspect. Separated 
male and female forms of life rose, in dual columns, and 
they so appear, today, man is on one side, woman on the 
other. In that divided state, neither the man, nor the 
woman can exercise the powers which they respectfully 
feel is their inherent right. 

It is seen that, on the arc of extension, there is the 
division of Principle, at every turn, while on the arc of 

( 590 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


591 


evolution, there is the reunion of Principle, in larger 
measure, in every new metamorphosis of Harmony. In 
a sense creation is the division and reunion of Principle, 
hut, as we plainly see, the parts of Principle reunited dif¬ 
fer widely from their condition at the time of division. 
The progress of the parts—the growth of the units, and 
unit organisms—is wherein the element of unfoldment 
abides. 

The arc of evolution is whereon we see the reunion of 
Powers, Love and Truth. The highest types of it are 
Principle fluxing together in rising and expanding de¬ 
grees of Harmony. With each such rise and expansion 
there is a corresponding rise and expansion of Power, Love 
and Truth. The highest types of that evolution are 
exhibited in man; still higher expressions of Power, Love 
and Truth are demonstrated in the new man. The 
greatest stride is made in the evolution of Power, Love 
and Truth, by the reunion of the male and female Prin¬ 
ciples, in the new dual individuality to which man and 
woman are rising. Hence, any interpretation of life un¬ 
foldment which does not bring to clear vision, the fact 
of the reunion of the male and female Principles—the 
man and the woman—into one dual form of life is mani¬ 
festly imperfect, and in error. An increase of Power, 
Love and Truth could not be achieved without implicat¬ 
ing that reunion. 

Hence we see that the second marriage union, which 
is wrought by Power, Love and Truth, unfolds to higher 
and more transcendent degrees of Power, Love and Truth. 
Therefore, I say, that Jesus, who was a higher embodi¬ 
ment of Power, Love and Truth than has yet been mani¬ 
fested in any other human form of life, was essentially 
in a metamorphosis of both spiritual and celestial Power, 
Love and Truth, in one dual form of life; and, not only 
that, but was also in a transcendent metamorphosis of the 
man and the woman, in one partly incomprehensible 
form of life. That is plain to a perfected vision of the 
plan of life, when considered in connection with the pow¬ 
ers displayed by Him. while visibly on earth. The origin 
of the duality, or the functional forces which propagated 
to it will be elaborated in a future effort. 

I am satisfied that a higher development, or unfold¬ 
ment of the spiritual and celestial Principles in man, and 
particularly in man and woman, by and between whom 
they oscillate in higher functions of creation, is neces¬ 
sary to the conquest of that event called death. Higher 
methods of thinking—more effective methods of thinking 
will certainly work out, for men and women, a mighty 


532 


THE NEW IDEA. 


revision of courtship and marriage. The transcendent 
biological institution of marriage, hidden in human 
courtship and marriage is not very well understood. The 
teachings of this Exercise, and of this volume will make 
it plainer, and invest it with greater interest. That is 
necessary. 

It is because the marriage union of our generations 
is not fully consummated—not carried beyond mere phys¬ 
ical subvesture tones—that its fruits are so feeble. It 
does not reach very much beyond the functions necessary 
for the propagation of human bodies; and to a conform¬ 
ity with the better sentiments of civilization in connec¬ 
tion therewith. When it has been extended to the actual 
marriage union of two invisible life organizations—of the 
real man and the real woman far more transcendent pow¬ 
ers will become visible in results. 

As soon as, and in the measure in which that tran¬ 
scendent institution is transferred from invisible to vis¬ 
ible spheres, those eventuations called physical old age 
and death will be overcome, provided other necessary 
methods of thinking are concomitant with that one. I 
hope, in the near future to elaborate functional methods 
of thinking for a higher consummation of wedlock, so 
that the higher fruits possible to that institution will be 
realized. 


EXERCISE CV. 


FIVE PRE-HUMAN MAN RACES. 

Evolution in invisible spheres—Very short sum-total 
period of unfoldment in spheres visible to humans— 
Functions of the nervous system—Its wonderful as¬ 
sociation in apperception—Nervous system of con¬ 
sciousness—The magnetic system. 


IN an earlier portion of this volume the five pre-hu¬ 
man man races were incidentally referred to, without 
elaboration of any sort in that connection. It was stated, 
then, that the great subject, which has engaged consider¬ 
able attention on the part of scientific research would not 
be considered at any length in this work. However, that 
feature of biology demands something further than has, 
so far, been said. 

I wish, in the first place, to call attention to the fact 
that the evolution of the forms of life below man, or of 
the animal forms, which existed prior to the races of pre¬ 
human man, is practically visible to humans. In a sense 
the evolution of animal forms proceeds in plain view. At 
any rate man has come into that idea. The unfoldment of 
animal life is, so to speak, concomitant with the processes 
of visible evolution. But that idea is in error. In all the 
long series of ages since the birth of animal life, in the 
fact of the propagation of cellular units, but a mere pinch 
of the processes of animal evolution has been visible to 
man. Nor would it have been different had humans lived 
in the full functions of their present powers in both of the 
tertiary geological ages. 

In all the evolution of animal souls, from the sub¬ 
stare of the primal cell, to the first of the prehuman man 
races, not a thousandth part of the period of the life of any 
one has been devoted to the work of obtaining experience 
in a physical subvesture body. All the other and larger 
portions of time here involved have been used in the work 
of unfoldment in etheric bodies—in bodies invisible to the 
animal or human eye. 

Because that is a fact, man has come to consider only 
those occasional dots in the vista of ages, concerning the 
periods of animal unfoldment, wherein there was life 
in a visible body. No reference is made to those vastly 
longer periods of time between each of such appearances. 
Science does not bother itself with those, much less to 

( 593 ) 



594 


THE NEW IDEA. 


divine the processes of evolution therein. In that way, I 
say, man has come to consider the stages of the unfoldment 
of the successive fixed and intermediate species of the 
animal races, as having gone forward in open view. 

It is necessary to a full understanding of the ideas of 
this exercise, that the student shall come to see how little 
of the whole period of the life of any one form, counting 
from the single cell to man, is devoted to activity in a body 
visible to humans. Some of the animal fixed and interme¬ 
diate species live but a very short time in the physical 
subvesture body. From five to one hundred years might 
be considered as the extreme limits of a very wide range 
of animal life organizations. Below that, and including 
the insect races the limit of visible body life is from a few 
seconds, and a few hours upward. 

It is known, of course, that all those forms of life con¬ 
tinue to live in invisible bodies, or in spheres invisible to 
man, during all those vast periods of time when they do 
not wear sub-phvsical tone bodies. Science has not yet 
determined, nor defined those conditions of a life organiza¬ 
tion which require contact with physical subvesture tones. 
One fact is self evident. It is that the demand for such 
contact is very slight compared with the requirements 
for etheric existence. Forms of life do not very often 
descend into sub-physical spheres, and when they do, they 
remain for only a very brief period, at a time, devoting 
more than nine hundred and ninety-nine one thousandeths 
of their W'hole time to the demands of invisible spheres. 

By the way, that rule does not apply to humans, 
except in the idea that the latter rose from the animal 
races, and in that other idea, that in certain cases, they 
pass out of this sphere on the scale of psychological dis¬ 
organization, to return to human spheres by way of rein¬ 
carnation. 

It is now sought to bring two important facts to 
vision, to-wit: (1), first, the very short sum-total period 
of time, in which any rising form of animal life dwells in 
a visible body ; and (2), the wonderful processes of life 
unfoldment which are wrought in bodies invisible to 
humans. We are not in a position to elaborate the latter, 
as yet, or rather, I have not yet done so, for the reason 
that those steps of progress are not all implicated by the 
teachings of this volume. We shall reach out to a touch 
with some of them in this exercise. 

When the mind of the student has come into a realiza¬ 
tion of the fact that all but a mere item of the evolution of 
pre-human forms of life has been propagated in spheres 
invisible to man, he is ready for the statement, already 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


595 


made in this volume, that the five pre-human races consti¬ 
tuting the so-called missing links in the evolution of man 
were infolded completely in nearby invisible spheres of 
life. That is the fact. 

We must now come to see the great functions of those 
five departments of life unfoldment. We say, in the first 
place, that each, in turn, is functional to sentient unfold¬ 
ment—to a more perfect development of sentient con¬ 
sciousness. The first pre-human man estate was for the 
purpose of perfecting the nervous system. In that period 
the sense of touch was unfolded to higher functions. It 
is quite plain to the thinker that such advances could not 
well be accomplished in a physical subvesture body. With 
the latter thrown off, and with a body, or life organization 
composed of units, each without the lower vestures, it is 
seen that the outer body would then be in the fact of 
the outer vestures of its units, to-wit.: pure physical mag¬ 
netic ether. In that state the development of the nervous 
system would be quite easy, as one can see. That was 
necessary to a higher unfoldment of mental functions, 
because we all know that a highly developed nervous 
system is necessary to psychological advancement. 

Hence, it is seen that the first pre-human stage of man 
was particularly functional to a more perfect nervous 
system. The four other stages which followed were in 
extension of the same department of evolution. The func¬ 
tions of the sense of taste depend exclusively upon the 
quality and tension of the nervous system. It is the same 
with the sense of smell. Hence there was not only the 
development of nerve centers and organism, but an as¬ 
sociation of such organism in appreciation, so that the 
sensations of taste and smell could be conveyed to con¬ 
sciousness. 

It is seen that the development of the bodily nervous 
system, in its higher stages is a work of equal delicacy 
with that of the unfoldment of psychological organism. 
Indeed the two organisms are so closely interwoven that 
it is impossible to draw a line between them. The func¬ 
tions of taste and smell, aside from serving the require¬ 
ments of the conscious form of life, work out a proper 
association of the nerve organs, in relativity and interde¬ 
pendence, which is in the science of apperception. 

The functions of hearing and vision work a still fur¬ 
ther advance, or rise, of the nerve organism. In short the 
evolution of the sense organs of taste, smell, hearing and 
vision, and their succeeding functions, find their highest 
work in developing the nervous system of human life or¬ 
ganizations. All the senses function by the nerve organ- 


596 


THE NEW IDEA. 


isms, and the activities of those organs propagate a higher, 
and still higher association of nerve organs and functions 
in the science of apperception, or association, in relativ¬ 
ity and interdependence. It is plain that man feels, tastes, 
smells, hears and sees by the functions of his nervous or¬ 
ganism. In short, all sense perception is by the functional 
activities of the nerves, the complexity of the nervous or¬ 
ganism being second only to that of the psychological; 
and, not only that, but it operates as a base for the activ¬ 
ities of the latter. 

Hence, we say that the physiological nerve organiza¬ 
tion feels, tastes, smells, hears, sees and thinks, in func¬ 
tional degrees of wisdom and intelligence, just as the psy¬ 
chological organism does on a little higher scale; but all 
that is resolved to the interdependent dual thinking of 
the spiritual and celestial Principles. 

It is plain that when the higher man-ape families 
reached a certain harmony point in life unfoldment, they 
shed their physical bodies, and went forth in etheric 
bodies—bodies, the units of which were without phys¬ 
ical subvesture tones—to function in invisible etheric 
spheres, for the more perfect evolution of their sentient 
organisms. In a sense, the sensitive nerve organisms of 
their etheric bodies had put on protecting physical sub¬ 
vesture bodies, as an outer form clothing, until those sens¬ 
itive nerves and tissues had become strong enough, in 
their higher and liner vestures to be able to lay them 
aside. Thus, laying them aside, they begin to function in 
the fact of their higher bodily organism, so to speak, 
in order to unfold that to higher functions. 

When that mighty work was completed in all its 
five form stages, the life organization reached the human 
stage of perfection, and came back here to wear, for a 
brief finishing period, a physical subvesture body to fit 
its higher human form. 

I desire to impress the fact, in this connection, that 
what is generally called the development of the nervous 
system reaches out to the unfoldment of the whole man, 
body, mind and soul. The visible nerve and tissue are 
the base upon which the invisible nerve and tissue rest. 
The former unfolds into the latter, all the way from the 
outmost to the inmost tones. The development of the 
outer tone nerves and tissues fluxes their tones into the 
higher ones, by propagation, and there is the consequent 
rise of propagation, in its sweep, until it reaches the in¬ 
most soul and produces responsive oscillations from that 
transcendent centre, by which there is further unfoldment 
of the whole man. 


NHW TONE METHOD OP THINKING. 


597 


There is the nervous system of the psychological or¬ 
ganism, as well as of the physical, or sub-physical. Unless 
there be a rugged development of them all, there will be 
feebleness of both mind and body and soul. Indeed, there 
is the nervous system of the soul, and of the whole life. 
Every tone of the whole life organization, from the low¬ 
est, or outmost, to the highest, or inmost, is magnetic. 
Even the sub-physical tones are magnetic. A tone of any 
kind, or class, is always magnetic. Oscillation is magnetic, 
whether of the three fundamental tones of the primal soul, 
or of any of the outer vesture tones. Everything, there¬ 
fore, of the whole life organization, high or low, is in the 
transcendent fact of an interdependent magnetic system. 

That is a climax of thought which the student should 
hold in steady vision. It is of supreme importance and 
transcendent functions for self-life unfoldment. Prom 
that conception, which is in Truth, we come to see the 
mighty forces at work to raise and perfect, and render 
harmonious, the whole nerve and tissue organism of man, 
in those five stages of pre-human man. Those prehuman 
man methods of thinking worked out a complete unfold¬ 
ment of celestial nerve and tissue organism, to the har¬ 
mony point of the five planes, or spheres of sentient vibra¬ 
tion, and to their correspondences in the dual psycholog¬ 
ical region. 

It is necessary, now, to bring to vision, again, the 
fact of the duality of the tones of the whole nervous sys¬ 
tem of man—of the units composing it. Those units, and 
that whole are in spiritual-celestial tones, so that the un¬ 
foldment of one is the development, or evolution, 
of both. It is absolutely impossible to develop 
the celestial, or sentient side of man, without 
unfolding the spiritual side also, provided there be 
the consequent unfoldment of the psychological organism. 
Both are implicated in the rise and expansion of the 
new man. In the absence of that mutual co-operation of 
the two sides of man’s duality, there is inharmony, and 
such discordant results as are commonly called afflictions. 

During the five stages of the unfoldment of pre¬ 
human man, while in invisible spheres, which is the same 
as saying, while he existed outside of a physical subresture 
tone body, there was the development, in the science of ap¬ 
perception, or natural association, sometimes called, “nat¬ 
ural selection, ’ ’ of the whole nervous system, celestially, 
spiritually, and psychologically. That unfoldment must 
be considered from all three standpoints just named. 
When the five stages of it named had been completed, 
man was ready, by the fact of the attained harmony of 


598 


THE NEW IDEA. 


his magnetic system to assume the human state, which he 
did, by appropriating a sub-physical body for the last 
time, so far as biological necessities are concerned. 

Why did man return to a physical subvesture body at 
all? For the best of reasons. The paramount object was 
to resume life in spheres where separate male and female 
forms propagate bodily form tones. Moreover, man had 
not yet risen to wear the highest sub-physical form tone 
bodies, such as humans function in, and that experience 
was necessary to further perfect his dual nervous or mag¬ 
netic system. 


EXERCISE CVI. 


RISING AS A WHOLE. 

Organism of the soul—Rise and expansion of the soul— 
Real status of the soul—The new man—Unfoldment 
of the soul and body simultaneously—Integrity of 
the whole form of life—Preponderance of the celestial 
tones—Equality of duality. 


THE HUMAN life organization must rise from the 
standpoint of all its parts, else its unfoldment will be 
imperfect and inharmonious. Any process of thinking, 
in the plan of Principle, must implicate all the tones of 
the life form and including the inmost, to and including 
the outmost—from and including the soul, to and includ¬ 
ing the outmost body. In short, man must unfold as a 
whole. He must unfold celestially, as well as spiritually; 
sentiently as well as psychologically. 

In order to reach the goal of this particular Exercise, 
it is necessary, in the first place, to point out, once more, 
in what particular fact the soul consists, together with 
its tone relation with all its vestures, whether the latter 
consist of the outmost physical subvesture body, or one 
of the inner germinating bodies, to be worn visibly, in 
some future state. Let it be said bluntly, that the soul 
of man is not. exclusively, spiritual. The old idea that 
the soul of man is in the fact of a spirit, or Spirit, is ob¬ 
solete. It is not in Truth. 

Man is a triad. First, by his duality he is both spir¬ 
itual and celestial. That has been fully elaborated. Then, 
in the fact of his tri-fold organism, he is spiritual, celes¬ 
tial and psychological. The latter is that higher part of 
man, commonly called consciousness, which is propagated 
by the joint thinking of the spiritual and celestial duality. 
That latter is the soul. That soul of man has been trans¬ 
mitted from one form of life to another, all the way up 
the arc of evolution, from the fact of the substare of the 
cell to a higher, purer, stronger, and more expanded soul 
in each succeeding higher form, until man is reached. 
From the latter point, it, of course, rises still higher, and 
yet higher, until Omniscience is attained. 

I desire very much that the student will give to the 
next preceding paragraph most careful and diligent think¬ 
ing. The greater portion of this whole volume has been 
devoted to an elaboration of life units, and unit organ- 

( 599 ) 



600 


THE NEW IDEA. 


isms, and mass-tone bodies, and the internal tone organ¬ 
izations of each such harmony point, with the almost ex¬ 
clusive purpose of bringing to clear vision the facts ex¬ 
pressed in the next preceding paragraph. 

Because the soul, or substare of each unit is at its 
center; and because all other tone vestures envelop it, 
man has come to think of that substare, when in the mass- 
tone of many, as in man, as the real soul. Suppose, in 
order to assist psychological vision, we regard the soul 
of man to be in that fact, for a few minutes. What will 
be the result of such thinking in the event of the disso¬ 
lution, or separation of the units composing the body. 
It is at once seen that such a soul would be dissolved, 
—dissipated in such an event—because, in such a disso¬ 
lution, or separation of the units, they would carry away 
from the sociological bodily compact, their substares, and 
both the spiritual and celestial sides of their respective 
dualities. In that case there would be nothing left, be¬ 
cause the integrity of the life units cannot be disinte¬ 
grated. 

It must be brought to vision that the real soul of man 
is the new man— the at present invisible man, and, for 
that matter, the forever invisible man, from the viewpoint 
of the present, or any succeeding body. That new man—• 
the soul—I say, is propagated by the oscillations—think¬ 
ing—of the spiritual and celestial Principles, which re¬ 
side in the dual units, and in mass-form, in the mass-body. 

The foregoinsr partial repetition is permitted here in 
order to emphasize a still more important fact. That 
fact is hidden in the first paragraph of this Exercise. 
Hence, I repeat, man must unfold from the standpoint 
of each one of his tone vestures, as well as from that of 
the physical-spiritual subvestures: and as well as from 
that of the substare of each unit. In other words he must 
unfold from his outer visible bodily tones, and from the 
inner tones of each of his germinating tone bodies, and 
the whole of that unfoldment must be into the real soul 
—into the rising new man— the real man—the only soul 
there is or can be in a rational soul sense. 

In other words the real soul of man is propagated 
from the substares of tone units, which are in the tones 
of potential Power, Love and Truth; and also from all the 
outer tones of duality; and that propagation is by the 
joint oscillations of the spiritual and celestial Principles 
of the units and the mass-forms; and, further, that propa¬ 
gation has been going forward in that way, and by those 
methods, since life was born, and it will continue until 
the Ultimate Infinite Universe is resolved to one soul of 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


601 


Harmony, with all other souls as integral constituents 
thereof. 

Prom the mere designation of the fact of the soul, 
we have branched into the evolution of the soul, impli¬ 
cating the necessity of a fluxing together of the tones of 
intelligence, as also the tones of wisdom, in order to se¬ 
cure the unfoldment of the whole man, body, mind and 
spirit, which is the only method of soul unfoldment. It 
will assist our ideas, in this connection to analyze some 
of the utterances of Paul Tyner, author of “Through the 
Invisible,” etc. Here is one: “The Spiritual Life is 
the present life spiritually discerned.” In granting the 
correctness of that statement, one must realize that it is 
confined to a view of life from the standpoint of only one 
side of man’s duality—the spiritual side. It cannot be 
in Truth from the standpoint of the soul, because that it 
both spiritual and celestial. The soul is the rising new 
creature and contains propagations, so to speak, fluxed 
together, in a new and rising metamorphosis, from all 
the tones of the life organization. However, spiritual dis¬ 
cernment is an exceedingly important matter, but not 
more so than celestial discernment. The two are always 
in mutual equality. 

Again, Mr. Tyner says: “Not things, but the point 
of view, is vital and important. To be spiritually minded 
is life.” .But to be celestially minded is life also. Again: 
“To see life from the standpoint of the Soul is to see 
straight.” I will venture to change that saying so that 
it will conform to this system, to-wit.: “To see life from 
the standpoint of ‘spiritual intelligence’ is to see straight.” 
The idea of straightness, or rightness is a spiritual con¬ 
ception. It does not necessarily implicate wisdom. The 
soul is dual; it is in wisdom as well as intelligence, which 
is the same as saying that it is both spiritual and celes¬ 
tial in its tones. I have already pointed out that a spir¬ 
itual soul, or substare, is in the facts of spiritual Power, 
Love and Truth, functioning in intelligence; that a ce¬ 
lestial soul, or substare is in the facts of celestial Power, 
Love and Truth, functioning in wisdom. I now declare 
that a human soul is in the faets of both spiritual and 
celestial Power, Love and Truth, and in both spiritual 
intelligence and celestial wisdom. 

It may be somewhat astonishing, but it is true, that 
a human soul is potentially higher than either a spiritual 
or a celestial soul, in their separate capacities, because it 
is in those transcendent effects propagated by the joint 
thinking of both. 

Soul realization dawns in thinking in the method of 


602 


THE NEW IDEA. 


the Two Principles, which is in the fact of the joint 
oscillations of intelligence and wisdom—the straight and 
the curved lines—by which the real man— the invisible 
man—is unfolded. Mr. Tyner says: “There is in us 
all an inmost centre where Truth abides in fullness.’’ I 
would rather render that as follows: there is in us all 
an inmost centre—the hidden man of the heart—where 
Power, Love and Truth, in the potential embodiment of 
Principle—abides, and from which transcendent foun¬ 
tains, man, by thinking, may unfold into the fullness of 
Truth. Again he says: “Realization of Truth in the in¬ 
ner confers rule and dominion over all things in the 
outer, moulding (unfolding) them, day by day, into the 
reflection and likeness, (realities) of Absolute Truth, its 
Fullness of Power, its Beauty of Wholeness ... its 
Perfect Peace.’’ With the two changes indicated by the 
parenthesis, that sentence will fit into this system of 
thinking. 

I think I may assume, without the slightest offense 
to the sensibilities of such noble personalities as Paul 
Tyner, Lillian Whiting, and others of their grand type, 
whose thought pictures of the pure and the beautiful pro¬ 
vide us with such healthful soul-food, that they are think¬ 
ing under a slight misapprehension of the nature and rel¬ 
ativity of the human soul. Let me say that there is in 
reality, a distinctive human soul. It is not merely that 
the soul of man dwells in a human body, in order to ob¬ 
tain human experience. It is more than that. The soul 
in a human body is a human soul, unlike any soul life 
prior or subsequent to it. It is in the fact of the human 
soul status. Prior to its advent in a human body it was 
in a different condition; and when it leaves a human body 
on an ascending scale, it is also different, in that it is 
higher and more expanded, and more beautiful. 

Nor is the human soul altogether spiritual. It is 
concerning the duality of the human soul wherein modern 
thinkers most greatly err. They cling to the old idea 
that it is purely spiritual—that it was unfolded from a 
source higher than that from which the visible body, 
or the invisible germinating bodies are unfolded. To 
so think is error. Man was unfolded body, mind 
and soul, from the same source—from Absolute 
Being by Principle. That is clearly demonstrated from 
the foregoing pages. That study will remove any doubt 
that may have previously existed on the subject. In fact 
the earth, a planet, an animal, or any other fact or thing, 
of the universe, came from the same ultimate source as the 
soul. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


603 


The soul is dual. It exists in spiritual and celestial 
duality. It exists, from its most primal to its most per¬ 
fect and completely unfolded state, as compared with its 
bodily envelope, in the fact of the partly, or completely, 
risen life. From its double primal state of spiritual and 
celestial tones—of the tones of spiritual Power, Love and 
T?uth, and celestial Power, Love and Truth, it has existed, 
and will evermore continue to exist, as the effect of joint 
spiritual and celestial oscillations; and, therefore, its 
substance is both spiritual and celestial. Not only is that 
the fact, but the sides of its duality embrace all of the 
risen triad tones of both the spiritual and the celestial. 
It is remembered that that which is propagated from 
any form of life is in the substance of that form from 
which it is propagated, although it may be in a higher 
form-tone. Now the spiritual triad tones are, on a de¬ 
scending scale, spiritual, divine and angelic; and, the 
celestial triad tones are, on the same scale, celestial, 
mental and physical. All those tones are implicated in 
the propagation of the soul to a higher status. 

Then, we have physical tones in the soul, do we? 
Not exactly in that way, dear reader. What then? It is 
in this way: the spiritual and the celestial tones join in a 
mass-tone of each, and jointly propagate the new man— 
the risen man—body, mind and soul. The new tones—the 
tones of the new man— are, in Principle, the same as 
the old ones, but they are higher, by propagation—in 
higher substance. The relativity and interdependence of 
the tones—all the tones—remain the same in the new as 
in the old. The form is higher. The metamorphosis 
changes, gradually, with each step of unfoldment. 

By the involution of unfoldment, as in the plan of 
life, the outer bodily tones, or their effects in propagation, 
rises into the new man, so that, in that sense, when man 
comes to think in higher and more scientific methods, 
there will no longer eventuate that phenomena commonly 
called death of the body, because those tones will rise, 
in regular order, by propagation, into the new. It is 
seen, therefore, that the resurrection of biology, as well as 
that of the sacred scriptures, when the latter comes to be 
more fully understood, is a continuous process of propa¬ 
gation. 

I, therefore, warn thinkers against the idea of plac¬ 
ing a higher, or more sacred esteem upon the spiritual 
than upon the celestial. Let me call artention to the 
fact that the primal souls of the units of life possessed, 
or were primarily composed of, a greater number of ce¬ 
lestial than spiritual tones. We see, by the life scale of 


GQ4 


THE NEW IDEA. 


harmonics, that two of the three fundamental tones are 
celestial. Now, the primal soul consists of three funda¬ 
mental tones, as is fully elaborated later on these pages. 
They are C, E and G. Both C and E are celestial, while 
G alone is spiritual. 

We know that, in a way which we cannot fully 
understand, the divine tone is fuller than any other 
of the spiritual tones, and that those of F and B pro¬ 
ceeded from G. On the celestial side, the tones of C and 
E came forth simultaneously with the spiritual tone of 
G; and the celestial tone of D, unfolded simultaneously 
with the celestial tones of F and B. The mass-tone of A 
was unfolded last; but, while that tone is located, so to 
speak, on the spiritual scale, between G and B, we know 
that it is a fluxing together of all the other tones, and tone 
fractions of the scale, into the Harmony point of propa¬ 
gation, by which the risen, or new life, is propagated. 
Hence, the real soul is propagated from all the tones of 
the dual scale of life harmonies, and, by the risen fact— 
the effects of propagation—it is wherein all the lower 
tones are transformed, and, wherein, in that way, they 
survive. 

All the foregoing has been said in order to bring 
to the vision of students the fact that the celestial side 
of the soul is equally important and functional with the 
spiritual side. In other words, wisdom is equally inter¬ 
dependent with intelligence. It has already been stated 
that spiritual Power, Love and Truth are in the meta¬ 
morphosis of intelligence; and, that celestial Power, Love 
and Truth are in the metamorphosis of wisdom. Apply 
those facts to the human soul, and we at once see that 
its duality is in the facts of spiritual intelligence and 
celestial wisdom. Intelligence always is spiritual. Wis¬ 
dom always is celestial. 

Anyone who esteems the spiritual above the celestial 
exalts intelligence above wisdow, Power above Love. 

To be spiritually-minded is life; but it must be re¬ 
membered that the spirituallv-mindedness referred to by 
that sacred symbol is in the idea that the dual invisible 
soul is generally held in thought as purely and exclusively 
spiritual, because completely invisible. In all ages, the 
invisible life has been regarded as spiritual life exclus¬ 
ively. That is error. As much of invisible life is celestial 
as spiritual. Both are one life in the final unfoldment 
of Harmony. 

It is not that we shall lower spiritual standards in 
the least, but that we must come to exalt celestial facts. 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


605 


Both are equally interdependent—equally sacred, equally 
beautiful and equally pure. 

Wherein is the difference? That already has been 
explained, but I may add here: Intelligence always is 
right to the extent of the degree of its unfoldment, while 
wisdom is right only by jointly oscillating with intelli¬ 
gence, a degree of the one, with a degree of the other. 
That should be brought to clear vision. Intelligence 
knows; wisdom knows how. Power is force; Love is 
force in utility. 

I have formulated this Thinking Exercise in the hope 
that those who so grandly unfold the pure and the beau¬ 
tiful in their thinking and acting, will no longer find 
their sources exclusively in tones spiritual, but in tones 
celestial as well. 




EXERCISE CVII. 


CHOOSING A KINGDOM. 

The Twelve Kingdoms of Life—This volume will train 
students to choose one of them—Appeal to students. 


ONE who has become trained to think in the tone 
methods of Principle may seek the solitude of the closet, 
or the chamber, and there, alone, separate from all others, 
for the time, attune his life organization, by propulsions 
of desire, choice and motive, in the power of the oscilla¬ 
tions of Principle, commonly called volition, until he can 
hear, psychologically, in the voice of silence, the sweet 
songs of his own thoughts, and ideas; and until he is 
transported, body, mind and soul, into a state of harmony, 
wherein all is youth, and health, and purity. 

It is remembered that as trillions of invisible 
thought tones fellowship, and propagate ideas, in the 
higher realms of the human life organization, there is the 
music of oscillation. The units composing the higher psy¬ 
chological tones are, of course, without physical subves¬ 
tures. Therefore, they contact each other without pro¬ 
ducing anything whatever in the way of sound. How¬ 
ever, their activities generate its correspondence in ether 
shimmers, which reach the psychical ear of humans in 
silent voices, but in voices that can be distinctly appre¬ 
hended. 

It already has been said, in effect, that the human 
organization of consciousness may, by proper methods of 
thinking apprehend all life phenomena of the full tone 
physical zone, not by touch, taste, smell, sound and vision, 
as is the rule in these lower spheres, but by their corre¬ 
spondences in hi’gher functions. Touch is about (the 
same on that higher tone scale as it is here, but it is many 
thousand times more sensitive and discriminating. It is 
the very same with taste and smell. As to hearing, that 
is by ether shimmers, which are many thousand times 
finer than atmospheric waves, but the apprehension of 
tone oscillations by the higher consciousness is, in Prin¬ 
ciple, the same as now. As to vision, the eye is relieved 
of its outer tone veil, and brings to conscious vision the 
pure ether tones of the physical zone proper. 

Those are the functions of consciousness when its 
organization is released from the sub-phvsical tone ves¬ 
tures, but that organism, in its present interdependent re- 

( 606 ) 



NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


607 


lations with the visible body, may now exercise psychical 
sense contact with the life activities of its own substance, 
to the full degree of its unfoldment. Hence, I say, by 
proper methods of thinking, man may not only sentiently, 
but psychologically, touch, taste, smell, hear and see all 
things visible to the zone of mental substance, which is 
the same as saying, all activities of the next higher zone 
of life. 

Thus, there is opening up to humans, in the exact 
measure of their training and proficiency in scientific 
methods of thinking, a whole world of functions which 
are now hidden to a vast majority. We shall rise to 
those higher conscious exercises by the new method of 
tone-thinking. When men and women come to exercise 
volition in the orbital plan of Principle?, they will open 
to vision the whole realm of the at-present unseen, so far 
as the dual angelic-physical zone of full tone substance 
is concerned. 

What is meant by the orbital plan of Principle? In 
that plan is the secret of the human power that is higher 
than the human will, unless that exalted type of the 
human will which is in the actuality of the volition of 
Principle be considered a function of the human will. 
It is in this way: The soul of man is dual—in a duality 
of the triad of spiritual Power, Love and Truth, and of 
the triad of celestial Power, Love and Truth. That soul 
thinks in desire, choice and motive, and its motor effects 
are discharged in the facts of its four-fold dual vesture 
body. The latter in turn project the current of volition, 
until it reaches the outer environment, from whence it 
returns, on a higher spiral of the orbit of propagation, 
and thus there is the rise and progress of life unfoldment. 

It is by that method of thinking that the new invisi¬ 
ble man is created, expanded and unfolded. The soul 
has communication with the outer environment through 
the tones of its four-fold tone vesture body; and, by the 
orbital plan of Principle, the circuit of propagation is not 
completed, until it returns to the soul—the point of its 
beginning—with a harvest of progress wrought by the 
oscillations of the Two Principles. 

That is the method of thinking in the orbital plan of 
Principle by which there is the creation —the generation 
and regeneration— of man, body, mind and soul; that 
is the method of thinking in tune with Principle, to the 
renewal of the human life organization, body, mind and 
soul, in perpetual youth, and wholeness, which latter is 
the integrity of health. In that method of thinking are 
all the glory and riches of the a-tone-ment. Please think 


608 


THE NEW IDEA. 


of that word, a-tone-ment, very carefully, and it will 
come into vision how very slightly the word has been 
understood hitherto. When all the tones of the human 
life organization are oscillating in interdependent har¬ 
mony there is the continuous normal life of the whole 
man, body, mind and soul. In that condition there can 
be the dissolution of neither. In such a state of Harmony, 
there is the at-one-ment of body, mind and soul, or such 
an integrity of them as to achieve their equal immortality. 

A-tone-ment is that complete interdependent Har¬ 
mony of all the tones of a human life organization, both 
spiritual and celestial, including the sub-spiritual and 
sub-physical, by which all the tones flux into the harmony 
mass-tone of propagation, from which the new man rises 
in the integrity of wholeness, and for which there can 
be neither death nor dissolution of the body, nor of the 
mind, nor of the soul. At-one-ment, although it fails to 
emphasize the essential idea of tone, has the very same 
significance. 

What I am trying to bring to the vision of students 
is the fact that there can be no form, or fact, of life, 
without a body; that soul cannot exist except in a body; 
that the body of the soul is as important and as sacred 
as the soul itself; that there is the equal evolution of 
soul and body; that unless soul and body unfold together, 
simultaneously, and harmoniously, there can be the un- 
foldment of neither; that when the human life organiza¬ 
tion so unfolds there will be no dissolution of the form of 
life visible or invisible; and, that men and women may 
train themselves to think in the tone methods of Principle, 
until they will, in that manner, and with those transcen¬ 
dent results, come to unfold themselves in the glory of 
perpetual youth, and in the grandeur of continuous 
health and happiness. 

I have not the power of language to express the 
technique, or exact processes of propagation, so as 'to 
bring to clear vision how it is that the new rises from 
the old, in such processes, except to say that the internal 
tones of each unit, and their tones of fellowship, one 
with another, work out a compound, or interdependent 
oscillation, of the Two Principles, by which there is the 
reality of creation— the actuality of propagation. At the 
last analysis, it is Principle at work as cause, spinning 
and weaving tone life plasm from the ternal fountain 
of substance. That is an industry peculiar to Principle, 
or cause, in which tones already created, in each of which 
Principle is inherent and functional, engage, jointly, with 
the Primordial force. 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


609 


The secret key to this whole matter of tone-propa¬ 
gation, or tone methods of thinking, is this: A knowledge 
of such processes is in the fact of such processes; that is 
to say, methods of thinking, by which a knowledge of 
such processes is appropriated, are in those identical pro¬ 
cesses. To so think is to so propagate. That is self- 
evident. Hence, all one has to do is to think so as to 
obtain a full understanding—a complete knowledge of the 
facts here stated—and in so doing, he or she sets in tune 
and function tone processes which propagate the things 
desired, provided only that the choice and motive in 
which desire is exercised are according to the plan of 
Principle. That latter is an essential element of the 
necessary harmony. 

Hence, it is, that in those methods of thinking neces¬ 
sary to obtain a knowledge of the facts and doctrines 
taught in this volume, one actually thinks to the propaga¬ 
tion of the continuous rise and unfoldment of the human 
life organization, body, mind and soul. In that way one 
achieves self-life unfoldment in continuous youth and 
health. 

I now call attention to the orbital plan of Principle— 
to the tone method of thinking— once more in order to 
reach the highest and final thought summit of this vol¬ 
ume. The orbit of the volition of Principle, which is from 
soul to body; from body to environment; from environ¬ 
ment to body; and lastly, from body to soul, implicates, 
in the soul, both at the start and at the finish, contact 
with the Ultimate Supreme Fountain of Life—the High¬ 
est Source of Life. In other terms, the volitional orbit 
of Principle, functioning in a human life organization, 
reaches, in its infinite sweep, and implicates all the func¬ 
tions of Unity, Variety and Harmony—the Prior, the 
Subsequent and the Final. 

Thus it is that human desire, choice and motive, in 
the volition of Principle, travels over the whole orbit of 
infinitude, by each of their joint oscillations. Thus man 
has communications with all things. The orbit of his 
tone thinking is co-extensive with eternity. 

It will now be remembered that, in one of the think¬ 
ing Exercises of this volume, brief reference was made 
to the Twelve Ultimate Supreme Principles of the Infinite 
Universe of Life. Strange as it may appear, the orbital 
plan of human tone thinking, in its higher oscillations 
reaches to and implicates them all. By that transcendent 
method, in the tone Harmony of All, human thinking 
propagates to the externalization of each of those Prin¬ 
ciples in even these spheres of life. By that method of 


610 


THE NEW IDEA. 


thinking we come to know potentially, that is, in the 
lower degrees of wisdom and intelligence, the nature of 
those Twelve Principles. They come into outlines of 
psychical and soul vision by a contemplation of the fol¬ 
lowing twelve words, to-wit: 

Unity Variety Harmony 

Power Love Truth. 

Intelligence Wisdom Knowledge 

Purity Beauty Omniscience 

Those are the Twelve Kingdoms of God, in any one of 
which a human may choose citizenship, in order, finally, 
to become a citizen of them all. Herein we have our first 
true vision of the symbol of citizenship. The idea of 
citizenship is very ancient. In most of the ancient king¬ 
doms of these spheres, man could buy, with money, or 
other valuable considerations, citizenship. The right of 
citizenship always has been highly prized. In our times 
citizenship is the free gift of the Government, bestowed 
upon all who seek it with the requisite intellectual, moral 
and physical qualifications. The title and honor are not 
sold for a material consideration. In that respect the 
beautiful symbol of citizenship is becoming brighter with 
each succeeding century. 

Now, in respect of the Twelve Kingdoms of Life, 
which mankind is founding here on the earth, and in all 
the higher heavens of glory above, let me say that it is 
within the powers and rights of men and women to 
choose any one of them. Indeed, that is necessary. Man 
must exercise choice of a kingdom in which to function 
as a citizen. He becomes a student—a thinker—first. 
Then, as in the Vedas, he becomes a householder, which 
in the higher ideas of the Vedanta philosophy, is resolved 
to the selection, in choice, of a kingdom, in -which the 
thinker is to function as a citizen. 

In selecting a kingdom man makes choice not only 
of particular methods of thinking in Principle, by which 
to unfold into functional citizenship in that kingdom, 
but, of that particular type, or form, or tone of life, in 
which he, by choice and motive, desires to function. Here 
we raise the idea of citizenship to the glory of a particu¬ 
lar form-tone of life. That is a vision of real correspond¬ 
ences, of which Swedenborg never dreamed, but it is 
transcendentlv in Truth. 

We know that Buddha made choice of the Kingdom 
of Knowledge, first; and, that, having risen to the full 
functions of citizenship in that mighty Kingdom, he pro¬ 
ceeded to conquer others of the Twelve Kingdoms, but 
in what order, I am unable to say. Jesus made choice of 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


611 


the Kingdom of Love, reaching out to Brotherhood of 
all the Kingdoms. From Love, he rose into the Kingdom 
of Truth; then to the Kingdom of Purity; and he ascended 
to the next higher heaven of substance, having con¬ 
quered bodily dissolution, while entering the Kingdom of 
Harmony. Thus it is, that as soon as one has become 
trained to think in tone methods of desire, choice, motive 
and the volition of Principle, he makes choice of a King¬ 
dom, or a plan of life, according to the methods of life 
unfoldment in any one of the Twelve Kingdoms above 
named. It is the right and duty of the student, as soon 
as he or she has become sufficiently trained, as a thinker, 
to choose a Kingdom—to make choice of a plan of life. 
Having risen, by unfoldment, to the functions of the 
chosen Kingdom, that one will readily pass, from one to 
another of all the Kingdoms of the Twelve Principles 
in regular order; and in the functions of choice. 

It is seen from the above that this volume is intended 
as a Training School Master, its mission being to teach 
students how to think; and, they having become so trained, 
to make choice of a Kingdom of unfoldment, the founda¬ 
tions of which were laid in Principle before the creation 
of our universe was begun. 

In conclusion, let me say that I have planned a 
wonderful School Lecture System in elaboration of 
methods of tone-thinking for life unfoldment in all of 
those Twelve Kingdoms of Life. I appeal to readers and 
students to hasten the conquest of this volume so that we 
all may be prepared to enter upon the higher and grander 
work. 


EXERCISE CVIII. 


REVIEW. 

A PECULIAR characteristic of this volume is that 
in the rise of its thinking exercises, it is made to appear 
that the author himself unfolded to higher visions of 
Truth in the processes of its composition. That is the 
fact. However, that scale of rise is so arranged, in suc¬ 
cessively higher tones, that students will unfold and rise, 
in life, accordingly, as they follow out the order of the 
methods of thinking herein laid down. 

Some will possibly conclude that if the higher sum¬ 
mits reached in the latter portions of the book had been 
incorporated in connection with the subjects treated in 
the earlier portions, it would have been better. I have 
chosen a different plan. I did not elaborate any of the 
earlier subjects treated, to anything like completion, but 
left them in a partial state of development, and later on, 
as has been seen, those same subjects have been carried 
to higher ground. 

That plan has resulted in a number of partial repe¬ 
titions, which might have been avoided had each depart¬ 
ment of thinking, or each subject implicated thereby, 
been fully developed, when those were first under con¬ 
sideration. The idea of the author, in the plan adopted, 
was that a majority of students could best unfold into 
this new system of thinking, by degrees. It was origin¬ 
ally in expectation that this volume would go into the 
hands of a large number of people who are without 
any special scientific training. In fact, the idea concern¬ 
ing this whole effort has been that the average man and 
woman might easily appropriate a knowledge of science, 
so as to function therein, by presenting to them the facts 
of science in a work-a-day dress, or in plain clothes, 
stripped of all technicalities which might confuse. It is 
still hoped and believed that such a plan, while function¬ 
ing as an innovation, will produce more practical results. 

I now call attention to some of the main features of 
this new system, not only from the standpoint of their 
scientific foundations, but from that of their practical 
applications and functions in self-life unfoldment. A 
large portion of the volume has been devoted to a some¬ 
what crude elaboration of life unit organism. In no other 
work has that department of thinking been carried out to 
such an extent. The idea that life exists exclusively by 
its units, and originally by its ultimate primal units, is 

(612) 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


613 


new. It is a conception not hitherto promulgated by 

man, but it is in accordance with facts. The other idea 
that each one of those units, and of all successor units 
are in the facts of thoughts is also new, and that con¬ 
ception is also loyal to truth. 

The plan of elaboration of the tone organism of 
life units is likewise new, and possibly never has been 
met with by students previously. At first the reader 
probably regarded the idea of such tone organisms as 
purely in speculative philosophy, but at the conclusion 
of the next preceding exercise, it must have been seen 
that the tone organism of life units, as explained in this 
volume is founded in truth. The whole plan, when once 
brought to vision, and therefore appropriated in knowl¬ 
edge, must, I think, prove very satisfying to the human 
psychological organism. It appeals to human thoughts 
and emotions, which thoughts and emotions must neces¬ 
sarily respond to the plan thus elaborated. 

From the observations just made, I appeal to the 
student on the ground of the practical utilities of this 
new system. It reduces the science of psychological pro¬ 
cesses to something practical, and brings them within 
the reach of the average man and woman who have exer¬ 
cised sufficient patience and persistence to appropriate the 
methods of thinking which naturally arise from the sys¬ 
tem. In this way the volume should, in the opinion of 
the author, become a permanent study, and an abiding 
source of life unfoldment. 

The author naturally exercises considerable pride in 
the extensive work performed in this volume. He regrets 
very much that the art of expression, in the terminology 
of language, and in the rules of diction has been so 
poorly amplified. From those latter considerations, he 
seeks shelter in the strength and accuracy of the methods 
of thinking into which he has found it possible to unfold. 
The whole volume, with all its new ideas, and scientific 
discoveries is a living example of what may be accom¬ 
plished, by methods of thinking, without the valuable 
aid of the training of scientific schools. If I have been 

able, even after many years of persistent thinking, to 
achieve what is herein elaborated, what might brother 
man, or sister woman, who has had the advantages of a 
scientific training not accomplish? I have been able to 
do what is done in this volume because I believed there 
were greater powers in human life than is usually granted 
by humans themselves, and because I persisted in efforts 
to unfold into those powers. 

I found my own weak, trembling and troubled heart 


614 


THE NEW IDEA. 


to contain a fountain from which those powers have 
been drawn, and the student may do the very same on 
a much higher scale. It is true that, as a rule, man does 
not place a sufficiently high estimate upon his own re¬ 
sources. He is far too prone to consider himself a vehicle 
for the transmission of power from some source higher 
than himself, and to externalize it for the benefit of en¬ 
vironment, in that transmission. In that way he loses 
sight of the fact that man, himself, is not only the source 
of power, but that by functioning therein, he may un¬ 
fold to Omniscience. 

I have indulged the foregoing observation in order 
to say that while man is, in one sense, an infinitely small 
spark of life, when contrasted with the Ultimate Supreme 
Principle of Life, he has the power to function in all 
the other sparks of infinitude, and thus to exercise infi¬ 
nite power. In that latter idea, we bring to vision the 
transcendent fact of Brotherhood, which rises out of the 
relativity and interdependence of all the forms of life 
in the infinite universe, great and small. Thus it is seen 
that the sum total possibilities of the Ultimate Supreme 
Ruler are resolved to the possibilities of, so called, insig¬ 
nificant man. 

No man can study, or think in the glorious plan of 
relativity and interdependence, and their consequent 
sweep of obligation and duty, as they are revealed in 
the Brotherhood of Harmony, without being thrilled in 
every unit and fiber of his life, and thus propagated to 
higher and still higher functional powers. 

In the idea that a study or a method of thinking 
in the plan of Principle is a source of power, the study 
of the relativity and interdependence of the forms of 
life of our universe is, without a doubt, a marvelous 
source of strength. Is it not seen that by grasping such 
thoughts, and appropriating them to the expansion of our 
knowledge, we grow in functional power? It is in error 
that man prescribes his potentialities. It is in righteous¬ 
ness that he exalts and magnifies them. Man is not only 
the Good, but he is a spark of the sum total Good, and 
if he will fan that little spark, which within him dwells, 
it will develop into a mighty flame, that will illumine the 
whole universe. That spark will be most successfully 
fanned into such a flame, by thinking in the ideals which 
just now engage our attention. 

That conception of the units of substance, by which 
I have invested their tone organisms with conscious wis¬ 
dom and intelligence is not only new, but it lays more 
satisfactory foundations for the whole range of ontolog- 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


615 


ical phenomena. Its elaboration is resolved to a flood of 
light, which illumines the processes of creation, and re¬ 
solves world and man building to the abilities of humans. 
It is, therefore, seen that the most transcendent achieve¬ 
ment in all the processes of creation was in the unfold- 
ment of thoughts from Principle. The conception that 
there is nothing but thoughts and thought organisms in 
our universe, and that all the processes of creation are 
in the relativity of methods and interdependence of 
thinking is surely a triumph of synthetics. 

The orbital plan of Principle is not completely new, 
but we have carried that idea into more practical appli¬ 
cations. I have elaborated that orbit in the ideas of 
unity, variety and harmony, and its applications to the 
processes of volition, by which the motor effects of think¬ 
ing are propagated to environment; and from environ¬ 
ment back again to the psychological organism. That 
latter is a new conception. Thus the new version brings 
to clear vision the real processes of creation, or of 
thinking. 

The duality of Principle is an old idea of truth. I 
have carried that into new realms of thinking, by calling 
attention to the fact that the Two Principles, to-wit: the 
male and female, or the spirtiual and celestial Principles, 
which separated in the earlier stages of creation, both 
in the first and second mornings of life, unite again in 
the first individual forms of life of trans-human exist¬ 
ence. There is no escape from that vision of truth, when 
one follows, carefully, the processes of the unfoldment of 
Principle. It is plain, to a diligent Thinker, that the 
greatest function of evolution in physiological subvesture 
spheres is in the fact of the divided male and female 
forms of life. From that data, I gather, synthetically, 
the biological lesson of the second marriage, as has 
been quite fully elaborated in this volume. 

I have quite fully elaborated scientific methods of 
thinking for self-life unfoldment, in accordance with the 
nature of human psychological organism. In that work, 
I have shown the relativity and interdependence of de¬ 
sire, choice, motive and volition; and in connection 
therewith, I have endeavored to demonstrate two very 
important facts. They fellow: First, owing to wrong 
thinking, or thinking to wrong ideals, through the vast 
range of human generations, man has become psycholog¬ 
ically disorganized, to the extent that his spiritual and 
celestial tones, and physical subvesture tone organisms 
have become disconnected from the soul or substare of 
life; and, secondly, that as soon as that connection is 


616 


THE NEW IDEA. 


restored, man may think in desire, choice, motive and 
volition, to the unfoldment of his life infinitely. 

I have tried to lay special emphasis upon the fact 
that the hidden man of the human heart is pure and 
righteous and holy, and that those characteristics of 
character are its natural status. I have also laid equal 
stress on the fact that all evil, sin and unhealthy condi¬ 
tions of man are confined to the outer spiritual and celes¬ 
tial tones of his life, and that those are abnormal and 
unnatural. I have pointed out a method by which radia¬ 
tion from the inner man may be extended into the outer 
tone organism, by which it may be regenerated and 
transformed into natural methods of thinking. 

The somewhat abstruse psychological data surround¬ 
ing the awakening, by which the inner man is made more 
functional to life unfoldment is cleared away and made 
plain in those thinking exercises of the volume treating 
upon that question. The various exercises of the volume 
are manifold in their functions. It has been seen that 
they are functional to the unfoldment of knowledge; 
to training human psychological organisms in proper 
methods of thinking; in bringing to clear vision, the dual 
and triad nature of consciousness; in establishing, by 
clear outlines, the processes of resurrection, by which 
the invisible man rises from the visible form of life; in 
making plain the real facts concerning that event mis¬ 
called, death; in bringing to clearer vision, probably for 
the first time in the experience of most of my readers, 
the wonderful reality of relativity and interdependence, 
of the forms of life, which is the biological foundation 
of Brotherhood; and in elaborating the phenomena of 
self-life unfoldment, generally. 

I am fully persuaded that a study, by way of methods 
of thinking, of this volume will work out to the physical, 
mental and moral health of students. That is, perhaps, 
its most important function. It will be found that if 
one will make this book a companion, for at least evening 
and morning study, and will follow out the system laid 
down, for evening, morning or daily thinking, the re¬ 
sults will soon become visible in the characteristics of 
that one’s life. I am not at all afraid of the doctrines 
which I have enunciated in this volume, concerning the 
possibilities of perpetual youth and health. I have, my. 
self, from these studies realized substantial indications 
along such lines. The careless reader of the foregoing 
exercises will probably not accept these conclusions; but 
if a man, or a woman will take this volume into his 
or her confidence, in some degree of love and affection, 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


61 ' 


and make it a companion for study, the results that will 
be realized, in his or her life, will be most astonishing. 
They will be especially so in the lives of those who have 
many troubles, and who are continuously suffering many 
disappointments; and who are afflicted by very small 
or great experiences. It is utterly impossible to over¬ 
estimate the transcendent results in health and pros¬ 
perity, which will follow' continuous thinking in the 
ideas of this volume. One can do no more than give his 
or her honest testimony concerning such results. If the 
reader will not accept that testimony to the extent of 
making an earnest experiment, it will be a positive loss 
to him or her. 

I am conscious of the functions of those higher life 
foods, which one may appropriate from the works of 
art, and in the study of the beautiful. I do not, for a 
moment, undervalue the functions of thinking in the 
beautiful, and I most earnestly recommend all the read¬ 
ers of this volume to turn, in any available direction, and 
to think in ideals of the beautiful, to the fullest extent 
of Jheir opportunities. That will resolve itself to methods 
of thinkng for the unfoldment of Harmony, 

There is a world of thinking, however, which is 
properly prior to exercising the psychological organism 
in tones of the beautiful. The study of this volume will 
give to psychological functions a greater degree of rug¬ 
gedness, force and power. It is seen that I have been 
dealing throughout with fundamentals. I have been 
formulating foundations, rather than indulging in build¬ 
ing beautiful superstructures. All that latter is to come 
later. I shall do what I can, in that direction, and others 
will do transcendently more. 

I am confident, beyond a doubt, that, crude as these 
foundations may be, from the standpoint of art, they are 
the essence of * Principle. Principle is the fountain of 
life unfoldment for mankind. A more potential concep¬ 
tion is not possible to man, in our age, than that which 
resolves Principle to the fountain of all life. Principle 
may, indeed, become our Ideal God, towards which to 
think for health, prosperity and happiness. It will be 
conceded by all critics, that this volume is resolved to 
the study of Principle; and. that although the methods 
which I have formulated for that purpose are some¬ 
what crude, they are potential of results. 

In the foregoing collection of thinking exercises, I 
have banished materialism and pantheism, and trans¬ 
formed idealism to functional potentialities, in degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence, for life unfoldment. I have 


618 


THE NEW IDEA. 


defined functions of human perceptions, and shown that 
while those are in illusion, they are in potential degrees 
of wisdom and intelligence. I have held to the truth, 
that the same Principle of life is within man that was 
within the Great Teacher, and have explained that the 
great difference between the life of the Master and that 
of humans consists in the fact of the different degrees of 
the unfoldment of Principle, rather than in the fact that 
the same Principle is not in both. It is true that the 
Master unfolded into the new Principle of bodily immor¬ 
tality, but that achievement was accomplished by func¬ 
tioning in the same Principle that abides in all humans 
today. That achievement is an example for man. 

It must be remembered, in this connection, that the 
difference between men and the highest creatures in our 
universe consists in the differences between the degrees 
of life unfoldment in, and by, Principle. We may not 
be able to bring to vision all the potential experiences, 
which functioned to the unfoldment of the Infant over 
whom the star of glory rested, to herald its advent. There 
may be in the plan of life, provisions and potentialities 
of unfoldment, peculiar to a line of descent and ascent 
of Principle. I am not in a position to say that such is 
not the truth. But I do say, and clearly see, that all tha-t 
is functionally possible to the ultimate life unfoldment 
of any human. When all is said that can be said on 
that subject, the whole question is resolved to the possi¬ 
bilities of functioning to the unfoldment of Principle, 
which is within the destiny of man. By relativity and 
interdependence, which is resolved to the Brotherhood of 
Principle, all things are possible to man. On that doc¬ 
trine, I shall permanently stand. 

Every man of the human race enjoys the same 
origin. One man differs from another in glory, by the 
degrees of unfoldment only. No one creature can place 
before him or her a higher goal in life than another, 
except that be done from the standpoint of the rung of 
the ladder upon w’hich the feet may already rest. It is, 
in fact, that there is the unfoldment of the goal of life, 
from the standpoint of any one degree of unfoldment of 
potentialities. The higher one rises, the higher and the 
farther one’s vision extends. Hence, one whose feet are 
resting upon a higher rung of the ladder of evolution, 
than those of one who is below him, enjoys a higher 
vision of the possibilities of life. It is a fact that we 
came into human forms of life on different rungs of 
the ladder of evolution. That statement requires care¬ 
ful consideration. Humans do not all start from the 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


619 


same degree of life unfoldment, as marking the beginning 
of human life. The life experiences, prior to the event 
which brought man into a human form of life, had much 
to do with the summit on which he began to function in 
human experiences, just as the experiences in human 
spheres have much to do in determining the summit on 
which we shall begin to function in the next higher 
sphere of life. 

Now, there is the line of descent, or ascent, of such 
successive experiences; and we know, or should know, 
that there is one higher than all others in such successive 
experiences and functions, as there is one lower than 
all others in the same. Between that highest and that 
lowest are all the intermediates. It is in a clear effort of 
thinking by which we come into a vision of the fact 
that, morally speaking, the birth of Jesus into the human 
state was the advent into that state of that highest one, 
at least up to that time, and probably for all time. 

The conception of the next preceding paragraph may 
be regarded as the product of a high method of think¬ 
ing, but it is loyal to the facts of the unfoldment of 
Principle; it is in the plan of life. That is self-evident. 
But all that does not shut the door of unfoldment to 
those who are following behind the highest. All may 
reach the status of that highest one, at any one point, 
and not only do that, but ascend still higher. We must 
constantly hold in vision the relativity and interdepend¬ 
ence of all the forms of life of the infinite universe, by 
the functions of which the Infinite Brotherhood of Ulti¬ 
mate Harmony is achieved. The high and the low, and 
intermediates must all be estimated from the standpoint 
of the degree of unfoldment reached at any one time. 

If the student will bring to clear vision those facts 
concerning the relativity and interdependence of the 
high and the low of life, a world of misleading ideas will 
be resolved to the truth of Harmony. 

In a very broad sense, after all, I feel that I have 
only but begun this great study. It is true that I have 
devoted many years to it already. Possibly, if I had 
devoted as much time and energy to formulating the plan 
of this volume, as I have to thinking in order to bring 
into vision the facts which it contains, it would have 
been better. I realize shortcomings, in that respect. 
Nevertheless, the plan carried out will, I hope, accomplish 
its purpose. 

If this effort is sufficiently encouraged, I desire to 
follow it with a serial lecture course, in further elabora¬ 
tion of the subjects presented, by way of small volumes, 


620 


THE NEW IDEA. 


say one each month, continuously. A position has been 
reached in connection with this system of thinking which 
naturally inspires one to continue it. That which has 
been done, after all, is only a preparation for what may 
possibly be accomplished in the future. I am exceedingly 
anxious that a sufficient number of people, throughout 
the country, will become interested in this study to enable 
me to carry it on for some years to come. In expressing 
that wish, it is scarcely necessary for me to remind the 
reader who has traversed these pages, that the motive 
which has actuated my efforts from the start, and which 
will move me to any future action, in the premises, is 
that of benefit to my fellow men. I am thrilled by the 
teachings of this volume concerning the Brotherhood of 
mankind. The sweep of relativity and interdependence 
of human, and other forms of life, carrying with it a 
like sweep of obligation and duty, present a problem for 
thinking and for action sufficient to engage the strongest 
mental and moral effort of our race. 

THE END. 


V 


AN APPENDIX 

FOR THE 

FREEDOM OF A SLAVE 

























THERAPEUTICAL EXERCISE. 


THINKING AWAY FROM THE LIQUOR HABIT. 

Services of a physician requisite at the start in acute 
cases of the disease—An outline of that treatment— 
Thinking away from the habit to begin with return¬ 
ing physical health—A “cure” is not effected by any 
physical treatment—Thinking the only remedy—How 
deliverance comes. 


WHEN the liquor habit has bound a man in chains 
of slavery from years of indulgence, he is in a most piti¬ 
able, and, also, a most disgusting condition. Few, not 
including the victim, really know the nature of that 
slavery. Potential evil cannot forge more galling chains. 
In that condition there exists in a man one form of 
necessity for a continuance of the habit. It is not in the 
sense of an appetite, or a longing for the poison, but a 
condition of disorder reaching out to heart weakness 
which demands that particular kind of stimulant. 

The slave to strong drink is in a terrible state of 
physical, mental and moral degradation. That arises 
from the peculiar nature of alcoholic liquids by which it 
is produced. There is a sense in which “spirits,” as 
intoxicants were formerly called, are an incarnation of 
“the evil spirit.” That is metaphorical, but, in a way, 
very loyal to the Truth. We are taught that the fruits 
of the good Spirit are love, joy, peace, longsuffering, gen¬ 
tleness, goodness, faith, meekness and temperance. If 
one will find a word that will express the exact opposite 
of each of the nine, in the above list, such as hatred for 
love, sorrow for joy, and so on, he will have nine words 
expressive of the fruits of intoxicants upon the life organ¬ 
ization of a man, who is suffering from their results. He 
has a hatred of the things he should love; sorrow where 
once was joy; quarreling and strife where once was 
peace; impetuosity and peevishness where once was long- 
suffering and patience; boisterousness and bad temper 
where once was gentleness and kindness, and so on to 
the end. 

Thus it is seen that the sufferings of the slave to the 
liquor habit become constitutional, reaching up to a dis¬ 
organization and dethronement of the moral faculties. 
They invade subjective consciousness in their results, and 
w'ork a measure of disorganization which is hard to over- 

( 623 ) 



624 


THE NEW IDEA. 


come. Wliile it is true that evil cannot enter the invisi¬ 
ble form of life, by substance, because it is without sub¬ 
stance, nevertheless its results may and do afflict and 
distress that department of human life. 

All hurtful habits operate in about the same way, but 
none with such baneful effects as that of the liquor 
habit, except those comprehended in moral degeneracy, 
for the greater part, produced by it. 

Until the habit becomes fastened upon the human 
system, by a continuance of over-indulgence, it may be 
quite easily thrown off, and forgotten, by methods of 
thinking, for life nnfoldment, which have already been 
quite fully explained, but when that form of vice has 
secured a solid grip on the life organization, and taken 
the form and function of a disease, the case requires 
special treatment—a particular method of thinking and 
acting. Then it is that man is a prisoner indeed and in 
Truth. But he is his own jailer, and may turn himself 
at liberty, without so great a struggle after all. 

In the first place, he must in some way be awakened 
into a desire for liberty; but that is one of the hopeful 
conditions of the disease. While a spark of moral sense 
remains, the victim, in his sufferings, intensely desires 
to be free. He will freely give all and more than he 
possesses to be set at complete liberty—to be made free. 
That condition is one of opportunity for the self-enslaved 
self. He still has the power to exercise desire, and 
although at some turns of his sufferings his desires are 
for death; at others, although it may be from personal 
and interested suggestion, he desires to be delivered from 
his chains. 

He who has not descended below that awful condition 
may quite easily deliver himself, provided he summon 
courage, and the will, and make a supreme effort. What 
shall he do? He must force upon himself a complete 
change. He has nothing whatever to do with his dis¬ 
ease, except that the physician may, with good effect, 
supply a temporary partial substitute for the required 
stimulant, and an antidote for the poison, which has per¬ 
meated his organization. In an acute ease of the disease, 
when the mental functions are disorganized, and the moral 
faculties in a condition of inharmony, the victim cannot 
think for self, except to his further injury. In a state 
of complete, or partial delirium, he is helpless, except for 
self-destruction. 

In that stage he is a proper subject for the experi¬ 
enced doctor, at the start. It is necessary that certain 
material medicines be administered, to purge the physical 


f 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


625 


organization of poison, and to overthrow nervousness by 
inducing sleep. Rest can be appropriated only in sleep. 
The victim is now entering upon a stage of terrible suf¬ 
fering, reaching to the very centers of his mental organ¬ 
ism. Except the heroic “knockout” treatment be re¬ 
sorted to, which is often dangerous, whiskey, properly 
“doped,” must be given, at increasing intervals, and 
heart stimulants will also be found necessary. For two 
or three days the hope of the patient is in sleep. Some¬ 
times it is very difficult to induce any considerable 
periods of that resting and quieting restorative. 

"When the patient has struggled and battled through 
the earlier stages of that first period of treatment, he is 
in a condition of critical weakness, and food must be 
appropriated in some way. His stimulants can no longer 
be “doped” with safety, and yet stimulants he must 
have. Often small quantities of liquor, in mixed doses, 
will have to be administered, but so long as the fre¬ 
quency and quantities of those are on the diminishing 
scale, the case is proceeding hopefully. 

But the reader may ask, Why doesn’t such a patient 
resort to one of the several known “cures,” and be done 
with it? It is better for his future that he suffer it out 
in the old way. Some of those “cures,” while they may 
destroy the liquor habit, destroy very much of the mental 
organization of the man therewith; and, again, the per¬ 
centage of real cures, in such cases, is smaller than the 
public is aware of. 

The foregoing partly outlined treatment for a very 
acute case is only, for the purpose of preparing the victim 
for a higher and more effective system of therapeutics. 
As soon as his desire for, and ability to partake of, and 
digest, suitable food is restored, and he begins to realize 
the return of some measure of strength, and reason, so 
as to be able to walk about in taking light exercise, the 
work of higher treatment should begin. Too much advice 
and persuasion at this point is not advisable. Interested 
friends can do most good by speaking words of cheer and 
encouragement, not at all referring to the unfortunate 
habit by which the affliction came. 

The greatest and most effective service that can be 
rendered, with returning physical health are suggestions 
of something new, that will interest the patient—that will 
absorb his attention, and work for him a complete change 
in his methods of thinking. His mental organism is 
now greatly in need of medicine and food. That can 
come only by thinking—not by brooding over the errors 
and evils of the past, but by a new plan 1 of thinking 


626 


THE NEW IDEA. 


which will work a complete change. It must be remem¬ 
bered that the alleviation experienced by the foregoing 
outlined treatment has worked no cure whatever. The 
disease is still deeply seated in the life organization of 
the patient, and the old habit will surely return, sooner 
or later, unless a higher treatment be resorted to. The 
condition now reached affords the very best opportunity 
for beginning that system. 

What should the patient do? He should at once begin 
a zealous and persistent study of this volume. It should 
be his constant companion. If he cannot sleep at night, 
let him rise and devote an hour to its study. That will 
induce sleep. He should force upon himself the most 
hearty compliance with the morning and evening require¬ 
ments, and devote most of his time in a determined 
struggle to appropriate the teachings of all the exercises, 
one after another, dwelling long and zealously upon 
those which most agreeably appeal to his inclinations. 

That method of thinking should be continued, even 
by the force of the power of the will, during the days 
of returning health. It will strengthen and harmonize 
his whole life organization, physically, mentally and mor¬ 
ally, and by such methods of thinking, he will bury the 
liquor habit out of sight, and out of thought, and unfold 
completely out of it, until it will no longer function in 
his life in any way. It will become a thing of the past 
to be forgotten; and when recalled in memory, the new 
man— the man now free-will wonder how it all came 
about. 

He will realize it was not a “cure,” but that it all 
came in the unfoldment of his life organization, physi¬ 
cally, mentally, intellectually, morally, spiritually, and 
psychologically, and that he has become a new man, with 
a new heart; that old things have passed away, and that 
all things have become new. It is fortunate, for this 
system, that the man who has become a slave to intoxi¬ 
cants is almost always of more than average intelligence. 
Hence, he is by nature qualified to appropriate these 
studies. The former drinking man will readily call to 
mind that among his companions round the “flowing 
bowl,” that one of a low order of intellectualities was but 
slightly affected, relatively. His spirits did not flow in 
such a volume of wit and laughter inspiring genius and 
talent, responsive to the intoxicating draughts, as did his 
own, and those of others of his own type. It is somehow 
the man of high intellectual powers that the deadly habit 
most speedily and most heartlessly enslaves. There are 
men who, in that respect, are so slightly raised above the 


NEW TONE METHOD OF THINKING. 


627 


animals, that liquor does not appear to greatly affect 
them. But, of course, those are the “brute drunkards”— 
men of but little intellectual unfoldment. For the one 
who has become a veritable “brute drunkard,” possibly 
the “patent cure” will be most serviceable. And yet if 
he can be awakened to a desire for knowledge—to a de¬ 
sire to rise, intellectually—the system of thinking to 
unfoldment herein elaborated, will save him and raise 
him to the status of a man. There are none able to think, 
in even the lowest human degrees of wisdom and intelli¬ 
gence, whom this system will not reach, if persistently 
applied. 

But to the average man who has become a slave, or 
in the smallest measure addicted to the drink habit, this 
system of thinking to the dissolution of his chains is 
most earnestly recommended. There is one difficulty 
with this whole matter. The man, in the first stages of 
the drink habit, even though he is conscious of its grow¬ 
ing power over his life, will not acknowledge, even in 
secret and to himself, the dangers into which he is being 
gradually drawn. I can only, in a quiet way, urge upon 
such of that class as may come into possession of this 
volume, to take up its study, with a full desire to be 
purged of all unhealthy habits. That applies to women 
as well as men. 

The author has in his possession abundance of proof 
that an appropriation of the teachings of this volume will 
lift a man out of all hurtful habits, and banish them 
forever, rendering him free, happy and healthy, and 
placing his feet on the highway of prosperity. 


























































































































































































































































JUN 12 1908 




































































« 







































